OMNI FLOW

Manual Guide

Volume 1

System Architecture and Installation Firmware Revisions 23.71/27.71 Orifice / Turbine Gas Flow Metering Systems

Volume 2D

Basic Operation

Volume 3D

Configuration and Advanced Operation

Volume 4D

Modbus Database Addresses and Index Numbers

Volume 5

Technical Bulletins Warranty & Licences

Manual Guide

Effective May 1999

About Our Company Measure the Difference! Omni flow computers Our products are currently being used world-wide at: ❑ Offshore oil and gas production facilities ❑ Crude oil, refined products, LPG, NGL and gas transmission lines ❑ Storage, truck and marine loading/offloading terminals ❑ Refineries; petrochemical and cogeneration plants.

Omni Flow Computers, Inc. is the world’s leading manufacturer and supplier of panel-mount custody transfer flow computers and controllers. Our mission is to continue to achieve higher levels of customer and user satisfaction by applying the basic company values: our people, our products and productivity. Our products have become the international flow computing standard. Omni Flow Computers pursues a policy of product development and continuous improvement. As a result, our flow computers are considered the “ brain” and “ cash register” of liquid and gas flow metering systems. Our staff is knowledgeable and professional. They represent the energy, intelligence and strength of our company, adding value to our products and services. With the customer and user in mind, we are committed to quality in everything we do, devoting our efforts to deliver workmanship of high caliber. Teamwork with uncompromising integrity is our lifestyle.

Contacting Our Corporate Headquarters

"

#

Omni Flow Computers, Inc. 10701 Corporate Drive, Suite 300 Stafford, Texas 77477 USA

Phone:

281-240-6161

Fax:

281-240-6162

World-wide Web Site: http://www.omniflow.com

!$"

E-mail Addresses: [email protected] [email protected]

Getting User Support Technical and sales support is available world-wide through our corporate or authorized representative offices. If you require user support, please contact the location nearest you (see insert) or our corporate offices. Our staff and representatives will enthusiastically work with you to ensure the sound operation of your flow computer.

ALL.71+ ! 05/99

xi

Omni 6000 / Omni 3000 User Manual

Manual Guide

About the Flow Computer Applications Omni 6000 and Omni 3000 Flow Computers are integrable into the majority of liquid and gas flow measurement and control systems. The current firmware revisions of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computers are: ❑ 20.71/24.71: Turbine/Positive Displacement/Coriolis Liquid Flow Metering Systems with K Factor Linearization (US/metric units) ❑ 21.71/25.71: Orifice/Differential Pressure Liquid Flow Metering Systems (US/metric units) ❑ 22.71/26.71: Turbine/Positive Displacement Liquid Flow Metering Systems with Meter Factor Linearization (US/metric units) ❑ 23.71/27.71: Orifice/Turbine Gas Flow Metering Systems (US/metric units)

About the User Manual This manual applies to .71+ firmware revisions of Omni 6000 and Omni 3000 Flow Computers. It is structured into 5 volumes and is the principal part of your flow computer documentation.

Target Audience As a user’s reference guide, this manual is intended for a sophisticated audience with knowledge of liquid and gas flow measurement technology. Different user levels of technical know-how are considered in this manual. You need not be an expert to operate the flow computer or use certain portions of this manual. However, some flow computer features require a certain degree of expertise and/or advanced knowledge of liquid and gas flow instrumentation and electronic measurement. In general, each volume is directed towards the following users: ❑ Volume 1. System Architecture and Installation ♦ Installers ♦ System/Project Managers ♦ Engineers/Programmers ♦ Advanced Operators ♦ Operators ❑ Volume 2. Basic Operation ♦ All Users ❑ Volume 3. Configuration and Advanced Operation ♦ Engineers/Programmers ♦ Advanced Operators ❑ Volume 4. Modbus Database Addresses and Index Numbers ♦ Engineers/Programmers ♦ Advanced Operators ❑ Volume 5. Technical Bulletins ♦ Users with different levels of expertise.

xii

ALL.71+ ! 05/99

Manual Structure The User Manual comprises 5 volumes; each contained in separate binding for easy manipulation. You will find a detailed table of contents at the beginning of each volume.

Volume 1. System Architecture and Installation Volume 1 is generic to all applications and considers both US and metric units. This volume describes: ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑

Basic hardware/software features Installation practices Calibration procedures Flow computer specifications

Volume 2. Basic Operation User Reference Documentation - The User Manual is structured into five volumes. Volumes 1 and 5 are generic to all flow computer application revisions. Volumes 2, 3 and 4 are application specific. These have four versions each, published in separate documents; i.e., one per application revision per volume. You will receive the version that corresponds to your application revision. The volumes respective to each application revision are: Revision 20/24.71: Volume #s 2a, 3a, 4a Revision 21/25.71: Volume #s 2b, 3b, 4b Revision 22/26.71: Volume #s 2c, 3c, 4c Revision 23/27.71: Volume #s 2d, 3d, 4d For example, if your flow computer application revision is 20/24.71, you will be supplied with Volumes 2a, 3a & 4a, along with Volumes 1 & 5.

This volume is application specific and is available in four separate versions (one for each application revision). It covers the essential and routine tasks and procedures that may be performed by the flow computer operator. Both US and metric units are considered. General computer-related features are described, such as: ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑

The application-related topics may include: ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑

Batching operations Proving functions PID control functions Audit trail Other application specific functions

Depending on your application, some of these topics may not be included in your specific documentation. An index of display variables and corresponding key press sequences that are specific to your application are listed at the end of each version of this volume.

Volume 3. Configuration and Advanced Operation Volume 3 is intended for the advanced user. It refers to application specific topics and is available in four separate versions (one for each application revision). This volume covers: ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑

ALL.71+ ! 05/99

Overview of keypad functions Adjusting the display Clearing and viewing alarms Computer totalizing Printing and customizing reports

Application overview Flow computer configuration data entry User-programmable functions Modbus Protocol implementation Flow equations and algorithms

xiii


Manual Guide

Volume 4. Modbus  Database Addresses and Index Numbers Volume 4 is intended for the system programmer (advanced user). It comprises a descriptive list of database point assignments in numerical order, within our firmware. This volume is application specific, for which there is one version per application revision.

Volume 5. Technical Bulletins Manual Updates and Technical Bulletins Volume 5 of the User Manual is a compendium of Technical Bulletins. They contain updates to the user manual. You can view and print updates from our website: http://www.omniflow.com

Volume 5 includes technical bulletins that contain important complementary information about your flow computer hardware and software. Each bulletin covers a topic that may be generic to all applications or specific to a particular revision. They include product updates, theoretical descriptions, technical specifications, procedures, and other information of interest. This is the most dynamic and current volume. Technical bulletins may be added to this volume after its publication. You can view and print these bulletins from our website.

Conventions Used in this Manual Typographical Conventions - These are standard graphical/text elements used to denote types of information. For your convenience, a few conventions were established in the manual’s layout design. These highlight important information of interest to the reader and are easily caught by the eye.

Several typographical conventions have been established as standard reference to highlight information that may be important to the reader. These will allow you to quickly identify distinct types of information. CONVENTION USED Sidebar Notes / InfoTips Example: INFO - Sidebar notes are used to highlight important information in a concise manner.

Keys / Keypress Sequences Example: [Prog] [Batch] [Meter] [n]

DESCRIPTION Sidebar notes or “ InfoTips” consist of concise information of interest which is enclosed in a grayshaded box placed on the left margin of a page. These refer to topics that are either next to them, or on the same or facing page. It is highly recommended that you read them. Keys on the flow computer keypad are denoted with brackets and bold face characters (e.g.: the ‘up arrow’ key is denoted as [%]). The actual function of the key as it is labeled on the keypad is what appears between brackets. Keypress sequences that are executed from the flow computer keypad are expressed in a series of keys separated by a space (as shown in the example).

Screen Displays Example: Use Up/Down Arrows To Adjust Contrast; Left, Right Arrows To Adjust Backlight

xiv

Sample screens that correspond to the flow computer display appear surrounded by a dark gray border with the text in bold face characters and mono-spaced font. The flow computer display is actually 4 lines by 20 characters. Screens that are more than 4 lines must be scrolled to reveal the text shown in the manual.

ALL.71+ ! 05/99

CONVENTION USED Headings Example:

2. Chapter Heading 2.3. Section Heading

DESCRIPTION Sequential heading numbering is used to categorize topics within each volume of the User Manual. The highest heading level is a chapter, which is divided into sections, which are likewise subdivided into subsections. Among other benefits, this facilitates information organization and cross-referencing.

2.3.1. Subsection Heading

Figure Captions Example: Fig. 2-3. Figure No. 3 of Chapter 2

Page Numbers Example:

2-8 Application Revision and Effective Publication Date Examples: All.71 ! 03/98 20/24.71 ! 03/98 21/25.71 ! 03/98 22/26.71 ! 03/98 23/27.71 ! 03/98

Figure captions are numbered in sequence as they appear in each chapter. The first number identifies the chapter, followed by the sequence number and title of the illustration. Page numbering restarts at the beginning of every chapter and technical bulletin. Page numbers are preceded by the chapter number followed by a hyphen. Technical bulletins only indicate the page number of that bulletin. Page numbers are located on the outside margin in the footer of each page. The contents of Volume 1 and Volume 5 are common to all application revisions and are denoted as All.71. Content of Volumes 2, 3 and 4 are application specific and are identified with the application number. These identifiers are included on every page in the inside margin of the footer, opposite the page number. The publication/effective date of the manual follows the application identification. The date is expressed as month/year (e.g.: March 1998 is 03/98).

Trademark References The following are trademarks of Omni Flow Computers, Inc.: ❏ Omni 3000 ❏ Omni 6000 ❏ OmniCom Other brand, product and company names that appear in this manual are trademarks of their respective owners.

ALL.71+ ! 05/99

xv


Manual Guide

Copyright Information and Modifications Policy This manual is copyright protected. All rights reserved. No part of this manual may be used or reproduced in any form, or stored in any database or retrieval system, without prior written consent of Omni Flow Computers, Inc., Stafford, Texas, USA. Making copies of any part of this manual for any purpose other than your own personal use is a violation of United States copyright laws and international treaty provisions. Omni Flow Computers, Inc., in conformance with its policy of product development and improvement, may make any necessary changes to this document without notice.

Warranty, Licenses and Product Registration

! Important!

Product warranty and licenses for use of Omni flow computer firmware and of OmniCom Configuration PC Software are included in the first pages of each Volume of this manual. We require that you read this information before using your Omni flow computer and the supplied software and documentation. If you have not done so already, please complete and return to us the product registration form included with your flow computer. We need this information for warranty purposes, to render you technical support and serve you in future upgrades. Registered users will also receive important updates and information about their flow computer and metering system.

Copyright 1991-1999 by Omni Flow Computers, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

xvi

ALL.71+ ! 05/99

Volume 1 User Manual

System Architecture and Installation

Effective May 1999


Contents of Volume 1

1. Overview of Hardware and Software Features..................................................... 1-1 1.1. Introduction .......................................................................................................... 1-1 1.2. Operator’s Panel .................................................................................................. 1-2 1.2.1.

LCD Display ..........................................................................................................1-2

1.2.2.

Electromechanical Totalizers.................................................................................1-2

1.2.3.

Diagnostic and Program LEDs...............................................................................1-2

1.2.4.

Active Alarm LED..................................................................................................1-2

1.2.5.

Alpha Shift LED.....................................................................................................1-2

1.2.6.

Operator Keypad ...................................................................................................1-2

1.3. Passive Backplane Mother Board....................................................................... 1-4 1.4. Back Panel Terminal Module............................................................................... 1-6 1.4.1.

Back Panel Terminations.......................................................................................1-6

1.4.2.

Extended Back Panel ............................................................................................1-7

1.5. Central Processor Module................................................................................... 1-8 1.6. Input/Output (I/O) Modules .................................................................................. 1-9 1.6.1.

Photo-Optical Isolation ........................................................................................ 1-10

1.6.2.

Digital I/O Modules.............................................................................................. 1-11

1.6.3.

Serial Communication Modules ........................................................................... 1-12

1.6.4.

Process I/O Combination Modules....................................................................... 1-16

1.7. Operating Power ................................................................................................ 1-17 1.8. Firmware and Software...................................................................................... 1-19 1.8.1.

Interrupt-Driven CPU........................................................................................... 1-19

1.8.2.

Cycle Time.......................................................................................................... 1-19

1.8.3.

On-line Diagnostics and Calibration..................................................................... 1-19

1.8.4.

PC Communications Interface ............................................................................. 1-19

1.8.5.

OmniComâ Configuration PC Software ............................................................... 1-20

1.8.6.

Year 2000 Compliance ........................................................................................ 1-20

1.9. Initializing Your Flow Computer ........................................................................ 1-21

ii

ALL.71+ w 05/99

Volume 1


2. Process Input/Output Combination Module Setup ............................................. 2-1 2.1. Introduction...........................................................................................................2-1 2.2. Features of the I/O Combo Modules....................................................................2-1 2.2.1.

Setting the Address of the Combo Modules........................................................... 2-2

2.2.2.

Hardware Analog Configuration Jumpers .............................................................. 2-2

2.2.3.

Process I/O Combo Module Addresses Versus Physical I/O Points ...................... 2-2

2.2.4.

Assigning Specific Signal Inputs ........................................................................... 2-3

2.2.5.

Sample Omni Flow Computer Configuration Charts .............................................. 2-4

2.3. The A and B Combo I/O Modules ........................................................................2-6 2.3.1.

A and B Combo Module Non-Selectable or Selectable Address ............................ 2-7

2.3.2.

The A Type Combo I/O Module............................................................................. 2-8

2.3.3.

The B Type Combo I/O Module........................................................................... 2-10

2.4. The E/D and E Combo Modules.........................................................................2-11 2.4.1.

The E/D Type Combo I/O Module ....................................................................... 2-11

2.4.2.

The E Type Combo I/O Module........................................................................... 2-12

2.5. The H Type Combo I/O Module..........................................................................2-13 2.6. The HV Type Combo I/O Module .......................................................................2-15 2.7. The SV Type Combo I/O Module........................................................................2-16

3. Mounting and Power Options ................................................................................ 3-1 3.1. Mechanical Installation.........................................................................................3-1 3.1.1.

Panel Mounting..................................................................................................... 3-1

3.1.2.

Nema 4 / 4X Configurations .................................................................................. 3-2

3.1.3.

Nema 7 Specification............................................................................................ 3-2

3.2. Input Power...........................................................................................................3-4 3.2.1.

AC Power ............................................................................................................. 3-4

3.2.2.

DC Power ............................................................................................................. 3-4

3.2.3.

Safety Considerations ........................................................................................... 3-4

3.3. Power Terminals...................................................................................................3-5 3.3.1.

CE Equipment Power Terminals ........................................................................... 3-5

3.3.2.

Extended Back Panel Power Terminals ................................................................ 3-6

3.4. Power Supply Module Switching Regulator .......................................................3-8

ALL.71+ w 05/99

iii



4. Connecting to Flowmeters..................................................................................... 4-1 4.1. Turbine Flowmeter (A or B Combo Module) ....................................................... 4-1 4.2. Wiring Flowmeter Signals to E Type Combo Modules ...................................... 4-2 4.3. Faure Hermanä Turbine Meters (E Combo Module).......................................... 4-3 4.4. Pulse Fidelity and Integrity Checking with E Type Combo Modules ................ 4-4

5. Connecting to Transducers and Transmitters ..................................................... 5-1 5.1. Wiring the Input Transducers.............................................................................. 5-1 5.2. Wiring of a Dry ‘C’ Type Contact......................................................................... 5-2 5.3. Wiring RTD Probes .............................................................................................. 5-3 5.4. Wiring Densitometers .......................................................................................... 5-4 5.4.1.

Wiring Densitometer Signals to an E/D Type Combo Module ................................5-4

5.4.2.

Solartronä Densitometers......................................................................................5-4

5.4.3.

Sarasotaä Densitometers ......................................................................................5-6

5.4.4.

UGCä Densitometers ............................................................................................5-8

5.5. Wiring of Honeywellä ST3000 Transmitters .................................................... 5-10 5.6. Wiring Micro Motionä Transmitters.................................................................. 5-11 5.6.1.

Connecting Micro Motionä RFT9739 Transmitter to A Type or E Type Process I/O Combination Modules .................................................................................... 5-11

5.6.2.

Connecting Micro Motionä RFT 9739 via RS-485 Serial Communications........... 5-12

5.6.3.

Connecting Micro Motionä RFT9739 via Serial RS-232-C to 485 Converter ........ 5-13

6. Connecting Analog Outputs and Miscellaneous I/O Including Provers............. 6-1 6.1. Analog Outputs .................................................................................................... 6-1 6.2. Digital Inputs/Outputs .......................................................................................... 6-2 6.2.1.

Wiring a Digital Point as an Input or an Output ......................................................6-2

6.2.2.

Connecting Various Digital I/O Devices .................................................................6-4

6.3. Provers ................................................................................................................. 6-5

iv

6.3.1.

Connecting Pipe Prover Detector Switches............................................................6-5

6.3.2.

Interfacing to a Brooksä Compact Prover..............................................................6-5

6.3.3.

Controlling the Plenum Pressure of a Brooksä Compact Prover ............................6-6

ALL.71+ w 05/99

Volume 1


7. Connecting to Serial Devices................................................................................. 7-1 7.1. Serial Port Connection Options...........................................................................7-1 7.2. Connecting to Printers .........................................................................................7-2 7.2.1.

Connecting to a Dedicated Printer (Port 1) ............................................................ 7-2

7.2.2.

Connecting to a Shared Printer (Port 1) ................................................................ 7-3

7.2.3.

Print Sharing Problems ......................................................................................... 7-3

7.3. Connecting to a Personal Computer and Modem ..............................................7-4 7.4. Peer-to-Peer Communications and Multi-drop Modes .......................................7-6 7.4.1.

Peer-to-Peer RS-485 Two-wire Multi-drop Mode ................................................... 7-6

7.4.2.

Peer-to-Peer via RS-232-C Communications ........................................................ 7-7

7.4.3.

Keying the Modem or Radio Transmitter Carrier in Multi-drop Applications ........... 7-7

7.4.4.

RS-485 Four-wire Multi-drop Mode ....................................................................... 7-8

7.5. Connecting to a SCADA Device...........................................................................7-9 7.6. Interfacing the Fourth Serial Port to an Allen-Bradleyä KE Module ...............7-10

8. Diagnostic and Calibration Features .................................................................... 8-1 8.1. Introduction...........................................................................................................8-1 8.2. Calibrating in the Diagnostic Mode .....................................................................8-2 8.2.1.

Entering The Diagnostic Mode .............................................................................. 8-2

8.2.2.

Display Groups in the Diagnostic Mode................................................................. 8-3

8.2.3.

Leaving The Diagnostic Mode............................................................................... 8-3

8.3. Calibration Instructions........................................................................................8-4

ALL.71+ w 05/99

8.3.1.

Calibrating A Voltage or Current Analog Input....................................................... 8-4

8.3.2.

Calibrating an RTD Input Channel......................................................................... 8-5

8.3.3.

Calibrating a 4 to 20 mA Digital to Analog Output ................................................. 8-7

8.3.4.

Verifying the Operation of the Digital I/O Points .................................................... 8-8

v



9. Flow Computer Specifications .............................................................................. 9-1 9.1. Environmental ...................................................................................................... 9-1 9.2. Electrical............................................................................................................... 9-1 9.3. Microprocessor CPU............................................................................................ 9-1 9.4. Backplane............................................................................................................. 9-2 9.5. Process Input/Output Combo Modules .............................................................. 9-2 9.6. Flowmeter Pulse Inputs ....................................................................................... 9-2 9.7. Detector Switch Inputs ........................................................................................ 9-3 9.8. Detector Switch Inputs of E Combo Module ...................................................... 9-3 9.9. Analog Inputs ....................................................................................................... 9-3 9.10. RTD Inputs............................................................................................................ 9-3 9.11. Analog Outputs .................................................................................................... 9-4 9.12. Control Outputs/Status Inputs ............................................................................ 9-4 9.13. Multi-bus Serial I/O Interface ............................................................................... 9-5 9.13.1. RS-232 Compatible ...............................................................................................9-5 9.13.2. RS-485..................................................................................................................9-5

9.14. Operator Keypad.................................................................................................. 9-5 9.15. LCD Display .......................................................................................................... 9-5 9.16. Electromechanical Counters............................................................................... 9-6 9.17. Operating Mode Indicator LEDs.......................................................................... 9-6 9.18. Security................................................................................................................. 9-6

vi

ALL.71+ w 05/99

Volume 1


Figures of Volume 1 Fig. 1-1.

Features of the Operator Front Panel ................................................................................ 1-3

Fig. 1-2.

Passive Backplane Motherboard Omni 3000 ..................................................................... 1-4

Fig. 1-3.

Passive Backplane Motherboard Omni 6000 ..................................................................... 1-5

Fig. 1-4.

Back Panel Terminations Omni 6000 and Omni 3000........................................................ 1-6

Fig. 1-5.

Extended Back Panel - Omni 6000 (left); Omni 3000 (right) .............................................. 1-7

Fig. 1-6.

Central Processor Module - Jumper Settings ..................................................................... 1-8

Fig. 1-7.

Matching the I/O Modules to the Back Panel Terminations ................................................ 1-9

Fig. 1-8.

Photo-optical Isolation - How It Works ............................................................................. 1-10

Fig. 1-9.

Digital I/O Module Model # 6011 - Jumper Settings ......................................................... 1-11

Fig. 1-10. RS-232/485 Module #68-6205 Showing Selection Jumpers and LED Indicators .............. 1-12 Fig. 1-11. Layout of Jumper Blocks Showing RS-232/485 Formats.................................................. 1-13 Fig. 1-12. Back Panel Wiring of the RS-232/485 Module #68-6205 ................................................. 1-14 Fig. 1-13. Dual RS-232 Serial I/O Module Model - Jumper Settings................................................. 1-15 Fig. 1-14. Power Supply Module Model # 68-6118........................................................................... 1-18 Fig. 2-1.

Sample Configuration Chart (Blank) - Omni 3000.............................................................. 2-4

Fig. 2-2.

Sample Configuration Chart (Blank) - Omni 6000.............................................................. 2-5

Fig. 2-3.

The A and B Combo I/O Module - Configuration Jumpers ................................................. 2-6

Fig. 2-4.

A and B Combo Module - Non-Selectable / Selectable Address......................................... 2-7

Fig. 2-5.

A Type Combo Module - Flow Pulse Jumper Settings (Channel 3 or Channel 4) ............... 2-8

Fig. 2-6.

A Type Combo Module - Analog Input Jumper Settings..................................................... 2-9

Fig. 2-7.

B Type Combo Module - Jumper Settings - Frequency Densitometer Setup .................... 2-10

Fig. 2-8.

E/D Type Combo Module - Jumper Settings.................................................................... 2-11

Fig. 2-9.

E Type Combo Module - Jumper Settings ....................................................................... 2-12

Fig. 2-10. H Type Combo Module - Jumper Settings ....................................................................... 2-13 Fig. 2-11. HV Type Combo Module - Jumper Settings..................................................................... 2-15 Fig. 2-12. Omni Multivariable Interface (SV Type Combo) Module Model 68-6203 - Jumper Settings ........................................................................................................................... 2-16 Fig. 3-1.

Panel Mounting - Omni 6000 (upper), Omni 3000 (lower) .................................................. 3-1

Fig. 3-2.

Input Power Terminals - Omni 3000 (upper), Omni 6000 (lower) ....................................... 3-5

Fig. 3-3.

Input Power Terminals - Extended Back Panel (Omni 6000 only) ...................................... 3-6

Fig. 3-4.

Example of Typical Back Panel Assignments (Omni 6000)................................................ 3-7

Fig. 3-5.

Example of Typical Back Panel Assignments (Omni 3000)................................................ 3-7

Fig. 3-6.

Power Supply Module Model 68-6118................................................................................ 3-8

ALL.71+ w 05/99

vii


Figures of Volume 1

Fig. 4-1.

Connecting to a Turbine Pre-amp (A or B Combo Modules) ...............................................4-1

Fig. 4-2.

Wiring to Turbine Pre-Amps (E Type Combo Modules Only)..............................................4-2

Fig. 4-3.

Wiring of Faure Herman Pre-amp Using Omni 24 VDC .....................................................4-3

Fig. 4-4.

Wiring of Faure Hermanä Pre-amp Using External 24 VDC...............................................4-3

Fig. 4-5.

Connecting Dual Coil Turbines for Pulse Fidelity Checking ................................................4-4

Fig. 5-1.

Wiring the 4-20 mA Inputs (Input Channels 1 & 2 shown)...................................................5-1

Fig. 5-2.

Wiring for Dry C Type Contact ...........................................................................................5-2

Fig. 5-3.

Wiring a 4-Wire RTD Temperature Probe ..........................................................................5-3

Fig. 5-4.

Wiring a Solartronä Densitometer with Safety Barriers to a ‘B’ Type I/O Combo Module ...5-4

Fig. 5-5.

Wiring a Solartronä Densitometer without Safety Barriers to a ‘B’ Type I/O Combo Module...............................................................................................................................5-5

Fig. 5-6.

Wiring a Sarasotaä Densitometer with Safety Barriers to a ‘B’ Type I/O Combo Module....5-6

Fig. 5-7.

Wiring a Sarasotaä Densitometer without Safety Barriers to a ‘B’ Type I/O Combo Module...............................................................................................................................5-7

Fig. 5-8.

Wiring a UGCä Densitometer with Safety Barriers to a ‘B’ Type I/O Combo Module..........5-8

Fig. 5-9.

Wiring a UGCä Densitometer without Safety Barriers to a ‘B’ Type I/O Combo Module .....5-9

Fig. 5-10. Wiring of a Honeywellä Smart Transmitter ...................................................................... 5-10 Fig. 5-11. Wiring of a Micro Motionä RFT9739 Field-Mount (Explosion-Proof) Transmitter.............. 5-11 Fig. 5-12. Wiring of a Micro Motionä RFT9739 Field-Mount (Explosion-Proof) Transmitter Via Two-wire RS-485 Communications (Serial I/O Module #68-6205) .................................... 5-12 Fig. 6-1.

Wiring Devices to the Flow Computer’s Analog Outputs.....................................................6-1

Fig. 6-2.

Wiring of a Digital I/O Point as an Input .............................................................................6-2

Fig. 6-3.

Wiring of a Digital I/O Point as an Output ..........................................................................6-3

Fig. 6-4.

Connecting Digital I/O Devices to the Flow Computer ........................................................6-4

Fig. 6-5.

Wiring to a Brooksä Compact Prover ................................................................................6-5

Fig. 6-6.

Controlling the Plenum Pressure of a Brooksä Compact Prover ........................................6-6

Fig. 7-1.

Connecting a Printer to Serial Port #1 of the Flow Computer..............................................7-2

Fig. 7-2.

Connecting Several Flow Computers to a Shared Printer...................................................7-3

Fig. 7-3.

Direct Connect to a Personal Computer - DB25 Female Connector (Using Port #2 as an example)............................................................................................................................7-4

Fig. 7-4.

Direct Connect to a Personal Computer - DB9 Female Connector .....................................7-5

Fig. 7-5.

Connecting Port #2 to a Modem.........................................................................................7-5

Fig. 7-6.

Wiring of Several Flow Computers using the Peer-to-Peer Feature via RS-485 Communications in Two-wire Multi-drop Mode ...................................................................7-6

Fig. 7-7.

Wiring of Several Flow Computers in the Peer-to-Peer Mode using RS-232-C Communications. ...............................................................................................................7-7

viii

ALL.71+ w 05/99

Volume 1


Fig. 7-8.

Wiring of Multiple Flow Computers to a PLC Device Via RS-485 Communications in Four-wire Multi-drop Mode................................................................................................. 7-8

Fig. 7-9.

Typical Wiring of Port #3 to a SCADA Device via Modem ................................................. 7-9

Fig. 7-10. Wiring Serial Port #4 to Allen-Bradleyä KE Communications Module.............................. 7-10 Fig. 8-1.

ALL.71+ w 05/99

Figure Showing Calibration of RTD Input Channel............................................................. 8-6

ix

Volume 1


1. Overview of Hardware and Software Features 1.1. BASIC FEATURES - Omni flow computers are applicable to liquid and gas flow measurement, control and communication systems, and custody transfer operations. It’s basic features are: q 32-bit processing with math co-processor for fast, multi-tasking execution q 500 msec calculation cycle q Plug-in, assignable digital, serial and combination I/O modules q Point-to-point digital transmitter interface q 14-bit A/Ds, temperature trimmed q No I/O multiplexers, no potentiometers q Photo-optical Isolation of each I/O point q Meter pulse fidelity checking q Optional Honeywellä and Rosemount digital transmitter interface modules q Dual LEDs indicate active/fused digital I/O q Selectable digital I/O, individually fused q Standard, field-proven firmware ¾no need for custom programming q User-configurable control logic q Up to 4 flow/pressure control loops q User-configurable variables for displays and reports (Continues…)

ALL.71+ w 05/99

Introduction

Omni 3000ä and Omni 6000ä Flow Computers are reliable, easy to use, uniquely versatile measurement instruments. They are factory-programmed for single or multiple meter run configurations to measure crude oils, refined products, NGLs, LPGs, ethylene, propylene, natural gas, and specialty gases. Measurement of other flowing products can also be provided. Extensive communications capability enables the Omni 6000 to be used in a variety of Master/Slave configurations for high-speed data transfer applications, and as a large communication submaster. The flow computer can also be hardware configured as a medium-size Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) with significant digital I/O capability. Your Omni Flow Computer connects to various sensors monitoring pipeline flow in your transmission, petrochemical or process measurement application. It calculates, displays and prints data that will be used for operational or billing functions. The computer is configured to match your piping system requirements. Its nonrestrictive bus design permits any combination of inputs and outputs to meet most metering, flow and valve control, and communication requirements. Plug-in modules furnish the input and output channels as needed and provide an assurance of maximum product life by higher accuracy measurement technologies such as meter pulse fidelity checking, and Rosemount and Honeywellä digital transmitter interface modules. Up to 4 serial ports in some models are available for printing reports and other communications tasks. All I/O modules are quality tested and temperature trimmed to optimize the 14-bit analog resolution, and burned-in before shipment for field installation.

1-1

Chapter 1

Overview of Hardware and Software Features

1.2. BASIC FEATURES (Continued) q Data archive and report storage q Modbusä peer-to-peer communications to 38.4kbps for PLC/DCS q Real-time dial-up for diagnostics q International testing q Includes OmniComâ configuration software q Three year warranty

Operator’s Panel

The operator’s panel shown (Fig. 1-1) is standard for all applications and is used to display and enter all data. All data can also be accessed via any of the serial ports.

1.2.1.

LCD Display

The 4-line by 20-alpha-numeric character, back-lit Liquid Crystal Display is updated every 200 ms. It displays all messages and system variables in English language engineering units. Backlighting and display viewing angle are adjustable from the keypad (press [Setup] then [Display] and follow the displayed instructions).

1.2.2.

Electromechanical Totalizers

Three non-resetable, 6-digit electromechanical counters are included on the front panel for non-volatile backup totalizing. They can be programmed to count gross, net, mass or energy units at any rate up to 10 counts per second.

1.2.3.

Diagnostic and Program LEDs

These dual-color LEDs indicate when the user is in the Diagnostic Mode calibrating the I/O modules, or when in the Program Mode changing the configuration of the computer. The LEDs change from green to red after a valid password is requested and entered. The computer is in the normal Display Mode when neither of these LEDs are on.

1.2.4.

Active Alarm LED

New unacknowledged alarms cause this LED to glow red. This changes to green as soon as the alarm is acknowledged by pressing the [Cancel/Ack] key on the keypad.

1.2.5. INFO - Pressing the [Alpha Shift] key twice will put the shift lock on. The shift lock is canceled by pressing one more time or automatically after the [Display/Enter] key is pressed. Help System - These computers are equipped with a powerful context-sensitive help system. Press the [Help] key (bottom right) twice to activate the help displays. Cancel the help screens by pressing the [Prog] key.

1-2

Alpha Shift LED

This LED glows green to show that the next key only will be shifted. A red LED indicates that the shift lock is on.

1.2.6.

Operator Keypad

Control of the flow computer is via the 34-button alphanumeric membrane keypad, with tactile domes and audio feedback. Through the keypad you have the capability to configure your system, access and modify calibration data online, and view or print process data. Configuration data can also be entered remotely by serial port and is stored in battery backed-up CMOS SRAM memory. Passwords and an internal program inhibit switch provide tamperproof security.

ALL.71+ w 05/99

Volume 1


DIAGNOSTIC LED Glows green when in the Diagnostic Mode. Glows red when a valid password is entered.

LCD DISPLAY Is 4 lines by 20 characters. Backlight and viewing angle are adjustable via the keypad.

Flowrate FT-101 Cumulative FT-101

PROGRAM LED Glows green when in the Program Mode. Glows red when a valid password is entered.

BBL/Hr 1550.5 BBLS 234510

Total A

Total B

Total C

000682

009456

023975

DIAG/PROG KEY Used to access Diagnostic and Program Modes.

Diagnostic

Alpha Shift

Diag Prog

OPERATOR KEYPAD Has 34 keys, domed membrane with tactile and audio feedback.

Alpha Shift Net

Gross

A

Press

G

H

Time

Counts

M

SPACE/CLEAR / CANCEL/ACK KEY Used to clear data and insert spaces in the Program Mode. It is also used to cancel key press sequences and, in the Display Mode, acknowledge alarms.

Fig. 1-1.

ALL.71+ w 05/99

:

Prove

, Cancel / Ack

Space Clear

2

Status

T

S

;

1

.

0 Input

(

)

Setup

W

Z

R

THREE-FUNCTION KEYS These activate process variable or alpha-numeric character functions.

=

Product

V

Output

Y

Analysis

Q

3

Alarms

U

L

*

Batch

P

ALPHA SHIFT LED Glows green for a single character shift. Glows red when the shift lock is on.

Meter

K

6

Preset

O

F /

Orifice

J

5

Factor

Control

E

9

D.P.

I

N

“

Print

Density

SG/API

D

8

4

$

Energy

C

7

Temp

#

Mass

B %

&

ACTIVE ALARM LED Glows red when a new alarm occurs. Glows green when an acknowledged alarm exists.

Active Alarm

Program

ARROW KEYS Used to move the cursor and scroll displays. Also used as software ‘zero’ and as span control during calibration.

THREE 6-DIGIT, ELECTROMECHANICAL COUNTERS These non-resetable counters are assigned via the keypad.

X +

Help

Display Enter

DISPLAY/ENTER / HELP KEY Used to enter a key press sequence and to access the Help System.

Features of the Operator Front Panel

1-3

Chapter 1


1.3. INFO - Passive backplane simply means that no active circuitry is contained on it. The active circuitry is contained on the modules that plug into it.

Passive Backplane Mother Board

Mounted on the passive backplane are DIN standard connectors which are bussed in two sections. The front section is a high performance, 16-bit bus which accepts the Central Processor Module. The Omni 6000 computer has 3 other connectors available in this section to accept memory expansion and future product enhancements. The rear 8-bit I/O bus section comprises 10 connectors on the Omni 6000 and 4 on the Omni 3000, which can accept any type of optically isolated I/O module manufactured by Omni. The rearmost connector on both computers accepts the system AC/DC power supply module. Dual ribbon cable assemblies (Omni 6000) and a single ribbon cable (Omni 3000) connect the I/O connectors on the backplane to the back panel terminals. (See Fig. 1-2 below and Fig. 1-3 on facing page.)

‹

CAUTION!

‹

These units have an integral cabinet latching mechanism which first must be disengaged by lifting the bezel upwards, before withdrawing the unit from the case.

Fig. 1-2.

1-4

Passive Backplane Motherboard Omni 3000

ALL.71+ w 05/99

Volume 1

‹

CAUTION!


‹

These units have an integral cabinet latching mechanism which first must be disengaged by lifting the bezel upwards, before withdrawing the unit from the case.

Fig. 1-3.

ALL.71+ w 05/99

Passive Backplane Motherboard Omni 6000

1-5

Chapter 1


1.4.

Back Panel Terminal Module

The AC receptacle of the Omni 6000 and Omni 3000 back panel is a power line filter with a separate AC fuse holder. The AC power is contained on a separate four-conductor cable which plugs into the power supply. The power supply used with this version is a Model 68-6118; no physical fuses (see 1.7. Operating Power).

1.4.1.

Back Panel Terminations

The Omni 6000 terminal blocks are identified TB1 through TB10 with terminals marked 1 through 12 for each block. These provide 120 circuit paths to the passive backplane. The DC terminals are on TB11. The Omni 3000 terminal blocks are identified as TB1 through TB4, with terminals marked 1 through 12 for each block. These provide 48 circuit paths to the passive backplane. The DC terminal is on TB5.

Back Panel Fuses - All DC fuses are 3 amp fast-blow manufactured by Littlefuse, Model 225.003. All AC fuses are ½ amp slow-blow manufactured by Littlefuse, Model 229.500.

Fig. 1-4.

1-6

Back Panel Terminations Omni 6000 and Omni 3000

ALL.71+ w 05/99

Volume 1


1.4.2.

Extended Back Panel

Several flow computer mounting options are available with the extended back panel. Screw type terminals are provided for AC and DC power. Extended 64conductor ribbon cables and the AC cables are provided with a standard length of 5 feet. For the Omni 6000 (dimensions: 3” x 18”), this panel incorporates all the terminal blocks TB1 through TB10, with terminals marked 1 through 12. In addition to the terminal blocks, extra DC (fused), return and shield terminals are provided for TB1 through TB8. The Omni 3000 extended back panel (dimensions: 3” x 8½”) also incorporates all the terminal blocks TB1 through TB4, with terminals marked 1 through 12. In addition to the terminal blocks, extra DC (fused), return and shield terminals are provided for TB1 and TB2.

Extended Back Panel AC/DC Fuses - All DC fuses are ¼ amp fast-blow manufactured by Littlefuse, Model 225.250. The AC fuse is ½ amp slow-blow manufactured by Littlefuse, Model 239.500. The fuse for the back panel’s AC receptacle is a 5x20mm, ½ amp slow-blow.

Fig. 1-5.

ALL.71+ w 05/99

Extended Back Panel - Omni 6000 (left); Omni 3000 (right)

1-7

Chapter 1


1.5.

Central Processor Module

This module contains the Motorola 16/32-bit microprocessor operating at 16 MHz, a maximum of 512 kbytes of SRAM memory, 1 Mbyte of EPROM program memory, math coprocessor and time of day clock. Positions U3 and U4 on the Central Processor Module contain the program EPROMs. The hardware real-time clock will continue to operate even when power loss to the computer occurs. Time of power failure is logged and printed when the power is restored.

‹

CAUTION!

‹

POTENTIAL FOR DATA LOSS! RAM Battery Backup Omni flow computers leave the factory with a fully charged Ni-Cd battery as RAM power backup. RAM data, including user configuration and I/O calibration data, may be lost if the flow computer is disconnected from external power for more than 30 days. Observe caution when storing the flow computer without power being applied for extended periods of time. The RAM back-up battery is rechargeable and will be fully charged after power has been applied for 24 hours.

Math Processor

Program EPROM

Program RAM

Archive RAM

Backup Batttery

J1

J2

EPROM Size 1 OR 4 Meg Bit Select 4 Meg As Shown

J3

Fig. 1-6.

1-8

Central Processor

System Watchdog J3 In = Enabled J3 Out = Disabled (Always Enabled)

Central Processor Module - Jumper Settings

ALL.71+ w 05/99

Volume 1


1.6.

Input/Output (I/O) Modules

Omni flow computers utilize an I/O bus system. All I/O is modular and plug-in for easy field maintenance and replacement. I/O circuitry is also photo-optically isolated from all field wiring which makes it relatively immune to electrical noise and prevents damage to the electronics. Your Omni Flow Computer has a combination of 3 types of I/O modules: o Digital I/O Modules o Serial I/O Modules o Process I/O Combo Modules ¨ A and B Type Combo Modules ¨ E and E/D Type Combo Modules ¨ H Type Combo Modules Almost any combination of I/O mix can be accommodated in the flow computer. The only limitations are the number of I/O connectors (4 on Omni 3000, 10 on Omni 6000) and the number of wires connecting them to the back panel field wiring terminals (48 for Omni 3000, 120 for Omni 6000). Your Omni Flow Computer has a standard order in which the modules are plugged-in (Fig. 1-7; also see Fig. 1-2 and Fig. 1-3). This provides a standard termination layout.

TB6

TB7

TB8

TB9

TB10

24

Digital I/O 1-12 12 13

TB2

TB3

TB4

24

Fig. 1-7.

ALL.71+ w 05/99

TB1

1

Combo I/O # 2

Combo I/O # 6

Combo I/O # 1

TB5

Combo I/O # 5

Serial I/O 3 & 4

TB4

Combo I/O # 4

Serial I/O 1 & 2

TB3

Combo I/O # 3

Digital I/O 13-24

TB2

Combo I/O # 2

12 13

Digital I/O 1 - 12

TB1

1

Omni 3000 Serial I/O 1 & 2

Omni 6000

Combo I/O # 1

INFO - Mother board connectors do not have a specific address. These are pre-established at the factory. Each Omni Flow Computer will be supplied with a termination diagram indicating these settings.

Matching the I/O Modules to the Back Panel Terminations

1-9

Chapter 1


1.6.1. Photo-Optical Isolation Transducer signals are converted by the LED into high frequency pulses of light. These are sensed by the photo-transistor which passes the signal to the flow computer. Note that no electrical connection exists between the transducers and the computer circuits.

Photo-Optical Isolation

The microprocessor circuitry is isolated via photo-optical devices from all field wiring to prevent accidental damage to the electronics, including that caused by static electricity. Photo-optical isolation also inhibits electrical noise from inducing measurement errors. Independent isolation of each process input provides high common-mode rejection, allowing the user greater freedom when wiring transmitter loops. Furthermore, it minimizes ground loop effects and isolates and protects your flow computer from pipeline EMI and transients.

Pipeline Transducer Signals That May Pass On Damaging Transient Noise Fig. 1-8.

1-10

Opto Coupler IC

LED

Photo Transistor

Isolated Transducer Signals Passed On To Sensitive Computer Circuits

Photo-optical Isolation - How It Works

ALL.71+ w 05/99

Volume 1


1.6.2. INFO - Some Digital I/O modules have 12 replaceable fuses; one fuse for each I/O point. Other modules have electronic fuses that trip when overloaded and automatically reset when the fault condition is removed.

Digital I/O Modules

Digital I/O modules provide discrete inputs and outputs to control provers, samplers, injection pumps, motor operated valves (MOVs) and to provide remote totalizing. Each digital module provides 12 digital I/O points with each point able to be configured as either an input or output. The Omni 3000 normally has one digital I/O module. Whereas, the 6000 can have a maximum of two digital modules, resulting in 24 digital I/O points. The digital I/O module normally occupies I/O Slots 1 and 2 on the Omni 6000 backplane, and I/O Slot 1 on Omni 3000. Address jumpers on the digital I/O module are used to configure the module as either module D1 or D2. Digital I/Os 1 through 12 are allocated to module D1 and 13 through 24 are allocated to D2.

JP1 In = Dig. 1 Rising Edge Trigger JP2 In = Dig. 1 Falling Edge Trigger JP3 In = Dig. 2 Rising Edge Trigger JP4 In = Dig. 2 Falling Edge Trigger

Interrupt Request (IRQ) Select Jumpers for Pipe Prover Detector (Non-Double Chronometry)

NOTE: If “D2” remove all jumpers

Module Address Jumper

Select D1

Select D2

Green LED On Point Active

I/O Point LEDs - Each digital I/O point has 2 LEDs. One LED illuminates green when the I/O point is active and the other illuminates green or red when a fault condition exists. The fault LED illuminates green when an input over voltage condition exists. An output short circuit causes the fault LED to illuminate red.

Individual Fuses for Each I/O Point

F3

F2

F1

F6

F5

F4

F9

F8

F7

F12

F11

F10

I/O Point #01 Dual (Red/Green) Fuse Blown LED

Red On

= Sourcing Current Green On = Sinking Current

#12

Digital I/O Point LED Indicators

Fig. 1-9.

Digital I/O Module # 6011 – Jumper Settings

IRQ, (Interrupt request) jumpers are provided on digital I/O modules for interfacing to pipe prover detector switches. This feature applies only to liquid measurement applications. These jumpers are only used to configure digital I/O point 1 or digital I/O point 2 on module D1. All IRQ jumpers should be removed from D2 if a D2 module is installed.

ALL.71+ ! 05/99

1-11

Chapter 1


1.6.3.

Serial Communication Modules

RS-232/485 Serial I/O Module Model # 68-6205 INFO - Up to 12 flow computers and/or other compatible serial devices can be multi-dropped using Omni’s proprietary RS-232-C serial port. Thirty-two devices may be connected when using the RS-485 mode. Typically, one serial I/O module is used on the Omni 3000, providing two ports. A maximum of two serial modules can be installed in the Omni 6000, providing four ports.

Multivariable Transmitting Devices - In addition to the Serial I/O Module # 68-6205, the flow computer must also have an SV Module to communicate with multivariable transmitters. This serial module is jumpered to IRQ 3 when used in combination with an SV Module. Without an SV Module, the jumper is placed at IRQ 2. The SV Module can only be used with this serial module (68-6205) and is not compatible with the Serial I/O Module # 68-6005. For more information, see Technical Bulletin # TB980503.

Serial I/O Module # 68-6205 is capable of handling two communications ports Each serial communication port is individually optically isolated for maximum common-mode and noise rejection. Although providing RS-232C signal levels, the tristate output design allows multiple flow computers to share one serial link. Communication parameters such as baud rate, stop bits and parity settings are software selectable. In addition to RS-232, jumper selections have been provided on each port to allow selection of RS-485 format. With this option, a total of two RS-485 ports are available on each module.

Address Selection Jumpers Address S1 Selected

Address S2 Selected

LED Indicators IRQ 2 Selected

Port #2 (4) Jumpers

Port #1 (3) Jumpers

Fig. 1-10. RS-232/485 Module #68-6205 Showing Selection Jumpers and LED Indicators

1-12

ALL.71+ w 05/99

Volume 1

System Architecture and Installation The RS-232/485 Module has been designed so that RS-232 or RS-485 communications standards can be selected by placement of 16-pin resistor networks into the correct blocks. The following diagrams show the locations of blocks JB4, JB5, JB6 for Port #1, and JB1, JB2, JB3 for Port #2 for each format.

RS-232 JB1 or JB4

JB2 or JB5

RS-485

RS-485 2-WIRE

JB3 or JB6

RS-485 TERMINATED

RS-485 2-WIRE TERMINATED Terminated/Nonterminated RS-485 - The RS-485 devices located at each extreme end of an RS485 run should be terminated. Note that the device located at an extreme end may or may not be an Omni Flow Computer.

JB1 or JB4

JB2 or JB5

JB3 or JB6

RS-485 2-WIRE NON-TERMINATED JB1 or JB4

JB2 or JB5

JB3 or JB6

RS-232/485 NON-TERMINATED RS-232

RS-232/485 4-WIRE

RS-232

RS-485 4-WIRE TERMINATED JB1 or JB4

JB2 or JB5

JB3 or JB6

RS-485 TERMINATED


RS-232/485 RS-485 2-WIRE NON-TERMINATED RS-232

RS-232/485 4-WIRE

JB2 or JB5

JB3 or JB6

RS-485 2-WIRE RS-232

RS-485 TERMINATED

Fig. 1-11. Layout of Jumper Blocks Showing RS-232/485 Formats

ALL.71+ w 05/99

1-13

Chapter 1


Omni 6000 (Omni 3000) Terminal TB3 (TB2)

Note: Users of Micro Motionä RFT 9739 devices connected the peer-to-peer port (Port #2) of the Omni, please note that the resistor networks should be positioned for 2-wire RS-485 and that Terminal (A) from the RFT 9739 should be wired to Omni 7 and (B) from the RFT must be wired to Terminal 11.

First Serial Port

Second Serial Port

RS-232-C

RS-485 2-Wire

RS-485 4-Wire

1

TX

B

TX-B

2

TERM

¾

¾

3

RX

¾

RX-A

4

GND

GND

GND

5

RTS

A

TX-A

6

RDY

¾

RX-B

7

TX

B

TX-B

8

TERM

¾

¾

9

RX

¾

RX-A

10

GND

GND

GND

11

RTS

A

TX-A

12

RDY

¾

RX-B

Fig. 1-12. Back Panel Wiring of the RS-232/485 Module #68-6205

1-14

ALL.71+ w 05/99

Volume 1

System Architecture and Installation Dual RS-232-Compatible Serial I/O Module Model # 68-6005

INFO - Up to 12 flow computers can be multidropped to one RS-232C serial device. Typically, one serial I/O module is used on the Omni 3000, providing two ports. A maximum of two serial modules can be installed in the Omni 6000, providing four ports.

Dual channel serial communication modules can be installed providing two RS232-C ports. Each serial communication port is individually optically isolated for maximum common-mode and noise rejection. Although providing RS-232C signal levels, the tristate output design allows multiple flow computers to share one RS-232 device. Communication parameters such as baud rate, stop bits and parity settings are software selectable.

S1

Serial Ports 1 & 2 Use the S1 Module Setting

S0

Serial Ports 3 & 4 Use the S0 Module Setting

RTS Out TX Out

Chan. B

RTS Out TX Out

Chan. A

LED Indicators

RX In RDY In RX In

Chan. A Chan. B

RDY In

Fig. 1-13. Dual RS-232 Serial I/O Module Model - Jumper Settings

Serial Port Assignments The first port can be configured as a Modbus protocol port. It can also be configured as a printer port. The printer can be shared between multiple flow computers. Reports can be printed on a daily, batch end, timed interval or on demand basis. A reprint function provides backup should you experience printer problems at any time. Customized report templates are input using the OmniCom Configuration PC Software. The second, third, and fourth ports are independent Modbus protocol channels. The complete database of the flow computer is available for upload and download. The OmniCom configuration program provided by Omni can use any of these ports. The fourth RS-232C can also be set up to communicate with Allen-Bradley PLC devices.

ALL.71+ w 05/99

1-15

Chapter 1


1.6.4.

Process I/O Combination Modules

Meter runs utilize plug-in modules which include all necessary analog/digital (A/D) converters and control circuitry. User selection of process I/O is available with “combo” cards that can be a mix of meter pulse, frequency densitometer, 4-20 mA, 4-wire 100 ohm RTD inputs, and 4-20 mA outputs. All process measurements such as temperature, pressure, density, and flow are input via these process I/O combo modules. Each module will handle 4 inputs of a variety of signal types and provides one or two 4-20 mA analog outputs (except the SV Module which has six 4-20 mA outputs). Seven types of combo I/O modules are available: A, B, E, E/D, H, HV and SV. All modules accept analog and pulse frequency type inputs, except for the H and HV Modules which interface digitally with Honeywell Smart Transmitters, and the SV Module which interfaces serially with RS-485 compatible multivariable transmitters. The A and B Types use identical I/O boards. Likewise, the E and E/D Modules are also identical, except for the position of a configuration jumper which selects the type and address of each module. INFO - The flow computer allocates the physical I/O point numbers according to the module ID’s, not the position occupied on the backplane.

Each of the combo modules installed must have a different identity ¾i.e., you cannot have two or more modules of the same type and address. Valid ID’s are: A1 through A6, B1 through B6, E/D-1 through E/D-6, E1 through E6, H1 through H6, and SV1 through SV2. Only one HV Module can be installed. Modules are plugged into DIN type connectors on the passive backplane. Each backplane connector has 12 circuits which connect to the back panel terminal strips via ribbon cables. Combo I/O modules are plugged into the backplane starting at I/O Position #5 (Omni 6000) or I/O Position #3 (Omni 3000) and working towards Position #10 (Omni 6000) or Position #4 (Omni 3000). The preferred order is lowest number A Type to highest number H Type, them SV and HV Modules. The following chapter deals in more detail with process I/O combo modules and includes illustrations and jumper settings. (See Chapter 2 “Process I/O Combo Module Setup”.)

1-16

ALL.71+ w 05/99

Volume 1


1.7. Operating Power - The indicated power is maximum and includes the power used by transmitter loops, etc. It will vary depending on the number of modules installed, the number of current loops and any digital output loads connected.

‹

CAUTION!

‹


ALL.71+ w 05/99

Operating Power

Omni flow computers can be AC or DC powered. When AC powered, 120 VAC 50 Watts is applied to the AC plug. For powering transmitter loops when AC powered, approximately 500 mA at 24 VDC is available from the DC terminal block. The flow computer can be special ordered for operation on 220-250 VAC supplies. This requires a modified power supply unit and a different cord set. AC power to the unit is fused by a 0.5 Amp (5x20 mm) slow-blow fuse located in the AC power receptacle. To DC power the flow computer, apply 18 to 30 VDC, 50 Watts to the DC terminal block. DC power into or out of the back panel DC power terminals is fused by a 3 Amp, 2 AG fast-blow fuse located on the back panel next to the DC power terminals. All analog and digital circuits within the flow computer are powered from a 5volt switching regulator located on the power supply module. This is located in the rear most connector on the computer backplane. The DC power which supplies the switching regulator either comes directly from the DC terminals on the back panel of the flow computer (18-30 VDC) or by rectifying the output of the integral 120 VAC (240 VAC) to 20 VAC transformer. Regulated 5-volt power is monitored by a 3-4 second shutdown circuit located on the power supply module. When power is applied to the computer there will be a delay of 3 to 4 seconds before the unit powers up. A recommended maximum of 500 mA of transducer loop power is available with a fully loaded Omni system of 6 combo I/O modules, 2 digital I/O modules and 2 dual serial I/O modules. The Omni must be DC powered if this 500 mA limit is to be exceeded. The maximum system configuration of the Omni is 24 process inputs, 12 process outputs, 24 digital I/O points, and 4 serial I/O channels dissipates approximately 24 Watts. This causes an internal temperature of 15ºF (8.33°C) over the ambient. The unit should not be mounted in a cabinet or panel where the ambient inside the cabinet will exceed 110ºF (43.33°C).

1-17

Chapter 1

‹

CAUTION


‹

The Power Low and +5 v Adjust are factory adjustments that require the use of special equipment. DO NOT attempt to adjust.

AC Connector

Fig. 1-14. Power Supply Module Model # 68-6118

1-18

ALL.71+ w 05/99

Volume 1


1.8.

Firmware and Software

Omni flow computers are supplied with pre-programmed firmware and PC configuration software which permit a single unit to perform a great diversity of combined flow measurement tasks, such as: o Multiple Meter Run Totalizing, Batching, Proving, and Data Archiving o Flow and Sampler Control o Direct Interface to Gas Chromatographs and Smart/Multivariable Transmitters o Selectable Communications Protocols to Directly Interface to DCS, PLC and SCADA Host Systems The flow computer database numbers thousands of data points and provides the tightest communications coupling yet between SCADA and the metering system.

1.8.1.

Interrupt-Driven CPU

This is a very important aspect to firmware. It provides for a multi-tasking environment in which priority tasks can be undertaken concurrently with unrelated activity. This provides for high-speed digital signals to be output at the same time as measurement computations and serial communications to a printer or host computer, without degradation in speed or tasking. All custody transfer measurement programs are stored in EPROM or Flash Memory. This prevents damage due to electrical noise, or tampering with the integrity of calculation specifications. SRAM programming can also be accommodated.

1.8.2.

Cycle Time

All time-critical measurement functions are performed by the flow computer every 500 msec. This provides greater accuracy of measurement calculations and permits a faster response by pipeline operations in critical control functions, such as opening or closing valves.

1.8.3.

On-line Diagnostics and Calibration

Extensive diagnostic software is built into the system which allows the technician to locally or remotely debug a possible problem without interrupting on-line measurement. Calibration of analog signals is performed through the keypad and software. The system has only two potentiometers, both of which are on the power supply and are factory set and need no adjustment.

1.8.4.

PC Communications Interface

The wide use of PCs and video display units makes it possible to provide software for off-line/on-line access to measurement, configuration and calibration data. Collection of historical reports, including alarms, interval reports of any time sequence, liquid batch and prove reports, and full remote technical intervention capabilities are also provided.

ALL.71+ w 05/99

1-19

Chapter 1


1.8.5. INFO - Full details about the OmniComâ configuration program are documented in Appendix C.

On-line or off-line configuration of your Omni Flow Computer is possible using an IBM PC compatible running the OmniComâ program supplied with your flow computer. This powerful software allows you to copy, modify and save to disk entire configurations. The program also allows you to print customized reports by inputting report templates that are uploaded to the flow computer.

1.8.6. INFO - The current firmware has been fully tested and assured to be in conformance to Year 2000 requirements. For more information, please contact our technical support staff.

1-20

OmniComâ Configuration PC Software

Year 2000 Compliance

Omni flow computer firmware has been tested in conformance to Year 2000 requirements. It will accurately process time- and date-related data after December 31st, 1999. Software and hardware designed to be used before, during and after the calendar year 2000 will operate appropriately relating to date information. All calculating and logic of time-related data will produce the expected results for all valid date values within the application.

ALL.71+ w 05/99

Volume 1


1.9. ‹

CAUTION!

‹


Initializing Your Flow Computer

A processor reset signal is automatically generated when: 1) Power is applied. 2) The processor reset switch at the rear of the front panel is toggled. 3) The watchdog timer fails to be reset by firmware every 100 milliseconds. The flow computer will perform a diagnostic check of all program and randomaccess memory whenever any of the above events occur. The program is stored with a checksum in Non-volatile Read-only Memory. The program alarms if the calculated checksum differs from the stored checksum. The most obvious cause of such a problem would be a bent pin on a program memory chip. The validity of all data stored in RAM memory is checked next. This data includes totalizers, configuration data and historical data. Any problems here will cause the computer to initialize the RAM and display the following message: RAM Data Invalid Reconfigure System Using “OMNI” as Initial Password If due to the RAM area in the computer not agreeing with the checksum area, the computer will display the following message: RAM & Calibrate Data Invalid, Reconfigure & Re-calibrate Using “OMNI” as Password Assuming that the EPROM memory and RAM memory are valid, the flow computer then checks the software configuration against the installed I/O modules and displays a screen similar to the following:

INFO - For information on adjusting module configuration settings, see Volume 3.

Module S-Ware H-Ware A-1 Y Y B-1 Y N D-1 Y Y S-1 N Y Revision No. 023.70 EPROM Checksum 1B36 A ‘N’ in the hardware column indicates that a module has been removed since the software was configured. A ‘N’ in the software column indicates that a module has been added. In either case you should make the columns agree by adding or removing modules or re-configuring the software.

ALL.71+ w 05/99

1-21

Volume 1


2. Process Input/Output Combination Module Setup INFO - User selection of process I/O is available with “combo” cards that can be a mix of meter pulse, frequency densitometer, 4-20mA, 4wire 100 ohm RTD inputs, and fused 4-20mA outputs. Combo Module Input Features - The input characteristics of each combo module are as follows (see table on right): A Type: Each input can be 1-5v; 4-20mA. Inputs #1 and #2 also accept RTD. Inputs #3 and #4 also accept flow pulse signals. B Type: Inputs #1, #2 & #3 can be 1-5v; 4-20mA. Inputs #1 and #2 also accept RTD. Input #3 also accepts flow pulses and Input #4 is fixed as a frequency density input. E/D Type: Inputs #1 and #2 can be 1-5v; 4-20mA and RTD. Inputs #3 and #4 are frequency density. E Type: Inputs #1 and #2 can be 1-5v; 4-20mA and RTD. Inputs #3 and #4 accept flow pulses. H Type: All inputs are Honeywellä DE Protocol. HV Type: All inputs are Honeywellä Multivariable DE Protocol. SV Type: Each port (#1 and #2) is capable of RS-485 multi-drop to various multivariable transmitters.

2.1.

Introduction

All process measurement signals are input via the process I/O combination (or “combo”) modules plugged into the backplane of the computer. There currently are 7 types of combo modules available: A, B, E, E/D, H, HV, and SV Types. The 7 types of modules are actually manufactured using only 4 types of printed circuit modules. The first can be configured as either an A or B Module; the second is used for an E or E/D Module; the third printed circuit is used for an H or HV Type Module; and the fourth for an SV Module.

2.2.

Features of the I/O Combo Modules

Each combo module (except the SV Module) will handle 4 inputs of a variety of signal types and provides one or two 4-20 mA analog outputs. The SV Module has two ports and six 4-20 mA analog outputs. Only the E Combo Module has Level A pulse fidelity checking and double chronometry proving capabilities. The input/output capabilities and some of the features of the combo modules are expressed in the following table.

INPUT/OUTPUT CAPABILITIES AND FEATURES OF EACH I/O COMBO MODULE T YPE TYPE

INPUT #1

INPUT #2

INPUT #4

LEVEL A FIDELITY

DOUBLE CHRONOMETRY

PROVING A

1-5v; 4-20mA; RTD

B

1-5v; 4-20mA; RTD

E/D

1-5v; 4-20mA; RTD

E

1-5v; 4-20mA; RTD

Two 4-20mA

No

No

One 4-20mA

No

No

Frequency Density

Two 4-20mA

No

No

Flow Pulses

Two 4-20mA

Yes

Yes

1-5v; 4-20mA; Flow Pulses 1-5v; 4-20mA Flow Pulse

Frequency Density

H

Honeywell DE Protocol

Two 4-20mA

No

No

HV

Honeywell Multivariable DE Protocol

Two 4-20mA

No

No

Six 4-20mA

No

No

PORT #1 SV

ALL.71+ w 05/99

INPUT #3

ANALOG OUTPUTS

PORT #2

RS-485 Multi-drop to Various Multivariable Transmitters

2-1

Chapter 2

Process Input/Output Combination Module Setup

2.2.1.

Setting the Address of the Combo Modules

Jumpers are provided on each combo module which allow the user to select the address needed to access the module. Changing the software functions of the module is also done by moving the appropriate jumper; i.e., A or B Type, E or E/D Type.

2.2.2.

Hardware Analog Configuration Jumpers

Other jumpers are provided on each module which select the correct hardware analog configuration for the type of signal that each input channel will accept. This allows the same basic hardware module to accept signals such as 4-20 mA, 1-5 VDC, 100 ohm RTD probes and voltage or current pulses from a turbine, PD meter or digital densitometer.

2.2.3.

‹

IMPORTANT!

‹

Combo I/O modules are sorted alphabetically and by low- to-high address. Adding or removing cards may change the existing sort if the ‘Check I/O’ function is executed.

Process I/O Combo Module Addresses Versus Physical I/O Points

A flow computer will usually have several combo modules installed depending on the number of flowmeter runs to be measured. If for example, 2 A Type, 2 B Type, 1 E/D Type and 1 E Type Modules were installed, they would normally be numbered A1, A2, B1, B2, E/D1 and E1. Other address combinations are acceptable (e.g.: A2, A3, B1, B4, E/D2 & E2 ) as long as each has a unique identity. In the above example where 6 modules (A1, A2, B1, B2, E/D1 & E1) are installed, the physical I/O points are mapped as follows. (Note that E/D modules come before the E modules!) To standardize, Omni recommends that combo modules should always be installed starting with the lowest number A Type Module in I/O Slot #5 (Slot #3 in Omni 3000) as shown, with additional modules being installed in ascending order towards Slot #10 (Slot #4 in Omni 3000).

PROCESS I/O COMBO MODULE ADDRESSES VERSUS PHYSICAL I/O POINTS

2-2

M ODULE IDENTITY

INPUTS

OUTPUTS

BACKPLANE POSITION

PHYSICAL TERMINALS

A1

1-4

1&2

Slot 5

TB5 1-12

A2

5-8

3&4

Slot 6

TB6 1-12

B1

9-12

5

Slot 7

TB7 1-12

B2

13-16

6

Slot 8

TB8 1-12

E/D1

17-20

7&8

Slot 9

TB9 1-12

E1

21-24

9 & 10

Slot 10

TB10 1-12

ALL.71+ w 05/99

Volume 1


2.2.4.

Assigning Specific Signal Inputs

The Omni factory pre-assigns the physical I/O points of each flow computer based on information supplied at time of order. This configuration information is stored in battery backed-up static CMOS RAM. If you wish to change or add to these assignments, refer to the section ‘Program Setup’ in Volume 3, Chapter 2 “Flow Computer Configuration” and follow these basic rules: 1) Digital densitometer signals can only be assigned to the fourth channel of each B Type Combo Module, or the third and fourth channel of each E/D Module. 2) RTD signals can only be assigned to the first or second channel of each A, B, E/D or E combo module. Whenever possible, avoid using the second RTD excitation current source of an A Type Combo Module as this makes the second 4-20 mA output on that module inaccessable. 3) Pulse signals from flowmeters can be assigned only to the 3rd channel of each combo module and/or the 4th channel of each A Combo Module and E Combo Module (E/D Combo Modules excepted). 4) Pulse signals to be used for ‘Pulse Fidelity Checking’ must be connected to the 3rd and 4th channel of an E Combo Module with the third channel assigned as the flow input. 5) Use the 3rd and 4th input channels of an E Combo Module for double chronometry proving. INFO - The message ‘I/O’ Type Mismatch’ is displayed if you try to assign the same physical I/O point to more than one type of variable.

ALL.71+ w 05/99

1) Physical I/O points may be assigned to more than one variable (i.e., common temperature or pressure sensors) but variable types cannot be mixed (i.e., the same physical point cannot be assigned to temperature and pressure, for example)

2-3

Chapter 2


2.2.5.

Sample Omni Flow Computer Configuration Charts

The charts (below and facing page) are examples of the configuration chart supplied with your flow computer. It shows the type of combo modules installed, the assigned process variables, the I/O point numbers and the jumper settings for each input channel. To avoid confusion, we recommend that you plan any changes to the physical I/O setup on such a chart before making any changes.

Fig. 2-1.

2-4

Sample Configuration Chart (Blank) - Omni 3000

ALL.71+ w 05/99

Volume 1


CUSTOMER________________________ P.O.#____________ S.O.#_______ SOFTWARE________________________ COMPUTER S/N__________________ MODEL #_________________________ TAG#__________________________

Fig. 2-2. ALL.71+ w 05/99

Sample Configuration Chart (Blank) - Omni 6000

2-5

Chapter 2


2.3.

The A and B Combo I/O Modules

All I/O signals of the combo module are converted to the form of high frequency pulse trains (0 to 25 kHz). These pulse trains are passed through opto-couplers providing electrical isolation. All 4 process inputs can accept analog input voltages which are first buffered with a 1 megohm input buffer and then converted to pulse frequencies using precision voltage-to-frequency converters. With 2 averaged 500 millisecond samples, analog conversion resolution is 14 binary bits. Linearity is typically ±0.01% and the temperature coefficient is trimmed to better than ±15 PPM/°F. Current inputs such as 4-20 mA are converted to 1-5 VDC by jumpering-in a 250 ohm shunt resistor. The conversion gain of Input Channels 1 and 2 can also be increased by a factor of 10, allowing low level RTD signals (0.20 - 0.55 VDC) to be accepted. Input Channels 3 and 4 can also be jumpered to accept pulse signals (0-12 kHz). In this case, the input stage is configured as Schmitt Trigger, whose threshold is 3.5 VDC and hysteresis ±0.5 VDC. The voltage-to-frequency converter is bypassed in this mode. Input Channel 4 can also be jumpered for AC coupling and a 1-volt trigger threshold, making it suitable for interfacing to Solartron type densitometers. Analog Outputs #1 and #2 are obtained in the reverse fashion. A softwarecontrolled pulse train (100 Hz to 5.0 kHz) is passed through opto-couplers and converted to a current using precision frequency-to-current converters. Resolution of these outputs is approximately 12 binary bits. The second analog output is not available when the module is jumpered as a B Type.

A/B Module Type Select Jumper

AC / DC Coupling Channel # 4 Input

Channel #4 Pulse Input Threshold

Input Channel #4

Input Channel #3

Input Channel #2

Input Channel #1

Module Address Jumpers 2nd. RTD Excitation Source or 2nd Digital-Analog Output

Fig. 2-3.

2-6

Input Type Select Jumpers

The A and B Combo I/O Module - Configuration Jumpers

ALL.71+ w 05/99

Volume 1

System Architecture and Installation Two RTD excitation current sources (3.45 mA) are available on the combo module. The second RTD excitation source will not be available if the second 420 mA analog output is in use (see setting of JP12). This is a function of the number of circuits available from the back panel terminal to each combo module. On a B Type module the second analog output is not available, therefore this second RTD excitation source is always available.

2.3.1.

A and B Combo Module Non-Selectable or Selectable Address

The Combo Type A or B Module can either have a non-selectable address or a selectable Address. The non-selectable address type is featured in older versions of the Omni Flow Computer. The address is programmed into the Programmable Array Logic (PAL) integrated circuit and is factory set. The module address can only be changed by replacing the PAL chip. The selectable type address is featured in current versions of the Omni. Normally, it is preset at the factory, however it allows the user to change the address simply by selecting the correct type and address on the selection jumpers.

Non-Selectable Address

Selectable Address

TYPE B SELECT ONLY COMBO ADDRESS SELECT (A0 SHOWN)

Fig. 2-4.

ALL.71+ w 05/99

A and B Combo Module - Non-Selectable / Selectable Address

2-7

Chapter 2


2.3.2. INFO - The second analog output is not available in cases where JP12 is used to select the second RTD excitation current source. You may be able to avoid using the second RTD excitation source and save losing an analog output by using an unused excitation source on another combo module.

The A Type Combo I/O Module

The A Type Module is the most common configuration. It accepts 4 process inputs and provides two 4-20 mA analog outputs. Each module is connected to the back panel terminal blocks via 12 wires on the ribbon cables. The actual terminal block used depends upon which backplane connector (TB?) the module is plugged into. A Combo Module Back Panel Terminal Assignments TB? Terminal 1

Input Channel #1 (1-5v, 4-20mA, RTD)

TB? Terminal 2

Input Channel #1 (Isolated Signal Return)

TB? Terminal 3


TB? Terminal 4


TB? Terminal 5

Input Channel #3 (1-5v, 4-20mA, Flowmeter Pulses)

TB? Terminal 6


TB? Terminal 7

Input Channel #4 (1-5v, 4-20mA, Flowmeter Pulses)

TB? Terminal 8


TB? Terminal 9

RTD Excitation Current Source #1

TB? Terminal 10

Signal Return Terminals 9, 11 & 12 (Internally connected to DC power return)

TB? Terminal 11

Analog Output #1 (4-20mA)

TB? Terminal 12

Analog Output #2 (4-20mA) or RTD Excitation Current Source #2 (See JP12 Setting)

JP11

Select ‘P’ (Pulse Type Input - Channel 3 or 4)

Chan 4 Threshold JP11 In = 3.5 VDC Out = 1.2 VDC 4-20mA Jumper Out (Pulse Type Input) JP11

Select Module Type JPB Out = A Type

Address Select (Address #2 Shown) Module A0 A1 A2 #1 Out Out Out #2 In Out Out #3 Out In Out #4 In In Out #5 Out Out In #6 In Out In

Fig. 2-5.

2-8

JP12

RTD2

D/A2 JP12 In D/A2 Position JP13 In DC Coupled Position

A Type Combo Module - Flow Pulse Jumper Settings (Channel 3 or Channel 4)

ALL.71+ w 05/99

Volume 1


JP11

Select ‘A’ (Analog Type) Input JP11

4-20 mA Jumper In (Remove for 1-5VDC Input)

JP13 In DC Coupled Position for Preamp Turbine Meter Input (Channel 4)

Fig. 2-6.

ALL.71+ w 05/99

Configured for Configured for Configured for 4-20 mA Input 1-5 VDC Input RTD Input

A Type Combo Module - Analog Input Jumper Settings

2-9

Chapter 2


2.3.3. INFO - You will need either a B Type Combo Module or E/D Type Combo Module when using digital densitometers connected to the flow computer. With a B Type Combo Module, Analog Output #2 is never available because the periodic time function uses the internal timer counter that is normally used to generate the second analog output.

The B Type Combo I/O Module

The B Type Combo Module also handles 4 process inputs but Input Channel 4 is now used to measure the periodic time of a digital densitometer. The module always has Input Channel 4 jumpered as a frequency input. Signal coupling can be AC or DC with trigger threshold adjustable for 1.5 or 3.5 Vpp sensitivity. Each module is connected to the back panel terminal blocks via 12 wires on the ribbon cables. The actual terminal block used depends upon which backplane connector (TB?) the module is plugged into. B Combo Module Back Panel Terminal Assignments TB? Terminal 1


TB? Terminal 2


TB? Terminal 3


TB? Terminal 4


TB? Terminal 5

Input Channel #3 (1-5v, 4-20mA, DC Coupled Flowmeter Pulses)

TB? Terminal 6


TB? Terminal 7

Input Channel #4 (AC Coupled Densitometer Frequency)

TB? Terminal 8


TB? Terminal 9


TB? Terminal 10

Signal Return Terminals 9, 11 & 12 (Internally connected to DC power return)

TB? Terminal 11

Analog Output #1 (4-20mA)

TB? Terminal 12


JP11

Select ‘P’ (Pulse Type Input)

Channel 4 Threshold JP11 Out = 1.2 VDC (Solartron & Sarasota) JP11 In = 3.5 VDC (UGC)

JP11

Select Module Type JPB Out = A Type

Address Select (Address #2 Shown) Module A0 A1 A2 #1 Out Out Out #2 In Out Out #3 Out In Out #4 In In Out #5 Out Out In #6 In Out In

Fig. 2-7.

2-10

JP12

RTD2

D/A2 JP12 In RTD2 Position

Pulse (Frequency) Type Densitometer Requires AC Coupling - Channel 4

B Type Combo Module - Jumper Settings - Frequency Densitometer Setup

ALL.71+ w 05/99

Volume 1


2.4.

The E/D and E Combo Modules

The hardware of E/D and E Combo Modules are similar to that of the A and B Modules (discussed previously) except that these modules provide 2 analog input channels which can be configured by jumpers for 1-5 volt, 4-20 mA or 4wire RTDs, and 2 pulse input channels which can be used to input flowmeter pulses or densitometer frequency signals. Two 4-20 mA analog outputs are always available on these modules. The module hardware can also be configured by the application software to provide “Level A Pulse Fidelity Checking” on the two pulse input channels.

2.4.1.

The E/D Type Combo I/O Module

The E/D Type Combo Module is simply an E Combo Module with the JPD jumper in place. Input Channels 1 and 2 are analog input channels which can be configured by jumpers for 1-5 volt, 4-20 mA, or 4-wire RTDs. Input Channels 3 and 4 are always configured to measure periodic time and accept pulse signals from digital densitometers. Each module is connected to the back panel terminal blocks via 12 wires on the ribbon cables. The actual terminal numbers used depend upon which backplane connector (TB?) the module is plugged into. E/D Combo Module Back Panel Terminal Assignments TB? Terminal 1


TB? Terminal 2


TB? Terminal 3


TB? Terminal 4


TB? Terminal 5

Input Channel #3 (AC or DC Coupled Digital Densitometer Pulses) *

TB? Terminal 6

Input Channel #4 (AC or DC Coupled Digital Densitometer Pulses) * êêêêêêêêêêêêê

TB? Terminal 7

êêêêêêêêêêêêê

Not Used

TB? Terminal 8

RTD Excitation Current Source #2 *

TB? Terminal 9


TB? Terminal 10

Signal Return for signals marked (*) (Internally connected to DC power return)

TB? Terminal 11

Analog Output #1 (4-20mA) *

TB? Terminal 12


Input Threshold Select JP8 and JP1 In = +3.5 Volt DC / Out = +1.2 Volt DC

JP5

JP8 THRES

JP6 JP3

Select Module Type JPD In = E/D Module

RTD 4-20 INPUT 1

JP5 JP8 THRES

JP2

JP7 AC DC AC INPUT 3

Address Select (Address #2 Shown) Module #1 #2 #3 #4 #5 #6

A0 Out In Out In Out In

Fig. 2-8.

ALL.71+ w 05/99

A1 Out Out In In Out Out

JP5 A2 Out Out Out Out In In

JP2 JP7 AC DC AC INPUT 4 AC Coupling Select

AC DC AC INPUT 3

JP6

RTD 4-20 INPUT 2

JP1 THRES

AC DC AC INPUT 4

JP4

RTD 4-20 INPUT 1

JP6

RTD 4-20 INPUT 2

DC Coupling Select

4-20 mA Selected

E/D Type Combo Module - Jumper Settings

2-11

Chapter 2


2.4.2.

The E Type Combo I/O Module

The E Type Combo Module is simply an E/D Combo Module with the JPD jumper out. Double chronometry timers are provided in this module configuration, allowing either pulse train to be proved. Input Channels 1 and 2 are analog input channels which can be configured by jumpers for 1-5 volt, 4-20 mA, or 4-wire RTDs. Input Channels 3 and 4 are always configured to accept flowmeter pulses. Both RTD excitation current sources are also always available. Each module is connected to the back panel terminal blocks via 12 wires on the ribbon cables. The actual terminal numbers used depend upon which backplane connector (TB?) the module is plugged into.

E COMBO MODULE BACK PANEL T ERMINAL ASSIGNMENTS TB? Terminal 1


TB? Terminal 2


TB? Terminal 3


TB? Terminal 4


TB? Terminal 5

Input Channel #3 (AC or DC Coupled Flowmeter Pulses) *

TB? Terminal 6

Input Channel #4 (AC or DC Coupled Flowmeter Pulses) *

TB? Terminal 7

Double Chronometry Detector Switch In (Active Low) *

TB? Terminal 8


TB? Terminal 9


TB? Terminal 10

Signal Return for signals marked (*) return)

TB? Terminal 11


TB? Terminal 12


Input Threshold Select JP8 and JP1 In = +3.5 Volt DC / Out = +1.2 Volt DC

(Internally connected to DC power

JP5

JP8 THRES

JP6 JP3

Select Module Type JPD Out = E Module

RTD 4-20 INPUT 1

JP5 JP8 THRES

JP2

JP7 AC DC AC INPUT 3

Address Select (Address #2 Shown) Module #1 #2 #3 #4 #5 #6

A0 Out In Out In Out In

Fig. 2-9.

2-12

A1 Out Out In In Out Out

JP5 A2 Out Out Out Out In In

JP2 JP7 AC DC AC INPUT 4 AC Coupling Select

AC DC AC INPUT 3

JP6

RTD 4-20 INPUT 2

JP1 THRES

AC DC AC INPUT 4

JP4

RTD 4-20 INPUT 1

JP6

RTD 4-20 INPUT 2

DC Coupling Select

4-20 mA Selected

E Type Combo Module - Jumper Settings

ALL.71+ w 05/99

Volume 1


2.5.

The H Type Combo I/O Module

The H Type Combo Module is a special module which is used to communicate using the Honeywell ‘DE Protocol’ with 4 Honeywell Smart Transmitters. It operates on a point-to-point basis. Honeywell Model ST3000 temperature, pressure and differential pressure transmitters can be used. Transmitters operating in the ‘analog mode’ are automatically given a ‘wake-up pulse’ and switched into the ‘DE’ Mode, as soon as they are connected and assigned a meter run function. Two analog outputs are always available on this module. Each module is connected to the back panel terminal blocks via 12 wires on the ribbon cables. The actual terminal numbers used depend upon which backplane connector (TB?) the module is plugged into.

H Combo Module Back Panel Terminal Assignments TB? Terminal 1

Input Channel #1 (Transmitter Positive Terminal)

TB? Terminal 2

Input Channel #1 (Transmitter Negative Terminal)

TB? Terminal 3


TB? Terminal 4


TB? Terminal 5


TB? Terminal 6


TB? Terminal 7


TB? Terminal 8


TB? Terminal 9


Not Used

TB? Terminal 10


TB? Terminal 11


TB? Terminal 12




Module Address Jumpers

Green LED Indicates Any Activity Red LED Indicates OMNI is Transmitting

Transmitter Loop Status LEDs

Fig. 2-10. H Type Combo Module - Jumper Settings

ALL.71+ w 05/99

2-13

Chapter 2

Process Input/Output Combination Module Setup Four sets of LED indicators show the status of each transmitter loop. The red LED flashes when the flow computer is transmitting data to the transmitter, such as a change of range, etc. The green LED shows that data is being received by a channel. Note that each communication channel uses 2 wires and operates in the half duplex/simplex mode which means that the green LED shows the flow computer’s transmissions also. Each transducer is operated in the 6-byte broadcast mode. In this mode, the process variable is updated approximately every 300 msec. The database of the transducer is compared against the flow computer’s database every 1 or 2 minutes, depending on the type of transducer. Any changes to the transducer database which will affect the integrity of the measured variable must be made via the flow computer. These entries are: o o o o

Transducer Zero (Lower Range Value) Transducer Full Scale (Upper Range Value) Transducer Damping Code (Filter Time Constant) Transducer Tag Name

The flow computer will not allow any other devices to alter these variables. Should they be altered, by the Honeywell Smart Field Communicator (SFC) for example, they will be restored to their original value as shown in the flow computer (transducer tag name excepted).

2-14

ALL.71+ w 05/99

Volume 1


2.6.

The HV Type Combo I/O Module

The HV Type Combo Module is simply an H Module with the JP1, JP2 and JP3 address jumpers in the right-most setting (Address 15). The HV Combo Module is used to communicate with Honeywellä SMV3000 multivariable transmitters via the DE Protocol. Operation of the LEDs is similar to the normal H Module. Since only one multivariable transmitter is needed per meter run and since there are a maximum of four meter runs, there will never be a need for more then one HV Combo I/O Module. Two analog outputs are always available on this module. Each module is connected to the back panel terminal blocks via 12 wires on the ribbon cables. The actual terminal numbers used depend upon which backplane connector (TB?) the module is plugged into. HV Combo Module Back Panel Terminal Assignments TB? Terminal 1


TB? Terminal 2


TB? Terminal 3


TB? Terminal 4


TB? Terminal 5


TB? Terminal 6


TB? Terminal 7


TB? Terminal 8


TB? Terminal 9


Not Used

TB? Terminal 10


TB? Terminal 11


TB? Terminal 12




Module Address Jumpers

Green LED Indicates Any Activity Red LED Indicates OMNI is Transmitting

Transmitter Loop Status LEDs

Fig. 2-11. HV Type Combo Module - Jumper Settings

ALL.71+ w 05/99

2-15

Chapter 2


2.7.

The SV Type Combo I/O Module

The SV I/O Combo Module has two RS-485 serial ports which are used to communicate with devices such as Rosemountä 3095 multivariable transmitters via the Modbus Protocol. Dual LEDs on each port provide status of the communications. The module also has six 4-20 mA outputs. SV Modules and Other Combo Module Types The flow computer can handle only two SV Modules and three other A, B, E/D, E or H I/O Combo Modules. An HV module can also be installed in lieu of one of these I/O combo modules.

SV Combo Module Back Panel Terminal Assignments TB? Terminal 1

Port #1 B (RS-485)

TB? Terminal 2

Port #1 A (RS-485)

TB? Terminal 3

Port #2 B (RS-485)

TB? Terminal 4

Port #2 A (RS-485)

TB? Terminal 5

Signal Return for D/A Outputs signals marked (*)

TB? Terminal 6

Signal Return for D/A Outputs signals marked (*)

TB? Terminal 7


TB? Terminal 8


TB? Terminal 9


TB? Terminal 10


TB? Terminal 11


TB? Terminal 12


Jumper In = 1st MV Module Jumper Out = 2 nd MV Module

MV Address Selection Jumpers

IRQ 2 Always Selected

LED Indicators

PORT 1 (3)

PORT 2 (4)

RTS Always Selected

Transmitting (TX)/Ready-toSend (RTS) LEDs Red Receiving LEDs Green

Both Jumpers In = Port Terminated Both Jumpers Out = Port Unterminated

MV RS-485 Termination Jumpers

Fig. 2-12. Omni Multivariable Interface (SV Type Combo) Module Model 68-6203 - Jumper Settings

2-16

ALL.71+ w 05/99

Volume 1


3. Mounting and Power Options 3.1.

Mechanical Installation

Omni offers a variety of enclosure options which can all be customized based on customer specified requirements: q Panel Mounting q NEMA 4/4X q NEMA 7

3.1.1. Panel Mounting - Panels less than 1/8 inch thick can be used but will require that the rear of the computer be supported.

‹

CAUTION!

Panel Mounting

A panel with the correct size cut out as dimensioned below is required. Panels should be a minimum of 1/8 inch thick. Use the two keyed nuts and clamping bars provided to mount the flow computer to the panel.

‹

These units have an integral latching mechanism which first must be disengaged by lifting the bezel upwards before withdrawing the unit from the case.

‹

IMPORTANT!

‹

The maximum length of the ribbon cable that connects the keypad to the CPU module is 18 inches. The operation of the Central Processor Module (CPU) will be significantly affected if this length is exceeded.

Fig. 3-1.

ALL.71+ w 05/99

Panel Mounting - Omni 6000 (upper), Omni 3000 (lower)

3-1

Chapter 3

Mounting and Power Options

3.1.2.

Nema 4 / 4X Configurations

Both the NEMA 4 and NEMA 4X are weather-proof enclosures. The NEMA 4 is a standard steel enclosure, whereas the NEMA 4X is a stainless steel enclosure. Both Omni 6000 and Omni 3000 flow computers can be mounted inside the NEMAs on a sturdy swing frame. The NEMAs also include a 5’ x 3” viewing window with a ¼” lexan plate to allow easy viewing. Custom enclosures are available. NEMA 4 / 4X FOR OMNI 6000 / 3000 Dimensions

Weight

24 in x 24 in x 12 in

80 lbs

(610 mm x 610 mm x 305 mm)

(36 kg)

3.1.3.

Compliance q q q q

NEMA 4, -12 & -13 UL 50, Type 4 CSA Enclosure 4 IEC 529, IP66

Nema 7 Specification

The NEMA 7 is an explosion-proof enclosure which allows switch or pushbutton options for manipulating the contained flow computer. The viewing window is sustained by a 3” circular glass ½” thick. Both the Omni 6000 and Omni 3000 flow computers can be mounted in the NEMA 7 with minimal specification variances. Custom enclosures are available. NEMA 7 Dimensions

12 in x 18 in x 9 in

FOR OMNI 6000

Weight

Compliance

120 lbs (54 kg)

q NEC ¨ Division 1 & 2 ¨ Class I; Groups B, C & D ¨ Class II; Groups E, F & G ¨ Class III q IEC

(305 mm x 457 mm x 203 mm)

¨ Zone 0 & 1 ¨ Groups IIC, IIB & IIA

NEMA 7

FOR OMNI 3000

Dimensions

Weight

Compliance

12 in x 12 in x 8 in (305 mm x 305 mm x 203 mm)

110 lbs (50 kg)

q NEC ¨ Division 1 & 2 ¨ Class I; Groups B, C & D ¨ Class II; Groups E, F & G ¨ Class III q IEC ¨ Zone 0 & 1 ¨ Groups IIC, IIB & IIA

3-2

ALL.71+ w 05/99

Volume 1


3.2. INFO - A recommended maximum of 500mA of transducer loop power is available with a fully loaded system of 6 combo I/O modules, 2 digital I/O modules and 2 dual serial I/O modules. The computer must be DC powered if this 500 mA limit is to be exceeded.

Input Power

The Omni Flow Computer can be AC or DC powered.

3.2.1.

AC Power

When AC powered, 120 VAC, 50 Watts is applied to the AC terminal block. Approximately 500 mA at 24 VDC is always available from the DC terminal block to drive transducer loops, pre-amplifiers, and digital I/O loads when the unit is powered by AC. The flow computer can be special ordered for operation on 220-250 VAC supplies. This requires a modified power supply unit and a different cord set.

‹

CAUTION!

‹


3.2.2.

DC Power

When DC powered, 18 to 30 volts at 24 Watts is applied to the DC terminal block (this wattage figure does not include power sourced from the digital output terminals).

3.2.3.

Safety Considerations

To ensure continued protection against fire, the AC fuse must always be replaced with a 0.5 amp (5x20 mm) slow blow fuse. The DC fuse must be replaced by a 3 amp, 2 AG fast blow. Power should be connected via a suitable power disconnect switch certified as being safe for the area (for grounding requirements, see sidebar note on facing page).

ENVIRONMENTAL - The maximum system configuration of 24 process inputs, 12 process outputs, 24 digital I/O points and 4 serial I/O channels dissipates approximately 24 Watts. This causes an internal temperature rise of 15ºF over the ambient. The unit should not be mounted in a cabinet or panel where the ambient inside the cabinet will exceed 110ºF.

ALL.71+ w 05/99

3-3

Chapter 3


3.3. 3.3.1.

Power Terminals CE Equipment Power Terminals

In this current version of the Omni 3000 and Omni 6000 back panel the AC receptacle is a power line filter with a separate AC fuse holder. The AC power is connected via a separate 4-wire conductor cable which plugs into the power supply. The DC terminal is on TB 11 (for Omni 6000) and on TB5 (for Omni 3000). The power supply used with this version is a Model 68-6118; no fuses.

Back Panel Fuses - All DC fuses are 3 amp, fast-blow Model 225.003, manufactured by Littlefuse. All AC fuses are ½ amp, slow-blow Model 229.500, manufactured by Littlefuse

Earth Ground Requirements -To minimize the effects of electrical transients, the outer case of the flow computer should be connected to a high quality earth ground using the grounding stud located on the back of the unit (see Fig. 3-2). Connect the shields of all wiring to the same grounding stud. To eliminate earth loop currents, shields should be left unconnected and taped back at the other end.

Fig. 3-2.

3-4

Input Power Terminals - Omni 3000 (upper), Omni 6000 (lower)

ALL.71+ w 05/99

Volume 1


3.3.2.

Extended Back Panel Power Terminals

Several mounting options are now available with the Omni 6000 flow computer by requesting the Extended Back Panel Termination option. This panel incorporates all the terminal blocks of Versions 2 and 3, TB1 through TB10 with terminals marked 1 through 12. Screw type terminals are provided for AC and DC power. In addition to TB1 through TB10, extra DC (fused), return and shield terminals are provided for TB1 through TB8. Extended 64-conductor ribbon cables and the AC cables are provided with a standard length of 5 feet.

¼ Amp

Extended Back Panel Fuses - All DC fuses are ¼ amp fast-blow manufactured by Littlefuse, Model 225.250. The main DC fuse is 3 amp. The AC fuse is ½ amp slowblow manufactured by Littlefuse, Model 239.500. The fuse for the back panel’s AC receptacle is a 5x20mm, ½ amp slow-blow.

½ amp

3 Amp

Fig. 3-3.

ALL.71+ w 05/99

Input Power Terminals - Extended Back Panel (Omni 6000 only)

3-5

Chapter 3

3-6


Fig. 3-4.

Example of Typical Back Panel Assignments (Omni 6000)

Fig. 3-5.

Example of Typical Back Panel Assignments (Omni 3000) ALL.71+ w 05/99

Volume 1


3.4.

Power Supply Module Switching Regulator

All analog and digital circuits within the flow computer are powered from a 5volt switching regulator located on the power supply module. This is located in the rear most connector on the computer backplane. The DC power which supplies the switching regulator either comes directly from the DC terminals on the back panel of the flow computer (18-30 VDC) or by rectifying the output of the integral 120 VAC (240 VAC) to 20 VAC transformer. DC power into or out of the back panel DC power terminals is fused by a 3 Amp, 2 AG fuse located on the back panel next to the DC power terminals. Regulated 5-volt power is monitored by a 3 to 4 second shutdown circuit located on the power supply module. When power is applied to the computer there will be a delay of 3 to 4 seconds before the unit powers up.

‹

CAUTION

‹

The Power Low and +5 v Adjust on the Power Supply Module are factory adjustments that require the use of special equipment. DO NOT attempt to adjust

Fig. 3-6.

ALL.71+ w 05/99

Power Supply Module Model 68-6118

3-7

Volume 1


4. Connecting to Flowmeters 4.1.

Turbine Flowmeter (A or B Combo Module)

Input Channels 3 and 4 can be independently jumpered to accept pulse signals. Channel 3 on the A and B Combo Modules and Channel 4 on the A Combo Module can be used to input turbine or positive displacement flowmeters. The input threshold is 3.5 volts; hysteresis ± 1/2 volt.

Fig. 4-1.

ALL.71+ w 05/99

Connecting to a Turbine Pre-amp (A or B Combo Modules)

4-1

Chapter 4

Connecting to Flowmeters

4.2.

Wiring Flowmeter Signals to E Type Combo Modules

Input Channels 3 and 4 of each E Type Combo Module are used to input signals from turbine or PD flowmeters. Both channels share a common signal return at the Omni terminals. Input threshold can be jumpered for +1 or +3.5 volt. Input coupling can be AC or DC (see Chapter 2). Hysteresis is approximately 0.5 volt.

Fig. 4-2.

4-2

Wiring to Turbine Pre-Amps (E Type Combo Modules Only)

ALL.71+ w 05/99

Volume 1


4.3.

Faure Hermanä Turbine Meters (E Combo Module)

Faure Hermanä Turbine Meters are used in liquid applications only. For these flowmeters, high threshold jumpers JP1 and JP8 on the E Type Combo Module must be installed.

ALL.71+ w 05/99

Fig. 4-3.

Wiring of Faure Herman Pre-amp Using Omni 24 VDC

Fig. 4-4.

Wiring of Faure Hermanä Pre-amp Using External 24 VDC

4-3

Chapter 4

Connecting to Flowmeters

4.4.

Pulse Fidelity and Integrity Checking with E Type Combo Modules

A flowmeter with dual channel out-of-phase outputs can be connected as shown. The flow computer can be configured to continuously compare the signals for frequency and sequence on a pulse-to-pulse basis, and alarm and log any differences. (See Volume 5, Technical Bulletin TB-970901 for more information on Pulse Fidelity Checking.)

Fig. 4-5.

4-4

Connecting Dual Coil Turbines for Pulse Fidelity Checking

ALL.71+ w 05/99

Volume 1


5.

Connecting to Transducers and Transmitters 5.1.

Wiring the Input Transducers

Because of the high density of connections on the back panel terminal, it is recommended that wiring to the terminals be made with 18-22 gauge wire wherever possible. Transducers should be wired using twisted pairs of 18 gauge shielded wire. The shields should be connected together and grounded at the flow computer end. To prevent ground loops, shields should be taped back and insulated at the transducer end. Each of the 4-20 mA process input channels are individually optically isolated. The transducer may be connected in series with either the power or return line of the transducer current loop. The figure shown below shows a transducer wired in the power leg of the loop.

Fig. 5-1.

ALL.71+ w 05/99

Wiring the 4-20 mA Inputs (Input Channels 1 & 2 shown)

5-1

Chapter 5

Connecting to Transducers and Transmitters

5.2.

Wiring of a Dry ‘C’ Type Contact

Certain types of flowmeter photo-pulsers produce a low frequency contact pulse output (typical 1 pulse per barrel). To accommodate these low frequencies, they can be wired to any pulse input on A or E Type Combo Modules, as shown below.

Fig. 5-2.

5-2

Wiring for Dry C Type Contact

ALL.71+ w 05/99

Volume 1


5.3. INFO - Each A or B Type Combo Module always has 1 RTD excitation current source available at Terminal 9. A second source is always available on B Types at Terminal 12.

Wiring RTD Probes

Channels 1 and 2 of each combo I/O module can be jumpered to accept a signal from a 100 ohm RTD probe. The flow computer can be configured for the DIN 43-760 curve (a= 0.00385) or the American curve (a=0.00392). The probe is wired in a 4-wire configuration as shown below.

TIP - The excitation current source for an RTD need not come from the same combo module from which the signal is input. You will need to recalibrate the input channel if you choose to use an excitation source from another combo module.

Fig. 5-3.

ALL.71+ w 05/99

Wiring a 4-Wire RTD Temperature Probe

5-3

Chapter 5


5.4. 5.4.1. INFO - Because the density pulse signal can be a small AC signal with a large DC offset, you must select AC coupling and low trigger threshold for the combo module channel used; i.e.: on the B Type Combo Modules, JP13 in the AC position and JP11 out; on E/D Combo Modules, JP2 and JP7 in the AC positions and JP1 and JP8 out. Input impedance will be 10kohms; 1.5Vpp is required from the densitometer to reliably trigger the input.

Wiring Densitometers Wiring Densitometer Signals to an E/D Type Combo Module

Two independent densitometers with RTD probes can be wired directly to an E/D type combo module. For example, Solartronä and UGCä densitometers can be wired to the same E/D Type Module.

5.4.2.

Solartronä Densitometers

Connecting to a Solartron Digital Densitometer actually involves two devices: the densitometer current pulse signal and the densitometer 4-wire RTD probe attached to the vibrating tube. The pulse signal is connected to Channel 4 of a B Type Combo Module. The RTD is connected to Channel 1 or Channel 2. The device can be connected with or without safety barriers, depending on the needs of the application.

INFO - When configuring the flow computer, select the DIN curve for this RTD temperature point.

Fig. 5-4.

5-4

Wiring a Solartronä Densitometer with Safety Barriers to a ‘B’ Type I/O Combo Module

ALL.71+ w 05/99

Volume 1

‹

NOTICE!


‹

Diagrams shown are based on published manufacturers’, data. Omni accepts no responsibility for wiring or installation of equipment in a hazardous area. Equipment must always be installed in compliance with local and national safety standards.

Fig. 5-5.

ALL.71+ w 05/99

Wiring a Solartronä Densitometer without Safety Barriers to a ‘B’ Type I/O Combo Module

5-5

Chapter 5


5.4.3. INFO - Because the density pulse signal can be a small AC signal with a large DC offset, you must select AC coupling and low trigger threshold for the combo module channel used; i.e.: on the B Type Combo Modules, JP13 in the AC position and JP11 out; on E/D Combo Modules, JP2 and JP7 in the AC positions and JP1 and JP8 out. Input impedance will be 10kohms; 1.5Vpp is required from the densitometer to reliably trigger the input.

Sarasotaä Densitometers

The Sarasotaä Densitometer provides a voltage pulse signal representing density and also a 4-wire 100 ohm RTD probe monitoring the temperature of the device. The pulse signal is connected to Channel 4 of a B Type Combo Module. The RTD is connected to Channel 1 or Channel 2 of any module. The device can be connected with or without safety barriers, depending on the needs of the application.

INFO - When configuring the flow computer, select the DIN curve for this RTD temperature point.

Fig. 5-6.

5-6

Wiring a Sarasotaä Densitometer with Safety Barriers to a ‘B’ Type I/O Combo Module

ALL.71+ w 05/99

Volume 1

‹

NOTICE!


‹


Fig. 5-7.

ALL.71+ w 05/99

Wiring a Sarasotaä Densitometer without Safety Barriers to a ‘B’ Type I/O Combo Module

5-7

Chapter 5


5.4.4. INFO - Because the density pulse signal is a large DC pulse signal with little or no DC offset, you must select DC coupling with normal trigger threshold for the combo module channel used; i.e.: on the B Type Combo Modules, JP13 in the DC position and JP11 in; on E/D Combo Modules, JP2 and JP7 in the DC positions and JP1 and JP8 in. Input impedance will be 1Mohms; <3.0Vfor low level and >4V.0 for high level is required from the densitometer to reliably trigger the input.

UGCä Densitometers

The UGC Densitometer output provides an open collector transistor that requires an external pull-up resistor to 24 volts DC. The densitometer provides a 24 volt DC pulse output in the range of 1 to 2 kHz. The pulse signal is connected to Channel 4 of a B Type Combo Module and can be connected with or without safety barriers, depending on the application requirements.

Fig. 5-8.

5-8

Wiring a UGCä Densitometer with Safety Barriers to a ‘B’ Type I/O Combo Module

ALL.71+ w 05/99

Volume 1

‹

NOTICE!


‹


Fig. 5-9.

ALL.71+ w 05/99

Wiring a UGCä Densitometer without Safety Barriers to a ‘B’ Type I/O Combo Module

5-9

Chapter 5


5.5.

Wiring of Honeywellä ST3000 Transmitters

Up to four Honeywell Smart Transmitters can be wired to each H Type Combo I/O Module. Loop power is provided by the combo module. No external power is required.

Fig. 5-10. Wiring of a Honeywellä Smart Transmitter

5-10

ALL.71+ w 05/99

Volume 1


5.6. 5.6.1.

Wiring Micro Motionä Transmitters Connecting Micro Motionä RFT9739 Transmitter to A Type or E Type Process I/O Combination Modules

The frequency/pulse output that represents the volume flow from the RFT9739 Transmitter can be wired directly into either Frequency Channel 3 or 4 on A Type or E Type Combo Modules. (See Technical Bulletin TB-980401.)

Fig. 5-11. Wiring of a Micro Motionä RFT9739 Field-Mount (Explosion-Proof) Transmitter

ALL.71+ w 05/99

5-11

Chapter 5


5.6.2.

Connecting Micro Motionä RFT 9739 via RS-485 Serial Communications

Serial communication via RS-485 can be accomplished using the Peer-to-Peer Mode via Omni Serial Port #2 of the RS-232-C/485 Serial Module # 68-6205, with selection jumpers in the RS-485 position. (See Technical Bulletin TB980401.)

OMNI BACK PANEL TERMINALS SERIAL PORT #2 (PEER-TO-PEER) RS-485 MODE SELECTED 7 (B) 8 9 10 11 (A)

Fig. 5-12. Wiring of a Micro Motionä RFT9739 Field-Mount (Explosion-Proof) Transmitter Via Two-wire RS-485 Communications (Serial I/O Module #686205)

5-12

ALL.71+ w 05/99

Volume 1


5.6.3.

Connecting Micro Motionä RFT9739 via Serial RS-232-C to 485 Converter

Serial communication via RS-485 can also be accomplished utilizing the Peerto-Peer Mode via RS-232-C. (See Technical Bulletin TB-980401.)

Fig. 5-13. Wiring of a Micro Motionä RFT9739 Field-Mount (Explosion-Proof) Transmitter Via Serial RS-485 Converter

ALL.71+ w 05/99

5-13

Volume 1


6. Connecting Analog Outputs and Miscellaneous I/O Including Provers 6.1.

Analog Outputs

Analog outputs are available for remote terminal units, flow controllers, and recording devices. The analog outputs source 4-20 mA into a load wired to the DC power return. Maximum load resistance is 1000 ohms at 25 VDC. Digital-toAnalog conversion is accomplished with a 12-bit binary resolution. Two outputs are available on each A Type Combo Module. One output is available on each B Type Combo Module. To calibrate, each of the outputs is set to 4.00 and 20.00 mA and the software zero and span adjusted while in the Diagnostic Mode (described later). Any value between 2.5 and 23.0 mA may be output. Each output is assigned via the keypad or serial link to one of the many variables available (see Volume 3).

Fig. 6-1.

ALL.71+ w 05/99

Wiring Devices to the Flow Computer’s Analog Outputs

6-1

Chapter 6

Connecting Analog Outputs and Miscellaneous I/O Including Provers

6.2. 6.2.1.

Digital Inputs/Outputs Wiring a Digital Point as an Input or an Output

Digital I/O modules handle 12 digital points. Each point can be independently configured as either an input or output via the keypad or via a serial port. The power and returns for all digital I/O signals are common with the DC power terminals. Digital output loads are connected between the I/O terminal and DC power return. An approximate total load of 500 mA per module (per 12 points) is allowed although an individual point can handle 200 mA. Voltages applied to I/O points used as inputs must not exceed the DC supply voltage at the DC terminal, or the protective fuse for that point on the digital I/O module may blow.

Fig. 6-2.

6-2

Wiring of a Digital I/O Point as an Input

ALL.71+ w 05/99

Volume 1


Fig. 6-3.

ALL.71+ w 05/99

Wiring of a Digital I/O Point as an Output

6-3

Chapter 6


6.2.2.

Connecting Various Digital I/O Devices

On the Omni 6000, Digital I/O Module #1, handling points 1 through 12, is plugged into the backplane connector marked ‘I/O Module #1’. This in turn is connected to Terminal Strip TB1-1 through 12. Digital I/O Module #2, handling points 13 through 24, is plugged into the backplane connector marked ‘I/O Module #2’ which is connected to Terminal Strip TB2-1 through 12. The Omni 3000 has only one digital I/O module which is connected to Terminal TB1-1 through 12 on the back panel. The diagram below shows the typical wiring required to interface to other devices, such as: switches, relays, provers, programmable logic controllers, among other devices.

Fig. 6-4.

6-4

Connecting Digital I/O Devices to the Flow Computer

ALL.71+ w 05/99

Volume 1


6.3. 6.3.1. INFO - The prover detector switch signal activates an interrupt request into the computer. Jumpers JP1 and JP2 on the digital I/O module (Fig. 1-5) control which edge of the signal will cause the interrupt. Pulse counting should start when the sphere first activates the detector switch. Install JP1 in cases where the detector switch’s normally opened contacts are used (Fig. 1-9). Install JP2 in cases where the detector switch’s normally closed contacts are used.

Note: When using double chronometry proving, the detector switch input is on Terminal 7 of an E Type Combo I/O Module.

Provers Connecting Pipe Prover Detector Switches

Pipe prover detector switches are the only I/O signal that must be connected to a specific I/O point. They must be wired as shown in Fig. 6-4 to Digital I/O Point #1, and the point assigned to Boolean 1700 in the software configuration (see Volume 3). This is because Digital I/O Point #1 is internally jumpered to cause a high priority interrupt of the computer used to start and stop prover counting. Digital I/O Point #1 can still be used as a normal I/O point if pipe proving is not needed.

6.3.2.

Interfacing to a Brooksä Compact Prover

The Omni Flow Computer interfaces to the basic Brooksä Compact Prover Skid Electronics (the Brooks Control Box is not used). The control interface involves one digital output to control the piston launch, a digital input point to monitor the position of the piston, and a detector switch signal shared between each meter run to be proved. Compact provers use the ‘Pulse Interpolation Method’ of measuring the flowmeter counts between the detector switches. The interpolation method requires that the detector switches activate high speed hardware timers on the Omni’s combo I/O module. The detector switch signals called ‘first and final pickoff’ by Brooks are connected to the ‘Detector Switch’ input of each E Type Combo Module installed in the flow computer. The following diagram shows the complete installation, including 4-20 mA signals representing the temperature and pressure of the prover tube as well as the nitrogen plenum chamber. The 12-volt DC power supply is user supplied.

Fig. 6-5.

ALL.71+ w 05/99

Wiring to a Brooksä Compact Prover

6-5

Chapter 6


6.3.3.

Controlling the Plenum Pressure of a Brooksä Compact Prover

The plenum chamber pressure is used as a spring to close the poppet valve of the piston and cause the piston to be moved forward by the flowing liquid. The pressure required to close the poppet valve varies with pipeline pressure. Too high a plenum pressure causes the piston to be pushed downstream by this excess pressure and can lead to inaccurate provings. The Omni Flow Computer can monitor the plenum pressure and line pressure, and automatically charge or vent nitrogen from the plenum chamber. Before commencing a proving run, the Omni Flow Computer plenum pressure versus the required pressure and activates either or ‘vent’ solenoid valve. The pressures will be matched within entered deadband percent. The Omni activates the solenoids via relays (not shown).

checks the the ‘charge’ some user low voltage

An additional enhancement shown is a pressure switch signaling low nitrogen bottle pressure. In this case, the prove attempt would be aborted if it became impossible to achieve the correct plenum pressure.

Fig. 6-6.

6-6

Controlling the Plenum Pressure of a Brooksä Compact Prover

ALL.71+ w 05/99

Volume 1


7. Connecting to Serial Devices 7.1. INFO - Up to 12 flow computers and/or other compatible serial devices can be multi-dropped using Omni’s proprietary RS-232-C serial port. Thirty-two devices may be connected when using the RS-485 mode. Typically, one serial I/O module is used on the Omni 3000, providing two ports. A maximum of two serial modules can be installed in the Omni 6000, providing four ports.

RS-485 Communications with an RS-232-C Serial I/O Module #68-6005 - When connecting to RS-485 serial devices using Serial I/O Module #68-6005, a RS-232to-485 Converter device must be used.

Serial Port Connection Options

The total number of serial communication ports depends on the number of dual port serial I/O modules installed. The Omni 6000 accepts 2 serial I/O modules; the Omni 3000 accepts 1. Two optional serial communication I/O modules are available with your flow computer (see Chapter 1): the RS-232-C (compatible) Model #68-6005, and the RS-232-C/485 Model #68-6205. The older Model #686005 is only capable of RS-232 compatible serial communications. The newer Model #68-6205 is capable of either RS-232 or RS-485 communications via a selection jumper. When jumpered for RS-232, the characteristics and functionality of this module is identical to that of the older RS-232-C module, providing 2 optically isolated RS-232-C serial ports which can operate from 0.3 to 38.4 kbps. These ports are used for printers, personal computers, and SCADA devices. Although the output voltage levels are compatible with the RS-232 standard, the output is actually tristated when not sending data. This allows the transmit output from multiple flow computers to be bussed. A terminating resistor is provided at the back panel connections to pull down the transmitter signal to a mark (-9V). Hence, a short jumper is required in many cases from TX (Out) to Term. RS-485 communications allows interconnecting multiple flow computers, programmable logic controllers, multivariable transmitters, and other serial devices in either four-wire multi-drop mode or peer-to-peer two-wire multi-drop mode.

Multivariable Transmitting Devices - In addition to the Serial I/O Module # 68-6205, the flow computer must also have an SV Module to communicate with RS-485 compatible multivariable transmitters. This serial module must be jumpered to IRQ 3 when used in combination with an SV Module. Without an SV Module, the jumper must be placed at IRQ 2. The SV Module can only be used with this serial module (68-6205) and is not compatible with the Serial I/O Module # 686005. For more information, see Technical Bulletin # TB980303.

ALL.71+ w 05/99

7-1

Chapter 7

Connecting to Serial Devices

7.2. 7.2.1. INFO - The speed that data can be accepted by the printer depends on the size of the input buffer (if any) and the print mode (draft or near letter quality). Typical printers provide about 120 printed characters/second.

Connecting to Printers Connecting to a Dedicated Printer (Port 1)

The following diagram shows the Omni Flow Computer connected to a dedicated printer. The hardware handshake wire connected to Pin 20 of the DB25 connector is optional, as the computer can be made to insert null characters after each carriage return to match the computer data transmission rate to the printer speed.

TIP - Most printers default to the draft mode. Leave it there for maximum performance. Because of impact printer limitations, no speed improvement is obtained by selecting baud rates over 2.4kbps.

Fig. 7-1.

7-2

Connecting a Printer to Serial Port #1 of the Flow Computer

ALL.71+ w 05/99

Volume 1


7.2.2.

Connecting to a Shared Printer (Port 1)

Up to 12 Omni flow computers can share a printer. They are connected as shown. One flow computer is assigned as the master and manages all traffic to the printer. Each computer monitors the data transmitted to the printer by having its TX terminal jumpered to its RX terminal. Resident firmware ensures that only one computer will attempt to access the printer at any one time.

INFO - Note that only 1 terminating pull-down resistor is jumpered in place.

Fig. 7-2.

7.2.3. Note: Refer to Volume 3, Chapter 2 for Printer Settings.

Connecting Several Flow Computers to a Shared Printer

Print Sharing Problems

Most problems associated with printer sharing show up as garbled reports or locked up printers. This is usually caused by one or more computers sending data to the printer at the same time. Check your wiring to the figure above and consult the following checklist if you experience problems: 1) Check that all computers are set to the same baud rate, stop bits, and parity settings as the printer. 2) All computers must have the ‘Transmitter Key Delay’ set to ‘zero’ (0). 3) One and only one computer must have its ‘Printer Priority Number’ set to ‘1’. All computers must have a different priority number. 4) Some printers provide jumpers or switches which set the polarity of the ‘Printer Ready’ signal on Pin 20. This signal must be positive when the printer is ready. 5) When not using the ‘Printer Ready’ signal (Pin 20), ensure that you have entered enough NULs to prevent overrunning the printer buffer.

ALL.71+ w 05/99

7-3

Chapter 7


7.3. Note:

*

Depending upon whether a printer or Allen-Bradley PLC is used.

Connecting to a Personal Computer and Modem

Ports #1 and #2 (Ports #3 and #4* of an Omni 6000) can provide access to the computer’s database using a Modbus protocol interface. This port is usually connected to a PC running the OmniCom configuration software. Up to 12 Omni flow computers can be connected to 1 PC. The Modbus protocol includes an address field which ensures that only 1 unit will transmit at a time.


Fig. 7-3.

7-4

Direct Connect to a Personal Computer - DB25 Female Connector (Using Port #2 as an example)

ALL.71+ w 05/99

Volume 1



ALL.71+ w 05/99

Fig. 7-4.

Direct Connect to a Personal Computer - DB9 Female Connector

Fig. 7-5.

Connecting Port #2 to a Modem

7-5

Chapter 7


7.4. Peer-to-Peer Communications - The peer-to-peer communication feature allows you to multidrop up to 32 flow computers and other devices in RS-485 serial communications mode, and up to 12 using RS-232-C communications.

Peer-to-Peer Redundancy Schemes - Redundancy schemes allows for uninterrupted measurement and control functionality by interconnecting two identically equipped and configured flow computers (see Technical Bulletin TB980402).

Peer-to-Peer Communications and Multidrop Modes

Serial Port #2 can also be configured by the application software to act as a peer-to-peer Modbus master port. This is a half duplex/simplex link which allows any Omni Flow Computer to communicate with any other flow computer or Modbus slave device. That data link can operate at up to 38.4 kbps and uses a proprietary token passing scheme. Interconnecting multiple flow computers and or multiple serial devices can be accomplished via RS-232-Compatible or RS-485 communications.

7.4.1.

Peer-to-Peer RS-485 Two-wire Multi-drop Mode

The diagram below shows the wiring requirements for multi-dropping two or more flow computers via RS-485 in two-wire mode. This option is available only with the Omni Serial I/O Module #68-6205. (See Technical Bulletin #TB980401.)

UP TO 32 FLOW COMPUTERS

®

OmniCom and Peer-toPeer - The OmniCom Configuration PC Software package supplied with your Omni Flow Computer cannot be used on Serial Port #2 when it is being used as a peer-to-peer link.

B

GND

A

RS-485 TWO-WIRE TERMINATED

Fig. 7-6.

7-6

RS-485 TWO-WIRE NON-TERMINATED



Wiring of Several Flow Computers using the Peer-to-Peer Feature via RS-485 Communications in Two-wire Multi-drop Mode

ALL.71+ w 05/99

Volume 1


7.4.2.

Peer-to-Peer via RS-232-C Communications

The diagram below shows the wiring requirements for multi-dropping two or more flow computers in RS-232 C (compatible) mode. When multi-dropping two or more flow computers with other serial devices via the RS-232-C mode, an RS-232-to-RS-485 standard converter may be required. (See Technical Bulletin #TB-980401.)

Fig. 7-7.

7.4.3. Note: Refer to Volume 3, Chapter 2 “Flow Computer Configuration”.

ALL.71+ w 05/99

Wiring of Several Flow Computers in the Peer-to-Peer Mode using RS-232-C Communications.

Keying the Modem or Radio Transmitter Carrier in Multi-drop Applications

Use the RTS signal to key the modem or radio transmitter carrier in a multi-drop application. A delay between activating the RTS signal and actually sending data is provided to allow for carrier acquisition at the remote end. This delay can be selected as 0.0 msec, 50 msec, 100 msec, or 150 msec.

7-7

Chapter 7


7.4.4.

RS-485 Four-wire Multi-drop Mode

The diagram below shows the wiring requirements for multi-dropping two or more flow computers via RS-485 in four-wire mode to a third party PLC type device. Note that in the wiring example shown below, the PLC acts as a master and can communicate with either flow computer. A four-wire wiring system does not allow communications between slaves; i.e., data can only be transferred between master and slaves. The RS-485 option is available only with the Omni Serial I/O Module #68-6205.

UP TO 32 RS-485 DEVICES SLAVE

SLAVE

TX-B

MASTER PLC DEVICE A RX

RX-A

A TX TX-A

RX-B

RS-485

RS-485 FOUR-WIRE RS-485 FOUR-WIRE

Fig. 7-8.

7-8

Wiring of Multiple Flow Computers to a PLC Device Via RS-485 Communications in Four-wire Multi-drop Mode

ALL.71+ w 05/99

Volume 1


7.5.

Connecting to a SCADA Device

When using an Omni 6000 with 2 serial I/O modules installed, a second Modbus port (Physical Port #3 used as an example) can provide access to the computer’s database. This port can also be connected to a PC or any SCADA device either directly, via modem, or via radio link.

Fig. 7-9.

ALL.71+ w 05/99

Typical Wiring of Port #3 to a SCADA Device via Modem

7-9

Chapter 7


7.6.

Interfacing the Fourth Serial Port to an Allen-Bradleyä KE Module

Port #4 is available on Omni flow computers with the second serial module fitted. This port can be selected to communicate with Allen-Bradleyä devices using DF1 full duplex or half duplex protocol, or set up for Modbus devices. The example below assumes that the Allen-Bradley Protocol has been selected.

Fig. 7-10. Wiring Serial Port #4 to Allen-Bradleyä KE Communications Module

7-10

ALL.71+ w 05/99

Volume 1


8. Diagnostic and Calibration Features 8.1.

Introduction

In the diagnostic mode you can verify that the I/O modules and transducers are working and are calibrated to specification. The actual process transducers used may provide a variety of signal types, ranging from voltage or current pulses of various levels, to linear analog signals such as 4-20 mA., 1-5V, 0-1V or RTD elements. In the case of pulse inputs, the input module provides amplification and/or level shifting, Schmitt triggering and opto-isolation. When analog signals are used the input module provides all signal conditioning, opto-isolation, and converts the analog signal to a high frequency pulse train, in the range of 0 - 20 kHz. By using a precision voltage to frequency converter, typical linearity of +/-0.01 % is obtained. Certain diagnostic displays are always available while in the Display Mode. For example pressing [Input] then [Display] will display the raw frequency input from each process input point. The up/down arrow keys can be used to scroll through all inputs. A typical display shows: INFO - When viewing an analog input point, the frequency displayed approximates 1000Hz/mA. When viewing a turbine or photo pulsar signal, the display is the actual input frequency.

Input % Freq/Period #1 2530 Input % /Freq/Period #2 3021 Pressing [Output] [Status] [Display] shows the current percentage output for each of the digital to analog 4-20 mA outputs.

INFO - 0.0% corresponds to 4mA. 100.0% corresponds to 20mA.

ALL.71+ w 05/99

Analog Output % #1 55.79 Analog Output % #2 34.10

8-1

Chapter 8

Diagnostic and Calibration Features Important timing information is available by pressing [Time] then [Display] and then scrolling down using the down arrow. The displays are as follows: Power Applied Time: 09:10:30 Date: 01/21/91

Power Last Lost Time: 10:25:21 Date: 01/20/91 The previous two displays of power lost and power applied allow the user to estimate the amount of product flow which may be unaccounted for in the event of a power failure. Scrolling down further displays: Main Task Timing-Sec 20 mS Task 00.00 50 mS Task 00.00 100mS Task 00.01 500mS Task 00.04 Background 00.02 This timing information refers to various main application tasks that run within the computer. The information may be useful to Omni in the event of a problem.

8.2. INFO - The Diagnostic LED glows red after a valid password has been asked for and entered.

Calibrating in the Diagnostic Mode

In the Diagnostic Mode the user selects a specific process variable to calibrate or view. The display shows the input channel and combo module used for the variable. Calibration override values can be input and the input signals can be viewed simultaneously as engineering values % span, input voltage and current. Analog outputs and digital I/O points can also be viewed and manipulated.

8.2.1.

Entering The Diagnostic Mode

To enter the diagnostic mode proceed as follows press the [Alpha Shift] key, then the [Diag] key. INFO - The ‘Select Input/Output’ screen must be displayed when making a new selection while in the Diagnostic Mode. Return to this screen by pressing the [Diag] key once.

8-2

The front panel diagnostic LED will glow green and the following will be displayed on the first three lines of the LCD Display: Select Input/Output to Calibrate, Press "Diag" to Exit

ALL.71+ w 05/99

Volume 1

System Architecture and Installation The fourth line of the display is used to show the user’s selection. The user can choose to calibrate or view any analog input or output, or manipulate any set of digital I/O points.

8.2.2. INFO - Each input channel of each combo module has had its temperature coefficient trimmed to ±10 ppm/°F. To avoid temperature gradient effects and for best results, always allow the internal temperature of the computer to stabilize before making your final calibration adjustments.

Display Groups in the Diagnostic Mode

To display an input or output variable to calibrate, select from the following display groups and associated key presses or select the I/O number if known, (usually supplied on a separate sheet).

DISPLAY VARIABLES

VALID KEY PRESSES

All of the following key presses are valid in the Diagnostic Mode. To enter the Diagnostic Mode, these key presses must be preceded by the [Alpha Shift] [Diag] keys. Input Channels

(n = 1 through 24)

Meter Temperature Meter Pressure Meter Density

(n = 1 through 4)

(n = 1 through 4)

(n = 1 through 4)

[Input] or [Input] [n] [Temp] or [Temp] [Meter] [n] [Press] or [Press] [Meter] [n] [Density] or [Dens] [Meter] [n]

Meter Density Temp (n = 1 through 4)

[Density][Temp] or [Density][Temp][Meter][n]

Meter Dens Pressure (n = 1 through 4)

[Density][Press] or [Density][Press][Meter][n]

Prover Temperature (Left, Right)

[Prove} [Temp]

Prover Pressure (Left, Right)

[Prove} [Temp]

Output Channels Digital I/O

8.2.3.

(n = 1 through 24)

(n = 1 or 2)

[Output] [n] [Status] [n]

Leaving The Diagnostic Mode

Once you are done viewing and/or modifying the calibration settings, press [Diag] to return to the selection screen below: Select Input/Output to Calibrate, Press "Diag" to Exit

Press the [Diag] key again to return to the Display Mode (Diagnostic LED will turn off).

ALL.71+ w 05/99

8-3

Chapter 8

Diagnostic and Calibration Features

8.3. 8.3.1. Note: You can also calibrate the input and output of your choice by entering the number of that input or output; e.g.: Press [Input] [1] [Enter]; press [Output] [4] [Enter]. With this method you can calibrate the inputs and outputs to the computer without having them assigned to any I/O point numbers.

Calibration Instructions Calibrating A Voltage or Current Analog Input

While the above display is shown select the input variable to calibrate. For example to calibrate Meter Run #1 Temperature, press [Meter] [1] [Temp] (or the input # if known). The display shows: Select Input/Output to Calibrate, Press "Diag" to Exit Meter 1 Temp Other key press combinations work. [Temp] [Meter] [1] means the same to the computer as [Meter] [1] [Temp]. Pressing [Temp] without a meter number allows all of the temperatures to be scrolled through and calibrated. Now enter the selection by pressing [Display] and the following is displayed: Temperature #1 Input# & Module 1-a1 Override 60.0 Calibrate Input ? _

INFO - Unless previously entered, a request for a valid password is made at this point. The calibrate override value entered will be substituted for all process variables assigned to this physical I/O point when the user answers [Y] to ‘Calibrate Input ?’. It is automatically removed when the user presses the [Diag] key to exit or make a new selection.

8-4

The display shows the process variable name, the input channel number and combo module used. This example shows Temperature Meter Run #1 connected to Channel 1 of Combo Module A1. Before calibrating an input the user should enter a Cal Override value to be used in all calculations in place of the live value. Answer [Y] to the 'Calibrate Input ?' question and the following is displayed: Meter 1 % Value Input Volts mA Value

27.5 50.00 3.000 12.00

ALL.71+ w 05/99

Volume 1

System Architecture and Installation To calibrate the input channel follow these instructions:

INFO - Each input channel of each combo module has had its temperature coefficient trimmed to ±10 ppm/°F. To avoid temperature gradient effects and for best results, always allow the internal temperature of the computer to stabilize before making your final calibration adjustments.

INFO - The [ß ]/[à ] keys are used as a software ‘Zero’ potentiometer. Adjustments made when the Shift LED is on are approximately ten times more sensitive. Holding the arrow keys longer than two seconds speeds up the rate of adjustment.

1) Disconnect the transducer signal and replace it with a stable current or voltage source capable of inputting 4.000 to 20.000 mA or 1.000 to 5.000 V signal. 2) Set the input signal to 4.000 mA or 1.000 V as applicable. 3) Using the Up/Down arrow keys adjust the displayed value so it reads 4.000 mA / 1.000 V. 4) Set the input signal to 20.000 mA or 5.000 V as applicable. 5) Using the Left/Right arrow keys adjust the displayed value so it reads 20.000 mA / 5.000 V. 6) Recheck step 2) No further adjustment is normally needed if the Zero is adjusted at exactly 4.0 mA. 7) Disconnect the calibrator signal and reconnect the transducer signal. 8) Press the [Diag] key to return to the selection screen. Select Input/Output to Calibrate, Press "Diag" to Exit

TIP - The Span adjustment has no effect at 4mA or 1v. Always adjust the ‘Zero’ first at exactly 4mA or 1v.

8.3.2. Leaving the Diagnostic Mode - In the ‘Select Input/Output’ screen, press the [Diag] key to return to the Display Mode (Diagnostic LED will turn off).

Calibrating an RTD Input Channel

While the above screen is being displayed select a process variable which is assigned as an RTD probe input. For example, assuming a pulse type densitometer is installed, pressing [Meter] [1] [Density] [Temp] (or the input # if known), selects the input channel used to process Meter Run #1's Densitometer integral RTD. Other key press combinations will work, and [Density] [Meter] [1] [Temp] all mean the same. Pressing [Density] [Temp] allows the user to scroll through all density temperature channels. Now enter the selection by pressing [Display] and the following is displayed: Dens #1 Temperature Input# & Module 2-B1 Cal Overide 60.0 Calibrate Input ? _

ALL.71+ w 05/99

8-5

Chapter 8

Diagnostic and Calibration Features Enter the Calibrate Override value and answer [Y] to the 'Calibrate Input ?' question and a screen similar to the following is displayed: Dens#1 Deg.F 65.0 % Value 60.00 Resistance Value Ohms 100.00 To Calibrate an RTD input channel proceed as follows :

INFO - Each input channel of each combo module has had its temperature coefficient trimmed to ±10 ppm/°F. To avoid temperature gradient effects and for best results, always allow the internal temperature of the computer to stabilize before making your final calibration adjustments.

1) Disconnect the RTD probe and connect precision decade resistance box. capable of inputting 25.00 to 150.00 Ohms as shown below.

INFO - Installing the decade box at the actual RTD probe location provides maximum accuracy, but can be inconvenient. The errors introduced by installing the decade box at the back panel terminals of the flow computer are approximately 0.01% per 100 ohms of field wiring resistance.

6) Recheck step 2). No further adjustment is normally needed if the Zero is adjusted at exactly 25 Ohms.

2) Set the decade box to 25.00 Ohms. 3) Using the Up/Down arrow keys adjust the displayed value so it reads 25.00 Ohms. 4) Set the decade box to 150.00 Ohms. 5) Using the Left/Right arrow keys adjust the displayed value so it reads 150.00 Ohms.

7) Disconnect the decade box and reconnect the RTD probe. 8) Press the [Diag] key to return to the selection screen. Select Input/Output to Calibrate, Press "Diag" to Exit

TIP - The Span adjustment has no effect at 4mA or 1v. Always adjust the ‘Zero’ first at exactly 4mA or 1v.

Leaving the Diagnostic Mode - In the ‘Select Input/Output’ screen, press the [Diag] key to return to the Display Mode (Diagnostic LED will turn off).

Fig. 8-1.

8-6

Figure Showing Calibration of RTD Input Channel

ALL.71+ w 05/99

Volume 1


8.3.3.

Calibrating a 4 to 20 mA Digital to Analog Output

Each of the analog outputs can be calibrated by monitoring the loop current with an accurate milliamp meter and setting the output current to 4.00 mA and 20.00 mA. For example to calibrate Analog Output #1 proceed as follows: While the 'Select Input/Output' screen is displayed, press [Output] [1] [Display]. The display shows: Analog Output #1 0%=4mA, 100%=20mA Override % 0.00 Calibrate Output ? _

‹

CAUTION!

‹

At this point, the analog output reflects the value of the currently displayed override, not the assigned variable. The user must ensure that any equipment using the output signal will not cause an unsafe condition to arise or cause erroneous results to be generated.

Answer [Y] to the 'Calibrate Output ?' question and the display shows: Analog Output #1 0%=4mA, 100%=20mA Override % 0.00 Override Now Active To calibrate the output channel follow these steps: 1) Connect an accurate milliamp meter in series with the load. 2) Input 0.00 % (4.00 mA) as the output override. 3) Using the Up/Down arrow keys adjust the output current until the milliamp meter indicates 4.00 mA. 4) Input 100.00 % (20.00 mA) as the output override. 5) Using the Left/Right arrow key adjust the output current until the milliamp meter indicates 20.00 mA. 6) Repeat steps 2) through 5) until no further improvement can be obtained. 7) Remove the milliamp meter and reconnect the load. 8) Press the [Diag] key to return to the selection screen.

Leaving the Diagnostic Mode - In the ‘Select Input/Output’ screen, press the [Diag] key to return to the 'Display Mode' (Diagnostic LED will turn off).

ALL.71+ w 05/99

Select Input/Output to Calibrate, Press "Diag" to Exit

8-7

Chapter 8

Diagnostic and Calibration Features

8.3.4.

Verifying the Operation of the Digital I/O Points

The digital I/O points can be manipulated as a group by pressing [Status] [1] for digital points 1 through 12 or [Status] [2] for digital points 13 through 24. Pressing [Status] will allow the user to scroll to either group. Press [Display] and a screen similar to the following is displayed: Digital#1 I/O Points Input 001011001011 Overide 101010101010 Force To Output ? _

‹

CAUTION!

‹

After answering [Y], the digital outputs will reflect the value of the currently displayed override, not the assigned variable. The user must ensure that any equipment using the output signal will not cause an unsafe condition to arise or cause erroneous results to be generated.

INFO - To avoid a hardware conflict, only points that have been assigned as outputs will accept an override of ‘1’; i.e., entering a ‘1’ at an input position will be ignored and displayed as a ‘0’.

The second line shows the status of the I/O points frozen at the time that the screen was displayed. The points are numbered left to right (1 to 12) with a '0' indicating that a point is off and a '1' indicating that a point is on. The third line shows the override bit values that will be forced to the output port when the user answers [Y] to the 'Force To Output ?' question. A screen similar to the following is displayed: Digital#1 I/O Points Input 101110001101 Overide 101010101010 Override Now Active The override '1's and '0's can be changed at any time while the 'Override Now Active' line is displayed. The input status displayed on the second line should always agree with the green LEDs on the edge of the digital I/O module. Red LEDs lit indicate blown fuses on the digital I/O module. Outputs on this I/O module that are assigned as totalizer outputs will stop counting while the 'Override Now Active' line is displayed. Pulses to be output are accumulated and are output at the maximum allowed rate as soon as the [Diag] key is pressed. Press [Diag] to return to the selection screen below:

Leaving the Diagnostic Mode - In the ‘Select Input/Output’ screen, press the [Diag] key to return to the Display Mode (Diagnostic LED will turn off).

8-8

Select Input/Output to Calibrate, Press "Diag" to Exit

ALL.71+ w 05/99

Volume 1


9. Flow Computer Specifications 9.1.

Operating Temperature : q -15°C to +65°C

‹ NOTICE! ‹ Omni Flow Computers, Inc., pursuant to a policy of product development and improvement, may make any necessary changes to these specifications without notice.

Environmental Storage Temperature : q -20°C to +75°C Relative Humidity : q 80% non-condensing maximum

9.2.

Electrical Supply Voltage : q 120 VAC, 50-500 Hz; or 18-30 VDC, 10-20 Watts (excluding transducer loops) q Optional: 220-250 VAC, 50-500 Hz; or 1830 VDC, 10-20 Watts (excluding transducer loops) Transducer Output Power : q 24 VDC at 400 mA+ for configurations (when AC powered)

most

Isolation : q All analog inputs and outputs are optically isolated from computer logic supply q Maximum common mode voltage on any input or output is ± 250 VDC to chassis ground.

9.3.

Microprocessor CPU Type : q Motorola MC68HC000FN16 q Clock Speed: 16 MHz, 0 wait state; Throughput 4,000,000 instructions/sec Coprocessor : q Motorola MC68HC881/82FN16B q Clock Speed: 16 MHz; Throughput 50,000 floating point operations/sec EPROM Memory : q 1 Mbyte. expandable to 2 Mbytes max. RAM Memory : q 512 bytes standard; Expandable to 1 Mbytes max. Real Time Clock : q Battery backed-up, time of day; programmable interval down to 1 msec q Maintains time during power loss q Reports downtime on power-up Logic Voltage : q 5 VDC Over-voltage Protection : q Crowbar on power supply fires at 6.25 VDC approx. Transient Protection : q Transorbs on power supply module RAM Memory Battery Backup : q 3.6 VDC Ni-Cad; rechargeable

Typical Memory Backup Period : q 30-60 days (with power removed)

ALL.71+ w 05/99

9-1

Chapter 9

Flow Computer Specifications

9.4.

Backplane Type : q Passive; configured connectors


with

plug-in

DIN

Number of I/O Module Slots : q Omni 3000: 4 slots q Omni 6000: 10 slots

9.5. TYPE

Process Input/Output Combo Modules INPUT #1

INPUT #2

INPUT #3

INPUT #4

1-5v; 4-20mA; Flow Pulses

ANALOG OUTPUTS Two 4-20mA

·

Pipe Proving

One 4-20mA

·

Pipe Proving

· · ·

Pipe Proving Double Chron. Proving Level A Pulse Fidelity

A

1-5v; 4-20mA; RTD

B

1-5v; 4-20mA; RTD

E/D

1-5v; 4-20mA; RTD

Frequency Density

Two 4-20mA

E

1-5v; 4-20mA; RTD

Flow Pulses

Two 4-20mA

1-5v; 4-20mA Flow Pulse

Frequency Density

H

Honeywell DE Protocol

Two 4-20mA

HV

Honeywell Multivariable DE Protocol

Two 4-20mA

PORT #1 SV

9.6.

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

PORT #2

RS-485 Multi-drop to Various Multivariable Transmitters

Six 4-20mA

Flowmeter Pulse Inputs Input Frequency : q DC to 15 kHz.

Positive Going Trigger Threshold : q +4.0 Volts Negative Going Trigger Threshold : q +2.0 Volts Input impedance : q 1 M Ohm Configuration : q Differential input (E module inputs are single ended referenced to DC ret.) Common Mode Voltage : q ±250 VDC to chassis ground Pulse Fidelity Check : q Channels are continuously compared for frequency and sequence. E Module Only : q Complete failure of either A or B channel will not effect totalizing q Simultaneous noise pulses are rejected with 85% certainty

9-2

ALL.71+ w 05/99

Volume 1


9.7.

Detector Switch Inputs (Non-Double Chronometry)

‹ NOTICE! ‹

Input Type : q Voltage

Omni Flow Computers, Inc., pursuant to a policy of product development and improvement, may make any necessary changes to these specifications without notice.

Gating Transition : q Application of voltage starts and stops proves. Minimum Time Pulse High : q 1 msec Minimum Time Pulse Low : q 2 seconds Input Impedance : q 4.7 k Ohms Input On Voltage : q >10 V On, <4 VDC+ Off (referenced to DC Power Return) Debounce : q 2 sec in Software Common Mode Voltage : q ±250 VDC to chassis ground

9.8.

Detector Switch Inputs of E Combo Module (Double Chronometry) q Driven by open collector transistor or Normally Open switch. q Debounce capacitor may be needed with switch type detectors.

9.9.

Analog Inputs Input Type : q 4 - 20 mA or 1-5 V Input Impedance : q 1 MegOhm (250 Ohms) (4-20 mA range selected by installing shunt resistor) Resolution : q 14 Binary Bits, w/ 500 msec sample Linearity : q ±0.020% F.S. typical ± 1 Digit Temperature Drift : q Less than ±15 ppm/OF Common Mode Voltage : q ±250 VDC to chassis ground

9.10. RTD Inputs RTD Configuration : q 4-wire Bridge RTD Resistance : q 100 Ohm @ 32°F Excitation Current : q 3.45 mA Nominal Maximum Field Wiring Resistance : q 1k Ohm per wire Resolution : q 0.008 Ohms Temperature Drift : q Less than ±15 ppm/°F Linearity : q ±0.020% F.S. typical ± 1 Digit Common Mode Voltage : q ±250 VDC to chassis ground

ALL.71+ w 05/99

9-3

Chapter 9


9.11. Analog Outputs ‹ NOTICE! ‹ Omni Flow Computers, Inc., pursuant to a policy of product development and improvement, may make any necessary changes to these specifications without notice.

Resolution : q 12 Binary Bits Output : q Current source 4-20 mA (referenced to transducer power return terminal) Common Mode : q ±250 Volts to chassis ground Max./Min. Working Loop Voltage : q 30 VDC to 18 VDC Loop Resistance : q 900 Ohm with 24 VDC Power q 1.2 k Ohm with 30 VDC Power Update Rate : q Each 500 milliseconds

9.12. Control Outputs/Status Inputs (12 per module) Configuration : q Open emitter Darlington transistor source (Referenced to transducer power return terminal) Current Capacity : q 100 mA max., 500 mA per module Output Voltage : q +DC - 1 V Nominal Common Mode : q ±250 Volts to chassis ground Input Impedance : q 4.7 k Ohms in series with 2 LEDs Input Voltage : q Input voltages > 8 to < DC voltage at back panel DC terminal block, typically 24 VDC, will be recognized as on q Input voltages < +2 V will be recognized as off LEDs : q Operating and Fuse Indicators on each channel Scan Rate : q Outputs may be pulsed at 50Hz Maximum

9-4

ALL.71+ w 05/99

Volume 1


9.13. Multi-bus Serial I/O Interface 9.13.1. RS-232 Compatible (2 per Module) Serial Data Output Voltage : q ±7.5 Volts typical Recommended Load Impedance : q 1.5 k Ohm Short Circuit Current : q 10 mA limited Input Low Threshold : q Vl = -3.0 Volts Input High Threshold : q Vh = +3.0 Volts Baud Rate : q Software selectable q Range 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2, 38.4 k bps Common Mode Voltage : q ±250 Volts to chassis ground LEDs : q Indicator LEDs for each channel input, output and handshaking signals

9.13.2. RS-485 (2 per Module) Serial Data Output Voltage : q 5 Volts differential driver Recommended Load Impedance : q 120 Ohm Short Circuit Current : q 20 mA Input Low Threshold : q 0.8 Volts Baud Rate : q Software selectable q Range 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2, 38.4 k bps Common Mode Voltage : q ±250 Volts to chassis ground LEDs : q Indicator LEDs for each channel input, output and handshaking signals

9.14. Operator Keypad Keypad Characteristics : q 34-key, domed membrane, with tactile and audio feedback Material : q Autotex 2 Hard coat Polyester Film Data Entry Lockout : q Internal switch and software passwords Key Debounce : q Software controlled

9.15. LCD Display Display : q 4 lines of 20 Characters q 5 x 8 Dot Matrix Character Height : q 4.75 mm Display Data : q Alphanumeric, 80 characters Backlight : q Green/Yellow LED q Viewing angle, contrast and backlight controlled from keypad

ALL.71+ w 05/99

9-5

Chapter 9


9.16. Electromechanical Counters Quantity : q Three, with programmable function


Display : q 6-digit, non-resetable Character Height : q 5 mm Maximum Count Rate : q 10 counts per second

9.17. Operating Mode Indicator LEDs Quantity : q Four Dual Color : q Red/Green Indication : q Active Alarm LED ¨

Green: to indicate acknowledged existing alarm ¨ Red: to indicate new, unacknowledged, existing alarm q Diagnostic LED ¨

or

¨

or

Green: to indicate Diagnostic Calibration Mode is active ¨ Red: to indicate password is active q Program LED Green: to indicate Program Configuration Mode is active ¨ Red: to indicate password is active q Alpha Shift LED ¨

Green: to indicate Alpha Shift Lock Mode is active ¨ Red: to indicate alpha shift next key only

9.18. Security Hardware : q Optional lock on housing and internal keyboard program lockout Software : q Multi-level password control

9-6

ALL.71+ w 05/99

Volume 2D User Manual

Basic Operation Firmware Revisions 23.71/27.71

Orifice / Turbine Gas Flow Metering Systems

Effective May 1999



1. Basic Operating Features ...................................................................................... 1-1 1.1. Overview of the Keypad Functions .....................................................................1-1 1.2. Operating Modes ..................................................................................................1-2 1.2.1. 1.2.2. 1.2.3. 1.2.4.

Display Mode............................................................................................................. 1-2 Keypad Program Mode ............................................................................................. 1-2 Diagnostic and Calibration Mode .............................................................................. 1-2 Field Entry Mode ....................................................................................................... 1-2

1.3. Special Keys .........................................................................................................1-4 1.3.1. 1.3.2. 1.3.3. 1.3.4. 1.3.5. 1.3.6.

Display/Enter (Help) Key ........................................................................................... 1-4 Up/Down Arrow Keys ["]/[#].................................................................................... 1-4 Left/Right Arrow Keys [$]/[%]................................................................................... 1-4 Alpha Shift Key and LED ........................................................................................... 1-4 Program/Diagnostic Key [Prog/Diag]......................................................................... 1-5 Space/Clear (Cancel/Ack) Key.................................................................................. 1-5

1.4. Adjusting the Display ...........................................................................................1-5 1.5. Clearing and Viewing Alarms ..............................................................................1-6 1.5.1. 1.5.2. 1.5.3.

Acknowledging (Clearing) Alarms ............................................................................. 1-6 Viewing Active and Historical Alarms ........................................................................ 1-6 Alarm Conditions Caused by Static Discharges........................................................ 1-6

1.6. Computer Totalizing.............................................................................................1-6

2. PID Control Functions............................................................................................ 2-1 2.1. Overview of PID Control Functions.....................................................................2-1 2.2. PID Control Displays ............................................................................................2-2 2.3. Changing the PID Control Operating Mode ........................................................2-3 2.3.1. 2.3.2. 2.3.3. 2.3.4. 2.3.5.

Manual Valve Control ................................................................................................ 2-3 Automatic Valve Control............................................................................................ 2-3 Local Setpoint Select................................................................................................. 2-4 Remote Setpoint Select............................................................................................. 2-4 Changing the Secondary Variable Setpoint............................................................... 2-4

2.4. PID Control Remote Setpoint ..............................................................................2-4 2.5. Using the PID Startup and Shutdown Ramping Functions ...............................2-5 2.6. Startup Ramp/Shutdown Ramp/Minimum Output Percent................................2-5 2.7. PID Control Tuning...............................................................................................2-6 2.7.1. 2.7.2.

ii

Estimating The Required Controller Gain For Each Process Loop........................... 2-6 Estimating The Repeats / Minutes And Fine Tuning The Gain ................................. 2-7

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Volume 2d

Basic Operation

3. Computer Batching Operations............................................................................. 3-1 3.1. Introduction.......................................................................................................... 3-1 3.2. Batch Status ......................................................................................................... 3-1 3.3. Ending a Batch..................................................................................................... 3-2

4. Meter Factors for Turbine Flowmeters ................................................................. 4-1 4.1. Assigning or Changing Meter Factors via the Direct Access Method ............. 4-1 4.2. Assigning or Changing Meter Factors via the Menu Selection Method........... 4-1

5. Printed Reports ....................................................................................................... 5-1 5.1. Fixed Format Reports .......................................................................................... 5-1 5.2. Default Report Templates and Custom Reports ................................................ 5-2 5.3. Printing Reports................................................................................................... 5-2 5.4. Audit Trail ............................................................................................................. 5-3 5.4.1.

Audit Trail Report ...................................................................................................... 5-3

5.4.2.

Modbus Port Passwords and the Audit Trail Report .............................................. 5-3

6. Index of Display Variables ..................................................................................... 6-1

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

iii



Figures of Volume 2 Fig. 1-1. Flow Computer Front Panel Keypad......................................................................................... 1-1 Fig. 1-2. Block Diagram Showing the Keypad and Display Modes ......................................................... 1-3 Fig. 2-1. Typical PID Control Application - Single Loop .......................................................................... 2-1

iv

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Volume 2d

Basic Operation

1. Basic Operating Features 1.1. INFO - Within the document the following convention is used to describe various key press sequences: Individual keys are shown in bold enclosed in brackets and separated by a space. Although not always indicated, it is assumed for the rest of this document that the [Display/Enter] key is used at the end of every key press sequence to enter a command.

Overview of the Keypad Functions

Thirty-four keys are available. Eight special function keys and twenty-six dedicated to the alphanumeric characters A through Z, 0 through 9 and various punctuation and math symbols. The [Display/Enter] key, located at the bottom right, deserves special mention. This key is always used to execute a sequence of key presses. It is not unlike that the ‘Enter’ key of a personal computer. Except when entering numbers in a field, the maximum number of keys that can be used in a key press sequence is four (not counting the [Display/Enter] key).

Fig. 1-1.

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Flow Computer Front Panel Keypad

1-1

Chapter 1

Basic Operating Features Key words such as ‘Density’, ‘Mass’ and ‘Temp’ appear over each of the alphanumeric keys. These key words indicate what data will be accessed when included in a key press sequence. Pressing [Net] [Meter] [1] for instance will display net flow rates and total accumulations for Meter Run #1. Pressing the [Net] key causes net flow rates and total accumulations for all active meter runs to be displayed. In many instances, the computer attempts to recognize similar key press sequences as meaning the same thing; i.e., [Net] [1], [Meter] [1] [Net] and [Net] [Meter] [1] all cause the net volume data for Meter Run #1 to be displayed. In most cases, more data is available on a subject then can be displayed on four lines. The ["]/[#] (up/down) arrow keys allow you to scroll through multiple screens.

1.2.

Operating Modes

Keyboard operation and data displayed in the LCD display depends on which of the 3 major display and entry modes are selected.

1.2.1.

Display Mode

This is the normal mode of operation. Live meter run data is displayed and updated every 200 msec. Data cannot be changed while in this mode.

1.2.2.

Keypad Program Mode

Configuration data needed by the flow computer can be viewed and changed via the keypad while in this mode. When the Program Mode is entered by pressing the [Prog] key, the Program LED glows green. This changes to red when a valid password is requested and entered.

1.2.3.

Diagnostic and Calibration Mode

The diagnostic and calibration features of the computer are accessed by pressing the [Diag] key ([Alpha Shift] then [Prog]. This mode allows you to check and adjust the calibration of each input and output point. The Diagnostic LED glows green until a valid password is requested and entered.

1.2.4.

Field Entry Mode

You are in this mode whenever the data entry cursor is visible, which is anytime the user is entering a number or password while in the Program Mode or Diagnostic Mode.

1-2

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Volume 2d

Basic Operation

Fig. 1-2.

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Block Diagram Showing the Keypad and Display Modes

1-3

Chapter 1

Basic Operating Features

1.3. 1.3.1.

Special Keys Display/Enter (Help) Key

This key is located bottom-right on the keypad. Pressing once while in the Field Entry Mode will store the data entered in the field to memory. Pressing twice within one second will cause the contextsensitive Help to be displayed. The Help displays contain useful information regarding available variable assignments and selections. When in other modes, use it at the end of a key press sequence to enter the command.

1.3.2.

Up/Down Arrow Keys ["]/[#]

These keys are located top-center on the keypad. When in the Display Mode, the ["]/[#] keys are used to scroll through data relevant to a particular selection. When in the Program Mode, they are used to scroll through data and position the cursor on data to be viewed or changed. In the Diagnostic Mode, The up/down arrow keys are initially used to position the cursor within the field of data being changed. Once you select an input or output to calibrate or adjust, the up/down arrow keys are used as a software ‘zero’ potentiometer.

1.3.3.

Left/Right Arrow Keys [$]/[%]

These keys are located top-center on the keypad; to the left and right respectively of the Up/Down Arrow Keys. The [$]/[%] keys have no effect while in the Display Mode. When in Program Mode, they are used to position the cursor within a data field. In the Diagnostic Mode, they are initially used to position the cursor within the field of data to be changed. Once you select an input or output to calibrate or adjust, the left/right arrow keys are used as software ‘span’ potentiometer.

1.3.4.

Alpha Shift Key and LED

This key is located top-right on the keypad. Pressing the [Alpha Shift] key while in the Field Entry Mode causes the Alpha Shift LED above the key to glow green, indicating that the next valid key press will be interpreted as its shifted value. The Alpha Shift LED is then turned off automatically when the next valid key is pressed. Pressing the [Alpha Shift] key twice causes the Alpha Shift LED to glow red and the shift lock to be active. All valid keys are interpreted as their shifted value until the [Alpha Shift] key is pressed or the [Display/Enter] key is pressed. When in the Calibrate Mode, zero and span adjustments made via the arrow keys are approximately ten times more sensitive when the Alpha Shift LED is on.

1-4

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Volume 2d

Basic Operation

1.3.5.

Program/Diagnostic Key [Prog/Diag]

This key is located top-left on the keypad. While in the Display Mode, pressing this key changes the operating mode to either the Program or Diagnostic Mode, depending on whether the Alpha Shift LED is on. When in other modes, it cancels the current entry and goes back one menu level, eventually returning to the Display Mode.

1.3.6.

Space/Clear (Cancel/Ack) Key

This key is located bottom-left on the keypad. Static Discharges - It has been found that applications of electrostatic discharges may cause the Active Alarm LED to glow red. Pressing the [Space/Clear] key will acknowledge the alarm and turn off the red alarm light.

Pressing this key while in the Display Mode acknowledges any new alarms that occur. The Active Alarm LED will also change from red to green indicating an alarm condition exists but has been acknowledged. When in the Field Entry Mode, unshifted, it causes the current variable field being changed to be cleared, leaving the cursor at the beginning of the field awaiting new data to be entered. With the Alpha Shift LED illuminated, it causes the key to be interpreted as a space or blank. When in all other modes, it cancels the current key press sequence by flushing the key input buffer.

1.4.

Adjusting the Display

Once the computer is mounted in its panel you may need to adjust the viewing angle and backlight intensity of the LCD display for optimum performance. You may need to re-adjust the brightness setting of the display should the computer be subjected to transient electrical interference. While in the Display Mode (Program LED and Diagnostic LED off), press [Setup] [Display] and follow the displayed instructions: Use Up/Down Arrows To Adjust Contrast; Left, Right Arrows To Adjust Backlight

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

1-5

Chapter 1

TIP - Alarm flags are latched while the red LED is on. To avoid missing intermittent alarms, always press [Alarms] [Display] to view alarms before pressing [Cancel/Ack].

Basic Operating Features

1.5.

Clearing and Viewing Alarms

1.5.1.

Acknowledging (Clearing) Alarms

New alarms cause the Active Alarm LED to glow red. Pressing the [Cancel/Ack] key (bottom left), or setting Boolean Point 1712 via a digital I/O point or via a Modbus command, will acknowledge the alarm and cause the Active Alarm LED to change to green. The LED will go off when the alarm condition clears.

1.5.2.

Viewing Active and Historical Alarms

To view all active alarms, press [Alarms] [Display] and use the ["]/[#] arrow keys to scroll through all active alarms. Active Alarms Temperature #1 Hi Hi Pressure #2 Low

The last 500 time-tagged alarms that have occurred are always available for printing (see Historical Alarm Snapshot Report in this chapter).

1.5.3.

Alarm Conditions Caused by Static Discharges

It has been found that applications of electrostatic discharges may cause the Active Alarm LED to glow red. Pressing the [Space/Clear] key will acknowledge the alarm and turn off the red alarm light.

1.6.

Computer Totalizing

Two types of totalizers are provided: 1) Three front panel electromechanical and non-resetable; and 2) Software totalizers maintained in computer memory. The electromechanical totalizers can be programmed to count in any units via the Miscellaneous Setup Menu (Volume 3). The software totalizers provide batch and daily based totals, and are automatically printed, saved and reset at the end of each batch or the beginning of each contract day. Daily flow or time weighted averages are also printed, saved and reset at the end of each day. Batch flow weighted averages are also available in liquid application flow computers. Software cumulative totalizers are also provided and can only be reset via the Password Maintenance Menu (Volume 3). View the software totalizers by pressing [Gross], [Net] or [Mass]. Pressing [Meter] [n] [Gross], [Net] or [Mass] will display the software for Meter Run ‘n’.

1-6

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Volume 2d

Basic Operation

2. PID Control Functions 2.1.

Overview of PID Control Functions

Four independent control loops are available. Each loop is capable of controlling a primary variable (usually flow rate) with a secondary override variable (usually meter back pressure or delivery pressure). The primary and secondary set points can be adjusted locally via the keypad and remotely via a communication link. In addition, the primary set point can be adjusted via an analog input to the computer. Contact closures can be used to initiate the startup and shutdown ramp function which limits the control output slew rate during startup and shutdown conditions. A high or low 'error select' function causes automatic override control by the secondary variable in cases where it is necessary either to maintain a minimum secondary process value or limit the secondary process maximum value. Local manual control of the control output and bumpless transfer between automatic and manual control is incorporated.

Fig. 2-1.

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Typical PID Control Application - Single Loop

2-1

Chapter 2

PID Control Functions

2.2. INFO - Select PID Loop 1 through 4 by entering ‘n’ as 1, 2, 3 or 4.

PID Control Displays

While in the Display Mode press [Control] [n] [Display]. Press the down arrow key to display the following screens: Screen #1

Indicates which parameter is being controlled; primary or secondary

PID #1 VALVE STATUS Open 50.00 Auto/Manual Auto Primary Controlling

Screen #2 PID #1 PRIMARY Measured 20.00 Shows actual primary set point being used in engineering units

Setpoint

20.00

Screen #3 PID #1 SECONDARY Measured 20.00 Shows actual secondary set point being used in engineering units

Setpoint

20.00

Screen #4 INFO - Data such as set points or operating mode cannot be changed while in the Display Mode.

2-2

PID #1 SET POINT Source is Remote Remote S.P. Input Value is 20.00

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Volume 2d

Basic Operation

2.3. INFO - Select PID Loop 1 through 4 by entering ‘n’ as 1, 2, 3 or 4. To access the next two screens you must enter the [Y] to select Manual Valve or Local Setpoint even if a ‘Y’ is already displayed. To cancel the Manual Mode or Local Setpoint Mode, enter [N].

Changing the PID Control Operating Mode

Press [Prog] [Control] [n] to display the following screen: PID#1 OPERATING MODE Manual Valve(Y/N) N Local Set.Pt(Y/N) N Sec Set.Pt 750.0

2.3.1.

Manual Valve Control

To change to manual valve control enter [Alpha Shift] [Y] at the 'Manual Valve (Y/N)' prompt and the following screen is displayed: Primary Variable (Measurement in engineering units)

PID #1 MANUAL VALVE Up/Down Arrow to Adj Measure 20.00 50.00

Valve Control Open %

The switch from Auto to Manual is bumpless. Use the ["] key to open the valve or the [#] key to close it. Press [Prog] once to return to the previous screen. PID#1 OPERATING MODE Manual Valve (Y/N) Y Local Set.Pt(Y/N) N Sec Set.Pt 750.0

Notice you are now in Manual Valve Control

2.3.2.

Automatic Valve Control

To change from manual to automatic valve control, enter [N] at the 'Manual Valve (Y/N)' prompt. The switch to automatic is bumpless if local setpoint is selected.

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

2-3

Chapter 2


2.3.3.

Local Setpoint Select

Enter [Alpha Shift] [Y] at the 'Local Set. Pt. (Y/N)' prompt and the following screen is displayed: PID#1 LOCAL SETPOINT Up/Down Arrow to Adj Measured 20.00 Setpoint 20.00

Primary Variable (Measurement in engineering units)

The switch from Remote to Local is bumpless. Use the Up/Down arrow keys to increase or decrease the setpoint. Press [Prog] once to return to the previous screen. Notice you are now in Automatic with Local Valve Control

PID#1 OPERATING MODE Manual Valve(Y/N) N Local Set.Pt(Y/N) Y Sec Set.Pt 750.0

Change the setpoint of the secondary variable here

2.3.4.

Remote Setpoint Select

To change from local setpoint to remote setpoint, enter [Alpha Shift] [N] at the 'Local Set. Pt(Y/N)' prompt. The switch to remote setpoint may not be bumpless, depending upon the remote set point source.

2.3.5.

Changing the Secondary Variable Setpoint

Move the cursor to the bottom line of the above display, press [Clear] and then enter the new setpoint.

2.4. !

IMPORTANT!

!

You must assign a remote setpoint input even if one will not be used. The 420mA scaling of this input determines the scaling of the primary controlled variable.

2-4

PID Control Remote Setpoint

As described above, the PID control loop can be configured to accept either a local setpoint or a remote setpoint value for the primary variable. The remote setpoint is derived from an analog input (usually 4-20 mA). This input is scaled in engineering units and would usually come from another device such as an RTU. High/Low limits are applied to the remote setpoint signal to eliminate possible problems of over or under speeding a turbine meter (see Volume 1, Chapter 8 for more details).

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Volume 2d

Basic Operation

2.5.

Using the PID Startup and Shutdown Ramping Functions

These functions are enabled when a startup and/or shutdown ramp rate between 0 and 99 percent is entered (see section ‘PID Setup’ in Volume 3). Commands are provided to ‘Start’ the valve ramping open, ‘Shutdown’ to the minimum percent open valve or ‘Stop’ the flow by closing the valve immediately once it has been ramped to the minimum percent open. These commands are accessed using the keypad by pressing [Prog] [Batch] [Meter] [n], which will display the following: Mtr1 Batch Start Y ? Shutdown to Min% ? Batch Stop ? Print & Reset ?

2.6.

Startup Ramp/Shutdown Ramp/Minimum Output Percent

Inputs are provided for startup/shutdown ramp rates and minimum output % settings. When these startup/shutdown ramp rates are applied the control output, movements will be limited to the stated % movement per ½ second (see Volume 3). On receipt of a shutdown signal, the output will ramp to the minimum output % for topoff purposes.

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

2-5

Chapter 2


2.7. !

IMPORTANT!

!

PID Control Tuning - The primary variable must be tuned first. When tuning the primary variable loop, you must set the secondary setpoint high or low enough to the point where it will not take control. Otherwise, the PID loop will become very unstable and virtually impossible to tune. Adjust the primary gain and integral repeats per minute until you achieve stable control. Likewise, when tuning the secondary setpoint, the primary must be set so it cannot interfere. Once you have achieved stable control of both loops, you can then enter the setpoints established for each loop at normal operating conditions.

PID Control Tuning

Individual control of gain and integral action are provided for both the primary and secondary control loops. Tune the primary variable loop first by setting the secondary setpoint high or low enough to stop the secondary control loop from taking control. Adjust the primary gain and integral repeats per minutes for stable control. Reset the primary and secondary set points to allow control on the secondary variable without interference from the primary variable. Adjust the secondary gain and integral repeats per minute for stable control of the secondary variable.

2.7.1.

Estimating The Required Controller Gain For Each Process Loop

Each process loop will exhibit a gain function. A change in control valve output will produce a corresponding change in each of the process variables. The ratio of these changes represents the gain of the loop (For example: If a 10 % change in control output causes a 10% change in the process variable, the loop gain is 1.0. If a 10 % change in control output causes a 20 % change in process variable, the loop gain is 2.0). To provide stable control the gain of each loop with the controller included must be less than 1.0. In practice the controller gain is usually adjusted so that the total loop gain is between 0.6 and 0.9. Unfortunately the gain of each loop can vary with operating conditions. For example: A butterfly control valve may have a higher gain when almost closed to when it is almost fully open. This means that in many cases the controller gain must be set low so that stable control is achieved over the required range of control. To estimate the gain of each loop proceed as follows for the required range of operating conditions: (1) In manual, adjust the control output for required flowing conditions and note process variable values. (2) Make a known percentage step change of output (i.e., from 20% to 22% equals a 10% change). 3

(3) Note the percentage change of each process variable (i.e., 100 m /hr to 3 110 m /hr equals a 10% change). INFO - The primary gain interacts with the secondary gain. The actual secondary gain factor is the product of the primary gain and secondary gain factors.

2-6

(1) Primary Gain Estimate = 0.75 / (Primary Loop Gain). (2) Secondary Gain = Estimate).

0.75 / (Secondary Loop Gain x Primary Gain

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Volume 2d

Basic Operation

2.7.2.

Estimating The Repeats / Minutes And Fine Tuning The Gain

(1) Set the 'repeats / minute' to 40 for both primary and secondary loops. (2) Adjust set points so that only the primary (sec) loop is trying to control. (3) While controlling the primary (sec) variable, increase the primary (sec) gain until some controlled oscillation is observed. (4) Set the primary (sec) 'repeats/minute' to equal 0.75 / (Period of the oscillation in minutes). (5) Set the primary (sec) gain to 75% of the value needed to make the loop oscillate. (6) Repeat (2) through (5) for the secondary variable loop.

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

2-7

Volume 2d

Basic Operation

3. Computer Batching Operations 3.1.

Introduction

A complete set of software batch totalizers and flow weighted averages are also provided in addition to the daily and cumulative totalizers. These totalizers and averages can be printed, saved and reset automatically, based on the amount of flow delivered or on demand. The Omni flow computer can keep track of 4 independent meter runs running any combination of fluids or gases. Flowmeter runs can be combined and treated as a station. The batch totalizers and batch flow weighted averages are printed, saved and reset at the end of each batch. The next batch starts automatically when the flow from the flowmeter exceeds the meter active threshold. Flow received up to that point which does not exceed the threshold is still included in the new batch, but the batch start time and date are not captured until the threshold is exceeded.

3.2.

Batch Status

The batch status appears on the Status Report and is defined as either: ❏ In Progress ------- Batch is in progress with the meter active. ❏ Suspended ------- Batch is in progress with the meter not active. ❏ Batch Ended ----- Batch End has been received, meter not active.

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

3-1

Chapter 3

Computer Batching Operations

3.3.

Ending a Batch

A batch in progress is ended by setting the appropriate “End Batch Flag’ in the computer’s database. This can be done manually from the keypad, on a timed basis, through a digital I/O point or via a Modbus command. To manually end a batch from the keypad, press the [Prog] [Batch] [Meter] [n] or [Prog] [Meter] [n] [Batch] keys and a screen similar to the following will be displayed: METER #1 BATCH Print & Reset ?

Pressing [Prog] [Batch] and [Enter] (i.e., not specifying a meter run) will display the following: STATION BATCH Print & Reset ?

Enter [Y] to the ’Print & Reset ?’ question and enter your password when requested. The batch will be ended immediately and a Batch Report printed out. The above displays will vary if the PID ramping functions are enabled (see Chapter 2).

3-2

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Volume 2d

Basic Operation

4. Meter Factors for Turbine Flowmeters 4.1.

Assigning or Changing Meter Factors via the Direct Access Method

This applies only to turbine flowmeters. To assign or change the meter factor, you must edit the meter run that has the turbine meter. Press [Prog] [Meter] [n] [Enter], where ‘n’ is the meter run number that has the turbine flowmeter (1-4). A display similar to the following will be displayed: METER RUN #1 Meter ID Meter #1 Product No. 1 GC Stream 2

Scroll down until the cursor is on the ‘Meter Factor’ entry. Press [Clear] and enter the meter factor. Note that only numbers greater than 0.8000 and less than 1.2001 are allowed. The display will be similar to the following: METER RUN #1 K-Factor12 Freq Point12 Meter Factor

4.2.

0 0 1.0002

Assigning or Changing Meter Factors via the Menu Selection Method

Press [Prog] [Setup] [Enter], scroll down to ‘Meter Run Setup’ and press [Enter]. Scroll down through the meter run that corresponds to the turbine meter to the ‘Meter Factor’ entry. Press [Clear] and enter the meter factor.

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

4-1

Volume 2d

Basic Operation

5. Printed Reports -

5.1.

Fixed Format Reports

Several reports use a ‘fixed format’ (i.e., cannot be changed by the user). These are described below:

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

❑ Status Report

Shows general information on current active flowmeters, batch status (In progress / Suspended / Ended), current running products, batch ID string, current alarms and future batch information.

❑ Historical Alarm Report

Date and time tags of the last 500 alarms, when they occurred and are cleared. Meter run specific alarms also snapshot the gross volume and mass totalizers. Meter factor changes are also recorded here.

❑ Audit Trail Report

Date and time tags of up to the last 150 changes to the flow computer database made via the local keypad. Changes made via either Modbus port will also be recorded if the password feature is being used on that port.

❑ Product File Report

Shows information related to the product setup of the flow computer. For turbine/PD liquid flow computers, this data includes product name, meter factors, override gravities/densities and the equation or standard to be used for each product. Gas flow computers print product name, fluid type, calculations standard, component analysis, viscosity and isentropic overrides, SG and heating value overrides for each product.

❑ Config Data Report

Lists most configuration settings currently in the flow computer.

5-1

Chapter 5

Printed Reports

5.2.

Default Report Templates and Custom Reports

The following reports are user-configurable via the OmniCom configuration program. ❑ Snapshot Report ❑ Batch Report ❑ Daily Report

5.3. INFO - Entering a number between 1 and 500 at the ‘Hist Alarm ?’ line will cause many previous alarms to be printed. When requesting reports, such as previous daily, batch or prover reports, you must enter a number between 1 and 8; 1 refers to the last report generated and 8 refers to the oldest report. Up to 150 previous data entry changes can be printed when the ‘Audit Trail’ is requested.

Printing Reports

A Snapshot Report can be printed by pressing [Print] [Enter] and can also be printed automatically on timed intervals (see “ Print Setup” in Volume 3). Other printed reports are accessed from the Program Mode. Press [Prog] [Print] [Enter] and the following selection menu will be displayed: *PRINT REPORT MENU* Snapshot Report ? Previous Snapshot? Status Report ?(Y) Prev. Batch (1-8) Prev. Daily (1-8) Hist Alarm ? Audit Trail ? (Y) Arch Starts # of Arc Days Product File ?(Y) Config Report ?(Y)

Move the cursor to the report required and enter [Y] or the number of the historical report you wish to print ([1] refers to the latest, [2] refers to the next to latest etc). Press [Prog] twice to return to the Display Mode.

5-2

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Volume 2d

Basic Operation

5.4.

Audit Trail

5.4.1.

Audit Trail Report

A fixed format report provides an audit trail of changes made to the flow computer database. The number of changes that can be reported depends on the type of changes made. The last 150 items are recorded. Each record consists of a unique event number, time & date tag, database index number for the variable changed and the new and old value of the variable, The starting index number and the number of points changed is recorded when changes are made remotely via a Modbus port, using OmniCom for instance. Note1: Password entries are recorded in this field. A three-digit code signifies the password source and level of the password entered. These codes are as follows:

PIPELINE COMPANY NAME

Date: xx/xx/xx Event No. xxx

5.4.2.

Audit Trail Report Time: xx:xx:xx

Time

Date

xx:xx:xx

xx/xx/xx

Index Number1 xxxxx

Page: 1 Computer ID: REV2271

Old Value/ # of Points x.xxxxxxxxxxx

New Value/ Serial Port x.xxxxxxxxxxx

 Port Passwords and the Audit Trail Modbus Report

The Audit Trail Report is stored within the flow computer and is used to document and time and date stamp changes made to the flow computer database, either via the local keypad or via password protected serial port access. The report is formatted in columns as shown above:

PASSWORD CODES

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

100

Privileged Level Password entered at the keypad

300

Level A Password entered via Serial Port #3

101

Level 1 Password entered at local keypad

301

Level B Password entered via Serial Port #3

102

Level 2 Password entered at local keypad

302

Level C Password entered via Serial Port #3

103

Serial Port #2 Level A Password entered at local keypad

400


104


401


105


402


108

Level 1A Password entered at local keypad

500


200


501


201


502


202


503


5-3

Volume 2d

Basic Operation

6. Index of Display Variables Index of Display Variables -These lists contain variable groups and corresponding key press sequences needed to display them. In most cases, the sequence can be reversed (i.e.: [Temp] [Meter] [n] is the same as [Meter] [n] [Temp]). In all cases, the [Display/Enter] key (keypad bottom right) must be pressed to enter the command. Some variables may not be displayed based on the application or the physical I/O assignments.

DISPLAY VARIABLES

VALID KEY PRESSES

Flow Rates and Totalizers Batch Totalizers are displayed by including the [Batch] key before the key presses shown below: Daily & Cumulative Uncorrected Gross

[Gross] or [Gross] [Meter] [n]

Batch Uncorrected Gross

[Batch] [Gross] or [Batch] [Gross] [Meter] [n]

Batch Corrected Net

[Batch] [Net] or [Batch] [Net] [Meter] [n]

Daily & Cumulative Mass

[Mass] or [Mass] [Meter] [n]

Batch Mass

[Batch] [Mass] or [Batch] [Mass] [Meter] [n]

Daily & Cumulative Energy

[Energy] or [Energy] [Meter] [n]

Batch Energy

[Batch] [Energy] or [Batch] [Energy] [Meter] [n]

Premium Billing

[Net] [Setup] or [Net] [Setup] [Meter] [n]

Current Instantaneous Values Batch Totalizers are displayed by including the [Batch] key before the key presses shown below:

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Meter Temperatures

[Temp] or [Temp] [Meter] [n]

Meter Pressures

[Press] or [Press] [Meter] [n]

Density

[Density] or [Density] [Meter] [n]

Unfactored Density

[Density] [Meter] [n]

Specific Gravity & SG @ Reference

[SG/API] or [SG/API] [Meter] [n]

Densitometer Temperatures

[Density] [Temp] or [Density] [Temp] [Meter] [n]

Densitometer Pressures

[Density] [Press] or [Density] [Press] [Meter] [n]

Orifice Differential Pressures

[D.P.] or [D.P.] [Meter] [n]

Orifice & Pipe Diameter

[Orifice] or [Orifice] [Meter] [n]

Auxiliary Inputs 1-4

[Analysis] [Input]

6-1

Chapter 6

Index of Display Variables

DISPLAY VARIABLES

VALID KEY PRESSES

Calculation Factors Batch Totalizers are displayed by including the [Batch] key before the key presses shown below. Compressibility Factors

[Temp] [Factor] or [Temp] [Factor] [Meter] [n]

Batch FWA Meter Factors

[Batch] [Meter] [n] [Factor]

Other Factors and Intermediate Calculation factors Orifice Coefficients, Expansion & Velocity Approach Factors, Coefficient Iteration Loop Counters, Viscosity Isentropic Exponent, Sound M/S & Calculation HV

[Orifice] [Factor] or [Orifice] [Factor] [Meter] [n]

Meter Factors & K Factors

[Factor] or [Meter] [n] [Factor]

Pycnometer Factors

[Density] [Factor] or [Density][Factor] [Meter] [n]

Solartron / Sarasota / UGC Factors

[Density] [Factor] or [Density][Factor] [Meter] [n]

Alarm Information Active Alarms

[Alarms]

Transducer High/Low Alarm Limits

[Meter] or [Meter] [n]

Product Information Running Product

[Product]

Product Number and Name Fluid Code Viscosity, Isentropic Exponent Density @ Reference Conditions Calculation Mode AGA 8 Method Used

[Product] [n] or [Analysis] [Product] [n] Note: n = 1-4

Analyzer Status Communication Status, Event Timer Status & Alarm Word, Analysis & Sample Number, Date & Time of Last Analysis

[Analysis] [Status] or [Analysis] [Status] [Meter] [n]

Miscellaneous Displays

6-2

Current Time & Date Power Last Applied Time & Date Power Last Lost Time & Date Task Timing Display

[Time]

Display of Raw Input Signals

[Input]

Display of Raw Output Signals

[Output]

Hardware Inventory / Software Version

[Status]

Honeywell Module Status

[Input] [Status]

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Volume 2d

Basic Operation

DISPLAY VARIABLES

VALID KEY PRESSES

PID Control Displays Primary Setpoint Source Local/Remote Remote Setpoint Value Primary Measurement & Setpoint Secondary Measurement & Setpoint Valve Open % & Auto/Manual Status

[Control] [n]

 Transmitter Displays Honeywell Honeywell Transmitter Status

[Input] [Status]

User Displays Up to eight additional displays can be programmed by the user (See Volume 3 for more details).

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

6-3


Configuration and Advanced Operation Firmware Revisions 23.71/27.71


Effective May 1999



1. Overview of Firmware Revisions 23.71/27.71 ...................................................... 1-1 1.1. Number of Meter Runs - Type of Flowmeters.....................................................1-1 1.2. Product Configuration..........................................................................................1-1 1.3. Configurable Sensors per Meter Run..................................................................1-2 1.4. Temperature, Pressure and Differential Pressure Transmitters .......................1-2 1.5. Densitometers ......................................................................................................1-2 1.6. Gas Chromatographs ...........................................................................................1-2 1.7. Station Capability .................................................................................................1-2 1.8. Gas Products - Information Stored / Product.....................................................1-2 1.9. Type of Gases Measured .....................................................................................1-2 1.10. Totalizing and Batching .......................................................................................1-3 1.11. PID Control Functions..........................................................................................1-3 1.12. Time Weighted and Flow Weighted Averages....................................................1-3 1.13. User-Programmable Digital I/O............................................................................1-3 1.14. User-Programmable Logic Functions .................................................................1-3 1.15. User-Programmable Alarm Functions ................................................................1-3 1.16. User-Programmable Variables.............................................................................1-4 1.17. User Display Setups .............................................................................................1-4 1.18. User Report Templates ........................................................................................1-4 1.19. Serial Communication Links ...............................................................................1-4 1.20. Peer-to-Peer Communications ............................................................................1-4 1.21. Archive Data..........................................................................................................1-4 1.22. OmniCom  Software Communications Package ..............................................1-5 1.23. OmniView  Software Communications Package ..............................................1-5

ii

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Volume 3d


2. Flow Computer Configuration ............................................................................... 2-1 2.1. Introduction.......................................................................................................... 2-1 2.2. Configuring with the Keypad in Program Mode ................................................ 2-1 2.2.1.

Entering the Program Mode ...................................................................................... 2-1

2.2.2.

Changing Data .......................................................................................................... 2-1

2.2.3.

Menu Selection Method............................................................................................. 2-2

2.2.4.

Random Access Method ........................................................................................... 2-2

2.2.5.

Passwords................................................................................................................. 2-3

2.3. Getting Help ......................................................................................................... 2-4 2.4. Program Inhibit Switch........................................................................................ 2-4 2.5. Configuring the Physical Inputs / Outputs......................................................... 2-5 2.5.1.

Miscellaneous I/O Configuration (Misc. Setup Menu) ............................................... 2-5

2.5.2.

Physical I/O Points not Available for Configuration ................................................... 2-6

2.5.3.

Password Maintenance Settings ............................................................................... 2-6

2.5.4.

Entries Requiring a Valid Privileged Password ......................................................... 2-7

2.5.5.

Module Settings......................................................................................................... 2-7

2.5.6.

Meter Station I/O Assignments ................................................................................. 2-8

2.5.7.

Meter Run I/O Assignments .................................................................................... 2-10

2.5.8.

PID Control I/O Assignments .................................................................................. 2-12

2.5.9.

Analog Output Assignments.................................................................................... 2-14

2.5.10. Front Panel Counter Settings .................................................................................. 2-15 2.5.11. Programmable Boolean Statements ....................................................................... 2-16 2.5.12. Programmable Variable Statements ....................................................................... 2-18 2.5.13. User Display Settings .............................................................................................. 2-20 2.5.14. Digital I/O Point Settings ......................................................................................... 2-22 2.5.15. Serial Input / Output Settings ................................................................................. 2-24 2.5.16. Custom Modbus Data Packet Settings................................................................. 2-26 2.5.17. Programmable Logic Controller Setup .................................................................... 2-27 2.5.18. Archive File Setup ................................................................................................... 2-27 2.5.19. Peer-to-Peer Communications Settings.................................................................. 2-28

2.6. Setting Up the Time and Date ........................................................................... 2-33 2.6.1.

Accessing the Time/Date Setup Submenu ............................................................. 2-33

2.6.2.

Time and Date Settings........................................................................................... 2-33

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

iii



2.7. Configuring Printers...........................................................................................2-34 2.7.1.

Accessing the Printer Setup Submenu ................................................................... 2-34

2.7.2.

Printer Settings........................................................................................................ 2-34

2.8. Configuring Gas Chromatograph (GC) Analyzers............................................2-36 2.8.1.

Accessing the Analyzer Setup Submenu ................................................................ 2-36

2.8.2.

Analyzer Settings..................................................................................................... 2-36

2.9. Configuring Premium Billing Threshold Levels (Revision 23.71+ - US Customary Units Only).......................................................................................2-38 2.9.1.

Accessing Premium Billing Settings........................................................................ 2-38

2.9.2.

Premium Billing Threshold Settings ........................................................................ 2-38

2.10. Configuring PID Control Outputs ......................................................................2-39 2.10.1. Accessing the PID Control Setup Submenu ........................................................... 2-39 2.10.2. PID Control Output Settings .................................................................................... 2-39

2.11. Configuring Meter Specific Gravity / Density ...................................................2-41 2.11.1. Accessing the Gravity/Density Setup Submenu...................................................... 2-41 2.11.2. Meter Specific Gravity / Density Settings ................................................................ 2-41

2.12. Configuring Meter Temperature ........................................................................2-43 2.12.1. Accessing the Temperature Setup Submenu ......................................................... 2-43 2.12.2. Station and Meter Run Temperature Settings......................................................... 2-43 2.12.3. Station and Meter Run Density Temperature Settings............................................ 2-44

2.13. Configuring Meter Pressure ..............................................................................2-45 2.13.1. Accessing the Pressure Setup Submenu................................................................ 2-45 2.13.2. Station and Meter Run Pressure Settings ............................................................... 2-45 2.13.3. Station and Meter Run Density Pressure Settings .................................................. 2-46

2.14. Configuring Differential Pressure .....................................................................2-47 2.14.1. Accessing the Differential Pressure Setup Submenu ............................................. 2-47 2.14.2. Station and Meter Differential Pressure Settings .................................................... 2-47

2.15. Configuring the Meter Station ...........................................................................2-49 2.15.1. Accessing the Station Setup Submenu................................................................... 2-49 2.15.2. Meter Station Settings ............................................................................................. 2-49

2.16. Configuring Meter Runs.....................................................................................2-53 2.16.1. Accessing the Meter Run Setup Submenu ............................................................. 2-53 2.16.2. Meter Run Settings.................................................................................................. 2-53

iv

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Volume 3d


2.17. Configuring Miscellaneous Factors.................................................................. 2-58 2.17.1. Accessing the Factor Setup Submenu.................................................................... 2-58 2.17.2. Factor Settings ........................................................................................................ 2-58

2.18. Configuring Fluid Data and Analysis of Products ........................................... 2-60 2.18.1. Accessing the Fluid Data & Analysis Setup Submenu ............................................ 2-60 2.18.2. General Fluid Data & Analysis (Product) Settings................................................... 2-60 2.18.3. Additional Settings for Natural Gas Product............................................................ 2-61

3. User-Programmable Functions ............................................................................. 3-1 3.1. Introduction.......................................................................................................... 3-1 3.2. User-Programmable Boolean Flags and Statements ........................................ 3-1 3.2.1.

What is a Boolean? ................................................................................................... 3-1

3.2.2.

Sign (+, -) of Analog or Calculated Variables (5001 → 8999) .................................. 3-3

3.2.3.

Boolean Statements and Functions .......................................................................... 3-3

3.2.4.

How the Digital I/O Assignments are Configured...................................................... 3-8

3.3. User Programmable Variables and Statements............................................... 3-10 3.3.1.

Variable Statements and Mathematical Operators Allowed.................................... 3-10

3.3.2.

Using Boolean Variables in Variable Statements.................................................... 3-12

3.3.3.

Entering Values Directly into the User Variables..................................................... 3-13

3.3.4.

Using the Variable Expression as a Prompt............................................................ 3-13

3.3.5.

Password Level Needed to Change the Value of a User Variable.......................... 3-13

3.3.6.

Using Variables in Boolean Expressions ................................................................ 3-14

3.4. User Configurable Display Screens.................................................................. 3-15

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

v



4. Flow Equations and Algorithms for U.S. Customary Units (Revision 23.71+) .. 4-1 4.1. Flow Rate for Gas Differential Pressure Devices (Orifice, Nozzle and Venturi)..................................................................................................................4-1 4.1.1.

Mass Flow Rate at Flowing Conditions ‘Qm’ (Klbm/hr) .............................................. 4-1

4.1.2.

Volumetric Gross Flow Rate at Flowing Conditions ‘Qv’ (MCF/hr) ............................ 4-1

4.1.3.

Volumetric Net Flow Rate at Base Conditions ‘Qb’ (MSCF/hr).................................. 4-1

4.1.4.

Energy Flow Rate at Base Conditions ‘Qe’ (MMBTU/hr) ........................................... 4-2

4.1.5.

Nomenclature............................................................................................................ 4-2

4.1.6.

Diameters and Diameter Correlations....................................................................... 4-3

4.1.7.

Velocity of Approach Factor ‘Ev’ ............................................................................... 4-5

4.1.8.

Discharge Coefficients ‘Cd’........................................................................................ 4-6

4.1.9.

Fluid Expansion Factor Referenced to Upstream Pressure ‘Y1’............................. 4-10

4.2. Flow Rate for Gas Turbine Flowmeters ............................................................4-12 4.2.1.

Volumetric Gross Flow Rate at Flowing Conditions ‘QV’ (MCF/hr).......................... 4-12

4.2.2.

Mass Flow Rate at Flowing Conditions ‘Qm’ (Klbm/hr) ............................................ 4-12

4.2.3.

Volumetric Net Flow Rate at Base Conditions ‘Qb’ (MSCF/hr)................................ 4-12

4.2.4.

Energy Flow Rate at Base Conditions ‘Qe’ (MMBTU/hr) ......................................... 4-12

4.2.5.

Nomenclature.......................................................................................................... 4-13

4.3. Densities and Other Properties of Gas .............................................................4-14

vi

O

4.3.1.

AGA Report N 8: Compressibility for Natural Gas and Other Related Hydrocarbon Gases ................................................................................................ 4-14

4.3.2.

ASME 1967 Steam Equation ‘υr’............................................................................. 4-18

4.3.3.

Water Density.......................................................................................................... 4-18

4.3.4.

NBS Density (lb/CF), Viscosity Isentropic Exponent, Sound Velocity, and Enthalpy................................................................................................................... 4-18

4.3.5.

Density and Relative Density (Specific Gravity) Calculated from Digital Densitometer and Gravitometer Output Frequency ................................................ 4-19

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Volume 3d


5. Flow Equations and Algorithms for S.I. (Metric) Units (Revision 27.71+).......... 5-1 5.1. Flow Rate for Gas Differential Pressure Devices (Orifice, Nozzle and Venturi) ................................................................................................................. 5-1 5.1.1.

Mass Flow Rate at Flowing Conditions ‘Qm’ (ton/hr) ................................................. 5-1

5.1.2.

Volumetric Gross Flow Rate at Flowing Conditions ‘Qv’ (m /hr) ............................... 5-1

5.1.3.

Volumetric Net Flow Rate at Base Conditions ‘Qb’ (m /hr)........................................ 5-2

5.1.4.

Energy Flow Rate at Base Conditions ‘Qe’ (GJ/hr).................................................... 5-2

5.1.5.

Nomenclature............................................................................................................ 5-2

5.1.6.

Diameters and Diameter Correlations....................................................................... 5-3

5.1.7.

Coefficient of Discharge ‘C’....................................................................................... 5-5

5.1.8.

Fluid Expansion Factor ‘ε’ ......................................................................................... 5-8

3

3

5.2. Flow Rate for Gas Helical Turbine Flowmeters ................................................. 5-9 3

5.2.1.

Volumetric Gross Flow Rate at Flowing Conditions ‘QV’ (m /hr) ............................... 5-9

5.2.2.

Mass Flow Rate at Flowing Conditions ‘Qm’ (ton/hr) ................................................. 5-9

5.2.3.

Volumetric Net Flow Rate at Base Conditions ‘Qb’ (m /hr)........................................ 5-9

5.2.4.

Energy Flow Rate at Base Conditions ‘Qe’ (GJ/hr).................................................... 5-9

5.2.5.

Nomenclature.......................................................................................................... 5-10

3

5.3. Densities and Other Properties of Gas............................................................. 5-11 O

5.3.1.

AGA Report N 8: Compressibility for Natural Gas and Other Related Hydrocarbon Gases ................................................................................................ 5-11

5.3.2.

ASME 1967 Steam Equation ‘υr’............................................................................. 5-15

5.3.3.

Water Density.......................................................................................................... 5-15

5.3.4.

NBS Density, Viscosity Isentropic Exponent, Sound Velocity, and Enthalpy .......... 5-15

5.3.5.

Density and Relative Density (Specific Gravity) Calculated from Digital Densitometer and Gravitometer Output Frequency....................................................................... 5-16

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

vii



Figures of Volume 3 Fig. 1-1. Typical Gas Flow Metering Configuration Using Turbine and Orifice Flowmeters ................... 1-1 Fig. 2-1. Figure Showing Program Inhibit Switch .................................................................................... 2-4 Fig. 3-1. Figure Showing Automatic Four-Meter Flow Zone Thresholds ................................................ 3-6 Fig. 3-2. Figure Showing Four-Meter Run Valve Switching .................................................................... 3-7 Fig. 3-3. Keypad Layout - A through Z Keys ......................................................................................... 3-16

viii

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Volume 3d


1. Overview of Firmware Revisions 23.71/27.71 Orifice / Turbine Gas Flow Metering Systems 1.1.

Number of Meter Runs - Type of Flowmeters

Minimum 1 run, maximum 4 runs - gas orifice or turbine meter run.

1.2.

Product Configuration

Parallel runs measuring the same product or independent runs with different products.

TURBINE METERS

ORIFICE METERS

FT

FT

FT

FT

Fig. 1-1.

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Typical Gas Flow Metering Configuration Using Turbine and Orifice Flowmeters

1-1

Chapter 1

Overview of Firmware Revision 23.71/27.71

1.3.

Configurable Sensors per Meter Run

Meter turbines, differential pressures, meter temperature and pressure, meter density, density temperature and pressure.

1.4.

Temperature, Pressure and Differential Pressure Transmitters

All transmitters can be either 4-20mA, 1-5V or Honeywell DE digital protocol types. In addition temperature sensors can also be four wire DIN or American curve RTD probes connected directly.

1.5.

Densitometers

Can be configured for any combination or mix of individual or shared densitometers of any type (analog specific gravity, analog density, digital Solartron pulse, digital Sarasota pulse or digital UGC pulse); the maximum number that can be connected is four.

1.6.

Gas Chromatographs

Where applicable, analysis data can be obtained automatically via a serial communication port from a gas chromatograph. Standard protocols communicate with (1) Applied Automation analyzers, (2) Daniels Danalyzer, (3) other analyzers which communicate using Modbus protocol.

1.7.

Station Capability

Meter runs may be combined or subtracted in any mode to provide station flow rates and totalizers. Can be used in 'Check /Pay' meter systems to monitor flows and alarm if deviations exceed a preset limit.

1.8.

Gas Products - Information Stored / Product

Information for four different gases can be stored. Product setup information includes: name, type of gas, component analysis, relative density at reference conditions and calculation algorithm to be used when running the product.

1.9.

Type of Gases Measured

Natural gas and other fluids covered by: AGA 3 1992; API 14.3; AGA 8 Reports 1994, 1992 and 1985; ASTM Steam; NIST Steam, Water, Argon, Nitrogen, Oxygen, paraHydrogen, and Ethylene using NIST 1048.

1-2

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Volume 3d


1.10. Totalizing and Batching Gross (uncorrected) volume, Net (standard conditions) volume, Mass and Energy totalizers are provided for each meter run and defined station group. Separate totalizer sets provide, Cumulative (non resetable) Daily and Batch totalizers. The Batch totalizers can be used to provide either weekly, monthly or on demand totalizing information.

1.11. PID Control Functions Four independent control loops are provided for control of a primary variable with either high or low override control by a secondary variable. Contact closure inputs are activated to provide a startup ramp function for each control loop if needed. Primary set point can be adjusted via an analog input, a keypad entry or communication link. Control loops are not dedicated and may be cascaded. Data is processed every 500 msec.

1.12. Time Weighted and Flow Weighted Averages Either Flow weighted or time weighted averages for all input variables and correction factors based on daily flow or batch flow are standard. Because errors such as entering an incorrect orifice diameter, would cause large flow errors and errors in the flow weighted averages, time weighted averages are calculated for orifice metering runs. Averaging does not occur if the flow rate is zero. All variables associated with Turbine metering runs are flow weighted averaged. Gas chromatograph data is always time weighted.

1.13. User-Programmable Digital I/O Each I/O point is individually configurable as either an input or output with variable 'delay On' and 'delay Off'. Pulse widths are adjustable when used as auxiliary totalizer outputs or sampler outputs.

1.14. User-Programmable Logic Functions Sixty-four logic statements can be user programmed to control meter run switching and provide user auxiliary control functions.

1.15. User-Programmable Alarm Functions Sixteen of the programmable logic statements described above can be used to contain custom text messages which can be displayed, logged and printed.

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

1-3

Chapter 1

Overview of Firmware Revision 23.71/27.71

1.16. User-Programmable Variables Sixty-four user variables can be programmed to manipulate data for display and printing or remote access via a communication port. Typical uses include, special units conversions, customer averaging algorithms for leak detection, special limit checking and control functions. The programmable variable statements can also be used to type cast data of one type to another (i.e., change a floating point variable to an integer type so that a PLC or DCS system can make use of it).

1.17. User Display Setups The user may specify eight key press combinations which recall display screens. Each user display screen can show four variables each with a descriptive tag defined by the user.

1.18. User Report Templates Using OmniCom the user can generate custom report templates or edit existing templates. These are uploaded into the flow computer. Custom templates for the snapshot, batch end, daily and prove reports can be defined.

1.19. Serial Communication Links Up to four serial data links are available for communications with other devices such as printers, SCADA systems, PLC’s and other Omni Flow Computers. Ports communicate using a superset of the Modbus protocol (ASCII or RTU). Printer data is ASCII data.

1.20. Peer-to-Peer Communications Omni flow computers can be user configured to communicate with each other as equal peers. Groups of data variables can be exchanged or broadcast between other flow computers. Multiple flow computers can share resources such as a PLC.

1.21. Archive Data Two types of data archiving are possible in the flow computer. (1) Formatted ASCII text using custom report templates, (2) Raw Data using archive records and files.

1-4

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Volume 3d


 Software Communications 1.22. OmniCom Package OmniCom software is provided with each flow computer, and allows the user to configure the computer on-line or off-line using a personal computer.

 Software Communications 1.23. OmniView Package A Man-Machine Interface package for the Omni Flow Computer is also available as an option.

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

1-5

Volume 3d


2. Flow Computer Configuration 2.1.

Introduction

Configuration data is stored in the computer's battery backed-up RAM memory which will retain its data for at least 1 to 2 months with no power applied. Configuration data can be entered using one of three methods: 1) Configure off-line using the OmniCom PC configuration program and then uploading all data at once. 2) Configure on-line using the OmniCom PC configuration program which uploads each change as it is entered. 3) Enter configuration data via the front panel keypad using the Program Mode. Methods 1) and 2) require an IBM compatible PC running the OmniCom Configuration Software and are described in Volume 5 and in OmniCom Help. Method 3) is described here.

2.2.

2.2.1.

Configuring with the Keypad in Program Mode Entering the Program Mode

INFO - Key presses are denoted in bold face between brackets; e.g.: the enter key appears in this manual as [Enter].

While in the Display Mode press the [Prog] key. The front panel Program LED above the key will glow green and the following selection menu will be displayed th on the first three lines of the LCD display. The 4 line of the display is used to show the user key presses.

th

Press Keys to Select Group Entry, or Press "Prog" to Exit

INFO - The 4 line of the display is used to show the user key presses.

2.2.2.

Changing Data

Data can be accessed using a sequential list of menu prompts or in a random access manner by going directly to a specific group of entries.

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

2-1

Chapter 2

Flow Computer Configuration

2.2.3. INFO - Characters in ‘[ ]’ refer to key presses. TIP - It is best to use the menu selection method when programming an application for the first time as every possible option and variable will be prompted. Once a computer is in operation and you become familiar with the application you can decide to use the faster Random Access Method. To use the menu selection method, while in the Program Mode (program LED on) press [Setup] [Enter]. A Setup Menu similar to the one on the right will be displayed.

Menu Selection Method *** SETUP MENU *** Misc Configuration _ Time/Date Setup Printer Setup Analyser Setup PID Control Setup Grav/Density Setup Temperature Setup Pressure Setup DP Inches of Water Station Setup Meter Run Setup Factor Setup FluidData&Analysis

Use the [$]/[%] (up/down arrow) keys to move the cursor to the appropriate entry and press [Enter] to access a particular submenu. The first menu, 'Misc Configuration', should always be completed first as these entries specify the number and type of input and output devices connected to the flow computer; i.e., the menus following the 'Misc Configuration' menu do not ask for configuration data unless a transducer has been defined.

2.2.4.

Random Access Method

In addition to the Setup Menu, the data is also presented in related groups such as Temperature, Pressure, Meter, etc. You press the group key of your choice to get to a data area. By specifying a meter run before or after a group you go directly to the data for that group and that group only. Once a group is selected use the 'Up/Down' arrow keys to step to a specific data entry within the group. You can view data and, assuming a valid password has been entered, change its value as required. If an error is made, press [Clear], re-enter the correct data and press [Enter] to enter the new value. The cursor will automatically step to the next data item in that group unless that would cause a total change of screen (i.e., you can always verify your entry). A list of data groups and associated key presses is listed later in this chapter.

Example: Pressing [Temp] will allow you access to temperature data for all meter runs. Pressing [Meter] [1] [Temp] or [Temp] [Meter] [1] will allow access to only Meter Run #1 temperature data. For example, pressing [Meter] [1] [Temp] will display the following until the [Enter] key is pressed.

th

The 4 line of the display is used to show the user key presses.

2-2

Press Group Press Meter

Keys to Select Entry, or "Prog" to Exit 1 Temp

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Volume 3d

Configuration and Advanced Operation Pressing the [Enter] key will display a screen similar to this: TEMPERATURE #1 Deg.F Low Limit 30.0 High Limit 125.0 Override 60.0

2.2.5. INFO - Most entry groups occupy multiple screens so be sure to use the [$]/[%] to scroll and see all data.

Passwords

Except when changing transducer high/low alarm limits, a password is usually asked for when changing the configuration data within the computer. The flow computer has independent password protection of the following: ❏ Local Keypad Access / Modbus Port #1 (selectable) (Physical Serial Port #1) ❏ Modbus Port #2 - (Physical Serial Port #2) ❏ Modbus Port #3 - (Physical Serial Port #3) ❏ Modbus Port #4 - (Physical Serial Port #4)

Local Keypad Access Three password levels are provided: ❑ Privileged Level

Allows complete access to all entries within the flow computer including keypad passwords 1, 1A and 2 below. The initial privileged password for each Modbus port is selected via this password level.

❑ Level 1

This level allows technician access to most entries within the flow computer with the exception of I/O Points assignments, programmable variables and Boolean statements and passwords other than ‘Keypad Level 1’.

❑ Level 1A

This level allows technician access to the following entries only: ♦ Meter Factors ♦ K Factors ♦ Densitometer

Correction

Factors

(Pycnometer

Factor)

❑ Level 2

Allows access to the operator type entries. These entries include: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Transducer Manual Overrides Product Gravity Overrides Prover Operations Batching Operations

2-3

Chapter 2

Flow Computer Configuration Changing Passwords at the Keypad

INFO - Characters in ‘[ ]’ refer to key presses.

1) At the keypad press [Prog] [Setup] [Enter]. 2) With the cursor blinking on 'Misc Configuration', press [Enter]. 3) With the cursor blinking on 'Password Main?', press [Enter]. 4) Enter the Privileged Level Password (up to 6 Characters) and press [Enter]. 5) The Level 1, 1A and Level 2 passwords can now be viewed and changed if required.

INFO - See Technical Bulletin TB-960701 in Volume 5 for setting Level B and Level C passwords using OmniCom.

Note: Level B and Level C passwords for each Modbus port cannot be viewed or changed from the keypad.

INFO - The Help System is not limited to just the Program Mode. Context sensitive help is available in all modes of operation.

1) Scroll down to access each of the Modbus serial port 'Level A' passwords. These are labeled ‘Serial 1’ (if Modbus Protocol is selected), 'Serial 2', Serial 3', and 'Serial 4' corresponding to the physical port numbering for Modbus Ports 1, 2, 3 and 4.

2.3.

Getting Help

Context sensitive help is available for most data entries. Help is summoned by pressing the [Display/Enter] key twice ([Help] key) with the cursor on the data field in question. Help screens are frequently more than 1 full screen so always use the [$]/[%] keys to scroll in case there is more. Press [Prog] or [Enter] once to exit the help system and return to your original screen.

2.4.

Program Inhibit Switch

A 'Program Inhibit Switch' mounted behind the front panel prevents unauthorized changing of data when in the 'Inhibit' position. Most data can be viewed while the switch is in the program inhibit position, but any attempt to alter data will be ignored and cause 'PROGRAM LOCKOUT' to be displayed on the bottom line of the LCD display. The inner enclosure of the flow computer can be locked or sealed within the outer enclosure blocking access to the 'Program Inhibit Switch'.

!

CAUTION!

!

These units have an integral latching mechanism which first must be disengaged by lifting the bezel upwards before withdrawing the unit from the case.

Fig. 2-1.

2-4

Figure Showing Program Inhibit Switch

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Volume 3d


2.5. Tip - It is best to use the Menu Selection Method (see 2.2.3, this chapter) when programming an application for the first time as every possible option and variable will be prompted. Once a computer is in operation and you become familiar with the application you can decide to use the faster Random Access Method (see 2.2.4, this chapter).

INFO - Characters in ‘[ ]’ refer to key presses.

INFO - The first menu, 'Misc Configuration', should always be completed first as these entries specify the number and type of input and output devices connected to the flow computer. You are advise to complete all entries under this menu before proceeding. Only transducers that have been assigned to physical I/O points will be available for further configuration (i.e., the menus following the 'Misc Configuration' menu do not ask for or accept configuration data unless a transducer has been defined). (See 2.5.2, this chapter)

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Configuring the Physical Inputs / Outputs

The Omni Flow Computer can accept many I/O modules and be configured to match just about any combination of measurement transmitters. Configuring the physical I/O means setting up the number of meter runs, what types of transducers are to be used and to which physical I/O points they are connected.

2.5.1.

Miscellaneous I/O Configuration (Misc. Setup Menu)

The physical I/O configuration of the flow computer is changed by entering the ‘Misc. Setup’ menu while the 'Select Group Entry' screen is displayed (see 9.2.1. “Entering the Program Mode”). Press Keys to Select Group Entry, or Press "Prog" to Exit Setup Press [Setup] then [Enter] and the following selection menu will be displayed: *** SETUP MENU *** Misc Configuration _ Time/Date Setup Station Setup The cursor automatically appears at the ‘Misc Configuration’ option. Press [Enter] and the following selection menu will be displayed: *** Misc. Setup *** Password Maint?(Y) Check Modules ?(Y) Config Station?(Y) Config Meter “n” Config PID ? “n” Config D/A Out“n” Front Pnl Counters Program Booleans ? Program Variables? User Display ? “n” Config Digital“n” Serial I/O “n” Peer/Peer Comm(Y)? Custom Packet “n” Archive File “n”

2-5

Chapter 2


2.5.2.

Physical I/O Points not Available for Configuration

Configuration parameter groups are only prompted as needed. Meter runs and transducers which are not assigned to a physical I/O point will not be available for configuration. In these cases the following message will be displayed: Variable Selected is Not Assigned to a Physical I/O Point

If this message is displayed check the I/O point assignment for the variable.

2.5.3. INFO - Characters in ’{ }’ refer to password levels. Characters in ‘[ ]’ refer to key presses. TIP - Use the blank lines provided next to each configuration option to write down the corresponding settings you entered in the flow computer. Some of these entries may not appear on the display or in OmniCom. Depending on the various configuration settings of your specific metering system, only those configuration options which are applicable will be displayed.

Note: In the privileged password area all passwords are legible upon entering the correct privileged password. In all other cases when requested for a password, upon entering the password, the Omni will display all entered characters as asterisk.

Password Maintenance Settings

Password maintenance settings can only be entered via the Omni front panel keypad. Enter [Y] at ‘Password Maint ?’ of the ‘Misc Setup’ menu to open the following entries: {PL} Privileged

_______________

Enter the privileged password to allow you to view and change all configuration data including other passwords.

{PL} Level 1

_______________

Enter the Level 1 password to allow entry of all configuration data except entries which determine the physical I/O personality of the computer.

{PL} Level 1A

_______________

Enter the Level 1A password to allow entry of Meter factors, K Factors and Density Correction Factors only.

{PL} Level 2

_______________

Enter the Level 2 password which is required for operator type entries such as gravity overrides and meter factors.

{PL} Serial Port #1 Password

_______________

Enter the Serial Port password. All data in the Modbus database except passwords can be read via the serial ports. These passwords allow writes to the Modbus database. Password protection can be disabled by entering a blank field as a password.

{PL} Lockout Switch Active? (Serial Port #1)

_______________

Enter [N] for the lockout switch to be inactive for this serial port. Enter [Y] for the lockout switch to be active for this serial port.


_______________

Enter the Serial Port #2 Password.

2-6


_______________


_______________


_______________


_______________


_______________

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Volume 3d



Entries Requiring a Valid Privileged Password

The following entries display only when a Valid Privileged Password is entered: {PL} Model Number (0=3000, 1=6000)

{PL} Re-configure Archive

CAUTION!

!

If you change the number or type of installed I/O modules, you must perform the ‘Check Modules’ Function to inform the computer that you wish to use the new hardware configuration.

_______________

Enter [Y] to re-configure archive records definition. Enter [N] when finished.

{PL} Archive Run (Y/N)

_______________

Enter [Y] to start the archive running.

{PL} Reset All Totalizers ? (Y/N)

_______________

Reset All Ram and Reset Totalizers will only display after the privileged password has been entered. will clear to zero all internal totalizers. You can change totalizer decimal place settings after entering [Y]. The three electromechanical totalizers on the front of the computer cannot be zeroed.

{PL} Reset All RAM ? (Y/N)

!

_______________

This entry is used by the OmniCom configuration software to determine the maximum I/O capability of the computer.

_______________

Resetting all RAM will clear all configuration data, calibration data and totalizers. This means that all configuration data will have to be re-entered.

{PL} Input Calibrate Default ?

_______________

Entering a [Y] here will set all the analog input calibration constants used to scale zero and span settings to the default value. This will require you to re calibrate all the inputs. You can also do this on a channel by channel basis by entering the input channel number.

{PL} D/A Calibrate Default ?

_______________

Entering a [Y] here will set all the analog output calibration constants used to scale zero and span settings to the default value. This will require you to re-calibrate all the outputs. You can also do this on a channel by channel basis by entering the output channel number.

2.5.5.

Module Settings

Enter [Y] at ‘Check Modules ?’ of the ‘Misc Setup’ menu and a screen similar to the following will display: MODULE S-WARE H-WARE A-1 Y Y B-1 Y Y E/D-1 Y Y E-1 Y Y H-1 Y Y D-2 Y Y S-2 Y Y Update S-Ware ?

{PL} Update S-Ware ? (Y)

_______________

A table is displayed showing all of the physically installed I/O modules verses the I/O modules recognized by the software (see display example above). You must answer the 'Update Software' question entering [Y] whenever you change the number or type of installed modules. The available I/O point numbers are allocated to each module at this time according to the type and number of each module (see Chapter 2 for more information).

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

2-7

Chapter 2


2.5.6.

Meter Station I/O Assignments

INFO - The number of process variable I/O points available depends on the number of combo modules installed (see Chapter 2 in Volume 1 for more information). Point numbers range from 01 through 24. Assign [0] to ‘invalidate the assigning of a variable.

Enter [Y] at ‘Config Station ?’ of the ‘Misc Setup’ menu to open the following entries:

I/O Type Mismatch - The computer will not let you assign the same I/O point # to incompatible transducer types; i.e., an I/O point cannot be assigned as a temperature input for Meter Run #1 and a pressure input for Meter Run #2. If the ‘I/O Type Mismatch’ message is displayed, recheck the I/O.

{PL} Reference Specific Gravity (SG) I/O Point #

{PL} Station Configured As:

_______________

Station Totals and Flows Defined As: Define which meter runs will be included in the station flow rates and totalizers. Meter data can be added or subtracted. Example: Entering [1] [+] [2] [-] [3] [-] [4] defines the station flows and totals as the result of Meter Runs #1 and #2 added together, subtracted by the flows of Meters #3 and #4. Enter [0] for no station totalizers.

SG Transducer Tag

_______________

Enter the 8-character tag name used to identify this SG transducer on the LCD display.

SG Transducer Type

_______________

Enter the SG transducer type: 1=4-20mA signal, 2=Solartron 3096 digital pulse.

{PL} Nitrogen (N2) % I/O Point # Shared Transducers Enter the same I/O point to share transducers between meter runs.

_______________

Enter the physical I/O point number used to input the gas specific gravity at reference conditions (Points 1-24) The live SG will be used in the AGA 8 equation. Enter [0] if no live SG is available.

_______________

Enter the physical I/O point number used to input this gas analysis variable (Points 1-24) The data from this input signal will be used in the AGA 8 equation of state. Enter [0] if this signal is not available to the flow computer.

N2 % Transducer Tag

_______________

Enter the 8-character tag name used to identify this transducer on the LCD display. Correcting a Mistake Enter an I/O point # of [0] to cancel an incorrectly entered I/O point #, then enter the correct number. Assigning I/O Point #99 This indicates that the associated variable will be available for display and be used in all calculations, but will not be obtained via a live input. The variable value is usually downloaded into the flow computer database via a communication port or via a user variable statement.

2-8

{PL} Carbon Dioxide (CO2) % I/O Point #

_______________

Enter the physical I/O point number used to input this gas analysis variable (Points 1-24) The data from this input signal will be used in the AGA 8 equation of state. Enter [0] if this signal is not available to the flow computer.

CO2 % Transducer Tag

_______________

Enter the 8-character tag name used to identify this transducer on the LCD display.

{PL} Gas Heating Value (HV) % I/O Point #

_______________

Enter the physical I/O point number used to input this gas analysis variable (Points 1-24) The data from this input signal will be used in the AGA 8 equation of state and used to calculate energy flow. Enter [0] if this signal is not available to the flow computer.

Gas HV Transducer Tag

_______________


23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Volume 3d

Configuration and Advanced Operation Auxiliary Input Assignment

INFO - Characters in ’{ }’ refer to password levels. Characters in ‘[ ]’ refer to key presses.

{PL} Auxiliary Input #1 I/O Point #

Enter the physical I/O point number to which this auxiliary input is connected. Auxiliary Inputs can be used to enter miscellaneous variables.

Auxiliary Input #1 Tag TIP - Use the blank lines provided next to each configuration option to write down the corresponding settings you entered in the flow computer. Some of these entries may not appear on the display or in OmniCom. Depending on the various configuration settings of your specific metering system, only those configuration options which are applicable will be displayed.

_______________

_______________


Auxiliary Input Type

_______________

Enter the Auxiliary Input Type: 0 = DIN RTD 1 = American RTD 2 = Honeywell Smart Transmitter or 4-20mA.


_______________

Auxiliary Input #2 Tag

_______________


_______________


_______________


_______________


_______________


23/27.71+ ! 05/99

_______________


_______________


_______________

2-9

Chapter 2


2.5.7. Config Meter Runs Physical I/O information for up to 4 meter runs can be entered. Transducers that are not assigned an I/O point will not be available for display or further configuration.

INFO - The number of process variable I/O points available depends on the number of combo modules installed (see Chapter 2 in Volume 1 for more information). Point numbers range from 01 through 24. Assign [0] to ‘invalidate the assigning of a variable. I/O Type Mismatch - The computer will not let you assign the same I/O point # to incompatible transducer types; i.e., an I/O point cannot be assigned as a temperature input for Meter Run #1 and a pressure input for Meter Run #2. If the ‘I/O Type Mismatch’ message is displayed, recheck the I/O. Shared Transducers Enter the same I/O point to share transducers between meter runs.

Meter Run I/O Assignments

Enter [1], [2], [3] or [4] at ‘Config Meter "n"’ of the ‘Misc Setup’ menu to open the following entries: {PL} Select Turbine/Orifice Flowmeter

{PL} Flowmeter I/O Point #

Assigning I/O Point #99 This indicates that the associated variable will be available for display and be used in all calculations, but will not be obtained via a live input. The variable value is usually downloaded into the flow computer database via a communication port or via a user variable statement.

2-10

Meter #1

Meter #2

Meter #3

Meter #4

_______

_______

_______

_______

This entry applies only when turbine meters are selected in the entry above. Enter the number of the I/O point used to input the flow signal for each meter run. Flowmeter pulse inputs can rd th only be assigned to the 3 input channel of A, B and E combo modules, and 4 input channel of A and E combo modules.

Flowmeter Tag

_______

_______

_______

_______

This entry applies only when turbine meters are selected in the entry above. Enter the 8character tag name used to identify this flowmeter on the LCD display.

{PL} Dual Pulse Fidelity Check

_______

_______

_______

_______

This entry applies only when turbine meters are selected in the entry above. Enter [Y] to enable 'Level A' pulse fidelity and security checking for this meter run (API MPMS Chapter 5, Section 5). This can only be achieved with a flowmeter device which is fitted with two pickoffs which produce pulse trains signals which are not coincident. The pulse trains must be connected to channels 3 and 4 of an 'E Type Combo Module'. The Omni will continuously compare both pulse trains and alarm any differences of phase or frequency between the pulse trains. Totalizing will be unaffected by a failure of either pulse train and simultaneous transients and noise pulses will be rejected with an 85 % certainty. Enter [N] if pulse fidelity checking is not to be used.

{PL} DP Low Range I/O Point #

_______

_______

_______

_______

This entry applies only when orifice meters are selected in the entry above. Enter the I/O point used to input the signal from the low range differential pressure signal for this meter run. Duplicate I/O assignments can be made when a transducer is shared between meter runs. (e.g.: forward and reverse flow).

DP Low Range Tag Correcting a Mistake Enter an I/O point # of [0] to cancel an incorrectly entered I/O point #, then enter the correct number.

_______________

Each meter run may use either a turbine/positive displacement meters or differential pressure transmitters (orifice). Enter [Y] to select turbine meter or [N] to select orifice meter.

_______

_______

_______

_______

This entry applies only when turbine meters are selected in the entry above. Enter the 8character tag name used to identify this transmitter on the LCD display.

{PL} DP High Range I/O Point #

_______

_______

_______

_______

This entry applies only when orifice meters are selected in the entry above. Enter the I/O point used to input the signal from the low range differential pressure (DP) signal for this meter run. Duplicate I/O assignments can be made when a transducer is shared between meter runs. (e.g.: forward and reverse flow). Enter [0] if stacked DP transmitters are not used.

DP High Range Tag

_______

_______

_______

_______

This entry applies only when turbine meters are selected in the entry above. Enter the 8character tag name used to identify this transmitter on the LCD display.

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Volume 3d

INFO - Characters in ’{ }’ refer to password levels. Characters in ‘[ ]’ refer to key presses. TIP - Use the blank lines provided next to each configuration option to write down the corresponding settings you entered in the flow computer. Some of these entries may not appear on the display or in OmniCom. Depending on the various configuration settings of your specific metering system, only those configuration options which are applicable will be displayed.


{PL} Temperature I/O Point #

Meter #1

Meter #2

Meter #3

Meter #4

_______

_______

_______

_______

Enter the I/O point number used to input the temperature signal for each meter run. Duplicate I/O assignments are allowed when a sensor is shared by more than one meter run.

Temperature Transmitter Tag _______

_______

_______

_______

Enter the 8-character tag name used to identify this temperature transducer on the LCD display.

Temp Transmitter Type

_______

_______

_______

_______

_______

_______

Enter the Temperature Transmitter Type: 0 = DIN RTD probe (α=0.0385) 1 = American RTD probe (α=0.0392) 2 = Honeywell smart transmitter or linear 4-20mA output.

{PL} Pressure I/O Point #

_______

_______

Enter the I/O point number used to input the pressure signal for each meter run. Duplicate I/O assignments are allowed when a sensor is shared by more than one meter run.

Pressure Transducer Tag

_______

_______

_______

_______

Enter the 8-character tag name used to identify this pressure transducer on the LCD display.

{PL} Density I/O Point #

_______

_______

_______

_______

Enter the I/O point number used to input the density signal for each meter run. Duplicate I/O assignments are allowed when a densitometer is shared by more than one meter run. Digital th pulse densitometers can only be assigned I/O point numbers corresponding to the 4 input rd th channel of a B type Combo Module or the 3 and 4 input channels of an E/D combo module.

Density Transducer Tag

_______

_______

_______

_______

Enter the 8-character tag name used to identify this density transducer on the LCD display.

Densitometer Type

_______

_______

_______

_______

{PL} Dens Temperature I/O Point # _______

_______

_______

_______

Enter the Densitometer Type: 1 2 3 4 5 6

= = = = = =

Not applicable 4-20 SG linear 4-20 Density linear (gr/cc) Solartron pulse Sarasota pulse UGC pulse.

Enter the I/O point number used to input the signal applied to compensate for temperature effects at the densitometer for each meter run. If the densitometer has no temperature sensor fitted, enter the same I/O point assignment as the meter run temperature sensor.

Dens Temp Transmitter Tag

_______

_______

_______

_______

Enter the 8-character tag name used to identify this density temperature transducer on the LCD display.

Dens Temp Transmitter Type _______

_______

_______

_______

Enter the Densitometer Temperature Transmitter Type: 0 = DIN RTD probe (α=0.0385) 1 = American RTD probe (α=0.0392) 2 = Honeywell smart transmitter or linear 4-20mA output.

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

2-11

Chapter 2


{PL} Dens Pressure I/O Point

Meter #1

Meter #2

Meter #3

Meter #4

_______

_______

_______

_______

Enter the I/O point number used to input the signal applied to compensate for pressure effects at the densitometer for each meter run. If the densitometer has no pressure sensor fitted, enter the same I/O point assignment as the meter run pressure sensor.

Dens Press Transducer Tag

_______

_______

_______

_______

Enter the 8-character tag name used to identify this density pressure transducer on the LCD display.

2.5.8. Proportional Integral Derivative (PID) -- For practical reasons we refer to PID Control Loops in this manual. However, your flow computer actually performs the Proportional Integral (PI) function and does not apply the derivative term. The addition of the derivative term would greatly complicate tuning of the control loop and besides is not normally applicable to the types of flow and pressure control used in pipelines.

PID Control I/O Assignments

Enter [1], [2], [3] or [4] at ‘Config PID ? "n"’ of the ‘Misc Setup’ menu to open the following password Privileged Level {PL} entries:

Assign Primary Variable

Loop #2

Loop #3

Loop #4

_______

_______

_______

_______

Enter the database index number of the primary variable in the PID loop (see the sidebar).

Remarks

____________ ____________ ____________ ____________

Enter a remark in this 16-character field to identify the function of each variable assignment.

Primary Action (F/R)

_______

_______

_______

_______

Enter [F] (forward action) if the value of the primary variable increases as the controller output % increases. Enter [R] (reverse action) if the value of the primary variable decreases as the controller output % increases.

Remote Setpoint I/O Point # Valid Assignments - Any integer or floating point variable within the database can be assigned to be the primary or secondary controlled variable (see Volume 4 for a complete listing of database addresses and index numbers).

Loop #1

_______

_______

_______

_______

Enter the I/O point number that the remote set point analog signal is connected to (01-24). Assign this point to 99 in cases where the set point will be downloaded via a communication port. Enter [0] if you will not be using a remote setpoint.

Assign Secondary Variable

_______

_______

_______

_______

Enter the database index number of the secondary variable in the PID loop (see the sidebar).

Remarks

____________ ____________ ____________ ____________

Enter a remark in this 16-character field to identify the function of each variable assignment.

Secondary Action (F/R)

_______

_______

_______

_______

Enter [F] (forward action) if the value of the primary variable increases as the controller output % increases. Enter [R] (reverse action) if the value of the primary variable decreases as the controller output % increases.

2-12

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Volume 3d


Error Select (L/H)

Loop #1

Loop #2

Loop #3

Loop #4

_______

_______

_______

_______

This entry determines the circumstances under which the primary or secondary variables are controlled. Enter [L] for low or [H] for high error select, according to the following modes: MODE #1 Are both primary and secondary actions forward? yes no

&

Enter [L] for Low Error Select

MODE #2 Are both primary and secondary actions forward? yes no

'

yes

Is secondary action forward? no

(

&

Enter [H] for High Error Select

Enter [H] for High Error Select

'

Is secondary action forward? no

(

Enter [L] for Low Error Select

Mode #1: The controller will attempt to control the primary variable but will switch to controlling the secondary variable, should the controller be trying to drive the secondary variable ABOVE its setpoint. An example of this mode would be controlling flow rate (primary) while not exceeding a MAXIMUM delivery pressure (secondary). Mode #2: The controller will attempt to control primary variable but will switch to controlling the secondary variable, should the controller be trying to drive the secondary variable BELOW its setpoint. An example of this mode would be controlling flow rate (primary) while not dropping below a MINIMUM pressure value (secondary).

Startup Mode (L/M)

_______

_______

_______

_______

This entry determines how the computer handles a system reset such as a momentary loss of power. Enter [L] (Last) to cause the PID loop to stay in the operating mode it was last in before the system reset. Enter [M] (Manual) to cause the PID loop to startup with the PID loop in manual control mode and with the valve open % as it was before the system reset.

PID Tag

_______

_______

_______

_______

Enter an 8-character tag name to identify the PID controller output signal on the LCD display.

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

2-13

Chapter 2



Analog Output Assignments

Press [n] [Enter] at ‘Config D/A Out "n"’ of the ‘Misc Setup’ menu to open the following password Level 1 {L1} entries (n = D/A Output #):

Analog Output #1

at 4mA

at 20mA

__________

__________

__________

Under ‘Assign’, enter the database index number of the variable that will be assigned to the digital-to-analog output points. Under ‘at 4mA’ and ‘at 20mA’, enter the required scaling parameters in engineering units at 4mA and 20mA (e.g.: For Meter #1 Net Flow Rate assign 7102. Typical scaling might be 4mA=0.0 Bbls/hr and 20mA=1000.0 Bbls/hr).

Remark

_______________

Enter a remark in this 16-character field which identifies and documents the function of each digital-to-analog output.

Analog Output #2 Remark Analog Output #3 Remark Analog Output #4 Remark Analog Output #5 Remark Analog Output #6 Remark Analog Output #7 Remark Analog Output #8 Remark Analog Output #9 Remark Analog Output #10 Remark Analog Output #11 Remark Analog Output #12 Remark

2-14

Assign

__________

__________

__________

_______________ __________

__________

__________

_______________ __________

__________

__________

_______________ __________

__________

__________

_______________ __________

__________

__________

_______________ __________

__________

__________

_______________ __________

__________

__________

_______________ __________

__________

__________

_______________ __________

__________

__________

_______________ __________

__________

__________

_______________ __________

__________

__________

_______________

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Volume 3d


2.5.10. Front Panel Counter Settings Enter [Y] at ‘Front Pnl Counters’ of the ‘Misc Setup’ menu to open the following password Level 1 {L1} entries:

Assign Front Panel Counter

Counter A

Counter B

Counter C

__________

__________

__________

Enter the database index number of the accumulator variable that will be output to this electromechanical counter. The unit of measure is the same as that shown on the LCD for the totalizer (i.e., barrels, klbs, 3 m , etc.) The maximum count rate is limited to 10 counts per second. Count rates higher than 10 pulses per second will cause the computer to remember how many counts did not get output and continue to output after the flow stops until all buffered counts are output.

Remark

____________ ____________ ____________

Enter a remark in this 16-character field which identifies and documents the function of each front panel counter.

Pulses/Unit

__________

__________

__________

Enter the number of pulses per unit (volume, mass, energy).

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

2-15

Chapter 2


2.5.11. Programmable Boolean Statements Program Booleans These 64 Boolean statements are evaluated every 100 msec starting at Point 1025 continuing through 1088. Each statement can contain up to 3 Boolean variables, optionally preceded by the slash (/) denoting the NOT Function and separated by a valid Boolean operator: Operator Symbol NOT / AND & OR + EXOR * EQUAL = IF ) GOTO G MOVE : COMPARE % INDIRECT “ E.g.: 1025 1002&/1003 Boolean 1025 is true when point 1002 is true AND point 1003 is NOT true. Note: Points 1002 and 1003 in this example reflect the status of Physical Digital I/O Points 2 and 3. There are no limitations as to what Boolean points can be used in a statement. Statements can contain the results from other statements. E.g.: 1026 /1025+1105 Boolean 1026 is true when Boolean 1025 is NOT true OR Point 1105 is true. Using the ‘=’ operator, the result of a statement can initiate a command. E.g.: 1027 1719=1026 Request a ‘Snapshot Report’ when Boolean 1026 is true. Note: See Volume 4 for detailed list of Booleans and Status Commands.

2-16

Enter [Y] at ‘Program Booleans ?’ of the ‘Misc Setup’ menu to open the following password Privileged Level {PL} entries: Boolean Point 10xx

Equation or Statement

Comment or Remark

25:

_______________________ _______________________

26:

_______________________ _______________________

27:

_______________________ _______________________

28:

_______________________ _______________________

29:

_______________________ _______________________

30:

_______________________ _______________________

31:

_______________________ _______________________

32:

_______________________ _______________________

33:

_______________________ _______________________

34:

_______________________ _______________________

35:

_______________________ _______________________

36:

_______________________ _______________________

37:

_______________________ _______________________

38:

_______________________ _______________________

39:

_______________________ _______________________

40:

_______________________ _______________________

41:

_______________________ _______________________

42:

_______________________ _______________________

43:

_______________________ _______________________

44:

_______________________ _______________________

45:

_______________________ _______________________

46:

_______________________ _______________________

47:

_______________________ _______________________

48:

_______________________ _______________________

49:

_______________________ _______________________

50:

_______________________ _______________________

51:

_______________________ _______________________

52:

_______________________ _______________________

53:

_______________________ _______________________

54:

_______________________ _______________________

55:

_______________________ _______________________

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Volume 3d

Configuration and Advanced Operation Boolean Point 10xx


Comment or Remark

TIP - Use the blank lines provided next to each configuration option to write down the corresponding settings you entered in the flow computer.

56:

_______________________ _______________________

57:

_______________________ _______________________

58:

_______________________ _______________________

59:

_______________________ _______________________

Program Booleans These 64 Boolean statements are evaluated every 100 msec starting at Point 1025 continuing through 1088. Each statement can contain up to 3 Boolean variables, optionally preceded by the slash (/) denoting the NOT Function and separated by a valid Boolean operator: Operator Symbol NOT / AND & OR + EXOR * EQUAL = IF ) GOTO G MOVE : COMPARE % INDIRECT “ E.g.: 1025 1002&/1003 Boolean 1025 is true when point 1002 is true AND point 1003 is NOT true. Note: Points 1002 and 1003 in this example reflect the status of Physical Digital I/O Points 2 and 3. There are no limitations as to what Boolean points can be used in a statement. Statements can contain the results from other statements. E.g.: 1026 /1025+1105 Boolean 1026 is true when Boolean 1025 is NOT true OR Point 1105 is true. Using the ‘=’ operator, the result of a statement can initiate a command. E.g.: 1027 1719=1026 Request a ‘Snapshot Report’ when Boolean 1026 is true.

60:

_______________________ _______________________

61:

_______________________ _______________________

62:

_______________________ _______________________

63:

_______________________ _______________________

64:

_______________________ _______________________

65:

_______________________ _______________________

66:

_______________________ _______________________

67:

_______________________ _______________________

68:

_______________________ _______________________

69:

_______________________ _______________________

70:

_______________________ _______________________

71:

_______________________ _______________________

72:

_______________________ _______________________

73:

_______________________ _______________________

74:

_______________________ _______________________

75:

_______________________ _______________________

76:

_______________________ _______________________

77:

_______________________ _______________________

78:

_______________________ _______________________

79:

_______________________ _______________________

80:

_______________________ _______________________

81:

_______________________ _______________________

82:

_______________________ _______________________

83:

_______________________ _______________________

84:

_______________________ _______________________

85:

_______________________ _______________________

86:

_______________________ _______________________

87:

_______________________ _______________________

88:

_______________________ _______________________

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

2-17

Chapter 2


2.5.12. Programmable Variables These 64 variable statements are evaluated every 500 msec starting at the statement that determines the value of Points 7025 through 7088. Each statement can contain up to 3 variables or constants. Variables can be optionally preceded by the ‘$’ symbol denoting the ABSOLUTE value of the variable is to be used. Constants are identified by placing a ’#’ symbol ahead of the number. These and other operators are: Operator Symbol ABSOLUTE $ CONSTANT # POWER & MULTIPLY * DIVIDE / ADD + SUBTRACT EQUAL = IF ) GOTO G MOVE : COMPARE % INDIRECT “ The order of precedence is: 1) ABSOLUTE 2) POWER 3) MULTIPLY/DIVIDE 4) ADD/SUBTRACT In cases where operators have the same precedence, statements are evaluated left to right. E.g.: The value of floating point variable 7035 is defined as: 7035:7027�.5*7026 The power operator is evaluated first (the value of Point 7035 is set equal to the square root of the number contained in Point 7027) and the result is multiplied by the number stored in variable 7026. Note that statements can contain the results of other statements. (See OmniCom Help for more information by pressing [F1] on your PC keyboard in the “Configure Variable Statement’ menu.)

2-18

Programmable Variable Statements

Enter [Y] at ‘Program Variables ?’ of the ‘Misc Setup’ menu to open the following password Privileged Level {PL} entries: Prog Variable 70xx


Comment or Remark

25:

_______________________ _______________________

26:

_______________________ _______________________

27:

_______________________ _______________________

28:

_______________________ _______________________

29:

_______________________ _______________________

30:

_______________________ _______________________

31:

_______________________ _______________________

32:

_______________________ _______________________

33:

_______________________ _______________________

34:

_______________________ _______________________

35:

_______________________ _______________________

36:

_______________________ _______________________

37:

_______________________ _______________________

38:

_______________________ _______________________

39:

_______________________ _______________________

40:

_______________________ _______________________

41:

_______________________ _______________________

42:

_______________________ _______________________

43:

_______________________ _______________________

44:

_______________________ _______________________

45:

_______________________ _______________________

46:

_______________________ _______________________

47:

_______________________ _______________________

48:

_______________________ _______________________

49:

_______________________ _______________________

50:

_______________________ _______________________

51:

_______________________ _______________________

52:

_______________________ _______________________

53:

_______________________ _______________________

54:

_______________________ _______________________

55:

_______________________ _______________________

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Volume 3d

Configuration and Advanced Operation Prog Variable 70xx

TIP - Use the blank lines provided next to each configuration option to write down the corresponding settings you enter in the flow computer.

Note: See Volume 4 for detailed list of Booleans and Status Commands

Valid Numeric Variables These are any long integer or floating point number within the database (Points 5000-8999), including Boolean variables. For the purpose of evaluation, Boolean variables have the value of 1.0 if they are True and 0.0 if they are False.

23/27.71+ ! 05/99


Comment or Remark

56:

_______________________ _______________________

57:

_______________________ _______________________

58:

_______________________ _______________________

59:

_______________________ _______________________

60:

_______________________ _______________________

61:

_______________________ _______________________

62:

_______________________ _______________________

63:

_______________________ _______________________

64:

_______________________ _______________________

65:

_______________________ _______________________

66:

_______________________ _______________________

67:

_______________________ _______________________

68:

_______________________ _______________________

69:

_______________________ _______________________

70:

_______________________ _______________________

71:

_______________________ _______________________

72:

_______________________ _______________________

73:

_______________________ _______________________

74:

_______________________ _______________________

75:

_______________________ _______________________

76:

_______________________ _______________________

77:

_______________________ _______________________

78:

_______________________ _______________________

79:

_______________________ _______________________

80:

_______________________ _______________________

81:

_______________________ _______________________

82:

_______________________ _______________________

83:

_______________________ _______________________

84:

_______________________ _______________________

85:

_______________________ _______________________

86:

_______________________ _______________________

87:

_______________________ _______________________

88:

_______________________ _______________________

2-19

Chapter 2


2.5.13. User Display Settings Valid Index Number Assignments - Any 32-bit integer or floating point variable within the database can be assigned to be viewed via a user display (see Volume 4 for a complete listing). Valid Key Press Sequences - You may select a sequence of up to 4 key presses to recall each display. This does not count the [Display/Enter] key press which must be used to signal the end of the sequence. Each key is identified by the red A through Z character on each valid key. Valid keys are listed below [A] - also labeled [Gross] [B] - also labeled [Net] [C] - also labeled [Mass] [D] - also labeled [Energy] [E] - also labeled [S.G./API] [F] - also labeled [Control] [G] - also labeled [Temp] [H] - also labeled [Press] [I] - also labeled [Density] [J] - also labeled [D.P.] [K] - also labeled [Orifice] [L] - also labeled [Meter] [M] - also labeled [Time] [N] - also labeled [Counts] [O] - also labeled [Factor] [P] - also labeled [Preset] [Q] - also labeled [Batch] [R] - also labeled [Analysis] [S] - also labeled [Print] [T] - also labeled [Prove] [U] - also labeled [Status] [V] - also labeled [Alarms] [W] - also labeled [Product] [X] - also labeled [Setup] [Y] - also labeled [Input] [Z] - also labeled [Output]

The [↑ ↑]/[↓ ↓]/[← ←]/[→ →] (Up/ Down/Left/Right arrow) keys and the [Prog], [Alpha Shift] and [Clear] keys cannot be used in a key press sequence. Note: The ‘A’ through ‘Z’ keys are used simply to identify key presses. The [Alpha Shift] key does not need to be used when recalling user displays.

2-20

Enter 1 through 8 for the selected user display at ‘User Display ? “n”’ of the ‘Misc Setup’ menu to open the following password Level 1 {L1} entries: User Display #1 Key Press Sequence

[ ][ ][ ][ ]

Using the keys marked A through Z, enter the sequence of key presses needed to recall the selected user display (see the side bar for details). A maximum of 4 keys are allowed. User key press sequences take priority over any existing resident key press sequences. st

1 Variable Tag

_______________

Enter an 8-character tag name used to identify the display variable on the LCD display. st

1 Variable Index Number

_______________

Enter the database index number of the variable that you want to appear on the LCD display. Each variable within the flow computer database is assigned an index number or address. Any Boolean integer or floating point variable within the database can be displayed. st

1 Variable Decimal Point Position

_______________

Enter the number of digits to the right of the decimal point for the variable. Valid entries are 0 through 7. The computer will display each variable using the display resolution that you have selected, except in cases where the number is too large or too small. In either case, the flow computer will adjust the decimal position or default to scientific display mode. nd

2

Tag

Index #

Decimal Points

Variable

____________

________

____________

rd

3 Variable

____________

________

____________

th

____________

________

____________

4 Variable

User Display #2 Key Press Sequence st

1 Variable nd

[ ][ ][ ][ ]

Tag

Index #

Decimal Points

____________

________

____________

Variable

____________

________

____________

rd

3 Variable

____________

________

____________

th

____________

________

____________

2

4 Variable


1 Variable nd

[ ][ ][ ][ ]

Tag

Index #

Decimal Points

____________

________

____________

Variable

____________

________

____________

rd

3 Variable

____________

________

____________

th

____________

________

____________

2

4 Variable

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Volume 3d


User Display #4 Key Press Sequence Valid Index Number Assignments - Any 32-bit integer or floating point variable within the database can be assigned to be viewed via a user display (see Volume 4 for a complete listing). Valid Key Press Sequences - You may select a sequence of up to 4 key presses to recall each display. This does not count the [Display/Enter] key press which must be used to signal the end of the sequence. Each key is identified by the red A through Z character on each valid key. Valid keys are listed below [A] - also labeled [Gross] [B] - also labeled [Net] [C] - also labeled [Mass] [D] - also labeled [Energy] [E] - also labeled [S.G./API] [F] - also labeled [Control] [G] - also labeled [Temp] [H] - also labeled [Press] [I] - also labeled [Density] [J] - also labeled [D.P.] [K] - also labeled [Orifice] [L] - also labeled [Meter] [M] - also labeled [Time] [N] - also labeled [Counts] [O] - also labeled [Factor] [P] - also labeled [Preset] [Q] - also labeled [Batch] [R] - also labeled [Analysis] [S] - also labeled [Print] [T] - also labeled [Prove] [U] - also labeled [Status] [V] - also labeled [Alarms] [W] - also labeled [Product] [X] - also labeled [Setup] [Y] - also labeled [Input] [Z] - also labeled [Output]

The [↑ ↑]/[↓ ↓]/[← ←]/[→ →] (Up/ Down/Left/Right arrow) keys and the [Prog], [Alpha Shift] and [Clear] keys cannot be used in a key press sequence.

Tag

Index #

Decimal Points

____________

________

____________

Variable

____________

________

____________

3 Variable

rd

____________

________

____________

th

____________

________

____________

st

1 Variable nd

2

4 Variable


1 Variable nd

[ ][ ][ ][ ]

Tag

Index #

Decimal Points

____________

________

____________

Variable

____________

________

____________

rd

3 Variable

____________

________

____________

th

____________

________

____________

2

4 Variable


1 Variable nd

[ ][ ][ ][ ]

Tag

Index #

Decimal Points

____________

________

____________

Variable

____________

________

____________

rd

3 Variable

____________

________

____________

th

____________

________

____________

2

4 Variable


1 Variable nd

[ ][ ][ ][ ]

Tag

Index #

Decimal Points

____________

________

____________

Variable

____________

________

____________

rd

3 Variable

____________

________

____________

th

____________

________

____________

2

4 Variable


1 Variable nd

[ ][ ][ ][ ]

Tag

Index #

Decimal Points

____________

________

____________

Variable

____________

________

____________

rd

3 Variable

____________

________

____________

th

____________

________

____________

2

4 Variable

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

[ ][ ][ ][ ]

2-21

Chapter 2


2.5.14. Digital I/O Point Settings TIP - Use the blank lines provided next to each configuration option to write down the corresponding settings you entered in the flow computer. Some of these entries may not appear on the display or in OmniCom. Depending on the various configuration settings of your specific metering system, only those configuration options which are applicable will be displayed.

Enter 1 through 24 for the selected digital I/O Point at ‘Config Digital “n”’ of the ‘Misc Setup’ menu to open the following password Level 1 {L1} entries: Assign

Digital I/O #1 Remark Digital I/O #2 Remark Digital I/O #3

Config Digital ”n” - Assign each physical I/O point to a Modbus address of a Boolean variable. There are no limitations as to what Boolean points can be assigned to physical I/O points. Enter [0] (zero) for Modbus control. Assigning as Pulse Outputs - Meter and Station Accumulators may be output in the form of pulses. Pulse Width - Pulse width is measured using 10msec ticks; i.e., 100 = 1 second. Pulse per Unit - Pulse per unit entry can be used to provide unit conversion (e.g.: entering 4.2 pulses per barrel will give 1 pulse every 10 gallons as there are 42 gallons in a barrel). The units of volume, mass and energy flow are the same as is displayed on the LCD. Assigning as Control Output - Any internal alarm or Boolean can be output.

Remark Digital I/O #4 Remark Digital I/O #5 Remark Digital I/O #6 Remark Digital I/O #7 Remark Digital I/O #8 Remark Digital I/O #9 Remark Digital I/O #10 Remark Digital I/O #11 Remark Digital I/O #12 Remark

2-22

________

Pulse Width Pulse/Unit or Delay On

________ ________

Delay Off

________ ________

_______________ ________

________ ________

________ ________

_______________ ________

________ ________

________ ________

_______________ ________

________ ________

________ ________

_______________ ________

________ ________

________ ________

_______________ ________

________ ________

________ ________

_______________ ________

________ ________

________ ________

_______________ ________

________ ________

________ ________

_______________ ________

________ ________

________ ________

_______________ ________

________ ________

________ ________

_______________ ________

________ ________

________ ________

_______________ ________

________ ________

________ ________

_______________

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Volume 3d

Configuration and Advanced Operation Assign

Delay On/Off - Used to delay or stretch a control output. The delay is measured using 100msec ticks; i.e., 10 = 1 second. Assigning as Status or Command Inputs Switches, etc., can be used to trigger events within the flow computer, such as end a batch or start a prove sequence (see the facing page for more details). 1700 Dummy Boolean Assign all physical I/O points which will be used only in Boolean statements for sequencing or control to 1700. This sets up the points as an input only. Note: See Volume 4 for valid assignments.

Digital I/O #13 Remark Digital I/O #14 Remark Digital I/O #15 Remark Digital I/O #16 Remark Digital I/O #17 Remark Digital I/O #18 Remark Digital I/O #19 Remark Digital I/O #20 Remark Digital I/O #21 Remark Digital I/O #22 Remark Digital I/O #23 Remark Digital I/O #24 Remark

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

________

Pulse Width Pulse/Unit or Delay On

________ ________

Delay Off

________ ________

_______________ ________

________ ________

________ ________

_______________ ________

________ ________

________ ________

_______________ ________

________ ________

________ ________

_______________ ________

________ ________

________ ________

_______________ ________

________ ________

________ ________

_______________ ________

________ ________

________ ________

_______________ ________

________ ________

________ ________

_______________ ________

________ ________

________ ________

_______________ ________

________ ________

________ ________

_______________ ________

________ ________

________ ________

_______________ ________

________ ________

________ ________

_______________

2-23

Chapter 2


2.5.15. Serial Input / Output Settings Baud Rates Available 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400. Data Bits - 7 or 8 - 7 for ASCII Modbus, 8 for RTU Modbus.

Enter [1], [2], [3] or [4] at ‘Serial I/O “n”’ of the ‘Misc Setup’ menu to open the following entries: Port #1

Port #2

Port #3

Port #4

{L1} Baud Rate

_______

_______

_______

_______

{L1} Number of Stop Bits

_______

_______

_______

_______

{L1} Number of Data Bits

_______

_______

_______

_______

{L1} Parity Bit (Even/Odd/None)

_______

_______

_______

_______

{L1} Transmit Carrier Key Delay

_______

_______

_______

_______

Stop Bits - 0, 1 or 2. Parity Bit - Odd, Even, None. Transmitter Carrier Key Delay - Delays are approximate only. 0=msec, 1=50msec, 2=100msec, 3=150msec. Modbus Type - Select the protocol type which matches the Modbus master device. If the master can support either ASCII or RTU, choose RTU protocol as it is approximately twice as efficient as the ASCII protocol. Serial Ports #3 and #4 have additional protocol options.  Compatible Modicon OmniCom will not operate if downloading configuration with this entry set to ‘Y’.

Enter one of the following options: 0 = 0 msec delay 1 = 50 msec delay

2 = 100 msec delay 3 = 150 msec delay

You must enter [0] for Transmitter Carrier Key Delay for any port that will be used with a shared printer.

{L1} Serial Port Type

_______

This entry corresponds to Serial Port #1 only. Enter one of the following options: 0 = Printer 1 = Modbus RTU

{L1} Modbus Protocol Type

_______

_______

_______

This entry does not apply to Serial Port #1. Enter the type of protocol to be used on this port: 0 = Modbus RTU 1 = Modbus ASCII 2 = Modbus RTU (modem). Serial Port #4 has the following additional options: 3 = Allen Bradley Full Duplex 4 = Allen Bradley Half Duplex Mixed protocols are not allowed on a communication link. All devices must use the same protocol type. The RTU protocol is preferred as it is twice the speed of the ASCII. Selecting 'Modbus RTU Modem' provides RTU protocol with relaxed timing which is usually needed when communicating via smart modems. These modems have been found to insert intercharacter delays which cause a premature end of message to be detected by the flow computer. IMPORTANT: You must select either 'Modbus RTU' or 'Modbus RTU Modem' protocol for the port that will be used to communicate with OmniCom PC configuration software.

{L1} Modbus ID

_______

_______

_______

This entry does not apply to Serial Port #1 when a printer is selected as the port type. Enter the Modbus slave ID number that this serial port will respond to (1 through 247 acceptable). This entry will be disabled for Serial Port #1 if a printer is selected as the port type.

2-24

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Volume 3d


Skip CRC/LCR Check - If you have disabled the error checking on incoming messages, you must substitute dummy bytes in the message string. Outgoing messages will always include the error checking bytes.

23/27.71+ ! 05/99


{L1} Modicon Compatible (Y/N)

Port #1

Port #2

Port #3

Port #4

_______

_______

_______

_______

Enter [Y] to configure these Modbus ports to be compatible with Modicon PLC equipment (e.g.: 984 series) and DCS systems (e.g.: Honeywell TDC3000 systems using the Advanced Process Manager APM-SI). This entry will be disabled for Serial Port #1 if a printer is selected as the port type. In this mode the point number indexes requested and transmitted while using the Modbus RTU modes are actually one less than the index number documented in this manual. ASCII mode transmissions use the address documented in this manual. Data is counted in numbers of 16 bit registers rather than points. i.e., To request two 4 byte IEEE floating point variables, index numbers 7101 and 7102, would require the host to ask for 4 registers starting at index 7100. IEEE Floating Point data bytes are transmitted in swapped format:

NORMAL IEEE FLOAT FORMAT Byte #1 Biased Exponent

Byte #2 MS Mantissa

{L1} CRC Enabled

Byte #3 Mantissa

ORDER TRANSMITTED

Byte #4 LS Mantissa

Byte #1 Mantissa

_______

Byte #2 Byte #3 LS Biased Mantissa Exponent

_______

_______

Byte #4 MS Mantissa

_______

Many protocols use either a CRC, LRC or BCC error check to ensure that data received is not corrupted. The flow computer can be configured to ignore the error checking on incoming messages. This allows software developers an easy means of debugging communications software. Error checking should only be disabled temporarily when debugging the master slave communication link. The computer expects dummy characters in place of the CRC, LRC or BCC. Enter [Y] to perform error checking on incoming messages. For maximum data integrity always enter [Y] during normal running conditions. Enter [N] to disable error checking on incoming messages. This entry will be disabled for Serial Port #1 if a printer is selected as the port type.

2-25

Chapter 2


 Data Packet Settings 2.5.16. Custom Modbus INFO - Packets defined are usually read-only and must always be retrieved as a packet. When Modicon 984 is selected these packet setup entries are used to define a logical array of variables which can be read or written in any grouping. The number of data points is always input in terms of Omni “logical” elements; i.e., an IEEE floating point number comprises two 16bit words but is considered one logical element.


Custom Modbus Data Packets are provided to reduce the number of polls needed to read multiple variables which may be in different areas of the database. Groups of data points of any type of data can be concatenated into one packet by entering each data group starting index numbers 001, 201 and 401. The number of data bytes in a custom packet in non-Modicon compatible mode cannot exceed 250 (RTU mode) or 500 (ASCII mode). When Modicon compatible is selected, the number of data bytes in a custom packet cannot exceed 400 (RTU mode) or 800 (ASCII mode). Enter [1], [2] or [3] to select a data packet at ‘Custom Packet “n”’ of the ‘Misc Setup’ menu to open the entries below. Under Index #, enter the database address or Modbus index number for each start data point of each group. Under Points, enter the number of consecutive data points to include in each data group.

Custom Modbus Data Packet #1 (Addressed at 001) {L1} Index # | Points

Index # | Points

Index # | Points

Index # | Points

#1_______|_____

#2_______|_____

#3_______|_____

#4_______|_____

#5_______|_____

#6_______|_____

#7_______|_____

#8_______|_____

#9_______|_____ #10_______|_____ #11_______|_____ #12_______|_____ #13_______|_____ #14_______|_____ #15_______|_____ #16_______|_____ #17_______|_____ #18_______|_____ #19_______|_____ #20_______|_____


Index # | Points

Index # | Points

Index # | Points

#1_______|_____

#2_______|_____

#3_______|_____

#4_______|_____

#5_______|_____

#6_______|_____

#7_______|_____

#8_______|_____


Index # | Points

Index # | Points

Index # | Points

#1_______|_____

#2_______|_____

#3_______|_____

#4_______|_____

#5_______|_____

#6_______|_____

#7_______|_____

#8_______|_____

#9_______|_____ #10_______|_____ #11_______|_____ #12_______|_____ #13_______|_____ #14_______|_____ #15_______|_____ #16_______|_____ #17_______|_____ #18_______|_____ #19_______|_____ #20_______|_____

2-26

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Volume 3d


2.5.17. Programmable Logic Controller Setup INFO - Characters in ’{ }’ refer to password levels. Characters in ‘[ ]’ refer to key presses. TIP - Use the blank lines provided next to each configuration option to write down the corresponding settings you entered in the flow computer. Some of these entries may not appear on the display or in OmniCom. Depending on the various configuration settings of your specific metering system, only those configuration options which are applicable will be displayed.

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Note: See Technical Bulletin TB-960702 “Communicating with AllenBradley Programmable Logic Controllers” in Volume 5 for information on the ‘PLC Group “n”’ submenu.

2.5.18. Archive File Setup Note: See Technical Bulletin TB-960703 “Storing Archive Data within the Flow Computer” in Volume 5 for information on the ‘Archive File “n”’ submenu.

2-27

Chapter 2


2.5.19. Peer-to-Peer Communications Settings INFO - Characters in ’{ }’ refer to password levels. Characters in ‘[ ]’ refer to key presses. TIP - Use the blank lines provided next to each configuration option to write down the corresponding settings you entered in the flow computer. Some of these entries may not appear on the display or in OmniCom. Depending on the various configuration settings of your specific metering system, only those configuration options which are applicable will be displayed.

TIP - For maximum efficiency, always start Modbus ID numbers from 1.

Serial Port #2 of the flow computer can be configured to act as a simple Modbus slave port or as a peer-to-peer communication link. Using the peer-to-peer link allows multiple flow computers to be interconnected and share data. Enter [Y] at ‘Peer / Peer Comm (Y) ?’ of the ‘Misc Setup’ menu to open the following submenu: {L1} Activate Redundancy Mode

_______________

The active redundancy mode feature allows two flow computers to operate as a pair. Each flow computer receives the same process signals and performs the same calculations; i.e., in “redundancy”. This mode is typically used in critical applications where failure of a flow computer cannot be tolerated. Enter [Y] to allow both flow computers to manage the peer-to-peer link between them and automatically switch between being the master or slave computer. Important data such as meter factors and PID control settings can be continually exchanged between flow computers ensuring that at any time, should a failure occur to one, the other unit would be able to assume control of the PID and ticketing functions. The redundancy mode requires that four digital I/O ports be cross-connected to sense watchdog failure modes using the following points 2714=Input master status, 2864=Output Master status, 2713 Input watchdog status, 2863 = Output of watchdog status. (See Technical Bulletin TB-980402 in Volume 5.)

{L1} Next Master in Sequence

_______________

Enter the slave number of the next flow computer in sequence in the peer-to-peer communication sequence to pass over control. After the flow computer completes all of it's transactions it will attempt to pass over master control of the Modbus link to this Modbus ID. For maximum efficiency, always start Modbus ID definitions from 1. Enter the Modbus ID of this flow computer if there are no other peers in sequence on the communication link. Enter [0] to disable the peer-to-peer feature and use Serial Port #2 as a standard Modbus slave port.

{L1} Last Master in Sequence ID #

_______________

Enter the slave number of the last Omni (the highest Modbus ID number) in the peer-to-peer communication sequence. This is required for error recovery. Should this flow computer be unable to hand over control to the 'next master in sequence' (see previous entry), it will attempt to establish communications with a Modbus slave with a higher Modbus ID. It will keep trying until the ID number exceeds this entry. At that point the flow computer will start at Modbus ID #1. Enter the Modbus ID of this flow computer if it is the only master on the link.

{L1} Retry Timer

_______________

Should any slave device fail to respond to a communication request, the master device will retry to establish communications several times. Enter the number of 50 millisecond ticks that the flow computer should wait for a response from the slave device. To ensure fast recovery from communication failures, set this entry to as low a number as possible. Enter [3] for peerto-peer links involving only Omni flow computers. Other Modbus devices may require more time to respond.

2-28

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Volume 3d

Configuration and Advanced Operation Transaction #1 {L1} Target Slave ID #


_______________

Each transfer of data is called a transaction. Enter the Modbus ID # of the other slave involved in the transaction. Modbus ID ‘0’ can be used to broadcast write to all Modbus slave devices connected to the peer-to-peer link. Other valid IDs range from 1-247.

{L1} Read/Write ?

_______________

Enter [R] if data will be read from the slave. Enter [W] if data will be written to the slave. INFO - The Omni Flow Computer determines what Modbus function code and what data type is involved by the Modbus index number of the data within the Omni’s database. The Source Index determines the data type for a ‘write’. The Destination Index determines the data type for a ‘read’. Function codes used are: 01=Read Multiple Booleans 15=Write Multiple Booleans 03=Read Multiple Variables 16=Write Multiple Variables

{L1} Source Index #

_______________

Enter the database index number or address of the Modbus point where the data is to be obtained, corresponding to the first data point of the transaction. This is the slave’s database index number when the transaction is a ‘read’, and the master’s database index number when the transaction is a ‘write’. Refer to Volume 4 for a list of available database addresses or index numbers.

{L1} Number of Points

_______________

Enter the number of contiguous points to transfer. Each transaction can transfer multiple data points that can be any valid data type recognized by the Omni. The maximum number of points that can be transferred depends on the type of data: ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑

IEEE floats (4bytes each) 32-bit Integers (4 bytes each) 16-bit integers (2 bytes each) Packed coils or status (8 to a byte)

→ → → →

63 max 63 max 127 max 2040 max.

The Omni automatically knows what Modbus function to use and what data types are involved by the Modbus index number of the data within the flow computer database. The destination index number determines the data type when the transaction is a ‘read’. The source index number determines the data type when the transaction is a ‘write’.

{L1} Destination Index #

_______________

Enter the database index number or address of where the data is to be stored (destination index or address). If the transaction is a ‘read’, this will be the index number within the master Omni’s database. If the transaction is a ‘write’, this will be the register number within the remote slave’s database.

Transaction #2 Target Slave ID #

_______________

Read/Write ?

_______________

Source Index #

_______________

Number of Points

_______________

Destination Index #

_______________


23/27.71+ ! 05/99

_______________

Read/Write ?

_______________

Source Index #

_______________

Number of Points

_______________

Destination Index #

_______________

2-29

Chapter 2

Flow Computer Configuration Transaction #4

TIP - Use the blank lines provided next to each configuration option to write down the corresponding settings you entered in the flow computer. Some of these entries may not appear on the display or in OmniCom. Depending on the various configuration settings of your specific metering system, only those configuration options which are applicable will be displayed.

Target Slave ID #

_______________

Read/Write ?

_______________

Source Index #

_______________

Number of Points

_______________

Destination Index #

_______________


_______________

Read/Write ?

_______________

Source Index #

_______________

Number of Points

_______________

Destination Index #

_______________


_______________

Read/Write ?

_______________

Source Index #

_______________

Number of Points

_______________

Destination Index #

_______________


_______________

Read/Write ?

_______________

Source Index #

_______________

Number of Points

_______________

Destination Index #

_______________


2-30

_______________

Read/Write ?

_______________

Source Index #

_______________

Number of Points

_______________

Destination Index #

_______________

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Volume 3d

Configuration and Advanced Operation Transaction #9


INFO - The Omni Flow Computer determines what Modbus function code and what data type is involved by the Modbus index number of the data within the Omni’s database. The Source Index determines the data type for a ‘write’. The Destination Index determines the data type for a ‘read’. Function codes used are: 01=Read Multiple Booleans 15=Write Multiple Booleans 03=Read Multiple Variables 16=Write Multiple Variables

Target Slave ID #

_______________

Read/Write ?

_______________

Source Index #

_______________

Number of Points

_______________

Destination Index #

_______________


_______________

Read/Write ?

_______________

Source Index #

_______________

Number of Points

_______________

Destination Index #

_______________


_______________

Read/Write ?

_______________

Source Index #

_______________

Number of Points

_______________

Destination Index #

_______________


_______________

Read/Write ?

_______________

Source Index #

_______________

Number of Points

_______________

Destination Index #

_______________


23/27.71+ ! 05/99

_______________

Read/Write ?

_______________

Source Index #

_______________

Number of Points

_______________

Destination Index #

_______________

2-31

Chapter 2

Flow Computer Configuration Transaction #14


Target Slave ID #

_______________

Read/Write ?

_______________

Source Index #

_______________

Number of Points

_______________

Destination Index #

_______________


_______________

Read/Write ?

_______________

Source Index #

_______________

Number of Points

_______________

Destination Index #

_______________


2-32

_______________

Read/Write ?

_______________

Source Index #

_______________

Number of Points

_______________

Destination Index #

_______________

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Volume 3d


2.6. INFO - The first menu, 'Misc Configuration', should always be completed first as these entries specify the number and type of input and output devices connected to the flow computer; i.e., the menus following the 'Misc Configuration' menu do not ask for configuration data unless a transducer has been defined. Flow Computer Configuration via the Menu Selection Method It is best to use this method when programming an application for the first time as every possible option and variable will be prompted. Once a computer is in operation and you become familiar with the application you can decide to use the faster Random Access Method described below. Once you have finished entering data in a setup submenu, press the [Prog] key to return to the ‘Select Group Entry’ screen. Proceed as described in this manual for each setup option.

Setting Up the Time and Date

2.6.1.

Accessing the Time/Date Setup Submenu

Applying the Menu Selection Method (see sidebar), in the ‘Select Group Entry’ screen (Program Mode) press [Setup] [Enter] and a menu similar to the following will be displayed: *** SETUP MENU *** Misc Configuration Time/Date Setup _ Printer Setup Use the [$]/[%] (up/down arrow) keys to move the cursor to ‘Time/Date Setup’ and press [Enter] to access the submenu.

2.6.2.

Time and Date Settings

{L1} Omni Time

____:____:____

Enter Current Time using the correct method 'hh:mm:ss'. To change only the hour, minutes or seconds, move cursor to the respective position and enter the new setting.

{L1} Omni Date

____/____/____

Enter Current Date using the correct method 'mm/dd/yy' or ’dd/mm/yy’. To change only the month, day or year, move cursor to the respective position and enter the new setting.

{L1} Select Date Format Type

_____________

Select date format required by entering [Y] or [N]: Y = month/day/year N = day/month/year

Time and Date Setup via the Random Access Method - Setup entries require that you be in the Program Mode. In the Display Mode press the [Prog] key. The Program LED will glow green and the ‘Select Group Entry’ screen will appear. Then press [Time] [Enter] and use [$] / [%] keys to scroll.

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

2-33

Chapter 2


2.7. INFO - Characters in ’{ }’ refer to password levels. INFO - The first menu, 'Misc Configuration', should always be completed first as these entries specify the number and type of input and output devices connected to the flow computer; i.e., the menus following the 'Misc Configuration' menu do not ask for configuration data unless a transducer has been defined. Flow Computer Configuration via the Menu Selection Method It is best to use this method when programming an application for the first time as every possible option and variable will be prompted. Once a computer is in operation and you become familiar with the application you can decide to use the faster Random Access Method described below. Once you have finished entering data in a setup submenu, press the [Prog] key to return to the ‘Select Group Entry’ screen. Proceed as described in this manual for each setup option.

2.7.1.

Configuring Printers Accessing the Printer Setup Submenu

Applying the Menu Selection Method (see sidebar), in the ‘Select Group Entry’ screen (Program Mode) press [Setup] [Enter] and a menu similar to the following will be displayed: *** SETUP MENU *** Misc Configuration Time/Date Setup Printer Setup _ Use the [$]/[%] (up/down arrow) keys to move the cursor to ‘Printer Setup’ and press [Enter] to access the submenu.

2.7.2.

Printer Settings

{L1} Computer ID {L1} Print Interval in Minutes

2-34

_______________

Enter the number of minutes between each interval report. Entering [0] will disable interval reports. The maximum allowed is 1440 minutes which will provide one interval report per 24hour period.

{L1} Print Interval Start Time

_____:_____

Enter the start time from which the interval report timer is based (e.g.: Entering ‘01:00’ with a Print Interval of 120 minutes will provide an interval report every odd hour only).

{L1} Daily Report Time

_____:_____

Enter the hour at which the daily report will print at the beginning of the contract day (e.g.: 07:00).

{L1} Disable Daily Report? Printer Setup via the Random Access Method Setup entries require that you be in the Program Mode. In the Display Mode press the [Prog] key. The Program LED will glow green and the ‘Select Group Entry’ screen will appear. Then press [Print] [Setup] [Enter] and use [$] / [%] keys to scroll.

_______________

Appears on all reports. Enter up to 8 alphanumeric characters to identify the flow computer.

_______________

Enter [Y] to disable the Daily Report (default is 'N'). This simply blocks the report from printing. Data will still be sent to the historical buffers (last 8) and archive if archive is setup.

{L1} Daylight Savings Time Start

_____/_____/_____

Enter the Day/Month/Year that daylight savings time begins.

{L1} Daylight Savings Time End

_____/_____/_____

Enter the Day/Month/Year that daylight savings time ends.

{L1} Clear Daily Totals at Batch End?

_______________

Enter [N] to provide 24 hour totals of all flow through the flowmeter regardless of what product is run. Select [Y] to clear the totalizers at the end of each batch. This would mean that the daily totalizers would not necessarily represent 24 hours of flow but the amount of flow since the last batch end or the daily report

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Volume 3d

Configuration and Advanced Operation {L1} Automatic Hourly Batch Select?

TIP - Use the blank lines provided next to each configuration option to write down the corresponding settings you entered in the flow computer.

_______________

Enter [Y] to automatically cause a batch end every hour on the hour. If customized reports are selected a batch end report will be printed. If default reports are selected no batch end report will be printed.

{L1} Automatic Weekly Batch Select?

_______________

Enter a number 1 through 7 to automatically print a batch end report in addition to a daily report on a specific day of the week (0=No batch end, 1=Monday, 2=Tuesday, etc.).

{L1} Automatic Monthly Batch Select?

_______________

Enter a number 1 through 31 to automatically print a batch end report in place of a daily report on a specific day of the month (0=No batch end).

{L1} Print Priority

_______________

Enter [0] when the computer is connected to a dedicated printer. If several computers are sharing a common printer, one computer must be designated as the master and must be assigned the number 1. The remaining computers must each be assigned a different Print Priority number between 2 and 12.

{L1} Number of Nulls

_______________

For slow printers without an input buffer, a number of null characterss can be sent after each carriage return or line feed. A number between 0-255 will be accepted. Set this to ‘0’ if your printer supports hardware handshaking and you have connected pin 20 of the printer connector to terminal 6 of the flow computer (see Chapter 3).

{L1} Use Default Report Templates?

_______________

Entering [Y] instructs the flow computer to use the default report formats for Daily Batch End, Snapshot and Prover Reports. Enter [N] if you have downloaded your own custom report templates using the OmniCom program. Common Printer Control Codes Epson, IBM & Compatible: Condensed Mode= 0F Cancel Condensed= 12 OKI Data Models: Condensed Mode= 1D Cancel Condensed= 1E HP Laser Jet II & Compatible: Condensed= 1B266B3253 Cancel Cond= 1B266B3053

{L1} Condensed Print Mode Control String

_______________

Certain default report templates exceed 80 columns when the computer is configured for 4 meter runs and a station. Enter the hexadecimal character string which will put the printer into the condensed print mode. Data must be in sets of 2 characters (i.e., 05 not 5). A maximum of 5 control characters are allowed.

{L1} Cancel Condensed Print Mode Control String

_______________

Uncondensed Print Mode. Enter the hexadecimal character string which when sent to the printer will cancel the condensed print mode. Data must be in sets of 2 characters (i.e., 05 not 5). A maximum of 5 control characters are allowed.

{L1} Company Name _____________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ Two lines of the display allow entry of the Company Name. On each line enter a maximum of 19 characters and press [Enter]. Both lines are concatenated and appear on all reports.

{L1} Location ___________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ Two lines of the display allow entry of the station location Name. On each line enter a maximum of 19 characters and press [Enter]. Both lines are concatenated and appear on all reports.

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

2-35

Chapter 2


2.8. INFO - The first menu, 'Misc Configuration', should always be completed first as these entries specify the number and type of input and output devices connected to the flow computer; i.e., the menus following the 'Misc Configuration' menu do not ask for configuration data unless a transducer has been defined. Flow Computer Configuration via the Menu Selection Method It is best to use this method when programming an application for the first time as every possible option and variable will be prompted. Once a computer is in operation and you become familiar with the application you can decide to use the faster Random Access Method described below. Once you have finished entering data in a setup submenu, press the [Prog] key to return to the ‘Select Group Entry’ screen. Proceed as described in this manual for each setup option. Analyzer Setup via the Random Access Method Setup entries require that you be in the Program Mode. In the Display Mode press the [Prog] key. The Program LED will glow green and the ‘Select Group Entry’ screen will appear. Then press [Analysis] [Enter] or [Analysis] [Setup] [Enter] and use [$] / [%] keys to scroll.

2.8.1.

Configuring Gas Chromatograph (GC) Analyzers Accessing the Analyzer Setup Submenu

Applying the Menu Selection Method (see sidebar), in the ‘Select Group Entry’ screen (Program Mode) press [Setup] [Enter] and a menu similar to the following will be displayed: *** SETUP MENU Time/Date Setup Printer Setup Analyser Setup

*** _

Use the [$]/[%] (up/down arrow) keys to move the cursor to ‘Analyzer Setup’ and press [Enter] to access the submenu.

2.8.2.

Analyzer Settings

GC Analyzer ID #

_______________

Enter the identifying number of the Applied Automation or Daniels Danalyzer gas chromatograph. This is the serial communication ID number of the analyzer.

GC Analyzer Type

_______________

Enter the gas analyzer type: 0=Applied Automation, 1=Danalyzer.The Omni flow computer can communicate and retrieve analysis data from either an Applied Automation or a Daniels Danalyzer chromatograph. In both cases the flow computer uses the 3rd serial port for communications. When talking to an Applied Automation, the flow computer uses the AA proprietary HCI-A protocol interface. When talking to a Danalyzer, Modbus ASCII or RTU is used.

Results Interval (Minutes)

_______________

Enter the maximum number of minutes that the flow computer should wait for results from either type of gas chromatograph. When operating with an Applied Automation analyzer, the flow computer will request results from the chromatograph if it is not in the 'listen only' mode. The 'GC Alarm' bit will be set if no results are received after this request.

Listen Only Mode

_______________

Enter [Y] to set the flow computer to the ‘Listen Only’ mode. Enter [N] to disable this mode. In many cases, more than one flow computer will be connected to a single gas analyzer. Only one flow computer is allowed to act as a host device and request data from the analyzer. All of the remaining computers must 'listen' to the result data 'only'.

GC Fail Code

_______________

The selections are: 0=Always use the last good analysis from the GC, 1=Always use the manual overrides located in the 'Fluid Data and Analysis' menu, 2=Use the manual overrides if the GC fails. A failure may be due to a fatal error flagged by the GC indicating that the composition data may not be reliable. Fatal errors usually are caused by some type of hardware problem at the GC. EPROM error, D/A converter error, etc. A breakdown of communications between the flow computer and the GC will also cause a GC failure error.

2-36

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Volume 3d

Configuration and Advanced Operation Gas Chromatograph Component Numbers

INFO - Characters in ’{ }’ refer to password levels. TIP - Use the blank lines provided next to each configuration option to write down the corresponding settings you entered in the flow computer. Some of these entries may not appear on the display or in OmniCom. Depending on the various configuration settings of your specific metering system, only those configuration options which are applicable will be displayed.

Danalyzer C6+ Settings Danalyzer instruments (as of May 1994) group all components C6 through C8 as a C6+ group. Four different groupings of C6+ can be provided. These groups are numbered 108, 109, 110 and 111 in the Danalyzer documentation. For the Omni to work correctly the Danalyzer must be setup with the C6+ analysis value as the first component in its component table. The Omni will automatically determine the correct values of C6, C7 and C8 from the component code selected at the Danalyzer. Because of this, there should be no component number 1 in the Omni setup.

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Each gas chromatograph can be unique in the total number of components it can recognize and the order than they are presented. For the following settings, enter the component number position for each of the components listed below. Enter [0] for any unused components.

Methane (CH4)

_______________

Nitrogen (N2)

_______________

Carbon Dioxide (CO2)

_______________

Ethane (C2H6)

_______________

Propane (C3H8)

_______________

Water (H2O)

_______________

Hydrogen Sulfide (H2S)

_______________

Hydrogen (H2)

_______________

Carbon Monoxide (CO)

_______________

Oxygen (O2)

_______________

i-Butane (iC4H10)

_______________

n-Butane (nC4H10)

_______________

i-Pentane (iC5H12)

_______________

n-Pentane (n C5H12)

_______________

n-Hexane (C6H14)

_______________

n-Heptane (C7H16)

_______________

n-Octane (C8H16)

_______________

n-Nonane

_______________

n-Decane

_______________

Helium (He)

_______________

Argon (Ar)

_______________

Heating Value (SV)

_______________

Specific Gravity (SG)

_______________

2-37

Chapter 2


2.9.

INFO - The first menu, 'Misc Configuration', should always be completed first as these entries specify the number and type of input and output devices connected to the flow computer; i.e., the menus following the 'Misc Configuration' menu do not ask for configuration data unless a transducer has been defined. Premium Billing Threshold Level Setup via the Random Access Method - Premium Billing settings only apply to Firmware Revision 23.71+ (US customary units) and can only be accessed via the Random Access Method. Setup entries require that you be in the Program Mode. In the Display Mode press the [Prog] key. The Program LED will glow green and the ‘Select Group Entry’ screen will appear. Then press [Net] [Setup] [Enter] or [Setup] [Net] [Enter].

2-38

2.9.1.

Configuring Premium Billing Threshold Levels (Revision 23.71+ - US Customary Units Only) Accessing Premium Billing Settings

Premium Billing settings can only be accessed via the Random Access Method. Valid keypress sequences in the Program Mode are [Net] [Setup] [Enter] or [Setup] [Net] [Enter].

2.9.2.

Premium Billing Threshold Settings

Flow which occurs below Level 1 threshold will be accumulated in the 'Base Level' totalizer. Flow occurring between the Level 1 and the Level 2 threshold will accumulate in the 'Level 1' totalizer. Flow occurring between the Level 2 and the Level 3 threshold will accumulate in the 'Level 2' totalizer. Flow occurring above the Level 3 threshold will accumulated in the 'Level 3' totalizer. The 'Special Billing' threshold acts just like a fourth premium level when it is set to be greater in value than the Level 3 threshold but overrides any other premium threshold that is set greater than the Special Billing threshold. Premium totalizers are stored for each meter run and the station for the last 10 days (see database points 6n01-6n61 in Chapter 2 of Volume 4). For the following settings, enter the premium billing flow threshold levels in thousand standard cubic feet (MSCF)/hour. Station

Meter #1

Meter #2

Meter #3

Meter #4

Premium Level 1

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Premium Level 2

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Premium Level 3

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Special Billing

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Volume 3d


2.10. Configuring PID Control Outputs INFO - Characters in ’{ }’ refer to password levels.

2.10.1. Accessing the PID Control Setup Submenu


Applying the Menu Selection Method (see sidebar), in the ‘Select Group Entry’ screen (Program Mode) press [Setup] [Enter] and a menu similar to the following will be displayed:

Flow Computer Configuration via the Menu Selection Method It is best to use this method when programming an application for the first time as every possible option and variable will be prompted. Once a computer is in operation and you become familiar with the application you can decide to use the faster Random Access Method described below. Once you have finished entering data in a setup submenu, press the [Prog] key to return to the ‘Select Group Entry’ screen. Proceed as described in this manual for each setup option.

2.10.2. PID Control Output Settings

PID Control Output Setup via the Random Access Method - Setup entries require that you be in the Program Mode. In the Display Mode press the [Prog] key. The Program LED will glow green and the ‘Select Group Entry’ screen will appear. Then press [Control] [n] [Enter] (n = PID Control Loop # 1, 2, 3 or 4). Use [$] / [%] keys to scroll.

{L1} Primary Gain Factor

*** SETUP MENU *** Printer Setup Analyser Setup PID Control Setup _ Use the [$]/[%] (up/down arrow) keys to move the cursor to ‘PID Control Setup’ and press [Enter] to access the submenu.

Loop #1

Loop #2

Loop #3

Loop #4

_______

_______

_______

_______

Operating Mode Manual Valve Open (Y/N)

Enter [Y] to adjust the valve open % and adjust using the [$]/[%] keys. Enter [N] to change to AUTO mode.

Local Setpoint (Y/N)

_______

_______

_______

_______

Enter [Y] to use a local set point and adjust using the [$]/[%] keys. Enter [N] for ‘Remote’ set point mode.

Secondary Setpoint Value

_______

_______

_______

_______

Enter the value in engineering units for the set point of the secondary variable. The primary variable will be the controlled variable until the secondary variable reaches this set point. The secondary variable will not be allowed to drop below or rise above this set point, depending on the "Error Select" entry in the ‘Config PID’ menu.

Tuning Adjustments _______

_______

_______

_______

Enter a value between 0.01 to 99.99 for the Primary Gain Factor (Gain=1/Proportional Band).

{L1} Primary Integral Factor

_______

_______

_______

_______

Enter a value between 0.0 and 40.00 for the Primary Integral Factor (Repeats/Min=1/Integral Factor ) the reciprocal of the reset period).

{L1} Secondary Gain Factor

_______

_______

_______

_______

Enter a value between 0.01 to 99.99 for the Secondary Gain Factor (Gain=1/Proportional Band). The actual controller gain factor used when controlling the secondary variable is the product of this entry and the 'Primary Gain Factor'. Tune the primary control variable first and then use this entry to adjust for stable control of the secondary variable.

{L1} Secondary Integral Factor

_______

_______

_______

_______

Enter a value between 0 and 40.00 for the Secondary Integral Factor (Repeats/Min=1/Integral Factor ) the reciprocal of the reset period).

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

2-39

Chapter 2

INFO - The first menu, 'Misc Configuration', should always be completed first as these entries specify the number and type of input and output devices connected to the flow computer; i.e., the menus following the 'Misc Configuration' menu do not ask for configuration data unless a transducer has been defined.

PID Startup, Stop and Shutdown Ramp Command Points - These have been added to eliminate the need to manipulate the PID permissives directly. Using these command points greatly simplifies operation of the PID ramping functions. (See database points 1727-1730, 17881791, 1792-1795 respectively.)


{L1} Deadband %

Loop #1

Loop #2

Loop #3

Loop #4

_______

_______

_______

_______

Enter the dead band percent range. PID Control will only compensate for setpoint deviations out of this range. The control output will not change as long as the process input and the setpoint error (deviation) is within this dead band percentage limit range.

{L1} Startup Ramp %

_______

_______

_______

_______

Enter the maximum percentage to which the valve movement is limited per 500 msec at startst up. The control output is clamped at 0% until the 1 PID Permissive (PID #1-#4 ) database points 1722-1725) is set true. The control output % is then allowed to increase at the start-up ramp rate.

{L1} Shutdown Ramp %

_______

_______

_______

_______

Enter the maximum percentage to which the valve movement is limited per 500 msec at st shutdown. When the 1 PID Permissive is lost, the control output will ramp-down towards 0% at the shutdown ramp rate. nd

During the ramp-down phase, a 2 PID Permissive (PID #1-#4 ) database points 1752nd 1755) is used to provide a “ramp hold” function. If this 2 permissive is true, 100 msec before entering the ramp-down phase, the control output % will ramp-down and be held at the minimum ramp-down limit % (see the following entry) until it goes false. The control output will then immediately go to 0% (see sidebar).

{L1} Minimum Ramp to %

_______

_______

_______

_______

Enter the minimum percentage that the control output will be allowed to ramp down to. In many cases, it is important to deliver a precise amount of product. This requires that the control output be ramped to some minimum % and held there until the required delivery is complete. The control output is then immediately set to 0%.

Primary Controlled (Remote Setpoint) Variable {L1} Low Limit

_______

_______

_______

_______

Enter the engineering unit value below which the primary setpoint variable is not allowed to drop while in the remote setpoint mode.

{L1} High Limit

_______

_______

_______

_______

Enter the engineering unit value above which the primary setpoint variable is not allowed to rise while in the remote setpoint mode.

Secondary Controlled (Setpoint) Variable {L1} Zero Value

_______

_______

_______

_______

If a secondary controlled variable is used, enter the value in engineering units of the variable which will represent zero.

{L1} Full Scale Value

_______

_______

_______

_______

Enter the value in engineering units of the secondary variable at controller full scale, which is usually 2 times the normal operating setpoint setting.

2-40

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Volume 3d


2.11. Configuring Meter Specific Gravity / Density INFO - Characters in ’{ }’ refer to password levels. TIP - Use the blank lines provided next to each configuration option to write down the corresponding settings you entered in the flow computer. Some of these entries may not appear on the display or in OmniCom. Depending on the various configuration settings of your specific metering system, only those configuration options which are applicable will be displayed. INFO - The first menu, 'Misc Configuration', should always be completed first as these entries specify the number and type of input and output devices connected to the flow computer; i.e., the menus following the 'Misc Configuration' menu do not ask for configuration data unless a transducer has been defined.

2.11.1. Accessing the Gravity/Density Setup Submenu Applying the Menu Selection Method (see sidebar), in the ‘Select Group Entry’ screen (Program Mode) press [Setup] [Enter] and a menu similar to the following will be displayed: *** SETUP MENU *** Analyser Setup PID Control Setup Grav/Density Setup _ Use the [$]/[%] (up/down arrow) keys to move the cursor to ‘Grav/Density Setup’ and press [Enter] to access the submenu.

2.11.2. Meter Specific Gravity / Density Settings Specific Gravity / Density Data Station

Low Alarm Limit

Meter #1

Meter #2

Meter #3

Meter #4

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the gravity/density below which the gravitometer/densitometer low alarm activates.

High Alarm Limit

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the gravity/density above which the gravitometer/densitometer high alarm activates. Flow Computer Configuration via the Menu Selection Method It is best to use this method when programming an application for the first time as every possible option and variable will be prompted. Once a computer is in operation and you become familiar with the application you can decide to use the faster Random Access Method described below. Once you have finished entering data in a setup submenu, press the [Prog] key to return to the ‘Select Group Entry’ screen. Proceed as described in this manual for each setup option.

{L2} Override Value ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ Enter the gravity/density value that is substituted for the live transducer value, depending on the override code. An ‘*’ displayed along side of the value indicates that the override value is substituted. Each product setup can specify a gravity override to be used when ever that product is run. The override gravity in the product setup area overrides any transducer override.

{L2} Override Code ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ Enter the Override Code strategy: 0 1 2 3 4 5

= = = = = =

Never use override code Always use override code Use override code on transmitter failure On transmitter failures use last hour's average On transmitter failure use station transducer value On transmitter failure use absolute value of override SG/API of the running product.

{L1} Value at 4 mA ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ These entries apply if an analog gravitometer or densitometer is specified during the 'Config Meter Run' in 'Misc. Setup'. Engineering units that the transmitter outputs at 4mA or 1volt, or LRV of Honeywell Smart Transmitters.

{L1} Value at 20 mA________ ________ ________ ________ ________ These entries apply if an analog gravitometer or densitometer is specified during the 'Config Meter Run' in 'Misc. Setup'. Engineering units that the transmitter outputs at 20mA or 5 Volts, or URV of Honeywell Smart Transmitters.

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

2-41

Chapter 2

Flow Computer Configuration Station

Meter Specific Gravity/Density Setup via the Random Access Method - Setup entries require that you be in the Program Mode. In the Display Mode press the [Prog] key. The Program LED will glow green and the ‘Select Group Entry’ screen will appear. Then enter the key press sequence that corresponds to the options you want to configure: Specific Gravity: To access these settings, press [S.G.] [Enter] or [S.G.] [Meter] [n] [Enter] or [Meter] [n] [S.G./API] [Enter]. Density: To access these settings, press [Density] [Enter] or [Density] [Meter] [n] [Enter] or [Meter] [n] [Density] [Enter]. Digital Densitometers: To access these settings, press [Factor] [Density] [Meter] [n] [Enter] or [Density] [Factor] [Meter] [n] [Enter]. (“n” represents the meter run # 1, 2, 3 or 4). Note: Digital densitometers can only be configured via the Random Access Method. INFO - Densitometer constants are usually on a calibration certificate supplied by the densitometer manufacturer. Usually they are based on SI or metric units. For US customary applications you must ensure that the constants entered are based on gr/cc, °F and PSIG. Constants are always displayed using scientific notation; e.g.: K0=-1.490205E+00 (gr/cc) To enter K0, press [Clear] and press [-1.490205] [Alpha Shift] [E] [+00] [Enter].

2-42

{L1A} Factor A

Meter #1

Meter #2

Meter #3

Meter #4

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

This entry applies if an analog (4-20mA density linear) or a digital densitometer is specified during the 'Config Meter Run' in 'Misc. Setup'. It is not available when using specific gravity gravitometers. Enter the Pycnometer Density correction factor (Limit: 0.8 to 1.2). (Usually very close to 1.0000).

Digital Densitometer Factors The following additional entries are required if a digital densitometer is specified during the 'Config Meter Run' in the 'Misc. Setup' menu. There are three selections which refer to digital densitometers: 4 = Solartron, 5 = Sarasota, 6 = UGC. ({L1} Password Level required.) Solartron

Station

Meter #1

Meter #2

Meter #3

Meter #4

K0

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

K1

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

K2

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

K18

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

K19

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

K3

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

K4

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

K5

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Sarasota

Station

Meter #1

Meter #2

Meter #3

Meter #4

D0

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

T0

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Tcoef

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Tcal

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Pcoef

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Pcal

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

UGC

Station

Meter #1

Meter #2

Meter #3

Meter #4

K0

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

K1

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

K2

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

TC

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Kt1

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Kt2

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Kt3

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Pc

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Kp1

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Kp2

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Kp3

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Volume 3d


2.12. Configuring Meter Temperature INFO - The first menu, 'Misc Configuration', should always be completed first as these entries specify the number and type of input and output devices connected to the flow computer; i.e., the menus following the 'Misc Configuration' menu do not ask for configuration data unless a transducer has been defined. Flow Computer Configuration via the Menu Selection Method It is best to use this method when programming an application for the first time as every possible option and variable will be prompted. Once a computer is in operation and you become familiar with the application you can decide to use the faster Random Access Method described below. Once you have finished entering data in a setup submenu, press the [Prog] key to return to the ‘Select Group Entry’ screen. Proceed as described in this manual for each setup option. Meter Temperature Setup via the Random Access Method - Setup entries require that you be in the Program Mode. In the Display Mode press the [Prog] key. The Program LED will glow green and the ‘Select Group Entry’ screen will appear. Then press [Temp] [Enter], or [Temp] [Meter] [n] [Enter] or [Meter] [n] [Temp] [Enter] (n = Meter Run # 1, 2, 3 or 4). Use [$] / [%] keys to scroll.

2.12.1. Accessing the Temperature Setup Submenu Applying the Menu Selection Method (see sidebar), in the ‘Select Group Entry’ screen (Program Mode) press [Setup] [Enter] and a menu similar to the following will be displayed: *** SETUP MENU *** PID Control Setup Grav/Density Setup Temperature Setup _ Use the [$]/[%] (up/down arrow) keys to move the cursor to ‘Temperature Setup’ and press [Enter] to access the submenu.

2.12.2. Station and Meter Run Temperature Settings Station

Low Alarm Limit

Meter #1

Meter #2

Meter #3

Meter #4

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the temperature below which the flowmeter low alarm activates. Transducer values approximately 5% below this entry fail to low.

High Alarm Limit

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the temperature above which the flowmeter high alarm activates. Transducer values approximately 5% above this entry fail to high.

{L2} Override

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the temperature value that is substituted for the live transducer value, depending on the override code. An ‘*’ displayed along side of the value indicates that the override value is substituted.

{L2} Override Code ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ Enter the Override Code strategy: 0 1 2 3

= = = =

Never use override code Always use override code Use override code on transmitter failure On transmitter failures use last hour's average

{L1} at 4mA*

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the temperature engineering units that the transmitter outputs at 4mA or 1volt, or lower range limit (LRV) of Honeywell Smart Transmitters.

{L1} at 20mA*

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the temperature engineering units that the transmitter outputs at 20mA or 5 Volts, or upper range limit (URV) of Honeywell Smart Transmitters.

Note:

* Not Valid when a RTD Probe is specified.

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

2-43

Chapter 2



Meter Density Temperature Setup via the Random Access Method To access these settings, in the Program Mode press [Density] [Temp] [Enter].


Meter #3

Meter #4

This entry only applies to Honeywell digital transmitters connected to an H Type combo module. The process variable (i.e., temperature) is filtered by the transmitter before being sent to the flow computer. The time constant used depends on this entry. For Temperature Transmitters, enter the selected Damping Code: 0 1 2 3 4

= = = = =

0 seconds 0.3 seconds 0.7 seconds 1.5 seconds 3.1 seconds

5 6 7 8 9

= = = = =

6.3 seconds 12.7 seconds 25.5 seconds 51.5 seconds 102.5 seconds

2.12.3. Station and Meter Run Density Temperature Settings Station

Low Alarm Limit

Meter #1

Meter #2

Meter #3

Meter #4

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the temperature below which the densitometer low alarm activates. Transducer values approximately 5% below this entry activate the transducer fail low alarm.

High Alarm Limit

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the temperature above which the densitometer high alarm activates. Transducer values approximately 10% above this entry activate the transducer fail high alarm.

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the temperature value that is substituted for the live transducer value, depending on the override code. An ‘*’ displayed along side of the value indicates that the override value is substituted.


= = = =


{L1} at 4mA* Note:

Meter #2

{L1} Damping Code________ ________ ________ ________ ________

{L2} Override INFO - The Density Temperature sensor is used to compensate for temperature expansion effects which effect the periodic time of oscillation of the densitometer. It is also used when desired to calculate the density of the liquid to reference temperature using API 2540; Table 23, 23A or 23B.

Meter #1

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the temperature engineering units that the transducer outputs at 4mA or 1volt, or lower range limit (LRV) of Honeywell Smart Transmitters.

{L1} at 20mA*

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the temperature engineering units that the transducer outputs at 20mA or 5volts, or upper range limit (URV) of Honeywell Smart Transmitters.

{L1} Damping Code________ ________ ________ ________ ________ This entry only applies to Honeywell digital transmitters connected to an H Type combo module. The process variable (i.e., temperature) is filtered by the transmitter before being sent to the flow computer. The time constant used depends on this entry. For Temperature Transmitters, enter the selected Damping Code: 0 1 2 3 4

2-44

= = = = =


5 6 7 8 9

= = = = =


23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Volume 3d


2.13. Configuring Meter Pressure INFO - The first menu, 'Misc Configuration', should always be completed first as these entries specify the number and type of input and output devices connected to the flow computer; i.e., the menus following the 'Misc Configuration' menu do not ask for configuration data unless a transducer has been defined. Flow Computer Configuration via the Menu Selection Method It is best to use this method when programming an application for the first time as every possible option and variable will be prompted. Once a computer is in operation and you become familiar with the application you can decide to use the faster Random Access Method described below. Once you have finished entering data in a setup submenu, press the [Prog] key to return to the ‘Select Group Entry’ screen. Proceed as described in this manual for each setup option. Meter Pressure Setup via the Random Access Method - Setup entries require that you be in the Program Mode. In the Display Mode press the [Prog] key. The Program LED will glow green and the ‘Select Group Entry’ screen will appear. Then press [Press] [Enter], or [Press] [Meter] [n] [Enter] or [Meter] [n] [Press] [Enter] (n = Meter Run # 1, 2, 3 or 4). Use [$] / [%] keys to scroll.

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

2.13.1. Accessing the Pressure Setup Submenu Applying the Menu Selection Method (see sidebar), in the ‘Select Group Entry’ screen (Program Mode) press [Setup] [Enter] and a menu similar to the following will be displayed: *** SETUP MENU *** Grav/Density Setup Temperature Setup Pressure Setup _ Use the [$]/[%] (up/down arrow) keys to move the cursor to ‘Pressure Setup’ and press [Enter] to access the submenu.

2.13.2. Station and Meter Run Pressure Settings Station

Low Alarm Limit

Meter #1

Meter #2

Meter #3

Meter #4

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the pressure below which the flowmeter low alarm activates. Transducer values approximately 5% below this entry fail to low.

High Alarm Limit

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the pressure above which the flowmeter high alarm activates. Transducer values approximately 10% above this entry fail to high.

{L2} Override

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the pressure value that is substituted for the live transducer value, depending on the override code. An ‘*’ displayed along side of the value indicates that the override value is substituted.


= = = =


{L1} at 4mA*

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the pressure engineering units that the transmitter outputs at 4mA or 1volt, or lower range limit (LRV) of Honeywell Smart Transmitters.

{L1} at 20mA*

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the pressure engineering units that the transmitter outputs at 20mA or 5volts, or upper range limit (URV) of Honeywell Smart Transmitters.

2-45

Chapter 2


INFO - Characters in ’{ }’ refer to password levels. TIP - Use the blank lines provided next to each configuration option to write down the corresponding settings you entered in the flow computer.

Meter Density Pressure Setup via the Random Access Method - To access these settings, in the Program Mode press [Density] [Press] [Enter]. INFO - The Density Pressure sensor is used to compensate for pressure effects which effect the periodic time of oscillation of the densitometer. It is also used when desired to calculate the density of the liquid at the densitometer to equilibrium pressure using API 2540 MPMS 11.2.1 or 11.2.2.

Note:


Meter #1

Meter #2

Meter #3

Meter #4

{L1} Damping Code________ ________ ________ ________ ________ This entry only applies to Honeywell digital transmitters connected to an H Type combo module. The process variable (i.e., pressure) is filtered by the transmitter before being sent to the flow computer. The time constant used depends on this entry. For Pressure Transmitters, enter the selected Damping Code: 0 1 2 3 4

= = = = =

0 seconds 0.16 seconds 0.32 seconds 0.48 seconds 1 seconds

5 6 7 8 9

= = = = =

2 seconds 4 seconds 8 seconds 16 seconds 32 seconds

2.13.3. Station and Meter Run Density Pressure Settings Station

Low Alarm Limit

Meter #1

Meter #2

Meter #3

Meter #4

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the pressure below which the densitometer low alarm activates. Transducer values approximately 5% below this entry activate the transducer fail low alarm.

High Alarm Limit

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the pressure above which the densitometer high alarm activates. Transducer values approximately 10% above this entry activate the transducer fail high alarm.

{L2} Override

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the pressure value that is substituted for the live transducer value, depending on the override code. An ‘*’ displayed along side of the value indicates that the override value is substituted.


= = = =


{L1} at 4mA*

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the pressure engineering units that the transducer outputs at 4mA or 1volt, or lower range limit (LRV) of Honeywell Smart Transmitters.

{L1} at 20mA*

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the pressure engineering units that the transducer outputs at 20mA or 5volts, or upper range limit (URV) of Honeywell Smart Transmitters.

{L1} Damping Code________ ________ ________ ________ ________ This entry only applies to Honeywell digital transmitters connected to an H Type combo module. The process variable (i.e., pressure) is filtered by the transmitter before being sent to the flow computer. The time constant used depends on this entry. For Pressure Transmitters, enter the selected Damping Code: 0 1 2 3 4

2-46

= = = = =


5 6 7 8 9

= = = = =


23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Volume 3d


2.14. Configuring Differential Pressure INFO - The first menu, 'Misc Configuration', should always be completed first as these entries specify the number and type of input and output devices connected to the flow computer; i.e., the menus following the 'Misc Configuration' menu do not ask for configuration data unless a transducer has been defined. Flow Computer Configuration via the Menu Selection Method It is best to use this method when programming an application for the first time as every possible option and variable will be prompted. Once a computer is in operation and you become familiar with the application you can decide to use the faster Random Access Method described below. Once you have finished entering data in a setup submenu, press the [Prog] key to return to the ‘Select Group Entry’ screen. Proceed as described in this manual for each setup option. Meter Differential Pressure Setup via the Random Access Method Setup entries require that you be in the Program Mode. In the Display Mode press the [Prog] key. The Program LED will glow green and the ‘Select Group Entry’ screen will appear. Then press [D.P.] [Enter], or [D.P.] [Meter] [n] [Enter] or [Meter] [n] [D.P.] [Enter] (n = Meter Run # 1, 2, 3 or 4). Use [$] / [%] keys to scroll.

2.14.1. Accessing the Differential Pressure Setup Submenu Applying the Menu Selection Method (see sidebar), in the ‘Select Group Entry’ screen (Program Mode) press [Setup] [Enter] and a menu similar to the following will be displayed: *** SETUP MENU *** Temperature Setup Pressure Setup DP Inches of Water _ Use the [$]/[%] (up/down arrow) keys to move the cursor to ‘DP Inches of Water’ and press [Enter] to access the submenu.

2.14.2. Station and Meter Differential Pressure Settings Station

Low Alarm Limit

Meter #1

Meter #2

Meter #3

Meter #4

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the flowing differential pressure below which the orifice flowmeter low alarm digital point activates.

High Alarm Limit

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the flowing differential pressure above which the orifice flowmeter high alarm digital point activates.

{L2} Override Value ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ Enter the pressure value that is substituted for the live transducer value, depending on the override code. An ‘*’ displayed along side of the value indicates that the override value is substituted.


= = = =


{L1} Low DP at 4mA________ ________ ________ ________ ________ Enter the pressure engineering units that the low range DP transmitter outputs at 4mA or 1volt, or LRV of Honeywell Smart Transmitters.

{L1} Low DP at 20mA________ ________ ________ ________ ________ Enter the pressure engineering units that the low range DP transmitter outputs at 20mA or 5 Volts, or URV of Honeywell Smart Transmitters.

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

2-47

Chapter 2



Meter #1

Meter #2

Meter #3

Meter #4

{L1} Damping Code________ ________ ________ ________ ________ This entry only applies to Honeywell digital transmitters connected to an H Type combo module. The process variable (I.e., pressure) is filtered by the transmitter before being sent to the flow computer. The time constant used depends on this entry. For Differential Pressure/Pressure Transmitters, enter the selected Damping Code: 0 1 2 3 4

= = = = =


5 6 7 8 9

= = = = =


{L1} Hi DP at 4mA ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ Enter the pressure engineering units that the high range DP transmitter outputs at 4mA or 1volt, or LRV of Honeywell Smart Transmitters.

{L1} Hi DP at 20mA________

________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the pressure engineering units that the high range DP transmitter outputs at 20mA or 5 Volts, or URV of Honeywell Smart Transmitters. Meter Density Pressure Setup via the Random Access Method - To access these settings, in the Program Mode press [Density] [Press] [Enter].

Note: Differential pressure is expressed as “inches of water” (US units) and either kPa or mBar (metric units), depending upon setting made in the ‘Factor Setup’ menu.

{L1} Damping Code________ ________ ________ ________ ________ This entry only applies to Honeywell digital transmitters connected to an H Type combo module. The process variable (I.e., pressure) is filtered by the transmitter before being sent to the flow computer. The time constant used depends on this entry. For Differential Pressure/Pressure Transmitters, enter the selected Damping Code: 0 1 2 3 4

= = = = =


High DP Select %

5 6 7 8 9

= = = = =


________ ________ ________ ________ ________

The flow computer will automatically switch over to the signal from the high range DP transmitter when the signal from the low range transmitter exceeds this percent of its range. The switch over will not occur if the high range transmitter has failed or is not installed.

Low DP Select %

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

The flow computer will automatically switch over to the signal from the low range DP transmitter when the signal from the high range transmitter falls below this percent of its range. The switch over will not occur if the high range transmitter has failed or is not installed.

2-48

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Volume 3d


2.15. Configuring the Meter Station INFO - The first menu, 'Misc Configuration', should always be completed first as these entries specify the number and type of input and output devices connected to the flow computer; i.e., the menus following the 'Misc Configuration' menu do not ask for configuration data unless a transducer has been defined. Meter Station Setup via the Random Access Method - Setup entries require that you be in the Program Mode. In the Display Mode press the [Prog] key. The Program LED will glow green and ‘Select Group Entry’ screen will appear. Then press [Meter] [Enter] and use [$] / [%] keys to scroll. Meter Station Run Switching Flow Rate Thresholds - The Omni flow computer has 3 Boolean flags which are set or reset depending on the station flow rate: ❑ Run Switching Flag #1 at Modbus database point 1824. ❑ Run Switching Flag #2 at Modbus database point 1825. ❑ Run Switching Flag #3 at Modbus database point 1826. Each of these flags has a low threshold and high threshold flow rate. Each flag is set when the station flow rate exceeds the corresponding high threshold value. These flags reset when the station flow rate falls below the respective low threshold limit. See Chapter 3 for more information on how to include these flags in Boolean statements to automatically switch meter runs depending on flow rates.

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

2.15.1. Accessing the Station Setup Submenu Applying the Menu Selection Method (see sidebar), in the ‘Select Group Entry’ screen (Program Mode) press [Setup] [Enter] and a menu similar to the following will be displayed: *** SETUP MENU *** Pressure Setup DP Inches of Water Station Setup _ Use the [$]/[%] (up/down arrow) keys to move the cursor to ‘Station Setup’ and press [Enter] to access the submenu.

2.15.2. Meter Station Settings {L1} Station ID

_______________

Enter 8 alphanumeric characters maximum. This string variable usually appears in user custom reports (Modbus database point 4815).

Flow Low Alarm Limit

_______________

Enter the flow rate below which the Station Low Flow Alarm activates (Modbus database point 1810). Flow rates 5% below this value activate the Low Low Alarm (Modbus database point 1809).

Flow High Alarm Limit

_______________

Enter the flow rate above which the Station High Flow Alarm activates (Modbus database point 1811). Flow rates 5% above this value activate the High High Alarm (Modbus database point 1812).

{L1} Gross Flowrate Full Scale

_______________

Enter the gross flow rate at full-scale for the meter station. Sixteen-bit integer variables representing station gross and net flow rate are included in the database at 3802 and 3804. These variables are scaled using this entry and stored as percentage of full scale with a resolution of 0.1% (i.e., 0 to 999 = 0% to 99.9%)

{L1} Mass Flowrate Full Scale

_______________

Enter the mass flow rate at full-scale for the meter station. A 16-bit integer variable representing station mass flow rate is included in the database at 3806. This variable is scaled using this entry and stored as percentage of full scale with a resolution of 0.1% (i.e., 0 to 1000 = 0% to 100.0%)

Run Switch Operating Mode

_______________

In multi-meter run systems the flow computer can be configured to automatically open and close meter run block valves depending upon orifice differential pressure. Enter [Y] to select ‘Automatic’ mode if you have a multi-run system and wish to have the flow computer control the MOV block valves. Enter [N] to select 'Manual' mode if you wish to operate the valves via the keypad of the flow computer manually or via a Modbus link. Ignore this entry if you do not have MOVs which are controlled by the flow computer.

2-49

Chapter 2

Flow Computer Configuration Run Switch Delay Timer

INFO - Characters in ’{ }’ refer to password levels. Characters in ‘[ ]’ refer to key presses. TIP - Use the blank lines provided next to each configuration option to write down the corresponding settings you entered in the flow computer. Some of these entries may not appear on the display or in OmniCom. Depending on the various configuration settings of your specific metering system, only those configuration options which are applicable will be displayed. Flow Computer Configuration via the Menu Selection Method It is best to use this method when programming an application for the first time as every possible option and variable will be prompted. Once a computer is in operation and you become familiar with the application you can decide to use the faster Random Access Method described below. Once you have finished entering data in a setup submenu, press the [Prog] key to return to the ‘Select Group Entry’ screen. Proceed as described in this manual for each setup option.

Gas Analysis Variables These variables are: ❑ Reference Specific Gravity (Ref SG) ❑ Nitrogen (N2) % ❑ Carbon Dioxide (CO2) % ❑ Heating Value (HV)

Note:

* Not Valid when a RTD

_______________

Enter the amount of time in seconds that you want the flow computer to allow for each meter run block valve to open and flow rate to be established. If, after this amount of time differential pressure or flow rate has not been detected, the meter run block valve will be given the 'close' command and the meter run alarmed as being out of service. The flow computer will not attempt to open a meter run which is out of service until it is placed back in service, either via the flow computer keypad or via a Modbus command.

Run Switch Threshold Low Differential Pressure %

_______________

A meter run will be closed when the differential pressure across the orifice falls below this threshold percentage of its maximum range. Orifice runs are closed starting from the highest meter run number to the lowest. The last meter run is always left open but may be closed via manual command.

Run Switch Threshold High Differential Pressure %

_______________

A meter run will be opened when the differential pressure across the orifice of the last run opened exceeds this percentage of its maximum range. Meter runs are opened in order from lowest to highest skipping any meter runs which may not be in service. Runs placed back in service will automatically be utilized when the flow computer 'wraps around' (i.e., opens the highest numbered meter run and then starts looking for any runs that may have be out of service previously).

Gas Analysis Variables Ref. SG

Low Alarm Limit

N2 %

CO2 %

HV

________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the gas analysis variable value to be used as the low alarm point. The low alarm will activate when the input variable falls below this value.

High Alarm Limit

________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the gas analysis variable value to be used as the high alarm point. The high alarm will activate when the input variable goes above this value.

{L2} Override Value

________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the engineering value that is substituted for the live transducer value, depending on the override code. An ‘*’ displayed along side of the value indicates that the override value is substituted.

{L2} Override Code

________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the Override Code strategy: 0 1 2 3

= = = =


{L1} Value at 4mA*

________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the engineering units that the transducer outputs at 4mA or 1volt. This entry does not apply for reference specific gravity when Solartron 3096 gravitometer is selected as the reference SG transducer type.

{L1} Value at 20mA*

________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the engineering units that the transducer outputs at 20mA or 5volt. This entry does not apply for reference specific gravity when Solartron 3096 gravitometer is selected as the reference SG transducer type.

Probe is specified.

2-50

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Volume 3d

Configuration and Advanced Operation Specific Gravity of Reference Gas ‘X’


_______________

This entry applies only if Solartron 3096 gravitometer is selected as the reference specific gravity transducer type. Enter the reference specific gravity of 'Reference Gas X or Y'. Sample gases ‘X’ and ‘Y’ are used to determine the calibration constants K0 and K2 for the Solartron 3096 specific gravity transducer.

Time Reference of Gas ‘X’ TIP - Use the blank lines provided next to each configuration option to write down the corresponding settings you entered in the flow computer. Some of these entries may not appear on the display or in OmniCom. Depending on the various configuration settings of your specific metering system, only those configuration options which are applicable will be displayed.

Gas Analysis Variable & Auxiliary Input Setup via the Random Access Method - Setup entries require that you be in the Program Mode. In the Display Mode press the [Prog] key. The Program LED will glow green and ‘Select Group Entry’ screen will appear. Then press [Analysis] [Input] [Enter] or [Analysis] [Input] [n] [Enter] (n = Auxiliary Input # 1, 2, 3 or 4). Use [$] / [%] keys to scroll.

Note:


_______________

This entry applies only if Solartron 3096 gravitometer is selected as the reference specific gravity transducer type. Enter the periodic times (in microseconds) recorded when measuring the two sample gases ‘X’ and ‘Y’ used to determine the calibration constants K0 and K2 for the Solartron 3096 specific gravity transducer.

Specific Gravity of Reference Gas ‘Y’

_______________

This entry applies only if Solartron 3096 gravitometer is selected as the reference specific gravity transducer type. Enter the reference specific gravity of 'Reference Gas X or Y'. Sample gases ‘X’ and ‘Y’ are used to determine the calibration constants K0 and K2 for the Solartron 3096 specific gravity transducer.

Time Reference of Gas ‘Y’

_______________

This entry applies only if Solartron 3096 gravitometer is selected as the reference specific gravity transducer type. Enter the periodic times (in microseconds) recorded when measuring the two sample gases ‘X’ and ‘Y’ used to determine the calibration constants K0 and K2 for the Solartron 3096 specific gravity transducer.

Auxiliary Inputs

Low Limit

Input #1

Input #2

Input #3

Input#4

_______

_______

_______

_______

Enter the auxiliary input signal value below which the Low Alarm activates.

High Limit

_______

_______

_______

_______

Enter the auxiliary input signal value above which the High Alarm activates.

{L2} Override

_______

_______

_______

_______

Enter the value (in engineering units) which will be substituted for the transducer value depending, on the override code selected. An ‘*’ displayed along side of the value indicates that the override value is substituted.

{L2} Override Code

_______

_______

_______

_______

_______

_______

_______

Enter the Override Code strategy: 0 1 2 3

= = = =


{L1} at 4mA*

_______

Enter the value (in engineering units) that produces a transmitter output of 4mA or 1vol, or LRV of Honeywell Smart Transmitters t.

{L1} at 20mA*

_______

_______

_______

_______

Enter the value (in engineering units) that produces a transmitter output of 20mA or 5 Volts, or URV of Honeywell Smart Transmitters.

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

2-51

Chapter 2

Flow Computer Configuration {L1} Damping Code

_______

_______

_______

_______

This entry only applies to Honeywell digital transmitters connected to an H Type combo module. The process variable (I.e., temperature/pressure) is filtered by the transmitter before being sent to the flow computer. The time constant used depends on this entry. For Pressure Transmitters, enter the selected Damping Code: 0 1 2 3 4

= = = = =


5 6 7 8 9

= = = = =


For Temperature Transmitters, enter the selected Damping Code: 0 1 2 3 4

2-52

= = = = =


5 6 7 8 9

= = = = =


23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Volume 3d


2.16. Configuring Meter Runs INFO - The first menu, 'Misc Configuration', should always be completed first as these entries specify the number and type of input and output devices connected to the flow computer; i.e., the menus following the 'Misc Configuration' menu do not ask for configuration data unless a transducer has been defined. Flow Computer Configuration via the Menu Selection Method It is best to use this method when programming an application for the first time as every possible option and variable will be prompted. Once a computer is in operation and you become familiar with the application you can decide to use the faster Random Access Method described below. Once you have finished entering data in a setup submenu, press the [Prog] key to return to the ‘Select Group Entry’ screen. Proceed as described in this manual for each setup option. Meter Run Setup via the Random Access Method Setup entries require that you be in the Program Mode. In the Display Mode press the [Prog] key. The Program LED will glow green and the ‘Select Group Entry’ screen will appear. Then press [Meter] [n] [Enter] (n = Meter Run # 1, 2, 3 or 4). Use [$] / [%] keys to scroll.

2.16.1. Accessing the Meter Run Setup Submenu Applying the Menu Selection Method (see sidebar), in the ‘Select Group Entry’ screen (Program Mode) press [Setup] [Enter] and a menu similar to the following will be displayed: *** SETUP MENU *** DP Inches of Water Station Setup Meter Run Setup _ Use the [$]/[%] (up/down arrow) keys to move the cursor to ‘Meter Run Setup’ and press [Enter] to access the submenu.

2.16.2. Meter Run Settings Meter #1

Meter ID

Meter #2

Meter #3

Meter #4

________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the ID of the flowmeter (up to 8 alphanumeric characters) for each meter run. This ID usually appears on reports.

Product # Analysis Selected

________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the product number for the analysis data to be used for each meter run. The flow computer is capable of processing up to four meter streams each with independent fluids and or analysis data. Product and analysis data can be common to any number of metering runs. Valid product numbers are 1-4.

GC Analyzer Stream Number

________ ________ ________ ________

In many cases a gas chromatograph or gas analyzer will be shared between several meter runs or flow streams. When data is transmitted to the flow computer the analyzer will identify which flow stream the analysis data pertains to. Enter the number of the flow stream that this meter run should match before using the analysis data.

Flow Low Limit

________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the flow rate for each meter run below which the Flow Low Alarm (database point 1n21) activates. Flow rates 5% below this value will activate the Low Low Alarm (Modbus database point 1809).

Flow High Limit

________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the flow rate for each meter run above which the Flow High Alarm (database point 1n22) activates. Flow rates 5% below this value will activate the High High Alarm (Modbus database point 1812).

Alternate Access to Meter Run Settings from Meter Station Setup - After entering the Meter Station Settings, without exiting, press the [%] key and you will scroll down through each Meter Run setup entry.

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

2-53

Chapter 2

Flow Computer Configuration Meter #1


Gross Flow at Full Scale

Meter #3

Meter #4

________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the gross flow rate at full-scale for each meter run. Sixteen-bit integer variables representing meter run gross and net flow rate are included in the database at 3n42 and 3n40 respectively. These variables are scaled using this entry and stored as percentage of full scale with a resolution of 0.1% (i.e., 0 to 1000 = 0% to 100.0%)

Mass Flow at Full Scale

________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the mass flow rate at full-scale for each meter run. A 16-bit integer variable representing meter run mass flow rate is included in the database at 3n44. This variable is scaled using this entry and stored as percentage of full scale with a resolution of 0.1% (i.e., 0 to 1000 = 0% to 100.0%)

Additional Entries when Turbine Meter Type Selected The following entries apply when a turbine meter is selected in the ‘Config Meter “n”’ submenu of the ‘Misc Configuration’ menu. Unless otherwise indicated, the password level for these settings is {L1}. Active Frequency Threshold

Meter Run Setup via the Random Access Method Setup entries require that you be in the Program Mode. In the Display Mode press the [Prog] key. The Program LED will glow green and the ‘Select Group Entry’ screen will appear. Then press [Meter] [n] [Enter] (n = Meter Run # 1, 2, 3 or 4). Use [$] / [%] keys to scroll.

Meter #2

________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the Active Frequency Threshold for each meter run. Flow meter pulse frequencies equal or greater than this threshold will cause the Meter Active Flag (1n05) to be set. By using any Boolean statement you can use this flag bit to enable and disable totalizing by controlling the Disable Meter Run Flags (Modbus database points 1736, 1737, 1738 & 1739). Example: 1030:1736=/1105 ) Turn off Meter #1 flow if not greater than Active Frequency.

Error Check Threshold

________ ________ ________ ________

This entry will display only when ‘Dual Pulse’ is selected under ‘Config Meter Runs’ (Misc Setup). It applies only when a 'E' combo module is fitted and 'Pulse Fidelity Checking' is enabled. Enter the Pulse Fidelity Error Check Threshold (in Hz) for each meter run. To eliminate bogus alarms and error count accumulations, the dual pulse error checking functions are disabled until the sum of both pulse trains exceeds the pulses per seconds entered for this setting. Example: Entering 50 for this threshold means that the dual pulse error checking will be disabled until both A and B channels of the flowmeter pick-offs are providing 25 pulses per second each.

Max Error Counts/Batch

________ ________ ________ ________

This entry will display only when ‘Dual Pulse’ is selected under ‘Config Meter Runs’ (Misc Configuration). It applies only when a 'E' combo module is fitted and 'Pulse Fidelity Checking' is enabled. Enter the maximum number of error pulses allowed in one transaction for each meter run. The alarm points are: * * * *

1n48 1n49 1n50 1n51

A/B Comparitor Error Detected A Channel Failed B Channel Failed A and B Channels not equal

The dual pulse A/B Comparitor Error Alarm (1n48) is activated when the accumulated error counts between the flowmeter channels exceeds this count threshold. Accumulated error counts are cleared for every batch.

2-54

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Volume 3d

Configuration and Advanced Operation Meter #1


{L1A} K Factor #1

Alternate Access to Meter Run Settings from Meter Station Setup - After entering the Meter Station Settings, without exiting, press the [%] key and you will scroll down through each Meter Run setup entry. keys to scroll.

{L1A} K Factor #2

Meter #3

Meter #4

________ ________ ________ ________

This entry applies for simple flow-based linearization of K Factor. Enter the K Factors for each meter run. In this case, up to 12 K Factors and the associated flowmeter pulse frequencies are entered per meter run to define the K Factor Curve. The flow computer will continuously monitor the flowmeter pulse frequency and calculate gross flow based on and interpolated K Factor derived from the entered data points. Use only K Factor #1 in cases where flowmeter linearizing is not required. The K Factors associated with the lowest or highest frequency point will be used in cases where the flowmeter frequency is outside of the entered values.

Frequency Point 1

________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the flowmeter pulse frequency associated with the corresponding K Factor. The frequency points must be entered lowest to highest (Hz).

Frequency Point 2 {L1A} K Factor #3 Frequency Point 3 {L1A} K Factor #4 Frequency Point 4 {L1A} K Factor #5 Frequency Point 5 {L1A} K Factor #6 Frequency Point 6 {L1A} K Factor #7 Frequency Point 7 {L1A} K Factor #8 Frequency Point 8 {L1A} K Factor #9 Frequency Point 9 {L1A} K Factor #10 Frequency Point 10 {L1A} K Factor #11 Frequency Point 11 {L1A} K Factor #12 Frequency Point 12

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Meter #2

________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

2-55

Chapter 2

Flow Computer Configuration Meter #1

INFO - Characters in ’{ }’ refer to password levels. Characters in ‘[ ]’ refer to key presses. TIP - Use the blank lines provided next to each configuration option to write down the corresponding settings you entered in the flow computer. Some of these entries may not appear on the display or in OmniCom. Depending on the various configuration settings of your specific metering system, only those configuration options which are applicable will be displayed. Meter Run Setup via the Random Access Method Setup entries require that you be in the Program Mode. In the Display Mode press the [Prog] key. The Program LED will glow green and the ‘Select Group Entry’ screen will appear. Then press [Meter] [n] [Enter] (n = Meter Run # 1, 2, 3 or 4). Use [$] / [%] keys to scroll.

Meter Factor

Meter #2

Meter #3

Meter #4

________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the meter factor for the turbine flowmeter. The meter factor is a multiplier close to 1.0000 included to correct for small changes in flow meter characteristics. Net and mass flows are dependent on this number. Meter factors are determined by proving the flowmeter against some known standard volume or standard rate.

Meter Model

________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the model number of the flowmeter (up to 8 alphanumeric characters). This entry usually appears on the prove report.

Meter Size

________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the size of the flowmeter (up to 8 alphanumeric characters). This entry usually appears on the prove report.

Serial Number

________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the serial number of the flowmeter (up to 8 alphanumeric characters). This entry usually appears on the prove report.

Transducer Density Select ?

________ ________ ________ ________

Enter [Y] if you have a densitometer transducer measuring flowing density on this metering run and you wish to use this density value to calculate mass and volume flow rate. Enter [N] to cause the flow computer to use the appropriate equation of state.

Additional Entries when Orifice Meter Type Selected The following entries apply when an orifice meter is selected in the ‘Config Meter “n”’ submenu of the ‘Misc Configuration’ menu. Unless otherwise indicated, the password level for these settings is {L1}. Low Flow Cutoff

________ ________ ________ ________

Differential pressure signals lower than the value entered here will not be totalized. Differential pressure is expressed as 'inches of water' for U.S. units applications and 'kPa' or ‘mBar’ for metric units applications.

Orifice/Venturi Throat Diameter

________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the diameter (inches or mm) of the orifice bore at the orifice plate reference temperature. The actual diameter of the orifice bore is calculated continuously based on the flowing temperature of the fluid.

Orifice/Venturi Ref. Temperature

________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the temperature (°F for US units or °C for metric units) that corresponds to the temperature of the orifice plate when the bore was measured.

Orifice/Venturi Expansion Coef.

________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the expansion coefficient for the type of material of the orifice plate (see table below). The orifice bore diameter will expand and contract depending upon the temperature and thermal expansion coefficient for the type of plate material. The orifice equations require the linear coefficient of expansion. US Customary Units -100 to 300 °F = 6.20 x e

-73.3 to 148.9 °C = 1.12 x e

304/316 Stainless Steel

-100 to 300 °F = 9.25 x e

-73.3 to 148.9 °C = 1.67 x e

-7 to 154 °F = 7.95 x e

-21.6 to 67.8 °C = 1.43 x e

Monel

-6 -6

-6

Meter #1

2-56

Metric Units

Mild Steel Plate

-5 -5

Meter #2

-5

Meter #3

Meter #4

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Volume 3d

INFO - The first menu, 'Misc Configuration', should always be completed first as these entries specify the number and type of input and output devices connected to the flow computer; i.e., the menus following the 'Misc Configuration' menu do not ask for configuration data unless a transducer has been defined. Alternate Access to Meter Run Settings from Meter Station Setup - After entering the Meter Station Settings, without exiting, press the [%] key and you will scroll down through each Meter Run setup entry. keys to scroll.

Configuration and Advanced Operation Pipe Measured Diameter

________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the diameter of the meter tube pipe (inches or mm) at the reference temperature. The actual diameter of the meter tube used in the equations is calculated continuously based on the flowing temperature of the fluid.

Pipe Reference Temperature

________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the temperature (°F for US units or °C for metric units) that corresponds to the temperature of the metering tube when the orifice diameter was measured.

Pipe Expansion Coefficient

________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the expansion coefficient for the type of material of the pipe. The meter tube diameter will expand and contract depending upon the temperature and thermal expansion coefficient for the type of pipe material. The orifice equations require the linear coefficient of expansion. US Customary Units

Metric Units

Mild Steel Plate

-100 to 300 °F = 6.20 x e

-73.3 to 148.9 °C = 1.12 x e


-100 to 300 °F = 9.25 x e

-73.3 to 148.9 °C = 1.67 x e

-7 to 154 °F = 7.95 x e

-21.6 to 67.8 °C = 1.43 x e

-6

Monel

Use Downstream Pressure ?

-6

-6

-5 -5

-5

________ ________ ________ ________

Static pressure of the flowing fluid can be obtained from either the upstream or downstream pressure tap. Enter [Y] if downstream pressure is used. Enter [N] if upstream pressure is used.

Disable Isentropic Temp Correct. ________ ________ ________ ________ Enter [Y] (for ‘Yes’) to disable the downstream-to-upstream temperature correction calculation which assumes that an 'isentropic expansion' occurs after the orifice plate. The default for this entry is 'Yes' as AGA-3/API 14.3 do NOT mandate the use of this correction. This entry should always be [Y] when the temperature of the fluid is measured upstream of the orifice. At high differential pressures across the orifice, a significant cooling of the fluid can take place as it decompresses, if temperature is measured downstream of the orifice you may choose to ignore this effect by entering [Y] or correct for this effect by entering [N] (for ‘No’). The flow computer corrects the downstream temperature to the equivalent upstream temperature.

Type of Differential Pressure Taps ________ ________ ________ ________ Enter the Flange or Pipe Tap: 0 = Orifice flange 4 = ASME flow nozzle 1 = Orifice pipe 5 = Venturi (C=0.084) 2 = Orifice corner 6 = Venturi (C=0.995) 3 = Orifice D & D/2 The flow computer must be informed as to where the differential pressure taps are located on the orifice metering tube.

Transducer Density Select ?

________ ________ ________ ________

Enter [Y] if you have a densitometer transducer measuring flowing density on this metering run and you wish to use this density value to calculate mass and volume flow rate. Enter [N] to cause the flow computer to use the appropriate equation of state.

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

2-57

Chapter 2


2.17. Configuring Miscellaneous Factors INFO - The first menu, 'Misc Configuration', should always be completed first as these entries specify the number and type of input and output devices connected to the flow computer; i.e., the menus following the 'Misc Configuration' menu do not ask for configuration data unless a transducer has been defined. Flow Computer Configuration via the Menu Selection Method It is best to use this method when programming an application for the first time as every possible option and variable will be prompted. Once a computer is in operation and you become familiar with the application you can decide to use the faster Random Access Method described below. Once you have finished entering data in a setup submenu, press the [Prog] key to return to the ‘Select Group Entry’ screen. Proceed as described in this manual for each setup option. Factor Setup via the Random Access Method Setup entries require that you be in the Program Mode. In the Display Mode press the [Prog] key. The Program LED will glow green and the ‘Select Group Entry’ screen will appear. Then press [[Factor] [Enter], or [Factor] [Meter] [n] [Enter], or [Meter] [n] [Factor](n = Meter Run # 1, 2, 3, or 4). Use [$] / [%] keys to scroll.

2.17.1. Accessing the Factor Setup Submenu Applying the Menu Selection Method (see sidebar), in the ‘Select Group Entry’ screen (Program Mode) press [Setup] [Enter] and a menu similar to the following will be displayed: *** SETUP MENU Station Setup Meter Run Setup Factor Setup

*** _

Use the [$]/[%] (up/down arrow) keys to move the cursor to ‘Factor Setup’ and press [Enter] to access the submenu.

2.17.2. Factor Settings 3

{L1} Kg/m to Lb/ft

3

_______________

This entry applies to Revision 23 (US units) only. Enter the multiplier needed to convert the 3 3 Solartron densitometer readings from Kg/m to Lb/ft (default = 0.062428).

{L1} Atmospheric Pressure

_______________

Enter the Atmospheric Pressure in PSIa (US units) or absolute metric units (KPaa or mBara). This is used to convert flowing (gauge) pressure readings in PSIg to PSIa (absolute pressure units) for US units, and for the metric version to absolute units (KPaa or mBara), in conformance with pressure (metric) units selected. Absolute pressure is required for the equations of state. 3

{L1} Ft to Gallon Factor

_______________

This entry applies to Revision 23 (US units) only. Enter the number of gallons in a cubic foot (default = 7.480556).

{L1} Base Pressure

_______________

Enter the contract base pressure in PSIg (US units) or absolute metric units (KPAa or mBara), in conformance with pressure (metric) units selected. This is required by the AGA 8 density equation.

{L1} Base Temperature

_______________

Enter the contract base temperature in °F (US units) or °C (metric units). This is used by the AGA 8 density equation.

{L1} Density of Air

_______________

This entry is needed only for natural gas measurement where AGA 8 will NOT be used to calculate 'density at base conditions' (see 'Specific Gravity' entry in the 'Fluid Data & Analysis' menu. Entering [0] forces the flow computer to use AGA 8 to calculate density at base conditions. Net flow is calculated by dividing mass flow rate by density at base conditions.

{L1} Flow Average Factor

_______________

This entry applies only to turbine meters. The flow averaging factor is the number of calculation cycles used to smooth the displayed flow rate. A number 1-99 will be accepted. (A calculation cycle is 500msec).

2-58

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Volume 3d

Configuration and Advanced Operation Alarm Deadband %

INFO - Characters in ’{ }’ refer to password levels. Characters in ‘[ ]’ refer to key presses. TIP - Use the blank lines provided next to each configuration option to write down the corresponding settings you entered in the flow computer. Some of these entries may not appear on the display or in OmniCom. Depending on the various configuration settings of your specific metering system, only those configuration options which are applicable will be displayed. Factor Setup via the Random Access Method Setup entries require that you be in the Program Mode. In the Display Mode press the [Prog] key. The Program LED will glow green and the ‘Select Group Entry’ screen will appear. Then press [[Factor] [Enter], or [Factor] [Meter] [n] [Enter], or [Meter] [n] [Factor](n = Meter Run # 1, 2, 3, or 4). Use [$] / [%] keys to scroll.

_______________

Nuisance alarms can occur when input variables spend any amount of time near the high or low alarm set points. These nuisance alarms can swamp the alarm log with useless alarms leaving no room for real alarms. This entry sets a percentage limit based on the 'high alarm' entry. A variable must return within the high/low alarm limits by more than this amount before the alarm is cleared. Example: High limit is 100°F, Low limit is 20°F, Alarm deadband is set to 2%. A transducer input which exceeded 100°F will set the 'high alarm'. The transducer signal must drop 2 percent below the high alarm setpoint (98°F) before the alarm will clear.

{L1} Roll All Totalizers

_______________

This entry is read-only and can only be changed at the keypad of the flow computer. Totalizers within the computer can be rolled at 8 or 9 significant digits.

Totalizer Decimal Place Resolution The following are read-only entries that cannot be changed via OmniCom. To change totalizer resolution you must first 'Clear All Totals' in the 'Password Maintenance' menu from the front panel keypad of the flow computer. You will then be given the opportunity to set the totalizing resolution. Valid decimal place settings are: XX; X.X; X.XX; and X.XXX. Gross (Uncorrected) Totalizer Decimal Places

_______________

Enter the number of decimal places for gross totalizer resolution.

Net (Corrected) Totalizer Decimal Places

_______________

Enter the number of decimal places for net totalizer resolution.

Mass Totalizer Decimal Places

_______________

Enter the number of decimal places for mass totalizer resolution.

Energy Totalizer Decimal Places

_______________

Enter the number of decimal places for energy totalizer resolution.

More Factors and System Constants Flow Weighted Average ?

_______________

Two averaging methods are available: flow weighted and time weighted. These methods do not modify the averaged variable if there is no flow taking place. Gas Chromatograph data is always time weighted. Enter [Y] to calculated averages weighted by mass flow increment. Enter [N] to calculate averages weighted by time period.

Select Pressure Units

_______________

This entry applies to Revision 27 (metric units) only, and is a global selection for all pressure 2 variables within the flow computer (1Bar=100KPa, 1kg/cm =98.0665KPa). Display resolution 2 is: XX.XKPa, X.XXXBar, or X.XXXKg/cm . Enter the pressure units you want to use: 0=KPa; 2 1=Bar; 2=Kg/m .

Select Differential Pressure Units

_______________

This entry applies to Revision 27 (metric units) only, and is a global entry which applies to all DP variables within the flow computer (1KPA=10mBar. Display resolution is: x.xxKPa or x.xmBar. Enter the DP units you want to use: 0=KPa; 1=mBar.

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

2-59

Chapter 2


2.18. Configuring Fluid Data and Analysis of Products INFO - The first menu, 'Misc Configuration', should always be completed first as these entries specify the number and type of input and output devices connected to the flow computer; i.e., the menus following the 'Misc Configuration' menu do not ask for configuration data unless a transducer has been defined. Flow Computer Configuration via the Menu Selection Method It is best to use this method when programming an application for the first time as every possible option and variable will be prompted. Once a computer is in operation and you become familiar with the application you can decide to use the faster Random Access Method described below. Once you have finished entering data in a setup submenu, press the [Prog] key to return to the ‘Select Group Entry’ screen. Proceed as described in this manual for each setup option. Product Setup via the Random Access Method Setup entries require that you be in the Program Mode. In the Display Mode press the [Prog] key. The Program LED will glow green and the ‘Select Group Entry’ screen will appear. Then press [Product] [Enter] or [Product] [n] [Enter] (n = Product # 1 through 16). Use [$] / [%] keys to scroll.

2.18.1. Accessing the Fluid Data & Analysis Setup Submenu Applying the Menu Selection Method (see sidebar), in the ‘Select Group Entry’ screen (Program Mode) press [Setup] [Enter] and a menu similar to the following will be displayed: *** SETUP MENU *** Meter Run Setup Factor Setup FluidData&Analysis _ Use the [$]/[%] (up/down arrow) keys to move the cursor to ‘Fluid Data & Analysis’ and press [Enter] to access the submenu.

2.18.2. General Fluid Data & Analysis (Product) Settings Fluid data and analysis for up to four different gas products can be stored. Gas product setup data includes: name, type of gas, component analysis, relative density at reference conditions, and calculation algorithms to be used when running the product

{L1} Fluid Name

Prod. #1

Prod. #2

Prod. #3

Prod. #4

_______

_______

_______

_______

Enter the name of the product (up to 8 alphanumeric characters). Appears on reports.

{L1} Fluid Type

_______

_______

_______

_______

_______

_______

_______

Enter the type of fluid product: 0 = None. 1 = Natural Gas (AGA 8 1992 Equation of State). 2 = Steam (ASTM). 3 = Steam (NIST/NBS). 4 = Water (Keenan & Keys). 5 = Argon (NIST 1048). 6 = Nitrogen (NIST 1048). 7 = Oxygen (NIST 1048). 8 = Hydrogen (NIST 1048). 9 = Ethylene(NIST 1048). 10 =

Ethylene (IUPAC).

{L1} Reference Density

_______

This entry is not required when AGA8 is selected. Reference density is required to calculate 3 3 standard volume. Enter the density of the gas or water in Lb/ft (US units) or Kg/m (metric units) at standard temperature and pressure.

Prod. #1

2-60

Prod. #2

Prod. #3

Prod. #4

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Volume 3d


Configuration and Advanced Operation {L1} Flowing Fluid Viscosity

_______

_______

_______

_______

Enter the absolute viscosity of the gas at flowing conditions in centipoise units. For NIST 1048 products only, enter ‘-999’ to have the flow computer calculate the viscosity using the equation of state.

{L1} Isentropic Exponent

_______

_______

_______

_______

Enter the Isentropic Exponent dimensionless factor for this product at flowing conditions. For NIST 1048 fluids only, enter ‘-999’ to have the flow computer calculate it for you using the equation of state.

{L1} Heating Value (HV)

_______

_______

_______

_______

Enter a minus (negative) override value if you want the flow computer to calculated a heating value to calculate energy totals. Heating value is calculated using AGA-5, GPA 2172 or ISO 6976 for natural gas. NIST algorithms are used for steam and other gases. HV is expressed in BTU/SCF (US units) or MJ/Nm3 (metric units). Enter a positive override value to be used in place of the calculated value in systems where a gas chromatograph (GC) is not available. In systems which use a GC this override is also the fall back value should the GC fail. The GC HV if available will always be used unless it is assigned the component number '0' in the 'Analysis Setup' menu. Energy can also be calculated using the live 4-20mA value obtained from a BTU analyzer. In this case the analyzer value overwrites this entry in the #1 product area only.

2.18.3. Additional Settings for Natural Gas Product INFO - AGA 8 can also be used for many other gas mixtures, including carbon dioxide.

AGA 8 Method Select

Prod. #1

Prod. #2

Prod. #3

Prod. #4

_______

_______

_______

_______

Enter the AGA 8 calculation method for characterization of the natural gas mixture (see selections below). You must select a 'detailed method' if you will be connected to a gas chromatograph analyzer. 0 = Disable AGA 8 Calculations. 1 = 1994 - Detailed Analysis. 2 = 1994 - HV / SG / CO2. 3 = 1994 - SG / N2 / CO2. 4 = 1992 - Detailed Analysis. 5 = 1992 - HV / SG / CO2. 6 = 1992 - SG / N2 / CO2. 7 = 1985 - Detailed Analysis. 8 = 1985 - HV / SG / CO2. 9 = 1985 - HV / SG / N2 / CO2. 10 =

1985 - SG / N2 / CO2.

11 =

1985 - HV / N2 / CO2.

12 =

1985 - SG / CO2 / C1.

Heating Value Method Select

_______

_______

_______

_______

Enter the method used to calculate the heating value of the gas: 0=AGA-5, 1=GPA 2172-96, 2=ISO 6976-95. The energy flow of the gas may or may NOT be calculated using the method selected, depending upon the manual override value for the entered HV.

Water Content

_______

_______

_______

_______

This entry applies to Revision 23 (US units) only. Enter the amount of water that the gas contains in Lbs/MMCF. It is used to calculated the correction factor FWV. Due to the resolution of FWV (X.XXXX) water contents of 7 Lbs/MMCF and less produce FWV factors of 1.0000. Factor FWV corrects the net volume and therefore energy for water content. Enter zero if a GC is providing water content in the compositional analysis.

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

2-61

Chapter 2

Flow Computer Configuration Prod. #1

Prod. #2

Prod. #3

Prod. #4

_______

_______

_______

_______


Specific Gravity

Product Setup via the Random Access Method Setup entries require that you be in the Program Mode. In the Display Mode press the [Prog] key. The Program LED will glow green and the ‘Select Group Entry’ screen will appear. Then press [Product] [Enter] or [Product] [n] [Enter] (n = Product # 1 through 16). Use [$] / [%] keys to scroll.

The following entries apply to AGA 8 1992 and 1994 calculation methods, and represent component mole percentage overrides. Enter the mole percentages of each component of the gas stream. These percentages are used to calculate the flowing density and heating value if the application does not have a gas chromatograph (GC) analyzer or the GC fails. This data may be overwritten by data received from the GC. All entries apply for the detailed analysis method.

Notes: These entries apply to the following AGA 8 1994/1992 methods when selected:

* AGA 8 1994/1992 HV/SG/CO2

# AGA 8 1994/1992 SG/N2/CO2

2-62

Enter a minus (negative) number to instruct the flow computer to calculate 'density at reference conditions' using the AGA 8 equation of state (detailed methods only). Net volumes are calculated by dividing mass flow by 'density at reference conditions'. Otherwise enter a positive override value of specific gravity at reference conditions that will be used together with the 'density of air' entry to calculate 'density at reference conditions'. On product #1 only this value is overwritten if SG is to be obtained from Solartron 3096 gravitometer. In cases where a chromatograph is used, this entry serves as the GC failure override. The GC value of SG if available will also be used unless the component number for SG is set to '0' in the 'Analysis Setup' menu.

Entries for AGA 8 1994/1992 Methods

Component # - Mole % Override

Prod. #1

Prod. #2

Prod. #3

Prod. #4

01 - % Methane (CH4)

_______

_______

_______

_______

#

02 - % Nitrogen (N2)

_______

_______

_______

_______

*#

03 - % Carbon Dioxide (CO2)

_______

_______

_______

_______

04 - % Ethane (C2H6)

_______

_______

_______

_______

05 - % Propane (C3H8)

_______

_______

_______

_______

06 - % Water (H2O)

_______

_______

_______

_______

07 - % Hydrogen Sulfide (H2S) _______

_______

_______

_______

08 - % Hydrogen (H2)

_______

_______

_______

_______

09 - % Carbon Monoxide (CO) _______

_______

_______

_______

10 - % Oxygen (O2)

_______

_______

_______

_______

11 - % i-Butane (iC4H10)

_______

_______

_______

_______

12 - % n-Butane (nC4H10)

_______

_______

_______

_______

13 - % i-Pentane (iC5H12)

_______

_______

_______

_______

14 - % n-Pentane (nC5H12)

_______

_______

_______

_______

15 - % n-Hexane (C6H14)

_______

_______

_______

_______

16 - % n-Heptane (C7H16)

_______

_______

_______

_______

17 - % n-Octane (C8H16)

_______

_______

_______

_______

18 - % n-Nonane

_______

_______

_______

_______

19 - % n-Decane

_______

_______

_______

_______

20 - % Helium (He)

_______

_______

_______

_______

21 - % Argon (Ar)

_______

_______

_______

_______

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Volume 3d

Configuration and Advanced Operation Entries for AGA 8 1985 Methods


The following entries apply to AGA 8 1985 calculation methods, and represent component mole percentage overrides. Enter the mole percentages of each component of the gas stream. These percentages are used to calculate the flowing density and heating value if the application does not have a gas chromatograph (GC) analyzer or the GC fails. This data may be overwritten by data received from the GC. All entries apply for the detailed analysis method. Component # - Mole % Override

Prod. #1

Prod. #2

Prod. #3

Prod. #4

#^

_______

_______

_______

_______

_______

_______

_______

_______

03 - % Hydrogen Sulfide (H2S) _______

_______

_______

_______

04 - % Water (H2O))

_______

_______

_______

_______

05 - % Helium (He)

_______

_______

_______

_______

06 - % Methane (CH4)

_______

_______

_______

_______

Notes: These entries apply to the following AGA 8 1985 methods when selected:

07 - % Ethane (C2H6

_______

_______

_______

_______

08 - % Propane (C3H8)

_______

_______

_______

_______

* AGA 8 1985 HV/SG/CO2 # AGA 8 1985

09 - % i-Butane (iC4H10)

_______

_______

_______

_______

10 - % n-Butane (nC4H10)

_______

_______

_______

_______

11 - % i-Pentane (iC5H12)

_______

_______

_______

_______

12 - % n-Pentane (nC5H12)

_______

_______

_______

_______

13 - % n-Hexane (C6H14)

_______

_______

_______

_______

14 - % n-Heptane (C7H16)

_______

_______

_______

_______

15 - % n-Octane (C8H16)

_______

_______

_______

_______

16 - % n-Nonane

_______

_______

_______

_______

17 - % n-Decane

_______

_______

_______

_______

18 - % Oxygen (O2)

_______

_______

_______

_______

19 - % Carbon Monoxide (CO) _______

_______

_______

_______

20 - % Hydrogen (H2)

_______

_______

_______

*#^ 02 - % Carbon Dioxide (CO2)

^

HV/SG/N2/CO2 & SG/N2/CO2 & HV/N2/CO2

^ AGA 8 1985 SG/CO2/C1 INFO - AGA 8 can also be used for many other gas mixtures, including carbon dioxide.

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

01 - % Nitrogen (N2)

_______

2-63

Volume 3d


3. User-Programmable Functions 3.1.

Introduction

The computer performs many functions, displays and prints large amounts of data, but there are always some application-specific control functions, calculations or displays that cannot be anticipated. The Omni Flow Computer incorporates several programmable features that enable the user to easily customize the computer to fit a specific application. ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏

User-programmable Boolean Flags and Statements User-programmable Variables and Statements User-configurable Display Screens User-customized Report Templates

The first three Items are explained here. The last item requires the use of the OmniCom PC configuration software that comes with the flow computer.

3.2.

3.2.1.

User-Programmable Boolean Flags and Statements What is a Boolean?

A Boolean point is simply a single bit register within the computer (sometimes called a flag) which has only two states, On or Off (True or False, 1 or 0). These Boolean flags or points are controlled and/or monitored by the flow computer and represent alarms, commands and status points. Each Boolean point is given an identifying number within the data base of the computer allowing the state (On or Off) to be monitored or modified by assigning that Boolean point to a physical digital I/O point or accessing it via a communication port. A maximum of 24 physical digital I/O points are available for monitoring limit switches, status signals or controlling relays or lamps.

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

3-1

Chapter 3

User-Programmable Functions Boolean points are numbered as follows:

INFO - The 4-digit ‘point’ numbers referred to in this chapter are Modbus index numbers used to identify each variable (Boolean or other) within the Modbus database. A complete listing and descriptions of database points is included in Volume 4.

1001 through 1024 1025 through 1088 1089 through 1099 1100 through 1199 1200 through 1299 1300 through 1399 1400 through 1499 1500 through 1699 1700 through 1799 1800 through 1899 2100 through 2199 2200 through 2299 2300 through 2399 2400 through 2499 2600 through 2623 2700 through 2759 2800 through 2876 2877 through 2899

Physical Digital I/O Points 1 through 24 Programmable Boolean Points (64 total) Programmable Pulse outputs (11 total) Meter Run #1 Boolean Points (Alarms, Status etc.) Meter Run #2 Boolean Points (Alarms, Status etc.) Meter Run #3 Boolean Points (Alarms, Status etc.) Meter Run #4 Boolean Points (Alarms, Status etc.) Scratchpad Storage for Results of Boolean Statements Command or Status Inputs Station Boolean Flags (Alarms, Status etc.) Meter Run #1 Totalizer Roll-over Flags Meter Run #2 Totalizer Roll-over Flags Meter Run #3 Totalizer Roll-over Flags Meter Run #4 Totalizer Roll-over Flags Miscellaneous Station Boolean Points (Alarms, Status etc.) Miscellaneous Boolean Command and Status Points Station Totalizer Roll-over Flags More Miscellaneous Boolean Command and Status Points

Physical Digital I/O Points (1001 → 1024) Each of the physical digital I/O points is assigned to a valid Boolean point number as detailed above. Points 1700 through 1799 are command inputs which are described later, all other point assignments indicate that the I/O point is to be set up as an output point. Output points which are dedicated as flow accumulator outputs can be set up for pulse widths ranging from 10 msec to 100 sec in 10 msec increments. All other output point assignments have associated 'time ON delay' and 'time OFF delay' timers which are adjustable from 0.0 to 1000 sec in 100 msec increments.

Programmable Boolean Points (1025 → 1088) There are 64 user flags or Boolean points are available and are controlled by 64 Boolean statements or equations. These are provided to perform sequencing and control functions. Each statement or equation is evaluated every 100 msec. starting at point 1025 and ending at point 1088. The results of these Boolean statements can then assigned to physical digital I/O points. There are no restrictions as to what Boolean points can be used in a Boolean statement including the results of other Boolean statements or the status of physical I/O points.

Programmable Accumulator Points (1089 → 1099) There are 11 Programmable points that are used with Variable Points 7089 through 7099 for programming pulse outputs for Digital I/O or Front Panel Counters.

3-2

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Volume 3d

Configuration and Advanced Operation One-Shot Boolean Points (1501 → 1649) The 149 Boolean flags located between 1501 and 1650 are used to store temporary data that has been received via the Modbus link or put there by a Boolean statement. These Boolean variables can be sent to a digital output or used in the Boolean statements described above.

Scratch Pad Boolean Points (1650 → 1699) The 50 Boolean flags located between 1650 and 1699 can be use as momentary commands. When set true they remain on for two seconds.

3.2.2.

Sign (+, -) of Analog or Calculated Variables (5001 → 8999)

The sign of analog or calculated variables can also be used in a Boolean statements by simply specifying the point number. The Boolean value of the variable is 'true ' if it is positive and 'false' if it has a negative value.

3.2.3.

Boolean Statements and Functions

Each Boolean statement consists of up to 3 variables optionally preceded by the Boolean 'NOT' function and separated by one of the Boolean functions 'AND', 'OR', 'Exclusive OR' or 'EQUAL' . The following symbols are used to represent the functions: Function

Symbol

NOT AND OR EX OR EQUAL IF GOTO MOVE COMPARE

/ & + * = ) 'G' : %

The '=' function allows a statement to be used to change the state of the Boolean point on the left of the equal sign (usually a command point). Evaluation precedence is left to right.

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

3-3

Chapter 3

User-Programmable Functions To program the Boolean points proceed as follows: From the Display Mode press [Prog] [Setup] [Enter] [Enter] and the following menu will be displayed: *** Misc. Setup *** Password Maint?(Y) Check Modules ?(Y) Config Station?(Y) Config Meter "n" Config PID ? "n" Config D/A Out "n" Front Pnl Counters Program Booleans ? _ Program Variables ? User Display ? "n" Scroll down to 'Set Boolean ? (Y)' and enter [Y]. Assuming that no Booleans are as yet programmed, the display shows: Boolean Point #10xx 25: _ Rmk 26: Note that the cursor is on the line labeled 25: At this point enter the Boolean equation that will cause Boolean point 1025 to be ON (True) / OFF (False).

INFO - Points 1005 and 1006 reflect the current status of physical I/O Points 05 and 06 which could be inputs connected to the outside world or outputs controlling relays, etc.

For example, to turn Boolean 1025 ON whenever Boolean 1005 is OFF, OR whenever 1006 is ON, enter [/1005+1006] (note the use of the '/' to indicate the 'NOT' function). Boolean Point #10XX 25: /1005+1006 Rmk 26: _ Boolean 1025 could then be used in the statement following which defines Boolean 1026. For example, by including Boolean 1205 which indicates that Meter #2 is active and flowing (see following page), Boolean 1026 will be ON whenever 'Meter 2 is active and flowing' AND (1005 is NOT ON OR 1006 is ON).

TIP - Leave plenty of empty statements between programmed ones. This will allow you to modify the execution order of your program if you need to later.

Boolean Point #10xx 25: /1005+1006 Rmk 26: 1205&1025 Use the 'Up/Down' arrow keys to scroll though all 64 programmable Boolean points.

3-4

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Volume 3d

Configuration and Advanced Operation Remember that the Boolean statements are evaluated in order starting from 1025 proceeding to 1088 . For maximum speed always ensure that statements used in other statements are evaluated ahead of time by placing them in the correct order.

Example 1: Meter Failure Alarm for Two-Meter Run Application INFO - Use the Exclusive OR function ‘*’ to compare 2 points. The result of an Exclusive OR of 2 points is true only if both points are different states.

Object: Using signals from 'flow sensing switches' inserted into the pipeline, provide an alarm output which activates whenever the signals from the flow switches and flow meter signals differ, also provide a snapshot report by setting command point 1719. How the hardware is configured:

INFO - Booleans 1025, 1026 and 1027 are only used as an example here. Any unused programmable Booleans can be used for this function.

Physical I/O points 02 and 03 are setup as inputs by assigning them to 1700 (see the Command and Status Booleans on a later page). They are connected to flow sensing switches on meter runs 1 and 2 respectively. The switches activate with flow. Physical I/O point 04 is connected to a 'meter fail alarm bell'. The output is assigned to Programmable Boolean 1027. A 'delay ON' of 5 seconds is selected to eliminate spurious alarms which would occur during startup and shutdown. A 'delay OFF' of 5 seconds is selected to ensures that the alarm bell remains on for at least 5 seconds. The Booleans are programmed as follows:

True if Meter #1 fails. True if Meter #2 fails. Request snapshot if either meter fails.

BOOLEAN POINT #10xx 25: 1105*1002 26: 1205*1003 27: 1719=1025+1026 28:

Notes: ❑ Boolean Point 1025 is true (Meter 1 failed) whenever 'Meter 1 Active' (Point 1105) differs from 'Flow Detected' Flow Switch 1 (Point 02). ❑ Boolean Point 1026 is true (Meter 2 failed) whenever 'Meter 2 Active' (Point 1205) differs from 'Flow Detected' Flow Switch 2 (Point 03). ❑ Boolean Point 1027 is true (Meter 1 OR 2 failed) whenever point 1025 OR 0126 are true. The Boolean Command Bit 1719 is set when Boolean Point 1027 is true.

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

3-5

Chapter 3

User-Programmable Functions Example 2: Automatic Run Switching for 4-Meter Run Application Object: To improve metering accuracy by automatically selecting the correct flow meter run to be active in a multi run application. Small turbines need to be protected from over-speeding while for best accuracy larger turbines should be valved off when the flow drops below their minimum rate. In the example shown, except when switching from one flow meter to the other, only one flow meter run is active at one time. This is one example only. The number of runs open for a given application at any flow rate obviously depends on the size of the flow meters used.

Fig. 3-1.

Figure Showing Automatic Four-Meter Flow Zone Thresholds

Switching is based on the station flow gross flow rate which is compared to preset switching thresholds entered by the user (See 'Meter Station Settings' in Chapter 2). Threshold Flags 1, 2 and 3 are set and reset according to the actual station flow rate. The first task is identify the 4 zones and assign programmable Boolean points to them. This allows us to include them in further Boolean statements. Zone 1 = NOT Flag 1 AND NOT Flag 2 AND NOT Flag 3 Zone 2 = Flag 1 AND NOT Flag 2 AND NOT Flag 3 Zone 3 = Flag 1 AND Flag 2 AND NOT Flag3 Zone 4 = Flag 1 AND Flag 2 AND Flag 3

3-6

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Volume 3d

Configuration and Advanced Operation As each statement can have only 3 terms in it we must pre-process some part of the equations. The term 'NOT Flag 2 AND NOT Flag 3' appears in Zone 1 and 2 equations. Now we assign valid point numbers to our statements and rewrite them the way they will be input. First one term needs to be pre-processed to simplify: 1025 = NOT Flag 2 AND NOT Flag 3

25: /1825&/1826

Next the flow Zones are defined: Zone 1 = NOT Flag 1 AND NOT Flag 2 AND NOT Flag 3

26: /1824&1025

Zone 2 = Flag 1 AND NOT Flag 2 AND NOT Flag 3

27: 1824&1025

Zone 3 = Flag 1 AND Flag 2 AND NOT Flag 3

28: 1824&1825&/1826

Zone 4 = Flag 1 AND Flag 2 AND Flag 3

29: 1824&1825&1826

The program thus far looks like: / Flag 2 & / Flag 3

BOOLEAN POINT #10xx 25: 1105*1002 26: 1205*1003 27: 1719=1025+1026 28: 1824&1825&/1826 29: 1824&1825&1826

Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone 4

In our example each meter run valve (V1, V2, V3 and V4) fails closed, energizes to open. A limit switch mounted on each valve indicates the fully open position (SW1, SW2, SW3 and SW4).

Fig. 3-2.

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Figure Showing Four-Meter Run Valve Switching

3-7

Chapter 3

User-Programmable Functions

3.2.4.

How the Digital I/O Assignments are Configured

We will use Physical I/O Points 11, 12, 13 and 14 to connect to valve limit switches SW1, SW2, SW3 and SW4 respectively. The switches activate when the appropriate valve is fully open. The points are designated as inputs by assigning them to the dummy input Boolean Point 1700 (see the Command and Status Booleans on a later page). Their data base point numbers are simply their I/O point number preceded by 10 (e.g.: I/O Point 11 = 1011). Physical I/O points 15, 16, 17 and 18 are wired so as to open the meter run valves V1, V2, V3 and V4. They will be assigned to the Boolean Flags 32 (Point 1032) through 35 (Point 1035) which represent the required state of V1 through V4 as explained below. The Boolean equations are as follows: V1 = (NOT SW2 AND NOT SW3 AND NOT SW4) OR Zone 1

Valve #1 is opened when the flow is in Zone 1 and will remain open until at least 1 of the other 3 valves is fully open. Valves V2, V3 and V4 are programmed in a similar fashion. V2 = (NOT SW1 AND NOT SW3 AND NOT SW4) OR Zone 2 V3 = (NOT SW1 AND NOT SW2 AND NOT SW4) OR Zone 3 V4 = (NOT SW1 AND NOT SW2 AND NOT SW3) OR Zone 4

To simplify we pre-process the common terms. The term 'NOT SW3 AND NOT SW4' is used to determine V1 and V2. The term 'NOT SW1 AND NOT SW2' is used to determine V3 and V4. Assigning the next valid point numbers to our statements and re-write them the way they will be input. 1030 = NOT SW3 AND NOT SW4

30: /1013&/1014

1031 = NOT SW1 AND NOT SW2

31: /1011&/1012

The final Equations to determined the state of V1, V2, V3 and V4 are as follows: V1= NOT SW2 AND (NOT SW3 AND NOT SW4) OR Zone 1

32: /1012&1030+1026

V2 =NOT SW1 AND (NOT SW3 AND NOT SW4) OR Zone 2

33: /1011&1030+1027

V3= (NOT SW1 AND NOT SW2) AND NOT SW4 OR Zone 3

34: 1031&/1014+1028

V4 =(NOT SW1 AND NOT SW2) AND NOT SW3 OR Zone 4

35: 1031&/1013+1029

The computer evaluates each expression from left to right, so the order of the variables in the above statements is critical. The logic requires that the OR variable comes last.

3-8

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Volume 3d

Configuration and Advanced Operation The final program consists of 11 statements:

Zone 1

BOOLEAN POINT #10xx 25: /1825&/1826 26: /1824&1025 27: 1824&1025 28: 1824&1825&/1826 29: 1824&1825&1826 30: /1013&/1014 31: /1011&/1012 32: /1012&1030+1026 33: /1011&1030+1027 34: 1031&/1014+1028 35: 1031&/1013+1029

Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone 4

V1 V2 V3 V4

The only thing left to do now is assign Booleans 1032, 1033, 1034 and 1035 to the appropriate digital I/O points which control V1, V2, V3 and V4. Here is a summary of all of the digital I/O as assigned:

INFO - A list of Modbus database addresses and index numbers is included in Volume 4 of the Omni User Manual.

1026 is set by 1834 and cleared by 1835.

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

PHYSICAL I/O POINT

ASSIGNED TO BOOLEAN

WIRED TO

SYMBOL

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

1700 1700 1700 1700 1032 1033 1034 1035

Valve 1 Fully Open Switch Valve 2 Fully Open Switch Valve 3 Fully Open Switch Valve 4 Fully Open Switch Valve 1 Actuator Valve 2 Actuator Valve 3 Actuator Valve 4 Actuator

SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 V1 V2 V3 V4

Any pulse signal can be latched by using a small program similar to the following:

BOOLEAN POINT #10xx 25: /1834&/1026 26: /1835&/1025 27:

3-9

Chapter 3


3.3.

User Programmable Variables and Statements

There are 64 user-programmable floating point variables within the flow computer numbered 7025 through 7088. The value stored in each of these variables depends on an associated equation or statement. These statements are evaluated every 500 msec and the resultant variable values can be displayed on the LCD display, printed on a report, output to a D-A output, or accessed via one of the communication ports. Typical uses for the variables and statements include providing measurement units conversions, special averaging functions, limit checking and comparisons.

3.3.1.

Variable Statements and Mathematical Operators Allowed

Each statement can contain up to 3 variables or constants. The following symbols are used to represent the functions: Operator TIP - The order of precedence is: ABSOLUTE, POWER, MULTIPLY & DIVIDE, ADD & SUBTRACT. Where operators have the same precedence the order is left to right.

ADD SUBTRACT MULTIPLY DIVIDE CONSTANT POWER ABSOLUTE EQUAL IF STATEMENT GOTO STATEMENT MOVE COMPARE

Symbol + * / # & $ = ) G : %

Description Add the two variables or constants Subtract the RH variable or constant from LH Multiply the two variables or constants Divide the two variables or constants The number following is interpreted as a constant Raise the LH variable to the power of the RH Use the abs. unsigned value of variable following Make the variable on left equal to the expression Compares the variable to another (What if?) Go to a different variable Move statement or result to another variable. Compare a value with or equal to

To program the user variables proceed as follows: From the Display Mode press [Prog] [Setup] [Enter] [Enter] and the following menu will be displayed: *** Misc. Setup *** Password Maint?(Y) Check Modules ?(Y) Config Station?(Y) Config Meter "n" Config PID ? "n" Config D/A Out"n" Front Pnl Counters Program Booleans ? Program Variables? _

3-10

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Volume 3d

Configuration and Advanced Operation Scroll down to 'Program Variables ? (Y)' and enter [Y]. Assuming that no variables are as yet programmed, the display shows: PROG. VARIABLE #70xx 25: _ 26: 27: Note that the cursor is on the line labeled 25:. At this point enter the variable equation that will calculate the value of variable 7025.

Example 1: To provide a variable (7025) which represents Meter Run #1 gross flow rate in ‘MCF per day' in place of the usual MCF per hour, multiply the 'MCF per hour' variable (7101) by the constant 24. PROG. VARIABLE #70xx 25: 7101*#24 26: 27:

bbls/hr x 24 = bbls/day

Example 2: To provide a variable that represents 'gallons per minute' (7026) we can convert the 'barrels per hour' variable (7101) to gallons by multiplying by 0.7 (0.7 = 42/60 which is the number of gallons in a barrel / divided by the number of minutes in an hour). PROG. VARIABLE #70xx 25: 7101*#24 26: 7101*#.7_ 27:

bbls/hr x 24 = bbls/day bbls/hr x 0.7 = gal/min

Example 3: To provide a variable (7028) that represents meter run #1 temperature in 'degrees Celsius' we subtract 32 from the 'degrees Fahrenheit' variable (7105) and divide the result (7027) by 1.8.

bbls/hr x 24 = bbls/day bbls/hr x 0.7 = gal/min °F - 32.0

PROG. VARIABLE #70xx 25: 7101*#24 26: 7101*#.7_ 27: 7105-#32 28: 7027/#1.8

(°F - 32.0) / 1.8 = °C

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

3-11

Chapter 3

User-Programmable Functions Example 4: Gross barrels within the flow computer are simply flow meter counts divided by the flow meter 'K-Factor' (pulses per barrel); i.e., gross barrels are not meter factored. To provide a variable (7029) which represents Meter Run #1 gross meter factored barrels, multiply the batch gross barrel totalizer (5101) by the batch flow weighted average meter factor (5114).

bbls/hr x 24 = bbls/day

PROG. VARIABLE #70xx 25: 7101*#24 26: 7101*#.7_ 27: 7105-#32 28: 7027/#1.8 29: 5101*5114

bbls/hr x 0.7 = gal/min °F - 32.0 (°F - 32.0) / 1.8 = °C Gross bbls x Mtr Factor

3.3.2.

Using Boolean Variables in Variable Statements

Boolean points used in a programmable variable statement are assigned the value 1.0 when the Boolean value is TRUE and 0.0 when the Boolean value is FALSE. By multiplying by a Boolean the user can set a variable to 0.0 when the Boolean point has a value FALSE.

Example: Provide a variable (7025) which functions as a 'Report Number'. The report number which will appear on each 'batch end report' must increment automatically after each batch and reset to zero at the contract day start hour on January 1 of each year. Add 1.0 at Batch End Clear batch report number on Jan 1 Contract Hour

PROG. VARIABLE #70xx 25: 7025+1835 26: 1834)7025=#0 27:

Boolean 1835 is true one calculation cycle at the end of a batch. Boolean point 1834 is equal to 1.0 for one calculation cycle on the contract day start hour on January 1. If statement 1834 is true we reset counter 7025.

3-12

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Volume 3d


3.3.3.

Entering Values Directly into the User Variables

In some cases it may be necessary to enter data directly into a user variable (not the expression, just the variable). For example, to preset the 'Report Number' Variable 7025 in the example above we proceed as follows. While in the Display Mode press [Prog] [Input] [Enter], the following will display: USER VARIABLE #7025 Value 1234 7025+1835

Current value (can be changed by the user). Expression for this variable (cannot be changed from this entry).

3.3.4.

Using the Variable Expression as a Prompt

Entering plain text into the expression associated with the variable causes the computer no problems. It ignores the text and leaves the variable unchanged. For example: USER VARIABLE 7025 Value ? .00018 Enter Lbs to SCF ?

3.3.5.

Password Level Needed to Change the Value of a User Variable

The first four variables, 7025, 7026, 7027 and 7028 require ‘Level 2’ password. the remaining variables require ‘Level 1’.

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

3-13

Chapter 3


3.3.6. Note: See the beginning of this chapter on how to program a Boolean expression if necessary:

Using Variables in Boolean Expressions

In some cases it is also necessary to trigger some type of an event based on the value of a calculated variable. Boolean variables used in the Boolean expressions and described in the previous text can have only one of two values, ON or OFF (TRUE or FALSE). How can the floating point numbers described in this chapter be used in a Boolean expression? Simply using the fact that a variable can be either positive (TRUE) or negative (FALSE). Any variable or floating point can be used in a Boolean expression.

Example: Provide an alarm and snapshot report which will occur when the absolute difference in net flow rate between Meter Runs #1 and #2 exceeds 10 bbls/hr, but only when Meter Run #1 flow rate is greater than 1000 bbls/hr. Result can be positive or negative. Absolute flow difference minus 10.

PROG. VARIABLE #70xx 30: 7102-7202 31: $7030-#10 32: 7102-#1000

Positive if flow rate is greater than 1000.

Variable 7031 will be positive (TRUE) if Meter Runs #1 and #2 flow rates differ by more than 10 bbls/hr. Variable 7032 will be positive (TRUE) when Meter Run #1 flow rate exceeds 1000 bbls/hr . User variables 7031 and 7032 shown above must both be positive for the alarm to be set. In addition, we will require that the condition must exist for 5 minutes to minimize spurious alarms. The alarm will be activated by Physical I/O Point #02 and we will use Boolean statements 1025 and 1026. Enter the following Boolean statements (1025 and 1026 used as example only): True when both are positive.

Snapshot report when alarm active.

BOOLEAN POINT #10xx 25: 7031&7032 26: 1719=1002 27:

To complete the example we assign Digital I/O Point #02 (Point # 1002) to 1025 and select a 'delay on' of 3000 to provide a 5 minute delay on activate (3000 ticks = 3000 x 100 msec = 300 seconds). Set the ‘delay off’ to 0.

3-14

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Volume 3d


3.4.

User Configurable Display Screens

The user can specify up to eight display screen setups. Each display screen can be programmed to show four variables, each with a descriptive tag. Any variable within the data base can be selected for display. Steps needed to configure a display screen are: INFO - The computer checks for the user display key presses first so you may override an existing display screen by selecting the same key press sequence.

1) Specify a sequence of up to four key presses that will be used to recall the display. Key presses are identified by the A through Z character on each key. For each variable (four maximum): 2) Specify the eight character string to be used to identify the variable. Any valid characters on the keypad can be used. 3) Specify the database index or point number. 4) Specify the display resolution of the variable (i.e., how many digits to the right of the decimal point). Should the number exceed the display capacity, the decimal will be automatically shifted right to counter the overflow. The computer will shift to scientific display mode if the integer part of the number exceeds +/- 9,999,999. To configure the user display screens proceed as follows: From the Display Mode press [Prog] [Setup] [Enter] [Enter] and the following menu will be displayed: *** Misc. Setup *** Password Maint?(Y) Check Modules ?(Y) Config Station?(Y) Config Meter "n" Config PID ? "n" Config D/A Out"n" Front Pnl Counters Program Booleans ? Program Variables? User Display ? "n" _ Scroll down to 'User Display ? "n"’ and enter 1 through 8 to specify which screen you wish to configure.

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

3-15

Chapter 3

User-Programmable Functions The screen for Display #1 shows: USER DISPLAY #1 Key Press _ Var #1 Tag Var #1 Index Var #1 Dec. Var #2 Tag Var #2 Index Var #2 Dec. Var #3 Tag Var #3 Index Var #3 Dec. Var #4 Tag Var #4 Index Var #4 Dec. Use the 'UP/DOWN' arrows to scroll through the screen. For 'Key Press' enter the key press sequence (up to 4 keys) that will be used to recall this display. The keys are identified by the letters A through Z.

Fig. 3-3.

3-16

Keypad Layout - A through Z Keys

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Volume 3d

Configuration and Advanced Operation Example: You wish to recall 'User Display #1' by pressing [Gross] [Meter] [1], select the key sequence [A] [L] [O] as shown below. USER DISPLAY #1 Key Press A L O Var #1 Tag Var #1 Index Var #1 Dec. Continue configuring User Display #1 by entering the description tag, index number and decimal position required for each variable.

Press [Gross] [Meter] [1] Description Tag Index # for Meter #1 Flow Rate Display XXXX.XX Description Tag Index # for Meter #1 Batch Barrels Display XXXX.XX Description Tag Index # for Meter #1 Preset Count Display XXXX.XX Description Tag

USER DISPLAY #1 Key Press A L O Var #1 Tag M1 MSCF Var #1 Index 7101 Var #1 Dec. 2 Var #2 Tag M1 MMSCF Var #2 Index 5101 Var #2 Dec. 0 Var #3 Tag M1 PRSET Var #3 Index 5116 Var #3 Dec. 0 Var #4 Tag M1 MFACT Var #4 Index 5114 Var #4 Dec. 4 Var #4 Tag _

Index # for Meter #1 Batch F.W.A. M/F Display XXXX.XX Description Tag

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

3-17

Chapter 3

User-Programmable Functions In the preceding example, User Display #1 is used to display Meter Run #1: Variable #1

Flow rate in MSCF per Hour

Variable #2

Accumulated Batch MSCF

Variable #3

Meter Factor for the Batch

Variable #4

Not Used

The screen is recalled by pressing [Gross] [Meter] [1] [Enter] and displays: USER DISPLAY # 1 M1 MSCF 1234.56 M1 MMSCF 123456789 M1 MFACT 1.0000

3-18

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Volume 3d


4. Flow Equations and Algorithms for U.S. Customary Units (Revision 23.71+) 4.1. Flow Rate Units - For practical reasons, the Omni flow computer displays calculated flow rates in thousands of units per hour, in comparison to the standards (AGA and API). Therefore, the flow equations must be divided by 1000.

Flow Rate for Gas Differential Pressure Devices (Orifice, Nozzle and Venturi)

The practical flow equations expressed in this section are based on the following standards: O

❑ American Gas Association Report N 3: Orifice Metering of Natural Gas and other Related Hydrocarbon Fluids, Part 3: Natural Gas Applications (AGA 3) O ❑ American Gas Association Report N 5: Fuel Gas Energy Metering (AGA 5) O ❑ American Gas Association Report N 8: Compressibility Factors of Natural Gas and Other Related Hydrocarbon Gases (AGA 8) ❑ American Petroleum Institute: Manual of Petroleum Measurement Standards, Chapter 14: Natural Gas Fluids Measurement; Section 3: Concentric, Square-Edged Orifice Meters; Part 1: General Equations and Uncertainty Guidelines (API MPMS 14.3.1) ❑ American Society of Mechanical Engineers: Measurement of Fluid Flow in Pipes Using Orifice, Nozzle, and Venturi (ASME MFC-3M)

4.1.1.

Mass Flow Rate at Flowing Conditions ‘Qm’ (Klbm/hr) Qm =

4.1.2.

[N

1

× C d × E v × Y1 × d 2 ×

1000

Qm ρf

Volumetric Net Flow Rate at Base Conditions ‘Qb’ (MSCF/hr) Qb =

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

]

Volumetric Gross Flow Rate at Flowing Conditions ‘Qv’ (MCF/hr) Qv =

4.1.3.

ρ f × ∆Ρ

Qm ρb

4-1

Chapter 4

Flow Equations and Algorithms for U.S. Customary Units (Revision 23.71+)

4.1.4.

Energy Flow Rate at Base Conditions ‘Qe’ (MMBTU/hr) Qe =

4.1.5.

( Q b × HV )

1000

Nomenclature

The following symbols are used in the flow rate equations. Some of these require further elaboration or calculation, which can be found in the indicated standards. Qm = mass flow rate at flowing (actual) conditions for gas differential pressure flowmeters, in thousands of pounds mass per hour (Klbm/hr) Qv = volume (gross) flow rate at flowing (actual) conditions for gas differential pressure flowmeters, in thousands of cubic feet per hour (MCF/hr) Qb = volume (net) flow rate at base (standard/reference) conditions for gas differential pressure flowmeters, in thousands of standard cubic feet per hour (MSCF/hr) Qe = energy flow rate at base (standard/reference) conditions for gas differential pressure flowmeters, in millions of British thermal units per hour (MMBTU/hr) N1 = factor of combined numerical constants and unit conversions = 359.072 Cd = coefficient of discharge (dimensionless see 5.1.8 this chapter) Ev = velocity of approach factor (dimensionless see 5.1.7 this chapter) Y1 = fluid expansion factor referenced to upstream static pressure (dimensionless see 5.1.9 this chapter) d = orifice plate bore or nozzle/Venturi throat diameter at flowing temperature, in inches (see 5.1.6 this chapter)

ρf = fluid density at upstream flowing conditions (actual temperature and pressure), in pounds mass per cubic foot (lbm/CF) ∆Ρ = differential pressure, in inches of water at 60°F, which is the static pressure difference measured between the upstream and downstream flange tap holes or in the throat taps.

ρb = fluid density at base conditions (standard/reference temperature and pressure), in pounds mass per cubic foot (lbm/CF) HV = volumetric heating value at reference conditions, in British thermal units per standard cubic foot (BTU/SCF)

4-2

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Volume 3d


4.1.6.

Diameters and Diameter Correlations

The various orifice meter flow equations require calculating the diameters of the orifice plate bore or of the nozzle/Venturi throat, the meter tube (internally), and the beta ratio. These calculated diameters are also used to calculate the pipe Reynolds number, which is used in calculating discharge coefficients.

Orifice Plate Bore or Nozzle / Venturi Throat Diameter ‘d’ (inches) The calculated diameter (in inches) of the orifice plate bore or of the throat of the nozzle or Venturi tube at flowing temperature is used in the flow equations to calculate flow rates and the pipe Reynolds number. It is the internal diameter of the orifice plate measuring aperture (bore) or throat computed at flowing temperature, and is defined as follows:

(

)

d = dr 1 + α 1 Tf - Tr   1   Where: d = orifice plate bore or nozzle/Venturi throat diameter at flowing temperature, in inches dr = reference orifice plate bore or nozzle/Venturi throat diameter at reference temperature, in inches α1 = linear coefficient of thermal expansion of the orifice plate or nozzle/Venturi throat material, in/in⋅°F Tf = temperature of the fluid at flowing conditions, in °F Tr1 = reference temperature for the orifice plate bore or nozzle/Venturi throat diameter, in °F

Upstream Meter Tube (Pipe) Internal Diameter ‘D’ (inches) The calculated upstream internal meter tube diameter (in inches) at flowing temperature is used in the flow equations to calculate the diameter ratio and the pipe Reynolds number. It is the inside diameter of the upstream section of the meter tube computed at flowing temperature, and is defined as follows:

[

(

D = D r 1 + α 2 Tf - Tr2

)]

Where: D = upstream internal meter tube diameter or upstream diameter of classical Venturi tube at flowing temperature, in inches Dr = reference meter tube internal diameter at reference temperature, in inches α2 = linear coefficient of thermal expansion of the meter tube material, in in/in⋅°F Tf = temperature of the fluid at flowing conditions, in °F Tr

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

2

= reference temperature for the meter tube internal diameter, in °F

4-3

Chapter 4

Flow Equations and Algorithms for U.S. Customary Units (Revision 23.71+) Diameter (Beta) Ratio ‘β β’

Dimensionless Values Both the diameter (beta) ratio and pipe Reynolds number are dimensionless; however, consistent units must be used.

The diameter ratio (or beta ratio) is defined as the calculated orifice plate bore or nozzle/Venturi throat diameter divided by the calculated meter tube internal diameter: β = d

D

Where: d = orifice plate bore or nozzle/Venturi throat diameter at flowing temperature, in inches D = upstream meter tube (pipe) internal diameter at flowing temperature, in inches

Pipe Reynolds Number ‘RD’ and ‘Rd’ The pipe Reynolds number is used in the equation for calculating the coefficient of discharge for differential pressure flowmeters. It is a correlating parameter used to represent the change in the orifice plate, nozzle or Venturi tube coefficient of discharge with reference to either the meter tube diameter (RD) or the bore (throat) diameter (Rd), and the fluid mass flow rate (its velocity through the orifice), the fluid density, and the fluid viscosity. Pipe Reynolds Number Referenced to the Meter Tube Diameter ‘RD’ The following equation applies to orifice, nozzle and Venturi differential pressure flow metering devices, except for pipe-tapped orifice flowmeters.

RD =

48 qm πµD

Where: RD = pipe Reynolds number referenced to the upstream internal meter tube diameter or upstream diameter of a classical Venturi tube qm = mass flow rate at flowing (actual) conditions for differential pressure flowmeters, in lbm/sec π = universal constant = 3.14159 µ = absolute (dynamic) viscosity of fluid at flowing conditions, in lbm/ft⋅sec D = upstream internal meter tube diameter or upstream diameter of a classical Venturi tube at flowing temperature, in inches

4-4

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Volume 3d


Pipe Reynolds Number Referenced to the Bore or Throat Diameter ‘Rd’ The following equation applies only to pipe-tapped orifice meters.

Rd =

48 qm πµd

Where: Rd = pipe Reynolds number referenced to the orifice plate bore or nozzle/Venturi throat diameter qm = mass flow rate at flowing (actual) conditions for differential pressure flowmeters, lbm/sec π = universal constant = 3.14159 µ = absolute (dynamic) viscosity of fluid at flowing conditions, in lbm/ft⋅sec d = orifice plate bore or nozzle/Venturi throat diameter at flowing temperature, in inches

4.1.7. Dimensionless Values The calculated velocity of approach factor is dimensionless; however, consistent units must be used.

Velocity of Approach Factor ‘Ev’

The velocity of approach factor is used in the differential pressure flowmeter equations to calculate the flow rate. It relates the velocity of the flowing fluid in the flowmeter approach section (upstream meter tube) to the fluid velocity in the orifice plate, nozzle or Venturi tube. The velocity of approach factor is defined by the following expression: Ev =

1 1 - β4

Where: Ev = velocity of approach factor β = diameter (beta) ratio (see 5.1.6 this chapter)

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

4-5

Chapter 4


4.1.8. Dimensionless Values The calculated coefficient of discharge is dimensionless; however, consistent units must be used.

Discharge Coefficients ‘Cd’

The equations for the coefficient of discharge (Cd) have been determined from test data and correlated as a function of the diameter ratio (β), the meter tube diameter (D), and the pipe Reynolds number (RD). It is used in the flow rate equations.

Coefficient of Discharge for Orifice Flowmeters With Flange Taps (RG Equation) ‘Cd(FT)’ The Reader-Harris/Gallager (RG) equation for concentric, square-edged, flangetapped orifice flowmeter coefficient of discharge [Cd(FT)] is a function of the orifice geometry and of a specified pipe Reynolds number, and is defined as follows: 0.7   6   C (FT) + 0.000511  10 β   R   i  D   C d (FT) =  0.8   19000 β      + 0.0210 + 0.0049    RD   

    0.35   6     × β 4  10       RD   

Where: Cd(FT) = coefficient of discharge at a specified pipe Reynolds number for flange-tapped orifice flowmeters Ci(FT) = coefficient of discharge at an infinite pipe Reynolds number for flange-tapped orifice flowmeters = Ci(CT) + Tap Term Where: Ci(CT) = coefficient of discharge at an infinite pipe Reynolds number for corner-tapped orifice flowmeters  0.5961 + 0.0291 β2 - 0.2290 β8 =   + 0.003 (1- β) max ( 2.8 - D, 0.0

[

)]

  

Tap Term = Upstrm + Dnstrm

[

 0.0433 + 0.0712 e-8.5L1   0.8  Upstrm =   19000 β    ×  1 - 0.23    RD       − 0.0116   2 L 2     1- β    Dnstrm =    11 .  × β  1 - 0.14   

4-6

0.1145 e-6.0L1   4   ×  β   1- β4     

 2 L2  - 0.52    1- β   19000 β     RD 

0.8

   

13 .

   

]    

       

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Volume 3d

Configuration and Advanced Operation Where: e = Napierian constant = 2.71828 L1 = dimensionless location

correction

for

upstream

tap

= 1/D = L2 L2 = dimensionless correction for downstream tap location D = upstream internal meter tube diameter or upstream diameter of a classical Venturi tube at flowing temperature, in inches (see 5.1.6 this

chapter) β = diameter (beta) ratio (see 5.1.6 this chapter) RD = pipe Reynolds number referenced to the upstream internal meter tube diameter (see 5.1.6 this chapter) With Corner Taps ‘Cd(CT)’

C d (CT) = 0.5959 + 0.0312 β 2.1 - 0.184 β 8 + 91.71 β 2.5 (RD )

−0.75

Where: Cd(CT) = coefficient of discharge at a specified pipe Reynolds number for orifice flowmeters with corner taps β = diameter (beta) ratio (see 5.1.6 this chapter) RD = pipe Reynolds number referenced to the upstream internal meter tube diameter (see 5.1.6 this chapter) With D and D/2 Taps ‘Cd(DT)’

(

)

-1   2.1 - 0.184 β 8 + 0.039 β 4 1- β 4  0.5959 + 0.0312 β  C d (DT) =   0 . 75 − 3 2.5  - 0.01584 β + 91.71 β  R ( ) D  

Where: Cd(DT) = coefficient of discharge at a specified pipe Reynolds number for orifice flowmeters with D and D/2 taps β = diameter (beta) ratio (see 5.1.6 this chapter) RD = pipe Reynolds number referenced to the upstream internal meter tube diameter (see 5.1.6 this chapter)

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

4-7

Chapter 4


With Pipe Taps ‘Cd(PT)’    C d (PT) = C i (PT ) 1+  

  875       d 830 - 5000β + 9000β 2 - 4200β 3  75 +    D       Rd      

Where: Cd(PT) = coefficient of discharge at a specified pipe Reynolds number for orifice flowmeters with pipe taps Ci(PT) = coefficient of discharge at an infinite pipe Reynolds number for orifice flowmeters with pipe taps =

Ce (PT)   875     15 830 - 5000β + 9000β2 - 4200β3  75 +   D    1+  d 10 6   

( )

      

Where: Ce(PT) = coefficient of discharge for orifice flowmeters with pipe taps when the pipe Reynolds number ‘Rd’ is equal to 6 [d(10 )/15]  0.0182 0.06  2  +  0.44  β  0.5925 +  D D   0.225  5   14 =  +  0.935 +  β + 1.35 β   D  5   1.43  2  +  0.5  × ( 0.25 - β ) D 

        

D = upstream internal meter tube diameter or upstream diameter of a classical Venturi tube at flowing temperature, in inches (see 5.1.6 this chapter) d = orifice plate bore diameter at flowing temperature, in inches (see 5.1.6 this chapter) β = diameter (beta) ratio (see 5.1.6 this chapter) Rd = pipe Reynolds number referenced to the diameter of the orifice plate bore (see 5.1.6 this chapter)

4-8

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Volume 3d


Coefficient of Discharge for ASME Flow Nozzles ‘Cd(FN)’ Dimensionless Values The calculated coefficient of discharge is dimensionless; however, consistent units must be used.

 10 6 β   C d (FN) = 0.9975 - 0.00653    RD 

0.5

Where: Cd(FN) = coefficient of discharge at a specified pipe Reynolds number for ASME flow nozzles β = diameter (beta) ratio (see 5.1.6 this chapter) Rd = pipe Reynolds number referenced to the diameter of the orifice plate bore (see 5.1.6 this chapter)

Coefficient of Discharge for Classical Venturi Tubes With Rough Cast / Fabricated Convergent Section ‘Cd(VTR/F)’ Cd(VTR/F) = 0.984 When: 4 inches ≤

D

≤ 48 inches

0.3 ≤

β

≤ 0.75

5

2 x 10

6

≤ RD ≤ 6 x 10

Where: Cd(VTR/F) = discharge coefficient for classical Venturi tube with a rough cast or fabricated convergent section β = diameter (beta) ratio (see 5.1.6 this chapter) RD = pipe Reynolds number (see 5.1.6 this chapter) With Machined Convergent Section ‘Cd(VTM)’ Cd(VTM) = 0.995 When:

2 inches ≤

D

≤ 10 inches

0.3 ≤

β

≤ 0.75

5

2 x 10

6

≤ RD ≤ 2 x 10

Where: Cd(VTM) = discharge coefficient for a classical Venturi tube with a machined convergent section β = diameter (beta) ratio (see 5.1.6 this chapter) RD = pipe Reynolds number (see 5.1.6 this chapter)

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

4-9

Chapter 4


4.1.9. Expansion Factor Referenced to Upstream Pressure ‘Y1’ - The flow rate equations for differential pressure flow metering devices always require using the expansion factor referenced to upstream pressure (Y1), even when the static pressure is measured at downstream taps.

Fluid Expansion Factor Referenced to Upstream Pressure ‘Y1’

The fluid expansion factor (Y) is used to take into account the compressibility of the fluid in calculation the flow rate. This coefficient is determined from correlating the diameter ratio (β), the differential pressure (∆Ρ), the flowing isentropic exponent (κ), and the absolute static pressure (Ρ) at upstream (Y1) conditions. This factor is used in the mass flow rate equation for differential pressure metering devices and can be calculated using the following expressions:

Upstream Expansion Factor for Orifice Plates With Flange / Corner / D & D/2 Taps

Dimensionless Values The calculated fluid expansion factor is dimensionless; however, consistent units must be used.

Y1 = 1 -

( 0.41 + 0.35 β ) xκ 4

1

Where: Y1 = fluid expansion factor based on the absolute static pressure at the upstream tap β = diameter (beta) ratio (see 5.1.6 this chapter) x1 = upstream acoustic ratio κ x1 = ratio of differential pressure to absolute static pressure measured at the upstream tap When static pressure is measured at upstream flange tap holes: x1 =

∆Ρ N3Ρf1

When static pressure is measured at downstream flange tap holes: x1 =

∆Ρ N3Ρf2 + ∆Ρ

Where: ∆Ρ = orifice differential pressure, in inches of water at 60°F N3 = unit conversion factor = 27.707 Ρf1 = absolute static pressure at the upstream tap Ρf2 = absolute static pressure at the downstream tap

κ = isentropic exponent

4-10

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Volume 3d

Configuration and Advanced Operation With Pipe Taps

(

)

x Y1 = 1 -  0.333 + 1.145 β 2 + 0.7 β 5 + 12 β 13  1   κ Where: Y1 = fluid expansion factor based on the absolute static pressure at the upstream tap β = diameter (beta) ratio (see 5.1.6 this chapter) x1 = upstream acoustic ratio κ x1 = ratio of differential pressure to absolute static pressure measured at the upstream tap x1 =

∆Ρ N3Ρf1

Where: ∆Ρ = orifice differential pressure, in inches of water at 60°F N3 = unit conversion factor = 27.707 Ρf1 = absolute static pressure at the upstream tap

κ = isentropic exponent

Upstream Expansion Factor for ASME Flow Nozzles and Classical Venturi Tubes

Y1 =

 1 - β4   κ τ 2/ κ   1 - τ ( κ -1)/ κ   ×    ×    κ - 1    1 - τ      1 - β 4 τ 2/ κ 

Where: Y1 = fluid expansion factor at upstream (pressure) conditions κ = isentropic exponent τ = pressure ratio =

Ρ1 Ρ2 Where: Ρ1 = absolute upstream static pressure of the fluid Ρ2 = absolute downstream static pressure of the fluid

β = diameter (beta) ratio (see 5.1.6 this chapter)

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

4-11

Chapter 4


4.2. 4.2.1.

Flow Rate for Gas Turbine Flowmeters Volumetric Gross Flow Rate at Flowing Conditions ‘QV’ (MCF/hr) QV =

4.2.2.

Pulses × 3600 KF

Mass Flow Rate at Flowing Conditions ‘Qm’ (Klbm/hr) Q m = Q V × ρf × MF

4.2.3.

Volumetric Net Flow Rate at Base Conditions ‘Qb’ (MSCF/hr) Qb = Q V ×

4.2.4.

Energy Flow Rate at Base Conditions ‘Qe’ (MMBTU/hr) Qe =

4-12

ρf × MF ρb

(Q b

× HV )

1000

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Volume 3d


4.2.5.

Nomenclature QV = volumetric gross flow rate at flowing conditions for gas turbine flowmeters, in thousands of cubic feet per hour (MCF/hr)

Qm = mass flow rate at flowing conditions for gas turbine flowmeters, in thousands of pounds mass per hour (Klb/hr) Qb = volumetric net flow rate at base conditions for gas turbine flowmeters, in thousands of standard cubic feet per hour (MSCF/hr) Qe = energy flow rate at base (standard/reference) conditions for gas turbine flowmeters, in millions of British thermal units per standard cubic foot (MMBTU/SCF) Pulses = number of pulses emitted from the flowmeter pulse train per second.

ρf = fluid density at flowing conditions (actual temperature and pressure), in pounds mass per cubic foot (lbm/CF) ρb = reference density at base conditions (standard/reference temperature and pressure), in pounds mass per cubic foot (lbm/CF) KF = K factor, in pulses per thousand cubic feet (Pulses/MCF) MF = meter factor (dimensionless) HV = volumetric heating value at reference conditions, in British thermal units per standard cubic foot (BTU/SCF)

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

4-13

Chapter 4


4.3.

Densities and Other Properties of Gas

4.3.1. O

AGA Report N 8 Documentation References - Detailed information on computations performed in conformance to the different editions of this standard can be found in the following O AGA Report N 8 versions: ❑ Second Edition, July nd 1994: 2 Printing, O Catalog N XQ9212 ❑ Second Edition, November 1992: O Catalog N XQ9212 ❑ December 1985: O Catalog N XQ1285

AGA Report NO 8: Compressibility for Natural Gas and Other Related Hydrocarbon Gases

Omni flow computer firmware has been programmed in conformance with the December 1985, November 1992, and July 1994 editions of the American Gas O Association Report N 8 (AGA 8). This standard provides computation methodology for compressibility and supercompressibility factors and densities of natural gas and other hydrocarbon gases. Of the three editions, the July 1994 edition is considered the most reliable, accurate and complete. However, due to contract requirements or other conditions, some users may want to apply an earlier AGA 8 version. The December 1985 edition of AGA 8 incorporates improvements to the accuracy of computations compressibility and supercompressibility factors beyond the capabilities of AGA’s “Manual for the Determination of O Supercompressibility Factors for Natural Gas” (December 1962; Catalog N L00304). Other improvements included in this version were the expansion in the ranges of gas composition, temperature and pressure, and applications to gas thermodynamic properties. A very significant improvement to this standard is apparent in the AGA 8 November 1992 edition. Major changes incorporate more precise computations of compressibility factors and densities of natural gas and related hydrocarbon gases, calculation uncertainty estimations and upgraded FORTRAN computer program listings. Other improvements include enhanced equations of state, more accurate calculations for rich gases based on new velocity of sound data, revised correlation methodology. The current AGA 8 manual was updated in July 1994 for the purpose of correcting typographical errors found in the previous edition, improving the computer programs, and achieving consistency with GPA 2172-94 and the 1992 O edition of AGA Report N 3, Part 3. For reference purposes and as a comparison and contrast exposition of these AGA 8 editions, the following is a brief presentation of some aspects applied by the Omni flow computer, which include: ❑ Types of Gases ♦ Mole Percent Ranges of Gas Mixture Characteristics ♦ Natural Gas Compound Identification Codes ❑ Methods for Gas Mixture Characterization ♦ AGA 8 1994/1992 Methods ♦ AGA 8 1985 Methods

4-14

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Volume 3d

Configuration and Advanced Operation Types of Gases The AGA 8 report is intended for natural gases and other related hydrocarbons gases. Omni flow computer programs include calculations and other information O from the three latest editions of the AGA Report N 8 at the time of firmware release. The following table lists the type of gases, the corresponding identification codes assigned to each gas type in the computer program, and the mole % range of gas mixture characteristics contained in Omni firmware that have been taken from AGA 8 1994, 1992 and 1985 editions.

Comparative Table of Natural Gas Types, Identification Codes and Mole Percent Ranges o

(AGA Report N 8 Editions Applicable to Omni Flow Computers)

Note:

# The normal range is considered to be zero for these compounds, as follows: AGA 8 1994: oxygen & argon AGA 8 1992: hydrogen, carbon monoxide, oxygen & argon

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

1994 / 1992

TYPE OF GAS MIXTURE

ID CODE

Methane Nitrogen Carbon Dioxide Ethane Propane Water Vapor Hydrogen Sulfide Hydrogen Carbon Monoxide Oxygen Iso-Butane Normal Butane Iso-Pentane Normal Pentane Normal Hexane Normal Heptane Normal Octane Normal Nonane Normal Decane Helium Argon

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

1985

MOLE % RANGE NORMAL

EXPANDED

45.0 to 100.0 0 to 50.0 0 to 30.0 0 to 10.0 0 to 4.0 0 to 0.5 0 to 0.02 0 to 10.0 / # 0 to 3.0 / # #

0 to 100.0 0 to 100.0 0 to 100.0 0 to 100.0 0 to 12.0 0 to Dew Point 0 to 100.0 0 to 100.0 0 to 3.0 0 to 21.0

0 to 1.0

0 to 6.0

(Total Butanes)

(Total Butanes)

0 to 0.3

0 to 4.0

(Total Pentanes)

(Total Pentanes)

0 to 0.2

0 to Dew Point

(Hexane Plus Heavier (Hexane Plus Heavier Hydrocarbons) Hydrocarbons)

0 to 0.2 #

0 to 3.0 0 to 1.0

ID CODE

MOLE % RANGE

6 1 2 7 8 4 3 20 19 18 10 9 12 11 13 14 15 16 17 5 N/A

50.0 to 100.0 0 to 50.0 0 to 50.0 0 to 20.0 0 to 5.0 0 to 1.0 0 to 1.0 0 to 1.0 0 to 1.0 0 to 1.0 0 to 3.0 (Butanes)

0 to 2.0 (Pentanes)

0 to 1.0 (Hexane Plus Heavier Hydrocarbons)

0 to 1.0 0 to 1.0

4-15

Chapter 4

Flow Equations and Algorithms for U.S. Customary Units (Revision 23.71+) Methods for Gas Mixture Characterization O

AGA REPORT N 8 - 1994/1992 EDITIONS: Three methods of characterization of a gas mixture from the AGA 8 1994/1992 editions are available for use on the Omni Flow Computers: the Detailed Method and the Gross Characterization Methods (#1 & #2). The Detailed Characterization Method The gas phase pressure-temperature-density behavior of natural gas mixtures is accurately described by the detailed characterization method, for a wide range of conditions. This behavior can also be accurately describe for the pure components methane, ethane, carbon dioxide, nitrogen and hydrogen and binary mixtures of these components. A low density correlation was developed for propane and heavier hydrocarbons, and binary mixtures of these components with methane, ethane, nitrogen and carbon dioxide. The uncertainty of compressibility factors and density calculations for natural gases from production separators, which can contain mole percentages of hexanes plus heavier hydrocarbons greater than 1%, is reduced by this method. Correlations were developed to reduce the calculation uncertainty of the following: ❑ Natural gases containing hydrogen sulfide (sour gas): correlations of the density behavior of pure hydrogen sulfide and binary mixtures of hydrogen sulfide with methane, ethane, nitrogen and carbon ❑ Natural gases containing water vapor (wet gas): second virial correlations for water and binary mixtures of water with methane, ethane, nitrogen and carbon dioxide Gross Characterization Methods The following table identifies the nominal ranges of gas characteristics for which these methods are used:

Notes:

* Reference conditions: Combustion at 60°F, 14.73 psia: Density at 60°F. 14.73 psia.

** Reference conditions: Combustion at 25°C, 0.101325 MPa: Density at 0°C, 0.101325 MPa

RANGE

QUANTITY

Relative Density Gross Heating Value * Gross Heating Value ** Mole % Methane Mole % Nitrogen Mole % Carbon Dioxide Mole % Ethane Mole % Propane Mole % Butanes Mole % Pentanes Mole % Hexanes Plus Mole % Helium

0.56 to 0.87 477 to 1150 Btu/scf 18.7 to 45.1 MJ/m3 45.2 to 98.3 0.3 to 53.6 0.04 to 28.94 0.24 to 9.53 0.02 to 3.57 0.01 to 1.08 0.002 to 0.279 0.0005 to 0.1004 0 to 0.158

Method #1: Utilizes the volumetric gross heating value (HV), relative density, mole fraction CO2. Method #2: Utilizes Relative Density, mole fraction N2, mole fraction CO2.

4-16

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Volume 3d

Configuration and Advanced Operation O

AGA REPORT N 8 - 1985 EDITION: Six methods of characterization of a gas mixture from the AGA 8 1985 edition are available for use on the Omni Flow Computers: the primary method and five alternate methods. Primary Characterization Method The primary method is the most accurate method in this AGA 8 version for characterization of natural gas, for computations using the equation of state for compressibility factor. This method consists of a complete compositional analysis (the mole fractions of all components) of a natural gas mixture. Alternate Characterization Methods An alternate characterization method is used when a complete compositional analysis for a natural gas is not available. One of the five alternate methods can be used to estimate the mole fractions of methane and other important hydrocarbons in the natural gas, as well as diluents other than carbon dioxide and nitrogen. These characterization methods do not include water vapor or hydrogen components. Various combinations of the following quantities are utilized: ❑ Real Gas Relative Density (Specific Gravity) (G), at 60°F and 14.73 psia ❑ Real Gas Gross Heating Value per Unit Volume (HV), at 60°F and 14.73 3 psia (BTU/ft ) ❑ Mole Fraction of Carbon Dioxide [x(CO2)] ❑ Mole Fraction of Nitrogen [x(N2)] ❑ Mole Fraction of Methane [x(CH4)] These alternate methods yield estimates of the mole fraction of the following: ❑ Methane ❑ Ethane ❑ Propane ❑ Normal Butane ❑ Iso-Butane ❑ Total Pentanes ❑ Total Hexanes plus Heavier Hydrocarbon Gases ❑ Total Diluents other than Nitrogen and Carbon Dioxide The five alternate characterization methods are: (1) The Gravity, Carbon Dioxide, Nitrogen Method (2) The Gravity, Heating Value, Carbon Dioxide, Nitrogen Method (3) The Gravity, Heating Value, Carbon Dioxide Method (4) The Heating Value, Carbon Dioxide, Nitrogen Method (5) The Gravity, Methane, Carbon Dioxide, Nitrogen Method

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

4-17

Chapter 4


4.3.2.

υr’ ASME 1967 Steam Equation ‘υ

The Omni flow computer applies the ASME 1967 steam equation. This equation is a closed-form solution (non-iterative), developed using reduced properties; pressure (Ρr) and temperature parameters (Tr), to define the reduced volume (υr) of steam.

4.3.3. Acknowledgement - The implementation of the Keenan & Keyes steam tables was based on the work of Don Kyle of Kyle Engineering, Inc.

Water Density

Water density calculations performed by the Omni flow computer are derived from the fundamental equation which expresses the characteristic function ‘ψ’, known as the Helmholtz free energy, in terms of the independent variables density (ρ) and temperature (T). This fundamental equation from which water density is derived has been obtained from: Joseph H. Keenan, Frederick G. Keyes, et al., Steam Tables: Thermodynamic Properties of Water Including Vapor, Liquid and Solid Phases (John Wiley & Sons, 1969), page 134.

4.3.4.

NBS Density (lb/CF), Viscosity Isentropic Exponent, Sound Velocity, and Enthalpy

The NBS Technical Note 1048 (Issued July 1982) is used to calculate density 3 (lb/ft ), absolute viscosity (C.P.) isentropic exponent, sound velocity, and enthalpy (BTU/lb) for the following gases: ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑

4-18

Argon Nitrogen Oxygen Hydrogen Ethylene

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Volume 3d


4.3.5.

Density and Specific Gravity Values Determined from Densitometer and Gravitometer Frequency Signals - The equations used to determine the density and specific gravity via gas density and specific gravity transducers are provided by the respective manufacturers.

Density and Relative Density (Specific Gravity) Calculated from Digital Densitometer and Gravitometer Output Frequency

The calculations expressed in this section are performed by the Omni to determine the density from frequency signals received from the following third party densitometers and gravitometers: ❑ Sarasota / Peek ❑ UGC ❑ Solartron

Sarasota Density (lb/CF) Sarasota density is calculated using the frequency signal produced by a Sarasota densitometer, and applying temperature and pressure corrections as shown below:

(

)

(

)

 2D ' t - t '  1 + K t - t '  0  0   0  D c = DCF ×   ×   ' ' 2x t 0 t0     Where: Dc = corrected density DCF = Density correction factor Note:

* D0’ must be expressed in pounds per cubic foot (lb/CF).

D0 = calibration constant, in mass/volume* t = densitometer oscillation period in microseconds (µsec) t0 = calibration constant, in microseconds t0' = Tcoef x (Tf - Tcal) + Pcoef x (Pf - Pcal) + t0 K = spool calibration constant Tf = flowing temperature, in °F Tcoef = temperature coefficient, in µsec/°F Pf = flowing pressure, in psig Pcoef = pressure coefficient, in µsec/psig Pcal = calibration pressure, in psig

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

4-19

Chapter 4

Flow Equations and Algorithms for U.S. Customary Units (Revision 23.71+) UGC Density (lb/CF)


UGC density is calculated using the frequency signal produced by a UGC densitometer, and applying temperature and pressure corrections as shown below: UNCORRECTED DENSITY:

(

D = K 0 + (K 1 × t) + K 2 × t 2

)

Where: D = uncorrected density, in lb/CF K0   K 1  = calibration constants of density probe, entered via the keypad K 2  t = densitometer oscillation time period, in microseconds (µsec) CORRECTED DENSITY:

(

)

(

)

   2    K Ρ3 D + K Ρ2 D + K Ρ1 × Ρf - Ρc  D c = DCF ×    + D  +  K D2 + K D + K T T × f t2 t1 c     t3

(

)

(

)

Where: Dc = corrected density, in lb/CF DCF = density correction factor D = uncorrected density, in lb/CF K Ρ1   K Ρ2  = pressure constants K Ρ3  Ρƒ = flowing pressure, in psig Ρc = calibration pressure, in psig K t1   K t2  = temperature constants K t3  Tƒ = flowing temperature, in °F Tc = calibration temperature, in °F

4-20

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Volume 3d

Configuration and Advanced Operation Solartron  Density (kg/m3)

INFO - For Solartron gas density transducers, it is NOT necessary to convert the calibration sheet from metric to US customary units.

Solartron density is calculated using the frequency signal produced by a Solartron frequency densitometer, and applying temperature and pressure corrections as detailed below. UNCORRECTED DENSITY:

(

D = K 0 + (K 1 × t) + K 2 × t 2

)

Where: D = uncorrected density, in kg/m

3

K0   3 K 1  = calibration constants supplied by Solartron, in kg/m and °C K 2  t = densitometer oscillation time period, in microseconds (µsec) TEMPERATURE CORRECTED DENSITY: DT = D ×

[1 +

K 18 (TF - 20 )

] + [ K 19 (TF

- 20)

]

  TF + 273 

   

Where: DT = temperature corrected density, in kg/m D = uncompensated density, in kg/m

3

3

K 18   = calibration constants supplied by Solartron K 19  TF = Temperature in °C ACTUAL DENSITY:  Da = DT ×  1 +  

K3

(D T + K 4 )

 ×  K 5 − 

(

G

)

Where: Da = actual density, in kg/m

3

DT = temperature compensated density, in kg/m

3

K3   K 4  = calibration constants supplied by Solartron K 5  G =

Gas Specific Gravity Ratio of Specific Heats

TF = Temperature in °C

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

4-21

Chapter 4

Flow Equations and Algorithms for U.S. Customary Units (Revision 23.71+) Solartron  NT 3096 Gravitometer: Relative Density (Specific Gravity)/Output Frequency Relationship


The relationship between the gravitometer output frequency and the specific gravity is given by the following: G = K0 + K2 T

2

Where: G = specific gravity of a gas determined from the transducer frequency signal T = periodic time of the sample gas specific gravity at stable temperature and at the selected reference chamber pressure, in microseconds (µsec) =

G - K0 K2

K0 = calibration constant =

G Y - K 2 TY 2


GX - G Y TX - TY GX = specific gravity of calibration (sample) gas ‘X’ GY = specific gravity of calibration (sample) gas ‘Y’ TX = periodic time of a known calibration (sample) gas of ‘X’ specific gravity under stable operating conditions, in µsec TY = periodic time of a known calibration (sample) gas of ‘Y’ specific gravity under stable operating conditions, in µsec

4-22

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Volume 3d


5. Flow Equations and Algorithms for S.I. (Metric) Units (Revision 27.71+) 5.1. Flow Rate Units - For practical reasons. the Omni flow computer displays calculated flow rates in thousands of units per hour, in comparison to the standards (ISO). Therefore, the flow equations must be either divided or multiplied by 1000.

Flow Rate for Gas Differential Pressure Devices (Orifice, Nozzle and Venturi)

The practical flow equations expressed below are based on the International Standard ISO 5167-1: Measurement of Fluid Flow by Means of Pressure Differential Devices, Part 1: Orifice Plates, Nozzles and Venturi Tubes Inserted in Circular Cross-section Conduits Running Full.

5.1.1.

Mass Flow Rate at Flowing Conditions ‘Qm’ (ton/hr) K1 × Qm =

C 1- β

4

× ε × d2 ×

∆Ρ × ρ f

1000

Where: 1

= velocity of approach factor = Ev

1 - β4 Therefore also:

Qm =

5.1.2.

 K 1 × C × E v × ε × d 2 × 

1000

Volumetric Gross Flow Rate at Flowing Conditions ‘Qv’ (m3/hr) Qv =

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

∆Ρ × ρ f 

Qm × 1000 ρf

5-1

Chapter 5

Flow Equations and Algorithms for S.I. (Metric) Units (Revision 27.71+)

5.1.3.

Volumetric Net Flow Rate at Base Conditions ‘Qb’ (m3/hr) Qb =

5.1.4.

Energy Flow Rate at Base Conditions ‘Qe’ (GJ/hr) Qe =

5.1.5.

Qm × 1000 ρb

( Qb

× HV

)

1000

Nomenclature

The following symbols are used in the flow rate equations. Some of these require further elaboration or calculation, which can be found on the following pages in this chapter and in the indicated standards. Qm = mass flow rate at flowing (actual) conditions for differential pressure flowmeters, in tons per hour (ton/hr) Qv = volume (gross) flow rate at flowing (actual) conditions for 3 differential pressure flowmeters, in cubic meters per hour (m /hr) Qb = volume (net) flow rate at base (standard/reference) conditions for 3 differential pressure flowmeters, in cubic meters per hour (m /hr) Qe = energy flow rate at base (standard/reference) conditions for differential pressure flowmeters, in gigajoule per hour (GJ/hr) K1 = factor of combined numerical constants and unit conversions = 0.005654862 C = coefficient of discharge (dimensionless see 6.1.7 this chapter) β = diameter (beta) ratio (dimensionless see 6.1.6 this chapter) Ev = velocity of approach factor (dimensionless) = 1

1 - β4

ε = fluid expansion factor (dimensionless see 6.1.8 this chapter) d = orifice plate bore (throat) diameter at flowing temperature conditions, in meters (see 6.1.6 this chapter) ∆Ρ = differential pressure, in Pascals (Pa), which is the static pressure difference measured between the upstream and downstream tap holes (or in the throat of a Venturi tube).

ρƒ = fluid density at flowing conditions (actual temperature and 3 pressure), in kilograms per cubic meter (kg/m ) ρb = fluid density at base conditions (standard/reference temperature 3 and pressure), in kilograms per cubic meter (kg/m ) HV = volumetric heating value at reference conditions, in British thermal units per standard cubic foot (BTU/SCF)

5-2

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Volume 3d


5.1.6.

Diameters and Diameter Correlations

The various flow equations require calculating the diameters of the orifice plate bore or nozzle/Venturi throat, the meter tube or pipe (internally), and the diameter (beta) ratio. These calculated diameters are also used to calculate the pipe Reynolds number, which is used in calculating discharge coefficients.

Orifice Plate Bore or Nozzle / Venturi Throat Diameter ‘d’ (mm) The calculated diameter (in millimeters) of the orifice plate bore or of the throat of the nozzle or Venturi tube at flowing temperature is used in the flow equations to calculate flow rates and the pipe Reynolds number. It is the internal diameter of the orifice plate measuring aperture (bore), or the throat of the nozzle or the Venturi tube, computed at flowing temperature. It is defined as follows:

[

(

d = dr 1 + α 1 T f - Tr 1

)]

Where: d = orifice plate bore (or nozzle/Venturi throat) diameter at flowing temperature, in mm dr = reference orifice plate bore diameter or throat at reference temperature, in mm α1 = linear coefficient of thermal expansion of the orifice plate or nozzle/Venturi throat material, in mm/mm⋅°C Tƒ = temperature of the fluid at flowing conditions, in °C Tr

1

= reference temperature for the orifice plate bore or nozzle/Venturi throat diameter, in °C

Meter Tube (Pipe) Internal Diameter ‘D’ (mm) The calculated internal diameter of the meter tube (in millimeters) at flowing temperature is used in the flow equations to calculate the diameter ratio and the pipe Reynolds number. It is the inside diameter of the upstream section of the meter tube computed at flowing temperature, and is defined as:

[

]

D = D r 1 + α 2 (Tf - Tr2 ) Where:

D = meter tube internal diameter at flowing temperature, in mm Dr = reference meter tube internal diameter at reference temperature, in mm α2 = linear coefficient of thermal expansion of the meter tube material, in mm/mm⋅°C Tf = temperature of the fluid at flowing conditions, in °C Tr

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

2

= reference temperature for the meter tube internal diameter, in °C

5-3

Chapter 5

Flow Equations and Algorithms for S.I. (Metric) Units (Revision 27.71+) Diameter (Beta) Ratio ‘β β’

Dimensionless Values Both the diameter (beta) ratio and the pipe Reynolds number are dimensionless; however, consistent units must be used.

The diameter ratio (or beta ratio) is defined as the calculated orifice plate bore diameter divided by the calculated meter tube internal diameter: β = d

D

Where: d = orifice plate bore diameter at flowing temperature, in mm D = meter tube internal diameter at flowing temperature, in mm

Pipe Reynolds Number ‘RD’ The pipe Reynolds number is used in the equation for calculating the coefficient of discharge for differential pressure flowmeters. It is a correlating parameter used to represent the change in the device’s coefficient of discharge with reference to the meter tube diameter, the fluid mass flow rate (its inertia or velocity through the device), the fluid density, and the fluid viscosity, It is a parameter that expresses the ratio between the inertia and viscous forces, and is calculated using the following equation: RD =

4 qm π × µ × D

Where: RD = pipe Reynolds number qm = mass flow rate at flowing (actual) conditions, in kg/sec π = universal constant = 3.14159 µ = absolute (dynamic) viscosity of fluid at flowing conditions, in Pascals⋅second D = meter tube internal diameter at flowing temperature, in meters

5-4

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Volume 3d


5.1.7. INFO - The coefficient of discharge, as defined for and incompressible fluid flow, relates the actual flow rate (at flowing conditions) to the theoretical (reference) flow rate through a device. Calibration of standard primary devices by means of incompressible fluids (liquids) shows that the discharge coefficient is dependent only on the pipe Reynolds number (RD) for a given primary device in a given installation. The numerical value of the coefficient of discharge (C) is the same for different installation whenever such installations are geometrically similar and the flows are characterized by identical pipe Reynolds numbers. (ISO 5167-1: 1991; page 3.)

Note: For pipelines with: D ≤ 58.62mm and L1 ≥ 0.4333 use 4 4 -1 0.039 = β (1-β ) in the discharge coefficient equation for orifice plates.

Coefficient of Discharge ‘C’

The equations for the coefficient of discharge (C) have been determined from test data and correlated as a function of the diameter ratio (β), the pipe diameter (D), and the pipe Reynolds number (RD). It is used in the flow rate equations and is defined by the following equations:

Coefficient of Discharge for Orifice Plates ’C(OP)’ The discharge coefficient for orifice plates is given by the Stolz equation:

C(OP) = 0.5959 + 0.0312 β

(

+ 0.09 L 1 β 4 1 − β 4

)

−1

2.1

- 0.184 β

8

+ 0.0029 β

2.5

 10 6    R   D 

0.75

− 0.0337 L'2 β 3

Where: C(OP) = discharge coefficient for orifice plate β = diameter (beta) ratio (see 6.1.6 this chapter) RD = pipe Reynolds number (see 6.1.6 this chapter) L1 = relative upstream pressure tapping spacing = l1/D Where: l1 = D =

distance of the upstream tapping from the upstream orifice plate face pipe diameter

L’2 = relative downstream pressure tapping spacing Dimensionless Values The discharge coefficient is dimensionless; however, consistent units must be used.

= l’2/D Where: l’2 = D =

distance of the downstream downstream orifice plate face pipe diameter

tapping

from

the

FOR CORNER TAPPINGS: L1 = L’2 = 0 FOR D AND D/2 TAPPINGS: L1 = 1 L’2 = 0.47 FOR FLANGE TAPPINGS: 25.4 L1 = L’2 = D

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

5-5

Chapter 5

Flow Equations and Algorithms for S.I. (Metric) Units (Revision 27.71+) Coefficient of Discharge for ISA 1932 Nozzles ‘C(IN)’ C(IN) = 0.99 - 0.2262 β

(

4.1

- 0.00175 β

2

- 0.0033 β

4.15

)

 10 6    R   D 

1.15

Where: C(IN) = discharge coefficient for ISA 1932 nozzle β = diameter (beta) ratio (see 6.1.6 this chapter) RD = pipe Reynolds number (see 6.1.6 this chapter)

Coefficient of Discharge for Long Radius Nozzles ‘C(LN)’  10 6   C(LN) = 0.9965 - 0.00653 β 0.5    RD 

0.5

Where: C(LN) = discharge coefficient for long radius nozzle β = diameter (beta) ratio (see 6.1.6 this chapter) RD = pipe Reynolds number (see 6.1.6 this chapter)

Coefficient of Discharge for Classical Venturi Tubes Venturi Tube with an Rough Cast / Fabricated Convergent Section ‘C(VTR/F)’ C(VTR/F) = 0.984 When:

100 mm ≤

D

≤ 800 mm

0.3 ≤

β

≤ 0.75

5

2 x 10

6

≤ RD ≤ 2 x 10

Where: C(VTR/F) = discharge coefficient for classical Venturi tube with an “as cast” convergent section β = diameter (beta) ratio (see 6.1.6 this chapter) RD = pipe Reynolds number (see 6.1.6 this chapter)

5-6

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Volume 3d


Venturi Tube with a Machined Convergent Section ‘C(VTM)’ C(VTM) = 0.995 When:

50 mm ≤

D

≤ 250 mm

0.4 ≤

β

≤ 0.75

5

2 x 10

6

≤ RD ≤ 1 x 10

Where: C(VTM) = discharge coefficient for a classical Venturi tube with a machined convergent section β = diameter (beta) ratio (see 6.1.6 this chapter) RD = pipe Reynolds number (see 6.1.6 this chapter) Venturi Tube with a Rough-welded Sheet-iron Convergent Section ‘C(VTRS)’ C(VTRS) = 0.985 When:

200 mm ≤

D

≤ 1200 mm

0.4 ≤

β

≤ 0.7

5

2 x 10

6

≤ RD ≤ 2 x 10

Where: C(VTRS) = discharge coefficient for a classical Venturi tube with a roughwelded sheet-iron convergent section β = diameter (beta) ratio (see 6.1.6 this chapter) RD = pipe Reynolds number (see 6.1.6 this chapter)

Coefficient of Discharge for Venturi Nozzles ‘C(VN)’ C( VN) = 0.9858 - 0.196 β 4.5 Where: C = discharge coefficient for Venturi nozzle β = diameter (beta) ratio (see 6.1.6 this chapter)

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

5-7

Chapter 5


5.1.8. Dimensionless Values The fluid expansion factor is dimensionless; however, consistent units must be used.

Fluid Expansion Factor ‘εε’

The fluid expansion factor (ε) is used to take into account the compressibility of the fluid in calculation the flow rate. This coefficient is determined from correlating the diameter ratio (β), the differential pressure (∆Ρ), the flowing isentropic exponent (κ), and the absolute static pressure (Ρ) at upstream (ε1) or downstream (ε2) conditions. In addition to these variables, the pressure ratio is also correlated for fluids flowing through nozzle type and Venturi type devices.

Expansion Factor at Upstream Conditions ‘εε1’ The fluid expansion factor at upstream (pressure) conditions is given by the following expressions: Orifice Plates

(

ε 1 = 1 - 0.41 + 0.35β 4

) κ∆ΡΡ

1

Where: ε1 = fluid expansion factor at upstream (pressure) conditions β = diameter (beta) ratio ∆Ρ = differential pressure Ρ1 = absolute upstream static pressure of the fluid κ = isentropic exponent Nozzles, Long Radius Nozzles, Venturi Tubes and Venturi Nozzles

ε1 =

 1 - β4   κ τ 2/ κ   1 - τ ( κ -1)/ κ   ×    ×    κ - 1    1 - τ      1 - β 4 τ 2/ κ 

Where: ε1 = fluid expansion factor at upstream (pressure) conditions κ = isentropic exponent τ = pressure ratio =

Ρ1 Ρ2 Ρ1 = absolute upstream static pressure of the fluid Ρ2 = absolute downstream static pressure of the fluid

β = diameter (beta) ratio

5-8

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Volume 3d

Configuration and Advanced Operation Expansion Factor at Downstream Conditions ‘εε2’ The fluid expansion factor at downstream (pressure) conditions for differential pressure flow metering devices is given by the following expressions:

ε 2 = ε1 ×

1 +

∆Ρ Ρ2

Where: ε1 = fluid expansion factor at upstream (pressure) conditions ε2 = fluid expansion factor at downstream (pressure) conditions ∆Ρ = differential pressure Ρ2 = absolute downstream static pressure of the fluid

5.2.

Flow Rate for Gas Helical Turbine Flowmeters

5.2.1.

Volumetric Gross Flow Rate at Flowing Conditions ‘QV’ (m3/hr) QV =

5.2.2.

Mass Flow Rate at Flowing Conditions ‘Qm’ (ton/hr) Qm =

5.2.3.

Pulses × 3600 KF

( QV

× ρf × MF

ρf × MF ρb

Energy Flow Rate at Base Conditions ‘Qe’ (GJ/hr) Qe =

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

1000

Volumetric Net Flow Rate at Base Conditions ‘Qb’ (m3/hr) Qb = Q V ×

5.2.4.

)

( Qb

× HV

)

1000

5-9

Chapter 5


5.2.5.

Nomenclature QV = volumetric gross flow rate at flowing conditions for gas turbine 3 flowmeters, in cubic meters per hour (m /hr)

Qm = mass flow rate at flowing conditions for gas turbine flowmeters, in tons per hour (ton/hr) Qb = volumetric net flow rate at base conditions for gas turbine 3 flowmeters, in cubic meters per hour (m /hr) Qe = energy flow rate at base (standard/reference) conditions for gas turbine flowmeters, in gigajoule per hour (GJ/hr) Pulses = number of pulses emitted from the flowmeter pulse train per second

ρf = fluid density at flowing conditions (actual temperature and 3 pressure), in kilograms per cubic meter (Kg/m ) ρb = reference density at base conditions (standard/reference 3 temperature and pressure), in kilograms per cubic meter (Kg/m ) 3

KF = K factor, in pulses per cubic meter (pulses/m ) MF = meter factor (dimensionless) HV = volumetric heating value at reference conditions, in megajoule 3 per standard cubic meter (MJ/m )

5-10

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Volume 3d


5.3.

Densities and Other Properties of Gas

5.3.1. O

AGA Report N 8 Documentation References - Detailed information on computations performed in conformance to the different editions of this standard can be found in the following O AGA Report N 8 versions: ❑ Second Edition, July nd 1994: 2 Printing, O Catalog N XQ9212 ❑ Second Edition, November 1992: O Catalog N XQ9212 ❑ December 1985: O Catalog N XQ1285

AGA Report NO 8: Compressibility for Natural Gas and Other Related Hydrocarbon Gases

Omni flow computer firmware has been programmed in conformance with the December 1985, November 1992, and July 1994 editions of the American Gas O Association Report N 8 (AGA 8). This standard provides computation methodology for compressibility and supercompressibility factors and densities of natural gas and other hydrocarbon gases. Of the three editions, the July 1994 edition is considered the most reliable, accurate and complete. However, due to contract requirements or other conditions, some users may want to apply an earlier AGA 8 version. The December 1985 edition of AGA 8 incorporates improvements to the accuracy of computations compressibility and supercompressibility factors beyond the capabilities of AGA’s “Manual for the Determination of O Supercompressibility Factors for Natural Gas” (December 1962; Catalog N L00304). Other improvements included in this version were the expansion in the ranges of gas composition, temperature and pressure, and applications to gas thermodynamic properties. A very significant improvement to this standard is apparent in the AGA 8 November 1992 edition. Major changes incorporate more precise computations of compressibility factors and densities of natural gas and related hydrocarbon gases, calculation uncertainty estimations and upgraded FORTRAN computer program listings. Other improvements include enhanced equations of state, more accurate calculations for rich gases based on new velocity of sound data, revised correlation methodology. The current AGA 8 manual was updated in July 1994 for the purpose of correcting typographical errors found in the previous edition, improving the computer programs, and achieving consistency with GPA 2172-94 and the 1992 O edition of AGA Report N 3, Part 3. For reference purposes and as a comparison and contrast exposition of these AGA 8 editions, the following is a brief presentation of some aspects applied by the Omni flow computer, which include: ❑ Types of Gases ♦ Mole Percent Ranges of Gas Mixture Characteristics ♦ Natural Gas Compound Identification Codes ❑ Methods for Gas Mixture Characterization ♦ AGA 8 1994/1992 Methods ♦ AGA 8 1985 Methods

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

5-11

Chapter 5

Flow Equations and Algorithms for S.I. (Metric) Units (Revision 27.71+) Types of Gases The AGA 8 report is intended for natural gases and other related hydrocarbons gases. Omni flow computer programs include calculations and other information O from the three latest editions of the AGA Report N 8 at the time of firmware release. The following table lists the type of gases, the corresponding identification codes assigned to each gas type in the computer program, and the mole % range of gas mixture characteristics contained in Omni firmware that have been taken from AGA 8 1994, 1992 and 1985 editions.

Comparative Table of Natural Gas Types, Identification Codes and Mole Percent Ranges o

(AGA Report N 8 Editions Applicable to Omni Flow Computers)

Note:

# The normal range is considered to be zero for these compounds, as follows: AGA 8 1994: oxygen & argon AGA 8 1992: hydrogen, carbon monoxide, oxygen & argon

5-12

1994 / 1992

TYPE OF GAS MIXTURE

ID CODE

Methane Nitrogen Carbon Dioxide Ethane Propane Water Vapor Hydrogen Sulfide Hydrogen Carbon Monoxide Oxygen Iso-Butane Normal Butane Iso-Pentane Normal Pentane Normal Hexane Normal Heptane Normal Octane Normal Nonane Normal Decane Helium Argon

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

1985

MOLE % RANGE NORMAL

EXPANDED

45.0 to 100.0 0 to 50.0 0 to 30.0 0 to 10.0 0 to 4.0 0 to 0.5 0 to 0.02 0 to 10.0 / # 0 to 3.0 / # #

0 to 100.0 0 to 100.0 0 to 100.0 0 to 100.0 0 to 12.0 0 to Dew Point 0 to 100.0 0 to 100.0 0 to 3.0 0 to 21.0

0 to 1.0

0 to 6.0

(Total Butanes)

(Total Butanes)

0 to 0.3

0 to 4.0

(Total Pentanes)

(Total Pentanes)

0 to 0.2

0 to Dew Point

(Hexane Plus Heavier (Hexane Plus Heavier Hydrocarbons) Hydrocarbons)

0 to 0.2 #

0 to 3.0 0 to 1.0

ID CODE

MOLE % RANGE

6 1 2 7 8 4 3 20 19 18 10 9 12 11 13 14 15 16 17 5 N/A

50.0 to 100.0 0 to 50.0 0 to 50.0 0 to 20.0 0 to 5.0 0 to 1.0 0 to 1.0 0 to 1.0 0 to 1.0 0 to 1.0 0 to 3.0 (Butanes)

0 to 2.0 (Pentanes)

0 to 1.0 (Hexane Plus Heavier Hydrocarbons)

0 to 1.0 0 to 1.0

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Volume 3d

Configuration and Advanced Operation Methods for Gas Mixture Characterization O

AGA REPORT N 8 - 1994/1992 EDITIONS: Three methods of characterization of a gas mixture from the AGA 8 1994/1992 editions are available for use on the Omni Flow Computers: the Detailed Method and the Gross Characterization Methods (#1 & #2). The Detailed Characterization Method The gas phase pressure-temperature-density behavior of natural gas mixtures is accurately described by the detailed characterization method, for a wide range of conditions. This behavior can also be accurately describe for the pure components methane, ethane, carbon dioxide, nitrogen and hydrogen and binary mixtures of these components. A low density correlation was developed for propane and heavier hydrocarbons, and binary mixtures of these components with methane, ethane, nitrogen and carbon dioxide. The uncertainty of compressibility factors and density calculations for natural gases from production separators, which can contain mole percentages of hexanes plus heavier hydrocarbons greater than 1%, is reduced by this method. Correlations were developed to reduce the calculation uncertainty of the following: ❑ Natural gases containing hydrogen sulfide (sour gas): correlations of the density behavior of pure hydrogen sulfide and binary mixtures of hydrogen sulfide with methane, ethane, nitrogen and carbon ❑ Natural gases containing water vapor (wet gas): second virial correlations for water and binary mixtures of water with methane, ethane, nitrogen and carbon dioxide Gross Characterization Methods The following table identifies the nominal ranges of gas characteristics for which these methods are used:

Notes:

* Reference conditions: Combustion at 60°F, 14.73 psia: Density at 60°F. 14.73 psia.

** Reference conditions: Combustion at 25°C, 0.101325 MPa: Density at 0°C, 0.101325 MPa

RANGE

QUANTITY

Relative Density Gross Heating Value * Gross Heating Value ** Mole % Methane Mole % Nitrogen Mole % Carbon Dioxide Mole % Ethane Mole % Propane Mole % Butanes Mole % Pentanes Mole % Hexanes Plus Mole % Helium

0.56 to 0.87 477 to 1150 Btu/scf 18.7 to 45.1 MJ/m3 45.2 to 98.3 0.3 to 53.6 0.04 to 28.94 0.24 to 9.53 0.02 to 3.57 0.01 to 1.08 0.002 to 0.279 0.0005 to 0.1004 0 to 0.158

Method #1: Utilizes the volumetric gross heating value (HV), relative density, mole fraction CO2. Method #2: Utilizes Relative Density, mole fraction N2, mole fraction CO2.

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

5-13

Chapter 5

Flow Equations and Algorithms for S.I. (Metric) Units (Revision 27.71+) O

AGA REPORT N 8 - 1985 EDITION: Six methods of characterization of a gas mixture from the AGA 8 1985 edition are available for use on the Omni Flow Computers: the primary method and five alternate methods. Primary Characterization Method The primary method is the most accurate method in this AGA 8 version for characterization of natural gas, for computations using the equation of state for compressibility factor. This method consists of a complete compositional analysis (the mole fractions of all components) of a natural gas mixture. Alternate Characterization Methods An alternate characterization method is used when a complete compositional analysis for a natural gas is not available. One of the five alternate methods can be used to estimate the mole fractions of methane and other important hydrocarbons in the natural gas, as well as diluents other than carbon dioxide and nitrogen. These characterization methods do not include water vapor or hydrogen components. Various combinations of the following quantities are utilized: ❑ Real Gas Relative Density (Specific Gravity) (G), at 60°F and 14.73 psia ❑ Real Gas Gross Heating Value per Unit Volume (HV), at 60°F and 14.73 3 psia (BTU/ft ) ❑ Mole Fraction of Carbon Dioxide [x(CO2)] ❑ Mole Fraction of Nitrogen [x(N2)] ❑ Mole Fraction of Methane [x(CH4)] These alternate methods yield estimates of the mole fraction of the following: ❑ Methane ❑ Ethane ❑ Propane ❑ Normal Butane ❑ Iso-Butane ❑ Total Pentanes ❑ Total Hexanes plus Heavier Hydrocarbon Gases ❑ Total Diluents other than Nitrogen and Carbon Dioxide The five alternate characterization methods are: (1) The Gravity, Carbon Dioxide, Nitrogen Method (2) The Gravity, Heating Value, Carbon Dioxide, Nitrogen Method (3) The Gravity, Heating Value, Carbon Dioxide Method (4) The Heating Value, Carbon Dioxide, Nitrogen Method (5) The Gravity, Methane, Carbon Dioxide, Nitrogen Method

5-14

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Volume 3d


5.3.2.

υr’ ASME 1967 Steam Equation ‘υ

The Omni flow computer applies the ASME 1967 steam equation. This equation is a closed-form solution (non-iterative), developed using reduced properties; pressure (Ρr) and temperature parameters (Tr), to define the reduced volume (υr) of steam.

5.3.3. Acknowledgement - The implementation of the Keenan & Keyes steam tables was based on the work of Don Kyle of Kyle Engineering, Inc.

Water Density

Water density calculations performed by the Omni flow computer are derived from the fundamental equation which expresses the characteristic function ‘ψ’, known as the Helmholtz free energy, in terms of the independent variables density (ρ) and temperature (T). This fundamental equation from which water density is derived has been obtained from: Joseph H. Keenan, Frederick G. Keyes, et al., Steam Tables: Thermodynamic Properties of Water Including Vapor, Liquid and Solid Phases (John Wiley & Sons, 1969), page 134.

5.3.4.

NBS Density, Viscosity Isentropic Exponent, Sound Velocity, and Enthalpy

The NBS Technical Note 1048 (Issued July 1982) is used to calculate density 3 (lb/ft ), absolute viscosity isentropic exponent, sound velocity, and enthalpy for the following gases: ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Argon Nitrogen Oxygen Hydrogen Ethylene

5-15

Chapter 5


5.3.5.


Density and Relative Density (Specific Gravity) Calculated from Digital Densitometer and Gravitometer Output Frequency

The calculations expressed in this section are performed by the Omni to determine the density from frequency signals received from the following third party densitometers and gravitometers: ❑ Sarasota ❑ UGC ❑ Solartron

Sarasota Density ‘kg/m3’ Sarasota density is calculated using the frequency signal produced by a Sarasota densitometer, and applying temperature and pressure corrections as shown below:

(

 2D ' t - t ' 0  0 D c = DCF ×  t0' 

)  × 1 + K (t - t )  0

 

 

2x t 0 '

'

 

Where: Dc = corrected density DCF = Density correction factor Note:

* D0’ must be expressed in kilograms per cubic 3 meter (kg/m ).

D0 = calibration constant, in mass/volume* t = densitometer oscillation period in microseconds (µsec) t0 = calibration constant, in microseconds t0' = Tcoef x (Tf - Tcal) + Pcoef x (Pf - Pcal) + t0 K = spool calibration constant Tf = flowing temperature, in °C Tcoef = temperature coefficient, in µsec/°C Pf = flowing pressure, in kPa Pcoef = pressure coefficient, in µsec/kPa Pcal = calibration pressure, in kPa

5-16

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Volume 3d

Configuration and Advanced Operation UGC Density ‘kg/m3’ UGC density is calculated using the frequency signal produced by a UGC densitometer, and applying temperature and pressure corrections as shown below: UNCORRECTED DENSITY:

(

D = K 0 + (K 1 × t) + K 2 × t 2

)


3

K0   K 1  = calibration constants of density probe, entered via the keypad K 2  t = densitometer oscillation time period, in microseconds (µsec) CORRECTED DENSITY:   D c = DCF ×   

(

 ) × (Ρ - Ρ )   D + K ) × (T - T ) + D   

 K D2 + K D + K Ρ2 Ρ1  Ρ3

(

+  K t3 D 2 + K t2 

f

t1

c

f

c

Where: Dc = corrected density, in kg/m

3

DCF = density correction factor D = uncorrected density, kg/m

3

K Ρ1   K Ρ2  = pressure constants K Ρ3  Ρƒ = flowing pressure, in kPa Ρc = calibration pressure, in kPa K t1   K t2  = temperature constants K t3  Tƒ = flowing temperature, in °C Tc = calibration temperature, in °C

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

5-17

Chapter 5

Flow Equations and Algorithms for S.I. (Metric) Units (Revision 27.71+) Solartron  Density ‘kg/m3’

INFO - For Solartron gas density transducers, it is NOT necessary to convert the calibration sheet from metric to US customary units.

Solartron density is calculated using the frequency signal produced by a Solartron frequency densitometer, and applying temperature and pressure corrections as detailed below. UNCORRECTED DENSITY:

(

D = K 0 + (K 1 × t) + K 2 × t 2

)


3

K0   3 K 1  = calibration constants supplied by Solartron, in kg/m and °C K 2  t = densitometer oscillation time period, in microseconds (µsec) TEMPERATURE CORRECTED DENSITY: DT = D ×

[1 +

K 18 (TF - 20 )

] + [ K 19 (TF

- 20)

]

  TF + 273 

   

Where: DT = temperature corrected density, in kg/m D = uncompensated density, in kg/m

3

3

K 18   = calibration constants supplied by Solartron K 19  TF = Temperature in °C ACTUAL DENSITY:  Da = DT ×  1 +  

K3

(D T + K 4 )

 ×  K 5 − 

(

G

)

Where: Da = actual density, in kg/m

3

DT = temperature compensated density, in kg/m

3

K3   K 4  = calibration constants supplied by Solartron K 5  G =

Gas Specific Gravity Ratio of Specific Heats

TF = Temperature in °C

5-18

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

Volume 3d

Configuration and Advanced Operation Solartron  NT 3096 Gravitometer: Relative Density (Specific Gravity)/Output Frequency Relationship


The relationship between the gravitometer output frequency and the specific gravity is given by the following: G = K0 + K2 T

2

Where: G = specific gravity of a gas determined from the transducer frequency signal T = periodic time of the sample gas specific gravity at stable temperature and at the selected reference chamber pressure, in microseconds (µsec) =

G - K0 K2


G Y - K 2 TY 2


GX - G Y TX - TY GX = specific gravity of calibration (sample) gas ‘X’ GY = specific gravity of calibration (sample) gas ‘Y’ TX = periodic time of a known calibration (sample) gas of ‘X’ specific gravity under stable operating conditions, in µsec TY = periodic time of a known calibration (sample) gas of ‘Y’ specific gravity under stable operating conditions, in µsec

23/27.71+ ! 05/99

5-19


Modbus Database Addresses and Index Numbers Firmware Revisions 23.71/27.71


Effective May 1999



 Protocol Implementation ...................................................................... 1-1 1. Modbus 1.1. Introduction ..........................................................................................................1-1 1.2. Modes of Transmission........................................................................................1-1 1.2.1. 1.2.2.

ASCII Framing and Message Format........................................................................ 1-2 Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) Framing and Message Format................................... 1-2

1.3. Message Fields .....................................................................................................1-2 1.3.1. 1.3.2. 1.3.3. 1.3.4.

Address Field ............................................................................................................ 1-2 Function Code Field .................................................................................................. 1-3 Data Field .................................................................................................................. 1-3 Error Check Field ...................................................................................................... 1-3

1.4. Exception Response ............................................................................................1-4 1.5. Function Codes ....................................................................................................1-4 1.5.1. 1.5.2. 1.5.3. 1.5.4. 1.5.5. 1.5.6. 1.5.7. 1.5.8. 1.5.9. 1.5.10.

Function Codes 01 and 02 (Read Boolean Status)................................................... 1-4 Function Codes 03 and 04 (Read 16-Bit Register Sets) ........................................... 1-6 Function Code 05 (Write Single Boolean)................................................................ 1-7 Function Code 06 (Write Single 16-Bit Integer) ....................................................... 1-8 Function Code 07 (Read Exception Status) ............................................................. 1-9 Function Code 08 (Loopback Test)........................................................................ 1-10 Function Code 15 (Write Multiple Boolean ) .......................................................... 1-11 Function Code 16 (Write 16-Bit Register Sets) ...................................................... 1-12 Function Code 65 (Read ASCII Text Buffer).......................................................... 1-14 Function Code 66 (Write ASCII Text Buffer).......................................................... 1-14

1.6. Custom Data Packets .........................................................................................1-15 1.7. Peer-to-Peer on the Modbus  Link ...................................................................1-16 1.8. Half Duplex Wiring Configuration Required .....................................................1-16 1.9. Active Master ......................................................................................................1-16 1.10. Error Recovery....................................................................................................1-16

ii

23/27.71+ ! 05/98

Modbus  Database Addresses and Index Numbers

Volume 4d

2. User-Defined, Status and Command Data (0001 - 2999) ..................................... 2-1 2.1. Custom Data Packets or Modicon™ G51 Compatible Register Arrays............ 2-1 2.2. Archive Control Flags .......................................................................................... 2-1 2.3. Status / Command Data....................................................................................... 2-2 2.3.1. 2.3.2. 2.3.3. 2.3.4. 2.3.5. 2.3.6. 2.3.7. 2.3.8. 2.3.9. 2.3.10. 2.3.11. 2.3.12. 2.3.13. 2.3.14. 2.3.15. 2.3.16. 2.3.17. 2.3.18. 2.3.19.

23/27.71+ ! 05/98

Reading and Writing the Physical Digital I/O ............................................................ 2-2 Programmable Booleans........................................................................................... 2-2 Programmable Accumulator Points .......................................................................... 2-2 Meter Run Status and Alarm Points.......................................................................... 2-3 User Scratch Pad Boolean Points ............................................................................. 2-6 User Scratch Pad One-Shot Boolean Points ............................................................ 2-6 Command Boolean Points/Variables ........................................................................ 2-7 Meter Station Alarm and Status Points ................................................................... 2-10 Meter Totalizer Roll-over Flags ............................................................................... 2-14 Miscellaneous Meter Station Alarm and Status Points ........................................... 2-16 Commands Which Cause Custom Data Packets to be Transmitted Without a Poll .......................................................................................................................... 2-17 Commands Needed To Accomplish a Redundant Flow Computer System ........... 2-17 Boolean Status Points Used for Meter Tube Switching .......................................... 2-18 Archive Trigger Commands .................................................................................... 2-18 Station Totalizer Roll-over Flags ............................................................................. 2-19 Station Totalizer Decimal Resolution Flags ............................................................ 2-20 Status Booleans Relating to Redundant Flow Computer Systems ......................... 2-20 More Station Totalizer Decimal Resolution Flags ................................................... 2-20 Boolean Command Outputs and Status Points Used For Meter Tube Switching... 2-21

iii



3. 16-Bit Integer Data (3001 - 3999) ........................................................................... 3-1 3.1. Custom Data Packet Definition Variables...........................................................3-1 3.1.1. 3.1.2. 3.1.3.

Custom Data Packet #1 ............................................................................................ 3-1 Custom Data Packet #2 ............................................................................................ 3-1 Custom Data Packet #3 ............................................................................................ 3-1

3.2. Miscellaneous 16-Bit Integer Data.......................................................................3-2 3.3. Meter Run 16-Bit Integer Data .............................................................................3-2 3.4. Scratchpad 16-Bit Integer Data............................................................................3-4 3.5. User Display Definition Variables........................................................................3-5 3.5.1. 3.5.2. 3.5.3. 3.5.4. 3.5.5. 3.5.6. 3.5.7. 3.5.8.

User Display Number 1 ............................................................................................. 3-5 User Display Number 2 ............................................................................................. 3-5 User Display Number 3 ............................................................................................. 3-5 User Display Number 4 ............................................................................................. 3-6 User Display Number 5 ............................................................................................. 3-6 User Display Number 6 ............................................................................................. 3-6 User Display Number 7 ............................................................................................. 3-7 User Display Number 8 ............................................................................................. 3-7

3.6. Data Used to Access the Raw Data Archive Records ........................................3-8 3.7. More Miscellaneous 16-Bit Integer Data ...........................................................3-10 3.8. Gas Chromatograph 16-Bit Integer Data...........................................................3-11 3.9. Meter Station 16-Bit Integer Data ......................................................................3-12 3.10. Danalyzer Gas Chromatograph Data.................................................................3-14 3.11. Flow Computer Time and Date Variables .........................................................3-15 3.12. More Miscellaneous 16-Bit Integer Data ...........................................................3-16

4. 8-Character ASCII String Data (4001 - 4999)......................................................... 4-1 4.1. Meter Run ASCII String Data................................................................................4-1 4.2. Scratch Pad ASCII String Data ............................................................................4-2 4.3. User Display Definition String Variables ............................................................4-2 4.4. String Variables Associated with the Station Auxiliary Inputs .........................4-3 4.5. Meter Station 8-Character ASCII String Data......................................................4-3

iv

23/27.71+ ! 05/98


Volume 4d

5. 32-Bit Integer Data (5001 - 6999)............................................................................ 5-1 5.1. Meter Run 32-Bit Integer Data ............................................................................. 5-1 5.2. Scratch Pad 32-Bit Integer Data.......................................................................... 5-4 5.3. Station 32-Bit Integer Data ................................................................................. 5-5 5.4. Premium Level 32-Bit Integer Data (US Customary Units Only)....................... 5-8 5.4.1. 5.4.2. 5.4.3.

Flow Rate Threshold Triggers (MSCF/Hour) ............................................................ 5-8 Non-Resetable Totalizers (MSCF) ............................................................................ 5-8 MSCF Totalizers Stored the Last 10 days for Meter and Station .............................. 5-9

6. 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data (7001 - 8999)....................................................... 6-1 6.1. Digital-to-Analog Outputs 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data .............................. 6-1 6.2. User Variables 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data................................................. 6-1 6.3. Programmable Accumulator 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Variables .................. 6-2 6.4. Meter Run 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data ........................................................ 6-2 6.5. Scratch Pad 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data ..................................................... 6-6 6.6. PID Control 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data ...................................................... 6-6 6.7. Miscellaneous Meter Run 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data............................... 6-7 6.8. Miscellaneous Variables 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data ................................ 6-9 6.9. Meter Station 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data ................................................. 6-10 6.10. Miscellaneous Meter Run 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data............................. 6-14 6.10.1. Previous Batch Average.......................................................................................... 6-14 6.10.2. Previous Hour’s Average......................................................................................... 6-15 6.10.3. Previous Day’s Average .......................................................................................... 6-15 6.10.4. Live Calculated Data (Information Only) ................................................................. 6-16 6.10.5. Statistical Moving Window Averages of Transducer Inputs .................................... 6-16 6.10.6. Miscellaneous In Progress Averages...................................................................... 6-16 6.10.7. More Miscellaneous In Progress Averages............................................................. 6-17 6.10.8. Previous Batch Quantities ....................................................................................... 6-17 6.10.9. Miscellaneous Live or Calculated Data ................................................................... 6-18 6.10.10. Station Previous Batch Average Data.................................................................... 6-19

23/27.71+ ! 05/98

v



7. ASCII Text Data Buffers (9001 - 9499)................................................................... 7-1 7.1. Custom Report Templates ...................................................................................7-1 7.2. Previous Batch Reports .......................................................................................7-1 7.3. Previous Daily Reports ........................................................................................7-2 7.4. Last Snapshot Report ..........................................................................................7-2 7.5. Miscellaneous Report Buffer ...............................................................................7-2

8. Flow Computer Configuration Data (13001 - 18999)............................................ 8-1 8.1. Flow Computer Configuration 16-Bit Integer Data.............................................8-1 8.1.1. 8.1.2. 8.1.3. 8.1.4. 8.1.5. 8.1.6. 8.1.7.

Meter Run Configuration Data................................................................................... 8-1 General Flow Computer Configuration 16-Bit Integer Data ...................................... 8-3 Serial Port Configuration 16-Bit Integer Data ............................................................ 8-3 Proportional Integral Derivative (PID) Configuration 16-Bit Integer Data .................. 8-5 Programmable Logic Controller Configuration 16-Bit Integer Data........................... 8-6 Peer-to-Peer Setup Entries 16-Bit Integer Data ........................................................ 8-8 Raw Data Archive Files 16-Bit Integer Data............................................................ 8-12

8.2. Flow Computer Configuration 16-Character ASCII String Data ......................8-16 8.3. Flow Computer Configuration 32-Bit Long Integer Data .................................8-19 8.4. Flow Computer Configuration 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data......................8-26 8.5. Product AGA-8 Component Override 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data...........8-30 8.6. Gas Chromatograph 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data......................................8-32 8.7. More Flow Computer Configuration 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data ............8-33 8.8. Product Previous Hourly and Daily Averages - AGA 8 Mol % 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data.............................................................................................8-35 8.8.1. 8.8.2.

vi

Previous Hourly Averages ....................................................................................... 8-35 Previous Daily Averages ......................................................................................... 8-36

23/27.71+ ! 05/98


Volume 4d

 Protocol Implementation 1. Modbus 1.1.

Introduction

Omni Flow Computers implement a superset of the Gould Modbus Protocol on Serial Ports #1 (selectable), #2, #3 and #4 (selectable), thus allowing simultaneous communications with two totally independent Modbus systems. Maximum transmission baud rate is 38.4 kbps with an average answer response time of 70 msec plus any modem warm-up time. The Modbus Protocol specifies one master and up to 247 slaves on a common communication line. Each slave is assigned a fixed unique device address in the range of 1 to 247. The Master always initiates the transaction. Transactions are either a query/response type (only one slave is accessed at a time) or a broadcast / no response type (all slaves are accessed at the same time). A transaction comprises a single query and single response frame or a single broadcast frame.

1.2.

Modes of Transmission

Two basic modes of transmission are available: ASCII or Remote Terminal Unit (RTU). The mode selected depends on the equipment being used.

AVAILABLE TRANSMISSION MODES TRANSMISSION MODE ASCII

RTU

Hexadecimal

8-bit binary

Start Bits

1

1

Data Bits

7

8

Coding System NUMBER OF BITS:

Parity (Optional) Stop Bits

1 or 2

1 or 2

Error Checking

LRC

CRC

300 bps to 38.4 kbps

300 bps to 38.4 kbps

Baud Rate

23/27.71+ ! 05/98

Odd, Even, None (1 or 0) Odd, Even, None (1 or 0)

1-1

Modbus  Protocol Implementation

Chapter 1

1.2.1.

ASCII Framing and Message Format

Framing in ASCII Transmission Mode is accomplished by the use of the colon (:) character indicating the beginning of a frame and a carriage return (CR) line feed (LF) to delineate end of frame. The line feed character also serves as a synchronizing character which indicates that the transmitting station is ready to receive an immediate reply.

ASCII MESSAGE FORMAT BEGINNING OF

ADDRESS

FRAME Assuming 7 bits per transmitted character.

FUNCTION CODE

DATA

ERROR CHECK

END FRAME

READY TO RECEIVE RESPONSE

OF

:

2 Char

2 Char

N x 2 Char

2 Char

CR

LF

7 Bits

14 Bits

14Bits

N x 14 Bits

14 Bits

7 Bits

7 Bits

1.2.2.

Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) Framing and Message Format

Frame synchronization can be maintained in RTU Transmission Mode only by simulating a synchronous message. The 'OMNI' monitors the elapsed time between receipt of characters. If 3.5 character times elapse without a new character or completion of the frame, then the frame is reset and the next bytes will be processed looking for a valid address.

RTU MESSAGE FORMAT

1.3. 1.3.1.

ADDRESS

FUNCTION

DATA

ERROR CHECK

8 Bits

8 Bits

N x 8 Bits

16 Bits

Message Fields Address Field

The address field immediately follows the beginning of the frame and consists of 2 characters (ASCII) or 8 bits (RTU). These bits indicate the user assigned address of the slave device that is to receive the message sent by the master. Each slave must be assigned a unique address and only the addressed slave will respond to a query that contains its address. When the slave sends a response, the slave address informs the master which slave is communicating. In broadcast mode, an address of zero (0) is used. All slaves interpret this as an instruction to read and take action, but do not issue a response message.

1-2

23/27.71+ ! 05/98


Volume 4d

1.3.2. Note: See 4.5 for descriptions and examples of these function codes. See 4.4 for a description of exception responses.

Function Code Field

The function code field tells the addressed slave what function to perform. The high order bit of the function code field is set by the slave device to indicate that other than a normal response is being transmitted to the Master device. This bit remains 0 if the message is a query or a normal response message. FUNCTION CODE

1.3.3.

ACTION

01

READ MULTIPLE BOOLEAN POINTS

03

READ STRINGS OR MULTIPLE 16 OR 32 BIT VARIABLES

05

WRITE SINGLE BOOLEAN POINT

06

WRITE SINGLE 16 BIT INTEGER

15

WRITE MULTIPLE BOOLEAN POINTS

16

WRITE STRINGS OR MULTIPLE 16 OR 32 BIT VARIABLES

65

READ ASCII TEXT BUFFER

66

WRITE ASCII TEXT BUFFER

Data Field

The data field contains the information needed by the slave to perform the specific function or it contains data collected by the slave in response to a query. This information may be text strings, values, exception code or text buffers.

1.3.4.

Error Check Field

This field allows the master and slave devices to check a message for errors in transmission. A transmitted message may be altered slightly due to electrical noise or other interference while it is on its way from one unit to another. The error checking assures that the master and the slave do not react to messages that have been changed during transmission. The error check field uses a longitudinal redundancy check (LRC) in the ASCII Mode and a CRC-16 check in the RTU Mode. The bytes checked include the slave address and all bytes up to the error checking bytes. Checking is done with the data in the binary mode or RTU mode.

The LRC Mode The error check is an 8-bit binary number represented and transmitted as two ASCII hexadecimal (hex) characters. The error check is produced by first stripping the Colon, CR and LF and then converting the hex ASCII characters to binary. Add the binary bytes (including slave address) discarding any carries, and then two's complement the result. At the received end the LRC is recalculated and compared to the LRC as sent. The colon, CR, LF, and any imbedded non-ASCII hex characters are ignored in calculating the LRC (see  Reference Guide for more details). page 1-7 of the Gould Modbus

23/27.71+ ! 05/98

1-3


Chapter 1 The CRC Mode

The message is considered as one continuous binary number whose most significant bit (MSB) is transmitted first. The message is pre-multiplied by x 16 16 15 2 (shifted left 16-bits), then divided by (x +x +x +1) expressed as the binary number (11000000000000101).The integer quotient digits are ignored and the 16-bit remainder (initialized to all ones at the start to avoid the case of all zeros being an accepted message) is appended to the message (MSB first) as the two CRC check bytes. The resulting message including CRC, when divided by the same polynomial (x16 + x15 + x2 + 1) at the receiver will give a zero remainder if no errors have occurred (see pages1-4 through 1-6 of the Gould Modbus Reference Guide for more details).

1.4.

Exception Response

Programming or operation errors are those involving illegal data in a message, no response or difficulty in communicating with a slave. These errors result in an exception response from the slave, depending on the type of error. When such a message is received from the master the slave sends a response to the master echoing the slave address, function code (with high bit set), exception code and error check fields. To indicate that the response is a notification of an error, the high order bit of the function code is set to 1. EXCEPTION CODE

1.5. 1.5.1. Note: Function Code 02 is identical to Function Code 01. It can be used by communication devices that do not support Function Code 01.

DESCRIPTION

01

ILLEGAL FUNCTION

02

ILLEGAL DATA ADDRESS

03

ILLEGAL DATA VALUE

04

DATA CANNOT BE WRITTEN

05

PASSWORD NEEDED

Function Codes Function Codes 01 and 02 (Read Boolean Status)

These functions allow the user to obtain the ‘on/off’ status of Booleans used to control discrete outputs from the addressed slaves only. Broadcast mode is not supported with this function code. In addition to the slave address and function field, the message requires that the information field contain the initial point number to be read (starting point) and the number of points that will be read to obtain the Boolean data. Boolean points are numbered as from 1001; (Boolean number 1= 1001). The data is packed one bit for each Boolean flag variable. The response includes the slave address, function code, quantity of data characters, the data characters, and error checking. Data will be packed with one bit for each Boolean flag (1 = on, 0 = off). The low order bit of the first character contains the addressed flag and the remainder follows. For Boolean quantities that are not even multiples of eight, the last characters will be filled-in with zeros at high order end.

1-4

23/27.71+ ! 05/98


Volume 4d

Example: Read Booleans 1120 to 1131 from Slave Device #01. POLL MASTER-TO-SLAVE : ASCII TRANSMISSION MODE ADDRESS

FUNCTION CODE

: 3031

3031

DATA STARTING POINT #

NUMBER OF POINTS

HI

LO

HI

LO

LCR CHECK 8-BIT

3034

3630

3030

3043

3845 CR LF

POLL MASTER-TO-SLAVE : RTU TRANSMISSION MODE ADDRESS

FUNCTION CODE

01

01


NUMBER OF POINTS

HI

LO

HI

LO

CRC CHECK 16-BIT

04

60

00

0C

‘nn’ ‘nn’

SLAVE RESPONSE : ASCII Transmission Mode DATA

ADDRESS

FUNCTION CODE

BYTE COUNT

HI

LO

LCR CHECK 8-BIT

: 3031

3031

3032

3038

3030

4634 CR LF

SLAVE RESPONSE : RTU Transmission Mode DATA

ADDRESS

FUNCTION CODE

BYTE COUNT

HI

LO

LCR CHECK 8-BIT

01

01

02

08

00

‘nn’ ‘nn’

The status of Booleans 1120 through 1127 is shown as 08 (hex) = 0000 1000 (binary). Reading right to left, this shows that status 1123 is ‘on’. The other data flags are decoded similarly. Due to the quantity of Boolean status requested, the last data field, which is shown as 00 (hex) = 0000 0000 (binary), contains the status of only four flags. The four left most bits are provided as zeros to fill the 8bit format.

23/27.71+ ! 05/98

1-5


Chapter 1

1.5.2. Note: Function Code 04 is identical to Function Code 03. It can be used by communication devices that do not support Function Code 03.

Register Groups for Long Integer Variable Type Points 6XXX or 15XXX long integers apply only to Revision 23 for US customary units.

Function Codes 03 and 04 (Read 16-Bit Register Sets)

Function Codes 03 and 04 allow the master to obtain the binary contents of holding registers in the addressed slave. The protocol allows for a maximum of 125 16-bit registers to be obtained at each request. Broadcast mode is not allowed for functions 03 and 04. These 16-bit registers are also grouped in sets of registers and accessed as one variable. The numeric range of the point number defines the variable type and indicates how many 16-bit registers make up that variable. REGISTER GROUPS FOR TYPES OF VARIABLES O

POINT # RANGE

VARIABLE TYPE

16-BIT REGS. / N OF BYTES / MAX POINTS / POINT POINT MESSAGE

3XXX or 13XXX

Short Integer

1 Register

2 Bytes

125

4XXX

8-Char. ASCII String

4 Registers

8 Bytes

31

6XXX or 15XXX

Long Integer

2 Registers

4 Bytes

62

17XXX or 18XXX

IEEE Floating Point

2 Registers

4 Bytes

62

14XXX


8 Registers

16 Bytes

15

The addressed slave responds with its address and the function code, followed by the information field. The information field contains a single byte indicating the number of data bytes returned followed by the actual data bytes. The data is returned in multiples of two bytes, with the binary content right justified. The data is sent MS Byte first. Example: Read Short Integer Message 3012 through 3013 from Slave #2. POLL MASTER-TO-SLAVE : RTU TRANSMISSION MODE ADDRESS

FUNCTION CODE

02

03


QUANTITY OF POINTS

HI

LO

HI

LO

CRC CHECK 16-BIT

0B

C4

00

02

‘nn’ ‘nn’

SLAVE RESPONSE : RTU Transmission Mode DATA

DATA

ADDRESS

FUNCTION CODE

BYTE COUNT

HI

LO

HI

LO

CRC CHECK 16-BIT

02

03

04

1F

40

1F

3E

‘nn’ ‘nn’

The slave responds with its address and the function code, byte count of the data field followed by the actual data field. In the example above, the data field contains 4 bytes representing the value of the requested data.

1-6

23/27.71+ ! 05/98


Volume 4d

1.5.3.

Function Code 05 (Write Single Boolean)

This message forces a single Boolean variable either ‘on’ or ‘off’. Boolean variables are points numbered 1XXX or 2XXX. Writing the 16-bit value 65,280 (FF00 HEX) will set the Boolean ‘on’. Writing the value zero will turn it ‘off’. All other values are illegal and will not effect the Boolean. Using a slave address ‘00’ (Broadcast Mode) will force all slaves to modify the desired Boolean. Example: Turn Single Boolean Point 1711 ‘on’ - Slave #2.

POLL MASTER-TO-SLAVE : RTU TRANSMISSION MODE

ADDRESS

FUNCTION CODE

02

05

BOOLEAN POINT #

DATA

HI

LO

HI

LO

CRC CHECK

06

AF

FF

00

‘nn’ ‘nn’

SLAVE RESPONSE : RTU Transmission Mode

ADDRESS

FUNCTION CODE

02

05

BOOLEAN POINT #

DATA

HI

LO

HI

LO

CRC CHECK

06

AF

FF

00

‘nn’ ‘nn’

The normal response to the command request is to retransmit the message as received after the Boolean state has been altered.

23/27.71+ ! 05/98

1-7


Chapter 1

1.5.4.

Function Code 06 (Write Single 16-Bit Integer)

Any numeric variable that has been defined on the 16-bit integer index table can have its contents changed by this message. The 16-bit integer points are numbered from 3XXX or 13XXX. When used with slave address zero (Broadcast Mode) all slaves will load the specified points with the contents specified. The following example sets one 16-bit integer at address 3106 (0C22 HEX) of Slave #2 (i.e., load address 3106 with data 0003). Example: Set Single 16-Bit Integer Slave #2.

POLL MASTER-TO-SLAVE : RTU TRANSMISSION MODE POINT #

DATA

ADDRESS

FUNCTION CODE

HI

LO

HI

LO

CRC CHECK

02

06

0C

22

00

03

‘nn’ ‘nn’

SLAVE RESPONSE : RTU Transmission Mode POINT #

DATA

ADDRESS

FUNCTION CODE

HI

LO

HI

LO

CRC CHECK

02

06

0C

22

00

03

‘nn’ ‘nn’

The normal response to a Function 06 query is to retransmit the message as received after the 16-bit integer has been altered.

1-8

23/27.71+ ! 05/98


Volume 4d

1.5.5.

Function Code 07 (Read Exception Status)

This function allows the user to obtain the status of the five events and determine the communication port number (serial port number). These events are programmed and cannot be reconfigured. Following are the five events: & & & & &

EPROM Checksum error flag Program mode Diagnostic mode Master status Power failed flag

Example: Request to Modbus ID # 13 (Address HEX: 0D) to respond with event status and communication port number. POLL MASTER-TO-SLAVE : RTU TRANSMISSION MODE ADDRESS

FUNCTION CODE

0D

07

CRC CHECK 8-Bit

DATA

‘nn’ ‘nn’

SLAVE RESPONSE : RTU Transmission Mode ADDRESS

FUNCTION CODE

DATA

CRC CHECK 8-Bit

0D

07

4C

‘nn’ ‘nn’

The slave responds with the Modbus OD number (address), the function code, and the data, followed by the CRC check. In the above example, the data field contains 1 byte representing the value of the requested data. Following is the conversion of hexadecimal data to binary, to determine the event status and communication port number. Hex 4C = 0100 1100 (Bit 7, Bit 6, Bit 5, Bit 4, Bit 3, Bit 2, Bit 1, Bit 0) Bit 7, Bit 6, Bit 5 represent the communication port: Port #

Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 7

1

0

0

1

2

0

1

0

3

0

1

1

4

1

0

0

Bit 4, Bit 3, Bit 2, Bit 1, Bit 0 represent the following event status: Bit 4 ' Bit 3 ' Bit 2 ' Bit 1 ' Bit 0 '

23/27.71+ ! 05/98

Power failed flag (1=Yes, 0=No); Modbus database address = 1829 Master status (1=Yes, 0=No); Modbus database address = 2864 In diagnostic mode (1=Yes, 0=No) In program mode (1=Yes, 0=No) Invalid EPROM Checksum error flag (1=Yes, 0=No); Modbus database address = 1837

1-9


Chapter 1

1.5.6.

Function Code 08 (Loopback Test)

Function Code 08 sends diagnostics test message to slave, to evaluate communications processing. The purpose is to test the communication system only; it does not perform any write function. The system (slave) responds with an echo. Example: Loopback Test – Simple return of query message sent to Slave Address Identification # 13.

POLL MASTER-TO-SLAVE : RTU TRANSMISSION MODE ADDRESS 0D

FUNCTION CODE 08

DATA DIAGNOSTICS CODE


HI

LO

HI

LO

00

00

A5

37

CRC CHECK ‘nn’ ‘nn’

SLAVE RESPONSE : RTU Transmission Mode ADDRESS 0D

FUNCTION CODE 08



HI

LO

HI

LO

00

00

A5

37

CRC CHECK ‘nn’ ‘nn’

The slave responds with an echo; i.e., identical Modbus ID (address), function code, and data.

1-10

23/27.71+ ! 05/98


Volume 4d

1.5.7.

Function Code 15 (Write Multiple Boolean )

Function Code 0FHEX (15) writes to each Boolean variable in a consecutive block of Boolean variables to a desired ‘on’ or ‘off’ state. Each Boolean is packed in the data field, one bit for each Boolean flag (1 = on, 0 = off). The data field consists of increments of 2 bytes and can be up to 250 bytes (2000 points). Boolean points are packed right-to-left, 8 to a byte with unused bits set to '0'. The use of slave address ‘00’ (Broadcast Mode) will force all slaves to modify the desired Boolean bits. The following example writes to 14 Boolean variables starting at address 1703. The data field value 05, 1703 through 1710, and data field value 20 represents the status of points 1711 through 1716. These data values are transmitted as 0000 0101 and 0010 0000, indicating that Booleans points 1703, 1705, 1716 are to be forced ‘on’ and 1704 and 1706 through 1715 are to be forced ‘off’ (the two most significant positions of the second byte are unused and set to ‘0’). Example: Turn on Boolean points 1703, 1705, 1716 ON Slave #3.


ADDRESS

FUNCTION CODE

03

0F

STARTING ADDRESS

QUANTITY OF POINTS

06

00

A7

0E

DATA

BYTE COUNT

HI

LO

02

05

20

CRC CHECK ‘nn’

‘nn’


FUNCTION CODE

03

0F

STARTING ADDRESS

OF POINTS

06

00

A7

QUANTITY 0E

CRC CHECK 'nn'

'nn'

The normal response to a Function 15 query is to echo the slave address, function code, starting address, and quantity of points written.

23/27.71+ ! 05/98

1-11


Chapter 1

1.5.8.

Function Code 16 (Write 16-Bit Register Sets)

Function Code 10HEX (16) allows the master to change the binary contents of holding registers in the addressed slave. The protocol allows for a maximum of 125 16-bit registers to be changed at each download. Using a slave address of zero (00) allows the master to change registers in all slaves simultaneously (Broadcast Mode). These 16-bit registers are also grouped as sets of registers and accessed as one variable. The numeric range of the point number defines the variable type and indicates how many 16-bit registers make up that variable. Register Groups for Long Integer Variable Type Points 6XXX or 15XXX long integers apply only to Revision 23 for US customary units.

REGISTER GROUPS FOR TYPES OF VARIABLES O

POINT # RANGE

VARIABLE TYPE

16-BIT REGS. / N OF BYTES / MAX POINTS / POINT POINT MESSAGE

3XXX or 13XXX

Short Integer

1 Register

2 Bytes

125

4XXX


4 Registers

8 Bytes

31

6XXX or 15XXX

Long Integer

2 Registers

4 Bytes

62

7XXX or 17XXX

IEEE Floating Point

2 Registers

4 Bytes

62

14XXX


8 Registers

16 Bytes

15

The addressed slave responds with its address and the function code, followed by the information field. The information field contains a single byte indicating the number of data bytes returned and the actual data bytes. The data is sent as multiples of two bytes, with the binary content right justified. The data is sent MS Byte first. Example: Write Short Integers 3012 through 3013 to Slave #2. Byte Count: The Byte Count will be increments of 2, 4, 8 or 16 bytes depending on the address range of the points downloaded.


ADDR

FUNC CODE

02

10

STARTING POINT #

QUANTITY OF POINTS

0B

00

C4

02

DATA

DATA

BYTE COUNT

HI

LO

HI

LO

04

1F

40

1F

3E

CRC CHECK ‘nn’

‘nn’


FUNCTION CODE

02

10

STARTING ADDRESS

OF POINTS

0B

00

C4

QUANTITY 02

CRC CHECK 'nn'

'nn'

The slave responds with its address and the function code, starting point number and quantity of points.

1-12

23/27.71+ ! 05/98


Volume 4d

Example: Write a Long Integer 5101 to Slave #4 POLL MASTER-TO-SLAVE : RTU TRANSMISSION MODE

ADDR

FUNC CODE

04

10

STARTING POINT #

QUANTITY OF POINTS

13

00

ED

01

DATA

DATA

BYTE COUNT

HI

LO

HI

LO

04

00

4F

20

4E

CRC CHECK ‘nn’

‘nn’


FUNCTION CODE

04

10

STARTING ADDRESS

OF POINTS

13

00

ED

QUANTITY

01

CRC CHECK ‘nn’

‘nn’

The slave responds with its address and the function code, starting point number and quantity of points.

23/27.71+ ! 05/98

1-13


Chapter 1

1.5.9.

Function Code 65 (Read ASCII Text Buffer)

Function Code 41HEX (65) allows the master to read the contents of an ASCII text buffer within an addressed slave. Data is always sent and received in packets containing 128 characters. Packets are numbered from 0 to 255. The size of the text buffer is always an exact multiple of 128 bytes. The last buffer will contain a HEX 1A (end of file character). The last buffer will contain an ASCII ^Z (end of file character). nd

Example: Read 2 packet of an ASCII Text Buffer Point 9001 from Slave # 5. POLL MASTER-TO-SLAVE : RTU TRANSMISSION MODE POINT #

PACKET #

ADDRESS

FUNCTION CODE

HI

LO

HI

LO

05

41

23

29

00

01

CRC CHECK ‘nn’

‘nn’

SLAVE RESPONSE : RTU Transmission Mode POINT #

PACKET #

ADDR

FUNC CODE

HI

LO

HI

05

41

23

29

00

…………

Lo

DATA BYTE 0

01

30

…………

Data B 128 YTE ………… 41

CRC CHECK ‘nn’

‘nn’

1.5.10. Function Code 66 (Write ASCII Text Buffer) Function Code 42HEX (66) is used by the master to download an ASCII text buffer to an addressed slave. Data is always sent and received in packets containing 128 characters. Packets are numbered from 0 to 255. The size of the text buffer is always an exact multiple of 128 bytes. The last buffer will contain a HEX 1A (end of file character). st

Example: Write 1 packet of an ASCII Text Buffer Point 9002 to Slave # 2. POLL MASTER-TO-SLAVE : RTU TRANSMISSION MODE POINT #

PACKET #

…………

ADDR

FUNC CODE

DATA

HI

LO

HI

Lo

BYTE 0

02

42

23

2A

00

00

39

DATA B 128 YTE ………… 2F

…………

CRC CHECK ‘nn’

‘nn’

SLAVE RESPONSE : RTU Transmission Mode

1-14

POINT #

PACKET #

ADDRESS

FUNCTION CODE

HI

LO

HI

LO

02

42

23

2A

00

00

CRC CHECK ‘nn’

‘nn’

23/27.71+ ! 05/98


Volume 4d

1.6.

Custom Data Packets

Many point numbers were left unused when numbering the variables within the database. This allows for future growth and different application data. Without custom data packets many polls would be required to retrieve data distributed throughout the database. The custom data packets allows you to concatenate or join different groups or sets of data in any order and of any data type into 1 message response. These custom packets are a type 03 read and are located at points 1, 201 and 401 in the database. Example: Read Custom Data Packet #1 at Point 0001 from Slave #2.


ADDRESS

FUNCTION CODE

02

03

STARTING POINT #

QUANTITY OF POINTS

HI

LO

HI

LO

CRC CHECK 16-BIT

00

01

00

00

‘nn’ ‘nn’

Dummy number of points

SLAVE RESPONSE : RTU Transmission Mode …………

DATA

ADDRESS

BYTE COUNT

HI

LO

…………

HI

LO

CRC CHECK 16-BIT

02

03

??

??

??

…………

??

??

‘nn’

Depends on the size of packet configured

23/27.71+ ! 05/98

DATA

FUNCTION CODE

‘nn’

Depends on the number and type of data points included

1-15


Chapter 1

1.7.

 Link Peer-to-Peer on the Modbus

Serial Port #2 (Modbus Port #1) can be configured to allow peer-to-peer communications. In this mode any Omni flow computer can act as a Modbus master and communicate with any other Modbus device on the communication link (see technical Bulletin TB-980401 “Peer-to-Peer Basics”).

1.8.

Half Duplex Wiring Configuration Required

The physical wiring of a Modbus link is usually full duplex, although the Modbus communication protocol is a half duplex protocol (i.e., both devices never transmit at the same time). For peer-to-peer communications the physical link must be wired for half duplex operation with all transmit and receive terminals wired in parallel (see 7.4 in Volume 1). This allows all devices to hear all transmissions; even their own.

1.9.

Active Master

Control of the communication link is passed from the current master to the next master in the sequence by broadcasting the ID number of the next master in sequence. When that flow computer has completed its transaction list (see 7.4 in Volume 1) it will in turn hand over control to the next master in the sequence.

1.10. Error Recovery Should the next master in the sequence fail to take control of the link the current master will search for an active master. To ensure best performance and fastest recovery in the event of an error, always number Modbus masters consecutively starting from 01.

1-16

23/27.71+ ! 05/98


Volume 4d

2. User-Defined, Status and Command Data (0001 - 2999) 2.1. INFO - This data is accessed using Modbus function code 03 for reads and 16 for writes. Boolean data bits are packed 8 to a byte.

Custom Data Packets or Modicon™ G51 Compatible Register Arrays

These three addresses specify reserved areas used to access user defined groups of data variables. Data can be accessed as read only blocks of data or the data is arranged as an array of adjacent 16-bit registers which can be read or written independently, if the Modicon Compatible mode is selected when setting up the serial port. 0001

Custom Data Packet / Array #1 Maximum 250 bytes using Modbus RTU mode (for Packet/Array definition see Index 3001-3040).

0201

Custom Data Packet / Array #2 Maximum 250 bytes using Modbus RTU mode (for Packet/Array definition see Index 3041-3056).

0401

Custom Data Packet / Array #3 Maximum 250 bytes using Modbus RTU mode (for Packet/Array definition see Indices 3057-3096).

2.2.

Archive Control Flags

Data to be added into the Text Archive RAM is flagged by embedding Boolean Point 1000 or 2000 within the appropriate custom report immediately preceding the data to be archived. You may enable or disable the archiving of data by resetting or setting this variable. 1000

Archive Control Flag

2000

Archive Control Flag

Report data following flag will be archived but not printed. Report data following flag is printed and archived.

23/27.71+ ! 05/98

2-1

Chapter 2

User-Defined, Status and Command Data (0001- 2999)

2.3. 2.3.1. !

IMPORTANT

!

Never set a physical I/O point which has been assigned as an input as this could cause a DC voltage to appear on the input terminals of that point which may conflict with any voltage already present on those terminals.

Status / Command Data Reading and Writing the Physical Digital I/O

The current status of physical Digital I/O Points 01 through 12 (Omni 3000) or 01 though 24 (Omni 6000) can be accessed by reading Modbus Indexes 1001 through 1024. All points which are to be written to exclusively via the Modbus link must first have the point assigned to Modbus control by entering zero (0) for 'Digital Point Assign' (see 2.5.14 in Volume 3). Assigning to '0' prevents the Omni application software from overwriting the Modbus write. 1001

Digital I/O Point #1

to 1024

2.3.2. INFO - Boolean data is accessed using Modbus function codes 01 for reads, 05 for single point writes and 15 for multiple bit writes. Boolean data is packed 8 points to a byte when reading.

Digital I/O Point #24

Programmable Booleans

Points 1025 through 1088 are updated every 100 msec with the current value of the programmable Boolean statements (see 2.5.11 in Volume 3). You may read from or write to these variables, but anything that you write may be overwritten by the flow computer depending upon the logic functions programmed into the logic statement. 1025

Boolean Point #25

to 1088

2.3.3.

Boolean Point #88

Programmable Accumulator Points

Points 1089 through 1099 are paired with Floating Point Variables 7089 through 7099. For example, numeric data placed in 7089 can be output as pulses by assigning a Digital I/O Point to 1089. 1089

Programmable Accumulator #1 Used to pulse out data placed into 7089.

to 1099

Programmable Accumulator #11 Used to pulse out data placed into 7099.

2-2

23/27.71+ ! 05/98


Volume 4d

2.3.4. Application Revisions 23.71+ & 27.71+ - This database corresponds to Application Revisions 23.71/27.71 for Orifice/Turbine Gas Flow Metering Systems. Both US and metric unit versions are considered.

Note: * Used to assign accumulator to the front panel counters or digital I/O points)

Meter Run Status and Alarm Points

The second digit of the index number defines the number of the meter run. For example: Point 1105 is the Meter Active Flag for Meter Run #1. Point 1405 would be the Meter Active Flag for Meter Run #4. 1n00

Spares

*

1n01

Pulses - Gross

*

1n02

Pulses - Net

*

1n03

Pulses - Mass

*

1n04

Pulses - Energy

1n05

Meter Run Active Flag Flow pulses above threshold frequency or DP greater than “cutoff”.

1n06

Spare

1n07

Any Meter Run Specific Alarm This Meter Clears if acknowledged.

1n08

Batch End Acknowledge Toggle ON/OFF.

1n09

Applied Automation - Gas Chromatograph - Communication Status 0=No communication; 1=Communication OK.

1n10

Spare

1n11

Applied Automation - Gas Chromatograph - Communication Alarm Communication failure (no response) if On.

1n12

Batch End Acknowledge 500 msec pulse.

1n13

Calculation Alarm Usually temperature, pressure or density is outside of the range of the algorithm selected.

1n14

Override In Use - Density Pressure

1n15

Override In Use - Differential Pressure

Override in use for any reason.

23/27.71+ ! 05/98

1n16

Override In Use - Temperature

1n17

Override In Use - Pressure

1n18

Override In Use - Gravity/Density Transducer

1n19

Override In Use - Density Temperature

2-3

Chapter 2

INFO - Boolean data is accessed using Modbus function codes 01 for reads, 05 for single point writes and 15 for multiple bit writes. Boolean data is packed 8 points to a byte when reading.

INFO - Transducer and flow rate alarms remain set while the alarm condition exists.

Alarms - All alarms indicated the current alarm condition at the time they are reset.

User-Defined, Status and Command Data (0001- 2999) 1n20

Mass Flowrate - Low Low Alarm

1n21

Mass Flowrate - Low Alarm

1n22

Mass Flowrate - High Alarm

1n23

Mass Flowrate - High High Alarm

1n24

Meter Temperature - Transducer Failed Low Alarm

1n25

Meter Temperature - Low Alarm

1n26

Meter Temperature - High Alarm

1n27

Meter Temperature - Transducer Failed High Alarm

1n28

Meter Pressure - Transducer Failed Low Alarm

1n29

Meter Pressure - Low Alarm

1n30

Meter Pressure - High Alarm

1n31

Meter Pressure - Transducer Failed High Alarm

1n32

Gravity/Density - Transducer Failed Low Alarm

1n33

Gravity/Density - Low Alarm

1n34

Gravity/Density - High Alarm

1n35

Gravity/Density - Transducer Failed High Alarm

1n36

Density Temperature - Transducer Failed Low Alarm

1n37

Density Temperature - Low Alarm

1n38

Density Temperature - High Alarm

1n39

Density Temperature - Transducer Failed High Alarm

1n40

Differential Pressure - Low Range - Transducer Failed Low Alarm

1n41

Differential Pressure - Low Range - Low Alarm

1n42

Differential Pressure - High Range - High Alarm

1n43

Differential Pressure - High Range - Transducer Failed High Alarm

1n44

Density Pressure - Transducer Failed Low Alarm

1n45

Density Pressure - Low Alarm

1n46

Density Pressure - High Alarm

1n47

Density Pressure - Transducer Failed High Alarm

1n48

Turbine - Meter Comparitor Alarm

1n49

Turbine - Channel A Failed

1n50

Turbine - Channel B Failed

1n51

Turbine - Difference Detected Between A & B Channel

Only when dual pulse fidelity check enabled. Total absence of pulses on Channel A. Total absence of pulses on Channel B. Missing or added pulses.

2-4

23/27.71+ ! 05/98


Volume 4d 1n52

Differential Pressure - Low Range Selected

1n53

Differential Pressure - High Range Selected

1n54

Any Meter Run Specific Alarm This Meter

1n55

Meter Off-line Flag

1n56

Batch in Progress Flag

Refers to when stacked DPs are used. Application Revisions 23.71+ & 27.71+ - This database corresponds to Application Revisions 23.71/27.71 for Orifice/Turbine Gas Flow Metering Systems. Both US and metric unit versions are considered.

Clears only if acknowledged and alarm condition is cleared. Pulses for 500 msec when Meter Active (1n05) goes false. Set when flow occurs at start of batch. Reset at batch end command.

1n57 INFO - The second digit of the index number defines the number of the meter run.

Batch Start Acknowledge Pulses for 500 msec when 1727-1730 command is received.

1n58

Meter Not Active / Batch Suspended True when batch is in progress but Meter Active (1n05) is false.

1n59

Spare

to 1n76

Spare

1n77

Correctable Totalizer Error Occurred

1n78

Non-correctable Totalizer Error

Primary totalizer checksum error secondary totalizer checksum OK. Primary and secondary totalizers reset to zero because both checksums incorrect.

Note: See 2n00 area for even more meter run alarms and status points.

1n79

Differential Pressure in Use - Low Alarm

1n80

Differential Pressure in Use - High Alarm

1n81

Spare

to

23/27.71+ ! 05/98

1n99

Spare

1500

Spare

2-5

Chapter 2


2.3.5. INFO - Boolean data is accessed using Modbus function codes 01 for reads, 05 for single point writes and 15 for multiple bit writes. Boolean data is packed 8 points to a byte when reading.

User Scratch Pad Boolean Points

There are two groups of user scratchpad flags which can be used to store the results of Boolean statements or to group data to be transmitted or received over a Modbus data link. 1501

Scratchpad - Point 01

to 1649

2.3.6.

Scratchpad - Point 149

User Scratch Pad One-Shot Boolean Points

Many times it is necessary to send a command which momentarily turns on a Boolean point. The following one-shot Boolean points simplify this action. They remain activated for exactly 2 seconds after they have been written to. 1650

Scratchpad One-Shot - Point 01

to 1699

2-6

Scratchpad One-Shot - Point 50

23/27.71+ ! 05/98


Volume 4d


INFO - Unless indicated as being ‘Level Sensitive’, most commands are 'edge triggered'.

To activate a command simply write a '1' (1 = True) to that point. It is not necessary to write a '0' (0 = False) after the command. The status of a command may also be read or used as input in a Boolean or variable statement. 1700

INFO- Notice that all write commands have indexes / point addresses with a ‘7’ in rd the 3 digit from the right.

Dummy Used only to reserve a digital I/O point to be used as an input. Point 1700 can be assigned to as many I/O points as needed.

1701

Spare

1702

End Batch - Station End batch on all meter runs defined in station.

1703 Hardware Interaction Unreliable operation will result if a command which has been assigned to a digital I/O point directly also needs to be activated via a Modbus write. This is because the On/Off state of the digital I/O point overwrites the command point every 100 msec and most command point actions are only triggered every 500 msec.

Command Boolean Points/Variables

End Batch - Meter #1 Points 1703-1706 individual end batch commands always work.

1704

End Batch - Meter #2

1705


1706


1707

Spare

to 1711

Spare

1712

Station Alarm Acknowledge

1713

Reset Power Failed Flag

Acknowledges all alarms. See power fail Flag 1829.

1714

Spare

to 1718

Spare

1719

Request Local Snapshot Report

1720

Snapshot Report to Modbus Buffer

Printed on local printer connected to flow computer. Move Snapshot Report to buffer located at 9402.

1721

Alarm Report to Modbus Buffer Move Alarm Report to buffer located at 9402.

23/27.71+ ! 05/98

2-7

Chapter 2

User-Defined, Status and Command Data (0001- 2999) #

INFO - Unless indicated as being ‘Level Sensitive’, most commands are 'edge triggered'. To activate a command simply write a '1' or 'True' to that point. It is not necessary to write a '0' or 'False' after the command is given. The status of a command may also be read or used as input in a Boolean or variable statement.

1722

st

1 PID Permissive - Loop #1 Points 1722-1725 enable PID startup and shutdown ramping for the respective meter (see 1752-1755). Level sensitive. st

#

1723

1 PID Permissive - Loop #2

#

1724


#

1725


1726

Spare

1727

Start Ramp-up PID - Loop #1

st st

st

nd

Initiates PID start up sequence by activating 1 and 2 PID Permissive (see 1n57 for acknowledge pulse). These commands are edge triggered, simply turn on.

Note:

# These points are defaulted to ‘active’ and need not be manipulated unless the application requires it.

1728


1729


1730


1731

Spare

1732

Alarm Acknowledge - Meter Run #1

1733


1734


1735


Points 1732-1735 are meter run specific alarms only.

Note:

*

1736

Disable Flow Totalizing - Meter Run #1

* These points also affect

*

1737


*

1738


*

1739


1740

Synchronize Gas Chromatograph Time & Date with Flow Computer

station totalizing (see also point 1761). Level sensitive.

Applied Automation only.

1741

Remote Up Arrow Key

1742

Remote Down Arrow Key

Duplicates the keypad function. Level sensitive. Duplicates the keypad function. Level sensitive.

1743

Spare

to 1750

2-8

Spare

23/27.71+ ! 05/98


Volume 4d 1751 Application Revisions 23.71+ & 27.71+ - This database corresponds to Application Revisions 23.71/27.71 for Orifice/Turbine Gas Flow Metering Systems. Both US and metric unit versions are considered.

Freeze Analog Inputs Used when calibrating analog inputs. Freezes ALL analogs. Level sensitive.

1752

2

nd

PID Permissive - Meter #1

Points 1752-1755 limit the PID ramp-down to the minimum output % setting (see 1722-1725). Level sensitive.

2

nd


1754

2

nd


1755

2

nd


1756

Orifice Plate Change - Meter #1

1753

Points 1756-1759 freeze all flow rates for the meter while changing orifice plates. Level sensitive.

1757


1758


1759


1760

Leak Detection Freeze Command Stores totalizers, temperatures, pressures and density variables to temporary storage (see 5n66 and 7634). This command is usually broadcast to all RTUs simultaneously.

1761

Disable Flow Totalizing Station This command has no effect in individual meter run totalizing (see also points 17361739). Level sensitive.

1762

Remote Print - Previous Batch Report #1 At local printer.

to

INFO- Notice that all write commands have indexes / point addresses with a ‘7’ in rd the 3 digit from the right.

1769

Remote Print - Previous Batch Report #8

1770

Remote Print - Previous Daily Report #1 At local printer.

to 1777

Remote Print - Previous Daily Report #8

1778

Spare

to 1785

Spare

1786

Remote Print - Alarm Report At local printer.

Note: More ‘Command Boolean Points’ are located at address 2701.

23/27.71+ ! 05/98

1787

Spare

2-9

Chapter 2

User-Defined, Status and Command Data (0001- 2999) 1788

!

CAUTION

!

Stored archive data may be lost! See chapter on ‘Raw Data Archive’ before manipulating these data points. These functions are duplicated using integers at 13920 and 13921.

1789

Shutdown PID - Loop #2

1790


1791


1792

Stop Flow PID - Loop #1

1793


1794


1795


! 1796

Raw Data Archive ‘Run’

! 1797

Alarms - All alarms indicated the current alarm condition at the time they are reset.

2-10

nd

Reconfigure Archive Level sensitive.

1798

Spare

to Spare

Meter Station Alarm and Status Points

Data points not specifically connected to a particular meter run are grouped here. These include flow computer general system alarms and metering group alarms and status points. *

1801

Positive - Gross Pulses

*

1802

Positive - Net Pulses

*

1803

Positive - Mass Pulses

*

1804

Positive - Energy Pulses

*

1805

Negative - Gross Pulses

*

1806

Negative - Net Pulses

*

1807

Negative - Mass Pulses

*

1808

Negative - Energy Pulses

1809

Flowrate - Low Low Alarm

Points 1805-1808 refer to flow which occurs in the reverse direction.

* Used to assign accumulators to the front panel electromechanical counters and digital I/O points.

st

Level sensitive.

2.3.8.

Note:

st

Points 1792-1795 deactivate the 1 and 2 PID permissive, causing the valve to ramp to the ‘top off’ setting, and then immediately closes the valve. If the valve is already at the ‘top off’ setting, the valve immediately closes.

1800



Points 1788-1791 start ramp-down to ‘top off’ valve setting by deactivating the 1 PID permissive. These commands are edge triggered; simply turn on.

INFO - Unless indicated as being ‘Level Sensitive’, most commands are 'edge triggered'. To activate a command simply write a '1' or 'True' to that point. It is not necessary to write a '0' or 'False' after the command is given. The status of a command may also be read or used as input in a Boolean or variable statement.

For points 1809-1812, flow rate units are mass units for all products.

1810

Flowrate - Low Alarm

1811

Flowrate - High Alarm

1812

Flowrate - High High Alarm

1813

Spare

1814

Spare

23/27.71+ ! 05/98


Volume 4d 1815

Any System Alarm

1816

Any New System Alarm

Includes acknowledged alarms also.

Application Revisions 23.71+ & 27.71+ - This database corresponds to Application Revisions 23.71/27.71 for Orifice/Turbine Gas Flow Metering Systems. Both US and metric unit versions are considered.

Does not include acknowledged alarms.

1817

Batch End Acknowledge Toggle state at batch end (see 1835).

1818

Gas Chromatograph - Failure Gas chromatograph fatal error received.

1819

Gas Chromatograph - Mol% - Override in Use

1820

Gas Chromatograph - Communication Alarm

Mol% overrides in product area being used. Communication lost with gas chromatograph.

1821

Spare

to 1826

Spare

1827

Leak Detection Freeze Command was received See point 1760.

Note:

#

1828

Day Start Flag

1829

Power Fail Flag

1830

Print Buffer Full Flag

True at specified day start hour (e.g.: 07:00:00).

# These points pulse high for one 500 msec cycle time.

True after power up (see 1713 for reset). Reports may be lost if 32K spooling buffer overflows due to the printer being ‘off-line’ or jammed with paper.

#

1831

Hour Start Flag

#

1832

Week Start Flag True at specified ‘day start’ hour Monday.

#

1833

Month Start Flag

#

1834

Year Start Flag

#

1835

Batch End Acknowledge

#

1836

Snapshot Printed

True at specified ‘day start’ hour on 1st day of month. True at specified ‘day start’ hour on 1st January. Pulses at batch end (see 1817). Indicates snapshot report printed.

1837

EPROM Error Flag Invalid checksum detected in EPROM memory.

1838

Peer-to-Peer Master Flag Momentarily true when this computer is peer-to-peer master.

1839

23/27.71+ ! 05/98

Spare

2-11

Chapter 2


User-Defined, Status and Command Data (0001- 2999) ~

1840

Boolean Statement Alarm

~

1841

Variable Statement Alarm

Tried to execute more than 100 Boolean statements. Tried to execute more than 100 variable statements.

1842

Peer-to-Peer - Transaction #1 - Communication Error Points 1842-1857 refer to an error occurred while communicating with the slave in the appropriate transaction. If a slave is involved in multiple transactions which fail, only the first will be flagged.

to 1857

Peer-to-Peer - Transaction #16 - Communication Error

#

1858

Calendar Day Start Flag

#

1859

Calendar Week Start Flag

#

1860

Calendar Month Start Flag

Notes:

~ The system limits the maximum number of statement evaluations to 100 to protected against possible lock-ups due to recursive loops. Any additional statement evaluations are ignored.

# These points pulse high

Format: 00:00:00. Format: 00:00:00 Monday. Format: 00:00:00 1st day of month.

#

1861

Calendar Year Start Flag st

Format: 00:00:00 Jan 1 .

for one 500 msec. cycle time.

1862

Reference Specific Gravity - Transducer Failed Low

1863

Reference Specific Gravity - Low Alarm

1864

Reference Specific Gravity - High Alarm

1865

Reference Specific Gravity - Transducer Failed High

1866

Mol% Nitrogen - Transducer Failed Low

to 1869

Mol% Nitrogen - Transducer Failed High

1870

Mol% Carbon Dioxide - Transducer Failed Low

to 1873

Mol% Carbon Dioxide - Transducer Failed High

1874

Heating Value - Transducer Failed Low

to

*

1877

Heating Value - Transducer Failed High

1878

Previous Batch - Station Alarm Flag Set if any station alarm during the previous batch.

*

1879

Previous Batch - Station Totalizer Roll-over Flag Set if any station totalizer rolled during the previous batch.

*

1880

Previous Daily - Station Totalizer Roll-over Flag Set if any station totalizer rolled during the previous day.

2-12

1881

Spare

1882

Spare

23/27.71+ ! 05/98


Volume 4d


1883

Auxiliary Input #1 - Transducer Failed Low

1884

Auxiliary Input #1 - Low Alarm

1885

Auxiliary Input #1 - High Alarm

1886

Auxiliary Input #1 - Transducer Failed High

1887


to 1890


1891


Note:

* These flags are usually used to conditionally print appropriate information messages on the batch and daily reports.

to 1894


1895


to Note: See 2600 area and 2800 area for more station alarms and status points.

1898


1899

Spare

to 1999

Spare

2000

Archive Control Flag Report data following flag is printed and archived (see 1.2, this chapter).

2001

Spare

to

23/27.71+ ! 05/98

2099

Spare

2n00

Spares

2-13

Chapter 2



Note: The ‘In Progress’ flags are those which the flow computer uses when printing the reports on the connected printer. Use the ‘Previous’ flags if the report is being printed by another device such as a SCADA or MMI. This is necessary because the flow computer clears the ‘In Progress’ data immediately after it prints the local report.

2-14

Meter Totalizer Roll-over Flags

The following Boolean points are flags indicating that a totalizer has rolled-over (i.e., reached maximum count and restarted from zero). These flags are used to conditionally print characters (usually ‘**’) in front of the totalizer which has rolled on the appropriate report. Examination of an Omni ‘Custom Report Template’ will show how this is accomplished. The second digit of the index number defines the number of the meter run. See also points at 2801 for station versions of these flags. 2n01

Batch In Progress - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n02

Batch In Progress - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n03

Batch In Progress - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n04

Batch In Progress - Energy Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n05

Batch In Progress - Cumulative - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n06

Batch In Progress - Cumulative - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n07

Batch In Progress - Cumulative - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n08

Batch In Progress - Cumulative - Energy Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n09

Daily In Progress - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n10

Daily In Progress - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n11

Daily In Progress - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n12

Daily In Progress - Energy Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n13

Daily In Progress - Cumulative - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n14

Daily In Progress - Cumulative - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n15

Daily In Progress - Cumulative - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n16

Daily In Progress - Cumulative - Energy Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n17

Previous Batch - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n18

Previous Batch - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n19

Previous Batch - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n20

Previous Batch - Energy Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n21

Previous Batch - Cumulative - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n22

Previous Batch - Cumulative - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n23

Previous Batch - Cumulative - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n24

Previous Batch - Cumulative - Energy Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n25

Previous Daily - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n26

Previous Daily - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n27

Previous Daily - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n28

Previous Daily - Energy Totalizer Rollover Flag

23/27.71+ ! 05/98


Volume 4d 2n29

Previous Daily - Cumulative - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag


2n30

Previous Daily - Cumulative - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag

Note: Notice that all write commands have indexes / point addresses with a ‘7’ in rd the 3 digit from the right.

2n40

Spare

2n41

Meter Hourly Archive Trigger Flag

2n42

Spare

2n31

Previous Daily - Cumulative - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n32

Previous Daily - Cumulative - Energy Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n33

Spare

to

Note: See 1800 area and 2800 area for more station alarms and status points.

to 2n99

Spare

2500

Spare

to 2600

23/27.71+ ! 05/98

Spare

2-15

Chapter 2


2.3.10. Miscellaneous Meter Station Alarm and Status Points Application Revisions 23.71+ & 27.71+ - This database corresponds to Application Revisions 23.71/27.71 for Orifice/Turbine Gas Flow Metering Systems. Both US and metric unit versions are considered.

INFO - To differentiate between normal message responses and unsolicited transmissions, Modbus function code 67 appears in the transmitted message rather than function code 03.

2601

Override in Use - Auxiliary Input #1

2602


2603


2604


2605

Override in Use - Reference Specific Gravity

2606

Override in Use - % Nitrogen Transducer

2607

Override in Use - % Carbon Dioxide Transducer

2608

Override in Use - Heating Value Transducer

2609

Spare

to 2619

Spare

2620

Calibration Data Checksum Error

2621

System Initialized Flag

Correctable as secondary copy was OK. True after power up or system reset, clears when reset power fail command is set (1713).

2622

Day Light Savings Time ‘On’ means that spring adjustment was made. ‘Off’ means autumn adjustment was made.

2623

Archive Memory Alarm 0=Ok; 1=Fail.

2624

Spare

to 2700

2-16

Spare

23/27.71+ ! 05/98


Volume 4d

2.3.11. Commands Which Cause Custom Data Packets to be Transmitted Without a Poll INFO - Boolean data is accessed using Modbus function codes 01 for reads, 05 for single point writes and 15 for multiple bit writes. Boolean data is packed 8 points to a byte when reading.


Activating any of the ‘edge triggered’ command points below causes the appropriate ‘Custom Data Packet’ to be transmitted out of the selected serial port without the serial port being polled for data. This function can be useful when communicating via VSAT satellite systems where operating cost is directly proportional to RF bandwidth used.

2701

Data Packet #1 to Serial Port #1

2702


2703


2704


2705


2706


2707


2708


2709


2710


2711


2712


2.3.12. Commands Needed To Accomplish a Redundant Flow Computer System Accomplishing a redundant flow computer system requires two identically configured flow computers to share input and output signals. In addition four digital I/O points are cross connected to enable each flow computer to monitor the other.

2713

Others - Watchdog Status

2714

Others - Master Status

Assigned to a digital I/O point monitoring other flow computers watchdog (see 2863). Assigned to a digital I/O point monitoring other flow computers master status (see 2864).

2715

Assume Master Status Command

2716

Assume Slave Status Command

Set to take mastership. Edge triggered. Set to relinquish mastership. Edge triggered.

23/27.71+ ! 05/98

2-17

Chapter 2


2.3.13. Boolean Status Points Used for Meter Tube Switching Application Revisions 23.71+ & 27.71+ - This database corresponds to Application Revisions 23.71/27.71 for Orifice/Turbine Gas Flow Metering Systems. Both US and metric unit versions are considered.

Status inputs and outputs are required to achieve the automatic meter tube switching function. The command input points below are used to interface to motor-operated valve (MOV) limit switch signals and allow the user to take an MOV ‘out of service’. See 2877 to 2896 for points needed to send MOV open and close commands.

2717

Meter #1- MOV - Open Status Must be activated when the MOV is fully open.

INFO - To differentiate between normal message responses and unsolicited transmissions, Modbus function code 67 appears in the transmitted message rather than function code 03.

How the MOV Limit Switches are Interpreted 2717=On 2717=Off 2717=Off 2717=On

2718=Off Open 2718=On Closed 2718=Off Travel 2718=On Illegal

2718

Meter #1 - MOV - Closed Status

2719

Meter #1 - MOV - ‘In Service’ Command / Status

Must be activated when the MOV is fully closed. Read/Write point used to remove an MOV from service. The flow computer also controls this point. Level sensitive.

2720

Meter #2 - MOV - Open Status

2721


2722

Meter #2 - MOV - ‘In Service’ Status

2723


2724


2725


2726


2727


2728


2729

Spare

to 2732

Spare

2.3.14. Archive Trigger Commands 2733

Archive Trigger Command - Meter #1

2734


2735


2736


2737

Spare

The archive trigger commands will trigger Point 2n41 ‘Meter Hourly Archive Flag’.

to 2800

2-18

Spare

23/27.71+ ! 05/98


Volume 4d

2.3.15. Station Totalizer Roll-over Flags INFO - Boolean data is accessed using Modbus function codes 01 for reads, 05 for single point writes and 15 for multiple bit writes. Boolean data is packed 8 points to a byte when reading.


INFO - Remember that the station is defined as a group of individual meter runs.

In Progress Flags - The ‘In Progress’ flags are the flags which the flow computer uses when printing the reports on the connected printer. Use the ‘Previous’ flags if the report is being printed by another device such as an SCADA or MMI. This is necessary because the flow computer clears the ‘In Progress’ data immediately after it prints the local report.

23/27.71+ ! 05/98

The following Boolean points are flags indicating that a totalizer has rolled-over (i.e., reached maximum count and restarted from zero). These flags are used to conditionally print characters (usually ‘**’ ) in front of the totalizer which has rolled on the appropriate report. Examination of an Omni ‘Custom Report Template’ will show how this is accomplished. See also points at 2n01 for meter run versions of flags. 2801

Batch In Progress - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag

2802

Batch In Progress - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag

2803

Batch In Progress - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag

2804

Batch In Progress - Energy Totalizer Rollover Flag

2805

Batch In Progress - Cumulative - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag

2806

Batch In Progress - Cumulative - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag

2807

Batch In Progress - Cumulative - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag

2808

Batch In Progress - Cumulative - Energy Totalizer Rollover Flag

2809

Daily In Progress - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag

2810

Daily In Progress - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag

2811

Daily In Progress - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag

2812

Daily In Progress - Energy Totalizer Rollover Flag

2813

Daily In Progress - Cumulative - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag

2814

Daily In Progress - Cumulative - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag

2815

Daily In Progress - Cumulative - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag

2816

Daily In Progress - Cumulative - Energy Totalizer Rollover Flag

2817

Previous Batch - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag

2818

Previous Batch - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag

2819

Previous Batch - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag

2820

Previous Batch - Energy Totalizer Rollover Flag

2821

Previous - Cumulative - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag

2822

Previous - Cumulative - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag

2823

Previous - Cumulative - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag

2824

Previous - Cumulative - Energy Totalizer Rollover Flag

2825

Previous Daily - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag

2826

Previous Daily - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag

2827

Previous Daily - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag

2828

Previous Daily - Energy Totalizer Rollover Flag

2-19

Chapter 2


User-Defined, Status and Command Data (0001- 2999) 2829

Previous Daily - Cumulative - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag

2830

Previous Daily - Cumulative - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag

2831 2832

Previous Daily - Cumulative - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag Previous Daily - Cumulative - Energy Totalizer Rollover Flag

2833

Print Snapshot - Reference Relative Density (SG) Flag

2834

Print Snapshot - Mol% Nitrogen (N2) Flag

2835

Print Snapshot - Mol% Carbon Dioxide (CO2) Flag

2836

Print Snapshot – Heating Value (HV) Flag

2837

Spare

to 2857

Spare

2.3.16. Station Totalizer Decimal Resolution Flags INFO - Remember that the station is defined as a group of individual meter runs.

All totalizers within the flow computer are ‘long integer types’. This data type uses an ‘implied’ decimal position. The computer uses these flags internally to determine how to format all totalizers of the same type for printing purposes. 2858

Print 0 Decimal Place for Gross Totalizer

2859

Print 1 Decimal Place for Gross Totalizer

2860

Print 2 Decimal Places for Gross Totalizer

2861

Print 3 Decimal Places for Gross Totalizer

2862

Spare

2.3.17. Status Booleans Relating to Redundant Flow Computer Systems 2863

Watchdog Status Out Normally High Watchdog. Monitored by other flow computer in a redundant system (see 2713).

2864

Master Status Indicates mastership. Monitored by other flow computer in a redundant system (see 2714).

2.3.18. More Station Totalizer Decimal Resolution Flags

2-20

2865

Print 0 Decimal Place for Mass Totalizer

2866

Print 1 Decimal Place for Mass Totalizer

2867

Print 2 Decimal Places for Mass Totalizer

2868

Print 3 Decimal Places for Mass Totalizer

23/27.71+ ! 05/98


Volume 4d


2869

Print 0 Decimal Place for Net Totalizer

2870

Print 1 Decimal Place for Net Totalizer

2871

Print 2 Decimal Places for Net Totalizer

2872

Print 3 Decimal Places for Net Totalizer

2873

Print 0 Decimal Place for Energy Totalizer

2874

Print 1 Decimal Place for Energy Totalizer

2875

Print 2 Decimal Places for Energy Totalizer

2876

Print 3 Decimal Places for Energy Totalizer

2.3.19. Boolean Command Outputs and Status Points Used For Meter Tube Switching Status inputs and outputs are required to achieve the automatic meter tube switching function. The command output points below are used to open and close the motor-operated valve (MOV). Alarm points are also provided which indicate MOV problems. See 2717 for points needed to interface to the MOV limit switches.

2877

Meter #1 - Open MOV - Command Out

2878

Meter #1 - Close MOV - Command Out

2879

Meter #1 - MOV - Alarm Out

Activates to open MOV. Activates to close MOV. MOV limit switches are indicating an illegal valve position.

2880

Meter #1 - Time-out Alarm - Opening MOV

2881

Meter #1 - Time-out Alarm - Closing MOV

MOV took too long opening. MOV took too long closing.

MOV Alarms: Any MOV alarm will cause the flow computer to take the MOV out of service (see 2719) and send a close MOV command.

2882


to 2886


2887


to 2891


2892


to 2896

23/27.71+ ! 05/98


2-21

Chapter 2


2897

Spare

to 3000

2-22

Spare

23/27.71+ ! 05/98


Volume 4d

3. 16-Bit Integer Data (3001 - 3999) 3.1. INFO - These short integers are accessed using Modbus function code 03 for reads, 06 for single writes and 16 for multiple register writes.

3.1.1.

Custom Data Packet Definition Variables Custom Data Packet #1

The 16-bit integers needed to define the 20 groups of data that make up Custom Data Packet #1 which is accessed at database Index 0001 are listed below. 3001

Group 1 - Starting Index Point Number

3002

Group 1 - Number of Index Points

to 3039


3040


3.1.2.

Custom Data Packet #2



3042


to 3055


3056


3.1.3.

Custom Data Packet #3



3058


to

23/27.71+ ! 05/98

3095


3096


3-1

Chapter 3

16-Bit Integer Data (3001- 3999)

3.2. Application Revisions 23.71+ & 27.71+ - This database corresponds to Application Revisions 23.71/27.71 for Orifice/Turbine Gas Flow Metering Systems. Both US and metric unit versions are considered.

Miscellaneous 16-Bit Integer Data

3097

Spare

3098

Number of Totalizer Digits Totalizers roll at: 0=9 digits; 1=8 digits.

3099

Spare

3100

Spare

3.3.

Meter Run 16-Bit Integer Data

The second digit of the index number defines the number of the meter run. For example: 3106 is the 'Meter Active Frequency' for Meter Run # 1. The same point for Meter Run # 4 would be 3406. 3n01

Override Code - Temperature For points 3n01-3n05: 0=Never use; 1=Always use; 2=Use if transmitter fails; 3=If transmitter fails use last hours average.

3n02

Override Code - Pressure

3n03

Override Code - Gravity/Density

3n04

Override Code - Density Temperature

3n05

Override Code - Density Pressure

3n06

Active Threshold Hz Point 1n05 is set when flow pulses exceed this frequency.

3n07

Use Transducer Density

3n08

Turbine or Differential Pressure

3n09

Override Code - Differential Pressure

3n10

Static Pressure - Location Select

3n11

AGA 8 - Method Selection

3n12

Orifice Taps

3n13

Disable Downstream/Upstream Temperature - Isentropic Correction

0=Use equation; 1=Use transducer. 0=Use differential pressure; 1=Use turbine meter.

0=Upstream; 1=Downstream. 1 to 3=1994; 4 to 6=1992; 7 to 12=1985 0=Flange; 1=Pipe; 2=Corner taps; 3=D&D/2; 4=Nozzle; 5 & 6= Venturi Note:

#

0=No; 1=Yes.

# Downstream temperature can be corrected to upstream conditions assuming an isentropic expansion after the orifice. Default is ‘Disable’ because AGA 3 / API 14.3 DO NOT mandate this correction.

3-2

3n14

Product Number Select

3n15

Gas Chromatograph Analyzer - Stream Number Selection

3n16

Spare

1 to 4.

23/27.71+ ! 05/98


Volume 4d 3n17

Hour in Progress - Flow Time

3n18

Last Hour’s - Flow Time

3n19

PID Control Mode

3n20

Setpoint Mode

500msec ticks (0-7200).

INFO - These short integers are accessed using Modbus function code 03 for reads, 06 for single writes and 16 for multiple register writes.

500msec ticks (0-7200). Do not write if 3n20 is ‘1’. 1=Manual; 0=Auto. Read only. DO NOT WRITE! 1=Local; 0=Remote.

3n21

PID Loop Status Read only. 1=Secondary; 0=Primary.

3n22

Frequency Point - K Factor #1 For points 3n22-3n33, see the 17500 area for matching K-Factors.

3n23

Frequency Point - K Factor #2

3n24


3n25


3n26


3n27


3n28


3n29


3n30


3n31


3n32


3n33


3n34

Comparitor Error Threshold When ‘dual pulse’ error checking enabled only.

Notes:

# 2s complement numbers based on span entries 17176 through 17189. Values expressed as percentages of span in tenth percent increments;. i.e., 1000 represents 100.0%

~ 2s complement numbers based on the 4-20 mA spans. Values are expressed as percentages of span in tenth percent increments; i.e., 1000 equals 100.0 %.

23/27.71+ ! 05/98

Spare

3n36

Meter Run - Flow Time - Hours Since Day Start

3n37

Meter Run - Flow Time - Minutes Since Day Start

3n38

Meter Run - Flow Time - Hours Previous Day

3n39

Meter Run - Flow Time - Minutes Previous Day

#

3n40

Current Net Flowrate

*

3n41

Net Totalizer

#

3n42

Current Gross Flowrate

*

3n43

Gross Total

#

3n44

Current Mass Flowrate

*

3n45

Mass Total

~

3n46

Current Meter Run Pressure

~

3n47

Current Meter Run Temperature

~

3n48

Current Transducer Density/Gravity

#

3n49

Energy Flowrate

*

3n50

Energy Total

* Unsigned integer totalizers cumulative based. They roll at 65536.

3n35

3-3

Chapter 3


16-Bit Integer Data (3001- 3999) 3n51

Applied Automation - Gas Chromatograph Status

3n52

Applied Automation - Gas Chromatograph Alarm Code

3n53

Spare

to 3n99

Spare

3500

Spare

3.4.

Scratchpad 16-Bit Integer Data

Ninety-nine integer registers are provided for user scratch pad. These registers are typically used to store and group data that will be moved via peer-to-peer operations or similar operations. 3501

Scratchpad - Short Integer #1

to

3-4

3599

Scratchpad - Short Integer #99

3600

Spare

23/27.71+ ! 05/98


Volume 4d

3.5. INFO - These short integers are accessed using Modbus function code 03 for reads, 06 for single writes and 16 for multiple register writes.

The 16-bit integers needed to define the variables that appear in the eight User Displays are listed below. Look in the 4601 area for string associated with setting up User Displays.

3.5.1. 3601

User Display Number 1 Database Index Number of 1st Variable

3602

Decimal Places for 1st Variable

3603

Database Index Number of 2nd Variable

3604

Decimal Places for 2nd Variable

3605

Database Index Number of 3rd Variable

3606

Decimal Places for 3rd Variable

3607

Database Index Number of 4th Variable

3608

Decimal Places for 4th Variable

3.5.2.

User Display Number 2 st

3609

Database Index Number of 1 Variable

3610


3611


3612


3613


3614


3615


3616

Decimal Places for 4 Variable

3.5.3.

23/27.71+ ! 05/98

User Display Definition Variables

th


3617


3618


3619


3620


3621


3622


3623


3624


th

3-5

Chapter 3



3625

st


3626


3627


3628


3629


3630


3631


3632


3.5.5. 3633

th



3634


3635


3636


3637


3638


3639


3640


3.5.6. 3641

3-6

User Display Number 4

th



3642


3643


3644


3645


3646


3647


3648


th

23/27.71+ ! 05/98


Volume 4d

3.5.7. INFO - These short integers are accessed using Modbus function code 03 for reads, 06 for single writes and 16 for multiple register writes.

3649



3650


3651


3652


3653


3654


3655


3656


3.5.8. 3657

th



3658


3659


3660


3661


3662


3663


3664


3665

Spare

th

to 3700

23/27.71+ ! 05/98

Spare

3-7

Chapter 3



Data Used to Access the Raw Data Archive Records

See the chapter describing how to use the raw data archiving features of the flow computer including how to manipulate the ‘pointers’ below. 3701

Archive 701 - Maximum Records

3702

Archive 701 - Current Record Number

Number of data records in archive file. Number of the last record updated.

3703

Archive 701 - Request Record Number Write the number of the record you wish to read.

3704

Archive 702 - Maximum Records Number of data records in archive file.

3705


3706

Archive 702 - Request Record Number

Number of the last record updated. Write the number of the record you wish to read.

3707


3708


3709


Number of data records in archive file. Number of the last record updated. Write the number of the record you wish to read.

3710


3711


3712



3713


3714



3715


3716


3717


3718



3-8

23/27.71+ ! 05/98


Volume 4d


3719


3720


3721



3722


3723


3724



3725


3726



3727


3728


3729


3730



3731


3732


3733



3734


3735



3736


23/27.71+ ! 05/98

3-9

Chapter 3



3737

More Miscellaneous 16-Bit Integer Data Archive File System - Memory Allocation Status 0=OK; 1=Allocation Error.

3738

Spare

to 3750

Spare

3751

Run Switching in Auto Mode

3752

Run Switching Timer

0=No; 1=Yes. Seconds allowed for flow to settle during MOV operations.

3753

Spare

to 3768

Spare

3769

Number of Historical Alarms to Modbus Buffer Used by OmniCom when reading the Historical Alarm Report. OmniCom first writes to this variable the number of historical alarm events to be included on the report.

3-10

23/27.71+ ! 05/98


Volume 4d

3.8. INFO - These short integers are accessed using Modbus function code 03 for reads, 06 for single writes and 16 for multiple register writes.

Gas Chromatograph 16-Bit Integer Data

The data points below are used to map the component order of the GC analysis to the component order needed by AGA8. 3770 Component # ‘n’ for % Methane 3771 Component # ‘n’ for % Nitrogen 3772 Component # ‘n’ for % Carbon Dioxide 3773 Component # ‘n’ for % Ethane 3774 Component # ‘n’ for % Propane 3775 Component # ‘n’ for % Water 3776 Component # ‘n’ for % Hydrogen Sulfide 3777 Component # ‘n’ for % Hydrogen 3778 Component # ‘n’ for % Carbon Monoxide 3779 Component # ‘n’ for % Oxygen 3780 Component # ‘n’ for % i-Butane 3781 Component # ‘n’ for % n-Butane 3782 Component # ‘n’ for % i-Pentane 3783 Component # ‘n’ for % n-Pentane 3784 Component # ‘n’ for % n-Hexane 3785 Component # ‘n’ for % n-Heptane 3786 Component # ‘n’ for % n-Octane 3787 Component # ‘n’ for % n-Nonane 3788 Component # ‘n’ for % n-Decane 3789 Component # ‘n’ for % Helium 3790 Component # ‘n’ for % Argon 3791 Component # ‘n’ for Heating Value 3792 Component # ‘n’ for Reference Relative Denisty

3793

Spare

to 3799

23/27.71+ ! 05/98

Spare

3-11

Chapter 3



Notes: * Unsigned integer totalizers cumulative based. They roll at 65536.

~

3800

Meter Station 16-Bit Integer Data Special Diagnostic Function Used to enable rigorous ‘Audit Trail’ reporting of all serial port transactions (see side bar note).

3801

Spare

#

3802

Current Net Flowrate

*

3803

Net Totalizer

#

3804

Current Gross Flowrate

*

3805

Gross Totalizer

#

3806

Current Mass Flowrate

*

3807

Mass Totalizer

3808

Spare

~ To avoid flushing the audit trail, audit events other than complete ‘downloads’ to the flow computer are usually not documented in the ‘audit trail’ unless serial port passwords have been enabled. If pass-words are enabled, the target address is recorded for single point writes. Rigorous auditing of a serial port or group of serial ports can be activated by placing the appropriate hexadecimal code in 3800 (S = Serial Port): 00 00 00 AA = Audit S1 00 00 AA 00 = Audit S2 00 AA 00 00 = Audit S3 AA 00 00 00 = Audit S4 To monitor multiple ports; e.g: AA 00 AA 00 = Audit S4 & S2

to 3810

Spare

#

3811

Current Energy Flowrate

#

3812

Energy Totalizer

3813

Fluid Type Select - Product #1

3814


3815


3816


3817

AGA 8 Method Select - Product #1

3818


3819


3820


3821

Heating Value Method Select - Product #1

3822


3823


3824


3825

Spare

# 2s complement numbers based on span entries 17176 through 17189. Values expressed as percentages of span in tenth percent increments. i.e. 1000 represents 100.0% . No over range or under range checking is done.

0=AGA 5; 1=GPA 2172-96

to 3828

3-12

Spare

23/27.71+ ! 05/98


Volume 4d


3829

Flow Average Factor

3830

Print Priority

3831

Number of Nulls After CR

3832

Print Interval in Minutes

Number of 500 msec calculation cycles to average. 0=Not sharing a printer; 1=Master; n=slaves 2-12. Used to slow data to a printer if no hardware handshake. Time interval between automatic snapshot reports.

3833

Automatic - Weekly Batch Select

3834

Automatic - Monthly Batch Select

0=None; 1=Monday; 7=Sunday. st

0=None; 1=1 day of the month.

3835

Automatic - Hourly Batch Select 0=No; 1=Yes.

3836

Default Report Templates 0=Custom templates; 1=Default reports.

3837

Gas Chromatograph Analyzer - Type Select

3838

Clear Daily @ Batch End Select

0=Applied Automation; 1=Danalyzer. 0=24hr Totals; 1=Cleared at batch end.

3839

Analyzer Number

3840

Gas Chromatograph - Result Interval

3841

Gas Chromatograph - Listen Only Mode

ID Used in communications Will ask gas chromatograph for data if no new result sent within this many minutes. 0=Be master; 1=Be slave - listen only.

3842

Select Date Type Selects date format: 0=dd/mm/yy; 1=mm/dd/yy.

23/27.71+ ! 05/98

3-13

Chapter 3


3.10. Danalyzer Gas Chromatograph Data Application Revisions 23.71+ & 27.71+ - This database corresponds to Application Revisions 23.71/27.71 for Orifice/Turbine Gas Flow Metering Systems. Both US and metric unit versions are considered.

INFO - The addresses on the right (3047-3057) are the corresponding addresses in the Danalyzer.

3843

Danalyzer - Alarm Word - 3046 For point 3843-3854, see Danalyzer documentation for complete details about mapping of alarm registers. Critical alarms in this register.

3844

Danalyzer - Alarm Word - 3047

3845


3846


3847


3848


3849


3850


3851


3852


3853


3854


3855

Danalyzer - Cycle Start - Month

3856

Danalyzer - Cycle Start - Day

3857

Danalyzer - Cycle Start - Year

3858

Danalyzer - Cycle Start - Hour

3859

Danalyzer - Cycle Start - Minute

3860

Spare

Critical alarms in this register.

Points 3855-3859 represent the time and date when the last analysis was started.

to 3866

3-14

Spare

23/27.71+ ! 05/98


Volume 4d

3.11. Flow Computer Time and Date Variables INFO - These short integers are accessed using Modbus function code 03 for reads, 06 for single writes and 16 for multiple register writes.

Time and date can be read and written here. See also 4847 and 4848. 3867

Current - Hour 0-23.

3868

Current - Minute

3869

Current - Second

3870

Current - Month

0-59. 0-59. 1-12.

3871

Current - Day of Month 1-31.

3872

Current - Year

3873

Current - Day of Week

3874

Disable Daily Report

0-99; Year 2000=00. Read only. 1=Monday; 7=Sunday. 0=print daily report; 1=no daily report.

3875

23/27.71+ ! 05/98

Number of Days Since Beginning of Year

3-15

Chapter 3


3.12. More Miscellaneous 16-Bit Integer Data Application Revisions 23.71+ & 27.71+ - This database corresponds to Application Revisions 23.71/27.71 for Orifice/Turbine Gas Flow Metering Systems. Both US and metric unit versions are considered.

3876

Spare

to 3879

Spare

3880

Override Code - Reference Specific Gravity

3881

Override Code - Nitrogen

3882

Override Code - Carbon Dioxide

3883

Override Code - Heating Value

3884

Override Code - Gas Chromatograph

3885

Spare

to 4099

3-16

Spare

23/27.71+ ! 05/98


Volume 4d

4. 8-Character ASCII String Data (4001 - 4999) 4.1. INFO - These ASCII string variables are accessed using Modbus function codes 03 for all reads and 16 for all writes.

Note: The index number of each string refers to the complete string which occupies the space of 4 registers. It must be accessed as a complete unit. You cannot read or write a partial string. Each point counts as one point in the normal Omni Modbus mode.

Meter Run ASCII String Data

The second digit of the index number defines the number of the meter run. For example: 4114 is the 'Meter ID' for Meter Run #1. The same point for Meter Run #4 would be 4414. Each ASCII string is 8 characters occupying the equivalent of 4 short integer registers (see the side bar comments). 4n00

Spares

4n01

Running Batch - Start Date

4n02

Running Batch - Start Time

#

4n03

Batch End - Date

#

4n04

Batch End - Time

4n05

Running Product Name

4n06

Current - Calculation Mode Algorithm set used, in string format.

Modicon Compatible Mode - For the purpose of point count only, each string counts as 4 registers. The starting address of the string still applies.

4n07

Spare

4n08

Spare

4n09

Meter Factor Used in Net / Mass Used on reports. It contains ‘Yes’ or ‘No’. Characters 1-8.

Note:

# Last batch end for this

4n10

Spare

4n11

Meter - Serial Number

4n12

Meter - Size

4n13

Meter - Model

4n14

Meter - ID

4n15

Flow Meter Tag / Low Range Tag - Differential Pressure

4n16

Differential Pressure - High Range Tag

4n17

Transmitter Tag - Temperature

4n18

Transmitter Tag - Pressure

4n19

Transmitter Tag - Densitometer

4n20

Transmitter Tag - Density Temperature

meter run.

23/27.71+ ! 05/98

4n21

Transmitter Tag - Density Pressure

4n22

Output Tag - PID Control

4-1

Chapter 4

8-Character ASCII String Data (4001- 4999) 4n23


Spare

to 4n99

Spare

4500

Spare

4.2.

Scratch Pad ASCII String Data

Storage for ninety-nine ASCII strings is provided for user scratch pad. These registers are typically used to store and group data that will be moved via peerto-peer operations or similar operations. 4501

Scratchpad - ASCII String #1

to 4599

Scratchpad - ASCII String #99

4600

Spare

4.3.

User Display Definition String Variables

The string variables which define the descriptor tags that appear in the eight User Displays and the key press combinations which recall the displays are listed below. INFO - See 3601 area for more data points needed to setup the user displays.

4601

User Display #1 - Descriptor Tag - Line #1

4602


4603


4604


4605


to 4632


4633

User Display #1 - Key Press Sequence

to 4640

User Display #8 - Key Press Sequence

4641

Spare

to 4706

4-2

Spare

23/27.71+ ! 05/98


Volume 4d

4.4. INFO - These ASCII string variables are accessed using Modbus function codes 03 for all reads and 16 for all writes.

Note: The index number of each string refers to the complete string which occupies the space of 4 registers. It must be accessed as a complete unit. You cannot read or write a partial string. Each point counts as one point in the normal Omni Modbus mode.

Modicon Compatible Mode - For the purpose of point count only, each string counts as 4 registers. The starting address of the string still applies.

4707

String Variables Associated with the Station Auxiliary Inputs Auxiliary Tag - Input #1

to 4710

Auxiliary Tag - Input #4

4711

Spare

to 4806

4.5.

Spare

Meter Station 8-Character ASCII String Data

4807

Date of Last Database Change

4808

Time of Last Database Change

4809

Reserved

4810

Esc Sequence to Print Condensed

Updated each time the Audit Trail is updated.

Raw ASCII characters sent to printer (see 14149 for Hex ASCII setup).

4811

Esc Sequence to Print Normal Raw ASCII characters sent to printer (see 14150 for Hex ASCII setup).

4812

Daylight Savings Starts Date format field (**/**/**).

4813

Daylight Savings Ends Date format field (**/**/**).

4814

Spare

4815

Station - ID

4816

Spare

4817

Spare

4818

Print Interval Timer Start Time Time format field (**:**:**).

4819

Time to Print Daily Report Time format field (**:**:**).

23/27.71+ ! 05/98

4-3

Chapter 4

8-Character ASCII String Data (4001- 4999)


4820

Product #1 - Name

4821

Product #1 - Name

4822

Product #1 - Name

4823

Product #4 - Name

4824

Spare

to 4831

Spare

4832

Reference Specific Gravity Tag

4833

Nitrogen Tag

4834

Carbon Dioxide Tag

4835

Heating Value Tag

4836

Flow Computer ID

4837

Company Name

4838

Company Name

Characters 1-8. Characters 9-16.

4839

Company Name Characters 17-24.

4840

Company Name

4841

Company Name

4842

Station Location

4843

Station Location

Characters 25-32. Characters 33-38. (Note: Last two characters are spares.) Characters 1-8. Characters 9-16.

4844

Station Location

4845

Station Location

4846

Station Location

*

4847

Current Date

*

4848

Current Time

Characters 17-24. Characters 25-32. Characters 33-38. (Note: Last two characters are spares.) Note:

Point 3842 selects date format (see also 3870-3872).

* The flow computer time and date can be set by writing to these ASCII variables. Be sure to include the colons ( : ) in the time string and the slashes ( / ) in the date string.

See also 3867-3869.

4849

Software Version Number

4850

Online Password / EPROM Checksum

Example: 23.71 Dual function point. Write password. Read provides EPROM Checksum.

4851

Spare

to 5000

4-4

Spare

23/27.71+ ! 05/98


Volume 4d

5. 32-Bit Integer Data (5001 - 6999) 5001 INFO - These 32-bit long integer variables are accessed using Modbus function code 03 for reads, 06 for single writes and 16 for multiple writes. Note that the index number for each variable refers to one complete long integer which occupies the space of two 16-bit registers. It must be accessed as a complete unit. You cannot read or write a partial 32-bit integer. Each 32-bit long integer counts as one point in the normal Omni Modbus mode.

Modicon Compatible Mode - For the purpose of point count only, each 32-bit integer counts as two registers. The starting address of the 32-bit integer still applies.

to 5099

5.1.

# These Variables are stored with 4 places after the implied decimal point. i.e. 10000 is interpreted as 1.0000

23/27.71+ ! 05/98

Spare

Meter Run 32-Bit Integer Data

The second digit of the index number defines the number of the meter run. For example: 5105 is the 'Cumulative Gross Totalizer' for Meter Run # 1. The same point for Meter Run # 4 would be 5405. 5n00

Spares

5n01

Batch in Progress - Gross Totalizer Points 5n01-5n04 represent the total batch quantities measured so far for the batch in progress. Results are moved to 5n50 area at the end of the batch.

*

5n02

Batch in Progress - Net Totalizer

*

5n03

Batch in Progress - Mass Totalizer

*

5n04

Batch in Progress - Energy Totalizer

*

5n05

Cumulative In Progress - Gross Totalizer Points 5n05-5n08 are non-resetable totalizers which are snapshot for opening readings.

Notes:

* The increment for all totalizers depends upon the ‘totalizer resolution’ settings shown in the ‘Factor Setup’ menu of OmniCom. They can only be changed via the keypad entries made in the ‘Pass-word Maintenance’ menu after ‘Resetting all Totalizers’.

Spare

*

5n06

Cumulative In Progress - Net Totalizer

*

5n07

Cumulative In Progress - Mass Totalizer

*

5n08

Cumulative In Progress - Energy Totalizer

*

5n09

Today’s In Progress - Gross Totalizer Points 5n09-5n12 are total daily quantities measured since the ‘day start hour’ today. These are moved to the 5n54 area at the start of a new day.

*

5n10

Today’s In Progress - Net Totalizer

*

5n11

Today’s In Progress - Mass Totalizer

*

5n12

Today’s In Progress - Energy Totalizer

#

5n13

Meter Factor in Use Now

#

5n14

Average Meter Factor - Batch in Progress

#

5n15

Average Meter Factor - Today’s In Progress

5n16

Spare

5n17

Spare

5-1

Chapter 5


‘Dual Pulse’ (Comparitor) Error Counts for Batch When pulse fidelity check enabled only.


5n19

Batch Number

5n20

Raw Input Counts (500 msec) Turbine counts this 500 msec cycle.

#

5n21

Mol % - Methane / Nitrogen

#

5n22

Mol % - Nitrogen / Carbon Dioxide

#

5n23

Mol % - Carbon Dioxide / Hydrogen Sulfide

#

5n24

Mol % - Ethane / Water

#

5n25

Mol % - Propane / Helium

#

5n26

Mol % - Water / Methane

#

5n27

Mol % - Hydrogen Sulfide / Ethane

#

5n28

Mol % - Hydrogen / Propane

#

5n29

Mol % - Carbon Monoxide / n-Butane

#

5n30

Mol % - Oxygen / i-Butane

Notes:

#

5n31

Mol % - i-Butane / n-Pentane

# These Variables are

#

5n32

Mol % - n-Butane / i-Pentane

#

5n33

Mol % - i-Pentane / n-Hexane

#

5n34

Mol % - n-Pentane / n-Heptane

#

5n35

Mol % - n-Hexane / n-Octane

#

5n36

Mol % - n-Heptane / n-Nonane

#

5n37

Mol % - n-Octane / n-Decane

#

5n38

Mol % - n-Nonane / Oxygen

#

5n39

Mol % - n-Decane / Carbon Monoxide

#

5n40

Mol % - Helium / Hydrogen

#

5n41

Mol % - Argon

5n42

Spare

5n43

In Progress - Raw Input Counts for Hour

5n44

In Progress - Gross Total for Hour

Mol % - The order of the analysis components varies depending upon which AGA 8 algorithm is selected (1992-94 or 1985). The Mol % data in this area comes from either live gas chromatograph data, 4020mA data, or override values (see 17230 area for example).

stored with 4 places after the implied decimal point. i.e. 10000 is interpreted as 1.0000

Raw turbine counts for the hour so far. Points 5n44-5n47 represent the total quantities for the current hour in progress. These will be moved to 5n74 area at the start of the new hour.

5n45

In Progress - Net Total for Hour

5n46

In Progress - Mass Total for Hour

5n47

In Progress - Energy Total for Hour

5n48

In Progress - Raw Input Counts for Batch

5n49

In Progress - Raw Input Counts for Day

Raw turbine counts; this batch. Raw turbine counts; today so far.

5-2

23/27.71+ ! 05/98


Volume 4d 5n50 INFO - These 32-bit long integer variables are accessed using Modbus function code 03 for reads, 06 for single writes and 16 for multiple writes. Note that the index number for each variable refers to one complete long integer which occupies the space of two 16-bit registers. It must be accessed as a complete unit. You cannot read or write a partial 32-bit integer. Each 32-bit long integer counts as one point in the normal Omni Modbus mode.


Previous Batch - Gross Totalizer Points 5n50-5n53 represent the total batch quantities for the previous batch.

5n51

Previous Batch - Net Totalizer

5n52

Previous Batch - Mass Totalizer

5n53

Previous Batch - Energy Totalizer

5n54

Previous Day’s - Gross Totalizer Points 5n54-5n57 are the total quantities for the previous day; ‘day start hour’ to ‘day start hour’.

5n55

Previous Day’s - Net Totalizer

5n56

Previous Day’s - Mass Totalizer

5n57

Previous Day’s - Energy Totalizer

5n58

Current Batch - Opening Gross Totalizer Points 5n58-5n61 are cumulative totalizers snapshot at the start of the batch in progress. These variables are also the closing totalizers for the previous batch.

5n59

Current Batch - Opening Net Totalizer

5n60

Current Batch - Opening Mass Totalizer

5n61

Current Batch - Opening Energy Totalizer

5n62

Today’s - Opening Gross Totalizer Points 5n62-5n65 are cumulative totalizers snapshot at day start hour for today. These variables are also the closing totalizers for the previous day.

5n63

Today’s - Opening Net Totalizer

5n64

Today’s - Opening Mass Totalizer

5n65

Today’s - Opening Energy Totalizer

5n66

Cumulative - Gross Total @ Leak Detection Freeze Command Points 5n66-5n69 are cumulative totalizers snapshot when the Leak Detection Freeze Command (1760) is received (see also points 7634, 7644, 7654 & 7664).

5n67

Cumulative - Net Total @ Leak Detection Freeze Command

5n68

Cumulative - Mass Total @ Leak Detection Freeze Command

5n69

Cumulative - Energy Total @ Leak Detection Freeze Command

5n70

Increment - Gross Totalizer Points 5n70-5n73 contains the incremental integer counts that were added to the totalizers for this current cycle (500msec).

5n71

Increment - Net Totalizer

5n72

Increment - Mass Totalizer

5n73

Increment - Energy Totalizer

5n74

Previous Hourly - Gross Total Points 5n74-5n77 represent the total quantities measured for the last hour. These are moved here from 5n44 area at the end of hour.

5n75

23/27.71+ ! 05/98

Previous Hourly - Net Total

5n76

Previous Hourly - Mass Total

5n77

Previous Hourly - Energy Total

5-3

Chapter 5



Previous Batch - Opening Gross Data from 5n58 area gets moved to 5n78-5n81 at the end of each batch.

5n79

Previous Batch - Opening Net

5n80

Previous Batch - Opening Mass

5n81

Previous Batch - Opening Energy

5n82

Previous Day’s - Opening Gross

5n83

Previous Day’s - Opening Net

Data from 5n62 area gets moved to 5n82-5n85 at the end/beginning of each day.

5n84

Previous Day’s - Opening Mass

5n85

Previous Day’s - Opening Energy

5n86

Previous Batch - Closing Gross Total

5n87

Previous Batch - Closing Net Total

5n88

Previous Batch - Closing Mass Total

5n89

Previous Batch - Energy Total

5n90

Previous Batch - Batch Report Number Use this value on Batch Report.

5n91

Spare

to 5n99

Spare

5500

Spare

5.2.

Scratch Pad 32-Bit Integer Data

Ninety-nine 32-bit integer registers are provided for user scratch pad. These registers are typically used to store the results of variable statement calculations, to group data that will be moved via peer-to-peer operations or similar types of operations. 5501

Scratchpad - 32-Bit Integer #1

to 5599

Scratchpad - 32-Bit Integer #99

5600

Spare

to 5800

5-4

Spare

23/27.71+ ! 05/98


Volume 4d

5.3. INFO - These 32-bit long integer variables are accessed using Modbus function code 03 for reads, 06 for single writes and 16 for multiple writes. Note that the index number for each variable refers to one complete long integer which occupies the space of two 16-bit registers. It must be accessed as a complete unit. You cannot read or write a partial 32-bit integer. Each 32-bit long integer counts as one point in the normal Omni Modbus mode.


*

5801

Station 32-Bit Integer Data Batch in Progress - Gross Totalizer Points 5801-5804 are total batch quantities measured so far for the batch in progress. These are moved to 5850 area at the end of the batch.

*

5802

*

5803

Batch in Progress - Net Totalizer Batch in Progress - Mass Totalizer

*

5804

Batch in Progress - Energy Totalizer

*

5805

Cumulative in Progress - Gross Totalizer Points 5805-5808 are non-resetable totalizers which are snapshot for opening readings.

*

5806

*

5807

Cumulative in Progress - Net Totalizer Cumulative in Progress - Mass Totalizer

*

5808

Cumulative in Progress - Energy Totalizer

*

5809

Today’s in Progress - Gross Totalizer Points 5809-5812 are total daily quantities measured since the ‘day start hour’ today. These are moved to the 5854 area at the start of a new day.

*

5810

*

5811

Today’s in Progress - Net Totalizer Today’s in Progress - Mass Totalizer

*

5812

Today’s in Progress - Energy Totalizer

5813

Spare

Note:


to 5843

Spare

5844

Station - In Progress - Gross Total for Hour Points 5844-5847 represent the total station quantities for the current hour in progress. These will be moved to 5n74 area at the start of the new hour.

5845

Station - In Progress - Net Total for Hour

5846

Station - In Progress - Mass Total for Hour

5847

Station - In Progress - Energy Total for Hour

5848

Time in hhmmss format

5849

Date in yymmdd format

Read (e.g.: the number 103125 represents 10:31:25). Read (e.g.: the number 970527 represents May 27, 1997). The date format used here does not follow the US/European format selection.

23/27.71+ ! 05/98

5-5

Chapter 5

32-Bit Integer Data (5001- 6999) 5850

Previous Batch - Gross Totalizer Points 5850-5853 are total batch quantities for the previous batch. These are moved here from 5801 area at the end of a batch.


5851

Previous Batch - Net Totalizer

5852

Previous Batch - Mass Totalizer

5853

Previous Batch - Energy Totalizer

5854

Previous Day’s - Gross Totalizer Points 5854-5857 are total quantities for the previous day; ‘day start hour’ to ‘day start hour’. These are moved here from 5809 area at the end of the day.

5855

Previous Day’s - Net Totalizer

5856

Previous Day’s - Mass Totalizer

5857

Previous Day’s - Energy Totalizer

5858

Current Batch - Opening Gross Totalizer Points 5858-5861 are cumulative totalizers snapshot at the start of the batch in progress. These variables are also the closing totalizers for the previous batch.

5859

Current Batch - Opening Net Totalizer

5860

Current Batch - Opening Mass Totalizer

5861

Current Batch - Opening Energy Totalizer

5862

Today’s - Opening Gross Totalizer Points 5862-5865 are cumulative totalizers snapshot at day start hour for today. These variables are also the closing totalizers for the previous day.

5863

Today’s - Opening Net Totalizer

5864

Today’s - Opening Mass Totalizer

5865

Today’s - Opening Energy Totalizer

5866

Cumulative - Gross Total @ Freeze Points 5866-5869 are cumulative totalizers snapshot when the Leak Detection Freeze Command (1760) is received (see also points 7634, 7644, 7654 & 7664).

5867

Cumulative - Net Total @ Freeze

5868

Cumulative - Mass Total @ Freeze

5869

Cumulative - Energy Total @ Freeze

5870

Increment - Gross Totalizer

Note:


5-6

*

Points 5870-5873 contain the incremental integer counts that were added to the totalizers for this current cycle.

*

5871

Increment - Net Totalizer

*

5872

Increment - Mass Totalizer

*

5873

Increment - Energy Totalizer

5874

Previous Hourly - Gross Points 5874-5877 represent the total quantities measured for the last hour. These are moved here from 5844 area at the end of hour.

5875

Previous Hourly - Net

5876

Previous Hourly - Mass

5877

Previous Hourly - Energy

23/27.71+ ! 05/98


Volume 4d 5878 INFO - These 32-bit long integer variables are accessed using Modbus function code 03 for reads, 06 for single writes and 16 for multiple writes. Note that the index number for each variable refers to one complete long integer which occupies the space of two 16-bit registers. It must be accessed as a complete unit. You cannot read or write a partial 32-bit integer. Each 32-bit long integer counts as one point in the normal Omni Modbus mode.


Previous Batch - Opening Gross Data from 5858 area gets moved to points 5878-5881 at the end of each batch.

5879

Previous Batch - Opening Net

5880

Previous Batch - Opening Mass

5881

Previous Batch - Opening Energy

5882

Previous Day’s - Opening Gross Data from 5862 area gets moved to points 5882-5885 at the end/beginning of each day.

5883

Previous Day’s - Opening Net

5884

Previous Day’s - Opening Mass

5885

Previous Day’s - Opening Energy

5886

Previous Batch - Closing Gross Total

5887

Previous Batch - Closing Net Total

5888

Previous Batch - Closing Mass Total

5889

Previous Batch - Closing Energy Total

5890

Previous Batch - Batch Number

5891

Previous Batch - Product Number

5892

Spare

to 6000

23/27.71+ ! 05/98

Spare

5-7

Chapter 5



Premium Level 32-Bit Integer Data (US Customary Units Only)

The data below is provided to configure ‘Premium Level Totalizing’ (applicable to Revision 23.71 in US Units only). This scheme provides separate totalizers which are used to segment ‘Thousand Standard Cubic Feet’ (MSCF) flow based on flow-rate zones. These zones are: Base, Level 1, Level 2, Level 3 and Special Billing. The special billing threshold is checked first and then Levels 1, 2 and 3. The second digit of the index number defines the number of the meter run. For example: 6104 is the 'Special Billing Threshold’ for Meter Run # 1. The same point for Meter Run # 4 would be 6404. Station data is located at 6804.

5.4.1. Addresses in the 6000 Range - For Revision 23.71+ (US units) only, this index number range corresponds to long integers. Other application revisions have this range assigned to IEEE floating points.

Flow Rate Threshold Triggers (MSCF/Hour)

6n00

Spares

6n01

Premium Level 1 - Threshold

6n02

Premium Level 2 - Threshold

Flow below this threshold is Base MSCF. Flow between Level 1 and 2 is Level 1 MSCF.

6n03

Premium Level 3 - Threshold Flow between Level 2 and 3 is Level 2 MSCF. Flow above this is Level 3 MSCF)

6n04

Special Billing - Threshold Flow above this trigger is Special Billing MSCF. Flow below is divided up between Base, Level 1, 2 and 3.

6n05

5.4.2.

Spare

Non-Resetable Totalizers (MSCF)

Note:

* The increment for all totalizers depends upon the ‘totalizer resolution’ settings shown in the ‘Factor Setup’ menu of OmniCom. They can be only be changed via keypad entries made in the ‘Password Maintenance’ menu after ‘Resetting all Totalizers’.

5-8

*

6n06

Cumulative - Base Totalizer

*

6n07

Cumulative - Premium Level 1 - Totalizer

*

6n08


*

6n09


*

6n10

Cumulative - Special Billing - Totalizer

23/27.71+ ! 05/98


Volume 4d

INFO - These 32-bit long integer variables are accessed using Modbus function code 03 for reads, 06 for single writes and 16 for multiple writes. Note that the index number for each variable refers to one complete long integer which occupies the space of two 16-bit registers. It must be accessed as a complete unit. You cannot read or write a partial 32-bit integer. Each 32-bit long integer counts as one point in the normal Omni Modbus mode.


5.4.3.

MSCF Totalizers Stored the Last 10 days for Meter and Station

*

6n11

Today’s - Base Totalizer

*

6n12

Today’s - Premium Level 1 - Totalizer

*

6n13


*

6n14


*

6n15

Today’s - Special Billing - Totalizer

*

6n16

Last Day’s - Base Totalizer

*

6n20

Last Day’s - Special Billing - Totalizer

*

6n21

2

nd


nd


to

to *

6n25

2

*

6n26

3 Last Day’s - Base Totalizer

rd

to Note:

rd

*

6n30

3 Last Day’s - Special Billing - Totalizer

*

6n31


*

6n35


*

6n36


*

6n40


*

6n41



th

to th

th

to th

th

to th

*

6n45


*

6n46


th

to *

23/27.71+ ! 05/98

6n50

th


5-9

Chapter 5

32-Bit Integer Data (5001- 6999) *


6n51

th


to th

*

6n55


*

6n56


th

to th

*

6n60


*

6n61


*

6n65


6n66

Reserved

Note:


th

to th

to 6n99

Reserved

6500

Reserved

to 6800

Reserved

*

6801

Station - Today’s - Base Totalizer

*

6802

Station - Today’s - Premium Level 1 - Totalizer

*

6803


*

6804


*

6805

Station - Today’s - Special Billing - Totalizer

*

6806

Station - Last Day’s - Base Totalizer

to *

6810

Station - Last Day’s - Special Billing - Totalizer

*

6811

Station - 2

nd


Station - 2

nd


to *

5-10

6815

23/27.71+ ! 05/98


Volume 4d * INFO - These 32-bit long integer variables are accessed using Modbus function code 03 for reads, 06 for single writes and 16 for multiple writes. Note that the index number for each variable refers to one complete long integer which occupies the space of two 16-bit registers. It must be accessed as a complete unit. You cannot read or write a partial 32-bit integer. Each 32-bit long integer counts as one point in the normal Omni Modbus mode.


totalizers depends upon the ‘totalizer resolution’ settings shown in the ‘Factor Setup’ menu of OmniCom. They can be only be changed via keypad entries made in the ‘Password Maintenance’ menu after ‘Resetting all Totalizers’.

rd

Station - 3 Last Day’s - Base Totalizer

to rd

*

6820

Station - 3 Last Day’s - Special Billing - Totalizer

*

6821


th

to th

*

6825


*

6826


*

6830


*

6831


*

6835


*

6836


th

to th

th

to

Note:

* The increment for all

6816

th

th

to th

*

6840


*

6841


*

6845


*

6846


th

to th

th

to th

*

6850


*

6851


th

to *

th

6855


6856

Reserved

to 7000

23/27.71+ ! 05/98

Reserved

5-11


Volume 4d

6. 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data (7001 - 8999) 6.1. INFO - These 32 Bit IEEE Floating Point variables are accessed using Modbus function code 03 for all reads, 06 for single writes or 16 for single or multiple writes. Note that the index number for each variable refers to the complete floating point variable which occupies the space of two 16- bit registers. It must be accessed as a complete unit. You cannot read or write a partial variable. Each floating point variable counts as one point in the normal Omni Modbus mode.

Digital-to-Analog Outputs 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data

Any analog output point which physically exists can be read via these point numbers. Data returned is expressed as a percentage of the output value. Only those points which physically exist and have been assigned to Modbus control by assigning zero (0) at 'D/A Out Assign' (see 2.5.9 in Volume 3) should be written to Outputs which are not assigned to Modbus control will be overwritten every 500 msec by the flow computer. Data written should be within the range of -5.00 to 110.00. 7001

Analog Output #1

to 7012

Analog Output #12

7013

Spare

to Modicon Compatible Mode - For the purpose of point count only, each IEEE float point counts as 2 registers. The starting address of the variable still applies.

7024

6.2.

Spare

User Variables 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data

Database points 7025 through 7088 have been assigned as user variables (see Volume 3). The value contained in the variable depends on the associated program statement which is evaluated every 500 msec. You may read these variables at any time. You may also write to these variables but anything you write may be overwritten by the flow computer depending on the evaluation of the statement. Leave the statement blank or simply put a comment or prompt into it to avoid having the flow computer overwrite it.

7025

User-Programmable Variable #1

to 7088

23/27.71+ ! 05/98

User-Programmable Variable #64

6-1

Chapter 6

32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data (7001- 8999)


Programmable Accumulator 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Variables

Points 7089 through 7099 are paired with Boolean Point Variables 1089 through 1099. Numeric data placed in 7089, for example, can be output as pulses by assigning a digital I/O point to 1089.

7089

Programmable Accumulator #1 Data placed into 7089 is pulse out using 1089.

to 7099

Programmable Accumulator #11 Data placed into 7099 is pulse out using 1099.

6.4. INFO - The second digit of the index number defines the number of the meter run number.

Meter Run 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data

The second digit of the index number defines the meter run number. For example: 7105 is the 'Temperature' variable for Meter Run #1. The same point for Meter Run #4 would be 7405.

INFO - Calculated averages can be either ‘flow weighted’ or ‘time weighted depending upon point number.

<

7n00

Spares

7n01

Flowrate - Gross 3

MACF/hr or m /hr. Notes:

<

7n02

< Current live values which are updated every 500msec.

* Current values in use now.

Flowrate - Net 3

MSCF/hr or m /hr.

<

7n03

Flowrate - Mass

<

7n04

Flowrate - Energy

Klb/hr or ton/hr. MMBTU/hr or GJ/hr.

*

7n05

Temperature

*

7n06

Pressure

*

7n07

Density in Use 3

Lb/ACF or kg/m .

*

7n08

Flowing Transducer Density Before Factoring

*

7n09

Flowing Transducer Density After Factoring

Temperature and pressure corrected. 7n09=7n08 x 7n43.

*

7n10

Density Transducer Temperature

*

7n11

Density Transducer Pressure

Corrects for transducer temperature expansion effects. Corrects for transducer pressure expansion effects.

6-2

23/27.71+ ! 05/98


Volume 4d

INFO - These 32 Bit IEEE Floating Point variables are accessed using Modbus function code 03 for all reads, 06 for single writes or 16 for single or multiple writes. Note that the index number for each variable refers to the complete floating point variable which occupies the space of two 16- bit registers. It must be accessed as a complete unit. You cannot read or write a partial variable. Each floating point variable counts as one point in the normal Omni Modbus mode.

*

7n12

Orifice - Diameter

*

7n13

Orifice - Flow Coefficient C

*

7n14

Orifice - Expansion Factor Y

*

7n15

Orifice - Velocity of Approach Factor EV

AGA 3 Coefficient. AGA 3 Coefficient. AGA 3 Coefficient.

*

7n16

Orifice - Differential Pressure

*

7n17

Meter Tube Diameter

Inches of Water (kpa or millbar). Temperature corrected.

#

Modicon Compatible Mode - For the purpose of point count only, each IEEE float point counts as 2 registers. The starting address of the variable still applies.

Notes:

* Current values in use now.

# When orifice metering is #

~ The data in these variables may be calculated real time or the same data as entered elsewhere depending on the fluid type selected or the equation of state selected.

Batch In Progress - Average Meter Run Temperature

7n19

Batch In Progress - Average Meter Run Pressure

7n20

Batch In Progress - Average of Density in Use

7n21

Batch In Progress - Average Density Transducer Temperature

7n22

Batch In Progress - Average Density Transducer Pressure

7n23

Batch In Progress - Flow Coefficient C

7n24

Batch In Progress - Expansion Factor Y

7n25

Batch In Progress - Velocity of Approach Factor EV

7n26

Batch In Progress - Orifice Diameter

7n27

Batch In Progress - Orifice Differential Pressure

7n28

Day In Progress - Velocity of Approach Factor EV

7n29

Day In Progress - Average Temperature

Temperature corrected.

#

selected, these variables are the average of the square rooted value which is then squared before storing.

7n18

7n30

Day In Progress - Average Pressure

7n31

Day In Progress - Average Density in Use

7n32

Day In Progress - Average Density Transducer Temperature

7n33

Day In Progress - Average Density Transducer Pressure

7n34

Day In Progress - Flow Coefficient C

7n35

Day In Progress - Expansion Factor Y

7n36

Day In Progress - Orifice Diameter

7n37

Day In Progress - Orifice Differential Pressure

Temperature corrected.

#

* ~ 7n38

Reference Density being Used to Calculate Net 3

3

Lb/ft or Kg/m (NIST, ASME calculations).

* ~ 7n39

Viscosity being Used in AGA3 Centi poise (pa.s).

23/27.71+ ! 05/98

* ~ 7n40

Isentropic Exponent being Used in AGA3

*

7n41

Ref. Specific Gravity being Used in AGA 8

*

7n42

Heating Value being Used in AGA 8

6-3

Chapter 6

32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data (7001- 8999) 7n43

Viscosity Override

7n44

Isentropic Override

7n45

Measured Orifice Diameter - @ Reference Temperature

7n46

Orifice Plate - Coefficient of Thermal Expansion

7n47

Orifice Plate - Reference Temperature

7n48

Measured Meter Tube Diameter - @ Reference Temperature

7n49

Meter Tube - Coefficient of Thermal Expansion

7n50

Meter Tube - Reference Temperature

7n51

Differential Pressure - Low Cutoff

Centi poise (pa.s). Application Revisions 23.71+ & 27.71+ - This database corresponds to Application Revisions 23.71/27.71 for Orifice/Turbine Gas Flow Metering Systems. Both US and metric unit versions are considered.

INFO - The second digit of the index number defines the number of the meter run number.

Inches of Water (kpa or millbar). 1n05 is set when DP above this.

7n52

Differential Pressure - Low Limit

7n53

Differential Pressure - High Limit

7n54

Differential Pressure - Override Value

7n55

Low Range - Differential Pressure - @ 4mA

7n56

Low Range - Differential Pressure - @ 20mA

7n57

High Range - Differential Pressure - @ 4mA nd

2

DP when using stacked DPs.

7n58

High Range - Differential Pressure - @ 20mA

7n59

Differential Pressure - High Switch Over %

7n60

Differential Pressure - Low Switch Over %

Use High DP if Low DP is greater than this %. Use Low DP if High DP is less than this %.

7n61

Meter Run Mass Flowrate - Low Limit

7n62

Meter Run Mass Flowrate - High Limit

7n63

Meter Temperature - Low Limit

7n64

Meter Temperature - High Limit

7n65

Meter Temperature - Override

7n66

Meter Temperature - @ 4mA

7n67

Meter Temperature - @ 20mA

7n68

Meter Pressure - Low Limit

to 7n72

6-4

Meter Pressure - @ 20mA

23/27.71+ ! 05/98


Volume 4d 7n73


Gravity / Density Transducer - Low Limit Indicated at either flowing or reference conditions, depending on which is selected.


to 7n77

Gravity / Density Transducer - @ 20mA

7n78

Density Transducer - Temperature - Low Limit

to 7n82

Density Transducer - Temperature - @ 20mA

7n83

Density Transducer - Pressure - Low Limit

to 7n87

Density Transducer - Pressure - @ 20mA

7n88

Density Transducer - Correction Factor Used to correct densitometer.

*

7n89

Densitometer - Constant #1

*

7n90


*

7n91


K0/D0. Note:

* Various factors used by various vendors of digital densitometers.

K1/T0. K2/Tcoef.

*

7n92


*

7n93


*

7n94


*

7n95


K18/Tcal/Tc. K19/Pcoef/Kt1. K20A/Pcal/Kt2. K20B/Kt3.

*

7n96


*

7n97


*

7n98


*

7n99


K21A/Pc. K21B/Kp1. Kr. (For UGC densitometers: Kr/KP2.) Kj. (For UGC densitometers: Kj/KP3.)

7500

23/27.71+ ! 05/98

Spare

6-5

Chapter 6



Scratch Pad 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data

Ninety-nine IEEE 32-bit floating point registers are provided for user scratch pad. These registers are typically used to store and group data that will be moved via peer-to-peer operations or similar uses.

7501

Scratchpad - IEEE Float #1

to 7599

Scratchpad - IEEE Float #99

7600

Spare

Notes:

+ Do not write to these variables. They are provided for read only information.

> Writing to these variables will have no effect as the flow computer overwrites these values with either the remote or local primary Setpoint value depending on the operating mode of the control loop.

~ Only writes made while in the 'Remote' mode will be meaningful. These variables are overwritten with the current value of the primary controlled variable when in all other modes.

^ Only writes made while in the 'Manual' mode will be meaningful. These variables are overwritten by the flow computer in all other operating modes.

< Writes to these variables are always accepted.

6-6

6.6.

PID Control 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data

+

7601

PID Control #1 - Local Primary Variable Setpoint Value

>

7602

PID Control #1 - Primary Setpoint Value in Use

~

7603

PID Control #1 - Remote Primary Setpoint Value

^

7604

PID Control #1 - Control Output Percent

<

7605

PID Control #1 - Secondary Variable Setpoint

+

7606


>

7607


~

7608


^

7609


<

7610


+

7611


>

7612


~

7613


^

7614


<

7615


+

7616


>

7617


~

7618


^

7619


<

7620


23/27.71+ ! 05/98


Volume 4d 7621 Spare INFO - These 32 Bit IEEE Floating Point variables are accessed using Modbus function code 03 for all reads, 06 for single writes or 16 for single or multiple writes. Note that the index number for each variable refers to the complete floating point variable which occupies the space of two 16- bit registers. It must be accessed as a complete unit. You cannot read or write a partial variable. Each floating point variable counts as one point in the normal Omni Modbus mode.

to 7623 Spare

6.7.

7624

Miscellaneous Meter Run 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data Equation of State - Velocity of Sound - Meter Run #1 Points 7624 - 7627 are current live values.


7625

Equation of State - Velocity of Sound - Meter Run #2

7626


7627


7628

Spare

7629

Equation of State - Heating Value - Meter Run #1

7630


7631


7632


7633

Spare

7634

Meter Run #1 - Temperature @ Leak Detect Freeze Command

Current live values.

INFO - See 7n01 through 7n99 for more meter run related data.

Notes:

* These variables represent the incremental flow which is accumulated each 500 msec. calculation cycle in float format (also see points 5n70 for integer format).

#

See 1760 command.

#

7635

Meter Run #1 - Pressure @ Leak Detection Freeze Command

#

7636

Meter Run #1 - Density / Gravity @ Leak Detect Freeze Command

7637

Spare

# Flowing variables are snapshot and stored here when the Leak Detection Freeze command (1760) is received (also see points 5n66).

23/27.71+ ! 05/98

to 7639

Spare

*

7640

Meter Run #1 - Gross Volume Increment

*

7641

Meter Run #1 - Net Increment Volume

*

7642

Meter Run #1 - Mass Increment

*

7643

Meter Run #1 - Energy Increment

#

7644

Meter Run #2 - Temperature @ Freeze Command

#

7645

Meter Run #2 - Pressure @ Freeze Command

#

7646

Meter Run #2 - Density / Gravity @ Freeze Command

6-7

Chapter 6

32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data (7001- 8999) 7647



Notes:

Spare

to 7649

Spare

*

7650


*

7651

Meter Run #2 - Net Volume Increment

*

7652


*

7653


#

7654


#

7655


#

7656


7657

Spare

* These variables represent the incremental flow which is accumulated each 500 msec. calculation cycle in float format (also see points 5n70 for integer format).

to 7659

Spare

# Flowing variables are snapshot and stored here when the Leak Detection Freeze command (1760) is received (also see points 5n66).

*

7660


*

7661


*

7662


*

7663


#

7664


#

7665


#

7666


7667

Spare

to

6-8

7669

Spare

*

7670


*

7671


*

7672


*

7673


#

7674

Station - Temperature @ Freeze Command

#

7675

Station - Pressure @ Freeze Command

#

7676

Station - Density / Gravity @ Freeze Command

23/27.71+ ! 05/98




Spare

to 7679

Spare

*

7680

Station - Gross Volume Increment

*

7681

Station - Net Volume Increment

*

7682

Station - Mass Volume Increment

*

7683

Station - Energy Volume Increment

7684

Spare

to 7700

6.8. INFO - The data is only meaningful when the input channel is used as an analog input or a Honeywell digital transducer input. For pulse type input channels see data points located at 15131 through 15154.

Spare

Miscellaneous Variables 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data

The percentage of span for each of the 24 process input channels is available as a floating point variable point. 7701

Process Input - Channel # 1

to 7724

Process Input - Channel # 24

7725

Spare

to 7800

23/27.71+ ! 05/98

Spare

6-9

Chapter 6


6.9. INFO - These 32 Bit IEEE Floating Point variables are accessed using Modbus function code 03 for all reads, 06 for single writes or 16 for single or multiple writes. Note that the index number for each variable refers to the complete floating point variable which occupies the space of two 16- bit registers. It must be accessed as a complete unit. You cannot read or write a partial variable. Each floating point variable counts as one point in the normal Omni Modbus mode.

7801

Meter Station 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data Station - Gross Flowrate 3

MACF/hr or m /hr.

7802

Station - Net Flowrate 3

MSCF/hr or m /hr.

7803

Station - Mass Flowrate

7804

Station - Energy Flowrate

Klbs/hr or ton/hr. MMBTU/hr or GJ/hr.

7805

Reference Specific Gravity

7806

Nitrogen

7807

Carbon Dioxide

Live transducer value, if available. Live transducer value, if available. Live transducer value, if available.

7808 Modicon Compatible Mode - For the purpose of point count only, each IEEE float point counts as 2 registers. The starting address of the variable still applies.

Heating Value

3

Live calorimeter value (BTU/SCF or MJ/m ).

7809

Auxiliary Input #1 Points 7809-7812 represent miscellaneous live input signals provided for user-defined functions.

7810

Auxiliary Input #2

7811

Auxiliary Input #3

7812

Auxiliary Input #4

7813

Time - hhmmss Read only (e.g.: the number 103125 represents 10:31:25).

7814

Date - yymmdd Read only (e.g.: the number 970527 represents May 27/ 97; the date format used here does not follow the US/European format selection).

7815

Danalyzer – Non-Normalized Total Mol % Point 7038 in gas chromatograph. Sum of components.

7816

Spare

7817

Density K0 Value

7818

Density K2 Value

This point is used for Solartron 3096 relative density device. This point is used for Solartron 3096 relative density device.

7819

Spare

to 7821

6-10

Spare

23/27.71+ ! 05/98


Volume 4d


7822

Product #1 - Reference Density

7823

Spare

7824


7825

Spare

7826


7827

Spare

7828


7829

Spare

to 7848

Spare

Note:

*

7849

Solartron 3096 - Reference Specific Gravity of Gas ‘x’ Type (Gx)

* Solartron 3096

*

7850

Solartron 3096 - Period Time - Gas ‘x’ Type (Tx)

*

7851

Solartron 3096 - Reference Specific Gravity of Gas ‘y’ Type (Gy)

*

7852

Solartron 3096 - Period Time - Gas ‘y’ Type (Ty)

7853

Mass Flowrate - Low Limit

Gravitometer Factors.

Indicates flow rate low limit in mass units.

7854

Mass Flowrate - High Limit Indicates flow rate high limit in mass units.

7855

Spare

to 7860

23/27.71+ ! 05/98

Spare

6-11

Chapter 6


Reference Specific Gravity - Low Limit Points 7861-7863 are configuration settings used when the reference SG is a live input.


7862

Reference Specific Gravity - High Limit

7863

Reference Specific Gravity - Override

7864

Reference Specific Gravity - @ 4mA

7865

Reference Specific Gravity - @ 20mA

7866

Nitrogen % - Low Limit

7867

Nitrogen % - High Limit

7868

Nitrogen % - Override

7869

Nitrogen % - @ 4mA

7870

Nitrogen % - @ 20mA

7871

Carbon Dioxide - Low Limit

7872

Carbon Dioxide - High Limit

7873

Carbon Dioxide - Override

7874

Carbon Dioxide - @ 4mA

7875

Carbon Dioxide - @ 20mA

7876

Spare

Points 7866-7870 are configuration settings used when the % N2 is a live 4-20 mA.

Points 7871-7875 are configuration settings used when the CO2 is a live 4-20 mA.


to 7887

Spare

7888

Cubic Feet to Gallon - Conversion Factor

7889

Spare

#

7890

Contract Base - Density of Air

#

7891

Local Atmospheric Pressure

#

7892

Contract Base - Temperature

#

7893

Gram/cc to lb/ft - Conversion Factor

#

7894

Contract Base - Pressure

# Note:

# Miscellaneous conversion factors and constants.

6-12

3

23/27.71+ ! 05/98



Heating Value - Low Limit Points 7895-7899 are configuration settings used when the calorimeter input is a live 3 4-20 mA (US customary units are BTU/SCF; metric units are MJ/m ).

7896

Heating Value - Low Limit

7897


7898


7899


7900

Spare

to 8500

23/27.71+ ! 05/98

Spare

6-13

Chapter 6


6.10. Miscellaneous Meter Run 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data INFO - These 32 Bit IEEE Floating Point variables are accessed using Modbus function code 03 for all reads, 06 for single writes or 16 for single or multiple writes. Note that the index number for each variable refers to the complete floating point variable which occupies the space of two 16- bit registers. It must be accessed as a complete unit. You cannot read or write a partial variable. Each floating point variable counts as one point in the normal Omni Modbus mode.


The following data refers to Meter Run #1. The same data is available for all meter runs at the following addresses: ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏

Meter Run #1 Meter Run #2 Meter Run #3 Meter Run #4

@ @ @ @

8501 8601 8701 8801

through through through through

8599 8699 8799 8899

6.10.1. Previous Batch Average 8501

Previous Batch - Average Temperature

8502

Previous Batch - Average Pressure

8503

Previous Batch - Average Density

8504

Previous Batch - Average Differential Pressure or Turbine Pulses Depends on setup.

8505

Previous Batch - Average Velocity Factor (Ev) or Turbine K Factor

8506

Previous Batch - Average Orifice Coefficient (Cd) or Turbine Meter Factor

8507

Previous Batch - Average Expansion Factor (Y)

8508

Previous Batch - Average Orifice Bore Diameter

Depends on setup.

Depends on setup. Previous Batch Average Refers to data stored at the time of the last Batch End command. It will remain valid until the next batch end. This is the data that should be used by SCADA or MMIs to build Monthly or Batch Reports.

8509

Previous Batch - Average Density Temperature

8510

Previous Batch - Average Density Pressure

8511

Previous Batch - Average Density Correction Factor

8512

Previous Batch - Average Mol % Nitrogen

8513

Previous Batch - Average Mol % Carbon Dioxide

8514

Previous Batch - Average Reference Specific Gravity

8515

Previous Batch - Average Heating Value

8516

Previous Batch - Average Extension Factor or Gross Volume Square root (DP x Density); or turbine meter gross flow.

8517

Previous Batch - Average Combined Flow Factor Cd x Ev x Y.

6-14

8518

Spare

8519

Spare

23/27.71+ ! 05/98


Volume 4d

6.10.2. Previous Hour’s Average Application Revisions 23.71+ & 27.71+ - This database corresponds to Application Revisions 23.71/27.71 for Orifice/Turbine Gas Flow Metering Systems. Both US and metric unit versions are considered.

Previous Hour’s Average Refers to data stored at the end of the last hour. It is valid for one hour and is then overwritten. This is the data that should be used by SCADA or MMIs which need hourly averages.

8520

Previous Hour’s - Average Temperature

8521

Previous Hour’s - Average Pressure

8522

Previous Hour’s - Average Differential Pressure or Raw Turbine Counts

8523

Previous Hour’s - Average Density in Use

8524

Previous Hour’s - Average Mol % Nitrogen

8525

Previous Hour’s - Average Mol % Carbon Dioxide

8526

Previous Hour’s - Average Reference Specific Gravity

8527

Previous Hour’s - Average Heating Value

8528

Previous Hour’s - Average Extension Factor or Gross Volume Square root (DP x Density); or turbine meter gross flow.

8529

Previous Hour’s - Average Combined Flow Factor Cd x Ev x Y.

8530

Previous Hour’s - Average K Factor Average of curve.

Previous Day’s Average Refers to data stored at the end of the contract day. It is valid for 24 hours and overwritten at the ‘day start hour’. This is the data that should be used by SCADA or MMIs to build daily reports.

6.10.3. Previous Day’s Average 8531

Previous Day’s - Average Temperature

8532

Previous Day’s - Average Pressure

8533

Previous Day’s - Average Density

8534

Previous Day’s - Average Differential Pressure or Turbine Pulses

8535

Previous Day’s - Average Velocity Factor (Ev) or Turbine K Factor

8536

Previous Day’s - Average Orifice Coefficient (Cd) or Turbine Meter Factor

8537

Previous Day’s - Average Expansion Factor (Y)

Depends on setup. Depends on setup.

Depends on setup.

8538

Previous Day’s - Average Orifice Bore Diameter

8539

Previous Day’s - Average Density Temperature

8540

Previous Day’s - Average Density Pressure

8541

Previous Day’s - Average Density Correction Factor

8542

Previous Day’s - Average Mol % Nitrogen

8543

Previous Day’s - Average Mol % Carbon Dioxide

8544

Previous Day’s - Average Reference Specific Gravity

8545

Previous Day’s - Average Heating Value

8546

Previous Day’s - Average Extension Factor or Gross Volume

8547

Previous Day’s - Average Combined Flow Factor

Square root (DP x Density); or turbine meter gross flow. Cd x Ev x Y.

23/27.71+ ! 05/98

6-15

Chapter 6



INFO - The indicated data (8501-8599) refers to Meter Run #1. The same data is available for all meter runs at the following addresses: Meter Run #1: 8501 through 8599 Meter Run #2: 8601 through 8699 Meter Run #3: 8701 through 8799 Meter Run #4: 8801 through 8899

Note: See 5n50 and 5850 for matching totalizer data.

6-16


Current AGA 8 - Compressibility Factor

8549

Previous Day’s - Gross in Float Format

8550

Previous Day’s - Net in Float Format

MACF. MSCF.

8551

Previous Day’s - Mass in Float Format KLbs.

6.10.4. Live Calculated Data (Information Only) 8552

Previous Day’s - Energy in Float Format

8553

Current AGA 8 - FPV Factor

MMBTU.

6.10.5. Statistical Moving Window Averages of Transducer Inputs 8554

Moving Hour - Transducer Input - Differential Pressure Low Range

8555

Moving Hour - Transducer Input - Differential Pressure High Range

8556

Moving Hour - Transducer Input - Average Temperature

8557

Moving Hour - Transducer Input - Average Pressure

8558

Moving Hour - Transducer Input - Average Density

8559

Moving Hour - Transducer Input - Average Density Temperature

8560

Moving Hour - Transducer Input - Average Density Pressure

6.10.6. Miscellaneous In Progress Averages 8561

In Progress - Batch Average - Density Correction Factor

8562

In Progress - Daily Average - Density Correction Factor

8563

In Progress - Hourly - Average - Water Vapor Factor (FWV)

8564

In Progress - Daily - Average - Water Vapor Factor (FWV)

8565

Previous - Hourly Average - Water Vapor Factor (FWV)

8566

Previous - Daily Average - Water Vapor Factor (FWV)

8567

Specific Gravity in Use

8568

Heating Value in Use

8569

Spare

23/27.71+ ! 05/98


Volume 4d

6.10.7. More Miscellaneous In Progress Averages Application Revisions 23.71+ & 27.71+ - This database corresponds to Application Revisions 23.71/27.71 for Orifice/Turbine Gas Flow Metering Systems. Both US and metric unit versions are considered.

8570

In Progress - Hourly Average - Temperature

8571

In Progress - Hourly Average - Pressure

8572

In Progress - Hourly Average - Differential Pressure or Raw Turbine Counts

8573

In Progress - Hourly Average - Density in Use

8574

In Progress - Hourly Average - Mol % Nitrogen

8575

In Progress - Hourly Average - Mol % Carbon Dioxide

8576

In Progress - Hourly Average - Reference Specific Gravity

8577

In Progress - Hourly Average - Heating Value

8578

In Progress - Batch Average - Mol % Nitrogen

8579

In Progress - Batch Average - Mol % Carbon Dioxide

8580

In Progress - Batch Average - Reference Specific Gravity

8581

In Progress - Batch Average - Heating Value

8582

In Progress - Daily Average - Nitrogen

8583

In Progress - Daily Average - Carbon Dioxide

8584

In Progress - Daily Average - Reference Specific Gravity

8585

In Progress - Daily Average - Heating Value

6.10.8. Previous Batch Quantities Previous Batch Quantities - Refers to data stored at the time of the last ‘Batch End’ command. It will remain valid until the next batch end. These variables are floating point duplicates of integer data at 5n50 area. These points are for MMI or SCADA retrieval, not for Batch Recalculation.

8586

Previous Batch - Gross in Float Format

8587

Previous Batch - Net in Float Format

8588

Previous Batch - Mass in Float Format

MACF. MSCF. KLbs.

8589

Previous Batch - Energy in Float Format MMBTU.

Note: See 8501 area for other Previous Batch data.

23/27.71+ ! 05/98

6-17

Chapter 6


6.10.9. Miscellaneous Live or Calculated Data INFO - These 32 Bit IEEE Floating Point variables are accessed using Modbus function code 03 for all reads, 06 for single writes or 16 for single or multiple writes. Note that the index number for each variable refers to the complete floating point variable which occupies the space of two 16- bit registers. It must be accessed as a complete unit. You cannot read or write a partial variable. Each floating point variable counts as one point in the normal Omni Modbus mode.

8590

Dry BTU in Use from Gas Chromatograph

8591

Reference Density in Use Calculated by AGA 8.

8592

Water Content in Use

8593

Upstream Temperature in Use

8594

Upstream Pressure in Use

8595

Differential Pressure Low Range in Use

Calculated value or override value. Calculated if transducer is located downstream. Calculated if transducer is located downstream. One of theses variables (8595 or 8596) is moved to 7n16 depending upon which of the transducers is selected.

8596

Differential Pressure High Range in Use

8597

Water Vapor Factor (FWV) in Use

8598

K Factor in Use Interpolated from curve.


INFO - The indicated data (8501-8599) refers to Meter Run #1. The same data is available for all meter runs at the following addresses: Meter Run #1: 8501 through 8599 Meter Run #2: 8601 through 8699 Meter Run #3: 8701 through 8799 Meter Run #4: 8801 through 8899

Weighted Averages ‘Time Weighted’ or ‘Flow Weighted’ averages can be selected on a global basis (see point 13394).

8599

Calculated Flowing Density in Use

8700

Spare

8601

Meter 2 - Miscellaneous 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data

to 8699


8700

Spare

8701


to 8799


8800

Spare

8801


to 8899

6-18


23/27.71+ ! 05/98


Volume 4d 8900

Spare

to 8948

Spare

6.10.10. Station Previous Batch Average Data 8949

Station - Previous Daily - Gross in Float Format

8950

Station - Previous Daily - Net in Float Format

8951

Station - Previous Daily - Mass in Float Format

8952

Station - Previous Daily - Energy in Float Format

8953

Spare

to 8985

Spare

8986

Station - Previous Batch - Gross in Float Format

8987

Station - Previous Batch - Net in Float Format

8988

Station - Previous Batch - Mass in Float Format

8989

Station - Previous Batch - Energy in Float Format

8990

Spare

to 9000

23/27.71+ ! 05/98

Spare

6-19


Volume 4d

7. ASCII Text Data Buffers (9001 - 9499) 7.1. Application Revisions 23.71+ & 27.71+ - This database corresponds to Application Revisions 23.71/27.71 for Orifice/Turbine Gas Flow Metering Systems. Both US and metric unit versions are considered.

INFO - These ASCII text buffers are accessed using Modbus function codes 65 for reads and 66 for writes. The index number for each 9000 type variable refers to the complete text buffer which may be as big as 8192 bytes. Data is transmitted or received as multiple transmissions of 128 byte packets (see Chapter 6)

Custom Report Templates

These are ASCII text files which serve as a format template for certain printed reports. 9001

Report Template - Snapshot / Interval

9002

Report Template - Batch

9003

Report Template - Daily

9004

Spare

to 9100

7.2.

Spare

Previous Batch Reports

Copies of the last 8 Batch Reports are stored. 9101

Batch Report - Last

9102

Batch Report - 2

9103

Batch Report - 3 Last

9104


9105


9106


9107


9108


9109

Spare

nd

Last

rd th th th th th

to 9300

23/27.71+ ! 05/98

Spare

7-1

Chapter 7

ASCII Text Data Buffers (9001- 9499)

7.3. INFO - These ASCII text buffers are accessed using Modbus function codes 65 for reads and 66 for writes. The index number for each 9000 type variable refers to the complete text buffer which may be as big as 8192 bytes. Data is transmitted or received as multiple transmissions of 128 byte packets (see Chapter 6)

Previous Daily Reports

Copies of the last 8 Daily Reports are stores 9301

Previous Day’s Report - Last

9302

Previous Day’s Report - 2

nd

Last

rd

9303

Previous Day’s Report - 3 Last

9304


9305


9306


9307


9308


9309

Spare

th th th th th

to 9400

Spare

7.4.

Last Snapshot Report

9401

Last Local Snapshot / Interval Report

7.5.

Miscellaneous Report Buffer

The following buffer is used to retrieve miscellaneous reports. Report data is loaded into this buffer depending on which bit is written to integer point 15129. Reports which are retrieved using this buffer are: ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏

Current Snapshot Report Alarm Report Audit Trail Report Status Report Product File Report

Text Archive Data defined by integers 15127 and 15128 is also retrieved using this buffer. 9402

9403

Miscellaneous Report Buffer

Spare

to 13000

7-2

Spare

23/27.71+ ! 05/98


Volume 4d

8. Flow Computer Configuration Data (13001 18999) !

CAUTION!

!

Flow computer configuration data is especially critical to the correct operation of the flow computer. Any modifications to this data while operating the flow computer could cause unpredictable results which could cause measurement or control errors. Users are encouraged to consult with Omni Flow Computers, Inc. before manipulating configuration data directly via a serial port or programmable variable statements.


The following data is especially critical to the correct operation of the flow computer. Any modifications to this data while operating the flow computer could cause unpredictable results which could cause measurement or control errors. Users are encouraged to consult with Omni before manipulating configuration data directly via a serial port or programmable variable statements.

8.1.

8.1.1.

Flow Computer Configuration 16-Bit Integer Data Meter Run Configuration Data

13001

Meter Run #1 - Flow I/O Point

13002

Meter Run #1 - Temperature I/O Point

13003

Meter Run #1 - Temperature Type

13004

Meter Run #1 - Pressure I/O Point

13005

Meter Run #1 - Density I/O Point

13006

Meter Run #1 - Density Type

13007

Meter Run #1 - Density Temperature I/O Point

13008

Meter Run #1 - Density Temperature Type

13009

Meter Run #1 - Density Press I/O Point

13010

Meter Run #1 - Density @ Reference Conditions

13011

Meter Run #1 - Differential Pressure Low Range I/O Point

13012

Meter Run #1 - Differential Pressure High Range I/O Point

13013

Meter Run #1 - Flowmeter Dual Pulse Fidelity

0=DIN RTD; 1=Amer RTD; 2=4-20mA/Honeywell.

1=API; 2=SG; 3=gr/cc; 4=Solartron; 5=Sarasota; 6=UGC. Application Revisions 23.71+ & 27.71+ - This database corresponds to Application Revisions 23.71/27.71 for Orifice/Turbine Gas Flow Metering Systems. Both US and metric unit versions are considered.

0=DIN RTD; 1=Amer RTD; 2=4-20mA/Honeywell.

0=Flowing; 1=Reference.

0=No; 1=Yes.

23/27.71+ ! 05/98

8-1

Chapter 8

Flow Computer Configuration Data (13001- 18999) 13014

!

CAUTION!

!




to 13026


13027


to 13039


13040


to 13052


13053

Reference Specific Gravity I/O Point

13054

Reference Specific Gravity Type 1=4-20mA; 2=Solartron 3096.

13055

Nitrogen I/O Point

13056

Spare

13057

Carbon Dioxide I/O Point

13058

Heating Value I/O Point

13059

Spare

to 13073

8-2

Spare

23/27.71+ ! 05/98


Volume 4d


General Flow Computer Configuration 16-Bit Integer Data

13074

Flow Computer Type

13075

Number of A Combo Modules Installed

13076

Number of B Combo Modules Installed

0=3000; 1=6000.

13077

Number of C Combo Modules Installed

13078

Number of Digital Modules Installed

13079

Number of Serial Modules Installed

13080

Number of E Combo Modules Installed

13081

Number of H Combo Modules Installed

13082

Number of ED Combo Modules Installed

13083

Spare

13084

Spare

8.1.3.

Serial Port Configuration 16-Bit Integer Data

13085

Serial Port #1 - Port Type

13086

Serial Port - ID

0=Printer; 1=Modbus. Read only point which reports back the number of the port you are connected to.

13087

Serial Port #1 - Baud Rate 1200-38400 bps.

13088

Serial Port #1 - Data Bits

13089

Serial Port #1 - Stop Bits

13090

Serial Port #1 - Parity

7 or 8. 0, 1 or 2. O, E, N.

13091

Serial Port #1 - Transmit Key Delay 0=0hms; 1=50 msec; 2=100 msec; 3=150 msec.

13092

Serial Port #1 - Modbus ID

13093

Serial Port #1 - Protocol Type

13094

Serial Port #1 - Enable CRC Checking

13095

Serial Port #1 - Modicon Compatible

0-247. 0=RTU; 1=ASCII; 2=RTU Modem. 0=No CRC, 1=CRC check. 0=Omni Mode; 1=Modicon 984 Mode.

23/27.71+ ! 05/98

8-3

Chapter 8

!

CAUTION!

Flow Computer Configuration Data (13001- 18999)

!



13096

Serial Port #2 - Baud Rate

13097


13098


13099


13100

Serial Port #2 - Transmit Key Delay

13101

Serial Port #2 - Modbus ID

13102

Serial Port #2 - Modbus Mode RTU / ASCII

13103


13104

Serial Port #2 - Modicon Compatible 0=Omni; 1=Modicon 984 compatible.

13105

Spare

to 13107

Spare

13108


13109


13110


13111


13112

Serial Port #3 - Transmit Delay

13113

Serial Port #3 - Modbus or Node ID

13114

Serial Port #3 - Protocol Type 0=Modbus RTU; 1=Modbus ASCII; 2=Modbus RTU Modem (Relaxed Timing); 3=Applied Automation Gas Chromatograph; 4=Danalyzer RTU; 5=Danalyzer ASCII.

13115


13116

Serial Port #3 - Modicon Compatible 0=Omni; 1=984 compatible.

13117

Spare

to 13119

Spare

13120


13121


13122


13123


13124

Serial Port #4 - Transmit Delay

13125


13126

Serial Port #4 - Modbus or Node ID

13127

Serial Port #4 - Protocol Type 0=Modbus RTU; 1=Modbus ASCII; 2=Modbus RTU Modem (Relaxed Timing); 3=Allen-Bradley Full Duplex DF1; 4=Allen-Bradley Half Duplex.

13128

Serial Port #4 - Modicon Compatible 0=Omni, 1=984 compatible. If Allen-Bradley Protocol selected above: 0=CRC; 1=BCC error checking.

8-4

23/27.71+ ! 05/98


Volume 4d


Proportional Integral Derivative (PID) Configuration 16-Bit Integer Data

13129

PID Loop #1 - I/O Point Assignment - Remote Setpoint

13130

PID Loop #1 - Primary Variable

13131

PID Loop #1 - Secondary Variable

13132

PID Loop #1 - Primary Action

13133

PID Loop #1 - Secondary Action

13134

PID Loop #1 - Error Select

0=Forward; 1=Reverse. 0=Forward; 1=Reverse. 0=Low; 1=High.

13135

PID Loop #1 - Startup Mode 0=Last state; 1=Manual.

13136


to 13142

PID Loop #2 - Startup Mode

13143


to 13149


13150


to

23/27.71+ ! 05/98

13156


13157

I/O Point Assignment - Auxiliary Input #1

13158


13159


13160


8-5

Chapter 8


8.1.5. !

CAUTION!

Programmable Logic Controller Configuration 16Bit Integer Data

!



13161

PLC Group #1 - Starting Address

13162

PLC Group #1 - Index 1

13163

PLC Group #1 - Number of Points 1

Allen-Bradley PLC-2 Translation Tables.

13164


13165


13166


13167


13168


13169


13170


13171


13172


13173


13174


13175


13176


13177


13178


13179


13180


13181


13182


13183


13184


13185


13186


13187


13188


13189


13190


13191


13192


13193


13194


13195


to

8-6

13225


13226


23/27.71+ ! 05/98


Volume 4d


13227


13228


to 13258


13259


13260


13261


to 13271


13272


13273


13274


to 13284


13285


13286

Spare

to 13292

Spare

13293

Input Type - Auxiliary Input #1

13294


13295


13296


13297

Spare

For points 13293-13296: 0=DIN; 1=Amer; 2=4-20mA.

to 13299

23/27.71+ ! 05/98

Spare

8-7

Chapter 8


8.1.6. !

CAUTION!

Peer-to-Peer Setup Entries 16-Bit Integer Data

!


13300

Current Master ID

13301

Reserved Register

Real-time. Shows current peer-to-peer master. Debug only.

13302

Transaction #1 - Slave ID

13303

Transaction #1 - Read / Write

13304

Transaction #1 - Source Index

13305

Transaction #1 - Number of Points

13306

Transaction #1 - Destination Index

13307


to INFO - These short integers are accessed using Modbus function code 03 for reads, 06 for single writes and 16 for multiple register writes.

13311


13312


to 13316


13317


to 13321


13322


to 13326


13327


to 13331


13332


to 13336

8-8


23/27.71+ ! 05/98




to 13341


13342


to 13346


13347


to 13351


13352


to 13356


13357


to 13361


13362


to 13366


13367


to 13371


13372


to 13376


13377


to 13381

23/27.71+ ! 05/98


8-9

Chapter 8

!

CAUTION!


!



13382

Next Master ID

13383

Last Master ID In Sequence

13384

Retry Timer

A non zero entry here turns on peer-to-peer mode.

Number of 50 msec ticks between retries; default=3.

13385

Activate Redundancy Mode 0=single unit; 1=dual flow computer system.

13386

Number of Decimal Places for Gross Totalizer

13387

Number of Decimal Places for Net Totalizer

13388

Number of Decimal Places for Mass Totalizer

13389

Number of Decimal Places for Energy Totalizer

13390

Spare

to 13393

Spare

13394

Select Averaging Method 0=Time weighted; 1=Flow weighted.

13395

Spare

13396

Override Code - Auxiliary Input #1

13397


13398


13399


13400

Meter Run #1 - Differential Pressure Low Range Damping Factor

13401

Meter Run #1 - Differential Pressure High Range Damping Factor

13402

Meter Run #1 - Temperature Damping Factor

13403

Meter Run #1 - Pressure Damping Factor

13404

Meter Run #1 - Density Temperature Damping Factor

13405

Meter Run #1 - Density Pressure Damping Factor

13406


to 13411

Meter Run #2 - Density Press Damping Factor

13412


to 13417

8-10


23/27.71+ ! 05/98




to 13423


13424

Spare

to 13432

Spare

13433

Auxiliary Input #1 - Damping Factor

13434


13435


13436


13437

Spare

to 13461

Spare

13462

Redundancy - Master PID #1 - Valve Mode Slave keeps copy of primary unit’s settings in points 13462-13469 in case it becomes master.

13463

Redundancy - Master PID #1 - Setpoint Mode

13464

Redundancy - Master PID #2 - Valve Mode

13465


13466


13467


13468


13469


13470

Redundancy - Slave PID #1 - Valve Mode

13471

Redundancy - Slave PID #1 - Setpoint Mode

13472


13473


13474


13475


13476


13477


13478

Spare

to 13499

23/27.71+ ! 05/98

Spare

8-11

Chapter 8


8.1.7. !

CAUTION!

!



Raw Data Archive Files 16-Bit Integer Data

The following entries are used to define the record structure of each Raw Data Archive file:

13500

Archive 701 #1 - Starting Index

13501

Archive 701 #1 - Number of Points

to 13530


13531

Archive 701 #16 - Number of points

13532

Spare

to 13539

Spare

13540


13541


to 13570


13571


13572

Spare

to 13579

Spare

13580


13581


to 13610


13611


13612

Spare

to 13619

Spare

13620


13621


to

8-12

13650


13651


23/27.71+ ! 05/98



Spare

to 13659

Spare

13660


13661


to 13690


13691


13692

Spare

to 13699

Spare

13700


13701


to 13730


13731


13732

Spare

to 13739

Spare

13740


13741


to 13770


13771


13772

Spare

to 13779

Spare

13780


13781


to

23/27.71+ ! 05/98

13810


13811


8-13

Chapter 8

!

CAUTION!


!



13820


13821


to 13850


13851


13852

Spare

to 13859

Spare

13860


13861


to 13890


13891


13892

Spare

to 13899

Spare

13900

Trigger Boolean - Archive 701 Points 13900-13909 contain the point numbers of the trigger points which cause the data to be stored when the trigger goes from low to high.

13901

Trigger Boolean - Archive 702

13902


13903


13904


13905


13906


13907


13908


13909


13910

Spare

to 13919

!*

CAUTION!

Spare

!*

POTENTIAL FOR DATA LOSS! Read Archive documentation before manipulating points 13920 and 13921.

!*13920

Archive Run ? 0=Stops archiving; 1=Starts archiving.

!*13921

Reconfigure Archive? 0=No configuration allowed; 1=Configuration changes allowed.

8-14

23/27.71+ ! 05/98



Archive 711 #1 Starting Index Points 13930-13961 are dummy read-only points which show the structure of the Alarm Archive.

13931

Archive 711 #1 Number of Points

to 13960

Archive 711 #16 Starting Index

13961


13962

Archive 712 #1 Starting Index Points 13962-13993 are dummy read-only points which show the structure of the Audit Trail.

13963


to 13992

Archive 712 #16 Starting Index

13993


13994

Spare

to 14000

23/27.71+ ! 05/98

Spare

8-15

Chapter 8


8.2. !

CAUTION!

Flow Computer Configuration 16Character ASCII String Data

!


14001

Boolean Statement #1025

to 14048


14049

OmniCom - Download Serial Number & File Name

14050

OmniCom - Download PC ID

14051

Variable Statement #7025

to 14098


14099

Spare

14100

Station Total and Flowrate Definition

14101

Comment String (Remarks) - Boolean Statement #1025

to 14148

Comment String (Remarks) - Boolean Statement #1072

14149

Printer Condense Mode String Points 14149 & 14150 represent the hexadecimal ASCII version of what is actually sent to the printer.

14150

Printer Uncondensed Mode String

14151

Comment String - Variable Statement #7025

to 14198


14199

Spare

to 14200

Spare

14201


to 14216

8-16


23/27.71+ ! 05/98


Volume 4d 14217 INFO - These ASCII string variables are accessed using Modbus function codes 03 for reads, and 16 for writes. Note that the index number for each string refers to the complete string which occupies the space of eight 16-bit registers. It must be accessed as a complete unit. You cannot read or write a partial string. Each string counts as one point in the normal Omni Modbus mode.

Modicon Compatible Mode - For the purposes of point count only, each string counts as 8 registers. The starting address of the string still applies.

Spare

to 14220

Spare

14221


to 14236


14237

Spare

to 14240

Spare

14241

Comment String - Boolean Statement #1073

to 14256

Comment String - Boolean Statement #1088

14257

Spare

to 14260

Spare

14261


to 14276


14277

Spare

to 14300

Spare

14301

Comment String - Assign - Digital to Analog Output #1

to 14312

Comment String - Assign - Digital to Analog Output #12

14313

Spare

to 14320

23/27.71+ ! 05/98

Spare

8-17

Chapter 8



Comment String - Assign - Digital I/O Point #1

to 14344

Comment String - Assign - Digital I/O Point #24

14345

Spare

to 14359

Spare

14360

Comment String - Assign - PID #1 - Primary Variable

14361

Comment String - Assign - PID #1 - Secondary Variable

14362


14363


14364


14365


14366


14367


14380

Comment String - Assign - Front Panel Counter A

14381

Comment String - Assign - Front Panel Counter B

14382

Comment String - Assign - Front Panel Counter C

14383

Spare

to 15000

8-18

Spare

23/27.71+ ! 05/98


Volume 4d

8.3. INFO - These 32-bit long integer variables are accessed using Modbus function code 03 for reads, 06 for single writes and 16 for multiple writes. Note that the index number for each variable refers to one complete long integer which occupies the space of two 16-bit registers. It must be accessed as a complete unit. You cannot read or write a partial 32-bit integer. Each 32-bit long integer counts as one point in the normal Omni Modbus mode.


15001

Flow Computer Configuration 32-Bit Long Integer Data Assign - Analog Output #1

to 15012

Assign - Analog Output #12

15013

Digital Point #1 - Assignment

15014

Digital Point #1 - Timer - Delay On

15015

Digital Point #1 - Timer - Delay Off

15016

Digital Point #1 - Timer - Pulse Width

100 msec ticks. 100 msec ticks. 10 msec ticks.

15017


to 15020


15021


to 15024

23/27.71+ ! 05/98


8-19

Chapter 8


!

CAUTION!

!




to 15028


15029


to 15032


15033


to 15036


15037


to 15040


15041


to 15044


15045


to 15048


15049


to 15052


15053


to 15056


15057


to 15060

8-20


23/27.71+ ! 05/98


Volume 4d 15061 INFO - These 32-bit long integer variables are accessed using Modbus function code 03 for reads, 06 for single writes and 16 for multiple writes. Note that the index number for each variable refers to one complete long integer which occupies the space of two 16-bit registers. It must be accessed as a complete unit. You cannot read or write a partial 32-bit integer. Each 32-bit long integer counts as one point in the normal Omni Modbus mode.



to 15064


15065


to 15068


15069


to 15072


15073


to 15076


15077


to 15080


15081


to 15084


15085


to 15088


15089


to 15092


15093


to 15096

23/27.71+ ! 05/98


8-21

Chapter 8


!

CAUTION!

!




to 15100

Digital Point #22 - Timer - Pulse Width (10msec Ticks)

15101


to 15104


15105


to 15108


15109

Assign - Front Panel Counter A

15110

Assign - Front Panel Counter B

15111

Assign - Front Panel Counter C

15112

Max Comparitor - Error Counts per Batch - Meter #1

15113


15114


15115


15116

Spare

Points 15112-15115 represent dual pulse error checks.

to 15119

Spare

15120

Input / Output Status of Digital Points Real-time, read-only! Indicates which points are inputs (1) and which are outputs (0). #1=Bit 0; #24=Bit 23.

15121

Spare

15122

On/Off Status of Digital Points Real-time, read-only! #1=Bit 0; #24=Bit 23: 0 =Off, 1=On.

15123

Spare

to 15125

8-22

Spare

23/27.71+ ! 05/98


Volume 4d 15126

32-Bit Packed Status Word Exclusively for OmniCom use (see Bit Layout below).

INFO - These 32-bit long integer variables are accessed using Modbus function code 03 for reads, 06 for single writes and 16 for multiple writes. Note that the index number for each variable refers to one complete long integer which occupies the space of two 16-bit registers. It must be accessed as a complete unit. You cannot read or write a partial 32-bit integer. Each 32-bit long integer counts as one point in the normal Omni Modbus mode.

LSB B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15


(((((( (((((( (((((( (((((( (((((( (((((( (((((( (((((( (((((( (((((( (((((( (((((( (((((( (((((( (((((( ((((((

N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

)))))) )))))) )))))) )))))) )))))) )))))) )))))) )))))) )))))) )))))) )))))) )))))) )))))) )))))) )))))) ))))))

B16 B17 B18 B19 B20 B21 B22 B23 B24 B25 B26 B27 B28 B29 B30 B31

(((((( N/A (((((( N/A (((((( N/A (((((( N/A (((((( N/A (((((( N/A (((((( N/A (((((( N/A (((((( N/A (((((( N/A Power Fail Flag End Batch #4 End Batch #3 End Batch #2 End Batch #1 End Batch Station

)))))) )))))) )))))) )))))) )))))) )))))) )))))) )))))) )))))) ))))))

MSB

15127

Text Archive Data - Number of Days to Retrieve

15128

Text Archive Data - Starting Date of Requested

Exclusively for OmniCom use. Fix date format (YYDDMM).

15129

32-Bit Command Word #1 Exclusively for OmniCom use (see Bit Layout below). LSB B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15

(((((( N/A )))))) End Batch Station End Batch Meter #1 End Batch Meter #2 End Batch Meter #3 End Batch Meter #4 (((((( N/A )))))) (((((( N/A )))))) (((((( N/A )))))) (((((( N/A )))))) (((((( N/A )))))) Alarm Acknowledge Reset Power Fail Flag (((((( N/A )))))) (((((( N/A )))))) (((((( N/A ))))))

B16 B17 B18 B19 B20 B21 B22 B23 B24 B25 B26 B27 B28 B29 B30 B31

(((((( N/A )))))) (((((( N/A )))))) Send Snapshot to Printer Load Snapshot to 9402 Load Alarms to 9402 Load Prod File to 9402 Load Status to 9402 Load Audit Trail to 9402 (((((( N/A )))))) (((((( N/A )))))) (((((( N/A )))))) (((((( N/A )))))) (((((( N/A )))))) (((((( N/A )))))) (((((( N/A )))))) (((((( N/A ))))))

MSB

23/27.71+ ! 05/98

8-23

Chapter 8


!

CAUTION!

32-Bit Command Word #2 Exclusively for OmniCom use (see Bit Layout below).

!


LSB


B0

Decrease PID #1 Setpoint @ 1% Rate

B16

Decrease PID #1 Valve @ 1% Rate

B1

Increase PID #1 Setpoint @ 1% Rate

B17

Increase PID #1 Valve @ 1% Rate

B2

Decrease PID #1 Setpoint @ 0.1% Rate

B18

Decrease PID #1 Valve @ 0.1% Rate

B3

Increase PID #1 Setpoint @ 0.1% Rate

B19

Increase PID #1 Valve @ 0.1% Rate

B4


B20


B5


B21


B6


B22


B7


B23


B8


B24


B9


B25


B10


B26


B11


B27


B12


B28


B13


B29


B14


B30


B15


B31


MSB

15131

Raw Process Input - Input #1 Real-time, read-only! 1kHz~1mA.

to 15154

Raw Process Input - Input #24

15155

Spare

to 15199

8-24

Spare

23/27.71+ ! 05/98


Volume 4d

Archive Data File Size INFO - These 32-bit long integer variables are accessed using Modbus function code 03 for reads, 06 for single writes and 16 for multiple writes. Note that the index number for each variable refers to one complete long integer which occupies the space of two 16-bit registers. It must be accessed as a complete unit. You cannot read or write a partial 32-bit integer. Each 32-bit long integer counts as one point in the normal Omni Modbus mode.


Information Only Data! *

15200

Size of Text - Archive File

*

15201

Size of Archive - File 701

*

15202


*

15203


*

15204


*

15205


*

15206


*

15207


*

15208


*

15209


*

15210


15211

Spare

15212

Spare

15213

Archive File ‘n’ Failed Indicates which archive file failed; e.g.: if archive files 1-4 occupy allocated memory, this point will read 5 (n=1-10). (See points 2623, 15200-15210, and 15214.)

Note:

* Archive Data File Size These variables contain the number of bytes each archive file uses within memory. They are updated when the archiving process is started and memory is allocated. The maximum memory that can be allocated to this group of variables is a total of 229359 bytes.

23/27.71+ ! 05/98

15214

Total Number of Archive Files Allocated

15215

Spare

to 17000

Spare

8-25

Chapter 8


8.4.

17001

INFO - These 32-bit IEEE Floating Point variables are accessed using Modbus function code 03 for all reads, 06 for single writes or 16 for single or multiple writes. Note that the index number for each variable refers to the complete floating point variable which occupies the space of two 16- bit registers. It must be accessed as a complete unit. You cannot read or write a partial variable. Each floating point variable counts as one point in the normal Omni Modbus mode.


Flow Computer Configuration 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data Digital-to-Analog - Output #1 - @ 4mA Engineering units which equal to 0%.

17002

Digital-to-Analog - Output #1 - @ 20mA Engineering units which equal to 100%.

to 17023

Digital-to-Analog - Output #12 - @ 4mA

17024

Digital-to-Analog - Output #12 - @ 20mA

17025

Pulses per Unit - Digital I/O #1

to

#

17048

Pulses per Unit - Digital I/O #24

17049

Pulses per Unit - Counter A

17050

Pulses per Unit - Counter B

17051

Pulses per Unit - Counter C

17052

PID #1 - Remote Setpoint - Low Limit Setpoint download will be limited to this setting.

#

17053

PID #1 - Remote Setpoint - High Limit

#

17054

PID #1 - Remote Setpoint - @ 4mA

#

17055

PID #1 - Remote Setpoint - @ 20mA

17056

PID #1 - Primary Gain

17057

PID #1 - Primary Repeats/Minute

Setpoint download will be limited to this setting. Note:

Sets the zero of the controller.

# Input expected is engineering units.

Sets the maximum span of the controller.

#

17058

PID #1 - Secondary Value - @ Zero

#

17059

PID #1 - Secondary Value - @ Full Scale

17060

PID #1 - Secondary Gain

17061

PID #1 - Secondary Repeats/Minute

17062

PID #1 - Maximum Ramp Up Rate % - p/500 msec

17063

PID #1 - Secondary Setpoint

17064

PID #1 - Maximum Ramp Down Rate % - p/500msec

Limits rate of valve movement at startup only.

#

Limits the rate of valve movement at shutdown only.

17065

PID #1 - Min Output % - To Ramp To This valve open % is used to slow the flow rate and complete the delivery (i.e., topoff).

17066

PID #1 - Deadband % No change in output if the % error is less than this

8-26

23/27.71+ ! 05/98


Volume 4d 17067

!

CAUTION!

!



PID #2 - Remote Setpoint - Low Limit

to 17081

PID #2 - Deadband %

17082


to 17096

PID #3 - Deadband %

17097


to 17111

PID #4 - Deadband %

17112

Output in Percent - Digital to Analog #1 Read-only, Live Value.

to 17123

Output in Percent - Digital to Analog #12 Read-only, Live Value.

17124

Spare

to 17135

Spare

17136

PID #1 - Primary Controlled Variable Value

17137

PID #1 - Secondary Controlled Variable Value

17138

PID #1 - Control Output %

17139

PID #1 - Primary Setpoint Value

17140

PID #1 - Secondary Setpoint Value

17141

Spare

to 17145

Spare

17146


to 17150


17151

Spare

to 17155

23/27.71+ ! 05/98

Spare

8-27

Chapter 8





to 17160


17161

Spare

to 17165

Spare

17166


to 17170


17171

Spare

to 17175

Spare

17176

Meter #1 - Full Scale - Gross Flowrate Used to scale integer volume flow rate variables 3140 & 3142.

17177

Meter #1 - Full Scale - Mass Flowrate Used to scale integer mass flow rate variable 3144.

8-28

17178

Spare

17179

Meter #1 - Meter Factor

17180

Meter #2 - Full Scale - Gross Flowrate

17181

Meter #2 - Full Scale - Mass Flowrate

17182

Spare

17183


17184


17185


17186

Spare

17187


23/27.71+ ! 05/98


Volume 4d

!

CAUTION!

!



17188


17189


17190

Spare

17191


17192

Station - Full Scale - Gross

17193

Station - Full Scale - Mass

(Used to scale integer volume flow rate variables 3802 & 3804. Used to scale integer mass flow rate variable 3806.

17194

Meter #1 - Venturi Pressure Loss %

17195


17196


17197


17198

Alarm Deadband % 0-5%. Global dead-band applied to all analog alarms. Variable must return this % out of alarm for alarm to cancel.

17199

Spare

to 17229

23/27.71+ ! 05/98

Spare

8-29

Chapter 8


8.5. INFO - These 32-bit IEEE Floating Point variables are accessed using Modbus function code 03 for all reads, 06 for single writes or 16 for single or multiple writes. Note that the index number for each variable refers to the complete floating point variable which occupies the space of two 16- bit registers. It must be accessed as a complete unit. You cannot read or write a partial variable. Each floating point variable counts as one point in the normal Omni Modbus mode.

Product AGA-8 Component Override 32Bit IEEE Floating Point Data

Some of the data points listed below have two components displayed for each point. The component to the left of the ‘/’ is used when AGA 8 1992 or 1994 is selected. The component to the right of the ‘/’ is used when AGA 8 1985 is selected. The following points correspond to AGA 8, 1994/1992 and 1985. They represent Product Mol % data. AGA 8 - 1994/1992

AGA 8 - 1985

#

17230

Product #1 - Mol % - Methane

Nitrogen

#

17231

Product #1 - Mol % - Nitrogen

Carbon Dioxide

#

17232

Product #1 - Mol % - Carbon Dioxide

Hydrogen Sulfide

17233

Product #1 - Mol % - Ethane

Water


17234

Product #1 - Mol % - Propane

Helium

17235

Product #1 - Mol % - Water

Methane

17236

Product #1 - Mol % - Hydrogen Sulfide

Ethane

17237

Product #1 - Mol % - Hydrogen

Propane

17238

Product #1 - Mol % - Carbon Monoxide

n-Butane

17239

Product #1 - Mol % - Oxygen

i-Butane

17240

Product #1 - Mol % - i-Butane

n-Pentane

17241

Product #1 - Mol % - n-Butane

i-Pentane

17242

Product #1 - Mol % - i-Pentane

n-Hexane

17243

Product #1 - Mol % - n-Pentane

n-Heptane

17244

Product #1 - Mol % - n-Hexane

n-Octane

17245

Product #1 - Mol % - n-Heptane

n-Nonane

17246

Product #1 - Mol % - n-Octane

n-Decane

17247

Product #1 - Mol % - n-Nonane

Oxygen

17248

Product #1 - Mol % - n-Decane

Carbon Monoxide

17249

Product #1 - Mol % - Helium

Hydrogen

17250

Product #1 - Mol % - Argon

Spare

17251

Product #1 - Viscosity Centipoise or ca.s.

Note:

#

17252

Product #1 - Isentropic Exponent K

17253

Product #1 - Heating Value

replaced with live values when using 4-20mA inputs for Carbon Dioxide, Nitrogen, BTU or SG.

3

3

BTU / Ft or MJ/m .

# These variables are 17254

Product #1 - Reference Specific Gravity Live value when using 4-20mA SG input.

17255


17256

Product #1 - Water Content

17257

Spare

to 17259

8-30

Spare

23/27.71+ ! 05/98


Volume 4d 17260

!

CAUTION!

Points 17260-17286 correspond to AGA 8 - 1994/1992 & 1985. They represent Product #2 Mol % data.

!



Product #2 - Methane / Nitrogen

to 17286


17287

Spare

to 17289

Spare

17290

Product #3 - Methane / Nitrogen Points 17290-17316 correspond to AGA 8 - 1994/1992 & 1985. They represent Product #3 Mol % data.

to 17316


17317

Spare

to 17319

Spare

17320

Product #4 - Methane / Nitrogen Points 17320-17346 correspond to AGA 8 - 1994/1992 & 1985. They represent Product #3 Mol % data.

to 17346


17347

Spare

to 17349

23/27.71+ ! 05/98

Spare

8-31

Chapter 8


8.6. INFO - These 32-bit IEEE Floating Point variables are accessed using Modbus function code 03 for all reads, 06 for single writes or 16 for single or multiple writes. Note that the index number for each variable refers to the complete floating point variable which occupies the space of two 16- bit registers. It must be accessed as a complete unit. You cannot read or write a partial variable. Each floating point variable counts as one point in the normal Omni Modbus mode.


8-32

Gas Chromatograph 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data

Data received from the gas chromatograph is stored here. This data is moved to the correct product variable area (17230, etc.) in the order specified in points at 3770. 17350

Analyzer - Component #1

17351


17352


17353


17354


17355


17356


17357


17358

Analyzer -Component #9

17359


17360


17361


17362


17363


17364


17365


17366


17367


17368


17369


17370


17371


17372


17373


17374


17375


17376


17377


17378


17379


23/27.71+ ! 05/98


Volume 4d

8.7. !

CAUTION!

More Flow Computer Configuration 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data

!


17380

Auxiliary Input #1 - Low limit

17381

Auxiliary Input #1 - High Limit

17382

Auxiliary Input #1 - Override Value

17383

Auxiliary Input #1 - @ 4mA

17384


17385


to 17389


17390


to Application Revisions 23.71+ & 27.71+ - This database corresponds to Application Revisions 23.71/27.71 for Orifice/Turbine Gas Flow Metering Systems. Both US and metric unit versions are considered.

17394


17395


to 17399


17400

Spare

to 17479

Spare

17480

Run Switch - Threshold Low %

17481

Run Switch - Threshold High %

Differential pressure input % less then this flags that a meter run should be closed. Differential pressure input % greater then this flags that a meter run should be opened.

17482

Spare

to 17500

23/27.71+ ! 05/98

Spare

8-33

Chapter 8




Meter #1 - K Factor #1 See 3122 for matching flow frequency entry.

17502

Meter #1 - K Factor #2

17503


17504


17505


17506


17507


17508


17509


17510


17511


17512


17513

Spare

to 17600

Spare

17601


to 17612


17613

Spare

to 17700

Spare

17701


to 17712


17713

Spare

to 17800

Spare

17801


to 17812

8-34


23/27.71+ ! 05/98


Volume 4d 17813

!

CAUTION!

!



Spare

to 18100

8.8.

Spare

Product Previous Hourly and Daily Averages - AGA 8 Mol % 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data

Some of the data points listed below have two components displayed for each point. The component to the left of the ‘/’ is used when AGA-8 1992 or 1994 is selected. The component to the right of the ‘/’ is used when AGA-8 1985 is selected. (Note: n = Product # 1, 2, 3 or 4.)

8.8.1.

Previous Hourly Averages

18n00

Spares

18n01

Mol % -

Methane

Nitrogen

18n02

Mol % -

Nitrogen

Carbon Dioxide

18n03

Mol % -

Carbon Dioxide

Hydrogen Sulfide

18n04

Mol % -

Ethane

Water

18n05

Mol % -

Propane

Helium

18n06

Mol % -

Water

Methane

AGA 8 - 1994/1992

AGA 8 - 1985

18n07

Mol % -

Hydrogen Sulfide

Ethane

18n08

Mol % -

Hydrogen

Propane

18n09

Mol % -

Carbon Monoxide

n-Butane

18n10

Mol % -

Oxygen

i-Butane

18n11

Mol % -

i-Butane

n-Pentane

18n12

Mol % -

n-Butane

i-Pentane

18n13

Mol % -

i-Pentane

n-Hexane

18n14

Mol % -

n-Pentane

n-Heptane

18n15

Mol % -

n-Hexane

n-Octane

18n16

Mol % -

n-Heptane

n-Nonane

18n17

Mol % -

n-Octane

n-Decane

18n18

Mol % -

n-Nonane

Oxygen

18n19

Mol % -

n-Decane

Carbon Monoxide

18n20

Mol % -

Helium

Hydrogen

18n21

Mol % -

Argon

Spare

18n22

Dry BTU

18n23

BTU Used Gas Chromatograph information only (not used by Omni).

18n24

23/27.71+ ! 05/98


8-35

Chapter 8

Flow Computer Configuration Data (13001- 18999) 18n25



Spare

to 18n50

8.8.2.

Spare

Previous Daily Averages AGA 8 - 1994/1992

AGA 8 - 1985

18n51

Mol % -

Methane

Nitrogen

18n52

Mol % -

Nitrogen

Carbon Dioxide

18n53

Mol % -

Carbon Dioxide

Hydrogen Sulfide

18n54

Mol % -

Ethane

Water

18n55

Mol % -

Propane

Helium

18n56

Mol % -

Water

Methane

18n57

Mol % -

Hydrogen Sulfide

Ethane

18n58

Mol % -

Hydrogen

Propane

18n59

Mol % -

Carbon Monoxide

n-Butane

18n60

Mol % -

Oxygen

i-Butane

18n61

Mol % -

i-Butane

n-Pentane

18n62

Mol % -

n-Butane

i-Pentane

18n63

Mol % -

i-Pentane

n-Hexane

18n64

Mol % -

n-Pentane

n-Heptane

18n65

Mol % -

n-Hexane

n-Octane

18n66

Mol % -

n-Heptane

n-Nonane

18n67

Mol % -

n-Octane

n-Decane

18n68

Mol % -

n-Nonane

Oxygen

18n69

Mol % -

n-Decane

Carbon Monoxide

18n70

Mol % -

Helium

Hydrogen

18n71

Mol % -

Argon

Spare

18n72

Dry BTU

18n73

BTU Used Gas Chromatograph information only (not used by Omni).

18n74


18n75 Spare to 18n99 Spare

8-36

23/27.71+ ! 05/98


Volume 4d

) These addresses are reserved for product development.

Reserved

to

Note:

)

18500

)

18999

Reserved

)

19000

Reserved

to

)

19999

Reserved

)

20000

Reserved

to

)

29999

Reserved

)

30000

Reserved

to

)

39999

Reserved

)

40000

Reserved

)

49999

to

23/27.71+ ! 05/98

Reserved

8-37

Volume 5 User Manual

Technical Bulletins 960701 Overview of OmniCom Configuration PC Software 960702 Communicating with Allen-Bradley Programmable Logic Controllers 960703 Storing Archive Data within the Flow Computer 960704 Communicating with Honeywell ST3000 Smart Transmitters 970701 Stability Requirements: Final Calibration of Flow Computer 970702 Secondary Totalizers Provide Net Volume at Temperatures Other than 15°C or 60°F 970801 Using Boolean Statements to Provide Custom Alarms in the Flow Computer 970802 Omni Flow Computer Modbus Database: Overview 970803 Meter Factor Linearization 970804 Calculation of Natural Gas Net Volume and Energy: Using Gas Chromatograph, Product Overrides or Live 4-20mA Analyzer Inputs of Specific Gravity and Heating Value

970901 Dual Pulse Flowmeter Pulse Fidelity Checking 980201 Communicating with Honeywell TDC3000 Systems 980202 Recalculating a Previous Batch within the Flow Computer 980401 Peer-to-Peer Basics 980402 Using the Peer-to-Peer Function in a Redundant Flow Computer Application 980501 Rosemount 3095FB Multivariable Sensor Interface Issues 980502 Communicating with Honeywell SMV3000 Multivariable Transmitters 980503 Serial I/O Modules: Installation Options 980504 Multivariable Flow Transmitter Interfaces: Serial Connectivity and Data Transfer Issues 980701 Using the Totalizer Maintenance Mode 980801 Unsolicited Transmissions of Custom Modbus Data Packets 980802 Digital I/O Modules: Installation Options 980803 Upgrading the Flow Computer Firmware 981101 Using the Audit Trail (Event Logger) Feature and Sealing of the Flow Computer 990101 Communicating with Instromet Q-Sonic Ultrasonic Gas Flowmeters

Effective May 1999

Omni Flow Computers, Inc.

Date: 07

23

96

Author(s): Kenneth D. Elliott / Robert L. Stallard

TB # 960701

Overview of OmniComâ Configuration PC Software Contents User Manual Reference This technical bulletin complements the information contained in Volume 3, Chapter 2 “Flow Computer Configuration”, and is applicable to all firmware revisions. This bulletin was previously published as an appendix to user manuals of firmware revisions Version .70 and earlier. OmniComâ Configuration PC Software - This powerful software package allows you to setup, copy or modify, and save to disk entire configurations for Omni flow computers. It also allows you to create custom reports and displays. You can work online, offline and remotely.

Scope .............................................................................................................. 2 Abstract........................................................................................................... 2 Configuring the Flow Computer.................................................................... 2 Report Configurator ....................................................................................... 3 Operations Utilities and Help......................................................................... 3 Dial-up Access................................................................................................ 3 Passwords Using OmniCom.......................................................................... 3 Local Keypad Access ................................................................................................4 Changing Passwords at the Keypad ..........................................................................4 Setting Up the Initial 'Level B' and 'Level C' Passwords for each Modbus Port............5 Maintaining the Modbus Port Password Using OmniComâ ........................................5 Disabling Modbus Port Passwords ............................................................................6

Getting Started ............................................................................................... 6 Installation Requirements..........................................................................................6 Installation Procedure ...............................................................................................6 Opening a File ..........................................................................................................7 View .........................................................................................................................7 Off-line......................................................................................................................7 On-line......................................................................................................................7 Reports.....................................................................................................................8 Utilities......................................................................................................................8 I/O Point Assignment List ................................................................................................................ 8 OmniComâ Setup ........................................................................................................................... 8 OmniComâ Application .................................................................................................................... 9 Archive Start/Stop Command .......................................................................................................... 9 Prover Commands......................................................................................................................... 10 Diagnostics.................................................................................................................................... 10 Omni Front Panel Emulator ........................................................................................................... 10

Help........................................................................................................................10 Registration of License and Software Support .........................................................11

TB-960701 w ALL REVS

1

Omni 6000 / Omni 3000 Flow Computers

Technical Bulletin

Scope OmniComâ Software is compatible with all firmware revisions of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computers. It is installed in a personal computer from which you can configure your flow computer.

Abstract OmniCom is a simple-to-use yet sophisticated PC-based configuration program that can be used to setup, copy or modify, and save to disk entire configurations for Omni flow computers. You can also select custom report options and modify report templates and Omni display screens that are resident within the program, or create new ones. These can then be uploaded to the flow computer. Default reports provide standard data and formats for most requirements. Major application programming has already been developed by Omni and is resident in EPROM. This is of particular importance in custody transfer measurement contracts. They require that the relevant API, AGA, GPA or ISO standards are fully implemented and not exposed to tampering. The OmniCom program allows you to develop your own system requirements by a simple process of menu selection and table completion. This replicates the data entry tables which can be accessed through the front panel keypad of your Omni Flow Computer.

Configuring the Flow Computer For Further Help - If you require further help, call Omni’s technical support at: ( +1-281-240-6161

Configuring the flow computer involves specifying what transducers are going to be used, their calibrated ranges and the physical I/O points being assigned. Other data needed by the flow computer relates to the flowing product to be measured, the type of calculations to be used, and communication and control features. You will usually configure the flow computer in the Off-line Mode and then upload your data. You do not have to be connected to the flow computer at this time. You will usually go to the Online Menu only when you need to communicate directly with the flow computer. Any changes made are immediately reflected in the flow computer.

2


Overview of OmniComä ä Configuration PC Software

TB-960701

Report Configurator One of OmniCom's indispensable features is the ability to reformat default reports by using OmniCom's report templates. This is the ONLY feature not available through the front panel keypad. Any variable defined in the Modbus database, or programmed as a variable can be inserted into a report with accompanying text. Reports can be created in languages other than English to suit local needs.

Operations Utilities and Help Accessing Help in OmniComâ - At the 'Using Help' feature, press [Enter] and [F1] for editing keystrokes.

For Further Help - If you require further help, call Omni’s technical support at: ( +1-281-240-6161

Operational tools such as remotely proving meters, and reading hardware diagnostics are provided. Diagrams are also provided for communications cable hook-up. Application Programs and PC Setup for OmniCom can also be selected. As you work through the entries, you will find entry-sensitive Help that explains the meaning of the particular entry. Whether at the flow computer keypad or at a PC there is always assistance.

Dial-up Access Omni Flow Computers encourages the installation of a telephone dial-up modem as a ready means of providing installation and maintenance support for customer and vendor alike. Serial communication passwords provide enhanced security. Three levels of password pre-exist within Omni flow computers to provide privileged or restricted access to critical configuration and calibration data. The OmniCom program allows you to upload/download data to and from the flow computer in an on-line mode at a range of baud rates by direct-wire or by telephone dial-up modem access. This is particularly useful when the flow computer is in use. Occasionally, you will want to modify configuration or calibration data, or just monitor activity. You can do all this without interfering with pipeline or process operations or with communication links to host SCADA or DCS systems.

Passwords Using OmniCom Except when changing transducer high/low alarm limits, a password is usually asked for when changing the configuration data within the computer. The flow computer has independent password protection of the following: INFO - For Firmware Revisions 70+, Physical Serial Port #1 is selectable as a Modbus RTU, Modbus RTU (modem), or printer port. This serial port on previous revisions was only a printer port.


1) 2) 3) 4) 5)

Local Keypad access Modbus Port #1 (Physical serial Port #1) Modbus Port #2 (Physical serial Port #2) Modbus Port #3 (Physical serial Port #3) Modbus Port #4 (Physical serial Port #4)

3


Technical Bulletin

Local Keypad Access Three password levels are provided: a) Privileged Level - Allows complete access to all entries within the flow computer including keypad passwords (b) and (c) below. The initial privileged password for each Modbus port is selected via this password level. b) Level 1 - This level allows technician access to most entries within the flow computer with the exception of I/O Points assignments, programmable variables and Boolean statements and passwords other than Keypad level 1. c) Level 1A - Allows access to the following entries: ¨ Meter factors and K Factors ¨ Densitometer correction factors (pycnometer factor) d) Level 2 - Allows access to the operator type entries. These entries include: ¨ Transducer manual overrides ¨ Product gravity overrides ¨ Prover operations ¨ Batching operations

Changing Passwords at the Keypad 1) At the keypad press [Prog] [Setup] [Enter] 2) With the cursor blinking on 'Misc Configuration' press [Enter] 3) With the cursor blinking on 'Password Main?' press [Alpha Shift] [Y] [Enter] 4) Enter the 'Privileged Level' Password (up to 6 characters) press [Enter] 5) The 'Level 1',Level 1A and 'Level 2' passwords can now be viewed and changed if required. INFO - Level B and Level C passwords for each Modbus port cannot be viewed or changed from the keypad.

4

6) Scroll down to access each of the Modbus serial port 'Level A' passwords. These are labeled 'Ser1Passwd', Ser2 Passwd', 'Ser3 Passwd' and ‘Ser4 Passwd’ corresponding to the physical port numbering for Modbus Ports 1, 2, 3 and 4 respectively.


TB-960701


Setting Up the Initial 'Level B' and 'Level C' Passwords for each Modbus Port 7) Enter an initial 'Level A' Password for the appropriate physical serial port at the keypad of the Omni Flow Computer as described above. 8) Connect a PC running OmniCom Software to the selected serial port of the Omni Flow Computer. Open a file and 'Receive Omni Configuration Data'. 9) A red pop-up screen will appear which notes that a password is required to proceed. If any other screen appears at this point, check wiring and communication settings, Modbusä ID, baud rate, etc. 10) Do not enter the 'Level A' password at this point. Keep pressed [Alt] as you press [E] to edit the passwords. A second red pop-up screen will appear asking for the 'current valid password'. A good practice would be to use uppercase letters (activate [CapsLock] on the keyboard) because when setting passwords from the flow computer’s keypad, they are always entered in uppercase. 11) Enter the 'Level A' password that was selected for this serial port. 12) You are asked if you would like to change the 'Level A', 'Level B' and 'Level C' passwords. Select to change 'Level B' at this point. You will be asked to enter a password. As you enter the password, asterisks will show in place of the characters you typed. You will be asked to re-enter the password to ensure that what you typed was correct. 13) To setup a ‘Level C’ password, repeat Steps 2 and 6 substituting ‘Level C’ for ‘Level B’ at Step 6.

Maintaining the Modbus Port Password Using OmniComâ After the initial passwords have been setup for each of the Modbus serial ports as shown above, they may be changed at any time while logged on with OmniCom. 1) While keeping pressed the [Alt] key, press [E] at any time and the popup screen appears asking for a password. This screen can be forced to appear by keeping pressed [Alt] as you press [P] while viewing any editing screen; i.e., any screen with data fields that can be edited. 2) When asked, enter your current password. Password ‘Level B’ and ‘Level C’ users are allowed to change only their own password levels. ‘Level A’ password users can change levels A, B and C.


5


Technical Bulletin

Disabling Modbus Port Passwords INFO - Level B and Level C passwords for each Modbus (serial) port cannot be viewed or changed from the keypad; i.e., you must use OmniCom to view, change or delete these password levels.

‘Level B’ and ‘Level C’ passwords should be disabled via OmniCom (see sidebar) before disabling the privileged ‘Level A’ password at the keypad. 1) To disable each password proceed as though you are going to change or set-up the password. 2) Press the [Delete] key six (6) times where the initial password was entered followed by the [Enter] key (no asterisks will show). 3) When asked to re-enter the password, re-enter six [Delete] key presses followed by the [Enter] key. 4) Repeat this procedure for both ‘Level B’ and ‘Level C’ passwords. 5) From the Omni flow computer keypad, delete the 'Level A' password for the appropriate Modbus serial port (see Volume 3). To do this, move the cursor to the serial Level A password to disable and press the [Clear] key and then the [Enter] key.

Getting Started ‹ CAUTION! ‹ Terminate and Stay Resident (TSR) programs such as SideKickä and Keyboard Macro processors can affect the operation of high speed communication programs such as OmniCom. They do this by 'stealing' processor cycles or turning off the hardware interrupt system of the personal computer. These programs may have to be disabled when you are in the 'On-line' Mode, if you encounter difficulties communicating with the Omni flow computer.

Installation Requirements To properly run OmniCom, and have sufficient memory for report templates and copies of the database, you will require the following: ¨ IBM PC (or compatible) ¨ MS DOS, V3.3 or later (excepting 4.01) ¨ 640Kb RAM ¨ 20Mb Free Hard Disk Space with a minimum of one floppy disk drive, 3½" 1.44 Mb ¨ Monochrome or color monitor with EGA or VGA graphics capability ¨ One RS-232 serial port ¨ One LPT port (optional) ¨ One RS-232 modem (optional at various supported baud rates)

Installing OmniCom Revisions Previous to 70 Before you install earlier revisions of OmniCom software, you must save your existing phone directory entries and setup. For instructions and any other assistance you may need, please contact our technical support staff at the following phone number: ( +1-281-240-6161

Installation Procedure OmniCom is delivered on 1.44 Mb, 3½" diskettes in an archived format. To install, do the following: 1) Insert the diskette into your PC's corresponding floppy disk drive. 2) Type the respective drive letter followed by a colon (e.g.: A: or B). 3) Type Install and press [Enter]. The OmniCom installation program will guide you through the rest of the installation.

6



TB-960701

Opening a File Accessing Help in OmniComâ - At the 'Using Help' feature, press [Enter] and [F1] for editing keystrokes.


First open an existing Omni-supplied file. Each application and derived files come with their own set of templates. You can then 'SAVE AS' to create a new file to commence your configuration. Each file that you create will occupy approximately 60 Kbytes of disk space. This includes 36 Kbytes for the configuration file and 6 Kbytes for each of the four custom report templates. All menu selections are supported by entry-sensitive ‘Help’. No matter where you are, by pressing [F1] you can obtain an explanation of the requirements for your entry selection.

View Files can be viewed separately or in parallel with a file that is currently being edited. This allows you to compare various numeric entries in similar files. This can be helpful if you are maintaining historical files that track changes you have made. You may not be able to use the ‘View’ feature with certain variations of flow computer configuration files because newer firmware include additional entry fields not available in earlier revisions.

Off-line You will usually begin in the Off-line Mode to configure your flow computer. It naturally leads in to the 'Omni Configuration' Menu selections. Only when you complete this section will you be able to activate the various 'Setup' options and proceed to establish your calibration ranges and other related data. Before you begin the configuration of I/O, be sure you know what number and type of physical I/O has been installed in the flow computer. A mismatch between your off-line configuration and physical hardware will not make a data upload to the flow computer meaningful in key areas of your configuration data.

On-line When you have completed building your configuration database, you are then ready to upload data to your Omni flow computer. The OmniCom program uses the Modbusä RTU binary protocol which mandates the use of 8 data bits. Be sure that the serial I/O parameters in both devices have been properly setup before attempting to communicate. Baud rate and parity settings are less critical but must also be the same. With a direct-connect to a PC, OmniCom will perform an auto baud rate search and display an error if baud rates are incompatible (see 2.5.16. Serial Input/Output Settings in Volume 3). Baud rates from 1.2 kbps to 38.4 kbps are supported. When using a modem, the auto baud rate search is not performed. In this case, the baud rate is that at which the modem is setup. Some personal computers may not have the processing power to support the higher baud rates. Note also that modems are capable of using a higher baud rate at the RS-232 connector than they are communicating on the telephone line. If the modems connect but the flow computer does not respond, try adjusting the flow computer’s baud rate.


7


Technical Bulletin

Reports The 'Report' Menu allows you to retrieve snapshot and historical reports from the flow computer or from your hard disk. These are pre-formatted default reports that are included in the Omni application software. You can also customize your own reports from standard templates. By using the on-screen report editor, you can add or delete text and data character strings which identify the variable in the computer's Modbusä database. [F1] for help describes the control functions to enable you to format the report easily. Bring up a report template and move the cursor onto the 'XXXX.XX' fields. Press [Enter] and a pop-up menu defines the variable being used. Type or edit text anywhere, move the cursor and keeping pressed [Shift] as you press [$] enables you to enter or delete any database address from the report.

Utilities The ‘Utilities’ Menu has several useful tools for setting up and maintaining OmniCom. The utilities available are: q q q q

I/O Point Assignment List OmniCom Setup OmniCom Application Archive Maintenance

q Prover/Batch Commands q Diagnostics q Omni Panel

End

I/O Point Assignment List When the configuration of your flow computer is complete, you should review your assignment of physical I/O by accessing the display under 'I/O Point Assignment List'. An I/O mismatch can result in erroneous calibration ranges and consequential errors in measurement and control of your metering system! This utility shows a summary list that indicates what physical I/O points are assigned to which variables. Point numbers with asterisks '*' next to them are used for more than one variable. Check the list to ensure you have not assigned a physical I/O point to more than one transducer type; e.g.: An I/O point cannot be assigned to a temperature and pressure transmitter at the same time. The flow computer will not allow this to happen in the ‘On-line’ mode, but OmniCom does not check for this in the ‘Off-line’ mode.

OmniComâ Setup This utility allows you to: q Select the type of video monitor. q Turn the sound effects on/off. q Setup the modem command strings.

8



TB-960701

OmniComâ Application Use this utility before you start to select the software version of OmniCom that matches the firmware version number of your Omni flow computer. The firmware versions are: US VERSIONS Turbine / Positive Displacement / Coriolis Liquid Flow Metering 20 Systems (with K Factor Linearization) 21

Orifice / Differential Pressure Liquid Flow Metering Systems

Turbine / Positive Displacement 22 Liquid Flow Metering Systems (with Meter Factor Linearization) 23


M ETRIC VERSIONS Turbine / Positive Displacement / Coriolis Liquid Flow Metering 24 Systems (with K Factor Linearization) 25

Orifice / Differential Pressure Liquid Flow Metering Systems

Turbine / Positive Displacement 26 Liquid Flow Metering Systems (with Meter Factor Linearization) 27


Archive Start/Stop Command

‹ WARNING! ‹ Warning: The flow computer will not accept changes made to the archive setup at the time of a 'Transmit Omni Configuration' upload unless the archiving feature has been turned off.

Accessing Help in OmniComâ - At the 'Using Help' feature, press [Enter] and [F1] for editing keystrokes.

When this menu is entered, OmniCom tries to establish communications with the flow computer using the comm parameter settings currently selected in the 'Start Comm' submenu of the 'Online' menu. It does this to establish the status of the 'Archive' flag and 'Archive Config Enable' flag. Check comm settings if all items on the menu are inactive; i.e., OmniCom is unable to communicate with the target computer. Any changes made to the flow computers configuration which involves the format of the data record, number of records in an archive file, or the total number of archive files within the flow computer, will cause the memory used to store the archive data to be reinitialized. This would cause all data stored in archive to be lost. Therefore, no changes to the target flow computers archive configuration will be allowed unless automatic data archiving has been disabled and the 'Archive Config Enable' flag is on.



9


Technical Bulletin

Prover Commands Proving features displayed here can only be viewed when communicating directly with an Omni Flow Computer. You may monitor or control the operation of a meter prover which is controlled by a remote Omni flow computer. You must have already established communications with the flow computer before making this selection. If you have not established communications with a flow computer you will receive one of the following error messages: Byte count does not match expected - OmniCom is confused and thinks your modem is connected to a flow computer. Try dialing out first. No response from Omni - You are either not connected to anything or the slave ID number of the flow computer you are trying to talk to does not match OmniCom's setting. Use the 'Shift' key with the appropriate 'Function' key to select the flowmeter you wish to remote prove. The 'Status Window' shows the event history and the 'Omni Display' echoes data shown locally at the Omni flow computer.

Diagnostics You must be connected and online with a flow computer for this selection to work. The screen displays diagnostic information about the flow computer such as number and type of I/O modules fitted, status of digital I/O, current output percent of analog outputs and raw input signals coming into the flow computer.

Omni Front Panel Emulator When this feature is selected, an illustration of the Omni front panel is displayed by which all the functions of an Omni Flow computer are emulated. Use the mouse to click on simulated buttons to access real time displays and make entries. OmniCom is actually displaying the same LCD display buffer information and the mouse click are actually sending data into the same key stroke buffer as the front panel keypad. Performance is much better at 9600 baud or higher. You must have setup the baud rate and other communication settings in the 'Start Comm' menu before you can use Omni Panel.

Help Accessing Help in OmniComâ - At the 'Using Help' feature, press [Enter] and [F1] for editing keystrokes.

10

You can further customize your Help screens by making use of an on-screen editor. Via this feature you can modify Help text by additions or deletions to suit your own needs and operations. Windows can be resized and repositioned to suit your own personal preference. This can be particularly useful as an additional memory aid, if the Operations Manual is not available to you, or if additional information is required for other users of this program.


TB-960701


Registration of License and Software Support For Further Help - If you require further help, call Omni’s technical support at: ( +1-281-240-6161


Remember to mail in the registration of your distribution diskette to Omni flow computers. OmniCom is provided with each Omni flow computer on a singleuser license basis. Any additional installations of this program will require reregistration by the user. This will ensure that you will have the opportunity to receive free telephone support, and notice of program revisions and new addon programs for your installation.

11


Date: 07

23

96


TB # 960702

Communicating with Allen-Bradleyä ä Programmable Logic Controllers Contents User Manual Reference This technical bulletin complements the information contained in the User Manuals, and is applicable to all firmware revisions. This bulletin was previously published as an appendix to user manuals of firmware revisions Version .70 and earlier.

Allen-Bradley Communications - This feature allows communicating with AllenBradleyä PLCs. However, Omni Flow Computers is not responsible for the operation, connectivity or compatibility of Allen-Bradley products, and furthermore, we do not warrant these products.

Scope .............................................................................................................. 1 Abstract........................................................................................................... 2 Protocol and Error Checking......................................................................... 2 PLC Supported ............................................................................................... 2 Flow Computer Database............................................................................... 2 4th and 5th Digit from the Right Identifies Type of Variable........................................2 3rd Digit from Right Identifies which Area within the Application .................................3

How the Allen-Bradleyä ä Accesses the Omni Flow Computer Database..... 3 PLC-2 .......................................................................................................................3 PLC-3 .......................................................................................................................3 PLC-5 .......................................................................................................................3 Valid Starting Addresses of PLC-5 Files ....................................................................4 16-Bit Integers ................................................................................................................................. 4 8-Character Strings ......................................................................................................................... 4 32-Bit Integers ................................................................................................................................. 4 32-Bit IEEE Floating Points ............................................................................................................. 4 Bit Integers ...................................................................................................................................... 4 16-Character Strings ....................................................................................................................... 4 32-Bit Integers ................................................................................................................................. 4 32-Bit IEEE Floating Points ............................................................................................................. 4

Scope All firmware revisions of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computers allow communications with Allen-Bradleyä Programmable Logic Controllers (PLCs). This technical bulletin refers to communication aspects specific to the Omni Flow Computer and serves as information only. Please refer to the manufacturer for any support or information on Allen-Bradley products.


1


Technical Bulletin

Abstract The Omni 6000 flow computer provides serial communications between the flow computer and an Allen-Bradleyä Programmable Logic Controller (PLC), usually via a KE or KF Communication Module connected to the Data Highway. Data is transmitted serially at a maximum rate of 38.4 kbps using 8 data bits, 1 stop bit and no parity bit. Average speed of response to a message request is approximately 75 msec.

Protocol and Error Checking Both the DFI full duplex protocol and the half duplex protocol are supported. CRC or BCC error checking can be utilized when using either full duplex or half duplex.

PLC Supported The Omni computer supports the following Allen-Bradleyä PLC types and messages. Note that bit level operations are not supported. PLC-2 PLC-3 PLC-5 SLC-502/3

Unprotected Block Reads and Writes Word Range Reads and Writes Typed Reads and Writes Unprotected Typed Reads and Writes

Flow Computer Database Serial Ports #1, #2, #3 and #4 in .71+ firmware revisions support communications using superset of Modbusä Protocol. This is the native communications language of the flow computer. Several thousand variables are available within the Database. The primary numbering system used to identify these variables is their 'index number'. The actual digits of the index number indicate the type of variable and in many cases application area within the computer.

4th and 5th Digit from the Right Identifies Type of Variable 1??? 3??? 4??? 5??? 7??? 8??? 13??? 14???

Variable is a digital status or command bit Variable is a 16 bit signed integer Variable is a 8 character ASCII string Variable is a 32 bit signed integer Variable is a 32 bit IEEE floating point Variable is a 32 bit IEEE floating point Variable is a 16 bit signed integer Variable is a 16 character ASCII string

15??? Variable is a 32 bit signed integer 17??? Variable is a 32 bit IEEE floating point

2


TB-960702

Communicating with Allen-Bradleyä ä Programmable Logic Controllers

3rd Digit from Right Identifies which Area within the Application ?1?? ?2?? ?3?? ?4?? ?5?? ?6?? ?7?? ?8?? ?9??

Variable relates to Meter Run #1 Variable relates to Meter Run #2 Variable relates to Meter Run #3 Variable relates to Meter Run #4 Variable is scratchpad Variable is PID related or scratchpad Variable is a command write. Variable is related to station functions Variable is related to prover functions

How the Allen-Bradleyä ä Accesses the Omni Flow Computer Database PLC-2 This family is usually limited as to the type of data and address range. Data is always transferred as block reads and writes. Five translation tables are provided where the user can specify what data within the database will be concatenated into read or write groups. The starting address of each data block is selectable. Note: The PLC2 does not understand 32-bit integer or 32-bit IEEE floating points but can pass these variable types to devices that do understand them.

o Translation Tables #1 through #3 are used to set up block reads which can contain status points packed 16 to a word, 16-bit or 32-bit integers and IEEE floating points. o Translation Table #4 is used for block writes of status and command bits only. Data is packed 16 to a word. o Translation Table #5 provides for block writes to any selected data.

PLC-3 This family can use the methods described above as well as 'word range reads and writes' of any variable within the database (see PLC-5 list for starting addresses).

PLC-5 This family utilizes 'typed reads and writes' of the complete Database. To accommodate the PLC-5 'file system’ method of addressing, the Modbus index numbers serve as the basis of the internal file system of the computers as it appears to a PLC-5 device. Table below shows typical examples:


3


Technical Bulletin

MODBUS INDICES VERSUS PLC-5 ADDRESSES M ODBUS INDEX #

PLC-5 ADDRESS

ELEMENT SIZE

COMMENT

1101

N11:01

1 Word (16 Flags)

Meter #1 Status Flags

1217

N12:17

1 Word (16 Flags)

Meter #2 Status Flags

1701

N17:01

1 Word (16 Flags)

Command Flags

3201

N32:01

1 Word (Integer)

Meter #1 Data

3210

N32:10

1 Word (Integer)

Offsets track

3901

N39:01

1 Word (integer)

Prover Data

4101

B41:01

1 Byte (ASCII)

4 Words per Variable

4102

B41:02

1 Byte (ASCII)

1 Byte per element

5101

N51:01

1 Word (Long Integer)

2 Words per variable

5102

N51:02



5103

N51:03


Same again

7401

F74:01

2 Words (IEEE Float)


7405

F74:05

2 Words (IEEE Float)

Offsets track

Valid Starting Addresses of PLC-5 Files 16-Bit Integers N10:01 N11:01 N12:01 N13:01 N14:01 N15:01 N16:01 N17:01 N18:01 N19:01 N30:01 N31:01 N32:01 N33:01 N34:01 N35:01 N36:01 N37:01 N38:01 N39:01

8-Character Strings B41:01 B42:01 B43:01 B44:01 B45:01 B46:01 B47:01 B48:01 B49:01

32-Bit Integers N51:01 N52:01 N53:01 N54:01 N55:01 N58:01 N59:01

32-Bit IEEE Floating Points F70:01

F71:01

F72:01

F73:01

F74:01

F75:01

F76:01

F77:01

F78:01

F79:01

Bit Integers N130:01 N134:01

16-Character Strings B140:01

32-Bit Integers N150:01

32-Bit IEEE Floating Points F170:01

4



Date: 07

23

96


TB # 960703

Storing Archive Data within the Flow Computer Contents User Manual Reference This technical bulletin complements the information contained in Volume 2 and Volume 3, and is applicable to all firmware revisions 71+. This bulletin was previously published as an appendix to user manuals of firmware revisions Version .70 and earlier.

Data Archiving - The archiving feature allows you to store raw data, ASCII text data and historical reports.

Scope .............................................................................................................. 1 Abstract........................................................................................................... 2 Raw Data Archiving........................................................................................ 2 Retrieving Data .........................................................................................................3 Raw Data Archive Point Addresses ...........................................................................4 Archive Configuration Changes .................................................................................5 Setting the 'Reconfig Archive' Flag .................................................................................................. 6 Possible Loss of Data when Starting and Stopping the Archive ...................................................... 6 Defining the Archive Records .......................................................................................................... 6

How The Available Memory Is Allocated....................................................................7 Checking The Archive File Memory Status Screens ...................................................8 Summary 0f Raw Data Archiving Features ................................................................9

Raw Data Archive Definition: Alarm/Event Log and Audit Event Log....... 10 Alarm/Event Log Record Structure: Archive File Address 711 ..................................10 Audit Event Log Record Structure: Archive File Address 712. ..................................10

Using The Custom Reports to Access the Text Archive Feature .............. 11 Custom Report Templates ........................................................................... 12

Scope All firmware revisions of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computers have the archiving feature. This feature allows you to archive raw data, ASCII data and historical reports.


1


Technical Bulletin

Abstract Definitions & Terminology Archive Address - A unique Modbusä address used to read a data record from an archive file. These addresses are in the 700 series; i.e., 701, 702, 703, etc. Archive Record - A structure containing a fixed set of data variables which cannot exceed 250 bytes in length. Data within the record can be of any valid data type in any order. Archive Trigger Boolean The actual event which causes the flow computer to capture and store a record within the archive file. The trigger can be any Boolean variable within the database including the result of a Boolean statement. Block Read - Modbusä protocol block read requires that Function Code 03 (read multiple registers) be used to retrieve data. Circular Archive File - A file of ‘n’ records arranged as a circular buffer which always contains the most recent ‘n’ records; i.e., the oldest data record is overwritten by each new record as it is added. Current Record Pointer - A 16-bit read-only integer register containing a number between 0 and ‘n’, representing the position of the most recently added record within the archive file. The pointer is adjusted after each complete record is added. A value of 0 indicates that no data records have been added since the last initialization of the archive memory. (Continues…)

2

The flow computer provides three distinct methods of storing data. These are as follows: 1) Raw Data Archive

Data records are defined and stored in raw binary format in circular files of 'n' records per file. Ten user configurable files are provided as well as an alarm file and audit trail file. This data can be retrieved using standard Modbusä Function Codes 3 and 6.

2) Text Archive Data

ASCII data which is captured and saved whenever a Snapshot, Daily, Batch End or Prove report is printed. Data is stored chronologically. To retrieve this data you must use OmniComä, OmniViewä or a custom Modbus driver which understands the proprietary Omni Modbus Function Codes 64 and 65.

3) Historical Reports These are exact copies of data that was sent to the local printer in ASCII format. The flow computer stores the last eight copies of each of the following reports: Daily, Batch End and Prove. Method 3 is limited to storing the last eight reports and is therefore not considered archive data. Therefore this chapter will be limited to describing how Methods 1 and 2 are used to store archive data within the flow computer.

Raw Data Archiving A maximum of ten archive files can be user configured. Two additional archive files, the alarm archive and audit trail archive are also included but are fixed in format and cannot be user configured. Each user configurable archive file consists of 'n' archive records, where 'n' is defined by the user. A record consists of a time and date stamp followed by a number of user defined variables of any valid data type as described by its archive record definition table. The amount of memory an archive consumes is calculated by multiplying the record size in bytes times the number of records in the archive. Associated with each archive file is an archive trigger Boolean. Data is captured and stored in each of the archive files whenever the appropriate trigger occurs; e.g., at the end of a batch or beginning of the day, etc. Three additional registers per archive file serve to indicate (a) maximum number of records, (b) current record pointer and (c) requested record to read pointer.


TB-960703

Storing Archive Data within the Flow Computer

Retrieving Data Definitions & Terminology (…Continued) Maximum Records Register - A 16-bit readonly integer adjacent to the ‘Current Record Pointer’ which contains the number ‘n’, indicating the maximum number of records within the archive file. Requested Record Pointer - A 16-bit read/write integer used to select a specific record within an archive file. Time and Date Stamp - Six bytes of binary data representing the date and time that the archive record was stored. The byte order is as follows: q Byte 1 = Month (1-12) or Day (1-31) q Byte 2 = Day (1-31) or Month (1-12) q Byte 3 = Year (0-99) q Byte 4 = Hour of Day (023) q Byte 5 = Minute (0-59) q Byte 6 = Seconds (0-59) q European Format Selected (dd/mm/yy) Valid Data Types q 32-bit IEEE floating point data q 32-bit long integer data q 16-bit integer data q 8-byte ASCII string data; byte packed Boolean status data

Data records are retrieved one record at a time by writing the number of the record required, to the requested record pointer register. The data can then be accessed immediately by a block read of the archive address. Data must be read as one complete block. Also, because the flow computer always responds with a complete record, the 'number of registers' field of the Modbus poll request is ignored by the flow computer. The following record retrieval method is simple and efficient; it works well assuming that there is only one host device retrieving data. The method assumes that the number of the last record retrieved is left in the requested record pointer within the flow computer. This will not be the case when more than one host device will be retrieving data; in this case each host device must know the number of the last record it retrieved. 1) Read the maximum records register, current record pointer and requested record pointer. These registers are adjacent to each other in the flow computers database. 2) A current record pointer value of 0 indicates that the archive file has been initialized (i.e. cleared to binary zeroes/ASCII Nulls) and no trigger event has occurred since initialization). 3) Compare the contents (just read) of the current record pointer with the requested record pointer. 4) If the records numbers are equal no additional records have been added since the last read and no further action is needed. 5) If the record numbers are not equal, increment the value of requested record pointer. 6) If the resultant value is greater than the value obtained from the maximum record pointer, roll-over has occurred and record number one should be retrieved by writing '1' to the requested record pointer register. Otherwise write the incremented value to the requested record pointer register. 7) After writing to the requested record pointer register in the flow computer, the selected archive record can be read immediately using Modbus function '3' (read multiple registers). Archive file addresses are in the 700 area of the flow computers database (i.e., archive file 1 = 701, archive file 2 = 702 etc.). 8) Repeat steps 3 through 7 until all records are read. During the normal course of events, the host attempts to read the next record in sequence based on the number of the last record it retrieved. An archive record containing binary 0s indicates that the archive has been initialized since the last read and that the host should restart by reading record number one (assuming that the current record pointer is not 0).


3


Technical Bulletin

Raw Data Archive Point Addresses

4

Archive #1

Record Access Address Access Record Date/Time Only Maximum # of Records Last Record Updated Pointer Record Req To Read Pointer

Read Only Read Only Read Only Read Only Read/Write

0701 0751 3701 3702 3703

Archive #2



0702 0752 3704 3705 3706

Archive #3



0703 0753 3707 3708 3709

Archive #4



0704 0754 3710 3711 3712

Archive #5



0705 0755 3713 3714 3715

Archive #6



0706 0756 3716 3717 3718

Archive #7



0707 0757 3719 3720 3721

Archive #8



0708 0758 3722 3723 3724

Archive #9



0709 0759 3725 3726 3727


TB-960703


Archive #10

Record Access Address Access Record Date/Time Only Maximum # of Records Last Record Updated Pointer Record Req To Read Pointer4


0710 0760 3728 3729 3730

Alarm Archive Record Access Address Access Record Date/Time Only Maximum # of Records Last Record Updated Pointer Record Req To Read Pointer


0711 0761 3731 3732 3733

Audit Archive


0712 0762 3734 3735 3736


Archive Configuration Changes Archive configuration changes can be made via OmniCom or directly from the key-pad of the flow computer. As the OmniCom program includes extensive help screens which document this subject, this appendix will concentrate on configuring the archive features via the keypad. From the Display Mode press [Prog] [Setup] [Enter]. The LCD screen displays: *** SETUP MENU *** Misc Configuration _ Time/Date Setup Station Setup Select 'Misc. Configuration' and press [Enter]. The following displays: *** MISC SETUP *** Password Maint?(Y) _ Check Modules ?(Y) Config Station?(Y) Select 'Password Maint' and press [Enter]. Enter the privileged password when prompted and scroll down the screen until the following is displayed: PASSWORD MAINTENANCE Reconfig Archive ? Y Archive Run?(Y/N) N Reset All Totals ?


5


Technical Bulletin

Setting the 'Reconfig Archive' Flag Any configuration changes that are made to any of the archive files such as changes to the size or number of records will force the flow computer to reallocate and clear to zero the RAM memory used to store archive data. To avoid accidental data loss, the flow computer requires that two entries are manipulated correctly before changes to the archive configuration can be made. The 'Reconfig Archive' flag must be set to 'Y’ and the Archive Run' flag must be set to 'N'.

Possible Loss of Data when Starting and Stopping the Archive To conserve archive storage, the user may on some occasions wish to set the 'Archive Run' flag to 'N' . This can be done at any time without loss of existing data as long as the 'Reconfig Archive' flag is not set to 'Y'. If the 'Reconfig Archive' flag is accidentally set to 'Y' no data will be lost until the 'Archive Run' flag is set to 'Y' (this allows the user to retrieve data before it is lost).

Defining the Archive Records After setting the 'Reconfig Archive' flag to 'Y' as described above, press the [Prog] key once to return to the 'Misc Setup' menu. It will be possible to define or change any archive file configuration by scrolling down the display until the following screen is displayed: *** MISC SETUP *** Archive File "n" _ Enter a number between 1 and 10 to select a specific archive file to modify (1 for example). The following screen will display: ARCHIVE 701 RECORD #1 Index 0 #1 Points 0 #2 Index 0 #2 Points 0 Begin entering the data that you require to be archived. The example below will cause variables 7101, 7102, 7103, 5101, 5102 and 5103 to be archived. INFO - The ‘Alarm’ and ‘Audit Trail’ archive files are fixed format and cannot be changed.

6

ARCHIVE 701 RECORD #1 Index 7101 #1 Points 3 #2 Index 5101 #2 Points 3


TB-960703


A maximum of 16 groups of variables may be included in an archive record. Data can be of any valid type. The record is limited to a total of 250 data bytes remembering that the time and date stamp included in each record occupies 6 bytes. Scrolling down the screen displays the following: ARCHIVE 701 RECORD Max Records 0 Trig Boolean 0 Circular Archive File - A file of ‘n’ records arranged as a circular buffer which always contains the most recent ‘n’ records; i.e., the oldest data record is overwritten by each new record as it is added.

Enter the maximum number of archive records to be contained within this circular archive file. At the 'Trig Boolean' entry, enter the database address of the Boolean trigger which will cause the flow computer to store the archive data record. For example, entering 1831 (the 'hour start’ flag) would cause the flow computer to store data at hourly intervals. Once you have entered all the necessary data for all of the archive records return to the following screen which is in the 'Password Maintenance' menu. Reconfig Archive ? Y Archive Run (Y/N) N

INFO - Redefining the archive Boolean trigger does not cause the archive RAM to be cleared.

Set 'Reconfig Archive' to 'N' and 'Archive Run' to 'Y'. At this point the flow computer will reinitialize archive RAM memory and attempt to allocate memory as configured.

How The Available Memory Is Allocated Approximately 250,000 bytes of memory are available for the storage of archived data, this includes 'Raw Data' and 'ASCII Text Data'. Archive memory is allocated dynamically, i.e. the memory required to satisfy the 'Raw Data Archive' is allocated first, one archive file at a time. The memory remaining after the Raw Data Archive files are setup is what is used by the Text Archive described later.


7


Technical Bulletin

Checking The Archive File Memory Status Screens The 'Archive File Memory Status' screens display automatically whenever the user attempts to re-start data archiving for the first time after reconfiguring the archive structure. These screens can also be accessed at any time by pressing 'Setup' 'Status' 'Display' while in the display mode. A correctly configured archive structure is indicated by the following screen. INFO - The number of files allocated changes depending on how many archive files have been configured

ARCHIVE FILE STATUS Archive Memory OK Files Allocated 3 An incorrectly configured archive structure is indicated by the following screen. ARCHIVE FILE STATUS Archive Memory Error Files Allocated 3 Archive memory errors are caused when RAM memory is insufficient for the number and size of archive files configured. In this case the 'Start Archive' command is ignored and the flow computer allocates memory to as many archive files as possible. The number on the 'Files Allocated' line of the display shows how many files were allocated before the memory ran out. Scroll down the screen to see the actual number of bytes allocated to each archive file. All remaining memory not allocated to the 'Raw Data Archive Files' is allocated to the 'Text Archive' buffer. The display below is typical. ARCHIVE FILE STATUS 709 ArcSize 10000 710 ArcSize 8192 TextArcSize 100256

8


TB-960703


Summary 0f Raw Data Archiving Features o Ten independent archive files are available for user configuration. o Two additional archive files, the 'alarm event log' and 'audit trail log' are provided. o Archive files consist of multiple records in a circular array. o Mixed types of variable data can be stored in records of 250 bytes maximum. o Except for the 'alarm log' and 'audit trail log', content and maximum number of records in an archive file are configurable. o Data is read in block form one record at a time. o Each archive has a unique address (701, 702, 703, etc.). o Each archive has a set of integer registers used to indicate most current record pointer, maximum number of records, and required record pointer. o Data is captured and stored in an archive file whenever the appropriate trigger event occurs. o Multiple archive files can be controlled by the same trigger event. o Empty archive records contain binary 0’s / ASCII Null characters. o To avoid errors, host devices reading archive data should dynamically determine the record pointer roll over value based on the number of record integers read each time from the flow computer. o Any configuration changes made to the archive setup such as redefinition of any record or change in the number of records within any archive will cause all data stored in the entire archive system to be reset. To prevent accidental erasure of all archived data the user must first halt all archiving by setting the ‘Archive Run/Halt Flag' to false (0), and setting the 'Config Archive Flag' to true (1).


9


Technical Bulletin

Raw Data Archive Definition: Alarm/Event Log and Audit Event Log Alarm/Event Log Record Structure: Archive File Address 711 Note: Alarm types are: 0 = Log event, sound beeper and display in LCD any edge change in bit identified by field #3. 1 = Log event, sound beeper and display in LCD rising edge changes in bit identified by field #3 2 = Event log any edge change in bit identified by field #3. No beeper or LCD display action. 3 = Event log rising edge changes in bit identified by field #3. No beeper or LCD display action. Rising edge change means 0 to1 transition.

Field #1

3-Byte Date

(MM, DD, YY or DD, MM, YY)

Field #2

3-Byte Time

(HH, MM, SS)

Field #3

16-Bit Integer

(Modbus Index # of alarm or event)

Field #4

1 Byte

(Alarm Type - see sidebar)

Field #5

1 Byte

(Boolean Value, 1 or 0 representing Alarm or OK)

Field #6

IEEE Float

(Value of transducer variable at the time of alarm or event)

Field #7

32-Bit Integer

(Volume totalizer at time of event or alarm)

Field #8

32-Bit Integer

(Mass totalizer at the time of the event or alarm)

Audit Event Log Record Structure: Archive File Address 712.

Note: Fields 5 and 6 are set to 0.0 when the variable type changed is String. Fields 7 and 8 contain null characters when the variable type changed is NOT a string. When fields 7 and 8 contain 8 character strings the remaining 8 characters are padded with nulls.

Field #1

3-Byte Date

(MM, DD, YY or DD, MM, YY)

Field #2

3-Byte Time

(HH, MM, SS)

Field #3

16-Bit Integer

(Event number, increments for each event, rolls at 65535)

Field #4

16-Bit Integer

(Modbus index of variable changed)

Field #5

IEEE Float

(Numeric variable value before change - old value)

Field #6

IEEE Float

(Numeric variable value after change - new value)

Field #7

16-Char ASCII (String variable value before change - old value)

Field #8

16-Char ASCII (String variable value after change - new value)

Field #9

32-Bit Integer

Field #10 32-Bit Integer

10

(Volume totalizer at time of change) (Mass totalizer at the time of the change)


TB-960703


Using The Custom Reports to Access the Text Archive Feature The actual data which will be archived in the 'Text Archive' buffer is identified within the body of a 'User Custom Report Template'. This is done by enclosing the data in question between braces '{}' and preceding the opening brace '{' character with either Boolean 1000 (archive the data identified between the braces) or Boolean 2000 (print and archive the data identified between the braces). In the example 'Batch End' report shown below, the first half of the report will be printed and stored in the 'Text Archive' while the second half of the report will not print but will be stored in the 'Text Archive'.

The user has embedded a Boolean point address 2000 to indicate that the following data enclosed by the ‘{…}’ characters is to be printed and archived. When embedding the point, set the width=1 and number of decimal places=0.

The User has embedded a Boolean point address 1000 to indicate that the following data enclosed by the ‘{…}’ characters is to be archived only and not printed. When embedding the point, set the width=1 and number of decimal places=0.

INFO - Data is archived only when the report is processed for the first time. Reprinting a stored report does not cause any data to be stored in the archive.


X{ Batch Report Date :

XX/XX/XX

Company Name Time : XX:XX:XX

Meter ID XXXXXXXX Product ID XXXXXXXX API Table Selected XXXXXXXX Batch Start Date XX/XX/XX Batch Start Time XX:XX:XX Batch End Date XX/XX/XX Batch End Time XX:XX:XX Batch Gross (IV) BBL XXXXXXXXX Batch Net (GSV) BBL XXXXXXXXX Batch Mass LB XXXXXXXXX X{ Opening Gross (IV) BBL XXXXXXXXX Opening Net (GSV) BBL XXXXXXXXX Opening Mass LB XXXXXXXXX Closing Gross (IV) BBL XXXXXXXXX Closing Net (GSV) BBL XXXXXXXXX Closing Mass LB XXXXXXXXX Batch Flow Weighted Averages: Gross Flow (IV) BBL/HR XXXXXX.X Temperature Deg.F XXXXXX.X Pressure PSIG XXXXXX.X Flowing Density GM/CC XXXXXX.X API @ 60 Deg.F XXXXXX.X VCF X.XXXX CPL X.XXXX Meter Factor X.XXXX }

Computer ID :

XXXXXXX

XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX/XX/XX XX:XX:XX XX/XX/XX XX:XX:XX XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX

XXXXXXXX

XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX}

XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX

XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX

XXXXX.X XXXXX.X XXXXX.X XXXXX.X XXXXX.X X.XXXX X.XXXX X.XXXX

The template files shown below can be used to archive text data whenever the report is processed. 1) 2) 3) 4)

'FILENAME.TP1' 'FILENAME.TP2' 'FILENAME.TP3' 'FILENAME.TP4'

Snapshot Report Batch Report Daily Report Prover Report

11


Technical Bulletin

Custom Report Templates A default selection of files with the extension 'TP?' are created automatically when OmniCom is installed, They can be found in the 'OMNI2?' subdirectories. For example the OMNI20 subdirectory contains the following template files:

Note:

*

To avoid duplication and conserve disk space these templates do not have matching TP1, TP2 and TP3 templates. Select TP1 though TP3 from the appropriate set (A, B, C or D) above depending on independent or common product.

REV20A.TP1

Interval Report

Independent Products

REV20A.TP2

Batch Report


REV20A.TP3

Daily Report


REV20A.TP4

Prove Report


REV20B.TP1

Interval Report


REV20B.TP2

Batch Report


REV20B.TP3

Daily Report


REV20B.TP4

Prove Report


REV20C.TP1

Interval Report

Common Product

REV20C.TP2

Batch Report

Common Product

REV20C.TP3

Daily Report

Common Product

REV20C.TP4

Prove Report

Common Product

REV20D.TP1

Interval Report

Common Product

REV20D.TP2

Batch Report

Common Product

REV20D.TP3

Daily Report

Common Product

REV20D.TP4

Prove Report

Common Product

REV20E.TP4*

Prove Report

Master Meter Method

REV20M.TP4*

Prove Report

Mass Meter Proving

Normal Pipe Prover

REV20MC.TP4* Prove Report

Mass Meter Proving

Double Chronometry

REV20LC.TP4* Prove Report

Double Chronometry

Viscosity Linearization

REV20LP.TP4* Prove Report

Pipe Prover

Viscosity Linearization

Double Chronometry

Normal Pipe Prover

Double Chronometry

Normal Pipe Prover

Templates can only be accessed if they exist; i.e., if you are currently working on 'FILENAME.OMI' opening the custom templates will just create an empty file. You must first create a set of templates by copying the appropriate sample templates as follows: 1) At the OmniCom File menu select 'Shell to DOS'. 2) Type the following to create a set of custom templates for a common product system using a full sized pipe prover (assumes Rev. 20.xx application): COPY OMNI20\REV20D.TP? OMNI20\filename.TP? 3) Type EXIT to return to OmniCom. In the above example OMNI20 is the sub directory which contains all files related to Application Revision 20. Likewise OMNI24 refers to Revision 24 applications.

12



Date: 07

23

96


TB # 960704

Communicating with Honeywellä ä ST3000/STT3000 Smart Transmitters Contents User Manual Reference This technical bulletin complements the information contained in the User Manual, and is applicable to all firmware revisions. This bulletin was previously published as an appendix to user manuals of firmware revisions Version .70 and earlier.

Communication with Honeywellä ä ST3000/STT3000 Smart Transmitters - This feature allows you to communicate with Honeywell Smart Temperature and Pressure Transmitters, via Omni’s H type Process I/O Combo Module and using Honeywell’s DE Protocol.

Scope .............................................................................................................. 1 Abstract........................................................................................................... 1 Digitally Enhanced (DE) Protocol Overview ................................................. 2 Transmitter Database..................................................................................... 2 Using the Honeywellä ä Handheld Communicator......................................... 3 Combo Module LED Status Indicators.......................................................... 3 Switching Between Analog and Digital Mode............................................... 4 Auto Mode ................................................................................................................4 Manual Operation .....................................................................................................4

Viewing the Status of the Honeywellä ä Transmitter from the Omni Front Panel ............................................................................................................... 4

Scope All firmware revisions of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computers have the feature of communicating with Honeywellä ST3000 Smart Transmitters. This feature uses Honeywell’s Digitally Enhanced (DE) Protocol and requires that an H Combo I/O Module be installed in your flow computer.

Abstract Using 'H' Combo I/O Modules, the Omni Flow Computer can communicate with Honeywellä Smart Temperature and Pressure Transmitters using Honeywell’s DE Protocol. Up to 4 transmitters can be connected to each 'H' Type Combo Module, with loop power being provided by the combo module.


1


Technical Bulletin

Digitally Enhanced (DE) Protocol Overview Digital data is transmitted serially between the flow computer and Honeywell Smart Transmitters by modulating the current in the two wire loop connecting the devices. Power for the transmitter is also taken from this current loop. Data is transmitted at 218.47 bits per second with a digital '0' = 20 mA and a digital '1’ = 4 mA. In normal operation, the Honeywell transmitter operates in the '6-byte Broadcast Mode'. In this mode, the transmitter transmits the following data to the flow computer every 366 msec: Byte #1 Status Flags Byte #2-#4 Process Variables % Span Value (3-byte floating point) Byte #5 Database ID (indicates where in the transmitters database Byte #6 below belongs) Byte #6 Database Data Value

Transmitter Database By using the data contained in Bytes #5 and #6, the flow computer builds and maintains an exact copy of the smart transmitters configuration database. A transmitter database varies in size from about 90 bytes for a pressure transmitter to 120 bytes for a temperature transmitter. It takes between 30 and 45 seconds to completely build a copy of the transmitter database within the flow computer. The transmitter database is continuously compared against the flow computer configuration settings for that transmitter. The flow computer automatically corrects any differences between the databases by writing the correct configuration data to the transmitter.

2


Communicating with Honeywellä ä ST3000 Smart Transmitters

TB-960704

Using the Honeywellä ä Handheld Communicator The flow computer is responsible for configuring the following entries within the transmitter: 1) 2) 3) 4)

Lower Range Value (LRV) or Zero Transmitter Span or Upper Range Limit (URL) Damping Factor Tag Name

Any changes made to 1, 2 and 3 using the handheld communicator will be overwritten by the flow computer. In the digital mode it is not necessary to calibrate the transmitter output using the handheld communicator. The digital signal can be calibrated using the normal Omni analog input method described in Chapter 8 of Volume 1.

Combo Module LED Status Indicators Each I/O channel of the 'H' Combo module has a set of two LED indicators, one green and one red. The green LED shows all communication activity taking place on the channel (flow computer, transmitter and handheld communicator if connected). The Red LED lights only when the flow computer is transmitting data to the transmitter. Normal digital operation is indicated by a regular pulsation of the green LED (about 3 per second). The red LED will be seen to blink whenever a configuration change is made in the flow computer which affects that particular transmitter.


3


Technical Bulletin

Switching Between Analog and Digital Mode. Auto Mode Connecting an analog mode Honeywell smart transmitter to the computer will cause the flow computer to automatically switch the transmitter to the digital DE mode, sending out a communication request to the Honeywell transmitter. A switch over to the digital mode by the transmitter will cause the green LED on the H combo module to pulse steadily indicating that communications have been established.

Manual Operation For manual operation, do the following: 1. Disable communications between the Honeywell transmitter and the flow computer by deleting all I/O point assignments within the flow computer to that I/O point. 2. Using the Honeywell SFC, SCT or any Honeywell handheld communicator, press [Shift] [A/D] and wait till the handheld displays 'Change to Analog?' 3. Answer (Yes) by pressing [Enter]. ‘SFC Working’ will be displayed. The 'H' Combo module’s green LED on that channel will stop pulsing. 4. Re-enter the I/O point to cause the Omni to send the communication request command to the Honeywell and after three command sends the green LED on the Honeywell module will pulse at a steady 3Hz rate.

Viewing the Status of the Honeywellä ä Transmitter from the Omni Front Panel To verify the data being received from the smart transmitter, press [Input] [Status] and [Enter] from the front panel. The following displays: H1-2 Transmitter PV% 25.00 Status IDLE LRV .0 SPAN 150.0 Damp Sec. .00 Conformity bit 0 SW Revision 2.1 Serial # xxxxxxxx Transmitter Type GP URL 3000 ID/TAG PT202 SV .00

4



TB-960704

H1-2 Transmitter : Indicates the Honeywell Combo Module (H1) and the channel number on that module (Channel 2 in this case). PV%

: Process variable value in percentage of the transmitter’s span. A -25.00 displayed on the Omni could mean that the transmitter is not communicating (see Status definition below).

Status

: There are five status states. 1) OK

: Communications between the flow computer and smart Honeywell transmitter are OK. The database within the transmitter matches the flow computer.

2) Idle

: This flow computer I/O point has been assigned to a Honeywell transmitter but is not receiving data from the transmitter. Possible cause is a wiring problem such as reversal of wiring. If you observe the status LEDs you will note that the flow computer attempts to establish communications by sending a wake-up command every 10 seconds or so.

3) Bad PV : Communications between the flow computer and smart Honeywell transmitter are OK but the transmitter has determined that a critical error has occurred within the transmitter meaning the value of the process variable cannot be trusted. The flow computer will set the transducer failure alarm and follow the fail code strategy selected by the user for this transducer. 4) DB Error : Communications between the flow computer and smart Honeywell transmitter are OK but the flow Computer has determined that the database within the flow computer does not agree with the database within the transmitter. If you observe the status LEDs you will note that the flow computer attempts to correct the transmitters database by writing the correct data to the transmitter once every 30-45 seconds or so.


5


Technical Bulletin

5) 4 Byte

: The transmitter is operating in the 4-Byte Broadcast Mode. Because the flow computer will not tolerate this mode of operation, this status display should only be displayed momentarily as the flow computer will automatically switch the transmitter into the 6-Byte Broadcast Mode.

LRV

: Lower Range Value of the transmitter in engineering units. Engineering units are degrees Celsius for temperature transmitters, inches of water for differential pressure transmitters, and pounds per square inch for pressure transmitters.

Span

: The Span of the transmitter in engineering units (the Span is the difference between the lower and upper ranges of the transmitter). Engineering units are degrees Celsius for temperature transmitters, inches of water for differential pressure transmitters, and pounds per square inch for pressure transmitters. The flow computer will display ‘DB Error’ if the user tries to enter a span of 0% or a span which would exceed the transmitter’s upper range limit' (URL).

Damp Seconds

: Damping Time of the transmitter output in seconds.

Conformity Bit

: Meaningful only with differential pressure transmitters. Conformity Bit 0 = linear output; Conformity Bit 1 = square root output. This bit should always be 0 for smart temperature transmitters.

Software Revision : Current Software installed within the smart device. Serial #

: Serial Number of the smart transmitter.

Transmitter Type : Valid transmitter types are: TT = Temperature Transmitter DP = Differential Pressure Transmitter GP = Gauge Pressure Transmitter

6



TB-960704


URL

: Upper Range Limit of the transmitter in engineering units. The transmitter will not accept configuration entries which exceed this value.

ID/TAG

: ASCII string used to identify the transmitter.

SV

: Secondary Process Variable Value expressed in °C. This represents sensor temperature for pressure transmitters, and junction temperature for temperature transmitters. The flow computer may or may not have a value in this field, depending upon whether the SV is included in the part of the transmitter’s database which is sent to the Omni.

7


Date: 07

02

97


TB # 970701

Stability Requirements: Final Calibration of Flow Computer Contents User Manual Reference This technical bulletin complements the information contained in Volume 1, and is applicable to Revision 20.70/24.70+. This bulletin was previously published with a different page layout.

Scope .............................................................................................................. 1 Abstract........................................................................................................... 1 Instructions .................................................................................................... 1

Scope All Omni 6000/3000 Flow Computers have calibration stability requirements.

Abstract Because of the temperature sensitivity and bit resolutions of the A/D and D/A converters, and the high accuracy requirements, it is important that the following procedures are followed when calibrating flow computer I/O circuits.

Instructions (1) Adjust the power supply to give 5.05-5.10 volts at backplane test points. (2) All final calibrations must be performed using the matching set of combo modules and power supply module (i.e. changing the power supply or adjusting the voltage during the final calibration requires that a sample calibration made up to that point be checked. If there is a noticeable change, all calibrated points should be rechecked). (3) Before calibrating, eliminate temperature gradient errors by closing the box and allowing at least 20 minutes for temperature stabilization to occur. Ensure that unit is not in a high air draft area (i.e. in the path of a fan or AC duct) Make adjustments such as jumper repositioning quickly. Wherever possible keep the unit closed to retain internal heat. Board replacements will require that sufficient time be allowed to achieve temperature stability. (4) Observe temperature stability requirements of any equipment used in the calibration process (i.e., current and voltage generators, digital voltmeters etc.).

TB-970701 w ALL.70+

1


Date: 07

04

97


TB # 970702

Secondary Totalizers Provide Net Volume at Temperatures Other than 15°°C or 60°°F Contents User Manual Reference This technical bulletin complements the information contained in Volumes 2, 3 and 4, applicable to firmware revisions 20/24.71+ and 21/25.71+. This bulletin was previously published with a different page layout.

Scope .............................................................................................................. 1 Abstract........................................................................................................... 1 Database Location of Second Set of Net Totalizer Data Points .................. 2 Keypad Entries Needed to Display the Extra Totalizers .............................. 2

Scope All firmware Versions 20/24 and 21/25, Revisions.70+ of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computers have secondary net totalizers for when more than one reference temperature is required.

Abstract Some times it is necessary to provide net totalizers at more than one reference temperature. Following are the Modbus data points that are used to provide secondary net totalizers in the Omni. Secondary totalizers are calculated real time just like the normal totalizers. The secondary totalizers are activated by setting up floating point data point 7699 with the secondary reference temperature required. This data point is initialized to 0 at a cold start up which effectively disables the extra totalizers and their appearance on the Omni default reports (obviously, 0° cannot be used as a second reference temperature). You may set up 7699 with a simple variable statement. For example: 7699=#68 will provide a second set of net totalizers corrected to 68 degrees. You may also initialize point 7699 via a one time Modbus write. If you choose to use the statement method you may remove the statement immediately after you enter it, but you should probably leave it to serve as a document trail. Note that the Omni initializes point 7699 to 0.0 on a cold boot. A cold boot occurs after a ‘Clear All Ram’ command is executed.

TB-970702 w ALL.70+

1


Technical Bulletin

Database Location of Second Set of Net Totalizer Data Points CURRENT BATCH

PREVIOUS BATCH

CURRENT DAILY

PREVIOUS DAY

Meter #1 Meter #2 Meter #3

5196 5296 5396

5198 5298 5398

5197 5297 5397

5199 5299 5399

Meter #4 Station

5496 5896

5498 5898

5497 5897

5499 5899

Keypad Entries Needed to Display the Extra Totalizers Secondary totalizers are viewed using the same key presses used to view the normal net totalizers. For example: pressing [Meter] [n] [Net] or [Net] [Meter] [n] will display meter ‘n’ net flow rates and totalizers followed by the secondary net totalizers. Pressing [Meter] [n] [Batch] [Net] will display the batch net totalizer followed by the secondary batch net totalizer. Likewise, the Station secondary totals are viewed using the same key presses that are used to view the normal station net total. Pressing [Net] will display the station net totalizer followed by the secondary net totalizer. Pressing [Batch] [Net] will display the station batch net totalizer followed by the secondary batch net totalizer.

2

TB-970702 w ALL.70+


Date: 08

04

97


TB # 970801

Using Boolean Statements to Provide Custom Alarms in the Flow Computer Contents Scope .............................................................................................................. 1 Abstract........................................................................................................... 1 Example: ..................................................................................................................2

Scope User Manual Reference This technical bulletin complements the information contained in the User Manual, and is applicable to all firmware revisions Version .70+. This bulletin was previously published with a different page layout.

All firmware revisions Version .70+ of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computers have the feature of customizing alarms with Boolean statements.

Abstract The flow computer automatically records and logs many important alarm events and status changes. These events include transducer ‘Low Alarm and High Alarm’ states and failure of any transducer connected to the flow computer which is measurement related. There are instances however where the flow computer user would like to monitor other internal or external status events that may have nothing to do with the measurement functions. These alarms may be the result of a digital I/O point changing state, or the result of a Boolean logic statement or a variable statement comparison. Because of this requirement, the last 16 Boolean statements of the flow computer serve the dual function of evaluating normal logic expressions, and also providing user configurable alarm messages. The alarm message text to be logged and displayed can be entered into the expression fields in any of these last 16 Boolean statements. These statement numbers are, 1057 through 1072 for flow computers with 48 Boolean statements, and 1073 through 1088 for computers with 64 statements. Each Boolean statement has an associated status point which is accessed using the same address as the statement number (Modbus Point 1072 for instance). The logic state of this status bit normally reflects the logical result of the statement (1 or 0, true or false). When the statement is used to provide a custom alarm message it functions in a different manner. To cause an alarm message to be logged, simply turn on the status point associated with the message.

TB-970801 w ALL.70+

1


Technical Bulletin

Example: In this example, the user wishes to monitor a tank level switch that is connected to Digital I/O Point #1. When the tank level is high, the level switch applies 24 volts to the digital I/O point. Digital I/O Point #1 is first assigned to the Dummy Boolean 1700, this reserves the Point as a digital Input . Modbus Point 1001 will simply follow the digital level applied to the terminals of digital point #1. Had it been Digital Point #22, Modbus Point 1022 would be affected. 1025:

1072=1001

Move logic value of Digital I/O #1 into Point 1072.

· · · 1072:

High Level Alarm

Actual ‘alarm text’ which appears in alarm log.

Statement 1025 (above) is used to transfer the logic state of Digital I/O Point #1 to Point 1072, activating the user alarm whenever 24 volts is applied to the input terminals by the ‘tank high level’ switch contacts.

2

TB-970801 w ALL.70+


Date: 08

08

97


TB # 970802

Omni Flow Computer Modbusä ä Database: Overview Contents User Manual Reference This technical bulletin complements the information contained in Volume 4 “Modbus Database Address and Index Numbers”, applicable to all firmware revisions .70+. This bulletin was previously published with a different page layout.

Modbus Database Modbus function codes are shown in hexadecimal th notation. The 4 digit (from the right) of the data point address defines the data type.

TB-970802 w ALL.70+

Scope .............................................................................................................. 1 Abstract........................................................................................................... 2 Omni Flow Computer Modbusä ä Database Extents...................................... 4 I/O Driver Concerns When Interfacing to Omni Equipment....................... 12 For Example:.................................................................................................................................. 12

Write Single Variable - Modbus Function 06 ............................................................12 Address Ranges - Future Expansion .......................................................................12

Scope All firmware revisions Versions 70+ of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computers are characterized by a Modbus database structured as described in this technical bulletin.

1


Technical Bulletin

Abstract The following are the data types within the database: Digital Flag Bits

: Also known as Boolean bits, status bits and command bits. All data points of this type can be read via Modbus function code 01 and written to using function codes 05 and 0F . Function codes 01 and 0F transfer byte packed data that is sent in the byte order they are prepared (not word order). Points are packed eight to a byte, packing from least significant to most significant Unused bit positions within a byte are cleared on transmission from the Omni and ignored by the Omni when receiving. Writing to status points is allowed but normally is pointless as the status point will be refreshed by the Omni every 500 ms. Valid addresses for this type of data are: 1XXX i.e. 1101, 1705, 1921 etc.

16-bit Integer Registers

: All data points of this type can be read via Modbus function code 03 and written to using function codes 06 and 10. Byte order transmitted is: MS byte then LS byte. Valid addresses for this type of data are: X3XXX i.e. 3121, 13133 etc.

8-character ASCII Strings : All data points of this type can be read via Modbus function code 03 and written to using function code 10 (note that function code 06 is not available on this data type). Byte order transmitted is as you would type it. Valid addresses for this type of data are: 4XXX i.e. 4101, 4502 etc. 32-bit Integer Registers

: Formatted as two’s complement. All data points of this type can be read via Modbus function 03 and written to using function codes 06 and 10. Byte order transmitted is: MS byte of MS word, LS byte of MS word, MS byte of LS word then LS byte of LS word. Valid addresses for this data type are: X5XXX i.e. 5101, 15205 etc.

2

TB-970802 w ALL.70+

TB-970802

Omni Flow Computer Modbusä ä Database: Overview

32-bit IEEE Floating Point : All data points of this type can be read via Modbus function 03 and written to using function codes 06 and 10. Byte order transmitted is: Mantissa Sign bit/Exponent byte, LS Exponent bit/MS mantissa byte, middle significant mantissa byte then LS mantissa byte. Valid addresses for this data type are: X7XXX i.e. 7210, 17006 etc. 16-character ASCII Strings : All data points of this type can be read via Modbus function code 03 and written to using function code 10 (note that function code 06 is not available for this data type). Byte order transmitted is as you would type it. Valid addresses for this type of data are: 14XXX i.e. 14001, 14022 etc.

TB-970802 w ALL.71+

3


Technical Bulletin

Omni Flow Computer Modbusä ä Database Extents Data within the Omni Flow Computer data base is organized in logical groups. Certain data written to the Omni requires special processing to occur in the Omni before it is stored in the data base. Other data is grouped together because it is related in function i.e. a collection of real-time data for a specific process. The list that follows shows the extent of each table or set of data points within the data base. Because the sets of data are not connected, data from adjacent sets cannot be read or written in the same poll.

Omni Flow Computer Modbusä ä Database Extents DATA POINT ADDRESS

DATA TYPE

APPLICABLE M ODBUS FUNCTION CODES (HEX)

COMMENTS

Used to Read/Write

03 00001

Mixed

03 (06) (10) 03

00201

Mixed

03 (06) (10) 03

4

00401

Mixed

0701

Mixed

03

0702

Mixed

03

0703

Mixed

03

0704

Mixed

03

0705

Mixed

03

0706

Mixed

03

0707

Mixed

03

0708

Mixed

03

0709

Mixed

03

0710

Mixed

03

03 (06) (10)

User-defined read only packet - Omni native mode. User-defined array - Modicon compatible. User-defined read only packet - Omni native mode. User defined array - Modicon compatible. User-defined read only packet - Omni native mode. User defined array - Modicon compatible. #1 User defined data archive record Firmware Revisions .70+. #2 User defined data archive record Firmware Revisions .70+. #3 User defined data archive record Firmware Revisions .70+. #4 User defined data archive record Firmware Revisions .70+. #5 User defined data archive record Firmware Revisions .70+. #6 User defined data archive record Firmware Revisions .70+. #7 User defined data archive record Firmware Revisions .70+. #8 User defined data archive record Firmware Revisions .70+. #9 User defined data archive record Firmware Revisions .70+. #10 User defined data archive record - Firmware Revisions .70+.

TB-970802 w ALL.70+


TB-970802

Omni Flow Computer Modbusä ä Database Extents (Continued)

DATA POINT ADDRESS

DATA TYPE


COMMENTS

Used to Read (Write)

0711

Mixed

03

0712

Mixed

03

Status & Command

01, (05), (OF)

Status

01

Status

01

Status

01

Status

01

Status & Command

01, (05), (OF)

Status & Command

01, (05), (OF)

Status

01

Status

01

Status

01

Status

01

Status

01

Status

01

Status

01

1001 to 1099 1101 to 1199 1201 to 1299 1301 to 1399 1401 to 1499 1501 to 1699 1701 to 1799 1801 to 1899 1901 to 1999 1301 to 1399 2001 to 2100 2101 to 2199 2201 to 2299 2301 to 2399

TB-970802 w ALL.71+

Alarm/Event Log archive record Firmware Revisions .70+. Audit Log archive record - Firmware Revision Versions .70+.

Point 1600 is a dummy point included to concatenate tables 15XX and 16XX.

Reserved for Future Expansion currently will return error exception 02 (illegal data address).

5


Technical Bulletin


DATA POINT ADDRESS

DATA TYPE


COMMENTS


2401 to 2499 2501 to 2699 2701 to 2799 2801 to 2899 2901 to 2999 3001 to 3099 3101 to 3199 3201 to 3299 3301 to 3399 3401 to 3499 3501 to 3599 3601 to 3699 3701 to 3799 3801 to 3899 3901 to 3999

6

Status

01

Status

01

Status & Command

01, (05), (OF)

Status

01

Status

01

16-bit Integer Register

03, (06), (10)


03, (06), (10)


03, (06), (10)


03, (06), (10)


03, (06), (10)


03, (06), (10)


03, (06), (10)


03, (06), (10)


03, (06), (10)


03, (06), (10)



TB-970802 w ALL.70+


TB-970802


DATA POINT ADDRESS

DATA TYPE


COMMENTS



TB-970802 w ALL.71+

8-character ASCII String

03, (10)


03, (10)


03, (10)


03, (10)


03, (10)


03, (10)


03, (10)


03, (10)


03, (10)


03, (10)

32-bit Integer 2s Complement

03, (06), (10)


03, (06), (10)


03, (06), (10)


03, (06), (10)


03, (06), (10)



7


Technical Bulletin


DATA POINT ADDRESS

DATA TYPE


COMMENTS



8


03, (06), (10)


03, (06), (10)


03, (06), (10)


03, (06), (10)


03, (06), (10)

32-bit IEEE Floating Point

03, (06), (10)

Applicable to Firmware Revisions 22/26.71+ only.


03, (06), (10)

32-bit, 2s Complement (Firmware Revision 23.70+ only).


03, (06), (10)



03, (06), (10)



03, (06), (10)

32-bit, 2s Complement (Firmware Revisions 23.70+ and 22/26.71+ only).


03, (06), (10)



03, (06), (10)



03, (06), (10)



03, (06), (10)


03, (06), (10)

Reserved for Future Expansion currently will return error exception 02 (illegal data address). Reserved for Future Expansion currently will return error exception 02 (illegal data address).

TB-970802 w ALL.70+


TB-970802


DATA POINT ADDRESS

DATA TYPE


COMMENTS



TB-970802 w ALL.71+


03, (06), (10)


03, (06), (10)


03, (06), (10)


03, (06), (10)


03, (06), (10)


03, (06), (10)


03, (06), (10)


03, (06), (10)


03, (06), (10)


03, (06), (10)


03, (06), (10)


03, (06), (10)


03, (06), (10)

ASCII Text Buffers

41, (42)

Applicable to Firmware Revisions 20/24.71+ and 22/26.71+ only.

Applicable to Firmware Revisions 20.71+ and 22/26.71+ only. Maximum of sixty-four 128-byte buffers per data point .

Reserved for Future Expansion - currently will return error exception 02 (illegal data address).

9


Technical Bulletin


DATA POINT ADDRESS

DATA TYPE


COMMENTS



10


03, (06), (10)


03, (06), (10)


03, (06), (10)


03, (06), (10)


03, (06), (10)


03, (06), (10)


03, (06), (10)


03, (06), (10)


03, (10)


03, (10)


03, (10)


03, (10)

Reserved for Future Expansion - currently will return error exception 02 (illegal data address). 32-bit IEEE Floating Point

03, (06), (10)


TB-970802 w ALL.70+


TB-970802


DATA POINT ADDRESS

DATA TYPE


COMMENTS


17001 to 17399 17401 to 17499 17501 to 17899 17901 to 18099 18101 to 18199 18200 to 49999

TB-970802 w ALL.71+


03, (06), (10)


03, (06), (10)

Not applicable to Firmware Revisions 22 & 26.


03, (06), (10)

Not applicable to Firmware Revisions 21/25 & 22/26.


03, (06), (10)



03, (06), (10)



11


Technical Bulletin

I/O Driver Concerns When Interfacing to Omni Equipment Most but not all of the data is grouped in blocks of 100 or so data points. These blocks in many cases are not connected. Limit requests for contiguous data across different blocks by examining the third digit from the right of the data point start and end addresses. If the digit is different break up the poll request.

For Example: An application requires data from points 7188, 7201 and 7210 to be read and displayed on screen. An intelligent I/O driver may determine that it is more efficient to read 23 data points starting with point 7188 and discard the unused data. In this particular example the Omni will transmit the data for points 7188 through 7199 and blank data will be returned for data points 7200 through 7210 because the data requested is in two different blocks within the Omni. To obtain the data correctly the I/O driver should determine that point 7188 and point 7201 are in different data blocks (because the third digit from the right changed from a 1 to a 2) and send out two data requests; one request for point 7188 and another for points 7201 through 7210.

Write Single Variable - Modbus Function 06 Omni software revisions 20.44 and greater implement this function on all 16-bit and 32-bit data points. Revisions prior to 20.44 implement function 06 on 16-bit integers only. To maintain compatibility with early Omni software revisions it may be advisable to use function 10 to write to single data points as well as multiple data points.

Address Ranges - Future Expansion Some of the address ranges specified in this document encompass more data than may be available on all applications at this time, Omni advises that for future compatibility any software driver developed should be able to support these address ranges.

12

TB-970802 w ALL.70+


Date: 08

12

97


TB # 970803

Meter Factor Linearization Contents User Manual Reference This technical bulletin complements the information contained in Volume 2 and Volume 3, applicable to Firmware Revision 22.70+/26.70+. This bulletin was previously published with a different page layout.

Scope .............................................................................................................. 1 Abstract........................................................................................................... 2 Meter Factor Linearization Function...........................................................................2 Meter Factor Validation and Control Chart Functions.................................................3

Scope Firmware Revisions 22.70+ and 26.70+ of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computers have the feature of Meter Factor Linearization. This feature applies to Turbine/Positive Displacement Liquid Flow Metering Systems (with Meter Factor Linearization).

TB-970803 w 22/26.70+

1


Technical Bulletin

Abstract Meter Factor Linearization Function Flowmeter performance varies depending upon flow rate and fluid viscosity. The flow computer can compensate for this variation in performance by applying a meter factor which is determined by interpolation of a ‘base meter factor curve’. The user develops this base meter factor curve by proving the flowmeter at various flow rates and determining the meter factors for those flow rates. A base meter factor curve must be developed for each product or fluid viscosity. The curve can consist of from one to twelve meter factor / flow rate points.

The MF is continuously adjusted for flowrate during a delivery. The MF is ‘flow weight’ averaged for the batch.

Prove Base Flowrate

Meter Factor The flow computer lifts or lowers the MF curve based on the MF obtained at the latest official flowmeter proving.

MF’s are normalized to the ‘Prove Base Flowrate’ for validation / comparison and historical archival purposes.

Flowrate

Fig. 1.

2

Base Meter Factor Curve

TB-970803 w 22/26.70+

TB-970803

Meter Factor Linearization

Meter Factor Validation and Control Chart Functions The second purpose of the base meter factor curve is also to act as a reference against which any meter factors developed during subsequent provings of the flowmeter can be compared. As an aid to this comparison the user specifies the base proving flow rate. This value is the flow rate which is considered to be the normal for the flowmeter concerned. For comparison purposes, each subsequent meter factor is normalized to the base proving flow rate and must pass two tests before it can be implemented. The first test checks that the calculated meter factor is within some maximum percentage deviation from the base curve. The second test verifies that the meter factor when normalized to the base proving flow rate is within some maximum percentage deviation from the historical average of the last ‘n’ meter factors. Only normalized and implemented meter factors are included in the historical average. The number ‘n’ can be one through 10.

Test 2 - Maximum Deviation Allowed From The Average of The Last ‘n’ Meter Factors

Meter Factor at Actual Flowrate (Passes Test 1)

Historical Average of Last ‘n’ Meter Factors

Base MF Curve

Test 1 - Maximum Deviation Allowed From Base Curve

Fig. 2.

TB-970803 w 22/26.71+

Meter Factor Normalized to Prove Base Flowrate (Fails Test 2)

The Function of the Meter Factor Base Curve

3


Date: 08

28

97


TB # 970804

Calculation of Natural Gas Net Volume and Energy: Using Gas Chromatograph, Product Overrides or Live 4-20mA Analyzer Inputs of Specific Gravity and Heating Value Contents User Manual Reference This technical bulletin complements the information contained i nVolume 3 , applicable to Revision 23.71/27.71. This bulletin was previously published with a different page format.

Natural Gas Net Volume and Energy Calculation Natural gas net volume and energy calculations apply to all gas flow computers, (firmware Revisions 23/27.71) shipped after July 1997. These calculations are considered using a gas chromatograph, product overrides, or live 4-20 mA analyzer inputs of specific gravity (SG) and heating value (HV).

TB-970804 w 23/27.71+

Scope .............................................................................................................. 1 Abstract ........................................................................................................... 2 Basic Calculation s ......................................................................................... 2 Critical Configuration Entries Which Affect the Calculation of Net Volume and Energy ..................................................................................................... 2 Density of Air at Base Condition ..............................................................................2 s Gas Relative Density (SG .).......................................................................................3 Gas Heating Value (HV )............................................................................................3 Key Analyzer Setup Menu Entries Neede .................................................................3 d No Gas Chromatograph Used - Manual Overrides Require ........................................................... d 3 Component Analysis Data Obtained From a Gas Chromatograp .................................................. h 4 Using Manual Overrides for Component Analysis Dat ................................................................... a 4 Component Analysis Data via a Serial Data Lin ............................................................................. k 4 Using Live Inputs for Heating Value, Specific Gravity, Nitrogen or Carbon Dioxid ......................... e 4

Scope Firmware Revisions 23.71+ and 27.71+ of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computers have the feature of Natural Gas Net Volume and Energy Calculation. This feature applies to Orifice/Turbine Gas Flow Metering Systems. This bulletin covers natural gas net volume and energy calculations using a gas chromatograph, product overrides, or live 4-20 mA analyzer inputs of specific gravity (SG) and heating value HV). (

1


Technical Bulletin

Abstract Gas compositional data needed by the flow computer to calculate flowing density, mass flow and energy flow of natural gas can be obtained from various sources. The following describes how the flow computer should be configured for each possible scenario.

Basic Calculations The basic calculations are: q Net Volume = Mass Flow / Density @ Base Conditions q Energy = Net Volume x Heating Value

(1) (2)

Density at Base Conditions can be obtained by one of the following methods: q q q q

(GC Relative Density) x (Density of Air @ Base Conditions) (Override Relative Density) x (Density of Air @ Base Conditions) (Live 4-20mA Relative Density) x (Density of Air @ Base Conditions) Calculated using Detailed Method of AGA 8

(3) (4) (5) (6)

Heating Value is obtained using one of the following methods: Heating Value Calculation The flow computer always calculates Heating Value using one of the mentioned standards, even if it is instructed not to use it. These calculated values are stored in the data base and can be used to compare against the values obtained from the GC or calorimeter. 7629=Mtr #1 calculated HV 7630=Mtr #2 calculated HV 7631=Mtr #3 calculated HV 7632=Mtr #4 calculated HV

q q q q

GC Analysis HV Manual Override HV Live 4-20mA HV Calculated using AGA 5, GPA 2172 or ISO 6976 (component analysis required)

(7) (8) (9) (10)

Component Analysis Data is obtained from one of the following sources: q q q q

Online Danalyzer or Applied Automation Gas Chromatograph Manual Overrides in the ‘Fluid Data Analysis’ menu Serial Communication Link Live 4-20mA SG, HV, N2 and CO2 (AGA 8 gross calculation methods only)

(11) (12) (13) (14)

Critical Configuration Entries Which Affect the Calculation of Net Volume and Energy Density of Air at Base Conditions This entry is in the ‘Factor Setup’ menu. Setting this entry to ‘0’ ensures that ‘gas density at base conditions’ is calculated using AGA 8. (method (6) previous page). Entering the ‘density of air at base conditions’ assuming a valid ‘gas relative density (SG)’ is available (see next paragraph) will override the AGA 8 calculation of ‘gas density at base conditions’. In this case ‘gas density at base conditions’ is calculated using either method (3), (4) or (5) (previous page).

2

TB-970804 w 23/27.71+

TB-970804

Calculation of Natural Gas Net Volume and Energy

Gas Relative Density (SG) This entry is located in the ‘Fluid Analysis Data’ menu. One entry per active product is required. It is mandatory that this field contain a valid value of ‘SG’ for all AGA 8 ‘gross’ calculation methods except for 1985 method #4. The data in this field can be manually entered or, automatically overwritten by a live 420mA input of ‘SG’ if it exists. This entry also serves as the GC ‘SG’ override if a GC is providing ‘gas relative density (SG)’ and a GC failure occurs. Entering a minus value in this field will force the flow computer to calculate ‘gas density at base conditions’ using AGA 8. (method (6) previous page). Entering the ‘gas relative density (SG)’ assuming a non zero ‘Density of Air @ Base Conditions’ is entered (see above) will override the AGA 8 calculation of ‘gas density at base conditions’. In this case ‘gas density at base conditions’ is calculated using either method (3), (4) or (5) (previous page). When an AGA 8 detailed method is selected and a GC is used to provide ‘gas relative density (SG)’, this entry field is ignored unless a GC failure occurs and the ‘GC Fail Code’ entry is set to ‘Use Override on GC Failure’.

Gas Heating Value (HV) This entry is located in the ‘Fluid Analysis Data’ menu. One entry per active product is required. It is mandatory that this field contain a valid value of ‘HV’ for AGA 8 ‘gross’ calculation method #1 and also AGA 8 1985 methods #2 and #4. The data in this field can be manually entered or, automatically overwritten by a live 4-20mA input of ‘HV’ if it exists. This entry also serves as the GC ‘HV’ override if a GC is providing ‘gas heating value (HV)’ and a GC failure occurs. Entering a minus value in this field will force the flow computer to use a ‘calculated gas heating value (HV)’ calculated using either AGA 5, GPA 2172 or ISO 6976 ( method (10) previous page). Entering a positive value into the ‘gas heating value (HV)’ entry will override the AGA 5, GPA 2172 or ISO 6976 calculation of ‘gas heating value (HV)’. When an AGA 8 detailed method is selected and a GC is used to provide ‘gas heating value (HV)’, this entry field is ignored unless a GC failure occurs and the ‘GC Fail Code’ entry is set to ‘Use Override on GC Failure’.

Key Analyzer Setup Menu Entries Needed The following text discusses only those key entries that must be made to ensure that the right values for component analysis are used in the calculation of Net Volume and Energy Flow.

No Gas Chromatograph Used - Manual Overrides Required Select ‘Always Use Fluid Data Overrides’ for ‘GC Fail Code’ in the ‘Analyzer Setup’ menu. No other entries are needed.

TB-970804 w 23/27.71+

3


Technical Bulletin

Component Analysis Data Obtained From a Gas Chromatograph Select either ‘Never Use Fluid Data Overrides’ or ‘On Fail Use Fluid Data Overrides’ for ‘GC Fail Code’ in the ‘Analyzer Setup’ menu to ensure that the GC data is used in place of the ‘Fluid Data & Analysis Data’ overrides’. Using the ‘GC’ Heating Value and Relative Density. To ensure that the heating value and relative density calculated by ‘GC’ are used in the calculations, make sure that component numbers are assigned for the ‘Heating Value’ and ‘Specific Gravity’ entries in the ‘Analyzer Setup’ menu. The number entered is not critical, simply use the next consecutive numbers after all the other components are numbered. Ignoring the ‘GC’ Heating Value and Relative Density. Entering ‘0’ for the component number for ‘Heating Value’ and ‘Specific Gravity’ entries in the ‘Analyzer Setup’ menu causes the flow computer to ignore the heating value and relative density sent by the GC and to use the override values entered in the ‘Fluid Data & Analysis Data’ menu.

Using Manual Overrides for Component Analysis Data Activate the ‘Fluid Data & Analysis’ entries by selecting ‘Always Use Fluid Data Overrides’ for ‘GC Fail Code’ in the ‘Analyzer Setup’ menu. No other entries are needed in the ‘Analyzer Setup’ menu. Enter the compositional analysis data values into the appropriate fields in the ‘Fluid Data & Analysis’ menu.

Component Analysis Data via a Serial Data Link Activate the ‘Fluid Data & Analysis’ entries by selecting ‘Always Use Fluid Data Overrides’ for ‘GC Fail Code’ in the ‘Analyzer Setup’ menu. No other entries are needed in the ‘Analyzer Setup’ menu. Compositional analysis data values should be written into the appropriate Modbus points normally containing the manual overrides in the ‘Fluid Data & Analysis’ menu.

Using Live Inputs for Heating Value, Specific Gravity, Nitrogen or Carbon Dioxide Activate the ‘Fluid Data & Analysis’ entries by selecting ‘Always Use Fluid Data Overrides’ for ‘GC Fail Code’ in the ‘Analyzer Setup’ menu. No other entries are needed in the ‘Analyzer Setup’ menu. In the ‘Station Configure’ menu, assign valid I/O points where 4-20mA and/or Solartron 3096 gravitometer signals will be connected. Input valid scaling factors in the ‘Station N2 / SG Setup’ menu. Note that override data fields in ‘Product #1’ entries of the ‘Fluid Data & Analysis Data’ menu are overwritten by live data values when 4-20mA inputs are used for HV, SG, N2 or CO2.

4

TB-970804 w 23/27.71+


Date: 09

01

97


TB # 970901

Dual Pulse Flowmeter Pulse Fidelity Checking Contents User Manual Reference This technical bulletin complements the information contained in Volumes 1, 3 and 4, and is applicable to firmware revisions 20/24, 22/26 and 23/27 Versions .71+, relating to helical turbine flowmeters. This bulletin was previously published with a different page layout.

Scope .............................................................................................................. 1 Abstract........................................................................................................... 2 Installation Practices...................................................................................... 2 How the Flow Computer Performs Fidelity Checking .................................. 3 Correcting Errors ........................................................................................... 3 Common Mode Electrical Noise and Transients.........................................................3 Noise Pulse Coincident with an Actual Flow Pulse.....................................................3 Total Failure of a Pulse Channel ...............................................................................4

Alarms and Displays ...................................................................................... 4 Pulse Fidelity Checking The dual pulse fidelity checking feature allows you to reduce flowmeter measurement uncertainty caused by added or missing pulses due to electrical transients or equipment failure.

Scope Firmware Revisions 20/24, 22/26 and 23/27 Versions.70+ of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computers have the feature of Dual Pulse Fidelity Checking. This feature applies to Turbine/Positive Displacement Liquid and Gas Flow Metering Systems.

TB-970901 w 20/24//22/26//23/27.70+

1


Technical Bulletin

Abstract The object of dual pulse fidelity checking is to reduce flowmeter measurement uncertainty caused by added or missing pulses due to electrical transients or equipment failure. Correct totalizing of flow must be maintained whenever possible. This is achieved by correct installation practices and by using turbine or positive displacement flowmeters which provide two pulse train outputs. In addition, an E Combo I/O Module must be installed and the correct configuration settings entered in the Omni Flow Computer. The two pulse trains are called the ‘A’ pulse and the ‘B’ pulse. In normal operation, both signals are equal in frequency and count but are always separated in phase or time. The API Manual of Petroleum Measurement Standards (Chapter 5, Section 5) describes several levels of pulse fidelity checking ranging from Level E to Level A. Level A is the most stringent method, requiring automatic totalizer corrections whenever the pulse trains are different for any reason. For all practical purposes, Level A as described in the API document is probably unachievable. The Omni Flow Computer implements a significantly enhanced Level B pulse security method by not only continuous monitoring and alarming of error conditions but also correcting for obvious error situations, such as a total failure of a pulse train or by rejecting simultaneous transient pulses. No attempt is made to correct for ambiguous errors, such as missing or added pulses. These errors are detected, alarmed and quantified only.

Installation Practices When using pulse fidelity checking, it is assumed that the user begins with and maintains a perfect noise free installation. The user must ensure that each pulse train input to the flow computer is a clean, low impedance signal which will not be subject to extraneous noise or electromagnetic transients. Any regular occurrence of these types of events must cause the equipment and/or wiring to be suspect and investigated. Pulse fidelity check circuitry is not intended to facilitate continued operation with a poor wiring installation which is prone to noise or transient pickup.

2

TB-970901w 20/24//22/26//23/27.70+

TB-970901

Dual Pulse Flowmeter Pulse Fidelity Checking

How the Flow Computer Performs Fidelity Checking Hardware on the E Combo I/O Module of the Omni Flow Computer continuously monitors the phase and sequence of the two pulse trains. It also monitors the frequency of the pulse trains. The flow computer determines the correct sequence of flowmeter pulses based on the time interval between pulses rather than the absolute phase difference. It does this by comparing the leading edges of both pulse trains at a set clock interval of 16 microseconds. Maintaining a minimum phase shift between the pulse trains (as indicated below) ensures that related pulse edges of each channel are, in worst case, at least 5 clock samples apart. M AXIMUM PULSE INPUT FREQUENCY

M AXIMUM PHASE SHIFT REQUIRED

1.5 kHz

45 degrees

3.0 kHz

90 degrees

6.0 kHz

180 degrees

Correcting Errors Missing or added pulses to either pulse train are considered ambiguous errors and cannot be corrected. However, they are detected with a 100% certainty and will be counted, eventually causing an alarm. Totalizing will continue using the A Pulse Train.

Common Mode Electrical Noise and Transients INFO - A certainty of 85% is a conservative specification. Tests on production units show that a 95% detection is a more typical proportion. This is due to the time skew between pulse channels being closer to 1 msec than 2 msec.

Common mode electrical noise and transients occur at the same instant in time (during the same clock period) on each pulse channel. They are detected with a certainty of 85%*. The certainty can never be 100% because of the slight differences in time (approximately 2 microseconds) that it takes each pulse to travel through its associated input circuitry. These simultaneous pulses are not used to totalize flow but are counted and will cause an alarm.

Noise Pulse Coincident with an Actual Flow Pulse It is possible that a common mode noise pulse can occur during the same sample period as an actual flow pulse. In this case, the pulse would be detected, alarmed and rejected for totalizing, causing a missing pulse. Statistically though, worst case at 3 kHz pulse input frequency, the odds are approximately 20:1 that the pulse should be rejected. To not reject the pulse would mean accepting 20 times as many extra flow pulses. The 20:1 ratio is based on the ratio of the periodic time of the flow pulses divided by the periodic time of the sample period (e.g.: 333.3msec / 16msec approximately equals 21).

TB-970901w 20/24//22/26//23/27.70+

3


Technical Bulletin

Total Failure of a Pulse Channel A total failure of either pulse train will be detected with a 100% certainty. The flow computer will alarm this condition and continue totalizing with the remaining pulse train as recommended in API MPMS (Chapter 5, Section 5).

Alarms and Displays To avoid spurious nuisance alarms such as can occur when flow begins, pulse fidelity checking is disabled until the incoming frequency exceeds a user preset frequency. Any differences in the two pulse trains will then be accumulated and used to trigger an alarm when a user preset value is exceeded. Error accumulations can be displayed or printed at any time. They are reset only at the start of a new batch. Alarms are time tagged and recorded in the historical alarm log.

4

TB-970901w 20/24//22/26//23/27.70+


Date: 02

06

98


TB # 980201

Communicating with Honeywellä ä TDC3000 Systems Contents User Manual Reference This technical bulletin complements the information contained in the User Manual, and is applicable to all firmware revisions Versions .71+.

Communication Options with Honeywell TDC3000 Systems - The Omni flow computer can communicate with Honeywell TDC3000 Systems via SIO modules in combination with APM or HPM modules. PLCG or CLM modules communicate directly with the Omni.

MVIP Testing - The Omni flow computer has been tested by Honeywell Phoenix as part of their MVIP certification program. Contact Honeywell at:

(

Scope .............................................................................................................. 1 Abstract........................................................................................................... 2 Communication Method 1: APM / HPM - SIO................................................ 2 FTA Array Points ......................................................................................................3 32-Bit Long Integer Variables .......................................................................................................... 3

Configuring The Omni Flow Computer ......................................................................4 Data Grouping Option (a) Custom Data Packet Setup ...............................................4 Modbus Function Codes Used to Access Custom Packet Data Within The Omni.......4 Data Grouping Option (b) Variable Statement Moves to Scratchpad Variables...........6

Communication Method 2: Programmable Logic Gateway (PLCG) ............ 6 Selection of Communication Method............................................................ 8

Scope All firmware revisions Version .71+ of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 flow computers have the capability of communicating with Honeywellä TDC3000 Systems. This is a new feature that requires specified communication modules.

(602) 313-5830

TB-980201 w ALL.71+

1


Technical Bulletin

Abstract This technical bulletin addresses the various serial communication options that can be used to transfer data between Omni flow computers and Honeywell TDC3000 systems. The hardware equipment used and the limitations of each method are also discussed. Three types of serial communication modules are available:

1) Serial I/O (SIO) module in combination with either an Advanced Process Manager (APM) or High Performance Process Manager (HPM) module.

2) Programmable Logic Controller Gateway (PLCG) 3) Communication Link Module (CLM) MVIP testing was performed using an Omni 6000 and Honeywell module types (1) and (2) above. Due to the unavailability of equipment and time constraints, tests were not performed using the CLM module. After MVIP testing it was the opinion of the Honeywell engineer that communications with the more powerful and flexible CLM module would pose no problem to the Omni. The nature of the types of tasks performed by the CLM module usually mean that a certain amount of custom I/O driver programming is the norm. This being the case, the CLM is the most flexible but also most expensive connectivity option.

Communication Method 1: APM / HPM - SIO Honeywell engineers state that with regard to serial communication there are no differences between the APM-SIO connection and the HPM-SIO connection. This document will target the APM system but all discussion will also apply to the HPM system. The APM is a I/O rack system used to get I/O signals into the DCS system. It is comprised of a plug in APM processor module and various other serial I/O, analog I/O and digital I/O plug in modules. The APM rack system can be expanded by adding one or more additional racks. Assuming open slots are available, up to 16 SIO modules can be connected to each APM system. Each SIO module is connected to the target equipment via a Field Termination Assembly (FTA). Each FTA has 2 serial ports with each port individually configurable as either an RS232 port or 2 wire RS485 port. Port characteristics are as follows: q q q q

2

Modicon compatible Modbus RTU protocol Maximum baud rate of 19200 kbps Data bits 8 Stop bits and parity selectable

TB-980201 w ALL.71+

TB-980201

Communicating with Honeywellä ä TDC3000 Systems

FTA Array Points Each FTA has a maximum amount of memory space allocated by the APM. This memory is organized in 16 blocks called Array Points. In addition, each HPM or APM is limited to 80 Array points in total that must be shared between all the SIO modules in its rack system. Each Array Point can therefore hold 512 bits of data and can hold one type of data variable. Each Array Point can therefore be configured as one of the following: 512 32 16 16

Coils or Status points. 16 bit Short Integer registers IEEE Floating point variables 32 bit Long Integer variables (see below)

With a maximum of 16 array points available per FTA it can be seen that data consolidation and grouping becomes very important. Typical TDC3000-Omni systems will require a mixture of data types to be exchanged, this further complicates the configuration process. The user must take care not to waste valuable memory space by partially filling array points. Try to minimize the types of variable (e.g.: if you only need to read a few short integers consider converting them to long integers within the flow computer using variable statements). The limited number of array points also impacts how many Omni flow computers can be connected (multi dropped) to each FTA for example: Most applications require long integer totalizers, IEEE floating point values and also alarm statuses. This means that at least 3 array points will be needed per Omni and that assumes that 16 IEEE floats, 16 totalizers and 512 alarms will be sufficient to transfer all the data needed by the TDC3000 system (extremely unlikely, as there could be up to 4 meter runs configured).

32-Bit Long Integer Variables Long integer types are not supported directly by the TDC3000 system. They can be read as 2 concatenated 16-bit short integers and combined within the TDC3000 system. The Honeywell cannot write to Omni long integer types because the Honeywell SIO Modbus protocol does not support Modbus function code 16 (write multiple registers) for integer registers. The protocol does however support writing to IEEE Floating point variables. Omni’s experience has shown that there are very few instances where the TDC3000 system needs to write long integers within the flow computer. Typical long integer data that there has been a need to write in the past has been duplicated in IEEE floats as shown below and on following page.

TB-980201 w ALL.71+

Long Integer

IEEE Float

Meter #1 - Current MF in Use Meter #2 - Current MF in Use Meter #3 - Current MF in Use Meter #4 - Current MF in Use

5113 5213 5313 5413

7796 7797 7798 7799

Station Running Batch Size Station Next Batch Size

5819 5820

7787 7783

3


Technical Bulletin

Long Integer

IEEE Float

Meter #1 - Next Batch Size

5820

7783

Meter #2 - Running Batch Size Meter #2 - Next Batch Size

5825 5826

7788 7784


5831 5832

7789 7785


5837 5838

7790 7786

Configuring The Omni Flow Computer Setup the flow computer serial port settings to match the Honeywell FTA settings and make sure to select ‘Modicon Compatible’. In view of the Honeywell array point limitation it is important to group the data as efficiently as possible within the Omni flow computer. Two options are available: 1) Custom data packet arrays 2) Move data to flow computer scratchpad variables using Variable Statements Method 1 must be used if it will be necessary to both read and write into the variables. Method 2 can only be used when it is only necessary to read data.

Data Grouping Option (a) Custom Data Packet Setup The Omni flow computer has 3 custom data packet areas where data can be grouped. These 3 data areas are addressed starting at Modbus addresses 0001, 0201 and 0401. Configure these data areas by completing the custom packet setup menus in the flow computer. When the Omni serial port is set as being ‘Modicon Compatible’ the custom packet data is read / write accessible by the TDC3000 system. Unlike the FTA arrays, the Omni does allow mixed data types within a custom data packet/array. This means that multiple FTA array points can be associated with one custom packet.

Modbus Function Codes Used to Access Custom Packet Data Within The Omni The Omni supports the following Modbus function codes to access custom packet data: Read Multiple Registers Write Multiple Registers Write Single Register

4

03 16 06

TB-980201 w ALL.71+

TB-980201


From the above it can be seen that Boolean variables must be handled differently when grouped within a custom array. They cannot be accessed using the normal Modbus function codes 01, 05 and 15. They can be read and written but as byte packed bits within Registers not as Coils and Status bits. For this reason it is recommended that writes to Boolean coils be accomplished by using the normal Modbus function code 05 and writing directly to the database Boolean point address.

‹ CAUTION! ‹ Because Boolean data is byte packed the user must ensure that the number of Booleans included in the custom packet are grouped in such a way as to ensure that the packet always contains an even number of bytes (i.e. the function codes we are using expect to be dealing with ‘registers’ and you can’t have half a register).

Here is an example showing a typical setup using the custom packet located at address 0001: ADDRESS

FTA ARRAY # USED

Packet #01 Point # # of Points Packet #02 Point # # of Points Packet #03 Point # # of Points Packet #04 Point # # of Points Packet #05 Point # # of Points Packet #06 Point # # of Points Packet #07 Point # # of Points Packet #08 Point # # of Points Packet #09 Point # # of Points Packet #10 Point # # of Points

………… ………… ………… ………… ………… ………… ………… ………… ………… ………… ………… ………… ………… ………… ………… ………… ………… ………… ………… …………

7101 8 7201 8 7301 8 7401 8 5101 4 5201 4 5301 4 5401 4 3101 4 3201 4

0001 - 0016

1

0017 - 0032

1

0033 - 0048

2

0049 - 0064

2

0065 - 0072

3

0073 - 0080

3

0081 - 0088

3

0089 - 0096

3

0097 - 0100

4

0101 - 0104

4

Packet #11 Point # # of Points Packet #12 Point # # of Points Packet #13 Point # # of Points Packet #14 Point # # of Points Packet #15 Point # # of Points Packet #16 Point # # of Points Packet #17 Point # # of Points Packet #18 Point # # of Points Packet #19 Point # # of Points Packet #20 Point # # of Points

………… ………… ………… ………… ………… ………… ………… ………… ………… ………… ………… ………… ………… ………… ………… ………… ………… ………… ………… …………

3301 4 3401 4 1105 48 1205 48 1305 48 1405 48 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0105 - 0108

4

0109 - 0112

4

0113 - 0115

5

0116 - 0118

5

0119 - 0121

5

0122 - 0124

5

Total 16 Floats

Total 16 Floats

Total 16 Long Int.

Total Int.

16

Short

Total 24 Packed Bytes

These packets are available but are not used in this example.

The above shows a total of 32 floating points,16 long integers, 16 short integers and 192 Boolean status bits packed in 24 bytes being mapped in 1 custom data packet and 5 FTA arrays.

TB-980201 w ALL.71+

5


Technical Bulletin

Data Grouping Option (b) Variable Statement Moves to Scratchpad Variables Option (b) is limited to when data needs to be read but not written to. Non contiguous data is moved into the flow computer scratchpad variables located at: Boolean Scratchpad Variables Integer Scratchpad Variables String Scratchpad Variables Long Integer Scratchpad Variables Floating Point Scratchpad Variables

1501 3501 4501 5501 7501

through through through through through

1699 3599 4599 5599 7599

User Boolean statements are used to group Boolean bits as follows: Example: 1025: 1026:

1501=1105:1169 1565=1205:1269

Move 64 bits to 1501 through 1564 Move 64 bits to 1565 through 1628

User variable statements are used to move all of the remaining data types as follows: Example: 7025: 7026:

7501=7101:7103 7504=7201:7203

Move 3 floats to 7501 through 7503 Move 3 floats to 7504 through 7506

Communication Method 2: Programmable Logic Gateway (PLCG) The PLCG is meant to receive ‘register’ data from PLCs representing unscaled analog values and 16-bit counters. Functionality is built into the PLCG which allows the user to easily scale analog inputs of 0-9999 or 0-4095 into engineering units. Alarm points can also be entered and monitored. This philosophy is at odds with the Omni flow computer as the vast majority of the variables within the flow computer are in engineering units requiring no scaling or alarm checking in the PLCG. In addition most of the data is contained in IEEE floating point format or 32-bit long integer values. The Modbus protocol supported by the PLCG unlike the APM-SIO module does not support reads or writes of IEEE floating point data. The protocol also does not support multiple register writes which would be required to write data to a flow computer long integer type. The PLCG can however be configured to scale other nominal ranges such as 0999 of which there are some variables of this type within the flow computer as shown below:

6

Mtr#1

Mtr#2

Mtr#3

Mtr#4

Station

Current Gross Flow Rates Current Net Flow Rates Current Mass Flow Rates Current S&W Corrected Flow Rates

3142 3140 3144 3149

3242 3240 3244 3249

3342 3340 3344 3349

3442 3440 3444 3449

3804 3802 3806

Current Temperature Current Pressure Current Analog Density

3147 3146 3148

3247 3246 3248

3347 3346 3348

3447 3446 3448

3809 3808 3810

TB-980201 w ALL.71+


TB-980201

Counter inputs ranging from 0-65535 are treated more generically requiring no scaling and are usually used for display purposes or are passed to an Application Module (AM) for processing. There are two options to monitor totalizing within the Omni flow computer:

1) Read long integer totalizers as two consecutive counter inputs and combine in the Application Module (AM) as follows: Totalizer = (high register * 65536) + low register

2) Read specially provided 16 bit integer non-resetable totalizers that roll at 65536 within the Omni data base shown below. Gross Totalizer Net Totalizer Mass Totalizer S&W Corrected Net Totalizer

Mtr#1

Mtr#2

Mtr#3

Mtr#4

Station

3143 3141 3145 3150

3243 3241 3245 3250

3343 3341 3345 3350

3443 3441 3445 3450

3805 3803 3807

The advantage of option (1) above is that any of the internal totalizers of the flow computer can be read in this manner and the results displayed by the TDC3000 system will match the flow computer displayed values. Option (2) is limited to one set of non-resetable totals which are not normally displayed at the flow computer and are of limited use. Using ‘Variable Statements’ within the Omni flow computer makes it easy to convert just about any variable within the flow computers data base into a 16bit register that can be ‘read’ by the PLCG as either a counter or an analog (assuming the data will fit), the only problem being the availability of enough variable statements (64 are provided). Example 1: Variable read as counter for display only 7025:

3501=7105*#10

3501 contains M #1 temperature in tenths of degrees

Example 2: Variable read as unscaled analog 0-4095 representing 50 to 150 °F 7026:

7105-#50

Adjust for 50 degree zero point

7027:

3502=7026*#40.95

100 degree span = 4095, move to scratch integer 3502

Note that in Example 2 above, no attempt was made to limit the impact of over or under range values passed to the PLCG. It is the authors understanding that inputs outside of the expected range cause ‘bad process value’ alarms in the PLCG.

TB-980201 w ALL.71+

7


Technical Bulletin

Selection of Communication Method Analysis of the various methods available shows that communications via the APM-SIO or HPM-SIO are most likely to provide the best solution, providing reasonable access to the flow computer’s database and requiring no custom driver programming in the TDC3000 system. Because of the awkward philosophical fit between the PLCG and flow computer type devices, many of the built in features of the PLCG (such as scaling and alarming) cannot be used. For this reason the use of a PLCG is not recommended except for instances where one already exists in a system and has an open port and an APM or HPM is not available. The CLM module is potentially the most flexible solution but the cost impact of any custom software driver development must be determined. Omni does not know whether a compatible protocol driver exists at this time, please contact Honeywell for more information in this regard.

8

TB-980201 w ALL.71+


Date: 02

23

98

Author(s): Kenneth D. Elliott / T.J. Tajani / R.L. Stallard

TB # 980202

Recalculating a Previous Batch within the Flow Computer Contents User Manual Reference This technical bulletin complements the information contained in Volume 2, Chapter 3 “Computer Batching Operations”, applicable to Revision 20.71/24.71+.

Batch Recalculation - The batch recalculation feature allows you to adjust quantities of the previous 4 batches at measurement locations where SG60/API60 and S&W values only become available after the batch has been delivered.

Scope .............................................................................................................. 1 Abstract........................................................................................................... 2 Calculations Performed ................................................................................. 2 Using the Flow Computer Keypad to Recalculate a Previous Batch Ticket .............................................................................................................. 3 Step 1.......................................................................................................................3 Step 2.......................................................................................................................3 Step 3.......................................................................................................................3 Step 4.......................................................................................................................4 Step 5.......................................................................................................................4

How the Flow Computer Manages the Modbus Database ........................... 5 Previous Batch Data that Is Writable .........................................................................6

Conclusion ..................................................................................................... 7

Scope Firmware Revisions 20.71+ and 24.71+ of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computers have the feature of Batch Recalculation. This feature applies to Turbine/Positive Displacement/Coriolis Liquid Flow Metering Systems (with K Factor Linearization.

TB-980202 w 20/24.71+

1


Technical Bulletin

Abstract The purpose of recalculating a previous batch is to make batch quantity corrections based on SG60/API60 and Sediment and Water data becoming available via sample analysis performed after a batch delivery is complete. At measurement locations where SG60/API60 and S&W values are not available online, sampler devices continuously extract a representative sample of fluid during a batch. At the end of the batch the sample container is sent for lab analysis. The data obtained from the analysis report can then be used to recalculate the batch correction factors and therefore batch quantities. Historical data from these analysis reports is also used to determine what values of SG60/API60 should be used for real time calculation of future batches that are known to have similar characteristic. These batches ultimately can also be recalculated when their actual analysis is determined.

Calculations Performed q The liquid correction factors Ctl and Cpl are first recalculated using the sample analysis SG60/API60 and the batch flow weighted average temperature and pressure calculated during the batch. q Gross Standard Volume (GSV) is recalculated using the newly calculated Ctl and Cpl. q The Sediment and Water correction factor Csw is calculated using the sample analysis S&W%. q Net Standard Volume (NSV) is recalculated using the recalculated GSV and Csw factor.

2

TB-980202 w 20/24.71+

TB-980202

Recalculating a Previous Batch within the Flow Computer

Using the Flow Computer Keypad to Recalculate a Previous Batch Ticket ‹

CAUTION!

‹

To ensure that previous batch data is correctly recalculated do not recalculate a batch close to ending a current batch in progress.

Step 1 Press [Prog] [Batch] [Meter] [n] [Enter] (n = meter run number). The Omni LCD screen will display:

METER #1 BATCH Print & Reset ? Select Prev# Batch 1 Enter API60 .0 Enter SG60 .0000 Enter %S&W .00 Recalculate&Print?

TIP - Note that only 4 lines can be displayed at one time. Use the scroll up or down arrows keys to display additional text.

Step 2 Select which previous batch you wish to recalculate. The Omni stores the last 4 completed batches numbered as: 1 = last batch completed to 4 = oldest batch completed. Press [¯ ¯] to scroll down to “Select Prev # Batch” and enter a number between 1 and 4, depending upon which batch is to be recalculated. The flow computer moves the selected previous batch data to the ‘previous batch’ data points within the database (see explanation later in this document)

Step 3 Enter Password when requested.

TB-980202 w 20/24.71+

3


Technical Bulletin

Step 4 Scroll to either “Enter API60” or “Enter SG60”. Type in a valid value and press [Enter].

Step 5 Scroll to “Recalculate & Print?”. Press [Y] and then [Enter]. At this time the flow computer will recalculate the batch data and send the report to the printer and the ‘Historical Batch Report Buffer’ in RAM memory. Batch report data can also be captured in ‘Raw Data Archive RAM’ using the trigger Boolean 1n76. The default batch report shows the batch number as XXXXXX-XX where the number ahead of the ‘-‘ is the batch number (5n90) and the number after the ‘-‘ is the number of times that the batch has been recalculated (3n52). Variable (3n52) is reset to ‘0’ at the end of a batch and increments each time the batch is recalculated.

4

TB-980202 w 20/24.71+

TB-980202


How the Flow Computer Manages the Modbus Database A pointer mechanism has been utilized which avoids having to have duplicate data points for every batch report variable for each of the four previous batches. Only one set of data points for previous batch data are mapped within the Modbus database. A pointer register is used to determine which set of previous batch data will be available by accessing the previous batch data points within the Modbus database. Using the batch gross totalizer variable as an example, we have: Note: The second digit of the index number (indicated as “n”) defines which meter run you are working with (i.e., n = 1, 2, 3 or 4).

q Modbus address of Current Batch in Progress – Gross Totalizer is 5n01 q Modbus address of Previous Batch – Gross Totalizer is 5n50 q Modbus address of Pointer register to select which previous batch is mapped is 3n51 As the batch progresses, the gross totalizer (5n01) accumulates flow. At the end of the batch the flow computer performs the following actions:

1) #3 previous batch data replaces #4 previous batch data 2) #2 previous batch data replaces #3 previous batch data 3) #1 previous batch data replaces #2 previous batch data 4) Current batch data replaces #1 previous batch data 5) Pointer register 3n51 is set to the value ‘1’ so that the Modbus database addresses for previous batch will access data for the batch just ended. This ensures that the batch report which prints immediately at the end of a batch and gets it’s data from the Modbus database, includes the correct information. The following table (using the batch gross totalizer as an example) shows typical data that would be read by accessing Modbus points 5n01 and 5n50. The data read depends upon the value of pointer register 3n51.

TB-980202 w 20/24.71+

5


STEP

DESCRIPTION

Technical Bulletin

CURRENT BATCH

1ST PREV. BATCH

2ND PREV. BATCH

3RD PREV. BATCH

4TH PREV. BATCH

5n01

5n50

5n50

5n50

5n50

1

2

3

4

Value contained in Pointer register 3n51.

1

First batch running.

12340

0

0

0

0

2

First batch ended.

23450

12340

0

0

0

3

Second batch ended.

34560

23450

12340

0

0

4

Third batch ended.

45670

34560

23450

12340

0

5

Fourth batch ended.

56780

45670

34560

23450

12340

6123

56780

45670

34560

23450

6

Fifth batch ended with sixth batch running.

Previous Batch Data that Is Writable Except for the data listed below, all data points for previous batch transactions are ‘read only’ for reasons of data integrity.

6

M ETER #1

M ETER #2

M ETER #3

M ETER #4

STATION

SG 60 or Reference Density (Rev. 24.71)

8508

8608

8708

8808

8908

API 60 Gravity

8519

8619

8719

8819

8919

Sediment and Water Percentage (BS&W)

8517

8617

8717

8817

8917

Command Boolean which triggers the recalculation

2756

2757

2758

2759

1798

TB-980202 w 20/24.71+

TB-980202


Conclusion Note: Setting these registers via Variable Statements is not allowed and will not produce the expected results

The flow computer retains data for the last four completed batches. Only one set of this data can be accessed at a time. Pointer registers, 3151 Meter Run #1, 3251 Meter Run #2, 3351 Meter Run #3, 3451 Meter Run #4n and 3879 for Meter Station are used to determine what set of batch data will be accessed. API60/SG60 and S&W data can be adjusted and the batch recalculated by writing a ‘1’ to points, 2756 for Meter Run #1, 2757 for Meter Run #2, 2758 for Meter Run #3, 2759 for Meter Run #4 and 1798 for Meter Station.

TB-980202 w 20/24.71+

7


Date: 04

06

98


TB # 980401

Peer-to-Peer Basics Contents User Manual Reference This technical bulletin complements the information contained in User Manual, and is applicable to all firmware revisions Version .70+. This is an updated edition that replaces previously published bulletins under the same title. See also the following: q TB-980402 - Using the Peer-to-Peer Function in a Redundant Flow Computer Application q Volume 1 - 1.6.3. Serial Communication Modules

Peer-to-Peer Communications - The peer-to-peer communication feature allows you to multidrop up to 32 flow computers and other devices in RS-485 serial communications mode, and up to 12 using RS-232-C communications.

Scope .............................................................................................................. 1 Abstract........................................................................................................... 2 Determining Which Computer Will Be Master .............................................. 2 Communication Settings for the Peer-to-Peer Link ..................................... 3 Foreign Modbus Devices and Single Master Systems................................. 3 Wiring Options ............................................................................................... 4 RS-232-C Wiring Requirements ................................................................................4 RS-232 to RS-485 Converter Wiring Requirements ...................................................5 RS-485 Wiring Requirements....................................................................................6

Setting up Transactions ................................................................................ 8 What Modbus Function Codes Are Used...................................................... 8 Special Considerations when ‘Modicon Compatible’ is Selected for Port #2..................................................................................................................... 8 Using Peer-to-Peer with Micro Motionä ä Coriolis Mass Meters ................... 9 The Micro Motion Meter is a Modicon Compatible Device ........................................11

Setting Up the Peer-to-Peer Transactions .................................................. 11

Scope Peer-to-Peer Redundancy Schemes - Redundancy schemes allows for uninterrupted measurement and control functionality by interconnecting two identically equipped and configured flow computers.

TB-980401 w ALL.70+

All firmware revisions Version .70+ of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computers have the Peer-to-Peer Communication feature.

1


Technical Bulletin

Abstract Communications between Omni flow computers is accomplished using the peer-to-peer function. This function is available only on Serial Port #2 with data being transmitted and received using Modbus RTU protocol. A data transaction list within each flow computer defines each Read or Write operation to be transacted for that computer. A maximum of 16 transactions per flow computer are available. The transaction list must be contiguous (i.e., an empty transaction will be treated as the end of list). Two optional serial communication I/O modules are available with your flow computer: the RS-232-C (compatible) Model #68-6005, and the RS-232-C/RS485 Model #68-6205. The older Model #68-6005 is only capable of RS-232 compatible serial communications. The newer Model #68-6205 is capable of either RS-232 or RS-485 communications via a selection jumper. When jumpered for RS-232, the characteristics and functionality of this module is identical to that of the older RS-232-C module.

Determining Which Computer Will Be Master Each flow computer wishing to communicate must temporarily become a Modbus Master so that messages may be initiated and its transaction list processed. This is accomplished when the current Modbus Master completes its transaction list and broadcasts the Modbus address of the next computer to be the master. The computer with the Modbus ID which matches the broadcast then assumes mastership and proceeds to process its transaction list. A timeout occurs whenever the next master in sequence does not take mastership and the broadcast will be retried once. Should the computer still fail to respond, the current master will attempt to pass mastership to the next computer in sequence by incrementing the Modbus ID by one and re-broadcasting the new Modbus ID. Each flow computer needing to process a transaction list (i.e., be a master) requires the following three entries: (1) Next Master in Sequence; (2) Last Master in Sequence; and (3) Retry Timer (50mS ticks). These entries are in the Peer-to-Peer Setup menu and function as follows: Entry 1 : This entry is the Modbus ID for the next flow computer master. A non zero entry here is what actually turns on the peer-topeer function. Modbus ID’s for master devices in the link must be assigned starting at 1, and for maximum efficiency not contain any missing ID’s (i.e., 1, 2, 3, 4, Not 1, 3, 6, 10, for instance). Entry 2 : This entry is the Modbus ID for the last flow computer master. Any master failing to find the ‘next master’ will keep trying Modbus ID’s until it reaches this ID, it will then start the search again at Modbus ID 1. Entry 3 : This entry is used to setup the communication retry rate. When the peer-to-peer link is solely comprised of Omni flow computers this entry should be set to 3 ticks (150 msec).

2

TB-980401 w ALL.70+

TB-980401

Peer-to-Peer Basics

Communication Settings for the Peer-to-Peer Link The following settings must be used: q q q q

Modbus RTU Protocol 8 Data Bits 1 Stop Bit No Parity

While slower baud rates can be used, 38.4 kbps or 19.2 kbps will provide maximum performance.

Foreign Modbus Devices and Single Master Systems INFO - It is important to note that in a peer-to-peer system, only the flow computers that have a non-zero entry for ‘Next Master in Sequence’ are limited to using Serial Port #2, all of the other flow computers are simply acting as Modbus slaves and can use any valid Modbus serial port.

TB-980401 w ALL.70+

The peer-to-peer function is not limited to multiple Omni flow computers. Some applications simply require a single flow computer master to communicate with a variety of Modbus slave devices which may be flow computers, PLC’s etc. In these cases, the entries 1 and 2 above would be set to 1 in the master flow computer only, signifying only one master is in the system. Entry 3 above would normally be set to 3 but may need to be increased depending upon the message response time of any foreign Modbus devices in the system.

3


Technical Bulletin

Wiring Options RS-232-C Wiring Requirements The following diagram shows the wiring requirements using the RS-232-C termination option. When multiple flow computers are used as peer-to-peer masters, they are connected in two-wire, multi-drop mode. INFO - The Omni Flow Computer uses a proprietary ‘tristatable’ RS-232-Compatible serial port, which unlike a normal RS-232 port, can be multidropped, interconnecting up to 12 flow computers or other serial devices.

Omni #1

Omni #2

Omni #3

Omni #4

TB3 (TB2)

TB3 (TB2)

TB3 (TB2)

TB3 (TB2)

1

1

1

1

2

2

2

2

3

3

3

3

4

4

4

4

5

5

5

5

6

6

6

6

7

7

7

7

8

8

8

8

9

9

9

9

10

10

10

10

11

11

11

11

12

12

12

12

Fig. 1.

4

Omni 6000 (3000) Peer-to-Peer Wiring Requirements using the RS-232-C Termination Option

TB-980401 w ALL.70+

TB-980401

Peer-to-Peer Basics

RS-232 to RS-485 Converter Wiring Requirements The following diagram shows a typical installation where two flow computers are connected to a PLC via an RS-232 to RS-485 converter module.

Omni #1

Omni #2

TB3 (TB2)

TB3 (TB2)

1 2 3

1 2 3

4 5 6

4 5 6

7 8 9

7 8 9

10 11 12

10 11 12

Fig. 2.

TB-980401 w ALL.70+

RS-232 to 485 Converter (Disable Echo) R S 2 3 2

TX-A TX-B RX-A RX-B

PLC R A S B 4 8 5

Omni 6000 (3000) Peer-to-Peer Wiring Requirements with PLC using a Standard RS-232 to RS-485 Converter Module

5


Technical Bulletin

RS-485 Wiring Requirements Multivariable Transmitting Devices - In addition to the Serial I/O Module # 68-6205, the flow computer must also have an MV Module to communicate with multivariable transmitters. This serial module is jumpered to IRQ 3 when used in combination with an MV Module. Without an MV Module, the jumper is placed at IRQ 2. The MV Module can only be used with this serial module (68-6205) and is not compatible with the Serial I/O Module # 68-6005. For more information, see Technical Bulletin # TB980303.

The diagram below shows a typical peer-to-peer installation using RS-485 communications, where four flow computers are interconnected in a two-wire, multi-drop mode.

Omni #1

Omni #2

Omni #3

Omni #4

TB3 (TB2)

TB3 (TB2)

TB3 (TB2)

TB3 (TB2)

1

1

1

1

2

2

2

2

3

3

3

3

4

4

4

4

5

5

5

5

6

6

6

(B)

7 8

8

8

7

9

9

9

10

10

10

(A)

RS-485 Two-wire Terminated

11

(A)

12 RS-485 Two-wire Non-terminated

11

(B)

8

9

12

6

7

6 (B)

10 11

Fig. 3.

7

(B)

(A)

12 RS-485 Two-wire Non-terminated

11

(A)

12 RS-485 Two-wire Terminated

Omni 6000 (3000) Peer-to-Peer Wiring Requirements using the RS-485 Two-wire Multi-drop

TB-980401 w ALL.70+

TB-980401

Peer-to-Peer Basics

The peer-to-peer communication link may also be used to transfer data to and from any other Modbus slave device such as a PLC. The following diagram shows a typical installation using RS-485 where two flow computers are connected to a PLC in a two-wire, multi-drop mode.

Omni #1

Omni #2

TB3 (TB2)

TB3 (TB2)

1 2 3

1 2 3

4 5 6

4 5 6

(B) 7 8 9 10 (A) 11 12 RS-485 Two-wire Terminated

Fig. 4.

TB-980401 w ALL.70+

(B) 7 8 9 10 (A) 11 12

PLC R S A 4 8 5 B

RS-485 Two-wire Non-terminated

Omni 6000 (3000) Peer-to-Peer Wiring Requirements with PLC using the RS-485 Two-wire Multi-drop

7


Technical Bulletin

Setting up Transactions To process a transaction the flow computer requires the following data for each transaction: Modbus Broadcast Address ‘0’ - This address only applies to write transactions.

Slave ID

: The Modbus address of the target device. This can be any valid Modbus address including the broadcast address ‘0’. Read or Write : Select the appropriate operation. Source Point Number : Specifies the data base address of the variable in the source device. For a read operation the slave is the source. For a write operation the source is the Omni flow computer master. Number of Points : The number of consecutive data variables to transfer between devices, starting at the source point number or address. Destination Point Number : Specifies the data base address of the variable in the destination device. For a write operation the slave is the destination. For a read operation the destination is the Omni flow computer master.

What Modbus Function Codes Are Used The flow computer decides what Modbus function code will be used depending upon the Omni flow computer data type specified in the transaction. Transactions involving short or long integers or IEEE floats will use Modbus function codes 03H for reads and 10H for writes. Boolean variables are packed 8 to a byte starting at LS bit and use function codes 01H for reads and 0FH for writes.

Special Considerations when ‘Modicon Compatible’ is Selected for Port #2 Some adjustments to the previous entries are needed when communicating with devices that require ‘Modicon Compatible’ to be selected for the peer-topeer port. 1) All data base point addresses (whether source or destination) referring to the foreign Modicon compatible device, should be entered as one less than the point address listed. This is needed because the Modicon device automatically adds one to the address received over the data link and subtracts one from the address before transmitting. References to data base point addresses within the Omni flow computer master still use the normal point address as shown in the Omni documentation. 2) The number of points entry becomes the number of 16 bit registers to transfer, rather than the number of data variables.

8

TB-980401 w ALL.70+

TB-980401

Peer-to-Peer Basics

Using Peer-to-Peer with Micro Motionä ä Coriolis Mass Meters The Omni flow computer can be configured to accept mass or volume pulses from a Micro Motion (MM) Coriolis Meter RFT transmitter as well as communicate via Modbus to the device and obtain variables such as fluid density and MM transducer alarm status. The flow computer is equipped with special firmware code to make the interface to the Micro Motion meter more useful and hopefully simpler. The communication link between the Micro Motion meter and the flow computer is via the peer-to-peer link. It is possible to have multiple Micro Motion meters connected to multiple flow computers as shown below.

Omni #1

Omni #2

TB3 (TB2)

TB3 (TB2)

Micro Motion RFT #2

1 2

1 2

3 4 5 6

3 4 5 6

R S 27 (Z22) 4 26 (D22) 8 5

7 8

7 8

9 10 11 12

9 10 11 12

RS-232 to 485 Converter (Disable Echo) R S 2 3 2

TX-A TX-B RX-A RX-B

R 27 (Z22) S 26 (D22) 4 8 5 Micro Motion RFT #1

Note: Termination Points 26 & 27 correspond to the explosion-proof field-mount RFT9739; and (D22) & (Z22) to the rack-mount version of the model.

Fig. 5.

TB-980401 w ALL.70+

Omni 6000 (3000) Peer-to-Peer Wiring Requirements with Micro Motion RFT Transmitters using a RS-232 to RS-485 Converter

9


Technical Bulletin

The following diagram shows a typical peer-to-peer installation using RS-485, where two flow computers are connected to two Micro Motion RFT9739 transmitters via a proprietary RS-232/485 Serial I/O Module #68-6205. Micro Motion Eliteâ â Model RFT9739 Transmitter Connectivity - Both fieldmount (explosion-proof) and rack-mount models of the RFT9739 transmitter have the A and B channels reversed to the industry standard applied to Omni flow computers; i.e., the flow computer’s A channel connects to Micro Motion’s B channel. Omni has tested this connectivity with the Micro Motion RFT9739 FieldMount Transmitter, but connecting to the rack-mount version has not yet been tested. Information on this connectivity has been provided by Micro Motion, Inc. Please contact Micro Motion for further information.

Omni #1

Omni #2

TB3 (TB2)

TB3 (TB2)

1 2 3

1 2 3

4 5 6

4 5 6

7 (B) 8 9 10 (A) 11 12

7 (B) 8 9 10 (A) 11 12


Fig. 6.

10

RS-485 Two-wire Non-terminated

Note: Termination resistors may be required with some installations.

Micro Motion RFT9739 #1

Micro Motion RFT9739 #2

(B) 26 (D22)

(B) 26 (D22)

(A) 27 (Z22)

Y

120W

(A) 27 (Z22)

Note: Termination Points 26 & 27 correspond to the explosion-proof field-mount RFT9739; and (D22) & (Z22) to the rack-mount version of the model.

Omni 6000 (3000) Peer-to-Peer Wiring Requirements with Micro Motion RFT9739 Transmitters using the RS-485 Two-wire Multidrop.

TB-980401 w ALL.70+

TB-980401

Peer-to-Peer Basics

The Micro Motion Meter is a Modicon Compatible Device Some adjustments to the peer-to-peer entries are needed when communicating with devices that require ‘Modicon Compatible’ to be selected for the peer-topeer port (Serial Port #2). 1) All data base point addresses (whether source or destination) referring to the foreign Modicon compatible device, should be entered as one less than the point address listed. This is needed because the Modicon device automatically adds one to the address received over the data link and subtracts one from the address before transmitting. References to data base point addresses within the Omni flow computer master still use the normal point address as shown in the Omni documentation. 2) The number of points entry becomes the number of 16 bit registers to transfer, rather than the number of data variables.

Setting Up the Peer-to-Peer Transactions Note: Meter Run #1 Density I/O point must be assigned to ‘99’ and Serial Port #2 must be assigned to be ‘Modicon Compatible’ for this to work correctly. Note also that the MM Modicon documentation manual lists the flowing density as point number 20249. This is common with Modicon compatible devices. Where there is a 5 digit address, drop the first digit and subtract 1 from the point address before using it in a transaction.

The following peer-to-peer transaction reads the flowing density of the fluid from the Micro Motion device (Modbus ID #2) and stores it in data base point 7108 (unfactored density, meter run #1). Transaction #1

Target Slave ID Read/Write ? Source Point # # of Points Destination Pnt #

...…..... 2 ...…..... R ...…..... 248 ...…..... 2 ...…..... 7108

The next transaction reads a 16-bit integer register from the MM meter which contains packed alarm status bits. These are stored in a special register within the flow computer which causes them to be time and date tagged, printed and logged just as though they were flow computer alarms. Transaction #2

Target Slave ID Read/Write ? Source Point # # of Points Destination Pnt #

...…..... 2 ...…..... R ...…..... 0 ...…..... 1 ...…..... 3118

The examples above refer to Meter #1 transactions that the flow computer is requesting. More transactions may be needed depending upon what data is required and how many meter runs are being used.

TB-980401 w ALL.70+

11


Date: 04

07

98

Author(s): Kenneth E. Elliott / Robert L. Stallard

TB # 980402

Using the Peer-to-Peer Function in a Redundant Flow Computer Application Contents User Manual Reference This technical bulletin complements the information contained in User Manual, and is applicable to all firmware revisions Versions .70+. This is an updated edition of the bulletin previously published under the same title.

Scope .............................................................................................................. 1 Abstract........................................................................................................... 2 RS-232-C Wiring Requirements ..................................................................... 2 RS-485 Wiring Requirements......................................................................... 3 Setting Up the Peer-to-Peer for Redundant Flow Computer Applications . 3 Sensing Failures and Switching between Redundant Computers.............. 5 Changing the Master / Slave Status via a Modbus Serial Port .................... 6 Redirecting the Control Signals .................................................................... 6

Peer-to-Peer Redundancy Schemes - Redundancy schemes allows for uninterrupted measurement and control functionality by interconnecting two identically equipped and configured flow computers.

Sharing Input Signals Between Primary and Secondary Flow Computers 7 Re-Calibration of Analog Inputs.................................................................... 7 Sharing Digital I/O Signals Between Primary and Secondary Flow Computers ...................................................................................................... 7

Scope All firmware revisions Versions .70+ of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computers have the Peer-to-Peer Communications feature, which is available only on Serial Port #2. This features includes the capability of setting-up redundant flow computer schemes.

TB-980402 w ALL.70+

1


Technical Bulletin

Abstract Redundancy involves using two identically equipped flow computers and connecting them in such a way to ensure uninterrupted measurement and control functionality in the event of failure of one of the units. This requires that all input and output signals are connected to both computers. During normal operation, one computer is designated the primary and the other computer the secondary or backup. To ensure synchronization between both devices, important variables such as PID controller settings, control valve positions and proving meter factors must be transmitted from the primary flow computer via the peer-to-peer link to the secondary flow computer. Should a failure of the primary flow computer occur, the secondary flow computer is automatically promoted to primary and assumes all control and measurement functions. In this case the data flow on the peer-to-peer link reverses automatically and the new master begins to transmit critical data to the slave, assuming that it is functioning. Peer-to-peer communication errors can occur during the switch over and are normal. They are cleared by pressing the [Ack] key on the flow computer keypad or writing to point 1712 (acknowledge station alarms). If the other flow computer is non-operational, the peer-to-peer communication errors cannot be cleared.

RS-232-C Wiring Requirements The following diagram shows the wiring needed when flow computers are applied in a redundancy scheme via the peer-to-peer feature and using the proprietary RS-232-C Serial I/O Module Model # 68-6005. They are connected in a two-wire multi-drop mode.

Fig. 1.

2

Omni #1

Omni #2

TB3 (TB2)

TB3 (TB2)

1

1

2

2

3

3

4

4

5

5

6

6

7

7

8

8

9

9

10

10

11

11

12

12

Omni 6000 (3000) Peer-to-Peer Wiring Requirements (RS-232-C Serial Port)

TB-980402 w ALL.70+

TB-980402

Using the Peer-to-Peer Function in a Redundant Flow Computer Application

RS-485 Wiring Requirements The diagram below shows the wiring needed when flow computers are applied in a redundancy scheme via the peer-to-peer feature and using the proprietary RS-232/485 Serial I/O Module Model # 68-6205. They are connected in a multidrop mode using the RS-485 two-wire termination option.

Omni #1

Omni #2

TB3 (TB2)

TB3 (TB2)

1 2 3

1 2 3

4 5 6

4 5 6

(B) 7 8 9 10 (A) 11 12

(B) 7 8 9 10 (A) 11 12


Fig. 2.


Omni 6000 (3000) Peer-to-Peer Wiring Requirements using the RS-485 Two-wire Termination Mode in a Redundant Flow Computer Scheme

Setting Up the Peer-to-Peer for Redundant Flow Computer Applications The ‘Activate Redundancy Mode’ entry is found in the peer-to-peer setup menu. Answering ‘Yes’ causes the ‘Next Master’ and ‘Last Master’ entries to disappear from the menu. They no longer need to be entered as the two flow computers now manage these two entries automatically. Any data needing to be synchronized between the flow computers will need to be setup by the user as transactions in the peer-to-peer menu.

TB-980402 w ALL.70+

3


Technical Bulletin

Two transactions are needed to handle redundant PID control: Transactions #1 & #2 Both primary and secondary flow computers must have these entries if they will be used for PID control. q Transaction #1: Sends the primary flow computer PID control mode settings (Auto/Manual, Local/Remote) to the secondary flow computer. q Transaction #2: Sends the primary flow computer PID set points and valve position values to the secondary flow computer.

Transaction #1

Target Slave ID Read/Write ? Source Point # NO of Points Destination Pnt #

...…..... ...…..... ...…..... ...…..... ...….....

2 W 13462 8 13470

Transaction #2


...…..... ...…..... ...…..... ...…..... ...….....

2 W 7601 20 7601

More peer-to-peer transactions are needed if additional data needs to be transferred, meter factors for example. Flow computers containing firmware Revisions 22 or 26 handle meter factor implementation differently than Revisions 20 or 24. These applications maintain historical meter factor entries which are triggered and stored when the meter factor is accepted and implemented at the end of a meter proving. As only the primary flow computer will be doing the actual proving, three special variables with associated firmware code have been added to the data base of revisions 22 and 26. By writing to and reading from these variables via the peer-to-peer link, the secondary flow computer can implement the meter factor result obtained when the primary computer completes and accepts a prove result. The following two transactions are required: Transactions #3 & #4 (Applicable to Firmware Versions 22 & 26 Only) Both primary and secondary flow computers must have these entries. q Transaction #3: Used to send the prove meter factor (5904) and the number of the meter last proved (5905) to the secondary flow computer. q Transaction #4: Confirms that the meter factor has been implemented in the secondary flow computer by reading back a copy of the number of the meter run just proved (5906).

4

Transaction #3


...…..... ...…..... ...…..... ...…..... ...….....

2 W 5904 2 5904

Transaction #4

Target Slave ID Read/Write ? Source Point # O N of Points Destination Pnt #

...…..... ...…..... ...…..... ...…..... ...….....

2 R 5906 1 5906

TB-980402 w ALL.70+

TB-980402


Sensing Failures and Switching between Redundant Computers Setting Up Peer-to-Peer Transactions - For each transaction, the flow computer requires the following data (see TB# 980401, ‘Peer-to-Peer Basics’): q Target Slave ID: Modbus database address of target device. q Read/Write?: ‘Read’ (R) selects slave as source device and master as destination device. ‘Write” (W) selects master as source device and slave as destination device. q Source Point #: Specifies database address (or first address in sequence) of data to transfer from source to destination device. O q N of Points: Total number of consecutive database addresses in sequence to transfer. q Destination Point #: Specifies database address (or first address in sequence) in destination device of data received from source device.

Redundancy Failover Wiring - Any 4 digital I/O points may be used to provide a failover switching mechanism. Fig. III.8-3 is an example that shows digital I/O 9 through 12 being used

When ‘Activate Redundancy’ is selected in the peer-to-peer menu, data base variables are activated to provide a redundancy switching mechanism which is accomplished by cross connecting 4 digital I/O points from each flow computer (primary and secondary). These database variables are: 2863

Watchdog status for this computer. Goes true 5 seconds after initialization and remains true as long as the flow computer is functioning correctly. Mastership status for this flow computer. True whenever this flow computer is the primary or master computer in the redundancy scheme. Watchdog status input from the other flow computer. This flow computer will assume mastership if it sees this point go false. Mastership status input from the other flow computer. This flow computer will relinquish mastership if it sees this point go true.

2864

2713 2714

Omni #1

Omni #2

TB1

TB1

1

1

2

2

3

3

4

4

5

5

6

6

7

7

8

8 Other Master Status (2714)

9

Master Status (2864)

10

Others Watchdog (2713)

11

Watchdog Out (2863)

12

Master Status (2864) Others Watchdog (2713) Watchdog Out (2863)

9 10 11 12

TB11

TB11

+

+

-

-

Fig. 3.

TB-980402 w ALL.70+

Others Master Status (2714)

Omni 6000 / 3000 Redundancy Failover Wiring

5


Technical Bulletin

Changing the Master / Slave Status via a Modbus Serial Port Sometimes it may be necessary to force a swap of primary (master) and secondary (slave) flow computers. For example, if both primary and secondary flow computers are functioning correctly (i.e. watchdogs are OK) but the MMI serial communication link to the primary flow computer was lost, it would be necessary to make the secondary flow computer the primary. Two special data base points are available to provide this function, they are: 2715

Note: The 2716 command will not work if the other flow computer’s watchdog status is not active (i.e., the other computer must be functioning correctly before this flow computer can give up mastership).

2716

Be Master - writing a one to this point automatically promotes this flow computer to master. This in turn causes the digital I/O point which is assigned point 2864 ( Mastership Status ) to go true. Assuming the digital I/O are cross connected as shown in the preceding figure, the other flow computer will automatically relinquish mastership when this happens. Be Slave - writing a one to this point automatically demotes this flow computer to slave. This in turn causes the digital I/O point which is assigned point 2864 ( Mastership Status ) to go false. Assuming the digital I/O are cross connected as shown in the preceding figure, the other flow computer will automatically assume mastership when this happens.

Both the above commands are edge triggered needing only to be turned on, they do not need to be turned off.

Redirecting the Control Signals In the event of a primary/secondary flow computer swap, a method is needed to redirect the appropriate 4-20 mA signals to control valves and other functions. One way of doing this is to use a DC relay with type C contacts. Suitable relays are available with multiple sets of contacts. The relay can be energized by the digital output assigned to indicate ‘Mastership Status’ from one of the flow computers.

6

TB-980402 w ALL.70+

TB-980402


Sharing Input Signals Between Primary and Secondary Flow Computers In a redundant system all input signals must be connected to both primary and secondary flow computers. Voltage pulse signals such as flowmeters and densitometer devices must be connected in parallel to the appropriate inputs of both flow primary and secondary computers. Current pulse signals must first be converted to voltage pulses by suitable input shunt resistor or source resistor. As a general rule, follow the wiring recommendations shown for a normal single flow computer installation (see Volume 1 of the User Manual) and then simply wire the second flow computer terminals in parallel with the first computer. Analog 4-20 mA signals should be converted to 1-5 volt signals by using a low temperature coefficient precision 250 ohm resistor. For each signal, configure the combo modules of both flow computers for 1-5 volt inputs and wire them in parallel across an appropriate 250 ohm resistor mounted externally to the flow computers.

Re-Calibration of Analog Inputs Each flow computer input channel which is configured for 1 - 5 volt input signals will need to be verified for accuracy. Re-calibration may be necessary depending upon the accuracy of the 250 ohm resistor used and how well it matches the internal 250 ohm resistor that was used when the input channel was originally calibrated. The system wiring between the flow computer and the 250 ohm resistor can also slightly affect the input calibration.

Sharing Digital I/O Signals Between Primary and Secondary Flow Computers Digital I/O channels configured as status inputs should be simply wired in parallel (ORed) with the other flow computer. Digital I/O channels configured as outputs may possibly require relay isolation similar to that needed for analog outputs described previously. Typical output signals that need to be relay isolated are sampler pulse outputs. Prover control signals do not usually need to be relay isolated as the secondary computer will never be attempting to control the prover while it is the slave or secondary computer. The user will need to determine which outputs need to be isolated based on whether it is possible or likely that the slave computer would activate the output when not in control.

TB-980402 w ALL.70+

7


Date: 05

03

98


TB # 980501

Rosemountä ä 3095FB Multivariable Sensor Interface Issues Contents User Manual Reference This technical bulletin complements the information contained in User Manual, applicable to Firmware Revision 21.72+/25.72+ and 23/72.+/27.72+.

Scope .............................................................................................................. 2 Abstract........................................................................................................... 2 Important Omni Flow Computer Compatibility Issues When Using SV Combo Modules ............................................................................................. 3 Serial Communication Module Compatibility .............................................................3 Other Known System Incompatibilities ......................................................................3 Equipment Ordering Limitations ................................................................................3

Connectivity Issues When Connecting to the 3095FB Multivariable Transmitters: Multi-drop versus Point-to-Point ........................................... 4 Advantages of Multi-drop Configurations ...................................................................4 Disadvantages of Multi-drop Configurations ..............................................................4

Jumper Settings for the Omni SV Combo Module ....................................... 5 Setting the Address of the SV Combo Module ...........................................................6 Setting the Termination Jumpers for the Each of the SV RS-485 Ports ......................6

Initial Setup of the Rosemountä ä 3095FB Multi Variable Transmitter.......... 8 Connecting the 3095FB to the Omni Flow Computer .................................. 9 3095FB Transmitter RS-485 Connections ...............................................................10 3095FB Transmitter Power Connections and Requirements ....................................10 Isolation and Transient Protection Issues ................................................................11 Wiring Considerations When Replacing a Multi-dropped 3095FB Transmitter..........11

Configuring the Omni Flow Computer to use the 3095FB Multi Variable Transmitter ................................................................................................... 12 Configuring the Meter Run I/O.................................................................................12 Selecting the Device Type ............................................................................................................. 12 Selecting the SV Combo Module Port............................................................................................ 12 Select Modbus Address for 3095FB.............................................................................................. 12 What I/O Points are Used and Why .............................................................................................. 12

DP, Pressure and Temperature Setup Entries Needed.............................................14

Data Transferred between the 3095FB Transmitter and the Omni Flow Computer ...................................................................................................... 14 Polling Intervals for Process Variables and Critical Alarms ......................................15 Critical 3095FB Alarms Monitored By The Flow Computer.......................................15

Synchronizing the 3095FB and the Flow Computer Configurations......... 16

TB-980501 w 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+

1


Technical Bulletin

Viewing the 3095FB Data at the Flow Computer Front Panel .................... 16 Installing, Replacing and Calibrating 3095FB Transmitters....................... 17 Wiring Issues ......................................................................................................... 17 Using the Omni Flow Computer to Set the Modbus Address of the 3095FB ............. 18 Using a Laptop PC to Trim the 3095FB Calibration ................................................. 19

Scope Firmware Revisions 21.72+/25.72+ and 23.72+/27.72+ of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computers are affected by the issues contained in this technical bulletin. This Bulletin applies to Orifice/Differential Pressure Liquid Flow Metering Systems and to Orifice Gas Flow Metering Systems.

Abstract The Rosemount 3095FB Multivariable sensor assembly is used to measure differential pressure (DP), static pressure (SP) and line temperature (T). Application of the 3095FB is limited to flow computer revisions 21, 23, 25 and 27 which work with differential head devices such as orifice meters, nozzles and venturi meters. Because the flow computer is limited to a maximum of four meter runs it is also limited to a maximum of four 3095FB multivariable transmitters. Data is accessed from the 3095FB transmitter via a 2 wire RS-485 data link at 9600 baud using Modbus protocol. Technically, it would have been possible to use one of the flow computer’s standard serial ports to communicate with the 3095FB but this would have caused several problems: q Reduced the number of serial ports available for use with SCADA, PLCs and OmniCom etc. q Extra 'A’ type combo modules would have to be purchased simply to provide analog outputs in a minimum system requiring just the multivariables. Omni chose to design a special ‘SV’ combo module which includes two 2 wire RS-485 ports and six 4-20 mA analog outputs. With this module it becomes possible to provide a powerful Omni 3000 system with the following specs: q Four meter runs with Differential Pressure, Static Pressure and Temperature inputs. q Four communication ports for SCADA, PLC, Printer, OmniCom etc. q Twelve Digital I/O for logic control q Six digital to analog outputs. This SV module is capable of connecting to one to four 3095FBs in various multi-drop configurations. A second SV combo module can be utilized in applications where point to point operation of more than two multivariable transmitters is desirable.

2

TB-980501 w 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+

Rosemountä ä 3095FB Multivariable Sensor Interface Issues

TB-980501

Important Omni Flow Computer Compatibility Issues When Using SV Combo Modules The ‘SV’ combo modules are effectively serial I/O modules which have been specially designed to communicate with various multivariable transmitters. Changes have been made to the IRQ priorities to accommodate these ‘SV’ combo modules. These IRQ changes also involve the ‘Serial I/O Combo Modules’ that are used to connect to printers, OmniCom, PLCs and SCADA devices.

Serial Communication Module Compatibility ‘SV’ combo modules cannot be installed in flow computer systems containing RS-232-C Serial I/O Combo modules model type 68-6005. The IRQ settings on the 68-6005 serial combo module are not jumper selectable and are incompatible with the 'SV’ combo modules. The flow computer will not be able to initialize or boot up if this module is installed (this will be evident by a blank LCD screen which flashes its backlighting on and off every 1.5 seconds). The more recent 68-6205 serial module which is both RS-232-C and RS-485 compatible, has jumper selectable IRQ settings, these must be installed in the ‘IRQ 3’ position when an ‘SV’ combo module is present (see technical bulletin TB-980503 for more details).

Other Known System Incompatibilities At the time this bulletin was prepared, it was not possible to install both an ‘SV’ combo module and an ‘HV’ (Honeywell multivariable) combo module.

Equipment Ordering Limitations Because of the compatibility issues raised in the above paragraphs, it is not possible for the customer to retrofit existing flow computer installations with ‘SV’ combo modules. Any system which requires ‘SV’ combo modules, must be purchased new from Omni, or the system must be returned to Omni to be modified (contact a sales person at Omni for upgrade details and pricing).

TB-980501 w 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+

3


Technical Bulletin

Connectivity Issues When Connecting to the 3095FB Multivariable Transmitters: Multi-drop versus Point-to-Point The 3095 FB multivariable transmitter is a four wire device, two power wires and two wires for the RS-485 serial communication link. It can be connected in a ‘point-to-point’ or ‘multi-drop’ wiring configuration.

Advantages of Multi-drop Configurations The advantages of multi-drop configurations are: q Possibly less wire may be needed to connect devices under certain conditions. This may or may not be the case depending upon equipment placement. q One Omni SV Combo module can handle up to four 3095 FB multivariable transmitters. An Omni 3000 can be used in place of an Omni 6000 and handle four meter runs.

Disadvantages of Multi-drop Configurations Disadvantages of multi-drop configurations are: q Multiple Modbus IDs required. Each multi-dropped transmitter must have a unique Modbus ID which matches the Modbus ID selected within the flow computer for that meter run multivariable. q Possibility of errors when replacing multivariable transmitters. Because of the multiple Modbus addresses it is not possible to simply take a transmitter off the shelf and install it in a multi-drop configuration. This is because transmitters come from Rosemount with the Modbus address defaulted to ‘1’ and there may already be a transmitter in the loop using that address. Adding a second transmitter with the same address as an existing transmitter would effectively cause a loss of signal on both transmitters (existing and new). Depending upon where the transmitter is in the wiring, ‘termination’ jumpers may or may not be required on the replacement transmitter (see below). q Transmitter interaction is possible. While not likely, a hardware failure in one transmitter could compromise the integrity of the shared RS-485 link causing a loss of flow signals for all meter runs. Calibrating a transmitter via a laptop computer requires the wiring to be disturbed, care must be taken not to disconnect other transmitters in the same multi-drop loop.

4

TB-980501 w 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+


TB-980501

q RS-485 termination requirements more complex. RS-485 transmission wires must have only one beginning and one end (they cannot be used in a ‘star’ configuration). Both ends of the wire must be terminated, meaning only two devices in the loop need terminating. In a point-to-point configuration, this simply means both the flow computer and transmitter are terminated. In a multi-drop configuration, the user must ensure that only the end devices have the termination jumpers in. This means that some transmitters may have the terminating jumpers in while others may have them out. Remember that the Omni may or may not be at the end of the wire so it may or may not be one of the terminated devices. q Process variable update time may exceed the flow computers 500 msec cycle time. Critical measurement or control systems require that the process variables be input to the flow computer as fast as possible for best performance.

Jumper Settings for the Omni SV Combo Module The Multi Variable ‘SV’ Combo module contains several sets of jumpers which must be installed correctly (see figure below).

Port 1 (3) Tx/RTS Leds Red Recv Led Grn

SV RS-485 Termination Jumpers Both Jmpers In = Port Terminated Both Jmpers Out = Port Non-Terminated Always RTS SV Address Jumper Jmp In = 1st SV Combo Jmp Out = 2nd SV Combo Always IRQ 2 2

Fig. 1.

TB-980501 w 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+

BRD SEL 4 IRQ

Port 2 (4) Tx/RTS Leds Red Recv Led Grn RTS T E R M

GND T E R M

RTS

GND

T E R M

T E R M

SV Port 1 ( 3 )

SV Port 2 ( 4 )

Port Numbers in ( ) are for 2nd SV Module

Omni Model 68-6203 Multivariable Interface Module - SV Combo Module

5


Technical Bulletin

Setting the Address of the SV Combo Module The flow computer can accept up to two ‘SV’ Combo modules, each with a unique address determined by the ‘BRD SEL’ jumper shown in Figure 1. With this jumper fitted the flow computer will report that a ‘SV1’ module is installed and SV ports 1 and 2 will be available. Without this jumper in the ‘BRD SEL’ position the flow computer will report that a ‘SV2’ module is installed and SV ports 3 and 4 will be available. Note that a system can have a ‘SV2’ module without a ‘SV1’ being installed, in this case only SV ports 3 and 4 would be available.

Setting the Termination Jumpers for the Each of the SV RS-485 Ports Multivariable RS-485 communication circuits must have two ends only, a ‘star’ configuration with more than two ends or a ‘loop’ configuration with no ends is not allowed. The devices at both ends of the circuit must be jumpered to provide termination.

3095 FB MV ID #1 Omni Flow Computer

Fig. 2.

3095 FB MV ID #2

3095 FB MV ID #3

This Device Must Be Terminated

3095 FB MV ID #4


Multi-drop Configuration with Flow Computer Terminated

Both jumpers marked ‘TERM’ must be installed to terminate a flow computer ‘SV’ port (see Fig. 1 previous page). Termination settings for the 3095FB are shown later in this document.

3095 FB MV ID #1


3095 FB MV ID #4

Omni Flow Computer

3095 FB MV ID #2

Fig. 3.

6

3095 FB MV ID #3


Multi-drop Configuration with Flow Computer Non-terminated

TB-980501 w 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+


TB-980501

3095 FB MV ID #1

3095 FB MV ID #2

3095 FB MV ID #3

3095 FB MV ID #4

Omni Flow Computer

Star Configuration Not Allowed!

Fig. 4.

Unacceptable Configuration - Five Termination Points

All 4 MV Ports of Flow Computer Must Be Terminated

3095 FB MV ID #1

3095 FB MV ID #1

3095 FB MV ID #1

3095 FB MV ID #1

Omni Flow Computer Using Independent MV Ports

Fig. 5.

Modbus IDs of 3095FBs Can Be The Same In This Point to Point Configuration

All Four 3095FB Transmitters Must Be Terminated

Point-to-Point Wiring Configuration

In the point-to-point configuration each 3095FB transmitter is connected to an independent ‘SV’ port of the flow computer. Because each ‘SV’ port is now connected to only one 3095FB, each 3095FB can now use the default Modbus address ‘1’, greatly simplifying transmitter replacement issues discussed later in this document.

TB-980501 w 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+

7


Technical Bulletin

Initial Setup of the Rosemountä ä 3095FB Multi Variable Transmitter The 3095FB module has two sets of DIP switches and a jumper set which must be setup according to the wiring configuration used to connect to the Omni Flow Computer.

PULL DOWN (B) PULL UP (A)

AC TERMINATION

All ON = Terminated All OFF = Un-Terminated

o o o SECURITY o o OFF ON

o o o o o

Security OFF to allow configuration

ON 1 2 3 S1 S2 ON 1 2

All ON For 9600 Baud

Fig. 6.

Rosemountä 3095FB Multivariable Setup Switches and Jumpers

Place the security jumper in the ‘OFF’ position, this allows the Omni flow computer to write to the 3095FB registers ensuring that the internal configuration matches the flow computer. Both baud rate switches S1 and S2 must be set to 9600; i.e., in the ‘ON’ position. The termination switches should be all ‘ON’ or all ‘OFF’ depending upon whether device termination is required.

8

TB-980501 w 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+


TB-980501

Connecting the 3095FB to the Omni Flow Computer TERMINAL

Fig. 7.

SIGNAL DESCRIPTION

1

Port #1(3) RS 485 B wire

2

Port #1(3) RS 485 A wire

3

Port #2(4) RS 485 B wire

4

Port #2(4) RS 485 A wire

5

Signal Return for 4-20mA Outputs

6

Signal Return for 4-20mA Outputs

7

4-20mA Analog Output # 5

8


9


10


11


12


Back Panel Termination Assignments - SV Combo Module

A RS-485 B + PWR -

Fig. 8.

TB-980501 w 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+

Rosemountä 3095FB Multivariable Wiring Terminals

9


Technical Bulletin

3095FB Transmitter RS-485 Connections Two terminals are provided marked A and B, these are connected to the A and B terminals of other multi-dropped 3095FBs and to the Omni SV Combo module terminals. These connections should be made using twisted pair unshielded wire with a minimum gauge dependent upon the distance to be run. Use 22 AWG minimum, 18 AWG maximum for runs less than 1000 ft. Use 20 AWG minimum, 18 AWG maximum for runs of 1000 to 4000 ft. Shielded twisted pair cable can be used but may have an attenuating effect due to a higher capacitance per foot thereby limiting the maximum wire run length to less than 4000 ft.

3095FB Transmitter Power Connections and Requirements Terminals marked ‘+’ and ‘-‘ are provided to connect the 3095FB to a 7.5 VDC. to 24 VDC. power supply. This power supply must be able to provide 10 mA per installed 3095FB plus an additional 100 mA which is needed when any 3095FB in the system is transmitting data to the flow computer. Ripple on this power supply must be less than 2%. Wiring gauge should be selected as per the previous paragraph and can be unshielded un-twisted pair, but for best performance should be shielded and twisted.

4000 Ft. Maximum

Omni Flow Computer

A B A MV Port #4 B MV Port #3

7.5 VDC to 24 VDC Power Supply 150 mA Minimum + -

10

No Stubs over 6 ft.

RS 485 Bus

A MV Port #1 B A MV Port #2 B

Fig. 9.

Termination ON

A RS-485 B

A RS-485 B

A RS-485 B

+ PWR -

+ PWR -

+ PWR -

Termination OFF

Termination OFF

Termination ON

Connecting The Flow Computer to Multi-dropped 3095 Transmitters

TB-980501 w 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+


TB-980501

Isolation and Transient Protection Issues The design of the 3095FB transmitter does not provide any DC isolation between the power connections and the RS-485 connections. Applying voltages between the power wiring and RS-485 wiring greater than the allowable common mode voltage of a RS-485 driver circuit could damage the 3095FB. The Omni flow computer SV port is optically isolated and can handle common mode voltages of +/- 250 VDC with respect to chassis ground. Inductive base transient protectors including the Rosemount Model 470, can adversely affect the output of the 3095FB. Do not use the Model 470 for transient protection with the 3095FB. If transient protection is desired, install the optional ‘Transient Protection Terminal Block’ described in Appendix B of the Rosemount 3095FB Manual (pub. 00809-0100-4738).

Wiring Considerations When Replacing a Multi-dropped 3095FB Transmitter If downtime of other 3095FB transmitters in a multi-dropped system cannot be tolerated, make sure to provide a suitable and safe means of disconnecting power and signal from each individual 3095FB transmitter. Because of the power requirements of the RS-485 the 3095FB cannot be made ‘intrinsically safe’. This means that proper safety procedures must be followed before any covers are removed from any devices or junction boxes located in hazardous areas. Refer to Rosemount 3095FB Manual (publication 00809-0100-4738) for correct installation of the 3095FB transmitter.

TB-980501 w 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+

11


Technical Bulletin

Configuring the Omni Flow Computer to use the 3095FB Multi Variable Transmitter Configuring the Meter Run I/O Selecting the Device Type The existing ‘Select Turbine Y/N’ entry in the ‘Config Meter Run’ menu has been changed to ‘Select Device Type’. Valid selections at this point are: 0 1 2 3

= = = =

DP Sensor Turbine Meter 3095FB Multivariable SMV 3000 Multivariable

When ‘2’ is selected above the following entries appear:

Selecting the SV Combo Module Port The number of ports available depends upon what SV Combo Modules are fitted in the flow computer. Ports 1 and 2 are available when SV Combo Module #1 is fitted, ports 3 and 4 when SV Combo Module #2 is present. It is possible to have SV ports 3 and 4 without SV ports 1 and 2 assuming SV Combo Module #2 is the only SV module fitted.

Select Modbus Address for 3095FB In point-to-point mode (i.e., each SV port is connected to a single 3095FB) it is recommended that you select Modbus ID ‘1’ at this point. This is the default ID used by Rosemount when the 3095 is shipped. In multi-drop mode each 3095FB connected to a SV port must have it’s own address which can be between 1 and 247.

What I/O Points are Used and Why Even though the multivariable data is obtained serially and not via analog input channels, the flow computer must have a storage structure in RAM to place the data. Omni has chosen to treat the data as closely as possible to that obtained by conventional means and use the same physical I/O RAM structure as is used for analog inputs. The main difference being that with analog and pulse inputs you would manually assign the I/O points to be used for each input. When using the 3095FB multi variable, the flow computer automatically assigns three I/O point assignments for the DP, temperature and pressure sensors within the 3095FB. The I/O point numbers are allocated in the order that the 3095FBs are configured using the above three entries (it has nothing to do with SV port or SV module numbers). The starting I/O point for the first 3095FB configured is the first point immediately after the last I/O point used by any other A, B, E/D, E or H combo modules in the system (see examples on facing page).

12

TB-980501 w 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+


TB-980501

EXAMPLE 1 CONFIGURATION

6000 - 2A - 1B – 1SV

A1 Combo Module I/O Points

1-4


5-8

B1 Combo Module I/O Points

9 - 12

st

3095FB Configured Uses

DP=13, T=14, P=15

nd


DP=16, T=17, P=18

3 3095FB Configured Uses

DP=19, T=20, P=21

4th 3095FB Configured Uses

DP=22, T=23, P=24

1

2

rd

Fig. 10. I/O Points Used by SV Combo Modules - Example 1

EXAMPLE 2 CONFIGURATION

6000 - 1A - 1E/D – 1SV


1-4

E/D1 Combo Module I/O Points

5-8

st

1


DP=9, T=10, P=11

2nd 3095FB Configured Uses

DP=12, T=13, P=14

rd


DP=15, T=16, P=17

th


DP=18, T=19, P=20

3

4

Fig. 11. I/O Points Used by SV Combo Modules - Example 2

Bi-directional Flow and 3095FB Transmitters Sometimes it is necessary to use a process variable obtained from a 3095FB in more than one meter run. For example, When measuring bi-directional flow it is customary to configure one meter run within the Omni flow computer as ‘forward’ flow and a second meter run as ‘reverse’ flow. To do this, simply configure both meter runs as ‘Device Type = 2 (3095FB Multi Variable)’, select the same SV port and Modbus ID, the Omni flow computer will recognize that both meter runs are using the same 3095FB device and allocate only one set of I/O assignments.

Referencing 3095FB Variables Elsewhere in the Configuration While the DP, temperature and pressure obtained from the 3095FB multi variable are used to calculate flow, it may also be necessary to use either the temperature and/or the pressure to correct a densitometer device mounted in close proximity. To do this simply note the I/O point numbers automatically assigned to the 3095FB when it was configured and reuse these point numbers as needed.

TB-980501 w 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+

13


Technical Bulletin

DP, Pressure and Temperature Setup Entries Needed Once I/O points have been assigned to the 3095FB multi variable transmitter by the flow computer the Differential Pressure, Temperature and Pressure setup menus become active. Data entries in these menus are: q q q q

Low Alarm Setpoint High Alarm Setpoint Override Value Override Code 0 1 2 3

= = = =

Never Use Override Value Always Use Override Value Use Override on a 3095FB Communication Failure or Critical Error Use Last Hour’s Average on a 3095FB Communication Failure or Critical Error

q 4mA Value (read only) q 20mA Value (read only) q Damping Code 0 1 2 3 4

= = = = =

0.108 Seconds 0.216 Seconds 0.432 Seconds 0.864 Seconds (Default) 1.728 Seconds

5 6 7 8

= = = =

3.456 Seconds 6.912 Seconds 13.824 Seconds 27.648 Seconds

All of these data entries are changeable when using analog transmitters but when using the 3095FB multi variable transmitter the 4mA and 20mA scaling values cannot be changed. The upper and lower range of the 3095FB sensors are fixed by design. The Omni flow computer simply reads these values and displays them in the 4mA and 20mA fields for information only. While the 3095FB transmitter has internal alarm setpoints and alarm status points, Omni has chosen to ignore the 3095FB integral alarming functions and use the existing flow computer alarm setpoints and alarm status points. The Low and High Alarm Setpoints of the flow computer therefore behave exactly as they would with an analog transmitter. The 3095FB Critical Alarm states are monitored continuously.

Data Transferred between the 3095FB Transmitter and the Omni Flow Computer In operation the Omni flow computer automatically sets up the 3095FB transmitter to use the correct floating point format and units of measure needed to match the flow computer’s configuration. The Omni continuously reads the following data: q q q q q q

14

Process Variables DP, Pressure and Temperature Individual Transmitter Sensor Ranges Critical Transmitter Alarms (Sensor failures etc) Transmitter Information (Body and Fill material etc) Manufacturers Code Transmitter Tags

TB-980501 w 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+


TB-980501

Polling Intervals for Process Variables and Critical Alarms The message poll scheme comprises regular reads of the process variable values and critical alarms every 200msec per 3095FB connected to a flow computer SV port. This means that in a multi-drop system with four transmitters the process variable update time will be 4 x 200msec or 800msec.

Critical 3095FB Alarms Monitored By The Flow Computer Critical alarm points within the 3095FB are monitored and mapped into the Omni flow computer Modbus database as follows: Alarms Associated with the 3095FB Providing Data to Meter Run ‘n’ M ODBUS ADDRESS

Note:

^

1n96 is flow computer generated.

ALARM POINT DESCRIPTION

ACTION TAKEN IF ALARM IS ACTIVE (SEE ALSO ‘FAILURE CODE SETTING’)

1n83

DP signal 10% above upper range limit

DP transmitter failure flagged

1n84

DP signal 10% below lower range limit

DP transmitter failure flagged

1n85

Pressure signal 10% above upper range limit

Pressure transmitter failure flagged

1n86

Pressure signal 10% below lower range limit


1n87

Pressure sensor is shorted


1n88

Pressure sensor bridge is open circuit


1n89

Temperature signal 10% above upper range limit

Temperature transmitter failure flagged

1n90

Temperature signal 10% below lower range limit


1n91

Temperature RTD is disconnected


1n92

Sensor internal temperature above upper range limit

DP, P and T, transmitter failures flagged

1n93

Sensor internal temperature below upper range limit


1n94

Critical 3095FB sensor electronics failure


1n95

Security jumper of 3095FB is set to ‘Write Protect’

DP, P and T transmitter failures flagged if write to 3095FB is attempted and fails.

^ 1n96

No Communications between the Omni and 3095FB unit


TB-980501 w 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+

15


Technical Bulletin

Synchronizing the 3095FB and the Flow Computer Configurations To ensure that the flow computer correctly interprets the 3095FB data, the flow computer continuously verifies that the configuration of the 3095FB transmitter matches that required by the flow computer. Additional message polls verifying this data are interleaved with the normal message polls used to retrieve the process variables and alarms. Notes: Numbers in ( ) are Modbus addresses within the 3095FB database

**

The flow computer will attempt to correct the database of the 3095FB transmitter if miss matches are detected for these variables.

*

The flow computer will adjust its database to agree with the 3095FB database if miss matches are detected for these variables.

Critical 3095FB configuration data which is checked every 10 seconds are: q q q q q q q

Floating Point Number Format ** (0132) Measurement Engineering Units of Measure ** (0060 - 0062) Minimum and Maximum Ranges of each Signal * (7407 - 7416) Transmitter Identification (Information Only) (0001 - 0011) Damping Factors ** (7421, 7424, 7427) Transmitter ASCII Tags (3x8 characters) ** (0032 - 0047) Transmitter Information (Materials of Construction) (0017 - 0029)

Viewing the 3095FB Data at the Flow Computer Front Panel Differential Pressure, Temperature and Pressure variables and averages are viewed using the normal key press combinations as described in the Omni Flow Computer User Manual. A display list of 3095FB transmitter information can be displayed by pressing ‘Setup’ ‘n’ ‘Enter’. Data is organized by SV port number ‘n’ and in the order that the transmitters were configured. The following information and diagnostic data is displayed (example shows first transmitter on the #1 SV port as an example):

st

1 digit is the SV port nd number, 2 digit is the Modbus Address of the 3095FB

16

SV Port 1 - 1 Manufactur Rosemount Model 3095/Modbus Out Board Rev 108.0

TB-980501 w 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+


TB-980501

If you continue to scroll down, the following data will be displayed:

Sensor Mod Rev 142 Sensor Serial 839193 Xmtr Ser 19644 H/W Rev 3 Modbus Rev 5 Sensor Type GP DP Range -250 to 250 SP Range 0-800 psi PT Range-40 to 1200F Isolator Mat’l 316SS Fill Fluid Silicone Flange Mtr’l 316SS Flange Type Coplaner Drain/Vent 316SS O-Ring PTFE(Teflon) Seal Type None Seal Fill None Seal Isolator None NumberofSeals None

Installing, Replacing and Calibrating 3095FB Transmitters Wiring Issues If downtime of other 3095FB transmitters in a multi-dropped system cannot be tolerated, make sure to provide a suitable and safe means of disconnecting power and signal from each individual 3095FB transmitter. Because of the power requirements of the RS-485 the 3095FB cannot be made ‘intrinsically safe’. This means that proper safety procedures must be followed before any covers are removed from any devices or junction boxes located in hazardous areas. Refer to Rosemount 3095FB Manual (publication 00809-0100-4738) for correct installation of the 3095FB transmitter.

TB-980501 w 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+

17


Technical Bulletin

Using the Omni Flow Computer to Set the Modbus Address of the 3095FB The 3095FB transmitter will normally be shipped with a default Modbus address of ‘1’. While this is fine for a point to point installation, it will cause a problem if two or more devices have the same Modbus ID in a multi-drop scheme. The Modbus ID of a transmitter can be set using the ‘Configurator User Interface PC Software’ available from Rosemount. It is anticipated though that some situations may arise where a 3095FB transmitter must be installed or replaced without this software being available. In this case the Omni flow computer can be connected to a 3095FB in the point to point mode using any available SV port and the Modbus ID changed to what is required in the flow computer configuration.

‹

CAUTION!

‹

This procedure involves ‘broadcast’ transmitting a Modbus address out of a SV port. All devices connected to this SV port will have their Modbus address set to the ID broadcast. This would cause data collisions and a complete loss of communication when more than one 3095FB transmitter is connected. Be sure to temporarily disconnect any 3095FB transmitters which addresses you do not want to change.

Proceed as follows: 1. Setup the 3095FB as described previously in the section titled ‘Initial Setup of the Rosemount 3095FB Multi Variable Transmitter’. 2. Setup the 3095FB to be RS-485 terminated. 3. Connect the transmitter to any open SV port (terminal A to A, B to B). The SV port should be jumpered for RS-485 termination. If this SV channel is not an open channel, all 3095FB transmitters except the one needing the address change must be disconnected. 4. Apply power to the 3095FB transmitter. 5. At the flow computer front panel press the following keys: [Alpha Shift] [Diag]

The computer will enter the Diagnostic mode.

[Setup] [n] [Enter]

Where ‘n’ is the SV port number that the 3095FB is connected to.

6. The following warning screen may display ( SV port 1 is used as an example) or the screen in (7) below will display. SV Port # 1 This Port Currently Configured For Use! Continue (Y/N)? This means that the flow computer has detected that this SV port is currently configured to communicate with one or more transmitters. You may or may not have selected the wrong SV port (see the cautions in sidebar).

7. If you wish to continue with the address broadcast operation enter ‘Y’ and the following screen will display. SV Port # 1 Change Xmtr Address New Address _ Idle

18

TB-980501 w 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+


TB-980501

8. Scroll down to ‘New Address’ and enter the address required. Press ‘Enter’ and the following message will display. Sending New Address

9. The flow computer will wait a short time and then attempt to communicate with the 3095FB using the new address. If communications are established the following message will be displayed for a few seconds. Address Changed The following message will display for a second or two should the transmission fail. Failed to Change Should this message appear check your wiring, switch and jumper settings and repeat the procedure. 10. Disconnect and reinstall 3095FB to the appropriate SV port for normal operation making sure to observe the termination requirements of only two devices at the end of a loop being terminated.

Using a Laptop PC to Trim the 3095FB Calibration The flow computer provides no way of calibrating or trimming the output of the 3095FB multi variable transmitter. To calibrate the transmitter use the ‘Configurator User Interface PC Software’ available from Rosemount. The user must disconnect the 3095FB needing calibrating and connect it in point to point mode with the Laptop or PC running the Rosemount Interface Software. Remember to follow all correct safety procedures when removing transmitter covers or junction boxes. Read the manufacture’s warnings and recommendations as printed in the 3095FB manual. Be aware that when removing a transmitter from a multi-drop installation, wiring may be disturbed and disruption of the circuit may cause a loss of all measurement signals due to loss of power, signal or RS-485 termination.

TB-980501 w 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+

19


Date: 05

05

98


TB # 980502

Communicating with Honeywellä ä SMV3000 Multivariable Transmitters Contents User Manual Reference This technical bulletin complements the information contained in the User Manual, and is applicable to all firmware revisions .72+.

Scope .............................................................................................................. 1 Abstract........................................................................................................... 2 DE Protocol Overview .................................................................................... 2 Transmitter Database..................................................................................... 2 The Honeywellä ä Handheld Communicator .................................................. 3

Communication with Honeywellä ä SMV3000 Smart Transmitters - This feature allows you to communicate with Honeywell SMV3000 Smart Multivariable Transmitters which provide Differential Pressure , Temperature and Static Pressure, via Omni’s HV type Process I/O Combo Modules and using Honeywell’s DE Protocol.

Combo Module LED Status Indicators.......................................................... 3 Switching Between Analog and Digital Mode............................................... 3 Viewing the Status of the Honeywell Transmitter from the Keypad............ 4 Viewing the Status of the Honeywellä ä Transmitter from the Keypad......... 5 Obtaining More Detailed Status Information from the Keypad.................... 8 Transducer Alarms Logged by the Flow Computer ................................... 12 HV Combo Module Address Jumpers ......................................................... 13 How the I/O Points are Assigned................................................................. 14 OmniCom Revision ...................................................................................... 15

Getting Tech Support Technical support is available at: ( (281) 240-6161 Email should be sent via the WEB Page at: www.omniflow.com or email to: [email protected]

TB-980502 w 21/23/27.72+

Scope All firmware revisions of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computers containing firmware 21.72+, 23.72+, 27.72+ are able to communicate with Honeywellä SMV3000 Smart Multivariable Transmitters. This feature uses Honeywell’s DE Protocol and requires that an HV Combo I/O Module be installed in your flow computer.

1


Technical Bulletin

Abstract Using an ‘HV’ Combo I/O Module, the Omni Flow Computer can communicate with up to 4 Honeywellä SMV3000 Smart Multivariable transmitters. These transmitters provide Differential Pressure, Temperature and Pressure signals using Honeywell’s DE Protocol. Only one ‘HV’ Type Combo Module can be installed in the flow computer. Loop power is provided by the ‘HV’ combo module.

DE Protocol Overview Digital data is transmitted serially between the flow computer and Honeywell Smart Transmitters by modulating the current in the two wire loop connecting the devices. Power for the transmitter is also taken from this current loop. Data is transmitted at 218.47 bits per second with a digital ‘0’ = 20 mA and a digital ‘1’ = 4 mA. In normal operation, the Honeywell transmitter operates in the ‘6-byte Burst Mode’. In this mode, the transmitter transmits the following data to the flow computer every 366 msec: Byte #1 Byte #2-#4 Byte #5 Byte #6

Status Flags Process Variables % Span Value (3-byte floating point) Database ID (indicates where in the transmitters database Byte #6 below belongs) Database Data Value

Transmitter Database By using the data contained in Bytes #5 and #6, the flow computer builds and maintains an exact copy of the multivariable transmitters configuration database. The transmitter database which is sent to the Omni flow computer is about 132 bytes. Based on the burst rate of the transmitter it can take about 45 to 55 seconds to completely build a copy of the transmitter database within the flow computer. The transmitter database is continuously compared against the flow computer configuration settings for that transmitter. The flow computer automatically corrects any differences between the databases by writing the correct configuration data to the transmitter.

2

TB-980502 w 21/23/27.72+

TB-980502

Communicating with Honeywellä ä SMV3000 Multivariable Transmitters

The Honeywellä ä Handheld Communicator The flow computer is responsible for configuring the following entries within the transmitter: (1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

Lower Range Value or Zero Transmitter Span or Max Range Damping Factor Tag Name DP, SP and Temperature conformance bits

Any changes made to 1, 2, 3 and 5 using the handheld communicator will be overwritten by the flow computer. In the digital mode it is not absolutely necessary to calibrate the transmitters outputs using the handheld communicator. The user can however trim the transmitters output calibration using the handheld communicator if he so desires without interference from the flow computer (see Honeywell documentation for details of trimming corrects). Whether the transmitter is trimmed with the handheld or not, the digital signals should be final calibrated ‘end to end’ using the normal analog input method described in Chapter 8 of Volume 1.

Combo Module LED Status Indicators Each I/O channel of the ‘HV’ Combo module has a set of two LED indicators, one green and one red. The green LED shows all communication activity taking place on the channel (flow computer, transmitter and handheld communicator if connected). The Red LED lights only when the flow computer is transmitting data to the transmitter. Normal digital operation is indicated by a regular pulsation of the green LED (about 3 per second). The red LED will be seen to blink whenever a configuration change is made in the flow computer which affects that particular transmitter.

Switching Between Analog and Digital Mode. Connecting an analog mode Honeywell multivariable transmitter to the computer will cause the flow computer to automatically switch the transmitter to the digital DE mode sending out a series of ‘Wake up commands’ to the Honeywell transmitter. A switch over to the digital mode by the transmitter will cause the green LED on the combo module to pulse steadily indicating that communications have been established. To disable the wake up command and initialize communications between the Honeywell transmitter and the flow computer, delete all I/O point assignments within the flow computer to that I/O point. Using the Honeywell handheld communicator press [Shift] [A/D] and wait till the handheld displays ‘Change to Analog?’ Answer by pressing [Enter] (Yes). ‘SFC Working’ will be displayed. The green LED on the ‘HV’ Combo module on that channel will stop pulsing. Re-entering the I/O point will cause the Omni to send the wake up command to the Honeywell and after three command sends the green LED on the Honeywell module will pulse at a steady 3Hz rate.

TB-980502 w 21/23/27.72+

3


Technical Bulletin

Viewing the Status of the Honeywell Transmitter from the Keypad To verify the data being received from the smart transmitter, press [Input] [Status] and [Enter] from the front panel. The following data displays: HV-1 Transmitter DB Status OK Gstatus NON-CRITICAL DP% 25.00 SP% 76.50 TT% 32.13 DP LRV 0.0 DP Span 400.0 DP Damp Secs. .16 DP Conformity bit 0 SP LRV 406.8 SP Span 27680.2 SP Damp Secs .16 SP Conformity bit 0 TT LRV .0 TT Span 100.0 TT Damp Secs .3 TT Conformity bit 0 SW Revision 2.1 Serial # xxxxxxxxxx DP Range 400.0 SP Range 20760.5 TT Range 850.0 ID/TAG SMV-3000 Filter Hertz 60 SensorType RTD-PT100

4

TB-980502 w 21/23/27.72+

TB-980502


Viewing the Status of the Honeywellä ä Transmitter from the Keypad HV-1 Transmitter : Indicates the Honeywell Multivariable Combo Module (HV) and the channel number on that module. As there can be only one HV module installed, this number can only be 1 through 4. DB Status

TB-980502 w 21/23/27.72+

: There are five status states. 1) OK : Communications between the flow computer and smart Honeywell transmitter are OK. The database within the transmitter matches the flow computer. 2) Idle : This flow computer I/O point has been assigned to a Honeywell transmitter but is not receiving data from the transmitter. Possible cause is a wiring problem such as reversal of wiring. If you observe the status LEDs you will note that the flow computer attempts to establish communications by sending a wake-up command every 10 seconds or so. 3) Bad PV : Communications between the flow computer and smart Honeywell transmitter are OK but the transmitter has determined that a critical error has occurred within the transmitter meaning the value of the process variable cannot be trusted. The flow computer will set the transducer failure alarm and follow the fail code strategy selected by the user for this transducer. 4) DB Error : Communications between the flow computer and smart Honeywell transmitter are OK but the flow Computer has determined that the database within the flow computer does not agree with the database within the transmitter. If you observe the status LEDs you will note that the flow computer attempts to correct the transmitters database by writing the correct data to the transmitter once every 30-45 sec or so. 5) 4 Byte : The transmitter is operating in the 4-Byte Burst Mode. Because the flow computer will not tolerate this mode of operation, this status display should only be displayed momentarily as the flow computer will automatically switch the transmitter into the 6-Byte Burst Mode.

5


Technical Bulletin

Gstatus

: Gross Status Flag value: 1) OK : No errors are reported by the SMV transmitter. 2) Critical Critical error reported by the SMV transmitter. 3) Non-Critical : An error of a non critical nature has been reported by the SMV transmitter. 4) Reserved : Consult Honeywell if this status value is returned.

DP%

: Differential pressure variable value in percentage of the transmitter span. A -25.00 could mean that the transmitter is not communicating (see Status definition previous).

SP%

: Static pressure variable value in percentage of the transmitter span. A -25.00 could mean that the transmitter is not communicating (see Status definition previous).

TT%

: Temperature variable value in percentage of the transmitter span. A -25.00 could mean that the transmitter is not communicating (see Status definition previous).

DP LRV

: Lower Range Value of the DP variable in engineering units. Engineering units are inches of water at 39 degrees Fahrenheit.

DP Span

: The Span of the Differential pressure variable in engineering units (the span is the difference between the lower and upper ranges of the transmitter). Engineering units are inches of water at 39 degrees Fahrenheit. The flow computer will display ‘DB Error’ if the user tries to enter a span of 0% or a span which would exceed the DP sensor ‘range’ (described later).

DP Damp Secs

: Damping Time of the DP transmitter output in seconds.

DP Conformity Bit : Meaningful only with differential pressure transmitters. Conformity Bit 0 = linear output; Conformity Bit 1 = square root output. The flow computer requires linear output and will automatically set this bit to 0 should it be set to a 1.

6

SP LRV

: Lower Range Value of the Static Pressure variable in engineering units. Engineering units are inches of water at 39 degrees Fahrenheit.

SP Span

: The Span of the Static Pressure variable in engineering units (the span is the difference between the lower and upper ranges of the transmitter). Engineering units are inches of water at 39 degrees Fahrenheit. The flow computer will display ‘DB Error’ if the user tries to enter a span of 0% or a span which would exceed the static pressure sensor ‘range’ (described later).

TB-980502 w 21/23/27.72+

TB-980502


SP Damp Secs

: Damping Time of the Static Pressure transmitter output in seconds.

SP Conformity Bit : Meaningful only with differential pressure transmitters. TT LRV

: Lower Range Value of the temperature variable in engineering units. Engineering units are degrees Celsius.

TT Span

: The Span of the Temperature variable in engineering units (the span is the difference between the lower and upper ranges of the transmitter). Engineering units are degrees Celsius. The flow computer will display ‘DB Error’ if the user tries to enter a span of 0% or a span which would exceed the temperature sensor ‘range’ (described later).

TT Damp Secs

: Damping Time of the Temperature transmitter output in seconds.

TT Conformity Bit : Meaningful only with differential pressure transmitters. Software Revision : Current Software installed within the smart multivariable device. Serial # : Serial Number of the smart multivariable device. DP Range

: Maximum range of the DP sensor in inches of water at 39 degrees Fahrenheit. The transmitter will not accept configuration entries which exceed this value.

SP Range

: Maximum range of the Static Pressure sensor in inches of water at 39 degrees Fahrenheit. The transmitter will not accept configuration entries which exceed this value.

TT Range

: Maximum range of the Temperature sensor in degrees Celsius. The transmitter will not accept configuration entries which exceed this value.

ID/TAG

: ASCII string used to identify the SMV DP transmitter.

Filter Hertz

: Frequency used to filter sensor signals to minimize AC mains interference. Selections are 50 or 60 Hertz.

Sensor Type

: Temperature sensor types are: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5)

RTD-PT100 J type Thermocouple K type Thermocouple T type Thermocouple E type Thermocouple

Note: Thermocouples can be internally or externally compensated.

TB-980502 w 21/23/27.72+

7


Technical Bulletin

Obtaining More Detailed Status Information from the Keypad Additional data based upon the ‘Primary’, ‘Secondary’ and ‘Tertiary’ ‘Detailed Status’ bytes which are retrieved from the SMV data base is available by pressing [Input] [Status] [Alarm] and [Enter]. The display will approximate the following messages depending upon certain bits being ON in the appropriate ‘detailed status byte’. Some of these status bits also cause alarm status points within the flow computer data base to be activated. When this happens, these alarm events are time and date tagged and logged in the alarm log as any other flow computer alarm.

HONEYWELL DETAILED STATUS BYTE-BIT 1-0 1-1 1-2

T EXT IN ‘BOLD’ DISPLAYED Meter Body Fault: Communication between sensor board and SMV main board electronics is suspect. Characterization PROM Fault or Checksum Error Suspect Input: Possibly Meter Body or Electronics Failure

OMNI ALARM POINT(S) ACTIVATED 2n44 CR 2n47 CR 2n50 CR 2n44 CR 2n47 CR 2n44 CR 2n47 CR

1-3

DAC Compensation: Fault Detected

2n52 CR

1-4

NVM Fault: Non Volatile Memory Error Detected

2n52 CR

1-5

RAM Fault: RAM Memory Error Detected

2n52 CR

1-6

ROM Fault: ROM Memory Error Detected

2n52 CR

1-7

PAC Fault Detected

2n44 CR 2n47 CR

2-0

MB OverTemp: Meter Body Sensor Over Temperature DP Zero Correction Value is Outside of Acceptable Limits DP Span Correction Value is Outside of Acceptable Limits Status 2-3 (Consult with Honeywell for meaning) MB Overload or : (Always with next message)

2-1 2-2 2-3 2-4

NC = None Critical Alarm.

2n51 NC 2n42 NC 2n42 NC ¾ 2n47 CR

CR = Critical Alarm Override Action Considered.

Note: The ‘n’ in the Modbus address refers to the number of the meter run.

8

TB-980502 w 21/23/27.72+

TB-980502


HONEYWELL DETAILED STATUS BYTE-BIT 2-5 2-6

T EXT IN ‘BOLD’ DISPLAYED Meter Body Fault: Pressure input is twice the URL DP Cal Corr Default: ‘Reset Corrects’ command issued or ‘Calibrate and Power Cycle’ performed

OMNI ALARM POINT(S) ACTIVATED 2n47 CR 2n42 NC

2-7

DAC Tempco Data Bad: Analog mode only.

¾

3-0

Invalid Database: Some error detected in the SMVs configuration. All PVs are suspect.

2n44 CR 2n47 CR 2n50 CR

3-1 3-2 3-3

Suspect SP Input: Static pressure input suspect Status 3-2 (Consult with Honeywell for meaning) Status 3-3 (Consult with Honeywell for meaning)

2n47 CR ¾ ¾

3-4

DP Term Out of Range

¾

3-5

V-T Term Out of Rng: Viscosity temperature term out of range D-T Term Out of Rng: Density temperature term out of range Ind Var Out of Range: Independent variable out of range Status 4-0 (Consult with Honeywell for meaning) Excess Zero Corr SP: Excess zero correction for static pressure Excess Span Corr SP: Excess span correction for static pressure SP is Absolute: Static pressure sensor is absolute SP is Gauge: Static pressure sensor is gauge Status 4-5 (Consult with Honeywell for meaning) SP Corrects Reset: Static pressure corrections reset

¾

3-6 3.7 4-0 4-1 4-2 4-3 4-4 4-5 4-6


¾ ¾ ¾ 2n45 NC 2n45 NC ¾ ¾ ¾ 2n45 NC



TB-980502 w 21/23/27.72+

9


Technical Bulletin

HONEYWELL DETAILED STATUS BYTE-BIT 4-7 5-0 5-1 5-2 5-3

OMNI ALARM POINT(S) ACTIVATED

T EXT IN ‘BOLD’ DISPLAYED Status 4-7 (Consult with Honeywell for meaning) Status 5-0 (Consult with Honeywell for meaning) Status 5-1 (Consult with Honeywell for meaning) Status 5-2 (Consult with Honeywell for meaning) Status 5-3 (Consult with Honeywell for meaning)

¾ ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾

5-4

DP in Input Mode

2n43 CR

5-5

SP in Input Mode

2n46 CR

5-6

Temp in Input Mode

2n49 CR

5-7

PV4 in Input Mode

¾

6-0

2 Wire RTD Used

¾

6-1

3 Wire RTD Used

¾

6-2

4 Wire RTD Used

¾

6-3

2 Wire TC Used

¾

6-4

DP in Output Mode

2n43 CR

6-5

SP in Output Mode

2n46 CR

6-6

Temp in Output Mode

2n49 CR

6-7

PV4 in Output Mode

7-0

Temp A/D Fault : Temperature A to D failure

2n50 CR

7-1

Temp Char Fault: Temperature characterization fault Temp Input Suspect: Temperature input signal is suspect Status 7-3 (Consult with Honeywell for meaning) Temp NVM Fault: Temperature non-volatile memory fault detected Status 7-5 (Consult with Honeywell for meaning)

2n50 CR

7-2 7-3 7-4 7-5


¾

2n50 CR ¾ 2n50 CR ¾



10

TB-980502 w 21/23/27.72+

TB-980502


HONEYWELL DETAILED STATUS BYTE-BIT 7-6 7-7 8-0

T EXT IN ‘BOLD’ DISPLAYED

OMNI ALARM POINT(S) ACTIVATED

Status 7-6 (Consult with Honeywell for meaning) Status 7-7 (Consult with Honeywell for meaning) Delta Temperature : (FUTURE - Consult with Honeywell for meaning)

¾ ¾ ¾

8-1

Excess Zero Cor Temp

2n48 NC

8-2

Excess Span Cor Temp

2n48 NC

8-3

Temp Input Open : Open circuit temperature sensor Temp Over Range : Process temperature is over range Redun Backup Temp : (FUTURE - Consult with Honeywell for meaning)

2n50 CR

8-6

Temp Corrects Active

2n48 NC

8-7

Temp Sensor Mismatch

2n50 CR

8-4 8-5


2n50 CR ¾



TB-980502 w 21/23/27.72+

11


Technical Bulletin

Transducer Alarms Logged by the Flow Computer The following alarm points are automatically updated with data contained in the ‘detailed status’ bytes within the flow computers copy of the SMVs data base (see the previous table). These alarms are time and date tagged and logged by the flow computer whenever the respective bit changes state. Other than the logging function, non critical alarms cause no other action to occur. Critical alarms are alarms which are considered to adversely impact the credibility of the measurement reading, these alarms cause the flow computer to examine the ‘Override Code’ strategy and apply an override if so configured.

ADDRESS OF ALARM POINT

ALARM T ITLE

ALARM T YPE

2n42

Meter ‘n’ DP: Invalid Corrects or Corrects Reset

NC

2n43

Meter ‘n’ DP is in the Input or Output Mode

CR

2n44

Meter ‘n’ DP Signal is Suspect

CR

Meter ‘n’ Pressure: Invalid Corrects or Corrects Reset Meter ‘n’ Pressure is in the Input or Output Mode

NC

Meter ‘n’ Pressure Signal is Suspect

CR

Meter ‘n’ Temperature - Invalid Corrects or Corrects Reset Meter ‘n’ Temperature is in the Input or Output Mode

NC

2n50

Meter ‘n’ Temperature Signal is Suspect

CR

2n51

Meter ‘n’ Body Fault - Over Temperature

NC

2n52

Meter ‘n’ Critical Failure of SMV Electronics

CR

2n53

Meter ‘n’ SMV Not Communicating

CR

2n45 2n46 2n47 2n48 2n49


CR

CR



12

TB-980502 w 21/23/27.72+

TB-980502


HV Combo Module Address Jumpers The HV Combo Module actually uses the same physical PCB module as a regular H type combo module, except it uses a different address jumper setting.

Module Address Jumpers In ‘*’ Position

Green LED Indicates Any Activity *

*

*

Red LED Indicates OMNI is Transmitting

SMV Channel #1 SMV Channel #2

Transmitter Loop Status LEDs SMV Channel #3 SMV Channel #4

Figure 1. Setting the Address Jumpers of the HV Combo Module

TB-980502 w 21/23/27.72+

13


Technical Bulletin

How the I/O Points are Assigned When the flow computer detects that an ‘HV’ combo module is installed it automatically allocates 12 of its 24 process inputs to the ‘HV’ module. The presence or absence of combo modules is checked after a RESET ALL RAM or after a CHECK I/O MODULES command is executed. Although the ‘HV’ combo has only 4 physical Honeywell DE ports, each SMV3000 provides 3 variables for a total I/O requirement of 4 x 3 = 12. As the total process input count of the flow computer is limited to 24 it is obvious that if an ‘HV’ combo module is fitted there can only be 3 other combo modules of type A, B, E/D, E or H. The ‘HV’ combo module is always the last module in the list, and the I/O assignments reflect this fact (see the following example). Example 1: Omni 6000 - 2A - H1 – HV ( Flow computer contains - 2 ‘A’ combos, 1 ‘H’ combo, and an ‘HV’ combo). The 1st ‘A’ combo is allocated:

Input points Output points

1, 2, 3 & 4 1&2

The 2nd ‘A’ combo is allocated:


5, 6, 7 & 8 3&4

The ‘H’ combo is allocated:


9, 10, 11 & 12 5&6

The ‘HV’ combo is allocated:

Input points

13, 14, 15 & 16 Diff. Pressure 17, 18, 19 & 20 Temperature 21, 22, 23 & 24 Pressure 7&8

Output points

While the example shown above employs 4 combo modules in total, it uses all 24 process input assignments, this means that 2 physical I/O module slots will be unusable on the backplane. To configure an ‘HV’ combo module it is only necessary to configure the Diff-Pressure I/O points in the Meter Run Config menu, the I/O points for the temperature and pressure variables are automatically assigned by the flow computer and cannot be changed by the user.

14

TB-980502 w 21/23/27.72+

TB-980502


Using the above example the following table identifies the I/O point assignments that will occur. Getting Tech Support Technical support is available at: ( (281) 240-6161 Email should be sent via the WEB Page at: www.omniflow.com or email to: [email protected]

DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE

T EMPERATURE

PRESSURE

METER RUN # 1

13

17

21

METER RUN # 2

14

18

22

METER RUN # 3

15

19

23

METER RUN # 4

16

20

24

Numbers in bold are entered by the user. Numbers in italics are assigned automatically by the flow computer and cannot be changed.

OmniCom Revision OmniCom revision ??.72 or later is required to support the SMV-3000 multivariable transmitter.

TB-980502 w 21/23/27.72+

15


Date: 05

13

98


TB # 980503

Serial I/O Modules: Installation Options Contents User Manual Reference This technical bulletin complements the information contained in Volume 1, and is applicable to all firmware revisions.

Scope .............................................................................................................. 1 Abstract........................................................................................................... 1 Features and Specifications .......................................................................... 2 Dual Channel RS-232-C Serial I/O Module Model #68-6005 ......................... 3 RS-232-C / RS-485 Serial I/O Module Model #68-6205-A .............................. 4 RS-232-C / RS-485 Serial I/O Module Model #68-6205-B .............................. 6 RS-232-C / RS-485 Serial Port Jumper Options ............................................ 8

Scope All Omni 6000/3000 Flow Computers have serial communications capabilities via proprietary serial I/O modules.

Abstract Omni flow computers can come equipped with serial I/O modules that communicate with RS-232-Compatible or RS-485 devices. Omni manufactures three models of serial modules: q Dual Channel RS-232-C Serial I/O Module Model # 68-6005 q RS-232-C/RS-485 Serial I/O Module Model # 68-6205-A q RS-232-C/RS-485 Serial I/O Module Model # 68-6205-B Each serial module has 2 ports. Omni 6000 flow computers can have up to two serial modules installed for a maximum of 4 ports. Omni 3000 flow computers typically use one serial module providing 2 ports. Each serial communication port is individually optically isolated for maximum common-mode and noise rejection. Jumpers are provided for selection of module address and serial port communication standards. Communication parameters such as protocol type, baud rate, stop bits and parity settings are software selectable.


1


Technical Bulletin

Features and Specifications Proprietary serial modules and multi-bus serial I/O interface specifications are: Omni Serial I/O Modules M ODEL #

68-6005

68-6205-A

68-6205-B

INFO - Up to 12 flow computers and/or other compatible serial devices can be multi-dropped using Omni’s proprietary RS-232Compatible serial port. Thirty-two devices may be connected when using the RS-485 mode. Typically, one serial I/O module is used on the Omni 3000, providing two ports. A maximum of two serial modules can be installed in the Omni 6000, providing four ports.

TYPE

q Dual channel serial communications providing two RS-232-Compatible ports. q Communications protocol, baud rate, stop bits and parity settings are software selectable.

Dual Channel RS-232Compatible

RS-232-Compatible / RS-485 (Non-selectable Ports)

RS-232-Compatible / RS-485 (Selectable Ports)

q Port #1 is factory-set as RS-232Compatible mode (jumper blocks are soldered in place). q Port #2 is factory set to RS-485 mode. q RS-485 communications are jumperselectable as: ¨ 2-wire terminated or nonterminated ¨ 4-wire terminated or nonterminated q Communications protocol, baud rate, stop bits and parity settings are software selectable. q Both Ports #1 and #2 are jumperselectable as either RS-232-C or RS485 modes. q RS-485 communications are jumperselectable as: ¨ 2-wire terminated or nonterminated ¨ 4-wire terminated or nonterminated q Communications protocol, baud rate, stop bits and parity settings are software selectable.

Omni Multi-bus Serial I/O Interface RS-232-COMPATIBLE

RS-485

±7.5 volts (typical)

5 volts (differential driver)

1.5 k ohm

120 ohm

10 mA (limited)

20 mA

INPUT LOW THRESHOLD

-3.0 volts

0.8 volts (differential input)

INPUT HIGH THRESHOLD

+3.0 volts

5.0 volts (differential input)

DATA OUTPUT VOLTAGE LOAD IMPEDANCE SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT

BAUD RATES COMMON M ODE VOLTAGE LEDS

2

BASIC COMMUNICATION FEATURES

1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2, & 38.4 k bps (software selectable) ±250 Volts to chassis ground channel inputs/outputs & handshaking signals


TB-980503

Serial I/O Module: Installation Options

Dual Channel RS-232-C Serial I/O Module Model #68-6005 INFO - Up to 12 flow computers and/or other compatible serial devices can be multi-dropped using Omni’s proprietary RS-232-C serial port. Typically, one serial I/O module is used on the Omni 3000, providing two ports. A maximum of two serial modules can be installed in the Omni 6000, providing four ports.

Dual channel serial communication modules can be installed providing two RS232-Compatible ports. Although providing RS-232-C signal levels, the tristate output design allows multiple flow computers to share one RS-232 device. This serial module is the oldest model manufactured by Omni.

Address Selection Jumpers

Jumper Settings - For information on setting the jumpers of serial I/O modules refer to 1.6.3. “Serial Communication Modules” in Volume 1, Chapter 1 of the User Manual.

1

0

Address S1 (1) Selected for Serial Ports 1 & 2

Address S2 (0) Selected for Serial Ports 3 & 4

RTS Out TX Out

Chan. B

RTS Out TX Out

Chan. A

LED Indicators RX In RDY In

Chan. A

RX In RDY In

Chan. B

Fig. 1. Dual RS-232 Serial I/O Module Model Showing Selection Jumper and Indicator LEDs


3


Technical Bulletin

RS-232-C / RS-485 Serial I/O Module Model #68-6205-A INFO - Up to 12 flow computers and/or other compatible serial devices can be multi-dropped using Omni’s proprietary RS-232-C serial port. Up to 32 devices may be connected when using the RS-485 mode. Refer to technical bulletin TB980401 “Peer-to-Peer Basics” for more information. Typically, one serial I/O module is used on the Omni 3000, providing two ports. A maximum of two serial modules can be installed in the Omni 6000, providing four ports.

Serial I/O Module # 68-6205-A (manufactured 1997) has two communication ports. The first serial port (Ports #1 and #3 if two 68-6205 modules are installed) is factory set in the RS-232-C mode (jumpers are soldered into place and cannot be moved). The second serial port (Ports #2 and #4) is configurable for RS-485 communications only. Although the first serial port provides RS-232-C signal levels, the tristate output design allows multiple flow computers to share one serial link.


Address S1 Selected for Serial Ports 1 & 2

Jumper Settings - For information on setting the jumpers of serial I/O modules refer to 1.6.3. “Serial Communication Modules” in Volume 1, Chapter 1 of the User Manual. For serial port jumper settings see also Fig. 6 in this bulletin.


IRQ Select Jumper IRQ 2 Selected (If using an SV Module, select IRQ 3)

LED Indicators

68-6205

REV: A

Port #2 (#4) Jumpers


(RS-485 Options Only)

(Hard-wired to RS-232-C Only)

Fig. 2. RS-232/485 Module #68-6205-A Showing Selection Jumpers and Indicator LEDs

4


TB-980503


The first serial port jumpers are factory hard-wired for RS-232-C mode. This port is non-selectable and cannot be changed by the user. The second serial port jumpers are factory preset in the RS-485 two-wire, terminated positions. This port is user-selectable for RS-485 two-wire/four-wire terminated/nonterminated jumper positions (see Fig. 6). Back panel wiring is shown below. Micro Motionä ä RFT 9739 Devices - Users of Micro Motionä RFT 9739 devices connected to the peer-to-peer port (Port #2) of the Omni, please note that the resistor networks should be positioned for 2-wire RS-485 and that Terminal A from the RFT 9739 should be wired to Omni Terminal B (7), and B from the RFT must be wired to Omni Terminal A (11). Refer to technical bulletin TB980401 “Peer-to-Peer Basics” for more information.


First Serial Port

Second Serial Port

RS-232-C

RS-485 2-Wire

RS-485 4-Wire

1

TX

2

TERM

3

RX

RS-232-C

4

GND

Hard-wired

5

RTS

6

RDY

7

B

TX-B

8

¾

¾

¾

RX-A

10

GND

GND

11

A

TX-A

12

¾

RX-B

9

N/A

Fig. 3. Back Panel Wiring of the RS-232-C/RS-485 Module #68-6205-A


5


Technical Bulletin

RS-232-C / RS-485 Serial I/O Module Model #68-6205-B INFO - Up to 12 flow computers and/or other compatible serial devices can be multi-dropped using Omni’s proprietary RS-232-C serial port. Up to 32 devices may be connected when using the RS-485 mode. Refer to technical bulletin TB980401 “Peer-to-Peer Basics” for more information. Typically, one serial I/O module is used on the Omni 3000, providing two ports. A maximum of two serial modules can be installed in the Omni 6000, providing four ports.

Serial I/O Module # 68-6205-B is the latest serial module manufactured by Omni (1998). It is capable of handling two communication ports. Each serial port is jumper-selectable for either RS-232-Compatible or RS-485 communications. Although providing RS-232-C signal levels when in this mode, the tristate output design allows multiple flow computers to share one serial link. In addition to the RS-232 mode, jumper selections have been provided on each port to allow selection of RS-485 format. With this option, a total of two RS-485 ports are available on this model.



Jumper Settings - For information on setting the jumpers of serial I/O modules refer to 1.6.3. “Serial Communication Modules” in Volume 1, Chapter 1 of the User Manual. For serial port jumper settings see also Fig. 6 in this bulletin.


IRQ Select Jumper IRQ 2 Selected (If using an SV Module, select IRQ 3)

LED Indicators

68-6205

Port #2 (#4)Jumpers

REV: B


Fig. 4. RS-232-C/RS-485 Module #68-6205-B Showing Selection Jumpers and Indicator LEDs

6


TB-980503


Jumpers for both serial ports are user-selectable to RS-232-C or RS-485 formats (see Fig. 6). The RS-485 options are either 2-wire or 4-wire mode; each mode can be set as terminated or non-terminated connections. Back panel wiring is shown below. Micro Motionä ä RFT 9739 Devices - Users of Micro Motionä RFT 9739 devices connected to the peer-to-peer port (Port #2) of the Omni, please note that the resistor networks should be positioned for 2-wire RS-485 and that Terminal A from the RFT 9739 should be wired to Omni Terminal B (7), and B from the RFT must be wired to Omni Terminal A (11). Refer to technical bulletin TB980401 “Peer-to-Peer Basics” for more information.


First Serial Port

Second Serial Port

RS-232-C

RS-485 2-Wire

RS-485 4-Wire

1

TX

B

TX-B

2

TERM

¾

¾

3

RX

¾

RX-A

4

GND

GND

GND

5

RTS

A

TX-A

6

RDY

¾

RX-B

7

TX

B

TX-B

8

TERM

¾

¾

9

RX

¾

RX-A

10

GND

GND

GND

11

RTS

A

TX-A

12

RDY

¾

RX-B

Fig. 5. Back Panel Wiring of the RS-232-C/RS-485 Module #68-6205-B


7


Technical Bulletin

RS-232-C / RS-485 Serial Port Jumper Options Serial Port I/O Software Settings - Each serial port is configurable via OmniComâ software or the Omni front panel. Detailed information on how to configure these and other flow computer settings is available in Volume 3, Chapter 2 of the User Manual and in OmniCom Help.

The RS-232-C/RS-485 serial port has been designed so that RS-232 or RS-485 communications standards can be selected by placement of 16-pin resistor networks into the correct blocks. The following diagrams show the locations of blocks JB1, JB2, JB3 for the first serial port (Model #68-6205-B only), and JB4, JB5, JB6 for the second serial port (Models #68-6205-A and #68-6205-B) for each format. Serial I/O Module #68-6205-A only has the RS-485 options available for the second serial port, and the first port is hard-wired to the RS232-C position and cannot be changed by the user.

RS-232 JB1 or JB4

JB2 or JB5

RS-485

RS-485 2-WIRE

JB3 or JB6

RS-485 TERMINATED


JB2 or JB5

JB3 or JB6


JB2 or JB5

JB3 or JB6

RS-232/485 NON-TERMINATED RS-232

Terminated/Nonterminated RS-485 - The RS-485 devices located at each extreme end of an RS485 run should be terminated. Note that the device located at an extreme end may or may not be an Omni Flow Computer.

RS-232/485 4-WIRE

RS-232


JB2 or JB5

JB3 or JB6

RS-485 TERMINATED


RS-232/485 RS-485 2-WIRE NON-TERMINATED RS-232

RS-232/485 4-WIRE

JB2 or JB5

JB3 or JB6

RS-485 2-WIRE RS-232

RS-485 TERMINATED

Fig. 6. Layout of Jumper Blocks Showing RS-232/485 Formats

8



Date: 05

21

98


TB # 980504

Multivariable Flow Transmitter Interfaces: Connectivity and Data Transfer Issues Contents User Manual Reference This technical bulletin complements the information contained in the User Manual, applicable to all revision .72+.

Multivariable Flow Transmitters - These are a special type of smart digital instrumentation device that incorporates multiple sensors. The sensors are controlled by microprocessors.

Scope .............................................................................................................. 1 Abstract........................................................................................................... 1 Improving Accuracy and Performance.......................................................... 2 Multiple Sensors and Parameters..............................................................................2 Scan Interval.............................................................................................................2 Time Lag ..................................................................................................................2

Transferring Flow Rate and Totalizer Data ................................................... 3 Serial Data Communications ......................................................................... 4 The Flowmeter Device as a Communication Slave ....................................................4 The Flowmeter Device as a Communication Pseudo Master......................................4 The Flowmeter Device as a Full Communication Master............................................4 Point-to-Point Configurations ....................................................................................5 Advantages and Disadvantages of a Serial Data Link ................................................6

Direct Pulse Train........................................................................................... 7

Scope This technical bulletin applies to all firmware revisions versions .72+ of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computers.

Abstract The term ‘multivariable flow transmitter’ denominates a class of smart digital instrumentation devices. This class of device incorporates multiple sensors controlled by either one or more microprocessors. Coriolis and ultrasonic liquid and gas flowmeters are examples of current multivariable transmitter technology. These devices use some form of serial data communication link to transfer data to and from the Omni flow computer, requiring an ‘SV’ multivariable communication combo module. In addition, the devices provide an output pulse train which is proportional to the flow (either mass or volume).

TB-980504 w ALL.72+

1


Technical Bulletin

Improving Accuracy and Performance Obtaining high accuracy is the primary goal of instrumentation designers. The inclusion of one or more microprocessors gives the instrument designer the ability to improve the performance of a device, by taking advantage of the fact that the measurement sensor is far more repeatable than it is accurate. For example, given the same set of operating conditions, the sensor is able to reproduce its results in an extremely predictable manner within the range of its sensors. At a different set of operating conditions, the sensor results may be different but still extremely predictable. Some considerations for improving measurement accuracy and instrument performance are the use of multiple secondary sensors and parameters, and the device’s scan interval and the time lag it produces to calculate results from a sensor measurement.

Multiple Sensors and Parameters The microprocessor allows the manufacture to characterize and correct the measurement sensor results by monitoring its electronic ambient conditions and sensor operating conditions. This is done using secondary sensors or calculating parameters such as temperature, pressure and density. The net result is greatly improved accuracy of the measurement output, and the availability of other measured or calculated parameters, which can be used by tertiary devices such as flow computers. The flow computer uses these parameters as values for input variables in ‘equations of state’ and to diagnose the condition of the transmitter.

Scan Interval All microprocessor controlled multivariable flowmeter devices operate on some scan interval; i.e., input parameters are measured on a scan interval (fixed or variable). The measured parameters are then input into a calculation sequence which produces a resultant flow rate, (either mass / unit time or volume / unit time).

Time Lag Note that sensor measurements must be taken before a result can be calculated. The calculated flow rate represents that which existed for the previous scan interval; i.e., there is a time lag from when the measurement is taken to when the flow rate is calculated. Fast scan intervals are typically used to minimize any uncertainty that may be introduced by this time lag.

2

TB-980504 w ALL.72+

TB-980504

MV Flow Transmitter Interfaces: Serial Connectivity vs. Direct Pulse Trains

Transferring Flow Rate and Totalizer Data Multivariable flowmeters provide useful and important diagnostic data and alarms which can be of great benefit to the user. This data could be processed and used to warn the user of impending failures or operational problems before they have had a major impact on the uncertainty of the measurement result. There is no question that the integrity of the measurement is greatly enhanced by providing this data to the flow computer and allowing the flow computer to log and alarm any abnormalities detected. Various multivariable flowmeter devices update their database with the most recently calculated volume or mass flow rate. The Omni flow computer, which is operating on a 500 msec calculation cycle, uses the last flow rate received from the flowmeter to calculate the incremental flow quantity for the current calculation cycle. INFO - At the time that this bulletin was being prepared, certain manufacturers were making firmware adjustments to their products to provide high resolution totalizers suitable for use by the Omni flow computer.

TB-980504 w ALL.72+

Most flowmeter devices also provide internal totalizers. Using these totalizers can be difficult unless they are provided in a numeric format which increments and rolls over predictably. Floating point variables for example normally keep increasing in value and do not roll over to zero at any point. This causes a problem because as the totalizer increases in size, a point is reached when the bit resolution of the mantissa portion of the number is exceeded, and the totalizer begins to increment using larger and larger steps. The flow computer could compare the totalizer values received between successive serial transmissions, but because of the totalizer roll over and resolution problems, and the inability to synchronize the reading of successive totalizer readings with the calculation cycle of the flow computer, it is better to use the instantaneous flow rate value obtained via a direct connection to calculate and totalize the flow in the flow computer. This has significance because it forms the basis for the totalizer integration within the transmitter.

3


Technical Bulletin

Serial Data Communications Each time the device performs its measurement scan and calculation process, it typically updates the values of calculated variables, measured parameters and alarm points in its database. Some flowmeter devices act as ‘serial communication slaves’, allowing the database to be asynchronously read and, in some cases, modified. Other devices act as ‘serial communication pseudo masters’ and simply transmit certain database points on a regular time interval, while acting as a slave and accepting commands and configuration changes. At least one device ¾the Krohne Ultrasonic flowmeter¾ can be both ‘full communication master’ and ‘communication slave’.

The Flowmeter Device as a Communication Slave In this mode the flowmeter device transmits data as requested by the flow computer communication master. When asked for data, the flowmeter will transmit the most recently calculated data or block of data. In normal operation, the flow computer requests flow and diagnostic data on a regular interval and intersperses any other data transmissions (e.g., configuration data or commands) between these regular flow update polls. Sometimes due to heavy communications traffic, communication glitches or transmission retries, flow update polls can be time-skewed or missed altogether.

The Flowmeter Device as a Communication Pseudo Master In this mode a fixed block of data is transmitted over and over on a regular interval without requiring a response, (e.g., Instromet ultrasonic gas flowmeter transmits a information data block every second). Any command or configuration data that is needed to be sent to the flowmeter transmitter must be interspersed between these regular data block transmissions. It is the job of the flow computer acting as communication master to ensure that configuration changes do not collide with information data block transmissions. Sometimes due to flow computer task loading, communication glitches or transmission retries, flow data blocks can be time-skewed.

The Flowmeter Device as a Full Communication Master The Krohne ultrasonic flowmeter can be configured to act as a Modbus master. In this mode the flowmeter can be configured to realize transactions of up to 20 predefined data blocks, which can be writes of data to a flow computer or reads of data from a flow computer. Each transaction requires a response from the slave flow computer. Update cycle time can be excessive if too many blocks with too much data are transferred and, as with the other serial communication methods, glitches and transmission retries can delay or time-skew the data received.

4

TB-980504 w ALL.72+

TB-980504


Point-to-Point Configurations Point-to-point configurations (Fig. 1), with both the flow computer and transmitter terminated, is the only acceptable wiring configuration.. Each flowmeter transmitter is connected to an independent ‘SV’ port of the flow computer. Because each ‘SV’ port is connected to only one flowmeter transmitter, each transmitter can now use a default communication address of ‘1’, greatly simplifying flow transmitter replacement issues. Data transfers are much faster then in a multi-drop mode and the likelihood of transmitter interaction is greatly minimized.

All 4 MV Ports of Flow Computer must be Terminated

Multivariable Device ID #1




Omni Flow Computer (Using Independent SV Ports)

Modbus IDs of Multivariable Devices can be the same in this Point-to-Point Configuration

All Four Multivariable Devices must be Terminated

Fig. 1. Point-to-Point Wiring Configuration

TB-980504 w ALL.72+

5


Technical Bulletin

Advantages and Disadvantages of a Serial Data Link The advantages of totalizing the flow in the flow computer using data obtained via a serial data link are: q Saving of two wires needed to transmit the pulse signal q No need to setup the multivariable flowmeter to output a pulse signal Disadvantages of totalizing the flow in the flow computer using data obtained via a serial data link are: q High level of instrumentation and technical expertise needed to maintain and debug an installation; e.g., the average metering technician is unlikely to be familiar with serial communication protocols, or able to operate a serial data protocol analyzer needed to interpret the data messages received from the flowmeter. q A cyclic or rapid change in flow rate at the flowmeter may not be captured correctly because of the relatively slow scan rate of the serial transmission link. q The flow rate update rate cannot be guaranteed to be regular in some cases due to communication glitches requiring communication retries and time-outs. Other factors which affect this are intermittent configuration and calibration transactions which may occur on the serial link. (these concerns are multiplied in a multi-dropped wiring system).

6

TB-980504 w ALL.72+

TB-980504


Direct Pulse Train From the calculated flow rate obtained from each measurement scan, the device calculates and outputs a pulse train of a certain frequency via a digital output. Each pulse will represent an exact amount of incremental flow. In some cases, a second digital output can be used to provide an exact copy of the pulse train except that it will be out of phase with the original pulse. These two pulse trains approximate the type of pulse output that is received from a dual pickoff turbine meter and as such can satisfy many of the ‘Pulse Fidelity’ checking requirements expressed in API MPMS, Chapter 5.5. The flow computer counts each and every pulse output by the flowmeter device and applies a flowmeter K-Factor as it would for any other pulse producing flowmeter. K-factors can be either in pulses per mass unit or pulses per volume unit. Changes in flow rate are immediately reflected in the pulse output and registered by the flow computer, within the cycle update limitations of both devices. The advantages of totalizing the flow in the flow computer via a direct pulse train are: q Flowmeter response time is as fast as the measurement and calculation scan period; e.g., a sudden increase or loss of flow would be detected within one calculation cycle. q Individual device scan cycles have no impact on uncertainty. Signal aliasing is not a problem. q Easy to implement ‘Dual Pulse Fidelity Checking’ using a second out of phase pulse using existing flow computer technology. q Low level of instrumentation and technical expertise needed to maintain and debug an installation; e.g., a metering technician with simple digital counter is all that is required to verify proper operation. q Ability to prove the device using conventional pipe provers and compact provers (applying double chronometry pulse interpolation methods). Disadvantages of totalizing the flow in the flow computer via direct pulse train are: q Two extra wires are needed to transmit the pulse signal. q Need to configure (scale) the digital I/O point pulse train frequency.

TB-980504 w ALL.72+

7


Date: 07

22

98

Author(s): T.J. Tajani / Robert L. Stallard

TB # 980701

Using the Totalizer Maintenance Mode Contents User Manual Reference This technical bulletin is applicable to Revisions 24.72+, 26.72+ and 27.72+ for metric units only.

Scope .............................................................................................................. 1 Abstract........................................................................................................... 1 Procedure to Start and End Maintenance Mode........................................... 2 Displaying the Maintenance Totals ............................................................... 3

Totalizer Maintenance Mode - This mode allows the operator to verify meter run calculations by measuring meter run flow rate (gross, net, mass, or energy) without impacting the custody transfer totals.

Totalizers ........................................................................................................ 3 Status.............................................................................................................. 3 Maintenance Mode Command ....................................................................... 4 Modbus Database Points Associated with the Totalizer Maintenance Mode ............................................................................................................... 4

Scope The Maintenance Mode feature applies to the following application revisions: q 24.72+ Turbine / Positive Displacement / Coriolis Liquid Flow Metering Systems with K Factor Linearization (metric units only) q 26.72+ Turbine / Positive Displacement Liquid Flow Metering Systems with Meter Factor Linearization (metric units only) q 27.72+ Orifice/Turbine Gas Flow Metering Systems (metric units only)

Abstract The purpose of maintenance mode function is to allow operators to verify meter run calculations. This function measures meter run flow rate (gross, net, mass, and energy) without impacting the overall operation of the custody transfer totals. When in the maintenance mode, the flow measured by the target meter run will not be accumulated in the meter run and/or station totalizers used for normal operation. Furthermore, any D/A outputs configured to output flow rate will not be impacted. While the specific meter is in the maintenance mode, the meter will display zero flow in all the non-maintenance mode displays.

TB-980701 w 24/26/27.72+

1


Technical Bulletin

Procedure to Start and End Maintenance Mode The maintenance mode function requires a technician Level '1' password. Following is the required procedure to Start and End the Maintenance Mode: (1) Enter a positive value for ‘low flow cutoff’ or ‘active frequency’ (see “Meter Run Setup” in Chapter 3 of the User Manual). A positive entry must be made to ensure that the meter active flag operates correctly at zero flow. (2) Shutdown the meter (flow rate = Zero). (3) In the display mode, press [Alpha Shift] [Prog] [Meter] [n] [Enter]. The Omni LCD screen will display: METER #1 MAINTENANCE Maintenance Mode N Reset Maint Totals Toggle Maint Mode _

Maintenance Mode Active/Inactive - If there is a ‘Y’ next to ‘Maintenance Mode’ in the display (see right), then the mode is active. The maintenance mode is inactive when an ‘N’ is displayed.

(4) Press [â â] (down arrow key) to place the cursor at ‘Toggle Maint Mode’ and press [Alpha Shift] [Y] [Enter]. Depending on the maintenance mode status, the Omni will toggle the mode. If the maintenance mode is active, then this step will end or “turn off” the mode; and vice versa. You will be prompted for the password. The LCD screen will display: METER #1 MAINTENANCE Maintenance Mode N Reset Maint Totals Password _

Configuration Settings The maintenance mode uses current flow computer configuration settings; i.e., additional configuration entries are not required

INFO - When the maintenance mode starts after selecting the type of measurement (gross, net, mass or energy), the flow rate and totalized flow are zero.

2

(5) Type the Level 1 password and press [Enter]. The Omni LCD screen will display a screen similar to the following: METER #1 MAINTENANCE Maintenance Mode Y Reset Maint Totals Toggle Maint Mode _ (6) To end (deactivate) the totalizer maintenance mode, repeat steps (2) through (5).

TB-980701 w 24/26/27.72+

TB-980701

Using the Totalizer Maintenance Mode

Displaying the Maintenance Totals INFO -Pressing [Gross] [Enter] in the maintenance mode will display the station and meter flow for this mode.

In the display mode, select the displays you want by entering the corresponding keypress sequence: q For Gross Flow Maintenance Totals, press [Meter] [n] [Gross]. q For Net Flow Maintenance Totals, press [Meter] [n] [Net]. q For Mass Flow Maintenance Totals, press [Meter] [n] [Mass]. q For Energy Flow Maintenance Totals (gas applications only ¾Revision 27.72+), press [Meter] [n] [Energy]. The Omni LCD screen will display: MaintenanceMode am3h Meter Tag 0.000 MaintenanceMode am3 Meter Tag 0.000

Current Flow Rate Totalized Value

Totalizers Meter Run Database Registers - The “n” in the database point number represents the meter run number (n = 1, 2, 3 or 4).

In the totalizer maintenance mode, the flow computer will realize all normal calculations and accumulate resulting flow quantities into special maintenance totalizers. The special totalizer registers reset to zero upon entry to maintenance mode or can be manually reset while in the maintenance mode. This reset will not affect the regular meter run totalizers. In this mode, the LCD screen will display meter run current flow rate and accumulated flow rate for the maintenance mode. Following are the Modbus database registers assigned as special maintenance mode totalizers: 5n92 5n93 5n94 5n95

Gross Maintenance Total Net Maintenance Total Mass Maintenance Total Energy (NSV) Maintenance Total

Status The following status points are provided in the Omni flow computer’s Modbus database to indicate when a meter run is in the totalizer maintenance mode: 1197 1297 1397 1497

TB-980701 w 24/26/27.72+

Meter Run #1 - Maintenance Mode Status Meter Run #2 - Maintenance Mode Status Meter Run #3 - Maintenance Mode Status Meter Run #4 - Maintenance Mode Status

3


Technical Bulletin

Maintenance Mode Command The maintenance mode function can be activated/deactivated remotely, providing that the flow rate is zero and the meter run is inactive (1n05 = 0). The meter run totalizer maintenance mode is activated by setting one or all the following Modbus database points to '1'; the mode will be ended by writing '0' to these same database points. 2737 2738 2739 2740

Meter Run #1 - Toggle Maintenance Mode Command Meter Run #2 - Toggle Maintenance Mode Command Meter Run #3 - Toggle Maintenance Mode Command Meter Run #4 - Toggle Maintenance Mode Command

Modbus Database Points Associated with the Totalizer Maintenance Mode The following table comprises the database registers for the maintenance mode function: MODBUS DATABASE POINTS ASSOCIATED WITH THE MAINTENANCE MODE Database Point Number Database Point Description

4

Meter #1 Meter #2 Meter #3 Meter #4

Meter Run Maintenance Mode Status

1197

1297

1397

1497

Gross Maintenance Mode Totalizers

5192

5292

5392

5492

Net Maintenance Mode Totalizers

5193

5293

5393

5493

Mass Maintenance Mode Totalizers

5194

5294

5394

5494

Energy (NSV) Maintenance Mode Totalizers

5195

5295

5395

5495

Maintenance Mode Command

2737

2738

2739

2740

TB-980701 w 24/26/27.72+


Date: 08

17

98

Author(s): Robert L. Stallard

TB # 980801

Unsolicited Transmissions of Custom Modbusä ä Data Packets Contents User Manual Reference This technical bulletin complements the information contained in the User Manual, specifically Volume 3, Chapter 4 “Modbusä ä Protocol Implementation”, and is applicable to all revisions .71+.

Unsolicited Transmissions - These type of transmissions are used for Omni flow computers to transmit custom data packets via an RS-232-C serial port without a poll. This feature is especially useful when communicating via VSAT satellite systems. Modbus protocol Function Code 67 has been assigned to this function exclusively for Omni flow computers.

TB-980801 w ALL.71+

Scope .............................................................................................................. 1 Abstract........................................................................................................... 2 Custom Modbusä ä Data Packets.................................................................... 2 Prerequisites for Using Unsolicited Transmissions of Custom Data Packets ........................................................................................................... 2 User-customized Modbus Driver................................................................................2 Compatible Serial Communications ..........................................................................3

Modbusä ä Protocol Implementation of Omni Proprietary Function Code 67: Transmit Read Unsolicited Custom Data Packet.......................... 3 Configuring Your Flow Computer for Unsolicited Transmissions of Custom Data Packets ..................................................................................... 4 Example ...................................................................................................................4

Scope This technical bulletin applies to all firmware revisions versions .71+ of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computers.

1


Technical Bulletin

Abstract Unsolicited transmissions are used to transmit a ‘Custom Modbus Data Packet’ from a selected flow computer RS-232-C serial port without it being polled for data by the receiving device. Modbus protocol Function Code 67 was assigned for this feature, which allows the receiving device to discriminate between a transmission without a poll (unsolicited) and a normal Modbus read. This function, among other uses, was designed for communicating via VSAT satellite systems where operating cost is directly proportional to RF bandwidth used. In communications via satellite, polled transmissions are much more costly than unsolicited transmissions. Typically, the device requesting data (master) would poll the flow computer to transmit the data to it through a satellite link. This would require a signal from the master device to the flow computer and yet another from the flow computer back to the requesting device. Whereas with unsolicited transmissions, the flow computer can be configured to transmit Modbus custom data packets at specified time intervals, when a certain event occurs, or by some other transmission triggering cause, without the master device having to poll the flow computer for such data. In this manner, only one signal is transmitted via satellite; i.e., from the flow computer to the master device.

Custom Modbusä ä Data Packets Custom Modbusä ä Data Packets - Many point numbers were left unused when numbering the variables within the database. This allows for future growth and different application data. Without custom data packets many polls would be required to retrieve data distributed throughout the database. The custom data packets allows you to concatenate or join different groups or sets of data in any order and of any data type into 1 message response. These custom packets are located at points 0001, 0201 and 0401 in the database. For more information refer to 2.5.18 and 4.6 in Volume 3, and 1.1, 1.3.14 and 2.1 in Volume 4 of the User Manual.

Custom Modbus Data Packets are provided to reduce the number of polls needed to read multiple variables which may be in different areas of the database. Groups of consecutive database points of any type of data can be joined together into one packet by entering each data group’s starting database index number. The number of data bytes in a custom packet which will be used for unsolicited transmissions cannot exceed 248 in RTU mode or 496 in ASCII mode.

Prerequisites for Using Unsolicited Transmissions of Custom Data Packets Before you can configure your flow computer to realize unsolicited transmissions of custom Modbus data packets, you must have the following: q User-customized Modbus driver for receiving device q Compatible serial communications capability

User-customized Modbus Driver Various communication master devices can be connected to the Omni flow computer via Modbus serial link including, but not limited to, front-end supervisory control and data acquisition (SCADA) system devices. In order for these devices to be able to identify and read unsolicited transmissions of Omni flow computer custom data packets, the user must develop a custom driver capable of identifying the Modbus protocol Function Code 67; which is an Omni proprietary function. The custom driver must then be installed in the SCADA or other receiving device and verified for adequate performance.

2

TB-980801 w ALL.71+

TB-980801

Unsolicited Transmissions of Custom Modbusä ä Data Packets

Compatible Serial Communications Both the Omni flow computer and the receiving device must be equipped with appropriate RS-232 compatible or RS-485 serial ports configured for Modbus protocol implementation. The Omni flow computer has several hardware and software options for RS-232 or RS-485 compatible serial data links (refer to the User Manual for details).

Modbusä ä Protocol Implementation of Omni Proprietary Function Code 67: Transmit Unsolicited Custom Data Packet A typical unsolicited transmission Modbus protocol message format using Function Code 67 is as follows: Modbus Protocol Message Format using Function Code 67 DEVICE FUNCTION ADDRESS CODE 67

XX

43HEX

BYTE COUNT

CUSTOM PACKET ADDRESS

DATA

CRC ERROR CHECK BYTES

XX

XXXXHEX

DD DD ... DD DD

CRC CRC

Device Address : The address that identifies the Omni flow computer that is transmitting unsolicited data. Function Code 67 : Represented in hexadecimal value as 43. Byte Count : The number of bytes of the data field (maximum of 248 bytes in RTU mode or 496 bytes in ASCII mode). Custom Packet Address : The flow computer database address of the custom Modbus data packet, represented in hexadecimal value: Custom Modbus Data Packet Addresses Hexadecimal Equivalents PACKET NUMBER

PACKET ADDRESS

HEXADECIMAL EQUIVALENT

#1

0001

0001

#2

0201

00C9

#3

0401

0191

Data : The actual flow computer data transmitted without a poll to the receiving device. CRC Error Check Bytes : Used to check the message for errors. For more information on Modbus protocol implementation, see Chapter 4 in Volume 3 of the User Manual.

TB-980801 w ALL.71+

3


Technical Bulletin

Configuring Your Flow Computer for Unsolicited Transmissions of Custom Data Packets User-programmable Boolean Statements and Variables - For more information, see Volume 4 for addresses of Boolean statements and userprogrammable variables, and Chapter 2 in Volume 3 on configuring Boolean statements and userprogrammable variables.

To activate unsolicited transmissions you must enable any of the following ‘edge triggered’ command points below which causes the appropriate custom Modbus data packet’ to be transmitted out of the selected serial port without the serial port being polled for data: Flow Computer Modbus Database Points for Unsolicited Transmissions ADDRESS

UNSOLICITED TRANSMISSION TYPE

2701 2702 2703

Custom Data Packet #1 via Serial Port #1 Custom Data Packet #2 via Serial Port #1 Custom Data Packet #3 via Serial Port #1

2704 2705 2706


2707 2708 2709


2710 2711 2712


Example The following user-programmable variables are an example of programming a timer for every 15 seconds which triggers the unsolicited transmission of a custom Modbus data packet. 7025: 7026 ) 7026 = # -15 7026: 7026 + # 0.5 The following Boolean statement is an example of an unsolicited transmission where every 15 seconds the data contained in Custom Modbus Data Packet #3 will be transmitted without a poll via the flow computer’s Serial Port #2 to the receiving device: 1025: 2706 = 7026

4

TB-980801 w ALL.71+


Date: 08

19

98


TB # 980802

Digital I/O Modules: Installation Options Contents User Manual Reference This technical bulletin complements the information contained i nVolume 1 , and is applicable to all firmware revisions.

Scope .............................................................................................................. 1 Abstract ........................................................................................................... 1 Installation Options and Jumper Settings .................................................... 2 Digital I/O Module Model # 68-601 1..........................................................................2 Digital I/O Module Model # 68-621 1..........................................................................3

Scope All Omni 6000/3000 Flow Computers have digital I/O capabilities via proprietary digital I/O modules.

Abstract Omni flow computers have digital I/O module options with user-selectable jumpers for module address, sequence and interrupt request (IRQ). Omni manufactures two models of digital modules: q Digital I/O Module Model #68-6011 q Digital I/O Module Model #68-6211 Each digital module has 12 digital points. Each digital point can be individually configured as either an input or an output, via the front panel keypad or a serial port using OmniComâ configuration PC software.

TB-980802 w ALL.71+

1


Technical Bulletin

Installation Options and Jumper Settings Only 1 digital I/O module can be installed in the Omni 3000 and a maximum of 2 installed in the Omni 6000. This provides a total of 12 digital I/O points for the Omni 3000 and a total of 24 digital I/O for the Omni 6000.

Digital I/O Module Model # 68-6011 I/O Point LEDs - Each digital I/O point has 2 LEDs (green and dual red/green) which indicate its status. When the single green LED is glowing, the digital I/O point is active. The dual red/green LED indicates a blown fuse, red indicating a source current and green a sinking current.

Inputs and outputs are provided for control of prover functions, remote totalizing, sampler operation, tube control, injection pump control, and other miscellaneous functions. Each digital I/O module provides a total of 12 digital I/O points. Each point can be configured independently as an input or output. Points are individually fused and include LEDs indicating that the point is active and if the fuse is blown. The digital I/O module normally occupies I/O Slots 1 and 2 on the Omni 6000 backplane, and I/O Slot 1 on Omni 3000. Userselectable jumper settings are shown in Figure 1 (below):

JP1 In = Dig. 1 Rising Edge Trigger JP2 In = Dig. 1 Falling Edge Trigger JP3 In = Dig. 2 Rising Edge Trigger JP4 In = Dig. 2 Falling Edge Trigger


NOTE: If “D2” remove all jumpers

Module Address Jumper

Select D1

Select D2

Green LED On Point Active

F3

F2

F1


Individual Fuses for Each I/O Point

F6

F5

F4

F9

F8

F7

F12

F11

F10

Red On


#12


Figure 1. Digital I/O Module Model # 68-6011 - Jumper Settings

2

TB-980802 w ALL.71+

TB-980802

Digital I/O Modules: Installation Options

Digital I/O Module Model # 68-6211 Digital Module # 68-6211 has the same features as the Model # 68-6011, plus the following: ❑ Surface-mounted circuitry ❑ Individual resetable fuses for each digital I/O point ❑ Redesigned user-selectable jumpers for IRQ polarity, channel assign, and module address selection using 1 or 2 digital I/ O modules. User-selectable jumper settings are shown in Figure 2 (below). When using a second digital I/O (D2) module, no jumper is required on JP1 and JP2.

Neither Jumper is Required for D2 Module


Assign IRQ to I/O Point #1

Assign IRQ to I/O Point #2

JP2

JP2

JP1 In = Rising Edge Trigger JP1 Out = Falling Edge Trigger

JP1

JP2

JP4 JP5

Green LED On Point Active Module Address Jumper

F3 ADDRESS

JP4

JP5

D1

Out

Out

D2

In

Out

F2

F1

I/O Point #01


F6

F5

F4

F9

F8

F7

F12

F11

F10

Red On

Individual Resetable Fuses for Each I/O Point


#12

#12


Figure 2. Digital I/O Module Model # 68-6211 - Jumper Settings

TB-980802 ! All.71+

3


Date: 08

27

98

Author(s): Richard Dojs / Isaac Perez / Robert L. Stallard

TB # 980803

Upgrading Flow Computer Firmware Contents User Manual Reference This technical bulletin complements the information contained in Volume 1, applicable to all firmware revisions. This technical bulletin replaces and invalidates TB-980301 “Upgrading EPROM Chips”.

‹ IMPORTANT! ‹

Scope .............................................................................................................. 1 Abstract........................................................................................................... 2 Safety Considerations.................................................................................... 2 Instructions .................................................................................................... 3 Installing New OmniComâ PC Configuration Software..............................................3 Replacing the Central Processor Module (CPU) and EPROM Chips ..........................4 Resetting RAM..........................................................................................................5 Verifying and Updating Information of Installed Modules (Check I/O Modules) ...........6 Setting the Number of Digits and Decimal Places for Totalizers .................................7 Special Instructions If Upgrading from Revision 20.56 Firmware .................................................... 8

After Replacing CPU Module or EPROMs and Before Downloading Configuration File - You must perform the ‘Check I/O Modules’ procedure (see page 6 in this bulletin) and calibrate your analog I/Os before downloading the configuration file to the upgraded flow computer. Also, you must reset RAM as expressed in this technical bulletin before downloading the configuration file. These procedures must be performed whether or not a corresponding message is displayed on the front panel LCD screen of the flow computer. Failure to do so may void the warranty and cause future problems and unpredictable results with your flow computer.

TB-980803 w All Revs

Downloading the Configuration File from OmniComâ to the Flow Computer .............9 Returning the Old EPROMs ....................................................................................10

Troubleshooting Tips .................................................................................. 10 Omni Display Does Not Come On After Resetting All RAM......................................10 Omni Front Panel Display is Blinking and/or the Keypad is Locked..........................11 “Cannot Open File” Message is Displayed when Trying to Transmit the Saved Report Templates to the Omni............................................................................................11 Incorrect Data in Printed Customized Reports .........................................................11 Unable to Complete a Prove Sequence ...................................................................11 OmniCom Unable to Communicate to the Flow Computer.......................................12

Scope This technical bulletin is applicable to all firmware revisions of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computers. The information contained in this technical bulletin is targeted to qualified professionals only.

1


Technical Bulletin

Abstract DANGER!

Electrical Shock Hazard! Dangerous AC voltages are present on the power supply module and ribbon cable when the unit is AC powered. To avoid electrical shock which could be fatal, It is imperative that you remove all power before opening and disassembling the flow computer and take any other necessary precautions. Only qualified technicians should work on any internal circuitry. Omni Flow Computers, Inc. is not responsible for personal injuries or accidents that may occur when working on flow computer circuitry.

‹ CAUTION! ‹ Static electricity can damage flow computer circuitry. Take approved static device handling precautions when working on the flow computer.

2

Upgrading Omni flow computer firmware allows users to incorporate new features and increase the capabilities of their flow metering system application. An upgrade may also be necessary for system conformance to API standards and Year 2000 (Y2K) requirements. To upgrade your flow computer firmware you will need to perform certain critical steps, such as: q Install new version of OmniComâ Configuration PC Software. q Save flow computer configuration file and report templates. q Replace Central Processor Module or EPROM chips. q Reset RAM. q Set the number of digits and decimal places for totalizers and factors. q Download and adjust flow computer configuration file and report templates.

Safety Considerations Before removing any circuit boards from the flow computer, the following must be observed: q Personal Safety : Although most of the internal circuits are powered by relatively low voltages, dangerous AC voltages are present on the power supply module and ribbon cable when the unit is AC powered. For this reason it is important to remove all power before disassembling the computer. q Static Electricity : Static electricity can be generated simply by moving around on certain surfaces or wearing certain types of clothing. The flow computer’s printed circuits can be damaged by this static electricity. Take approved static device handling precautions when working on the flow computer.


TB-980803

Upgrading Flow Computer Firmware

Instructions Before removing the Central Processor Module (CPU) or old EPROMs, you must install the new version of OmniComâ Configuration PC Software supplied with your new CPU or EPROMs and use this new version to retrieve the configuration file from the flow computer.

Installing New OmniComâ PC Configuration Software Using OmniComâ Help Context sensitive help is available by pressing the [F1] key on your PC keyboard when running OmniCom.

(1) With the old EPROMs still in the flow computer, install the new OmniCom to your PC from the diskette shipped with the CPU or EPROMs. The diskette label provides installation instructions. (2) Create a new file from within the newly installed version of OmniCom by opening ‘File/New’ and entering the file name. (3) When prompted for the EPROM version number of the file to create, select the version number that corresponds to the NEW EPROMs you will be installing. (4) Upload the configuration file from the OLD set of EPROMs installed in the flow computer by opening ‘Online/Start Comm’ and selecting ‘Receive Omni Configuration Data’. (5) Subsequently, receive ALL the report templates by selecting ‘Receive Report Templates’ within the ‘Online/Start Comm’ menu. As a precautionary measure, this should be done regardless of whether or not default report templates are being used. (6) Print the configuration file from OmniCom by opening ‘File/Print’ and selecting your print option (‘Yes’ or ‘No’). (7) Verify all settings indicated in the configuration file printout and make any necessary adjustments to these settings that are appropriate for your particular application. (8) Close OmniCom by selecting ‘Exit’ from the ‘Print’ menu. You will be prompted on whether to save the configuration file and each of the report templates. Answer ‘Yes’ to all.


3


Technical Bulletin

Replacing the Central Processor Module (CPU) and EPROM Chips ‹ CAUTION! ‹ When removing the CPU Module, take extreme care not to bend or fold the membrane keypad ribbon cable too sharply, or the metallic traces could be damaged. Location of EPROM ChipsThe location of the EPROM chips on the CPU Module is shown in Fig. 1. The EPROMs are the two large 32-pin Integrated Circuits (ICs or “chips”) with labels marked U3 and U4. Note the position of the orientation notches at one end of each EPROM.

‹ IMPORTANT!

‹

Replacing EPROM Chips Ensure that all pins plug into there respective holes and that none are bent.

‹ IMPORTANT! ‹ After Replacing CPU Module or EPROMs and Before Downloading Configuration File - You must perform the ‘Check I/O Modules’ procedure (see page 6 in this bulletin) and calibrate your analog I/Os before downloading the configuration file to the upgraded flow computer. Also, you must reset RAM as expressed in this technical bulletin before downloading the configuration file. These procedures must be performed whether or not a corresponding message is displayed on the front panel LCD screen of the flow computer. Failure to do so may void the warranty and cause future problems and unpredictable results with your flow computer.

(9) If you are replacing ONLY the EPROM chips and NOT the CPU module, reset all RAM in the Omni via the front panel keypad. If you will be replacing the entire CPU module, DO NOT reset the RAM. To reset RAM from the front panel keypad, press [Prog] [Setup] [Enter] [Enter] [Enter], then type in your privileged password as prompted. Scroll down by pressing the [â â] key to the ‘Reset All Ram?’ prompt and answer [Y] to answer ‘yes’. Answer ‘Yes’ or ‘OK’ to any warnings. (Go to Step 14 for detailed instruction on resetting Ram.) (10) Remove power from the Omni flow computer and remove the CPU module. (11) Make note of the new EPROM version and checksum indicated in the label placed on the EPROM chips. You will need this information later. (12) Either replace the old CPU module with a new CPU that has the new set of EPROMs, or simply replace the old set of EPROMs with the new set. (13) After replacing or reinstalling the CPU module, apply power to the Omni flow computer. Make a note of what your LCD screen displays when powering up. If you receive a display indicating loss of calibration data, you will need to calibrate your analog I/Os after completing the EPROM upgrade. (Refer to Volume 1 “System Architecture and Installation” of the User Manual for more information.)

Math Processor

Central Processor

Program EPROM

Program RAM

Archive RAM

Backup Batttery

J1

J2

EPROM Size 1 OR 4 Meg Bit Select 4 Meg As Shown

J3

System Watchdog J3 In = Enabled J3 Out = Disabled (Always Enabled)

Figure 1. Layout of Central Processor Module Showing Location of EPROM ICs and Jumpers J1, J2 and J3.

4


TB-980803


Resetting RAM ‹ IMPORTANT! ‹ After Replacing CPU Module or EPROMs and Before Downloading Configuration File - You must perform the ‘Check I/O Modules’ procedure (see page 6 in this bulletin) and calibrate your analog I/Os before downloading the configuration file to the upgraded flow computer. Also, you must reset RAM as expressed in this technical bulletin before downloading the configuration file. These procedures must be performed whether or not a corresponding message is displayed on the front panel LCD screen of the flow computer. Failure to do so may void the warranty and cause future problems and unpredictable results with your flow computer.

Program Mode - Pressing the [Prog] key will activate the Program Mode. While in this mode, the Program LED above the keypad is lit red. To exit the Program Mode, press the [Prog] key repeatedly until the Program LED goes off.

(14) You will need to reset RAM before and after replacing EPROM chips. If you will be replacing the entire CPU module, reset RAM only AFTER replacing the CPU. DO NOT reset the RAM before replacing. When power is applied to the flow computer after replacing EPROM chips, the following screen is displayed: RAM Data Invalid Reconfigure System Using “OMNI” as Initial Password Enter the key press sequence [Prog] [Setup] [Enter] [Enter] [Enter] and the following screen is displayed: PASSWORD MAINTENANCE Privileged _ Level 1 Level 1A Different screens will be displayed each time you press enter before you reach the above screen. (15) At the ‘Privileged’ prompt, enter the following key press sequence to use ‘OMNI’ as the privileged password: [Alpha Shift] [Alpha Shift] [O] [M] [N] [I] [Enter]. The cursor will move down to the next entry. PASSWORD MAINTENANCE Privileged OMNI Level 1 _ Level 1A

(16) Scroll down by pressing repeatedly the [â â] key to ‘Reset All Ram?’ and press [Alpha Shift] [Y] [Enter] for ‘Yes’. PASSWORD MAINTENANCE Archive Run?(Y/N) Reset All Totals Reset All Ram ? Y The display will briefly go blank, the backlight will go off and come back on. The following screen may then reappear: RAM Data Invalid Reconfigure System Using “OMNI” as Initial Password


5


Technical Bulletin

(17) Press [Status] and a screen similar to the following will be displayed: Module S-Ware H-Ware B-1 Y Y E-1 Y Y D-1 Y Y

(18) Scroll down by pressing repeatedly the [â â] key to the end to display the Revision Number and EPROM Checksum. Module S-Ware H-Ware S-1 Y Y Revision No. 021.72 EPROM Checksum 2408 Verify that these match with what you previously noted in Step 11. If they do not match and there is an EPROM Checksum alarm, stop at this point and contact Omni technical support.

‹ IMPORTANT! ‹ After Replacing CPU Module or EPROMs and Before Downloading Configuration File - You must perform the ‘Check I/O Modules’ procedure and calibrate your analog I/Os before downloading the configuration file to the upgraded flow computer. Also, you must reset RAM as expressed in this technical bulletin before downloading the configuration file. These procedures must be performed whether or not a corresponding message is displayed on the front panel LCD screen of the flow computer. Failure to do so may void the warranty and cause future problems and unpredictable results with your flow computer. Program Mode - Pressing the [Prog] key will activate the Program Mode. While in this mode, the Program LED above the keypad is lit red. To exit the Program Mode, press the [Prog] key repeatedly until the Program LED goes off.

Verifying and Updating Information of Installed Modules (Check I/O Modules) (19) If the EPROM Revision number and Checksum are correct, verify if both the ‘S-Ware’ (Software) and ‘H-Ware’ (Hardware) columns read ‘Y’ (Yes) for all the installed modules before proceeding any further. Scroll up and down the screen in the previous step by using the [â â] / [á á] arrow keys to view installed modules. If both columns read ‘Y’, go to Step 25. If not, proceed to the following step (20). Module S-Ware H-Ware B-1 Y Y E-1 Y Y D-1 Y N S-1 N Y Revision No. 021.72 EPROM Checksum 2408

(20) If one or more of the installed modules reads ‘N’ (No) under the ‘SWare’ (Software) and/or ‘H-Ware’ (Hardware) columns, press [Prog] [Setup] [Enter] [Enter] and the following is displayed: *** MISC. SETUP *** Password Maint?(Y) _ Check Modules ?(Y) Config Station?(Y) Different screens will be displayed each time you press enter before you reach the above screen.

6


TB-980803


(21) Move the cursor down by pressing the [â â] key to ‘Check Modules?’. *** MISC. SETUP *** Password Maint?(Y) Check Modules ?(Y) _ Config Station?(Y)

(22) Press [Enter] and a screen similar to the following is displayed: Module S-Ware H-Ware B-1 Y Y E-1 Y Y D-1 Y N

(23) Scroll down by pressing repeatedly the [â â] key to ‘Update S-Ware?’ and press [Alpha Shift] [Y] [Enter] to enter ‘Y’ for ‘Yes’. Module S-Ware H-Ware D-1 Y N S-1 N Y Update S_Ware ? Y You will be prompted to enter your password. Also enter ‘Y’ to answer ‘OK’ if cautioned that updating the software will cause the I/O configurations to be cleared. (24) Exit the Program Mode when you are done by pressing the [Prog] key repeatedly until the Program LED above the keypad goes out. This returns you to the Display Mode.

Setting the Number of Digits and Decimal Places for Totalizers (25) In newer versions of EPROMs, you are given an option to set the number of digits for cumulative totalizer rollover (8 or 9 digits) and the number of decimal places for volume and mass totalizers. Set these options via keypad ONLY by pressing [Prog] [Setup] [Enter] [Enter] [Enter]. The following screen is displayed: PASSWORD MAINTENANCE Privileged _ Level 1 Level 1A Different screens will be displayed each time you press enter before you reach the above screen.


7


Technical Bulletin

(26) At the ‘Privileged’ prompt, enter the following key press sequence to use ‘OMNI’ as the privileged password: [Alpha Shift] [Alpha Shift] [O] [M] [N] [I] [Enter]. The cursor will move down to the next entry. Setting the Number of Digits for Totalizers Totalizers within the flow computer can be rolled at 8 or 9 significant digits. To set totalizer rollover to 9 digits, press [0] [Enter]. To set totalizer rollover to 8 digits, press [1] [Enter].

Setting Volume and Mass Totalizer Resolution Gross and net volume and mass totalizer values can be expressed with up to 3 decimal places. To set the number of decimal places for totalizer resolution, press the corresponding number key ([0], [1], [2] or [3] decimal places, where 0=Klbs, 1=100lbs, 2=10lbs, 3=lbs). Then press the [Enter] key. All firmware revisions, except for Version 20.56, provide Mass in pounds.

Help for Number of Digits and Decimal Place Settings - You can view the Help in OmniCom under “Factor Setup & Sys Constants” by highlighting each of the fields. Then use F1 for a detailed explanation of each of your choices. However, DO NOT set these options via OmniCom. Context-sensitive help is also available via the Omni front panel keypad by pressing the [Help] key (same as the [Enter] key) rapidly twice while the cursor is at the entry you want to set.

PASSWORD MAINTENANCE Privileged OMNI Level 1 _ Level 1A

(27) Scroll down by pressing repeatedly the [â â] key to ‘Reset All Totals?’. PASSWORD MAINTENANCE Reconfig Archive ? Y Archive Run?(Y/N) N Reset All Totals ? _

(28) Press [Alpha Shift] [Y] [Enter] for ‘Yes’ and a screen similar to the following is displayed: All Totals Now Reset Totalizer Resolution # Digits, 0=9, 1=8 0 DecPlacesGross&Net 0 DecimalPlaces Mass 3 Enter the respective values you want for each and every totalizer resolution setting and press the [Enter] key after each entry (see sidebar). It is strongly recommended that you set these resolutions NOW because you will not be able to change these settings after configuring your flow computer or during flow operations without resetting to zero all your totalizers.

Special Instructions If Upgrading from Revision 20.56 Firmware Version 20.56 EPROMs provide Mass in hundreds of pounds. If you want to continue receiving your Mass in hundreds of pounds, press [1] [Enter] at the ‘DecimalPlaces Mass’ entry. (29) Exit the Program Mode when you are done by pressing the [Prog] key repeatedly until the Program LED above the keypad goes out. This returns you to the Display Mode.

8


TB-980803


Downloading the Configuration File from OmniComâ to the Flow Computer Program Mode - Pressing the [Prog] key will activate the Program Mode. While in this mode, the Program LED above the keypad is lit red. To exit the Program Mode, press the [Prog] key repeatedly until the Program LED goes off.

(30) In the Display Mode, press [Prog] [Setup] [Enter] [Enter] to display the ‘Misc. Setup’ menu. *** MISC. SETUP *** Password Maint?(Y) _ Check Modules ?(Y) Config Station?(Y) Different screens will be displayed each time you press enter before you reach the above screen. (31) Scroll down by pressing repeatedly the [â â] key to ‘Serial I/O “n”’. *** MISC. SETUP *** User Display ? “n” Config Digital“n” Serial I/O “n” _

Enter the number of the flow computer serial port to which your OmniCom PC is connected and press [Enter]. A screen similar to the following will display: SERIAL PORT #2 Baud Rate 38400 Number of Data Bit 8 Number of Stop Bit 1

‹ IMPORTANT! ‹ It is recommended that you select ‘Modbus RTU (modem)’ protocol for the ‘Modbus Type’ in Step 32 if it is available in your new EPROM version. If you decide to use this protocol, ensure that you make this same change in your OmniCom configuration file under ‘Config Serial I/O’ before proceeding to download the configuration file to the Omni

(32) Scroll down to ‘Modbus ID’ and then to ‘Modbus Type’ and enter the corresponding settings indicated in the OmniCom configuration file you printed earlier. Remember to press [Enter] after typing each setting. SERIAL TX Key Modbus Modbus

PORT #2 Delay ID Type

1 1 2

(33) Run OmniCom and open the configuration file you saved earlier which pertains to this flow computer. Open the File Menu and select ‘Print’. Print the file to a printer on your PC to have an updated printout of the flow computer configuration. (34) Open ‘Offline/Omni Configuration/Config Serial I/O’ and ensure that the ‘Modbus Type’ is set correctly to match what you selected in Step 32.


9


Technical Bulletin

(35) Open ‘Online/Start Comm’. Check the Modbus ID, Comm Port, Baud Rate, and Comm Media settings to ensure that these are correct. If you set the port in Step 32 to ‘Modbus RTU (modem)’ protocol, ensure that ‘Comm Media’ is set to Modem. (35) Transmit Omni Configuration Data. (36) Transmit Omni Report Templates. (37) Calibrate your analog I/Os if you are required to do so. For more information on calibrating analog I/O, see Volume 1, Chapter 8 of the User Manual.

Returning the Old EPROMs You are now done. Remember to use the Business Reply Label supplied with your new EPROMs. If you have not yet completed your EPROM Upgrade Form, please do so now and return along with the old EPROMs to Omni Flow Computers, Inc.

Troubleshooting Tips Omni Display Does Not Come On After Resetting All RAM Tech Support - If you encounter any other difficulties, please contact our technical staff. Phone: (281) 240-6161 Fax: (281) 240-6162 E-mail:

If the Omni Display does not come on after resetting all RAM, proceed as follows: (1) Disconnect all power to the Omni. (2) Remove CPU Module and also remove the System Watchdog Jumper J3 (See Figure 1) on the CPU.

[email protected]

(3) Reinstall CPU Module with Jumper J3 removed.

‹ IMPORTANT! ‹ Replacing RAM and EPROM Chips - Ensure that all pins plug into there respective holes and that none are bent.

(4) Power up the Omni and reset all RAM again. Display should be on. (5) Power down again the flow computer and remove CPU Board. (6) Replace Jumper J3 and then reinstall the CPU Module. (7) Once again, apply power to the flow computer. The Omni display should now be normal. However, if problem persists, try unplugging and reconnecting the RAM chips into the CPU board as follows: (1) Disconnect all power to the Omni. (2) Remove CPU Module. (3) Unplug and reconnect RAM chips to the CPU board (4) Reinstall the CPU Module. (5) Power up the Omni and reset all RAM again. Display should be normal.

10


TB-980803


Omni Front Panel Display is Blinking and/or the Keypad is Locked This problem may be solved by unplugging and reconnecting the RAM chips into the CPU board as follows: (1) Disconnect all power to the Omni. (2) Remove CPU Module. (3) Unplug and reconnect RAM chips to the CPU board (4) Reinstall the CPU Module. (5) Power up the Omni and reset all RAM again. Display should be normal.

“Cannot Open File” Message is Displayed when Trying to Transmit the Saved Report Templates to the Omni Sometimes, when trying to transmit the saved report templates to the flow computer, OmniCom will display a message indicating that it cannot open the file. Simply go to the OmniCom pull-down Report menu and open each of the reports individually, make the necessary changes and resave the reports. The change can simply represent change to the same thing it was before. Subsequently, save the template (usually ALT-S). Exit OmniCom and then restart OmniCom. Open the file and try transmitting the templates to the Omni again.

Incorrect Data in Printed Customized Reports When upgrading EPROMs and using customized reports, the data in the printed report may not be correct because some of the database registers may have changed, moved or redefined in the new version with respect to the old version. If you see that the printed data is not what you expected, then you should open the report template files to check if you are retrieving the data from the correct registers for the new EPROM version. Also verify with OmniCom that “Use Default Report Template’ under ‘Printer Setup’ is set to ‘No’.

Unable to Complete a Prove Sequence Sometimes you are unable to get through a prove sequence after an EPROM upgrade. Open up the deviation percentages in the Prover Setup to establish an initial prove sequence. Once a prove sequence has been established, you can tighten up the deviation percentages to what you had set before the EPROM upgrade.


11


Technical Bulletin

OmniCom Unable to Communicate to the Flow Computer Sometimes you are unable to communicate to an Omni after replacing the EPROMs. This may be caused by the following:

q The OmniCom Start Comm/Comm Media setting differs from the Omni flow computer Modbus Type setting in the serial port setup. In the newest versions of EPROMs when the flow computer is powered-up, the EPROMs default to Modbus RTU (modem) for Serial Port # 2. The Modbus RTU (modem) protocol is the preferred protocol; therefore, make this change in your OmniCom configuration file AND also set the ‘Comm Media’ to ‘Modem’ in the ‘Online/Start Comm’ menu.

q The new EPROMs default to Modbus ID 1 on power-up. Ensure that your Modbus ID matches in both the ‘Online/Start Comm’ menu and in the serial port setup in the Omni. Also ensure the OmniCom configuration file, Omni serial port, and OmniCom ‘Start Comm’ screen are all set to the same Modbus ID.

12



Date: 11

04

98


TB # 981101

Using the Audit Trail (Event Logger) Feature and Sealing of the Flow Computer Contents User Manual Reference This technical bulletin complements the information contained in Volumes 2 & 3 of the User Manual, applicable to all firmware revisions.

Scope .............................................................................................................. 1 Abstract........................................................................................................... 2 Activating the Audit Trail Feature ................................................................. 2 Password Protecting Serial Port Access ....................................................................3 Enabling Rigorous Auditing of Serial Ports ................................................................4

Printing and Viewing the Audit Trail Report................................................. 5 Audit Trail Feature - This feature is an event logger that records the last 150 changes made to the flow computer database. A fixed format report provides an audit trail of these changes. This report comprises time and date stamped changes made to the flow computer database, either via the local keypad or via password protected serial port access.

Printing the Audit Trail Report via Front Panel Keypad ..............................................5 Viewing and Printing the Audit Trail Report via OmniCom .........................................5

Sealing the Flow Computer ........................................................................... 6 Download Disabling (OmniCom Lockout) ..................................................................6 Serial Port Lockout Switch Enable Option .................................................................7 Program Inhibit (Keypad Lockout) Switch ..................................................................7 Housing Sealing........................................................................................................8

Scope All firmware revisions of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 flow computers have the Audit Trail feature. The information contained in this technical bulletin is for intermediate users.


1


Technical Bulletin

Abstract All Omni flow computer firmware revisions include the “Audit Trail” feature. In current revisions, this security feature consists of an archive file that stores 150 records of the most recent changes made to the flow computer database. The flow computer always logs changes made to the database via the Omni front panel keypad. It can also log changes made remotely via a Modbus port, using OmniComâ PC Configuration Software for instance, if passwords have been activated on the serial port. Each record consists of a unique event number, time and date tag, the database index number of the affected variable, and the new and old value of that variable. The value of gross and net totals at the moment of the event are also stored in the record. Furthermore, the firmware can log events that involve a group of consecutive database addresses. In this case, only the starting index number and the number of consecutive index points appear in the audit trail. The records comprise the Audit Trail Report which, when printed, lists the latest 150 records in time sequence starting with the most recent. You can view this report in OmniCom and print it either with OmniCom or the front panel keypad. The Audit Trail Report has a fixed format and is not customizable by the user.

Activating the Audit Trail Feature The Omni flow computer will automatically log all changes made to the configuration settings via the front panel keypad. However, to avoid flushing the audit trail, the firmware does not log configuration changes made via serial ports other then complete download events, unless rigorous auditing is enabled. In order for the flow computer to log configuration changes made through a serial port, whether remotely (via modem) or via direct connection, the corresponding serial port must be password protected or enabled for rigorous auditing. With passwords activated, the firmware will fully log the target database address’ old and new value only when single point writes occur. When blocks of data are written, only the starting database index and total number of consecutive points written to will be recorded in the audit trail log. Enabling rigorous auditing does not require serial port passwords to be used. The flow computer will archive all serial port transactions that represent configuration changes.

2


TB-981101

Using the Audit Trail Feature (Event Logger) and Sealing the Flow Computer

Password Protecting Serial Port Access Entering a Serial Port Password Initially, you can only assign serial port passwords via the Omni front panel keypad. Choose up to 8 alphanumerical characters for the password. Enter the selected password at the corresponding serial port entry under the ‘Password Maintenance’ submenu: q ‘Ser1 Passwd’ for Serial Port #1 q ‘Ser2 Passwd’ for Serial Port #2 q ‘Ser3 Passwd’ for Serial Port #3 q ‘Ser4 Passwd’ for Serial Port #4 Note: If Serial Port #1 has a printer connected to it, you need not assign a password to this port. Ports #3 and #4 are available only if your flow computer has a second serial I/O module installed.

The flow computer will automatically log any single point writes to a specific database address made via a password protected serial port. Assigning serial port passwords for the first time can only be done via the front panel keypad of the flow computer. To assign passwords and restrict access to serial ports via the Omni front panel keypad, proceed as follows:

(1) Using the flow computer’s front panel keypad and in the normal display mode, press [Prog] [Setup] [Enter] [Enter] [Enter]. This will display the ‘Password Maintenance’ submenu of the ‘Miscellaneous Configuration’ menu. PASSWORD MAINTENANCE Priveledged _ Level 1 Level 1A

(2) Scroll down to place the cursor at the desired ‘Sern Passwd’ prompt and enter a password of your choice. The “n” in ‘Sern’ represents the serial port number (e.g., the display shows Ser2 for Serial Port #2 ¾see sidebar). PASSWORD MAINTENANCE Ser1 Passwd Lockout SW Active? N Ser2 Passwd _

(3) Press [Enter] once you have keyed-in your password for the selected serial port. The flow computer will prompt you to enter the privileged password for the flow computer to validate the new serial port password. If you have not yet assigned a privileged password, either use “OMNI” as the default or scroll up and assign the password now. If you do the latter, repeat the procedure for assigning the serial port password.

Once assigned, you have the option of changing the serial port passwords via OmniCom PC configuration software. To do this, while on any field edit screen, press [Ctrl] [Alt] [P] on your PC keyboard and follow the online instructions. You will need to enter the current valid password before you can change it.


3


Technical Bulletin

Enabling Rigorous Auditing of Serial Ports Rigorous auditing is normally used only as a diagnostic tool to track down unexpected changes made to the flow computer database. It allows you to log all transactions of one or more non-password protected serial ports. Actually, the only way to log all changes to the Omni database done through serial ports is by enabling rigorous auditing. To enable rigorous auditing you must define a user-programmable variable statement. This statement places the decimal value of the serial port’s hexadecimal code into the database address the corresponds to the special diagnostic function (Index # 3800). To enable rigorous auditing to one or more serial ports, do the following: (1) From the table below, select the hexadecimal codes of the serial ports to which you want to apply rigorous auditing. Then determine the decimal equivalent of the selected hexadecimal codes (indicated in the table). (2) Formulate a variable statement that writes the desired decimal value to

Database Point # 3800 (Special Diagnostic Function) using the following logic: Address 3800 is EQUAL (=)to the CONSTANT (#) decimal value

Or simply select the respective variable statement from among those provided in the table. VARIABLE STATEMENTS TO

Serial Port(s) # 1

2

3

4

Œ

Hexadecimal Code

Decimal Equivalent

Variable Statement

000A

10

3800=#10

00A0

160

3800=#160

0A00

2560

3800=#2560

•

A000

40960

3800=#40960

Œ • Œ Ž Œ • • Ž • • Ž • Œ • Ž Œ • • Œ Ž • • Ž • Œ • Ž •

00AA

170

3800=#170

0A0A

2570

3800=#2570

A00A

40970

3800=#40970

0AA0

2720

3800=#2720

A0A0

41120

3800=#41120

AA00

43520

3800=#43520

0AAA

2730

3800=#2730

A0AA

41130

3800=#41130

AA0A

43530

3800=#43530

• Ž

4

E N A B L I N G R I G O R O U S AU D I T I N G SERIAL PORTS

FOR

AAA0

43680

3800=#43680

AAAA

43690

3800=#43690


TB-981101


Verifying the Audit Trail Feature - To verify that the audit trail feature and rigorous auditing are active, make any necessary flow computer configuration changes and view or print the Audit Trail Report (as indicated in this technical bulletin). If the changes you made appear on the report, the audit trail feature is working fine.

(3) Either via OmniCom or the front panel keypad, open the ‘Program Variable’ submenu under the ‘Miscellaneous Configuration’ menu, select an available (empty) variable point, and key-in the variable statement. Press [Enter] when done to enable the rigorous auditing feature. In OmniCom, remember to download the variable statement to the flow computer when done if working offline.

Printing and Viewing the Audit Trail Report You can print the Audit Trail Report from either the flow computer’s front panel keypad or from OmniCom. However, you can view this report only from OmniCom.

Printing the Audit Trail Report via Front Panel Keypad To print the Audit Trail Report from the flow computer’s keypad, do as follows: (1) In the display mode, press [Prog] [Print] [Enter] to display the ‘Print Report Menu’. (2) Scroll down to place the cursor at the ‘Audit Trail ? (Y)’ prompt and type the number ‘150’, indicating the total number of records to print. It is not necessary to print all 150 records, unless you want to. (3) Press [Enter] and the report will print.

Viewing and Printing the Audit Trail Report via OmniCom To print the Audit Trail Report from OmniCom, do the following: (1) With OmniCom running, select ‘Audit Trail Report’ under the ‘Report’ menu and press [Enter]. (2) Select ‘Load from Omni’ in the popup box and press [Enter]. OmniCom will prompt you for a password to continue. It will allow you to change the password if you want (for loading the Audit Trail report via OmniCom only). In any case you will need to enter the password you assigned for rigorous auditing. (3) Type the password and press [Enter]. OmniCom will proceed to load the audit trail data and display the Audit Trail Report. (4) If you want to print the report, press [Alt] [P] and follow the online instructions. (5) Exit OmniCom when done.


5


Technical Bulletin

Sealing the Flow Computer TIP - You can set the download disabling and serial port lockout switches in one session while in the ‘Password Maintenance’ setup. You can set these features only via the front panel keypad or using the Omni Panel Emulator provided in OmniCom. The recommended order for applying the sealing features is as follows: (1) Disable download to the flow computer (2) Select the serial port lockout switch option (3) Activate the program inhibit switch (4) Seal the flow computer housing enclosure

In addition to the audit trail, Omni flow computers provide sealing features for added security. These security features prevent access to the circuitry and tampering of configuration settings, protecting data and system integrity. The key sealing features are: q Download Disabling (OmniCom Lockout) q Serial Port Lockout Switches q Program Inhibit (Keypad Lockout) Switch q Housing Sealing

Download Disabling (OmniCom Lockout) Omni flow computer firmware allows you to block all complete downloads from OmniCom to the flow computer. This feature protects against accidental downloads that could occur due to incorrect logon. Once a flow computer is configured, the correct way to log on is to ‘Receive’ the configuration in OmniCom. You can set this feature only via the front panel keypad. To set the download disabling feature, proceed as follows: (1) In the normal display mode, press [Prog] [Setup] [Enter] [Enter] [Enter] to access ‘Password Maintenance’ setup. (2) At the ‘Privileged’ Password prompt, type-in the corresponding password and press [Enter]. The download disabling setting will not appear if you do not enter the privileged password. (3) Scroll down to the ‘Disable Download?’ prompt. The LCD screen displays as shown below. PASSWORD MAINTENANCE Lockout SW Active? N Model #? 0=3K,1=6K 1 Disable Download? N

(4) Press [Y] [Enter] to disable or [N] [Enter] to enable OmniCom downloading of the configuration data to the Omni flow computer. If desired, you can proceed to set the serial port lockout switches while in the ‘Password Maintenance’ setup. The following section describes this feature.

6


TB-981101


Serial Port Lockout Switch Enable Option The flow computer’s configuration provides a lockout switch option for each serial port. You can activate or deactivate the serial port lockout switch option only via the front panel keypad, as follows: (1) In the normal display mode, press [Prog] [Setup] [Enter] [Enter] [Enter] to access ‘Password Maintenance’ settings. (2) Scroll down to the ‘Lockout SW Active?’ setting that corresponds to the selected serial port. Press [Y] [Enter] to activate or [N] [Enter] to deactivate the lockout switch for each serial port to which you want to set this feature. (3) Press the [Prog] several times to exit the Program Mode and return to the Display Mode.

Program Inhibit (Keypad Lockout) Switch Preventing Access to the Program Inhibit Switch To prevent unauthorized activating or deactivating of the program inhibit switch, seal the flow computer housing as indicated in this technical bulletin. Activating the program inhibit switch with firmware revisions prior to .72 blocked all configuration changes. This was subsequently modified to allow configuration changes to password level 2 operational parameters such as PID setpoints, batch end commands, and prove commands.

The Program Inhibit Switch allows you to lock access to the Program and Diagnostic/Calibration Modes via the front panel keypad. This prevents configuration settings from being changed. Attempting to enter a configuration submenu will have no effect when the switch is in the inhibit position, and “PROGRAM LOCKOUT” will display on the bottom line of the LCD screen. Nonetheless, you can still enter key presses to only view data in the normal Display Mode. Figure 1 (on following page) shows the location of the program inhibit switch; which is behind the front panel. To access and activate or deactivate, do the following: (1) Hold the front panel from the bottom, gently lift it upwards to disengage the latching bezel, and withdraw the flow computer a couple of inches from its housing case. (2) Locate the red Program Inhibit Switch. It will be on the bottom right (when facing the front panel) behind the front panel (see Figure 1). (3) Using your right hand (recommended), place the switch to the downward position to lock the keypad or place it to the upward position to unlock the keypad. (4) Reinsert the flow computer into its housing, making sure that the bezel latches in place. You can test the program inhibit switch by pressing the [Prog] [Setup] [Enter] keys on the front panel keypad. This will take you to the Setup Menu in the Program Mode. Place the cursor on any of the submenus listed and press [Enter]. If the “Program Lockout” message flashes on the bottom line of the LCD screen, the program inhibit switch is active.


7


‹

CAUTION!

Technical Bulletin

‹

These units have an integral latching mechanism which you must first disengage by lifting the bezel upwards before withdrawing the unit from the case.

Figure 1. The Program Inhibit Switch

Housing Sealing You can lock or seal the inner enclosure of the flow computer within the outer enclosure, blocking access to the 'Program Inhibit Switch' and to the circuitry. To seal the flow computer, insert an instrument sealing wire through the holes provided on the top-right and towards the back of the enclosures. Before placing the sealing wire, make sure that the integral latching mechanism is in place aligning the holes of both enclosures (inner and outer).

8



Date: 01

05

99


TB # 990101

Communicating with Instromet Q-Sonic Ultrasonic Gas Flowmeters Contents User Manual Reference This technical bulletin complements the information contained in the User Manual, applicable to Revision 23.73/27.73+.

Scope....................................................................................................................1 Abstract ................................................................................................................1 Q-Sonic Flowmeter Theory of Operation .......................................................2 Omni Flow Computer Logic ...............................................................................2 Wiring Installation ...............................................................................................4

Communicating with Instromet Q-Sonic Ultrasonic Gas Flowmeters - The Instromet Q-Sonic ultrasonic flowmeter measures gas flow with acoustic pulse reflection paths by using the Absolute Digital Time Travel (ADTT) method. This device communicates with Omni flow computers via Omni’s ‘SV’ process I/O combo module using a proprietary protocol. To use the scaled pulse output of the Instromet flowmeter, the flow computer must either have an ‘A’, ‘B’ or ‘E’ combo module installed.

Getting Tech Support Omni Technical support is available at: Phone: (281) 240-6161 Fax: (281) 240-6162 Technical information is available on our website at: www.omniflow.com or send email to: [email protected]

TB-990101 23/27.73+

Flow Computer Configuration ...........................................................................4 Miscellaneous Configuration Meter Run Settings.......................................................... 5 Meter Run Setup Entries ............................................................................................... 5

Flow Computer Database Addresses and Index Numbers .............................6 Flow Computer User Displays .........................................................................10 SV Module Serial Communications Port ..................................................................... 10 Meter Run Data ........................................................................................................... 11

Scope This technical bulletin applies to firmware revisions 23.73+ and 27.73+ of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 flow computers, for gas flow metering systems.

Abstract The Q-Sonic ultrasonic flowmeter determines the linear gas velocity through the meter tube by using multiple acoustic pulse reflection paths. The Q-Sonic analyzes these paths employing the Absolute Digital Time Travel (ADTT) measurement method. The Omni flow computer totalizes either the flowmeter pulse input signal or the profile corrected gas velocity data, received from the QSonic, to calculate the actual flow rate of gas. The Omni compensates temperature expansion effects on the flowmeter tube by equaling the flow to the profile corrected gas velocity multiplied by the temperature compensated tube area. If required, it can also directly use the non-compensated flow rate value transmitted by the ultrasonic meter as the actual flow rate.

1


Technical Bulletin

Q-Sonic Flowmeter Theory of Operation Instromet’s ultrasonic gas flow metering technology incorporates multiple pairs of transducers into a smart digital inferential instrumentation device. The device is installed into a gas pipeline system to measure fluid flow. Each pair of transducers emits ultrasonic (acoustic) pulses that travel bi-directionally, in either a single (axial or diagonal) or double (swirl) reflection path, to and from each transducer in the pair. The flowmeters apply the Absolute Digital Time Travel (ADTT) method of ultrasonic pulse analysis, which is based on the fact that pulses travel (between a transducer pair) faster downstream with the flow than upstream against the flow. The gas flow velocity is determined from this upstream/downstream travel time differential of the ultrasonic pulses within the multiple reflection paths. When there is no gas flow in the pipeline, the upstream and downstream travel times are the same; i.e., the time differential is zero. The Q-Sonic flowmeter employs 3 or 5 transducer pairs with a minimum of one axial path and two swirl paths. This configuration allows for unique combinations of reflection paths to best take into account the different effects of gas flow profile variations, including swirl in the pipeline. The gas velocity can be determined for bi-directional (forward or reverse) fluid flow.

Omni Flow Computer Logic The Omni flow computer can determine the actual flow rate from either data received serially from the Q-Sonic flowmeter or from a live pulse frequency signal input, if one has been connected and assigned. Totalization will be based on the flow pulse frequency input when the flow transmitted by the Q-Sonic is in the correct direction (forward/reverse) and the pulse frequency is within limits. This live signal will also be used in the event of a communications failure between the Q-Sonic and the Omni. However, In order for the Omni to use the pulse frequency signal, it must be wired to the Q-Sonic and an I/O point assigned in the flow computer configuration. The flow computer will temperature compensate the meter tube area and calculate flow rate based on the profile corrected velocity of the gas transmitted serially by the flowmeter. If the calculated flow rate is not within reasonable limits, the Omni will directly use the transmitted flow rate as the actual flow rate.

2

TB-990101 23/27.73+

Communicating with Instromet Q-Sonic Ultrasonic Flowmeters

TB-990101

Start

No

Q.Sonic Comm unications OK?

Yes

Set Q.Sonic Comm unication Failed Alarm

Clear Q.Sonic Comm unication Failed Alarm

No

Is Transm itted Flow Rate in the Correct Direction? Yes

No

Are Pulse I/O Assigned?

Yes

Are Pulse I/O Assigned?

No

Clear Pulse Signal Suspect Alarm

No

Set Pulse Signal Suspect Alarm

Yes

Is the Flow Based on Pulses within Limits? Yes

No Clear Pulse Signal Suspect Alarm

Is the Flow Based on Gas Velocity within Limits?

Yes

Disable Totalizing

Clear Flow Delta Alarm

Set Flow Delta Alarm

Clear Flow Delta Alarm

Set Run as Inactive

Calculate Actual Flow Based on Pulse Input Signal

Calculate Actual Flow Based on Gas Velocity & Temp Comp Area

Calculate Actual Flow Based on Transm itted Flow Rate

End

Figure 1. Flow computer logic flow diagram for the Q-Sonic ultrasonic gas flowmeter.

TB-990101 23/27.73+

3


Technical Bulletin

Wiring Installation Serial Data Communications - The serial interface between these devices is 2-wire RS485 mode utilizing a proprietary protocol.

Setting Up and Wiring to Omni Combo Modules - In order to communicate with Q-Sonic ultrasonic flowmeters, the Omni flow computer must be equipped with at least one SV combo module (Model 68-6203). For instructions on jumper settings and other process I/O combination module setup information, please refer to Volume 1, Chapter 2 of the Omni User Manual

Figure 2 shows the typical wiring required for connecting a Q-Sonic flowmeter to the Omni flow computer. A 2-wire RS-485 interface can be wired to either port (terminals 1 and 2 for port 1, or 3 and 4 for port 2) of the flow computer terminal block that corresponds to the SV combo module. You can install up to two SV modules in the Omni flow computer, which will give you an availability of 4 SV RS-485 ports. Although not required, it is recommended that the flowmeter frequency pulse signals also be wired to the Omni’s input channel #3 (forward direction) and input channel # 4 (reverse direction) of an ‘A’ combo module. Input channel #3 corresponds to terminals 5 and 6, and input channel #4 to terminals 7 and 8 of the back panel terminal block respective to the combo module. The actual terminal block numbers depend upon which backplane connector or slot the module is plugged. The ‘E’ combo module can also be used in this configuration with slight variations in wiring connections (see Volume I, Chapter 2-12).

Figure 2. Example of wiring a Q-Sonic flowmeter to the Omni flow computer’s RS-485 port #1 of an SV module with the recommended bi-directional (forward/reverse) pulse output to input channels #3 and 4 of an ‘A’ combo module.

Flow Computer Configuration The flow configuration settings that are specific to the Q-Sonic flowmeter are entered in the miscellaneous configuration meter run menu and the meter run setup menu. You must enter the miscellaneous configuration meter run settings first and then proceed to the meter run setup entries. These configuration settings can be entered either via the Omni flow computer’s front panel keypad or using OmniCom configuration PC software (see Chapter 2 ‘Flow Computer Configuration’ in Volume 3 of the Omni User Manual, and the technical bulletin TB-960701 ‘Overview of OmniCom Configuration PC Software’).

4

TB-990101 ! 23/27.73+

TB-990101


Miscellaneous Configuration Meter Run Settings The following miscellaneous configuration meter run settings correspond to the Q-Sonic ultrasonic gas flowmeter: " Select Flowmeter Device Type  Enter [4] for each meter run that you want to select the Instromet Q-Sonic flowmeter as the device type.

" Select SV Module Port  The Omni flow computer can accept two SV combo modules. With one SV module you have two SV ports available, and with two SV modules four ports are available. For each ultrasonic meter run, enter the SV port number (1 to 4) to which the RS-485 serial interface input from the Q-Sonic flowmeter is wired to the flow computer.

" Select Flow Direction  Q-Sonic flowmeters allow for bi-directional fluid flow measurement. You can setup the flow computer to totalize either forward or reverse flow on any meter run with an ultrasonic flowmeter.

" Assign Flow Pulse Frequency I/O Point  Flowmeter pulse signals can only be assigned to Input Channels #3 and #4 of A and E combo modules, and input channel #3 of a B combo module. Enter the input channel number, which will be used to input the ultrasonic flowmeter pulse signal.

Meter Run Setup Entries The following meter run setup entries are available for the Q-Sonic ultrasonic gas flowmeter:  Enter the diameter of the ultrasonic flowmeter tube, in inches " Tube Diameter (firmware 23) or millimeters (firmware 27). This diameter is subsequently corrected for expansion due to temperature, and used together with the 'corrected gas velocity' through the meter to calculate flow rate.

 Enter the temperature, as degrees " Tube Reference Temperature Fahrenheit (firmware 23) or degrees Celsius (firmware 27), at which the ultrasonic meter tube was measured.

 The ultrasonic meter tube will expand and " Tube Expansion Coefficient contract with temperature. The flow computer requires the linear coefficient of thermal expansion for the meter tube material in order to correct the meter tube area. US Customary Units

Metric Units

Mild Carbon Steel Plate

-100 to 300 °F = 6.20 x e

-73.3 to 148.9 °C = 1.12 x e


-100 to 300 °F = 9.25 x e

-73.3 to 148.9 °C = 1.67 x e

-6 -6

-5 -5

 The actual user" Q-Sonic Maximum Flow Rate Deviation Percent entered flow used by the flow computer to totalize depends upon several factors: (1) If a pulse signal is available the flow computer will use it for calculations as long as the calculated flow rate is within this 'flow rate deviation percentage' of the flow transmitted serially by the Q-Sonic. (2) If a pulse signal is not available or failed, the flow computer will use the 'corrected linear gas velocity' transmitted by the Q-Sonic and calculate flow based on the 'temperature compensated area' of the meter tube. The flow rate calculated by this method must also be within this 'flow rate deviation percentage' of the flow transmitted serially by the Q-Sonic. Summarizing, the flow computer first tries to use the pulse signal, then the transmitted gas velocity value and finally the transmitted flow rate.

TB-990101 ! 23/27.73+

5


Technical Bulletin

" Minimum Automatic Gain Control (AGC) Ratio  The flow computer calculates the AGC ratio for each ultrasonic path in both path directions. An alarm will occur if the AGC ration of any path drops below this ratio. Reasonable entries are 1.5 to 2. Difference Between ‘Gas Velocity’ and ‘Velocity of Sound’ - The ‘gas velocity’ through the meter tube is directly proportional to the actual flow rate of the gas in the pipeline. The ‘velocity of sound’ (VOS) refers to the amount of time it takes a transmitted acoustic pulse to travel through the gas ultrasonic paths. The VOS will vary depending upon gas quality and flowing conditions.

" Minimum Percent Sample Ratio  This entry checks the ratio of good received data pulses verses total transmitted pulses for each ultrasonic path in both directions. A ratio below this setting will cause an alarm. Reasonable entries are 50% to 70%.

" Velocity of Sound (VOS) in Gas Deviation Percent  In some configurations, the flow computer can verify that the average VOS calculated for all paths agrees with the VOS of each individual path. This entry is the maximum percent that any one path VOS varies from the average VOS of all the paths.

" Gas Velocity Low Cutoff  Some gas movement can occur even when an ultrasonic meter is blocked-in. This is caused by convection currents within the meter tube. Enter a minimum gas velocity, in feet per second (Revision 23) or meters per second (Revision 27), below which you do not want to totalize. Consult with Instromet to determine this value.

Flow Computer Database Addresses and Index Numbers The following tables list the Modbus database addresses within the Omni have been assigned to the Q-Sonic ultrasonic metering feature. These tables are categorized per data type. Meter Run Alarm Status Points  Real Time Data Description

Database Address for Meter Run Number

Description


1

2

3

4

Loss of communication Loss of pulse impulse Flow rate delta alarm Path 1a - AGC ratio alarm Path 1b - AGC ratio alarm Path 2a - AGC ratio alarm Path 2b - AGC ratio alarm Path 3a - AGC ratio alarm Path 3b - AGC ratio alarm Path 4a - AGC ratio alarm Path 4b - AGC ratio alarm

2154 2155 2156 2157 2158 2159 2160 2161 2162 2163 2164

2254 2255 2256 2257 2258 2259 2260 2261 2262 2263 2264

2354 2355 2356 2357 2358 2359 2360 2361 2362 2363 2364

2454 2455 2456 2457 2458 2459 2460 2461 2462 2463 2464

Path 1 - sample error alarm Path 2 - sample error alarm Path 3 - sample error alarm Path 4 - sample error alarm Path 5 - sample error alarm Overall sample error alarm Path 1 - gas VOS alarm Path 2 - gas VOS alarm Path 3 - gas VOS alarm Path 4 - gas VOS alarm Path 5 - gas VOS alarm

Path 5a - AGC ratio alarm

2165

2265

2365

2465

Path 5b - AGC ratio alarm

2166

2266

2366

2466

Notes: AGC # Automatic Gain Control VOS # Velocity of Sound

6

1

2

3

4

2167 2168 2169 2170 2171 2172 2173 2174 2175 2176 2177

2267 2268 2269 2270 2271 2272 2273 2274 2275 2276 2277

2367 2368 2369 2370 2371 2372 2373 2374 2375 2376 2377

2467 2468 2469 2470 2471 2472 2473 2474 2475 2476 2477

TB-990101 ! 23/27.73+

TB-990101


16-bit Integer Registers  Real Time Data Description

Database Address for Meter Run Number 1

2

3

4

Flow direction (0=frwd,1=rvrs) Path 1 - performance (%)* Path 2 - performance (%)* Path 3 - performance (%)* Path 4 - performance (%)* Path 5 - performance (%)* Path 1a - AGC ratio* Path 1b - AGC ratio* Path 2a - AGC ratio* Path 2b - AGC ratio* Path 3a - AGC ratio* Path 3b - AGC ratio* Path 4a - AGC ratio* Path 4b - AGC ratio* Path 5a - AGC ratio* Path 5b - AGC ratio* Number of paths Number of samples taken Path 1 - valid sample Path 2 - valid sample

3155 3158 3159 3160 3161 3162 3163 3164 3165 3166 3167 3168 3169 3170 3171 3172 3173 3174 3175 3176

3255 3258 3259 3260 3261 3262 3263 3264 3265 3266 3267 3268 3269 3270 3271 3272 3273 3274 3275 3276

3355 3358 3359 3360 3361 3362 3363 3364 3365 3366 3367 3368 3369 3370 3371 3372 3373 3374 3375 3376

3455 3458 3459 3460 3461 3462 3463 3464 3465 3466 3467 3468 3469 3470 3471 3472 3473 3474 3475 3476

Path 3 - valid sample

3177

3277

3377

3477


3178

3278

3378

3478


3179

3279

3379

3479

Description Path 1a - AGC level Path 1b - AGC level Path 2a - AGC level Path 2b - AGC level Path 3a - AGC level Path 3b - AGC level Path 4a - AGC level Path 4b - AGC level Path 5a - AGC level Path 5b - AGC level Path 1a - AGC limit Path 1b - AGC limit Path 2a - AGC limit Path 2b - AGC limit Path 3a - AGC limit Path 3b - AGC limit Path 4a - AGC limit Path 4b - AGC limit Path 5a - AGC limit Path 5b - AGC limit


2

3

4

3180 3181 3182 3183 3184 3185 3186 3187 3188 3189 3190 3191 3192 3193 3194 3195 3196 3197 3198 3199

3280 3281 3282 3283 3284 3285 3286 3287 3288 3289 3290 3291 3292 3293 3294 3295 3296 3297 3298 3299

3380 3381 3382 3383 3384 3385 3386 3387 3388 3389 3390 3391 3392 3393 3394 3395 3396 3397 3398 3399

3480 3481 3482 3483 3484 3485 3486 3487 3488 3489 3490 3491 3492 3493 3494 3495 3496 3497 3498 3499

Notes: AGC # Automatic Gain Control

* Integer with two inferred decimal places. 32-bit IEEE Floating Points  Real Time Data Description


Description


1

2

3

4

Maximum flow deviation (%) Minimum AGC ratio (1 to 10) Minimum sample ratio (%) Max. VOS deviation (%) Gas velocity low cutoff Avg. path performance (%) Velocity of sound (VOS) Gas velocity Pressure Temperature

17513 17514 17515 17516 17517 17520 17521 17522 17523 17524

17613 17614 17615 17616 17617 17620 17621 17622 17623 17624

17713 17714 17715 17716 17717 17720 17721 17722 17723 17724

17813 17814 17815 17816 17817 17820 17821 17822 17823 17824

Gas flow rate

17525 17625 17725 17825 Notes: AGC # Automatic Gain Control 17526 17626 17726 17826 VOS # Velocity of Sound

Net flow rate

TB-990101 ! 23/27.73+

Path 1 - velocity of sound Path 2 - velocity of sound Path 3 - velocity of sound Path 4 - velocity of sound Path 5 - velocity of sound Path 1 - gas velocity Path 2 - gas velocity Path 3 - gas velocity Path 4 - gas velocity Path 5 - gas velocity

1

2

3

4

17527 17528 17529 17530 17531 17532 17533 17534 17535 17536

17627 17628 17629 17630 17631 17632 17633 17634 17635 17636

17727 17728 17729 17730 17731 17732 17733 17734 17735 17736

17827 17828 17829 17830 17831 17832 17833 17834 17835 17836

7


Technical Bulletin

32-bit IEEE Floating Points Previous Hour’s Average Data Description Number of samples taken Path 1 - valid sample Path 2 - valid sample Path 3 - valid sample Path 4 - valid sample Path 5 - valid sample Path 1a - AGC level Path 1b - AGC level Path 2a - AGC level Path 2b - AGC level Path 3a - AGC level Path 3b - AGC level Path 4a - AGC level Path 4b - AGC level Path 5a - AGC level Path 5b - AGC level Path 1a - AGC limit Path 1b - AGC limit Path 2a - AGC limit Path 2b - AGC limit Path 3a - AGC limit Path 3b - AGC limit Path 4a - AGC limit Path 4b - AGC limit Path 5a - AGC limit Path 5b - AGC limit Path 1 - gas velocity Path 2 - gas velocity Path 3 - gas velocity Path 4 - gas velocity Path 5 - gas velocity

32-bit IEEE Floating Points Previous Day’s Average Data


2

3

4

17537 17538 17539 17540 17541 17542 17543 17544 17545 17546 17547 17548 17549 17550 17551 17552 17553 17554 17555 17556 17557 17558 17559 17560 17561 17562 17563 17564 17565 17566 17567

17637 17638 17639 17640 17641 17642 17643 17644 17645 17646 17647 17648 17649 17660 17661 17662 17663 17664 17665 17666 17667 17668 17669 17660 17661 17662 17663 17664 17665 17666 17667

17737 17738 17739 17740 17741 17742 17743 17744 17745 17746 17747 17748 17749 17770 17771 17772 17773 17774 17775 17776 17777 17778 17779 17760 17761 17762 17763 17764 17765 17766 17767

17837 17838 17839 17840 17841 17842 17843 17844 17845 17846 17847 17848 17849 17880 17881 17882 17883 17884 17885 17886 17887 17888 17889 17860 17861 17862 17863 17864 17865 17866 17867

Description Number of samples taken Path 1 - valid sample Path 2 - valid sample Path 3 - valid sample Path 4 - valid sample Path 5 - valid sample Path 1a - AGC level Path 1b - AGC level Path 2a - AGC level Path 2b - AGC level Path 3a - AGC level Path 3b - AGC level Path 4a - AGC level Path 4b - AGC level Path 5a - AGC level Path 5b - AGC level Path 1a - AGC limit Path 1b - AGC limit Path 2a - AGC limit Path 2b - AGC limit Path 3a - AGC limit Path 3b - AGC limit Path 4a - AGC limit Path 4b - AGC limit Path 5a - AGC limit Path 5b - AGC limit Path 1 - gas velocity Path 2 - gas velocity Path 3 - gas velocity Path 4 - gas velocity Path 5 - gas velocity Notes: AGC

8


2

3

4

17568 17569 17570 17571 17572 17573 17574 17575 17576 17577 17578 17579 17580 17581 17582 17583 17584 17585 17586 17587 17588 17589 17590 17591 17592 17593 17594 17595 17596 17597 17598

17668 17669 17670 17671 17672 17673 17674 17675 17676 17677 17678 17679 17680 17681 17682 17683 17684 17685 17686 17687 17688 17689 17690 17691 17692 17693 17694 17695 17696 17697 17698

17768 17769 17770 17771 17772 17773 17774 17775 17776 17777 17778 17779 17780 17781 17782 17783 17784 17785 17786 17787 17788 17789 17790 17791 17792 17793 17794 17795 17796 17797 17798

17868 17869 17870 17871 17872 17873 17874 17875 17876 17877 17878 17879 17880 17881 17882 17883 17884 17885 17886 17887 17888 17889 17890 17891 17892 17893 17894 17895 17896 17897 17898

Automatic Gain Control

TB-990101 23/27.73+


TB-990101

Flow Computer Configuration Data  Miscellaneous Meter Run Configuration Database Address for Meter Run Number

Description Flowmeter device type SV module port #

1

2

3

3108 3153

3208 3253

3308 3353

Description

4


2

3

4

3408 Flow direction (0=frwd,1=rvrs) 3155 3255 3355 3455 3453 Flow pulse freq. I/O point # 13001 13014 13027 13040

Flow Computer Configuration Data  Meter Run Setup Description Tube diameter Tube coefficient Tube reference temperature Maximum flow deviation (%)

TB-990101 23/27.73+


2

3

4

7145 7146 7147 17513

7245 7246 7247 17613

7345 7346 7347 17713

7445 7446 7447 17813

Description Minimum AGC ratio (1 to 10) Minimum sample ratio (%) Max. VOS deviation (%) Gas velocity low cutoff


2

3

4

17514 17515 17516 17517

17614 17615 17616 17617

17714 17715 17716 17717

17814 17815 17816 17817

9


Technical Bulletin

Flow Computer User Displays SV Module Serial Communications Port You can view live data received via RS-485 communications on the flow computer front panel LCD display only if a SV port is used to input the RS-485 interface from the Q-Sonic flowmeter. To view this data, press [Setup] [n] [Display] on the Omni front panel keypad (where “ n” equals the SV port number, 1 to 4, you want to display) when in the Display Mode. The following data will display:

!"# " !"# $ " !"# $ " !"# % &'()*+#,#" -&'()*+#,#" .// &)0()*+#,#" . -&)0()*+#,#" $$ &'()*+#,#" $./ -&'()*+#,#" / &'()*+ / -&'()*+ / &)0()*+ / -&)0()*+ / &'()*+ / -&'()*+ / 1 2 3 #" 2. # 4 $2$$$56$ 7#*28 $2$$$56$ 9 2/. 9 $2$$$56$ -": 1 2 1 2/ 1 2. 3#" 2 3#" 2 3#" 2

10

TB-990101 23/27.73+

TB-990101


Meter Run Data To view the meter run data on the flow computer LCD display, press [Meter] [n] [Display] on the Omni front panel keypad (where “ n” equals the meter run number, 1 to 4, you want to display) when in the Display Mode. The following data will display:

;55 # #< 2 2. 3 #" 2 ="' 2/ # '" # < 2 # < 2 # < 2 2 - 2/ 2. - 2% 2 - 2.

TB-990101 23/27.73+

11

LIMITED WARRANTY. Omni Flow Computers, Inc. (“ Omni Flow” ) warrants all equipment manufactured by it to be free from defects in workmanship and materials, provided that such equipment was properly selected for the service intended, properly installed, and not misused. Equipment which is returned, transportation prepaid, to Omni’s assembly plant within three (3) years after date of shipment, and is found after inspection by Omni Flow Computers, Inc. to be defective in workmanship or materials, will be repaired or replaced, at the sole option of Omni Flow Computers, Inc., free-of-charge, and return-shipped at lowest cost transportation, prepay and add. Warranties on third-party manufactured devices supplied by Omni Flow or incorporated by Omni Flow in the manufacture of equipment bearing an Omni label shall be extended by the original device manufacturer. This Limited Warranty is void if failure of the equipment has resulted from accident, abuse or misapplication. NO OTHER WARRANTIES. Omni Flow disclaims any and all warranties, either expressed or implied, including but not limited to implied warranties of merchantibility, fitness for a particular purpose, and any other warranties which extend beyond the terms herein. No agreement varying or extending the foregoing warranties or limitations will be binding upon Omni Flow unless in writing, signed by a duly authorized officer. LOSS OR DAMAGE. Omni Flow shall by liable only for loss or damage caused directly by its sole negligence. Liability of Omni Flow for any claim of any kind for any loss or damage arising out of, or connected with this warranty; or from the performance or breach hereof shall in no case exceed the price allocated to the equipment or unit thereof which gives rise to the claim. The liability of Omni Flow shall terminate three (3) years after the shipment of the equipment from Omni Flow. NO LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. Omni Flow shall not be liable in any circumstance for any incidental or consequential damages whatsoever (including, without limitation, loss of business profits or revenue, business interruption, loss of business information, or other pecuniary loss, or claims of customers of the purchaser for any and such damages) arising out of the use or inability to use Omni Flow equipment or devices manufactured by third party manufacturers.

Copyright  1991-1999 by Omni Flow Computers, Inc. All Rights Reserved. No part of this manual may be used or reproduced in any form or by any means, or stored in a database or retrieval system, without prior written consent of Omni Flow Computers, Inc., Stafford, Texas, USA. Making copies of any part of this manual for any purpose other than your own personal use is a violation of United States copyright laws and international treaty provisions. Omni Flow Computers, Inc., pursuant to a policy of product development and improvement, may make any necessary changes to this document without notice. Omni 3000 and Omni 6000 are trademarks of Omni Flow Computers, Inc. OmniCom is a registered trademark of Omni Flow Computers, Inc.

(SINGLE-USER PRODUCTS) This is a legal agreement between you, the end user, and Omni Flow Computers, Inc. By the installation and use of accompanying equipment manufactured by Omni Flow Computers, Inc., you are agreeing to be bound by the terms of this Agreement.

OMNI FLOW COMPUTERS SOFTWARE LICENSE 1. GRANT OF LICENSE. Omni Flow Computers, Inc. (“ Omni Flow” ) grants to you the right to use one copy of Omni Flow software programs (the ‘SOFTWARE’) provided with the accompanying equipment manufactured by Omni Flow. 2. COPYRIGHT. The SOFTWARE is owned by Omni Flow and is protected by United States copyright laws and international treaty provisions. Therefore, you must treat the SOFTWARE like any other copyrighted material (e.g.: a book or recording on magnetic media). 3. OTHER RESTRICTIONS. You may not reverse engineer, duplicate, decompile, or disassemble the SOFTWARE provided on magnetic media in the form of disks or erasable programmable memory circuits (“ EPROMs” ). If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade and transferred by Omni Flow over a modem connection to magnetic media, or a single hard disk, then you may use the SOFTWARE for the sole purpose of permanent transfer to EPROM’s. You may not retain a copy for backup or archival purposes.

LIMITED WARRANTY LIMITED WARRANTY. Omni Flow warrants that the SOFTWARE will perform substantially in accordance with the accompanying written materials provided with the purchase of an Omni manufactured product for a period of three (3) years from the date of shipment from Omni’s production facility. Omni Flow’s entire liability shall be, at Omni Flow’s sole option, (a) remedy any defect and provide you, at no charge, with replacement magnetic media or (b) download an upgrade via a dial-up modem connection between Omni Flow and the end user, provided that equipment specified by Omni Flow for that purpose is used. This Limited Warranty is void if failure of the SOFTWARE has resulted from accident, abuse or misapplication. NO OTHER WARRANTIES. Omni Flow disclaims any and all warranties, either expressed or implied, including but not limited to implied warranties of merchantibility, fitness for a particular purpose, and any other warranties which extend beyond the terms herein, with respect to the SOFTWARE and accompanying hardware. No agreement varying or extending the foregoing warranties or limitations will be binding upon Omni Flow unless in writing, signed by a duly authorized officer. NO LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. Omni Flow shall not be liable in any circumstance for any damages whatsoever (including, without limitation, loss of business profits or revenue, business interruption, loss of business information, or other pecuniary loss, or claims of customers of the purchaser for any and such damages) arising out of the use or inability to use the SOFTWARE.

(SINGLE-USER PRODUCTS) This is a legal agreement between you, the end user, and Omni Flow Computers, Inc. By the installation and use of this product you are agreeing to be bound by the terms of this Agreement.

OMNICOM SOFTWARE LICENSE 1. GRANT OF LICENSE. Omni Flow Computers, Inc. (“ Omni Flow” ) grants to you the right to use one copy of the OmniCom software program and accompanying written materials (the ‘SOFTWARE’) provided with the accompanying equipment manufactured by Omni Flow. 2. COPYRIGHT. The SOFTWARE and accompanying written materials is owned by Omni Flow or its suppliers and is protected by United States copyright laws and international treaty provisions. Therefore, you must treat the SOFTWARE like any other copyrighted material (e.g.: a book or recording on magnetic media) except that in the sole instance of SOFTWARE provided on 5¼” or 3½” magnetic media disks, you may (a) make one copy of the SOFTWARE solely for backup or archival purposes, or (b) transfer the SOFTWARE to a single hard disk provided you keep the original solely for backup or archival purposes. 3. OTHER RESTRICTIONS. You may not reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble the SOFTWARE provided on magnetic media. You may transfer the SOFTWARE and accompanying written materials on a permanent basis provided you maintain no copies, and the recipient agrees to the terms of this Agreement. 4. DUAL MEDIA SOFTWARE. If the SOFTWARE is provided on 5¼” or 3½” magnetic media disks, then you may use the disks appropriate for your single-user computer. You may not use the other disks on another computer or loan or transfer them to another user except as part of the permanent transfer (as provided above) of all SOFTWARE and written materials

LIMITED WARRANTY LIMITED WARRANTY. Omni Flow warrants that the SOFTWARE will perform substantially in accordance with the accompanying written materials provided with the purchase of an Omni manufactured product for a period of three (3) years from the date of shipment from Omni’s production facility. Omni Flow’s entire liability shall be, at Omni Flow’s sole option, (a) remedy any defect and provide you, at no charge, with replacement magnetic media or (b) download an upgrade via a dial-up modem connection between Omni Flow and the end user, provided that equipment specified by Omni Flow for that purpose is used. This Limited Warranty is void if failure of the SOFTWARE has resulted from accident, abuse or misapplication. NO OTHER WARRANTIES. Omni Flow disclaims any and all warranties, either expressed or implied, including but not limited to implied warranties of merchantibility, fitness for a particular purpose, and any other warranties which extend beyond the terms herein, with respect to the SOFTWARE, the accompanying written materials and hardware. NO LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. Omni Flow or its suppliers shall not be liable in any circumstance for any damages whatsoever (including, without limitation, loss of business profits or revenue, business interruption, loss of business information, or other pecuniary loss, or claims of customers of the purchaser for any and such damages) arising out of the use or inability to use the SOFTWARE.

OMNI FLOW

Recommend Documents